diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-14 18:40:24 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-14 18:40:24 -0700 |
| commit | c7df13c1a3b151d948a899ea108716fe12639fe7 (patch) | |
| tree | ed6ce51620cda868f0b89270f9311dd93e6276d4 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 44394-0.txt | 6577 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 44394-h/44394-h.htm | 8805 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 44394-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 121428 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 44394-h/images/i002.jpg | bin | 0 -> 50113 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 44394-h/images/i003.jpg | bin | 0 -> 49970 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 44394-h/images/spine.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15769 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-8.txt | 6963 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 126816 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 372348 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-h/44394-h.htm | 9218 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 121428 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-h/images/i002.jpg | bin | 0 -> 50113 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-h/images/i003.jpg | bin | 0 -> 49970 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-h/images/spine.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15769 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394.txt | 6963 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394.zip | bin | 0 -> 126800 bytes |
19 files changed, 38542 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/44394-0.txt b/44394-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2167680 --- /dev/null +++ b/44394-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6577 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 44394 *** + +[Illustration: "Charley leveled his gun and sent sixteen shrieking +bullets just above the wheelman's head."] + + + + +The Boy Chums In the Gulf of Mexico + + OR + + On a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek + Spongers + + BY WILMER M. ELY + + Author of "The Boy Chums on Indian River," "The Boy + Chums on Haunted Island," "The Boy Chums in + the Forest," "The Boy Chums' Perilous Cruise." + +[Illustration] + + A. L. BURT COMPANY + NEW YORK + + + + + Copyright 1913 + + BY A. L. BURT COMPANY + + THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO + + + + +CONTENTS + + + I. 3 + II. MR. DRIVER. 11 + III. PREPARATIONS 19 + IV. THE START 27 + V. THE START 36 + VI. FIRST TROUBLE 45 + VII. SPONGING 53 + VIII. TROUBLE 61 + IX. MANUEL'S RELEASE 68 + X. A RASH RESOLVE 76 + XI. A MYSTERY 84 + XII. IN A DIVING SUIT 94 + XIII. A CLOSE CALL 100 + XIV. THE DISCUSSION 107 + XV. A DESPERATE PLAN 115 + XVI. TOO LATE 122 + XVII. OUTWITTED 129 + XVIII. IMPRISONED 136 + XIX. WRECKED 144 + XX. HUNTING HELP 152 + XXI. THE CASTAWAYS 159 + XXII. ANOTHER DANGER 167 + XXIII. THE RELAPSE 175 + XXIV. THE FLOOD 182 + XXV. THE FLOATING HATCH 189 + XXVI. WITH THE BOYS 197 + XXVII. THE JOURNEY 205 + XXVIII. JUDSON 212 + XXIX. THE FEUD 219 + XXX. BESIEGED 225 + XXXI. THE ENEMIES 233 + XXXII. THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN 240 + XXXIII. THE RESCUE 247 + XXXIV. CONCLUSION 255 + + + + +THE BOY CHUMS + +IN THE GULF OF MEXICO + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +"IT'S just like stepping suddenly into a strange country. I am glad we +came even if we decide not to go into the business." + +The speaker, a sturdy, manly-looking boy of eighteen, was one of a +party of four persons who were strolling along a street in the Greek +section of Tarpon Springs, a small Florida town, located on the +Anclote River, a few miles from the Gulf of Mexico. His companions +were a boy about his own age but of less robust appearance, a little +negro lad with a good-humored intelligent face, and a middle-aged, +heavily-bearded, blue-eyed man whose tattooed arms and rolling gait +told of a life spent on tossing seas and whose confident bearing and +air of authority stamped him as one above the rank of a common sailor. + +Those who have followed The Boy Chums through their many adventures +will recognize in the little party their old friends Charley West, +Walter Hazard, Captain Westfield and the Bahama lad, Chris, who lately +returned from a perilous trip along the Atlantic beach searching for +wreckage, and now seeking some promising venture in which to invest the +Fifteen Hundred Dollars they earned on that voyage. + +"You're right, Charley," agreed the other boy. "I didn't know before +that there was a sight like this in Florida. Here's a bench. Let's set +down and rest a bit. I am tired from walking." + +"Golly, I reckon dis nigger's tired some too," chimed in the little +darkey, "I'se dun had de toothache in mah legs for most an hour, but +I'se had to keep up wid you-alls. Don't dare let you white chillen +prognostracate 'round a queer place like dis alone." + +The seat selected was a long bench standing on the edge of the +sidewalk, its back to the sandy street. The four seated themselves at +one end and gazed around with eager interest at the strange scene, +unconscious of the curious glances bestowed upon them by a large, +deeply-tanned man, who, seated on the other end of the bench, was +languidly whittling on a piece of white pine with a large sheaf knife. + +The scene was one to arouse more than passing interest. Up and down +the sidewalk hurried swarthy-faced, powerfully-built men of all ages +and appearances, but all possessed of the same clear-cut features and +straight noses. Singly and in groups of two and three, they hurried +past, picturesque in their bright-colored clothing with gaudy sashes +knotted about their waists. About all clustered an air of energy and +bustle uncommon to sleepy Florida towns. + +Built up close to the inner edge of the sidewalk was a row of large +buildings startling in their coats of bright yellow, red, blue, and +green paint. Stretching away, close together in the distance, they +gave one the impression of a gigantic rainbow. Through their wide-open +doors and windows the interested onlookers could gain a plain view of +the interiors, from which came the confused jangle of foreign tongues. +To the right of where the little party sat was a busy grocery store, +its windows filled with strings of dried garlic, strange-looking +cheeses, queer nuts and fruits and a multitude of eatables strange to +American eyes. To the left of them was a tobacco factory, the whirling +machines shredding up the huge brown leaves into hair-like fibers and +binding them up into pound packages. Directly before them was a great +hall filled with little tables around which were seated groups of the +regular-featured men, playing cards, eating, or puffing at strange +pipes, with a small hose for a stem, the smoke passing through great +glass vessels partly filled with rose water before it reached the +smoker's lips. + +"That's the fifteenth place of that kind I've counted to-day," remarked +Charley West. "From their numbers, one would imagine that these people +did nothing but eat and play cards." + +"I'd like to try one of them pipes," said Captain Westfield, wistfully. +"I'll bet they give a good, cool smoke." + +"Let's go in and get dinner," Walter suggested. "I am hungry as a wolf +and that food smells mighty good. You can try a pipe after we eat, +Captain." + +The man at the end of the bench shifted his position closer to them. + +"Strangers here?" he enquired. + +"Just came in this morning. We're looking into the sponge business a +bit," replied the Captain. + +Charley eyed the tanned man closely. There was a sinister expression to +the fellow's face, and his eyes shifted uneasily away from the lad's +level glance. The keen-witted boy was not favorably impressed with the +stranger's appearance, but the man's cordiality drove away his faint +feeling of distrust. + +"I'll go in with you then," he offered. "Those fellows don't speak much +English and you would have a hard job making them understand what you +wanted. I know a little Greek and may be able to help you out a bit." + +"Much obliged to you," said the Captain, gratefully. "We don't +understand a word of their lingo. I'll stand treat to the dinner if +you'll eat with us." + +"It's a go," agreed the stranger, quickly. "Come on. My name's Robert, +Captain Roberts," he volunteered when the little party were seated +around one of the tables, "I'm a retired ship's master." + +Captain Westfield introduced himself and his companions. "As I said, we +are lookin' into this sponge business a bit, but it's hard to pick out +the proper course from these twisted-tongued furriners," he said. "Do +you happen to know anything about it?" + +"I used to be in the business myself," Captain Roberts replied +promptly. "I made enough money in it to quit the sea for good." + +"Then I reckon you're the very man to give us a few pointers. Is there +as much money in it as one hears tell of?" + +"More," declared the other. "These Greeks are getting rich off +sponging. It is not anything unusual for a schooner's crew to clear up +three or four thousand dollars from a single trip. It takes quite a bit +of money to make a start, though." + +"We have got a little change in our clothes," said the Captain, +modestly. "Do you reckon a person could get started good on a Thousand +dollars?" + +"That would do nicely," declared Captain Roberts, "and I can tell you +just how to lay it out to the best advantage, but let's order dinner +first. We can talk while we are eating." + +He beckoned to a dark-skinned, ill-favored waiter and gave an order in +low-pitched fluent Greek. + +The waiter was back almost instantly with a tray-load of steaming +dishes which he placed upon the table. The boys could not determine +the exact nature of the strange viands, but they were too hungry to be +critical, and attacked the food with hearty appetites. + +"This mutton stew is delicious," Charley declared as he took another +helping. "I don't know as I ever tasted anything better." + +Captain Roberts grinned. "You don't want to make any guesses about +Greek food," he declared. "That isn't mutton, but just tough old +Billy-goat, fattened on a diet of tin cans. These fellows have the +knack of fixing up such things so they can't recognize them themselves. +Just wait till the coffee is served. You'll say you never drank any +better. But let's get back to that sponging business now, Captain." + +He and Captain Westfield were soon plunged in a tangled maze of talk +about schooners, diving boats, sponges, and divers. + +The boys gave but little heed to the discussion for their attention was +partly diverted by the unusual scene around them. + +"It's just like being in another country," Walter whispered to his chum. + +"Yes, but I don't like the attention we seem to receive," Charley +replied. "Those fellows are staring at us as though there was something +wrong in our being here." + +The Greeks gathered around the other tables indeed seemed more than +casually interested in the little party. They stared frequently at them +and their new acquaintance, and exchanged significant glances and low +words with each other. + +"I guess we appear as odd to them as they do to us," Walter said, +carelessly. "There is a man who is not a Greek. That fellow leaning +against the end of the counter in the corner." + +The man indicated was unmistakably an American. He was short, +heavily-built and had a determined, aggressive face. He was engaged in +a heated discussion with the proprietor of the cafe and his heavy face +was flushed with anger. As the boys gazed curiously, he brought down +his clenched fist on the counter with a force that shattered some of +the dishes piled upon it. + +"You needn't smirk, grin, and make excuses," he thundered at the suave, +smiling Greek. "You've got to pay me that bill you owe me. It's been +standing for months and I happen to know that you are making money all +the time, hand over fist. It's no use pretending you don't understand +me," he shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoulders. "You know +what I say. If you don't come up with the money by to-morrow night I'll +close up this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining goods under +false pretences. And it will not be any use for you to try your nice +little Greek trick of a knife in my back in the dark. I go heeled and +I don't go to sleep when I walk this street. The fellow who tries that +trick on me will stop enough lead to start a cartridge factory." + +He turned and was walking towards the door when his glance rested for a +moment on the boys and their companions. His glance swept swiftly over +each member of the little party. He paused, hesitated a moment, then +turning, walked swiftly towards their table. + +Captain Roberts rose hastily at his approach. "There's a friend of mine +over there," he said hurriedly, "who I want to speak to. I'll be back +in a minute." + +The approaching stranger noted his departure with a grim smile. He +stopped beside the Captain and stood gazing down for one brief minute. + +"Are you fools or strangers?" he demanded, crisply. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +MR. DRIVER. + + +THE stranger's smile robbed his words of their hardness. + +"Strangers, yes," Charley replied, "Fools, no." + +"No offense intended," said the man, quickly. "Strangers will sometimes +take advice but fools will not. My advice to you strangers is to keep +out of places like this and not to make friends with other strangers. I +don't suppose you know who that man is who just left you." + +"He's a retired sea captain," said Captain Westfield. "He was giving us +some pointers about the sponge business. Mighty pleasant an' obligin' +fellow. Mighty fair-spoken." + +"Bless your simple little souls," exclaimed the stranger. "He's no +captain, active or retired. He's the runner for this place. Lucky you +haven't any of you drank your coffee yet. You'd be waking up in some +alley bye-and-bye with your heads aching from knock-out drops and your +pockets turned inside out. My, but you were easy." + +"I don't reckon any one would dare do such a thing in broad daylight," +Captain Westfield declared. + +"It's been done in this place a dozen times. And the victim's kicks +never did any good after it happened, for there was always a dozen +Greeks ready to go on the stand and swear that it was only a case of +drunkenness on the victim's part. Better get out of here." + +The humbled little party arose and followed their conductor out to the +sidewalk. As they passed through the crowd they could not help but +notice the wrathful glances the sitters bestowed upon the one who had +cheated them of their victims. + +"I guess we have acted pretty green," Charley admitted, as they passed +outside, "but we were so eager to learn about the sponge business that +we forgot caution. Besides, one does not look for such tricks in a +little town like this. It's not like a big city where one has to be +always on his guard against strangers." + +The stranger favored the members of the little party with a closer +scrutiny than he had yet bestowed upon them. + +"So you are figuring on going into the sponge business, eh?" he asked. + +"We may try it a bit if we find out that it pays as well as we have +heard tell of," answered Captain Westfield, cautiously, "but it's +mighty hard to find out anything definite about it from these Greeks." + +"Oh, there's big money in it all right," said their new friend. "You +might make a go of it. You are a pretty husky, determined-looking lot +and would soon get on to the Greekish tricks. It's a risky business, +though. I don't advise anyone to take it up." + +"We've encountered a few risks in other lines," said Charlie, modestly. +"We are willing to take a few chances if there's money enough in it to +tempt us." + +The stranger pulled out his watch and looked at the time. "My name is +Driver," he remarked. "I own a store over on the next street in the +American section. Business is slack at this time of day and I will show +you around a bit, if you wish. My clerks can look out for the trade for +an hour or two." + +"No need of thanks," he said as the Captain accepted his offer +gratefully. "If you decide to go into the sponge business, you will +need lots of provisions and I hope to sell them to you. We Americans +do not get any of the Greek trade and we are always glad to secure a +new customer. Now I suppose you want to know about the profit side of +the business first. Well, I can not give you exact figures but I know +that all engaged in the business are making big money. All these big +buildings you see have been built out of sponging, and they do not +represent a hundredth part of the money made out of the business. +There is an enormous amount sent back to Greece every month through the +post-office and bank here. I know Greeks who landed here only a few +years ago with nothing but the clothes on their backs--and those were +mighty poor--that are wealthy men now and they made their fortunes out +of sponges. Oh, there's big money in it all right. But you can look +into that part of the business closer later on. Now, I want to show +you something of the sponges themselves. We will go down to the harbor +first." + +The interested little party followed him as he led the way along a soft +sand road flanked by scrub palmettos. + +Their guide paused beside one of the several large buildings standing +close to the road. "This is a clipping shed," he said. + +The building was open on one side and was filled with a crowd of old +men, women and young boys, all Greeks. Before each was a pile of rough +sponges from which they were clipping the spoilt parts with great +shearing shears. In one corner, a man worked over a big screw-press, +pressing the severed fragments of sponges into huge compact bales. + +"That part isn't important enough to waste much time looking at," Mr. +Driver said, as he turned away. "Come on and I'll show you something +worth seeing." + +As they followed along behind their guide, the boys became sensible +of a strong, pleasant, appetizing odor in the air, an odor which grew +stronger as they advanced. A turn in the road brought them suddenly +upon the source of the odor. On the shore of a quiet little land-locked +harbor, blazed dozens of small camp-fires over which sat great iron +kettles. On pieces of canvas laid upon the ground were piles of fresh +beef and mutton. Over each pile worked several Greeks cutting the meat +with the sheaf knives into tiny squares about an inch in size. Other +Greeks were dumping the little square pieces into the kettles, while +still others kept the contents stirred and the fires under the kettles +burning briskly. + +"They are putting down the meat for their next voyage," explained Mr. +Driver. "They roast it in its own fat, put it into stone jars, and pour +the fat over it. As soon as the fat cools and congeals it forms an +air-tight covering which keeps the meat from spoiling." + +"If it tastes half as good as it smells, it must be delicious," Charley +remarked. + +Chris viewed the cooking operation with professional jealousy. "Golly, +I bet dey can't cook like dis nigger," he declared, "I spect dem +kettles ain't none too clean noway." + +Captain Westfield gave but scant attention to the trying-out process. +His interest was centered on the big fleet of schooners anchored near +shore. They were over a hundred in number and were of all sizes and +designs. They made a pretty sight lying gracefully close together in +the little harbor. But the old sailor soon strolled on to where groups +of Greeks were building and repairing boats on the shore. He inspected +their work with a critical eye, but he was soon lost in admiration. + +"Lads," he exclaimed, "I never saw such workmen before. They are +turnin' out tight, neat seaworthy little crafts with no tools but a saw +and a hatchet. Ain't those queer lookin' crafts though." + +The boats were about thirty feet in length, sharp at both bow and +stern, and of enormous depth for their size. True to their love for +bright colors the Greeks had painted each plank a different hue and the +little vessels looked like floating rainbows. + +The captain viewed their single masts, which inclined aft at an angle +of forty-five degrees, with deep-sea scorn. + +"It's clean against Nature for a mast to be set that way," he declared. +"It ain't regular or ship-shape." + +"Those small crafts are used as diving boats," Mr. Driver explained. +"They carry a big square sail, but most of them are equipped with +engines also. They are great sea boats and will ride out a gale almost +as well as the schooners." + +His explanations were interrupted by loud talking close at hand and +the little party, full of curiosity, hastened to the spot from which +the uproar came. + +In the center of a circle of curious onlookers, a large man wearing a +marshal's badge was slipping a pair of handcuffs on the wrists of a +slender boyish-looking young fellow. + +"No need to put those things on me, Mr. Officer," the lad was +protesting, passionately. "I'll go along with you without any trouble. +I've only acted within my rights and all I want is a fair trial." + +"Anything you say can be used against you at your trial," cautioned the +marshal. + +"I don't care, I admit I shot two of those treacherous Greeks. It was +the only thing to do. When it came on to blow a gale, they refused to +cut the cable, and work the schooner. It was a case of making them obey +orders and get her off before the seas or lose my ship. I only wish I +had shot more of them. They have been laying for me ever since to slip +a knife into me and chuck me overboard. I haven't dared take a wink of +sleep for three days and two nights." + +"Poor fellow," said Mr. Driver, as the marshal led away his protesting +captive. "I expect it happened just as he says--an open mutiny, +compelling him to shoot--but every Greek in his crew will go on the +stand and swear that it was a case of cold-blooded murder. Fortunately, +the judge is wise to Greek methods and the law deals gently with +commanders." + +"He looked mighty young to be a captain," said Captain Westfield. + +"It's this way," Mr. Driver explained, "the law compels the Greeks to +have an American captain for each schooner and diving boat, and they +hire the youngest and, therefore, cheapest man that they can get. It's +a dog's life, out alone for months with a gang that doesn't speak +a word of English. As long as the captain is content to be a mere +figurehead he can get along without serious trouble, but the minute +he runs counter to their wishes there is a row. But time is flying, +and I must get back to the store. If you will come back with me I'll +introduce you to a man who knows more about sponging than another +American in the country." + +"Just a moment, lads," said the Captain, as they turned to go. "Which +of those schooners do you like the best?" + +The two chums unhesitatingly indicated a beautiful two-masted, +snow-white schooner that seemed to rest as loftily on the water as a +floating swan. The grace and beauty of exquisite lines marked her out +from the many shapely schooners surrounding her. In large gilt letters +on either side of her bow was her name "Beauty". + +"She's my choice too," declared the Captain. "I wish we owned her. I +ain't never seen a prettier model." + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +PREPARATIONS. + + +AS soon as they got back into town, Mr. Driver hunted up the man of +whom he had spoken, and, introducing him to each of the little party, +hurried back to his store. + +Mr. Williams was a young man still in his twenties. He was a stocky, +well-built young fellow with an intelligent face, determined manner, +and a short, crisp way of speaking. He sized up the little party with +one quick appraising glance as Captain Westfield stated their errand. + +"If you are not willing to stand hardships, dirt, discomfort, and +danger, you want nothing to do with sponging," he declared. + +"We can stand anything that it pays us to stand," Charley replied, +quickly. + +"Well, that's the right kind of spirit," approved the young man, "but, +of course you don't any of you realize what you will have to meet. I've +seen others start in with the same confidence and get cold feet before +the first trip was over. It isn't any nice, ladies' pink-tea business. +It's a game for real men, but if the men are the right kind, they +get their reward for what they endure, all right, all right. I landed +here with an empty pocket and emptier stomach, and now,--well, I am +not a John D. Rockefeller yet, but I've got enough laid by to keep the +wolf from the door for a good many years. Better men than I have done +better than I have. It's like everything else, the best man wins, and +wins something worth winning, but, as I have said, it's no business for +nice, tender, little Willie boys, it's a man's game." + +Charley grinned in sympathy with the reliant, independent spirit of the +young fellow which was close kin to his own traits. "We left off our +short pants last summer," he observed, gravely, "we are fast learning +to dress ourselves, and the Captain there can even comb his own hair." + +"Good," chuckled the other, "I guess _you_ will pass muster anyway, so +I will give you some idea of what you will have to expect. First, there +is the loneliness. For three months at a time you'll be at sea without +another soul to talk to, for there are very few of the Greeks who speak +English. With a party like yours it would not be so bad for you would +be company for each other, but for the American captains who go out +alone with a crew of Greeks, it's awful. I've known some to go crazy +for sheer loneliness, and few ever make a second trip,--I'll never +forget my first experience. Second, sponging is a dirty business, the +stench from dying sponges will upset any but the strongest stomachs. +Third, there are the dangers, storms, accidents, and troubles with the +crew. I have never had any serious trouble with my own men, but then I +understand their lingo and that counts for a good deal, and, besides +they all know me around here and know that I will shoot first and +explain afterwards--that counts for still more." + +"All that is interesting, but it ain't to the pint," said Captain +Westfield. "The question is what can one make off a trip. I reckon them +little things you're telling about is just details." + +"I'm afraid you'll find them pretty serious details," Mr. Williams +said with a laugh, "but you are right, the money point is the main +thing. That's the only thing that has kept me in the business. Well, I +had considerable _bad_ luck last trip but I cleaned up three thousand +dollars. I've been doing better than that." + +The chums looked at each other with expressive faces while Mr. +Williams' keen black eyes twinkled as he watched them. + +"I seed a schooner down at the harbor," observed Captain Westfield, +carelessly. "She was a pretty looking little craft and her name just +seemed to fit her--'The Beauty'. If she's good an' sound an' for sale, +I might be willing to give a thousand dollars for her." + +Mr. Williams laughed, "You are not the first sailor who has fallen +in love with the 'Beauty'. She is the finest ever. She has led the +sponging fleet for three seasons. Many have tried to buy her but +couldn't. You are in luck, however. Her owner died last week and I have +just received a letter from his widow asking me to find a purchaser for +her. You can have her as she lays for thirteen hundred dollars, and she +is dirt cheap at that." + +"Will you hold that offer open until ten o'clock to-night?" asked the +captain, "we will want to talk it all over a bit." + +Mr. Williams agreed to his request, and, after thanking him gratefully +for his information, the little party took their departure. + +"Back to the harbor," said the captain as soon as they were out of +hearing. "I want to take a good look at the 'Beauty'. If she is +anyway near as good as she looks from a distance she's worth at least +twenty-five hundred dollars. Why we could make a tidy sum by buying +her, sailing her around to Jacksonville, and selling her again." + +They soon arrived at the harbor again where for a quarter they hired a +young Greek to row them out to the schooner. + +They found the little vessel all that her name implied. She was about +sixty-five feet long and broad for her length. She looked more like a +gentleman's yacht than a sponging vessel and they were all delighted +with her appearance. But pleased as they were with her on deck, they +were even more pleased with her below. There, they found a large +main cabin with swinging lamps, hanging sideboard, easy chairs, and +comfortable furnishings. Opening into the main cabin were found roomy +staterooms, two on a side, furnished with large bunks containing +springy mattresses. Instead of the small portholes, common with crafts +of her size, each stateroom was provided with windows of heavy glass to +admit air and light. + +Up forward at the foremast was the forecastle, or crew's quarters. It +was large, comfortable and well equipped with bunks. Aft of it was +the cook's galley, containing a good stove and plenty of pots, pans +and kettles. Everything was exquisitely neat and clean. But Captain +Westfield was not content with a mere survey of cabin and furnishings. +He unfurled several of the sails and examined the canvas closely. He +tested the strength of rope after rope. He climbed aloft and looked +over blocks, stays, and running gear. Lastly, he descended into the +hold and examined all that was visible of the vessel's ribs and +planking. + +"She's as tidy a little craft as I ever saw," he declared, when he at +last rejoined the boys back by the wheel. "She ain't over six years old +an' her sails an' rigging are all new. She's worth twenty-five hundred +dollars of any man's money if she's worth a cent. All we have got to +do it to buy her and carry her around to some lively port an' we can +make twelve hundred dollars as easy as finding it." + +"What's the use of selling her right off if we buy her," Walter +suggested, "Surely a few months' use will not lessen her value to any +great extent. Why not make a couple of trips sponging in her. I am +anxious to have a try for some of that big money they all talk about. +We will never have a better chance than now. At the worst, we would +only lose the price of a few months' provisions, we would still have +our vessel worth far more than we paid for her." + +"You've hit the nail right on the head," the captain exclaimed, +delightedly. "That's just what I've been studying over, but I reckoned +I'd wait an' see if either of you boys proposed it." + +Charley hesitated before agreeing to his chum's proposal. "I confess, +I am not so anxious to try the sponge business as I was," he remarked. +"First, we know nothing about it ourselves, and would have to depend +entirely upon hired help--which is a bad thing to have to do in +any business. Second, I don't like the Greeks, I don't like their +appearances, I don't like the reputation they have, and I don't like +the idea of being with a gang that doesn't understand English." + +"Bosh," Walter replied, lightly, "we will get along all right with +them. It isn't like one lone man being out with them, there are four +of us and they wouldn't dare start trouble with so many. As for making +them understand, why we can hire a man as interpreter. I believe it's +the best chance to make money we've had yet." + +"And I too," Captain Westfield agreed. "I reckon we'd be foolish to +let such a chance slip by. That young fellow Williams says he's made +considerable." + +"But he made several trips and learned the business before he went into +it on his own hook," Charley objected. "However, I am not going to hold +back if the rest of you want to try it." + +"Good," exclaimed the captain, "we will go right back and settle the +deal with Williams. We'll make money off the schooner if we don't off +the sponging." + +They found Mr. Williams still in his office. The thirteen hundred +dollars was paid over and they received a bill of sale for the +'Beauty', one diving boat and everything the schooner contained. + +"You've got a good boat at a mighty low price," he said. "There is no +reason why you shouldn't make well with her, if you just use common +sense. Doubtless, you have heard lots of hard things about the Greeks, +but I don't believe they are half as bad as they are painted. Half of +the trouble captains have with them comes from their not understanding +each other. Get a reliable man to translate your orders, and you will +get along all right although you will find it a hard life. I wish I +could help you select your crew but I have to go to Tampa to-morrow, +and will not be back until the fleet sails. We will see each other +again on the sponging grounds, if not before. I wish you the best of +luck until we meet." + +The now tired little party bade the hustling young man good-bye and +repaired to the small hotel where they engaged rooms and meals. + +After supper Charley unpacked his valise and got out the silver-mounted +revolver presented to him by Mr. Weston. He noted its calibre and +sauntering down to the hardware store purchased several boxes of +cartridges of a size to fit. He gave a couple of boxes to Walter who +possessed the exact duplicate of his weapon. + +"That's my first preparation for our trip," he said laughing. + +But, although he spoke lightly, he was troubled by vague misgivings +that their new venture was not going to be the smooth sailing his +companions believed. For one thing, he doubted if rough, blunt, +quick-tempered Captain Westfield was just the man to successfully +handle the suave, oily, treacherous Greeks. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE START. + + +"WE have got to get a move on us," Captain Westfield said as the +four chums gathered together at the breakfast table. "I've been out +enquirin' around this mornin' an' I've larned that the sponging fleet +sails in two days. Of course we don't have to go with the fleet, but, +bein' as it's our first trip an' we're green at the business, I reckon, +we had better keep with the crowd an' learn all we can. I've been up +to see the United States Commissioner an' got charts of the sponging +grounds an' took out papers for the ship. We're all officers on the +papers, lads. He put me down as captain of the schooner, Chris is mate. +You, Charley, are captain of the diving boats, an' Walter's chief +engineer." + +"I don't want to be no mate," Chris protested. "I wants to be de cook. +Dat's schooner's got a powerful fine galley an' a sight ob pots an' +kettles. Golly! I reckon dis nigger can fix up de grub better dan any +of dem ignorant furriners. A mate ain't no manner ob count on board a +little ship. De captain's always blamin' him for somethin' or udder +an' de crew always hates him. He's always in trubble wid one or the +udder. Now de cook's always his own boss, he don't hab to stay out +nights in de cold an' de rain an' ebbery one is powerful perlite to +him, 'cause dey wants to keep on de bes' side ob de one dat handles de +grub. I'd rather be a cook dan an ole mate any day." + +"But you don't know how to rig up their queer furrin dishes, lad," the +captain explained. "They ain't used to eatin' grub fixed up good like +you fix it." + +"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little negro, pompously. "I +spect dey doan know much 'bout cookin'. Reckon dey wouldn't eat any +more ob der own if dey got a taste ob mine." + +"That's the trouble," the captain agreed craftily, "an' we don't want +to spoil them. Besides, I reckoned you'd like to be mate. Why, I was at +sea ten years before I got a mate's berth. I reckon your folks on Cat +Island would be mighty proud to hear that you were one an' was wearing +a blue suit with big brass buttons, an' a cap with Mate on it in big +gilt letters." + +"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the little negro, +delightedly, rising hastily from the table. "I'se goin' to buy dem +clothes right now an' hab my picture took in 'em an' send 'bout twenty +ob dem to de folks on Cat Island." + +"You got around that pretty neatly, Captain," Charley said, as soon as +Chris was gone. "I expected him to insist upon being cook. He thinks no +one else can do it so well. But, seriously, don't you think we are all +rather young to be ship's officers. Men are quite apt to resent having +to take orders from mere boys." + +"The law requires that those four offices be filled by Americans an' +we can't afford to hire men to fill the places. Chris will be under my +orders all the time an' will be mate only in name. But you boys are +already smart sailors an' I expect you to be real officers on your +boats. If you weren't on the papers proper you might have trouble with +your men, but the fact that you are regular commissioned officers will +make smooth sailing for you. Any refusal to obey your orders would be +mutiny." + +"Very well, Captain," agreed Walter. "What do you want Captain West and +I to do next?" + +"Just lay around an' enjoy yourselves this mornin', I guess. The first +thing is to get a fellow who talks Greek an' to hire a crew. I want to +pick them out myself. As soon as we get them there will be plenty to +do stockin' up with grub an' water. Better spend the time lookin' over +your new command an' pickin' up what you can about the business." + +The advice was good, and, as soon as they had finished breakfast, the +boys hastened down to the harbor to inspect the diving boats they had +acquired with the purchase of the 'Beauty'. Upon a close inspection, +they were delighted with their new commands. The little vessel was +quite new and its model promised great seaworthiness. Besides the huge +square sail it carried, it was equipped with a ten-horse power gasoline +engine. Its rig was different from any the boys had ever seen, and they +spent several hours studying it, and making themselves acquainted with +the working of the engine. + +"I believe I can handle it by myself now, if I had to do it," Charley +declared, at last. "The engine may give us a little trouble at first, +but we will soon get on to it and it's likely there will be several +Greeks in the crew who know how to run it. Now, the next thing is to +settle on a name for our craft." + +"I thought of calling it 'Flora'," Walter said, with a little sheepish +smile. + +"And I was thinking of naming it 'Ola'," declared Charley promptly. + +After a spirited debate over the two names they held in such esteem, +the two lads at last came to a compromise by agreeing to call their +little ship "The Two Sisters". This decided, they rummaged around +in the lockers until they found paint and brushes with which they +proceeded to letter on the bow of their crafts the name chosen. + +As soon as this task was finished, they returned to the village and +made a round of the shops purchasing clothing for their trip, pricing +provisions, and learning all they could from the various merchants +about the Greeks and the sponge business. + +They were passing a little photo studio when Chris' voice hailed them +from inside. It was hard for them to refrain from laughter at the +figure the little negro presented. + +A common blue suit had been too tame a color for Chris' +brilliant-loving soul. He was clothed in a pair of baggish yellow +trousers, many sizes too large for him, a coat of vivid scarlet hue, +and a cap of deepest purple. But in spite of his brilliant attire, his +little ebony face expressed deepest satisfaction. On a chair beside +him was a great pile of finished tin-types and the Greek proprietor, +beaming at the unusual rush of business, was just adjusting his camera +to take another. + +"Why, what do you want with any more of them, Chris?" Walter exclaimed. +"You've got enough already to supply everyone on Cat Island." + +"Dey ain't no good," replied the little darkey, mournfully, "I 'spect +dis man doan know his business." + +Charley examined one of the despised tintypes. "Why, they look just +like you," he declared. + +"Dey's just black an' white," protested the little negro. "Dey doan +show de colors at all." + +The chums turned their heads aside to hide their grins. + +"That's a Greek camera, Chris," Charley said with a wink at Walter. +"You can't expect it to take American colors. I tell you what to do. +Just write at the bottom of each picture: Pants, yellow; coat, scarlet; +cap, purple." + +"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the little darkey, +brightening. "But it hain't like habbing de colors show," he added, +mournfully. + +The three were making their way back to the hotel when their progress +was arrested by piercing screams coming from the rear of a large Greek +restaurant. + +The boys hesitated and looked at each other. + +"Sounds as though someone was hurt pretty bad," Charley commented, "but +I guess we had better go along about our business. We are likely to +get ourselves into trouble if we meddle with things in this section," +but as he spoke the screams rang out afresh. The chums looked at each +other; there was no need for words between them. + +"Well, it's foolish, but here goes," Charley exclaimed. + +A narrow alley led into the rear of the building and down it has +hastened followed by his two companions. + +A minute's walk brought them to the scene of the screams. + +In a little back yard stood a small Greek boy about thirteen years of +age. He was clad only in short trousers and his bare back and legs +were covered with angry welts. Above him towered a dark, scowling +Greek, who was swinging a heavy cowhide whip, while at each descent of +the cruel, stinging lash the lad's screams rose in piteous protests. +Clustered around was some dozen men and boys looking on with unconcern. + +Charley caught the Greek's arm as it rose for another blow. "Stop that, +you big brute," he cried, trembling with anger. "You have no right to +beat a little fellow like that, no matter what he has done. If you hit +him another blow, I'll have you arrested." + +"He won't understand you, Charley," Walter cautioned. + +But the Greek did understand. He turned a look of the deepest hate on +the plucky lad. For a second he seemed in the act of striking him with +the heavy whip, but Charley did not flinch. "Try it, if you dare," he +cried. + +The Greek lowered his upraised arm. "Why should I not strike him?" He +demanded savagely, but in perfect English. "He is mine, I pay his fare +all the way from Greece. All day he plays on the street and brings home +no money. I will beat him if I wish." + +"You will not," declared Charley, firmly. "If you do, you will be +arrested very quickly. Lad, if this man attempts to beat you again, +you come to us; you will find us on board the schooner 'Beauty'. If +she is not in the harbor you go to Mr. Driver who owns the store, I +will tell him about you and he will see that you are not abused. Do you +understand what I say?" + +"Yes sir, I speak English good," the little lad replied proudly. "He +teach me so I can beg the pennies." + +The Greek's manner had suddenly changed. His frown disappeared and he +wore a smile that he endeavored to make pleasant. + +"The noble young gentleman need not worry," he said, smoothly, "I love +the boy and already regret having whipped him--he is very bad. But it +shall happen no more." + +"It had better not," Charley replied shortly, as he turned away. "Come +on, Walt, I am going to speak to Mr. Driver about it now." + +Mr. Driver listened to the lad's story with a very grave face. "I'm +afraid you boys have made a dangerous enemy," he said. "That Greek is +Manuel George, and he is a very bad character. He was arrested once +for the murder of another Greek, but they could not prove the charge +against him although everyone believed that he had done it. You want to +be very careful as long as you are in Tarpon. I will gladly have him +arrested if the boy makes any complaint to me." + +The boys found the captain waiting for them at the hotel. "I've had +the best of luck," the old sailor declared. "I found the very Greek we +need to make our orders plain to the crew. He talks English as good +as you or I. I did not lose any time in gettin' his name on the ship's +papers. He promised to meet us here at the hotel this noon. There he +comes now." + +The chums exchanged a glance of dismay, for approaching their table, +bowing, smiling, and as suave as though they were his dearest friends +was Mr. Manuel George. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +THE START. + + +THE captain introduced the boys to the Greek who beamed upon them as +though nothing unpleasant had ever passed between them. The lads met +his smiling advances with a cold silence which the captain noticed with +puzzled concern. + +As soon as he could do so without attracting too much notice, Walter +drew the old sailor to one side. "We don't want anything to do with +that man," he declared, and he hurriedly told about the whipping and +repeated what Mr. Driver had said. + +Captain Westfield looked troubled. "I wish I'd known that two hours +ago," he said. "He's signed on with us now an' if I try to get rid of +him he can make a lot of trouble for us. We have got to take him along. +If we don't, he's liable to libel the schooner an' cost us no end of +money and delay." + +Walter's face showed his anxiety and concern. + +"He said he was going to bring a boy along with him to act as cabin +boy," said the old sailor after an uncomfortable pause. "Maybe it will +all work out for the best. He won't be able to abuse the lad on the +schooner, an' I don't see how he can make us any trouble. All he's to +do is to make our orders plain to the men, it ain't as though he was an +officer over them." + +"Well, if it can't be helped, we have just got to make the best of it," +Walter agreed, "I am going to keep a mighty close watch on him all the +time, though. We will talk more about it later on. He keeps glancing at +us as though he knew we were talking about him." + +As soon as he got the chance, Walter told his chum what the captain had +said. + +"I don't like the idea of that fellow going with us," Charley declared, +"but if it has got to be, we had better start in by treating him +friendly. It won't help matters any to quarrel with him." + +That was sound sense and the boys at once began to treat the Greek +pleasantly, in spite of the dislike they felt for him. + +There was no doubt but what the fellow understood his position +thoroughly. With his able assistance, the captain, in a short time, +secured a full crew of fifteen men, including four professional divers +who brought their queer looking suits with lead shoes and heavy helmets +along with them. The boys were pleased with the appearance of the men. +They were well-built, husky fellows and looked to be capable sailors. +They were much alike in looks, all being broad-shouldered and swarthy +with clean-cut features and straight noses. One alone seemed to differ +greatly from the rest. He was a tall, powerful, handsome fellow with +unusually small hands and feet. He seemed to be shunned by the others +and left very much to himself. He was evidently a good sailor and when +the captain set his new crew at work to getting the schooner ready for +sea he performed his part with a quickness and intelligence that won +the old sailor's approval. + +As soon as the work was well under way, Charley and Walter, taking the +interpreter with them, went back up town to purchase their stores. The +bulk of their purchases were made at Mr. Driver's store, but there were +many articles that he did not carry in stock which they had to buy at +the Greek stores. Manuel directed them as to the kind of food their +crew were accustomed to. The bulk of the stores consisted of ripe black +olives in small kegs; queer looking cheeses, rice, black flour and an +abundance of tea and coffee. The boys bought three whole beeves and +four lambs, directing that all their purchases should be sent down to +the schooner at once. + +"Whew," whistled Charley as he paid the last bill, "we have only got +five dollars left of our fifteen hundred." + +"Don't you care," Walter replied, confidently. "We will have a couple +of thousand dollars anyway coming to us when we get back, and still +have the 'Beauty' besides." + +The boys next visited the hotel and got their valises and belongings +which they carried down to their new floating home. + +They found that the Greeks already had the meat cut up and sizzling +merrily in the great iron kettles. + +The new crew were a quick and willing lot and before dark the last +article was stored aboard, and, with the diving boat towing along +behind, they dropped the schooner down the river to the mouth and +anchored for the night just outside amongst a great fleet of schooners +lying ready for an early morning start for the sponging ground. + +Long after they had eaten their supper and all of the crew but the +anchor watch had retired to the forecastle, the four chums sat on +deck admiring the beauty of the scene around them. A thousand lights +twinkled from the fleet and high in the air ahead of them the great +lantern of the Anclote lighthouse on its little island of barren rock. + +Captain Westfield awoke the boys early next morning, "Hurry up on deck +if you want to see the prettiest sight you ever saw," he said. The lads +hustled into their clothing and followed him up the ladder. As they +gained the deck they paused with exclamations of deepest admiration. + +It was blowing a stiff breeze and the blue water of the Gulf was +dancing and sparkling with white-crested waves. Around them was the +fleet all under sail, their snowy canvas towering high above their +shapely hulls. Some lay with sails slatting, still clinging to their +anchorage while their brightly attired crews worked over windlasses, +reeling in the dripping cables. Some already under way lay hove-to in +the open Gulf waiting for their fellows; while still others, anchors +tripped and sails drawing, heeling over to the brisk breeze, darted +away, sending the water tossing and foaming from their bows. + +The boys drew a long breath of pure delight at the beautiful picture. + +"It's grand," Charley cried. + +"Aye, lad," agreed the captain with satisfaction. "There's no place +like the sea for beautiful scenes. But thar ain't a ship in the whole +fleet as pretty as our own. Just watch her now." + +The old sailor gave a few short orders which the interpreter repeated +to the crew. A dozen of them sprang to the windlass, while others stood +by the halyards, ready to hoist the big jibs the second the anchor +broke ground. The "Beauty's" huge main and foresails were already +hoisted and her cable hove short. + +The men at the windlass shouted some words. + +"Anchor broke," translated Manuel. + +"Up helm," commanded the captain, "give her the jibs." + +The great sails mounted their stays, the "Beauty's" head played off, +and, careening over 'till her lee rail touched the water, she surged +through the waters like a thing alive. + +The chums watched the foam sweep past in transports of delight. + +"My, but she's fast," Walter cried. + +"Aye, lad," the captain agreed, joyfully. "I ain't never seen a faster, +except maybe Black Sam's schooner. We'll have to shorten sail in an +hour if we don't want to run away from the rest of the fleet." + +The boys watched with delight as the Beauty overhauled and passed +schooner after schooner. + +As she surged past a large black-hulled vessel with three diving boats +in tow, a man on the stranger's deck waved his cap and shouted, + +"Good luck to you. Better keep with the fleet." + +"That's Mr. Williams," Charley exclaimed. "I am glad that we are going +to be near somebody we know." + +"Yes, it is Mr. Williams," affirmed Manuel, who was standing near. "But +here is my little boy to say that your breakfast is ready." + +"What is your name?" Walter enquired of the little fellow as they all +followed him below. "I could never remember that," he said, when the +lad replied with a very long Greek name. "I guess we will have to call +you Ben for short." + +The band of chums were very hungry and they seated themselves around +the table before the steaming cups of coffee and waited impatiently +for the food to be brought on, but the little Greek lad took a position +behind their chairs and waited. + +"Hurry up, Ben, and bring the breakfast," the captain ordered. + +"Breakfast there," the lad replied. + +The old sailor repeated his order but Ben replied as before. + +"I reckon he don't understand," the captain remarked, "Go up and tell +your father, owner, or whoever he is, to come down." + +The lad was back in a minute with the smiling Greek. + +"We want our breakfast," the captain explained, "the boy don't seem to +understand." + +"He understands all right, but, I see the cook does not comprehend. It +is the custom to have coffee only in the morning on sponging ships." + +"Nothing but coffee for breakfast?" roared the old sailor. + +"We eat but one meal a day and that at night," the Greek explained. "If +the rest of the crew ate the divers would want to eat also, and that +would be fatal for them. The stomach must be empty when they descend to +the bottom in deep water, otherwise they die." + +"Well, they can't see us eat an' I want my three square meals a day," +said the hungry sailor. "Right saving plan for us though if they only +eat once a day." + +"They eat the whole three meals in one," the Greek said with a smile. +"I will speak to the cook at once and he will soon have something ready +for you." + +In a very short time they were served with a substantial meal to which +they all did full justice. As soon as it was finished, they returned to +the deck where they learned that the "Beauty" was already so far in the +lead of the fleet that sail had to be shortened. + +With Manuel's aid the boys picked out their crews for the diving boat. +They found that many of the Greeks were familiar with gasoline engines +and they selected one of the youngest and most intelligent-looking for +an engineer. The four divers were, of course, allotted to their boat, +but besides them they had to have two men to work the air pump and two +others to tend to the life-lines, which made a crew of nine, besides +the young officers, and would leave only Captain Westfield, Chris and +the cook and five men on board the schooner. + +The divers at once began preparations for their future dangerous work. +They examined pump and air hose very carefully, for a slight leak in +either one would mean death by suffocation beneath the surface. They +brought out their diving suits and went over them inch by inch for +possible rents or tears. Many of the suits were old and covered with +a multitude of rubber patches. The boys were amazed that their owners +would dare descend in such worn suits, but Manuel assured them that +the patches were so cunningly put on that not only would they exclude +water, but they would outlast the suit itself. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +FIRST TROUBLE. + + +ONE of the sailors Charley had selected for his crew was the tall +handsome fellow whom the others seemed to shun. + +"I can't understand what the rest have against him," the young captain +remarked to his chum. "He seems very quiet and well behaved, and he is +every inch a sailor. I would ask Manuel about him but it is bad policy +to discuss one of the crew with another. It always makes trouble. +Likely, Manuel would lie about him anyway, he seems to hate him, look +at him glaring at him now." + +The Greek was leaning against the railing staring at the sailor who was +coiling down a rope near him. Suddenly the Greek addressed the man in a +low savage tone. The sailor's face grew red with anger, and he replied +shortly in a few hissing words. With a bound, the Greek cleared the +space between the two and struck the sailor full in the mouth. The man +reeled back against the main mast, but, recovering himself in a second, +sprang for his assailant. The Greek leaped to one side and whipped out +a long wicked knife. + +Before he could use it, Captain Westfield, belaying pin in hand, rushed +in between the two. + +"Put up that knife," he roared. "I'll do what fighting there is to be +done on this ship." + +The Greek shot one quick glance at him, venomous with hate, then he +glanced beyond him at the two lads who waited expectantly with hands on +their pistols. + +"He cursed me," he said sullenly, as he slowly replaced the knife in +his pocket. + +"When anyone curses you, report it to me an' don't take the law in +your own hands. I'm master of this schooner, an' you might as well +understand it right off. Tell that fellow just what I've told you." + +The sailor's face darkened as the Greek spoke to him rapidly, but he +turned slowly away and walked forward. + +"That's a bad beginning," Charley remarked to his chum. "I wish we had +never seen that Greek. I believe he insulted that sailor. The fellow +was behaving himself and tending to his own business." + +He repeated the remark to the captain a little later. + +"I reckon you're right, lad," agreed the old sailor, "that Greek seems +to be a trouble-maker but he'll find he's got the wrong man to deal +with. I've handled too many crews of tough roughnecks to be bested by +a dirty furriner." + +"I'll bet he will keep you busy with complaints," Walter said. "How +are you going to get at the truth of it if he does complain about the +others of the crew?" + +"You'll see, I reckon, he will try something like that but I'm ready +for him." + +Sure enough, in less than an hour the Greek approached the Captain. + +"I hate to trouble you, but I must complain as you have directed," he +said suavely. "The cook, he is very abusive, I tried to instruct him +about your meals but he answers me with vile names." + +"Bring the cook aft," Captain Westfield commanded. + +Manuel escorted the bewildered-looking cook aft with a look of sly +triumph on his face. + +The captain looked the man over appraisingly. He was a +broad-shouldered, well-muscled fellow. He spoke to him briefly but the +cook shook his head. He could not understand. + +The old sailor picked up a rope and spread it in a big circle on the +deck. + +"This insulting of you has got to be stopped right off," he declared, +addressing the interpreter. "Give me your knife." + +The Greek surrendered his weapon. + +"Now both of you get inside that ring and fight it out to a finish," +he ordered. "Lick him good for calling you names." + +Manuel's face fell, and, turning he spoke rapidly to the cook. "He has +apologized and my honor is satisfied," he declared. + +"All right," the captain said with a wink at the grinning boys. "Next +time any one insults you, I am going to make you give him a good +licking in a square fist fight. I'm not agoing to let any of the crew +swear at you and call you names--it ain't right." + +"I guess we won't have any more complaints from him right off," he +chuckled as the disappointed Greek retired forward. + +"I'm afraid we're going to have more or less trouble through not +understanding their language," Charley said, gravely. "I don't believe +he had a bit of trouble with the cook. He was just aiming to have you +punish the fellow and get you disliked by the crew." + +"I can handle him all right," the captain declared, confidently. "If he +gets troublesome I'll iron him and put him down in the hold. I reckon I +can make the rest understand what I want done by signs, though it would +be mighty awkward if a gale struck us." + +The old sailor soon left the boys in charge of the deck and went below +to write up the log and look over the charts. + +"If this wind holds we'll be on the edge of the sponging grounds by +night," he said when he returned. "I didn't realize before how big they +are. Why, they reach clear from Cedar Keys to Cape Sable, about seven +hundred miles." + +"One thing that has puzzled me is that all these schooners seem to come +from Key West," Charley remarked, '"Of Key West' is lettered on the +stern of every one of them." + +"Key West used to be the headquarters for the sponging business in +the old days," the captain explained. "They used to gather sponges +different from what they do now. A schooner would take out about +twenty small boats an' a crew of forty men. When she got to the sponge +grounds, the small boats would scatter out around her, two men in each +boat. One man would do the sculling and the other would lean over the +bow with a water glass in one hand--a pail with a pane of glass for +a bottom--and a long pole with a hook in the end in the other. When +he spied a sponge on the bottom through the glass he'd have the other +stop sculling and he would hook it up with his pole. It was slow, hard +work, but they made money at it until the Greeks came with their expert +divers. They could not compete with them so they either sold or leased +their schooners to the Greeks and went out of business." + +The old sailor's explanation was interrupted by a howl of "Oh, Golly!" +from the cook' galley forward and Chris, dripping with water, bounded +out of the open door of the little structure, and rushed aft. + +"I want you to put dat cook in irons, Massa Captain," he cried. "He's +done 'saulted his superior officer." + +"What did he do to you," the captain asked with a twinkle in his eye. + +"Throwed a hull pan of dirty, nasty dishwater obber me. I was jus' +tellin' him how he had outer do, an' tryin' to show de ignorant man how +to cook, when--slosh--he let fly dat big pan full all obber me." + +The dirty water was streaming from the little negro's brilliant +clothing and his face was streaked with purple from his cap. + +The captain checked his desire to laugh. + +"The cook did just right," he said, gravely. "You've got no business +in his galley. A cook is always boss there. Even the Captain seldom +interferes with him." + +Chris seemed inclined to protest indignantly, but the old sailor +continued. + +"How would you like to be cook an' have some one poking around an' +tellin' you what to do?" + +"Golly! I reckon you is right," the little darkey admitted, "I wouldn't +stand such doin's. 'Spect dough dat my good clothes is all spoiled. +Dat water was powerful greasy." + +"Better dry them out and lay them away," Walter suggested. "They are +too fine to wear at sea. You had ought to save them 'till we get in +port." + +Both boys were glad when Chris accepted the suggestion. They could see +that the crew regarded the little fellow in his gay apparel with a +contempt and ridicule that the plucky, loyal little lad did not deserve. + +Under her shortened canvas, the "Beauty" had dropped to the rear of the +fleet. Late in the afternoon the schooners ahead began to shorten sail. +Soon one rounded up into the wind, dropped anchor and lowered sail. +A mile further on another one anchored, a mile beyond another took +in sail, until at last the whole fleet was strung out in a long line +reaching many miles North and South. + +The captain held the "Beauty" on her course until the last schooner was +passed then anchored, lowered sails and made everything snug. + +"We are on the sponging grounds," he explained to the boys who had been +puzzled by the fleet's maneuvers. "To-morrow we make our first try as +spongers." + +As soon as their supper was finished the boys strolled forward to view +the crew at their meal. + +The Greeks ate in groups of four. Each group had a great tin pan filled +with some kind of stew. This they divided into four equal portions +with their big spoons, all eating from the same pan. + +The stew, black bread as hard as a rock, and ripe olives constituted +their meal, but the boys, hearty eaters themselves, were astounded at +the amount of food each Greek disposed of. + +"I never dreamed a man could stow away so much grub," Charley remarked. +"They are not eating three meals in one, but six." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +SPONGING. + + +THE morning sun rose over a scene of bustle and activity. From the +hundred schooners strung out two or three hundred diving boats with +sails hoisted and engines chugging. + +The young officers were up and away with the earliest. + +"Go slow," Captain Westfield cautioned them as they stepped aboard +their craft. "Keep your eyes open an' learn all you can. Don't give any +orders unless they are absolutely needed. But if you have to give them +an order make them obey it, don't let them trifle with you. You can +take Manuel along if you want to, I reckon I can manage to get along +without him." + +But the boys declined the offer. They had both taken a great dislike to +the suave, smiling Greek. + +The Captain had given their crew general instructions before they left +the schooner and the young officers had but little to do but signify by +waves of their hands which direction they wished to go. + +All places looked alike to the inexperienced boys, and as soon as their +craft was a quarter of a mile from the schooner, Charley signed to his +crew to anchor and proceed with their work. + +The divers at once prepared for their descent to the bottom. The lead +was first hove to find out the depth of the water, which proved to +be about thirty-five feet. Before donning their waterproof suits, +the divers tested the air pump carefully and examined the air hose +minutely, for upon these two things their lives would depend when once +they sank beneath the surface. While they were putting on the strange +looking suits and heavy leaded shoes, the crew slung short ladders +over the sides. The divers put on their headpieces last of all, these +were large globe-shaped coverings of metal with two heavy glasses in +front through which to see. But two divers were to descend at a time. +Their places would be taken by two others at the end of two hours, +which is about as long as one can safely work at a time beneath the +surface. Those in reserve assisted their companions in adjusting the +heavy headpieces. As soon as the helmets were on they screwed in the +air hose, and connected the other ends to the pumps. A line by which to +lower and raise them was fastened around each diver's body and he was +then assisted onto the ladder, for it was almost impossible for them to +move in their cumbersome suits and lead shoes. As soon as they had been +helped to the lowest step on the ladder, each was given a large basket +to which a long line had been fastened, and they were slowly and gently +lowered to the bottom. + +The young officers watched their operations with eager interest. +What impressed them most was the vigilant care shown by the divers +remaining on board. One took charge of the tub in which the air hose +was coiled and paid it out carefully as the diver sank, the other held +the life-line instantly ready for the jerks which would signal to him +the wishes of the one below. Not once did either's eyes shift or his +attention waver from his task. + +"It's easy to see that this is a dangerous business," Walter remarked. + +"Yes," his chum agreed, "I am beginning to see that Mr. Williams was +right when he said sponging was a man's game. It certainly takes nerve +to descend like those divers have, knowing that there is nothing +between them and death but that little air hose. But have you noticed +how they are treating that strange handsome fellow? They all seem to be +afraid to have him near." + +The mysterious sailor had approached the men working the air pumps, +apparently with the purpose of helping with the pumping, but the +pumpers drove him away with menacing gestures and upraised fists. He +moved over near the coiled air hose but the diver in charge of that met +him with a torrent of fiercely-uttered words and he slunk dejectedly +forward, and, seating himself by the mast, buried his face in his +hands. + +"Poor chap," Walter remarked, "he seems to be hated by the whole crew. +I wonder what is the reason." + +"We will find out, I guess, when we meet up with Mr. Williams again," +his chum replied. "He will likely know, or be able to find out quickly +from some of his crew. But look, we are about to see our first sponges." + +There had been a couple of quick jerks on the life-line. The diver +holding it called to one of the crew who seized the line that had been +attached to the basket, and began hauling it carefully in hand over +hand. + +The boys leaned over the side, eager for the first glimpse of their +future cargo. When the basket came into view they both uttered an +exclamation of disgust and disappointment. + +Instead of bright, clean, yellow sponges with which they were familiar, +the basket was heaped with what looked like huge lumps of dirty mud. + +The man dumped the contents out on deck and lowered the basket down +again. + +"What greenies we are," Charley said as he glanced at his chum's +crestfallen face. "We might have known if we had stopped to think, that +sponges have to be cleaned and cured before they look like those we saw +on shore. I expect that pile is worth a lot of money in spite of its +unattractive appearance." + +Five times did the basket appear loaded to the brim before the divers' +two hour spell below expired. As soon as their time was up they were +hauled aboard, their suits removed and the other two took their places. + +"Whew, but I am getting hungry," Walter exclaimed as noon time drew +near, "and we came off from the schooner without bringing a lunch with +us." + +"I am glad we did," Charley said. "It's all right having our meals +regular when we are on board the schooner and out of sight of the crew, +but it would hardly seem right to eat now before these hungry fellows. +I guess we can stand it to go without dinner of they can stand it to go +without both dinner and breakfast. Besides, I don't believe I could eat +any lunch if we had it. Whew, but that smell is getting awful." + +The hot sun was getting in its work on the rapidly increasing pile of +sponges on deck. Adhering to them were multitudes of muscles and little +fish which were beginning to send forth a fearful stench. + +"I am beginning to realize that a sponger's life is anything but a bed +of roses," Walter laughed. "It's easy to understand now why they only +eat one meal a day." + +The novelty of the diving operations soon wore off and the boys, to +pass the time, busied themselves with an attempt to learn something of +the Greek language. They selected the engineer for their teacher. He +was a young fellow with an intelligent, good-humored face and seemed to +take great interest in their efforts. Touching different parts of the +boat and engine the boys repeated the English names for them. The young +fellow grasped the idea instantly and repeated the names in Greek, +laughing heartily over their attempts to pronounce the words after him. + +In this manner the time passed quickly and pleasantly and the lads were +delighted with the rapid progress they made. + +"At this rate we will be able to speak the language a little in a +week's time," Charley declared. "I'm--" but he never finished the +sentence. + +From around them rose cries that brought the lads springing to their +feet. + +The crew were all crowded against the rail staring as if fascinated +over the side, while the diver holding one of the life-lines was +hauling it in with feverish energy. + +As the boys sprang to the rail, the diver's headpiece appeared above +the surface One glance, and they understood the reason for the sudden +commotion--from the metal helmet dangled a short piece of severed air +hose. + +The luckless man was quickly dragged aboard, the head-piece quickly +removed, and his rubber clothing cut away, but his eyes were closed and +his face purple--he was dead. A long, weird, prolonged wailing came +from his shipmates which arose and fell strangely, like the strains of +the mournful death march. + +The two chums gazed at each other with pale, horror-stricken faces. + +"Poor fellow," Walter murmured, "His life went out like a candle in a +gale. Alive one minute, dead the next. What could have cut that hose?" + +"Chafed against a sharp branch of coral or bitten in two by a shark," +Charley replied, sadly. "Well, I guess it means the last of our +sponging, the other divers will hardly want to go down after such an +accident, and I don't blame them." + +But, to his amazement, as soon as the wailing chant ceased, one of the +remaining divers began coolly to prepare to take the dead man's place. + +"My, but those fellows have got nerve," he declared, admiringly, but +he stopped the man as he began to put on his diving suit and by signs +ordered the crew to get up anchor and return to the schooner. + +"It's only a couple of hours to dark and we have had enough for one day +anyway," he remarked to his chum. + +When the diving boat reached the schooner his shipmates prepared the +dead man for burial. The body was sewed up in stout canvas and a piece +of iron fastened to it. It was then gently lowered over the side and +sank slowly beneath the waves. + +With its disappearance all vestige of gloom disappeared from the crew. +The dead man's scanty belongings were brought forth and auctioned off +to the various bidders, and an hour after the crew were chatting and +laughing with each other as cheerfully as ever. + +"Mr. Williams was right, this is a man's game, and a game for rough, +fearless men only," Walter remarked thoughtfully, for a second time. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +TROUBLE. + + +AFTER the crew had eaten their supper and rested a bit, the captain +had them transfer the sponges from the diving boat to the deck of the +schooner. The sponges made quite an imposing pile which the old sailor +surveyed with satisfaction. "You've done well to-day," he remarked, +"if every day's work is as good we'll have a valuable cargo before our +three months are up. I reckon, thar's all of two hundred dollars' worth +of sponges in that heap." + +"Are you sure that you know how to clean and cure them right?" Charley +enquired. + +"I don't, but Chris knows that part of the business from A to Z. Where +he comes from the people live by sponging and pearl fishing." + +"Golly, dat's right," observed the little darkey. "I'se helped my daddy +fix sponges many a time. First off, you'se got to beat de mud out ob +dem wid sticks, den you got to let dem lay foah a day or two to die, +'cause dey's alive jus' like fishes. When dey's good an' dead, you puts +dem in nets an' hangs dem ober de side for de water to wash dem out +clean. Den you dry dem out on deck an' string dem out on strings 'bout +two yards long. Dat makes dem all ready for market 'cept for clipping +de bad parts off of dem, which is done on shore. Dar ain't nothin' +'bout fixin' up sponges dat dis nigger doan know." + +Just then a small boat came alongside the schooner and the boys +hastened to the side to welcome the two men it contained. They were +the captain and mate of the schooner anchored nearest to the "Beauty". +Both were young fellows hardly out of their teens. They introduced +themselves as Steve Ward, and Ray Lowe. + +"We thought we'd drop over and have a little chat with you," said Ward, +who was the captain. "You, of course, don't realize it yet, but an +American face looks mighty good amongst this army of Greeks, especially +after one has been out for a month or two. We all start out together +but before the season ends we get pretty widely scattered and to meet +up with another schooner with an American aboard is like coming across +a long-lost brother. This is my fifth trip and I am getting pretty +well hardened to the loneliness now, but the first time I was out I +nearly went crazy. After we parted from the rest of the fleet, it was +worse than being alone on a desert island, for I had the misery of +seeing others talk, laugh and enjoy themselves without being able to +understand a word. When, at last, we came across a ship with someone +aboard I could talk to I nearly cried for joy. It seemed so good to be +able to understand and make myself understood once more." His glance +fell upon Manuel George, who was leaning against the rail, and his gray +eyes narrowed. + +"What made you bring that fellow with you?" he asked. + +"We had to have someone along who could talk their lingo," Captain +Westfield replied. "Do you know him?" + +"I don't know anything good of him," said the other shortly. "I came +near killing him once and I've always half regretted that I didn't do +it. It was on my first trip," he explained. "It was just such another +case as that young fellow's who was arrested the other day. Although I +was captain, the Greeks owned the schooner, and, because I was young +and inexperienced, they got the idea they could run over me and do +as they pleased. Manuel was always stirring them up and encouraging +them to disobey orders. One day I had some words with him about it, +and,"--the young fellow's face darkened--"well, he carries a bullet +in his leg yet. The others set on me and I had to lock myself up in +the cabin. Likely, they would have got me in the end and thrown me +overboard to feed the sharks, but we happened to come across another +schooner and they had to let me go." + +"He don't want to try any tricks with me," Captain Westfield declared. +"I got him to talk their lingo but had him sign on as one of the +crew. If he tries to act up, I'll put him at the hardest work on the +schooner." + +"Well, keep your eye on him," advised the other. "He has never made a +trip yet without making trouble. He's a mighty bad egg and as sly and +cunning as he is mean." + +The two men remained for over two hours, and from them the little party +learned many new and interesting things about their new business and +about the Greeks. + +"We have no reason to complain of a dull trip so far," Charley said, +when the two Americans had left. "Only two days out and one of our crew +is dead, another is supposed to be on the watch to make us trouble, and +a third is a mystery worth solving, judging from the way the others +treat him. If things keep on as they have started, we will have a +voyage exciting enough to satisfy anyone." + +If the lad could have known of the exciting events soon to follow close +on each other's heels, he would have had even less reason to complain +of dullness. + +The next day's sponging was the same as the first. They seemed to have +happened upon a spot where the sponges were unusually plentiful. The +basket came frequently to the surface loaded with the big mud-covered +masses and by nightfall the diving boat's deck was well covered. All +day the two lads persisted in their attempt to learn the Greek names +for the things about them. By night Charley was able to direct the +operation of getting under way for the schooner. Of course, he was yet +unable to construct sentences in Greek, but he could call the Greek +names for sails, anchor, and different parts of the rigging and the +crew managed to guess the rest. Though it was a crude and imperfect way +of giving orders, it succeeded better than the slow, imperfect signs he +had been obliged to depend upon before. + +"If we keep on as fast, we will be able to make them understand us well +within two weeks," he declared gleefully. + +It was still light enough for them to see distinctly when they reached +the schooner, and they looked about them with regret as they climbed +aboard. Her snow-white decks were filthy from the pounding out of the +sponges, and bulwarks, sails and rigging were spattered with the foul +mud, while the strong, rank odor of dead fish hung heavy in the air. + +Chris and the captain had just knocked off work. Their faces, hands and +clothing were black as soot. The old sailor's face showed set and stern +through its coating of mud. He said little until all were washed up and +seated around the supper table. + +"Well, lads, I reckon our troubles have begun," he remarked, grimly. +"Manuel an' I had a row to-day." + +"What about? How did it come out?" the boys questioned, eagerly. + +"I told him to help us with the sponge cleaning and he refused to do +it. When I insisted he flew into a rage, cursed me, an' shook his fist +in my face. I couldn't stand for that an' he's down in the hold now +with the irons on him." + +"Well, I feel easier with him there than with him mixing in with the +crew," Charley declared. + +"My row with him ain't the worst of the matter," the old sailor said +gravely. "I called on the crew to help me iron him and they all +pretended they didn't understand my sign, but they knew what I wanted +all right. I had to handle him alone an' we had quite a struggle +before I got the best of him." He rolled up his sleeve and showed an +ugly-looking cut on his arm. "He came near getting me with his knife +an' I had to give him a couple of taps with a belaying pin. That cut +don't amount to anything, but what worries me is that the crew stood +around an' watched him try to kill me without interfering--it's a +mighty bad sign." + +"That does look bad," Charley agreed, anxiously. "I guess we had better +keep him a close prisoner and not let any of the crew go near him, he +might try to stir them up and make things hot for us." + +"But that means that someone will have to guard him an' carry his meals +to him. It wouldn't do to have one of the Greeks do it, I reckon." + +"No," Charley agreed, thoughtfully, "but I believe I've got the very +man for the job--that handsome fellow the others seem to hate so. +Manuel tried to kill him and he is not likely to be easy with him." + +The mysterious sailor was at once sent for by Ben. As soon as he came +the captain loaded a tray with food and a bottle of water and signed +for him to carry it and follow him. Charley and Walter accompanied the +two. + +As they passed along the deck on their way to the hold, they met angry +glances and frowns from the crew. + +The mysterious sailor was very intelligent and they soon made him +understand that he was to guard the prisoner. He grinned with enjoyment +and, seating himself a little way from the Greek, took out his long +keen sheath knife and laid it handy beside him. + +The prisoner's face grew black with rage at sight of his guard, but he +maintained a sulky silence. + +"I guess he's safe enough now," the captain said as they returned to +their cabin. "I believe that fellow will guard him faithfully. They +seem to hate each other like poison--I wish I knew the reason for it." + +"It would not seem so strange if the hatred was confined to him and +Manuel, but all the others seem to share in the feeling," Charley +remarked. "It seems very queer to me." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +MANUEL'S RELEASE. + + +BEFORE the boys left the schooner next morning, the guard they had set +over Manuel approached the captain, and by signs and gestures intimated +that the prisoner wished to speak to him. + +Manuel's sullen demeanor had entirely disappeared and he looked humble +and penitent. + +"I wish to make my most humble apologies to you, noble captain," he +declared. "All night long I have thought over my hasty actions with +shame and regret. You were right and I wrong. I will work hard at +whatever you set me to do, and in the future you will have no cause to +complain if you will set me at liberty." + +There were tears in the fellow's eyes and his voice trembled as he +spoke. + +"Stop that blubbering," said the blunt old sailor, who detested tears +in men. "I reckon, if you are sure that you've learned your lesson an' +won't try to act smart again, I'll set you free; but the minute you try +to start any trouble again, I'll put you down here for keeps." + +As he removed the irons from the prisoner, the strange sailor burst +into a torrent of passionate speech. + +The captain paid no attention to him for he could not understand a +word of it, but Charley, who was watching closely, saw Manuel give the +fellow a quick glance of sly triumph. + +"I'm afraid you have made a mistake in setting that fellow free, +Captain," the lad said, as they returned to the deck. "I believe it +would have been wiser to have kept him in irons until we could touch +some port and put him ashore." + +"I never feel like being hard on a man when he's sorry for what he has +done," the old sailor replied. "I guess it will make the crew feel +better tempered to have him set free. I'm going to put him ashore at +the first port we touch. In the meanwhile we'll keep him hard at work +an' keep a eye on him all the time." + +"Perhaps we had better take him with us and put him to work at the +pump," Walter suggested. "That's good hard work." + +Charley approved the suggestion, for in spite of the Greek's seeming +repentance, the lad did not trust him in the least and thought it +wisest that he and the captain should be kept separated for awhile +after their quarrel. + +Manuel went at the hard labor at the air pump with a willingness and +cheerfulness which seemed to show the sincerity of his repentance. At +first, he seemed inclined to talk overmuch with the rest of the crew, +but Charley cut short his talkativeness with a curt command. + +"I believe that fellow is a regular Jonah," he confided to his chum +during the noon hour rest. "Yesterday and the day before we got lots of +sponges, but we haven't taken in enough this morning to pay expenses." + +"I guess this part of the ground is getting worked out, perhaps," +Walter replied. "I've noticed several schooners pulling up anchor and +getting under way." + +His surmise proved correct for during the afternoon many of the fleet +passed them headed North. Evidently others were finding the ground as +poor as they did. + +Late in the afternoon the captain recalled them to the schooner with a +signal previously agreed upon,--a flag hoisted to the foremast head. + +"I reckon we'd better be getting under way," the old sailor said when +they got aboard. "I want to keep with the fleet an' all the schooners +seem to be getting under sail. I've noted the course they are takin' +an' with this wind they'll be a long ways from us if we wait until +morning. I hailed one of the captains and he said they intended to sail +all night an' anchor an' get to work early in the morning." + +By the time the sails were all hoisted and the anchor tripped, it had +grown quite dark so the schooner's great side-lights of red and green +were filled, lit, and lashed to the foremast shrouds, for, with so many +boats around them every caution must be taken to avoid running one +down, or being run down themselves. The crew was divided into three +watches. Of which Walter was to have charge of the first, from eight to +twelve o'clock. Charley to have command of the second, or middle watch, +from twelve to four o'clock, while the captain would take the third, or +morning watch, from four to eight A. M. + +The breeze held steady and strong and the night passed away without any +exciting incident. + +The boys were up again at first peep of day, expecting to have to start +out with the diving boat as soon as the sun arose. But, when they +gained the deck, they found the "Beauty" still swinging along on her +course and the captain pacing the deck greatly perplexed. + +"It's mighty queer, but thar ain't one of the fleet in sight," he +exclaimed as he caught sight of the lads. "I don't understand it at +all. Go aloft, Charley, an' see if you can see any of them." + +The lad swung himself into the shrouds and made his way up to the +mainmast cross trees, but, although he gazed all around, his eyes met +nothing but the broad expanse of the blue sparkling waters. + +"Maybe we've run them all out of sight during the night," he suggested +when he regained the deck, but the old sailor shook his head. + +"The 'Beauty's' mighty fast, but she's not speedy enough to do that," +he declared. "Some of those schooners were ten miles ahead of us when +we started. Besides, I shortened sail as soon as I took my watch, +because I did not want to get in the lead." + +"Perhaps we have dropped away behind the rest," Walter said, but the +others knew that that was impossible. The "Beauty" was far too fast a +boat to be left so far behind. + +The Captain examined the log. "We have come a hundred and ten miles," +he said. "Do you reckon either of you boys could have made a mistake in +the course during your watch?" + +"We didn't vary a quarter of a point from the direction you gave during +my four hours," Charley declared. "I kept watch of the compass most of +the time and the needle held steady at North." + +"I was careful about that, also," Walter said. "We were headed exactly +North during my entire watch." + +"Well, that compass is true," the captain declared. "I tested it +carefully before we left port. I reckon thar's only one explanation; +the fleet must have changed their course during the night. We'd better +heave-to until noon when I can take the sun an' tell exactly where we +are at. It ain't no use trying to pick up the fleet again, now they +are out of sight--it would be like hunting for a needle in a hay stack." + +The crew were immediately set to taking in sail and in a few minutes +the little ship was lying head to the wind under reefed foresail sail. + +When the noon hour drew near, Captain Westfield brought his instruments +on deck and prepared to take an observation of the sun. As soon as he +secured it he went below to work out their position on the chart. + +When he reappeared his face wore a very puzzled expression. "Heave the +lead and find out how deep the water is an' what kind of bottom," he +said, briefly. + +Charley took the lead, a heavy cone-shaped piece of lead, slightly +hollowed at the bottom, and with a long line attached to the small +end. Filling the hollow end with soft soap, he dropped the lead over +the side and let it sink until it struck the bottom. Then he pulled it +aboard again, noting carefully the water mark on the line and examining +the soap to which some particles of the bottom had adhered. + +"Depth, six fathoms, (36 feet) bottom, soft gray mud," he announced. + +The captain strode back to the compass and stared at it with a puzzled +frown on his face. + +"We're forty miles from where we should be," he said as the boys +gathered around him, "Sure neither of you boys made a mistake in the +course last night?" + +"Sure," declared both lads positively. + +The four puzzled over the strange situation in silence for several +minutes. Then the captain with his knife loosened the screws and +removed the compass' face of glass. + +"I wonder how that got there," he suddenly exclaimed. + +Cunningly placed, so as to draw the magnetic needle West of North was a +small bright iron nail. + +"It couldn't have got there by itself," Charley declared, excitedly. +"It must have been put there by someone while we were all at supper +last night." + +"I guess there is no doubt as to who that someone was," with an +inclination of his head towards Manuel who, standing a little ways off +was watching them closely. The Greek, as soon as he saw the attention +he was receiving, turned and strolled carelessly forward. + +The captain pondered gravely, "I don't see what his object was," he +said, at last. "If we held on that course long it would only have +carried us further out into the Gulf, so he couldn't have been aiming +to get us wrecked." + +"He planned to get us separated from the fleet," Charley declared. "Do +you think we could find it again, captain?" + +The old sailor shook his head. "There's no telling where we are now," +he said, gloomily, "we might hunt for days without coming across them. +If that fellow did put that nail there to make us lose them, he's +succeeded all right." + +"What had we better do, captain?" Walter asked, anxiously. + +"Well, we aint got no real proof that the fellow put that nail thar so +we can't do anything with him. It might have been in thar all the time, +though I'm willing to take an oath that the compass was true when we +left port. Thar ain't much chance of picking up the fleet again an' I +don't reckon we'd better waste time trying it. The lead shows we are +still on the sponge banks an' I reckon we'd best just get to work, say +nothing, an' keep a close watch on that oil Greek chap." + +The "Beauty" was anchored accordingly, sails lowered and furled, and +everything made snug. As soon as that was done, the boys ordered their +crew into the diving boat and, running out a little ways from the +schooner, gave the signal to resume the diving operations. + +By sheer accident, they had chanced upon a spot rich in sponges and the +lads watched with satisfaction the steady reappearance of the lowered +basket. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +A RASH RESOLVE. + + +THE boys watched Manuel closely throughout the entire afternoon, but +they could detect nothing amiss in his manner or actions. He did +his work willingly and cheerfully, humming a tune most of the time, +apparently he was at peace with himself and the world. + +They were not the only ones who watched the Greek closely. Whenever the +lads glanced at the handsome sailor, they found him gazing intently at +the suspected man, much as a cat watches a mouse, ready to spring at +its slightest movement. + +The boys kept well apart from the crew, watchful for any threatened +outbreak on their part. But the men seemed so cheerful, willing and +contented that they soon grew ashamed of their distrust. + +Once the handsome sailor approached them respectfully, hat in hand, +and, halting before them, spoke rapidly in a low voice. The lads shook +their heads to show that they did not understand, and, with a look of +helpless resignation on his face, the fellow returned to his work. + +"I wish we could understand what he says," Charley said, wistfully. +"He, evidently, has something important he wishes to tell us." + +"We will be able to make out what he says before long," Walter said, +cheerfully. "We are learning lots of new words every day." + +"Yes, we are getting along pretty well," his chum agreed, "but we +are not picking up the language near as well as Chris. It's really +wonderful how fast he is learning." + +The little negro and the Greek boy had become great friends and Chris, +naturally quick witted, was learning with astonishing rapidity to talk +to his new chum. + +"It's the best day we've had yet," Charley declared as they returned +to the schooner in the evening. "We have got as many sponges this +afternoon as we have during any entire day." + +Captain Westfield was elated over their success. "It's turned out all +right after all," he said. "We've stumbled upon a mighty rich part of +the banks, an' I reckon, we ain't lost the fleet either, as we feared, +thar's some twenty sails coming up from the South'ard." + +The vessels, which the boys had not noticed before, were approaching +rapidly, coming before the stiff breeze. Before dark settled down, they +were plainly visible but the eager watchers could not recognize any +of them, they seemed larger schooners than any they had seen in the +fleet. The strangers anchored for the night near the "Beauty" and the +captain got out his night glass and studied them carefully. + +"They ain't any of the fleet," he declared with keen disappointment. +"They're Spanish smacks from Cuba. They fish around this coast +regularly every season." + +"Well, they'll be some company, anyway, as long as they stay near us," +Charley said, cheerfully. "I can speak Spanish if I can't Greek, we can +go over and call on them in the morning. I'd like to go to-night, but I +feel too tired out to move." + +Soon after supper, Manuel approached Captain Westfield, respectfully. + +"We would like to go aboard the schooners, if you will permit," he +requested. "We are nearly out of tobacco and the Cubans always carry a +lot for which we can trade." + +The old sailor thought for a few minutes. "You can go," he said, +shortly, "you an' one man. Take the dingy. I don't want the diving boat +used. An' be sure you're back aboard early." + +The Greek thanked him effusively for the permission, and, calling one +of his shipmates, the two got the schooner's little boat over the side +and sculled away for the nearest smack. + +"They have got plenty of tobacco," growled the captain, as soon as the +two were out of hearing. "Thar was enough sent aboard at Tarpon to last +them for months. I reckon he's figuring on deserting, that's why I let +him go. I'd be willing to lose the boat and the other man to be well +rid of him." + +It seemed that the old sailor was correct for when eight o'clock came +Manuel had not returned. + +"After what happened last night, I don't reckon it's wise to leave the +deck alone," the captain said as the boys prepared to retire to their +bunks. "One of us had ought to keep watch to see that no one monkeys +with the wheel or compass." + +Walter offered to take the first watch from eight to twelve, and, +leaving him pacing back and forth aft of the mainmast, the others +retired to rest. + +Charley was awakened by a vigorous shaking and his chum's voice calling +to him to get up. + +"My watch so soon," grumbled the lad sleepily, "Seems like I just got +to sleep." + +"It's only eleven o'clock," said Walter in excited tones, "but Manuel +came aboard an hour ago very drunk. He must have brought liquor with +him for they are all raising merry Ned in the forecastle now. The +captain and Chris are on deck. Hurry up, there's likely to be trouble +any minute." + +Charley slipped hastily into his clothing and securing his revolver +ran on deck. His three companions with revolvers in their hands were +ranged across the deck just aft of the mainmast. From the forecastle, +forward, came an uproar of shouting, cursing, and fighting. + +The old sailor was blaming himself, bitterly. "I'd ought to have +thought of it," he exclaimed, "Auguident is cheap as water in Cuba an' +those smacks always carry a lot of it to trade off for other things. +What an old fool I was." + +"What shall we do?" Charley asked. + +"Nothing, but let 'em fight it out amongst themselves an' keep 'em +from crowding aft on us. Our lives wouldn't be worth a pinch of snuff +if we went down to quiet them. If any of 'em tries to come aft of the +mainmast, shoot him." + +The words were hardly out of his mouth when a figure burst out of the +forecastle and came running aft followed by several others staggering, +shouting and cursing. + +The captain raised his pistol and took deliberate aim as the flying man +drew near. + +"Stop, or I'll shoot," he commanded. + +Charley knocked aside his upraised arm. "Let him pass," he cried, "it's +the strange sailor, they have been trying to kill him." + +The handsome fellow was bleeding from a dozen knife wounds, and was +breathing short and heavily. As he reached the little party of chums, +he turned about and faced his pursuers. It was evident that he did not +lack courage. + +The pursuing Greeks stopped short at sight of the little band stretched +across the deck with leveled revolvers. For a minute they seemed about +to dash forward regardless of consequences, but, after a moment's +hesitation, with a volley of curses they turned and slunk back to the +forecastle. They were yet sober enough to realize the danger of open +mutiny. + +"I don't think they'll try to bother us," said the captain with a sigh +of relief. "They ain't drunk enough for that yet, an' I reckon they've +about drank up all their liquor by now. It wouldn't last long amongst +so many of them." + +The strange sailor had sunk to the deck in a dead faint, and, leaving +the boys to guard the deck, the Captain and Chris carried him below, +and, laying him in one of the bunks, hurried back to their companions. + +"He ain't going to die," the old sailor informed them. "He's just weak +from loss of blood. I didn't take time to look him over close, but I +counted nineteen knife cuts on his body an' likely thar's some I didn't +notice." + +"We will have to keep him back aft with us. They would likely kill +him if we sent him back to the forecastle, for he is unable to defend +himself now," Charley said, and his chums agreed with him. + +The uproar in the forecastle continued for a long time then gradually +subsided. Evidently, the crew had disposed of the last of the liquor +and its effects were slowly wearing off. + +Not until four o'clock, however, did the last noise cease, and the +little party of chums remained on deck until the sun rose, ready for +any violence from the drunken Greeks. Daylight found them pale and +tired from their long, anxious vigil. + +"Better go below, lads, and have a good nap," the captain advised. +"They have all quieted down and there is no danger of trouble for the +present. They are going to feel mighty sick and weak from the drink." + +"I'm not going to give them a chance to sleep off their bad feelings," +declared Charley, grimly. "My crew have got to turn to and work as +usual. I'm going to turn them out as soon as Ben awakes." + +When the little Greek lad appeared, looking pale and frightened, +Charley sent him below to rouse Manuel. + +The lad, apparently, did not relish the task but he went, and, after a +long time, reappeared accompanied by the Greek. + +Manuel plainly showed the effects of the liquor. He looked sick and +haggard and one eye was much discolored from a blow he had received. He +was ready, however, with an excuse for the night's disorder. "I did my +best to stop the noise and trouble, and it was thus I received a blow +in the eye." + +"You were drunk when you came aboard," accused Walter. + +"I took a drink on the schooner," admitted Manuel, "only one little +drink. It was foolish, for I am unused to liquor and it went to my +legs, but my head was clear. I regret the disorder of the others." + +There was no doubt in the minds of the captain and the boys that he was +really the author of all the trouble, but they could not prove it and +Charley dismissed him with a curt command to call the crew. + +They were a sick-looking crowd when they were at last collected on +deck. All showed the effect of the liquor and many were the black +eyes and bruised faces. Their fighting humor seemed to have departed, +however, and they went about their tasks quietly, sullenly, and +listlessly. + +After they had finished their morning coffee, Charley ordered his crew +into the diving boat and set out for the spot where they had found so +many sponges. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +A MYSTERY. + + +THE two boys kept well apart from the crew, and watched closely for +any signs of threatened trouble, but, although the men looked sullen +and ugly enough for any kind of act, they seemed much subdued and went +about their tasks quietly saying little, even to each other. + +"I guess we are giving ourselves a lot of worry without cause," Walter +remarked, softly. "Those fellows seem quiet enough now. It was the +liquor that made them act as they did last night, but they have drank +it all up now and I do not believe we will have any more trouble with +them." + +"I wish I could agree with you," his chum said, gravely, "but I can't. +I believe in the old Latin proverb--'in vino veritas'--there is +truth in wine. I've always noticed that when a man gets intoxicated, +he reveals just the kind of man he really is. If he is naturally +quarrelsome when sober he is sure to want to fight when drinking. If he +is good-hearted and kind when sober, he is generally good-humored when +drunk. Liquor seems to destroy a man's caution and make him reveal his +real character. Now these fellows showed plainly their feelings towards +us last night when they were drinking. To-day they are sober and more +cautious, but I believe they feel just the same towards us. It only +needs some real or fancied wrong to bring their hatred to the surface +again. I believe if we had a clash with one of them now we would have a +first-class mutiny on our hands; but, I guess, we had not better do any +more whimpering. They will suspect that we are discussing them and it +will not improve matters any." + +For awhile the sponges came up from below every half hour, but towards +noon a full hour went by without the basket making its appearance. The +lads, at last, became somewhat alarmed at the delay. + +"Do you suppose they are in any trouble down below?" Charley enquired +of Manuel. + +The Greek shook his head. "They would have signaled if anything had +been wrong. There, they are signaling now." + +There came several jerks on the life-lines and the Greeks in charge of +them pulled the divers up and into the boat. The men had been below +for only an hour and the boys were puzzled to account for their coming +up before their time had expired. When their head-pieces were removed +the lads could see that the divers were greatly excited. They spoke +rapidly to those around them, and a hum of excited conversation arose +from the before listless crew. + +"What's the matter?" Charley demanded of Manuel, who seemed to be the +most excited of all. + +"It is nothing," was the quick reply. "The men grew faint for a minute +but they will be all right soon. That often happens to one when diving." + +The Greek's excitement was too great for such a trivial cause and +Charley decided promptly that he was lying. + +In a few minutes the divers resumed their head-pieces and prepared to +descend again. As they stood on the ladders one of the crew handed one +of them a coil of light rope to the end of which was attached a piece +of light wood. + +"What does he want with that buoy?" Charley demanded, sharply. + +"There's a bad hole in the bottom which he wishes to mark so that there +will be no danger of his blundering into it," replied Manuel promptly, +but, again, Charley decided that the fellow was lying. + +"There's something in the wind," he remarked to Walter. "The crew seem +greatly excited, and Manuel, I am sure, is lying." + +A strange change had suddenly taken place in the crew's manner. Before, +they had been silent, sullen and listless, now, they were animated, +their eyes glittered with excitement, and they chattered back and forth +like so many magpies. + +Manuel evidently noticed that the boys were watching them closely, +for he addressed them in a low tone and their chattering ceased. They +resumed their work with something like a return of their former manner, +but it was easy to see that their sullenness was now assumed. + +The lads turned their attention to the course the diver was taking, and +watched for the appearance of the buoy which would show the whereabouts +of the bad place on the bottom. The bit of wood soon floated into view +not a hundred feet from the boat. + +Apparently, the divers were still suffering from their faintness, for +it was a long time after they descended before the first basket load of +sponges appeared, and it was nearly an hour before the second one was +hoisted aboard. + +"We are not getting many to-day," Walter grumbled. "If we don't do +better pretty soon, we had better move and try another place." + +"There is something queer doing," Charley declared. "Just watch those +life-lines and see what you make of it." + +The ropes which were fastened to the divers showed plainly the +direction taken by the men below. The lines were kept faintly taut +to permit of the signals being clearly felt, and their slant gave an +accurate idea of just where the divers were working. + +Walter watched for awhile, a puzzled frown gathering on his face. + +"Why," he exclaimed, "they are right on that bad part of bottom, and +they haven't stirred for the last fifteen minutes." + +The lads continued to watch the tell-tale lines. For another fifteen +minutes the ropes remained motionless, then from their twitching it +became evident that the divers were once more moving around. In a short +time thereafter, the usual signal was given and two baskets of sponges +were hoisted up. + +"That's got me puzzled," said Charley, as the peculiar performance was +repeated. "I guess we had better appear not to have noticed it. The +crew is not looking at us in a very friendly way." + +The attitude of the Greeks seemed to be growing hostile. Many were the +unfriendly glances they cast at the two lads and the boys could hear +their names repeated in the low-toned conversation going on. + +The two lads retired to the bow where, though they effected to be +taking their ease, they kept on the alert for the first signs of +trouble. + +Though nothing happened to further arouse their fears, it was a trying +situation and both were glad when the time came to return to the +schooner. + +They found the captain and Chris both tired from a hard day's labor +cleaning sponges. The wounded sailor was sitting back by the wheel, +looking somewhat pale and haggard, but not a great deal the worse for +his many wounds. + +"His troubles' been sorter praying on his mind all day," said the +captain. "He got a hold of my pad and pencil this morning an' he's been +drawing pictures of the fight and other things--here's one of them." + +The old sailor produced a crumpled piece of paper from his pocket. + +Walter examined the sketch closely. It was not without a certain +cleverness and was better than one would expect of a humble sailor +before the mast. It depicted a struggle between two groups of men. In +one of the groups, the lad could recognize some of the faces of the +Greeks, who, armed with knives and clubs, were assailing the other +party. As the lad bent over to examine the other group more closely, he +uttered an exclamation of surprise. At first glance there was nothing +startling about those whom the Greeks were fighting, but a second +glance showed something familiar about the figures composing it. He +passed the sketch to Charley. + +"What do you make of it?" he asked. + +"Why, that little group is intended to represent us," his chum +exclaimed. "See they are just four in number. That big one with the +beard is meant for the captain and the little one for Chris, the other +two are you and I. Why, the likeness to us is quite striking when you +look at it closely." + +"I believe he intended this for a warning to us," Walter declared. +"Where are the rest of the things he drew, Captain?" + +"I threw them all away, I didn't reckon they meant anything," the old +sailor replied, regretfully. + +"Well, never mind," said Charley cheerfully, "we will get him to draw +them over again. He seems a very intelligent fellow. I wish he could +talk so as to tell us what the crew are saying now. Just look at him." + +The strange sailor was leaning forward listening eagerly to the buzz of +conversation going on between the Greeks. The diving boat's crew seemed +to have conveyed the excitement under which they had been laboring all +day to their shipmates who had remained aboard the schooner. Groups of +two or three were gathered here and there, talking eagerly together. + +Walter called the little Greek lad to him. + +"What are the men talking about, Ben?" + +The little fellow hesitated before replying. It was plain that he was +greatly troubled and frightened. "They talk about nothing much," he +stammered. + +Walter was pressing him with further questions when his chum interfered. + +"It's hardly fair to make him tell," he said. "It might cause him a lot +of trouble. His uncle is glaring at him now, as though he would like to +kill him." + +There was nothing to be learned by watching the crew's actions, so, +signing to the wounded sailor to follow them, the four chums descended +to the cabin where the Greek cook had supper waiting for them. + +Charley was unusually quiet during the meal, but when the Greek cook +and Ben had at last retired carrying the dishes with them, he arose and +closed the cabin door. + +"Captain," he said as he returned to his companions, "I am going down +in a diving suit to-morrow." + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +IN A DIVING SUIT. + + +THE old sailor stared at Charley as though he feared the lad had taken +leave of his senses. + +"Why, you must be crazy," he exclaimed. "You don't know anything about +that kind of diving." + +"I fancy there is not much to learn about it," Charley replied. "I've +been watching the divers closely and it appears very simple. The main +thing seems to be to keep the air hose clear. I've been wanting to go +down ever since the first day, and the strange way the crew have acted +to-day has decided me to try it. I want to see what it is that has so +excited them." + +"It's a fool notion and I ain't going to let you do it," the captain +stormed, but Charley only grinned, cheerfully. + +"It's no use scolding, Captain, I've quite made up my mind to try it. +I've been thinking it over the whole day." + +"I say you sha'n't do it," roared the old sailor. "I'll put you in +irons first, I'm captain of this schooner." + +"But I'm captain of the diving boat," Charley reminded him with a grin, +"If anyone interferes with my doings on my own ship it's mutiny, you +know." + +"Walt, say something to get him out of that fool notion," pleaded the +old sailor, helplessly. + +Walter turned to his chum with a twinkle in his eye, "If you go down, +I'm going too," he said, decidedly. + +"You're two young lunatics," the captain declared, wrathfully. "You're +bound to always run yourselves into danger whenever you get a show. +Neither one of you will ever live to see twenty." + +But, although he fumed and threatened for a long time, the matter +ended, as was always the case when the boys had determined upon a +thing, in his, at last, giving a grudging consent to their plan. + +Chris had followed his little friend Ben on deck as soon as he finished +his supper, but soon after the discussion was ended he returned below +grumbling. + +"Dat white child ain't no fitten company to-night," he declared. "He +acts plum scart to death an' won't talk none tall." + +"You go up and stay around the wheel, 'till we come up," the captain +ordered. "I thought you were there all the time or I'd been up myself, +I don't want none of those fellows fooling around the compass." + +When Chris had retired, still grumbling, Walter brought out a pad and +pencil and handed them to the sailor who had been watching their faces +closely during their animated debate. + +The man seized them eagerly and bending over the pad began to draw +slowly with awkward, clumsy fingers. When the sketch was finished he +tore off the sheet of paper and handed it to Charley whom he seemed to +recognize as the real leader of the little party. + +The lad examined the sketch with eager interest. "He must be a very +cheerful sort of fellow," he remarked, as he passed it to his chum. +"First, he prophesies a fight with the crew, and, now, he has got us +all shipwrecked. Can't say much for his skill with the pencil though; +that hulk does not look much like our pretty 'Beauty'." + +The rude sketch pictured a forlorn, dismasted wreck, covered with +seaweed and with one side badly stove in. + +The sailor had immediately commenced upon another picture which he soon +passed over. + +The boys looked it over but could not decide what it was intended to +represent. + +"It looks like a box full of crackers," Charley said with a grin. +"Well, if he's decided to have us shipwrecked, it's thoughtful of him +to provide us with something to eat." + +But the sailor did not seem to regard it as any laughing matter. He +watched their expressions with a face full of concern, and, when +Walter shook his head to show that he did not understand the sketch, he +laid aside the pad with a heavy sigh. + +"He has given it up," Charley said. "We had better go to bed, I guess +we have a hard day ahead of us to-morrow." + +Chris was recalled from the deck and Walter took his place while the +others turned into their bunks and were soon fast asleep. At midnight +he awakened Charley and at four o'clock Charley was relieved by the +captain. The watches passed away without any alarm, but one thing +struck both of the lads as being curious. All during their watches +three or four of the Greeks remained on deck instead of seeking their +bunks as they usually did right after eating supper. They sat around +up by the forecastle smoking and talking quietly together and the boys +came to the conclusion that they were merely wakeful from the effects +of the liquor they had drank the night before. + +The boys looked longingly at the tempting breakfast served by the Greek +cook, but as they had decided to make the descent to the bottom that +morning they were obliged to be content with a cup of coffee. + +The captain and Chris followed them aboard the diving boat. "We're +going with you," the old sailor explained. "It's a risky thing you're +planning to do an' I'd be too nervous and anxious about you to stay on +the schooner. She will be all right without us for a little while." + +Manuel seemed to note the presence of the captain and Chris with +satisfaction. Before the boat was shoved off from the schooner, he +called the cook to the rail and conversed with him a few minutes in low +tones. + +But his satisfaction changed to frowning anger when the boys began to +don the diving suits. + +"You are foolish to attempt to go down, young sirs," he said, angrily. +"It is dangerous, very dangerous." + +"We are the only ones at all likely to suffer," Charley replied +shortly. "Tend strictly to your pumping, when we think we need advice, +we will ask you for it." + +Before his head-piece was adjusted, he found opportunity to whisper to +Walter. "We won't be able to talk when we get below, so I want you to +follow me and do just what you see me do." + +"I will," promised his chum. "My, don't these things feel queer. I can +hardly lift my feet, they are so heavy. They make me feel helpless as a +little baby." + +The divers adjusted the helmets to the lads' heads and, assisting them +to the rail, helped them down the ladder, and lowered them gently to +the bottom. + +Charley laughed to himself as he caught sight of Walter in the clear +water. His chum looked like some strange monster in the grotesque +diving suit. He waved his hand to him and Walter placed one great paw +over his helmet where his mouth was supposed to be, to show that he was +endeavoring politely to stifle a laugh. + +But the boys' merriment at each other's grotesque appearance was +quickly lost in admiration of the strange scene about them. + +It was as though they were standing in the midst of a beautiful garden. +Here and there were patches of soft white bottom, like winding paths +amongst the marine growth. On every side of the bare places rose +lace-like sea fans of purple, yellow, and red, and feather-like sea +plumes swaying gently to and fro to the motion of the water caused by +the lads' descent. At their bases lay scattered multitudes of shells of +every conceivable shape, size, and hue, while, towering far above the +riot of color, rose mighty trees of snow-white coral among the branches +of which hovered golden, silver, crimson, and every shade of fish, +great and small, their fins flashing gracefully as they darted to and +fro. + +For some moments, the lads stood motionless drinking in the beauty of +the wonderful garden, but they had not descended merely to admire and +Charley, after a long look around, hauled gently on the life-line until +he had some hundred feet coiled neatly at his feet. Walter, though not +comprehending his chum's plan, followed his example. The ruse was to +serve a two-fold purpose, first to lead those on the diving boat to +think that the two were a considerable distance from the boat, and, +second, to deceive them as to the real direction taken by those below. + +As soon as Walter had got his life-line neatly coiled down, Charley +turned at right angles from the spot and moved slowly forward for the +place where he calculated lay the supposed bad place in the Gulf's +bottom. + +He was surprised to find that he could walk with perfect ease and +comfort. The suit, which had been so heavy and cumbersome above the +surface, now rested on him lightly as a feather. He could have walked +with considerable speed had it not been for the care he had to take to +keep his life-line free and clear from the numerous branches of coral. +He watched Walter anxiously to see that he used the same care with the +rope upon which their very lives depended and he was relieved to see +that his chum used every possible precaution. + +Although the water was clear as crystal, neither lad could see far +ahead at that depth below the surface for it was too far for the sun's +light to penetrate brightly. Charley was almost upon the rope with its +floating buoy above before he perceived it. He moved forward now with +the greatest caution for, if Manuel's statement was true, a hasty step +might plunge him suddenly into a nasty hole or a dangerous patch of +quicksand. But the bottom did not seem any different from that over +which they had passed. The rope was fastened to a branch of coral where +there was no indication of a hole or quicksand, but, a little beyond +where the rope was fastened, the lad could see dimly a large black mass +rising up from the bottom. Towards it he slowly made his way, followed +by his chum. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +A CLOSE CALL. + + +CHARLEY'S eyes were becoming accustomed to the semi-gloom and a few +steps forward gave him a clear view of the dark object. One glance, and +he turned to his chum with a cry which was lost in his muffling helmet. + +Before the two lads lay the wreck of a once stately ship, her masts +broken short off and a great gaping hole in her side. She had evidently +lain long in her bed amongst the coral and sponges for long tendrils of +sea moss streamed out from her barnacle-covered sides. + +Someone had been there before them for the moss and marine growth had +been scraped from the vessel's stern revealing the name, "Golden Hope". + +Charley turned from the spelling out of the indistinct letters to see +his chum beckoning to him wildly and he hurried to his side. + +Walter was stooping over an opened box partly filled with what had +once been shining gold pieces but which were now tarnished and almost +unrecognizable in their coat of gray slime. The box had been recently +torn open as was evident from the freshly-splintered wood. + +Charley sat down on the box's edge and did some rapid thinking. The +crew's excitement was now accounted for. They had not come upon a +rich bed of sponges as he had suspected but had discovered a treasure +such as men for ages have fought, struggled, and died to attain. The +half emptied box showed that the divers had already begun to remove +the gold. For a moment, the lad was puzzled to know how they had been +able to bring up what was missing without its being seen. There were +no pockets to the diving suits and they could have carried but a few +pieces at a time in their closed hands. A moment's reflection, however, +brought him to the only possible explanation; the gold must have been +sent up in the sponge basket hidden amongst the lumps of mud from which +it could have been removed by the crew without much risk of discovery. +But it was not the removal of the gold which gave the quick-witted +lad the most concern. The amount taken by the Greeks was likely but a +mere trifle when compared with that which remained. It was the effects +the discovery of such a treasure would have upon an already unruly +crew that he feared. As he had said to Walter but the day before, he +believed it needed but a trifle to fan the Greeks' growing discontent +into open mutiny. Here was riches enough to tempt the most steady band +of sailors and it was but reasonable to suppose that it would tempt +the lawless Greeks to deeds of violence and bloodshed. These thoughts +surged through the lad's mind in far less time than it has taken to +tell of them. He would have liked to have talked the matter over with +his chum and settled upon the wisest plan to follow, but that was +impossible below the surface and signs were useless to convey exact +ideas. He must decide alone upon their immediate course of action and +trust to Walter's quick wit to fall in with what he decided upon. + +Arising he turned to his chum and laid one finger across his lips. +Walter nodded his ponderous head-piece to show that he understood the +sign for silence regarding their discovery. + +Taking up his sponge basket, Charley retraced his steps to the spot +where they had descended followed by his observant chum. Here the +sponges grew in abundance and he at once began to fill his basket, an +example which Walter immediately followed. + +As he bent over to tear up an unusually large sponge he became suddenly +sensible of an agitation of the water near him. Straightening up, he +stood frozen to his tracks with fear and horror. Not ten feet from +where he stood lay a gigantic shark, its belly gleaming white through +the clear water. Its little green eyes were fixed upon him with a +wicked unblinking stare. He let the basket drop from his grasp and +flung up his arms with an unreasoning instinct to protect his head from +the impending attack. At his sudden movement the great fish darted +away. Evidently, it was equally as frightened of the strange unknown +monster it had encountered. + +The shock had left the frightened lad weak and trembling and he had to +rest a few minutes before he could resume the filling of his basket. + +As he placed the last sponge in the basket he turned to signal to his +chum to ascend, but Walter was already gone, his figure, grotesque in +the diving suit, was already well up from the bottom and shooting up +with astonishing swiftness. At the same moment Charley became aware of +a strange sickening sensation. He was choking and gasping for breath. +Before he could realize what had happened the frightful sensation had +passed and he was able to breathe fully and freely, and he felt himself +being pulled swiftly to the surface. + +In a moment he was hoisted above the surface, hauled aboard the boat +and his helmet removed. The captain, white-faced and shaken was leaning +against the mast his revolver in his hand. Chris, ashen-hued, and a +sailor, was still pumping faintly. Close beside the air pump lay Manuel +in apparent unconsciousness. + +"What's happened?" Charley cried. + +"Manuel keeled over in a fit or something," said the captain, brokenly. +"I thought you would both be dead before we could get you to the +surface. It seemed ages before I could get Chris to the pump and the +fellows to hauling you up. They seemed to move mighty slow 'till I +threatened to shoot. They maybe didn't understand what I said but the +sight of the gun made 'em more lively," he concluded, grimly. + +Charley walked over to the prostrate Greek and stood gazing down at his +upturned face. + +"He has no business to faint when he's working the air pump," he said +savagely. "I guess I'll kick him a good hard one in the face for +punishment." + +The manly lad had no such intention of carrying out such a brutal +threat but he wanted to test whether the treacherous Greek was, as he +suspected, really shamming. + +The prostrate man's features twitched, he sighed heavily and rolled +over on his side, Charley's suspicions were confirmed. + +"Captain," said the lad distinctly, "if anything happens to Walter and +I when we are below the surface, I want you to shoot this man without +the slightest hesitation. He is the only one who can understand your +orders and he must be made responsible for our safety." + +"I'll shoot him the first time anything goes wrong," the captain +declared wrathfully, as he caught the wink of Charley's eye. "I feel +like killing him now, for the fright he gave me." + +The shamming Greek did not seem to relish this threatening talk. He +showed signs of surprisingly rapid recovery. In a few minutes he was +able to sit up and look around. + +"I am overjoyed to find you both alive," he said faintly to the two +boys. "Everything grew suddenly black before me when I was pumping and +I knew no more. It is my heart, it troubles me at times. You young +gentlemen must go down no more, it is too risky." + +"We have had enough of it for to-day, but we may try it again +to-morrow," Charley replied, cheerfully. "It is very beautiful and +interesting down below." + +"I hope you avoided the bad place on the bottom," said the Greek, +anxiously. "The divers say it is a dangerous hole." + +"You must think we are fools to venture near such a place," said +Charley, indignantly, and the man looked greatly relieved. + +Above all, the prudent lad wished to keep the crew from thinking that +he and Walter had come upon the treasure. As long as they believed +them ignorant of its existence they would likely continue the work of +secretly removing it without open violence. + +He could not talk over the matter with his chums without danger of +being overheard, and he was forced to appear unconcerned and look on +with indifference while the divers sent up basket after basket of +sponges, in every load of which he was convinced was hidden several +hundred dollars of the gold coins. + +He greatly admired Walter's manner. The lad chattered over the +beautiful gardens they had seen below without a hint in his voice or +manner of the secret they had stumbled upon. + +From time to time the crew shot glances of scowling suspicion at +the little group, but they were evidently reassured by the boys' +cheerfulness and apparent unconcern. + +It was like sitting beside a powder mine with a lighted fuse in it, and +both lads were greatly relieved when the long day dragged away to its +close and the diving boat was headed back for the schooner. + +They were met at the schooner's rail by the cook who seemed greatly +excited and who greeted them with a torrent of rapidly spoken words. + +Manuel listened with a look of sadness, real or assumed, on his face. + +"He says," he interpreted swiftly, "that the wounded man went suddenly +crazy this morning and flung himself into the sea." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE DISCUSSION. + + +THE chums looked at each other in silent comprehension. There was not +a doubt in the mind of either that the sailor had been made away with +during their absence from the ship. They recalled Manuel's talk with +the cook before they left the schooner and the look of satisfaction in +his face when he learned that they were all going on the diving boat. +Even the captain was not slow to grasp the horrible truth. + +"It's a terrible business, but don't let on that you suspect them," he +whispered. "We've got to have a long talk and decide what it's best +to do." To Manuel, he said, curtly, "I reckon, it's the fellow's own +business if he wanted to drown himself, so you ain't got no cause to +grieve. Better divide his things up amongst the crew." + +Although they were eager for a talk alone, the four lounged carelessly +about the deck, striving to appear unconcerned, until the Greek boy +summoned them to supper below. They talked cheerfully until the cook +had retired bearing the empty dishes with him. Then Charley arose and +noiselessly closed the cabin windows and door so that their words would +not reach the deck. Returning to his seat, he called the pale-faced +little Greek lad to him, and, resting his hand on his head, said kindly, + +"Ben, we are not going to repeat anything you say to us, and we want +you to tell us just what has been troubling you the last few days." + +The little lad burst into tears, "They'll kill me," he sobbed, "they'll +kill me." + +"They will never know you told us," Charley assured him. "We will never +let anyone know you told us." + +"They are going to kill you all," faltered the boy as soon as he could +control his sobs. + +"Why do they want to kill us," Charley questioned. + +"My uncle makes them mad. When you give orders he adds lots of bad +names and swear words to them. He tells the crew that you always take +that sailor's part. He tells them you're going to have them all put in +jail when you get back to Tarpon. He tells them you love that sailor +and hate Greeks." + +"But why did they hate that sailor so?" Walter questioned. + +"He Turk," explained the lad. "Greeks hate Turks." + +The chums glanced at each other in swift comprehension. They knew of +the deadly hatred that existed between the two races. A hatred that +had led to the bitter war in which the Greeks had been badly beaten. +They understood now why the handsome sailor had been shunned by all +his shipmates. They could see, too, how the wily Manuel had used their +defense of the man to arouse the crew's resentment against them. The +cunning Greek had woven about them a net of lies which it would be +impossible to explain away. + +"Then they find gold," Ben continued, "that makes them crazy. Manuel +tells them to leave you alone if you don't find out about the money, +but kill you if you do." + +"The infernal rascal," exploded the captain. "He goes in irons and down +in the hold to stay 'till we get to port." + +"Don't do that!" cried the alarmed Greek lad. "They kill you right off +if you do." + +"One thing more," said Charley, as the little fellow's tears began to +flow afresh. "Who killed that sailor?" + +But Ben did not know although it was evident that he did not doubt that +the man had been killed. + +Charley waited until the lad had dried his tears, then let him go with +the caution to tell none of the crew that he had told them. + +"We are in the tightest fix of our lives," he declared, when Ben had +gone. "It seems, from what he says, that we are safe so long as they +do not suspect that we know anything about the gold but I fancy that +Manuel suspects that we have found it and I do not believe we can count +on their being willing to let us reach port alive. The question is, +what had we better do." + +"I don't understand all this talk about gold," said the captain. + +The boys hurriedly told of the discovery they had made while the old +sailor listened with sparkling eyes. + +"Boys," he exclaimed, when their tale was concluded, "you've found what +will make rich men of us all. I remember the excitement caused by the +loss of that ship. It happened twelve years ago. For months tugs and +steamers were scouring the Gulf searching for her. She had cleared from +New Orleans for New York with two million dollars in gold aboard." + +"She might as well contain two million toothpicks so far as we are +concerned," said Charley, impatiently. "I'd give up every cent of it +willingly to be safe in port this minute." + +The captain, brought abruptly back to a realization of their desperate +situation, thought deeply for several moments before he spoke. "We had +ought to be able to hold our own against them fellows," he, at last, +observed. "We are well armed and I don't believe they have got any +weapons except their sheaf knives which ain't no good except at close +quarters." + +"It is not open violence but treachery that I fear," Charley explained. +"We have had two samples already of the way they work. First in that +stoppage of the air hose and, second, in the making away of that +sailor. No, that Manuel is too cunning a rascal to risk open rebellion +when he can accomplish his ends without any personal risk." + +"Why not let them continue to get up the gold and hide it as they have +been doing?" Walter suggested. "We can pretend that we do not know what +is going on. Then when we get to port we can turn them over to the +authorities and recover the money without any trouble." + +Charley shook his head doubtfully. "That will not do," he said. "I am +as convinced as I am that I am living, that we would never reach port +alive. Manuel is too wise to take any chances and he knows that they +could not remove such a large amount of gold from the schooner without +arousing suspicion. I believe he has entrusted the crew to spare us for +the present only because he thinks that some of the fleet might happen +along and grow curious if we were all missing. Besides, it is doubtful +if any of them know enough about navigation to sail the 'Beauty' home. +Us boys, he probably will not hesitate to remove at any time if he can +give the act the appearance of accident, like what occurred to-day. +The captain, he will likely permit to remain alive until near port. He +will have a long story made up to account for our disappearance and the +gold will likely be well hidden amongst the ballast from where he can +remove it without exciting comment so long as we are not on board." + +The lad spoke confidently for he was putting himself in the place +of the cunning Greek and reasoning just what he would do in a like +position. + +"I've got it," exclaimed the captain in triumph. "When they are asleep +we'll batten down the forecastle hatch on them and keep them there +until we get to port. We four can work the schooner in, I guess." + +"I tell you, you don't realize what a cunning rascal that fellow is," +Charley declared in reluctant admiration. "He has provided against just +such an attempt. I did not understand the reason for it last night, but +I noticed that all during my watch on deck there were three or four men +hanging around the deck up forward. It's a great stake they are playing +for and they are not taking the slightest chances." + +"I noticed the men hanging around," admitted the captain, "but I didn't +think much of it at the time. Let's have your plan, if you've got one, +lad." + +"I'm afraid we can't get out of this hole without some violence and +danger," Charley replied. "I have been thinking over it all day and +this is the only thing I can think of that seems to offer any hope +of success. First thing in the morning Walter and I must descend to +the wreck again and bring up enough gold to pay off the men when we +get to port. It's a risky thing to do, but it is necessary to carry +out my plan. You see," he paused to explain, "the men were shipped for +three months and they could demand pay for that time. We haven't got +the money and we have not gathered up enough sponges yet to make up so +large an amount. They could tie the schooner up for their wages and +make us a lot of trouble and expense, a thing Manuel would be sure to +do." + +"But they have got a lot of gold which belongs to us, already," Walter +suggested. + +"We would have hard work to prove that it is ours, and it would mean a +lot of delay," replied his chum quickly. + +"Go on with your plan, lad," said the captain, who perceived that +Charley had thought over all sides of the question with his usual +clearness. + +"After we have brought up the money. We will use their own plan for +bringing it up without its being noticed--we will hang around and let +them go on with the work as usual all day, for it would not do to fight +it out on the diving boat. When we get back to the schooner at night, +we will bring matters to a head. We will make them get up anchor and +sails and head back for Tarpon. There's bound to be trouble and plenty +of it but we'll be prepared for it and Tarpon is only two days' sail. +What do you think of the plan?" + +He did not have to wait long for a chorus of objections. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +A DESPERATE PLAN. + + +"I DON'T see that your plan is any better than mine," Walter objected. + +"To tarry along while they remove the gold would give them time enough +to remove us one by one," Charley replied, "While by doing as I have +suggested they will have but little chance for treachery, and, although +we will be sure to have trouble with them as soon as we order them to +get up anchor, I think we can manage to keep the upper hand of them for +the short time it will take to reach Tarpon." + +"Golly, dis nigger plum hates to run off an' lebe all dat gole," Chris +observed. + +"We'll come back for it," Charley declared. "As soon as we have paid +off the Greeks and got rid of them, we'll pick a crew of Americans and +hurry back." + +"And while we are wasting time in getting a new crew, the Greeks will +have spread the news and a dozen boats will be here before we can get +back." + +"You forget that the captain is the only one who knows where we are +by the latitude and longitude. Without knowing that, fifty boats might +hunt for a month without seeing that little buoy. It would be like +looking for a needle in a haystack." + +"Hang that pesky Greek," exclaimed the captain. "He asked me this +morning for the schooner's position, an' I gave it to him." + +Charley's face fell, "That fellow seems to think of everything," +he sighed. "But it's hard to get an exact position by latitude and +longitude alone, isn't it, Captain?" + +"A navigator is lucky if he hits within four or five miles of the place +he's aiming for. Of course it can be done if one is extra careful, but +I could not swear to our exact position on the chart now, 'though I +reckon I could come within a couple of miles of it." + +"Good," Charley exclaimed, "I guess, we can make it impossible for them +to find the wreck again, if they should manage to get back before us. +It will mean a little change in my plan, though. Instead of getting +off to-morrow night, we will have to wait until the next morning." He +hastily outlined his amended plan, which, after they had discussed it +carefully, his companions agreed was as promising as any they could +think of. + +They had hardly finished their discussion when there came a knock at +the cabin door and Manuel entered, smiling. + +"I wished to enquire if the young gentlemen intend to go down in the +suits again to-morrow?" he said, suavely. + +"We haven't decided yet," Charley said, carelessly, "Why do you wish to +know?" + +"Because, if you are, the air hose had better be greased. If it is left +dry for long the rubber sometimes cracks and makes leaks." + +"Then have it well greased," the captain ordered. + +"I guess he's afraid of being shot if anything happens, an' is taking +every precaution," chuckled the captain when the Greek had retired. + +"Perhaps," agreed Charley, doubtfully, "but, I confess, I am afraid of +that fellow. I'll certainly look over that hose carefully before I go +down to-morrow." + +When they ascended to the deck, which they had forgotten to have +watched in the excitement of their discussion, they found Manuel and +two of the divers busily engaged in greasing the rubber air hose with +bacon slush from the cook's galley. + +Charley's was the first watch on deck and, long after his companions +had retired to their bunks, he paced back and forth aft of the main +mast pondering thoughtfully over the plan he had suggested. It was +the best he could conceive under the circumstances but he realized +that its execution would be attended with the gravest dangers. Most +of all, he dreaded the proposed descent to the bottom for the gold. +He was convinced that Manuel had hit upon some scheme to get rid of +him and Walter without danger to himself. Again and again the lad's +thoughts came back to the greasing of the hose. If the operation was +so important, why had the divers not done it before--They were not the +kind of men to take any unnecessary risks in their dangerous work below +the surface. He had often noted the care with which they had examined +hose and pump before each descent. + +But, while the lad puzzled over the matter, he did not neglect to +keep a watchful eye upon the three or four Greeks who lingered on the +forward deck. If he had needed any reminder of the peril of their +situation, it would have been found in the sight of those watchful, +restless figures. + +Near the end of his watch, he gave vent to a low exclamation--He had +discovered the reason for the greasing of the hose. For a few minutes +he was appalled by the cunning fiendishness which had prompted the +act. The two hoses lay coiled close together in great heaps on deck. +Sauntering over to them, the lad stooped over each pile for a second, +then, straightening up, he resumed his slow steady pacing. + +At midnight he awoke Walter to take his place. "I've solved it," he +told him. + +"Solved what?" asked Walter, sleepily. + +"Their reason for greasing the hose." + +"What is it?" + +"To attract sharks and lead them to bite it in two." + +"The fiends!" Walter cried as the devilish ingenuity of the plot dawned +upon him. "What are you going to do about it?" + +"Nothing, until we are ready to descend," his chum replied, "then it +will be too late for them to practice another surprise for us." + +"Are you sure you are right," asked Walter, doubtfully. "They are not +sure that we are going to descend, you know." + +"I think Manuel feels pretty confident that we will. If we fail to do +so, he likely will find some excuse for replacing the greased hose with +new ones. You can bet, he's got it all figured out. He is the brainiest +villain I ever met up with. Better hurry on deck now, and keep a close +watch out. There's no telling what other scheme he's got hatched up." + +Although he retired to his bunk at once, Charley lay long awake. The +morrow would be filled with danger and his nerves were already growing +tense for the struggle which he foresaw. The Captain had relieved +Walter on deck before he at last fell into a troubled slumber from +which he awoke just as day was beginning to break. + +By the time it was light enough to see, he was up and dressed and +making preparations for the carrying out of his hazardous plan. From +the lazerette, he procured a long coil of light rope which he placed +in one corner of his cabin. He next opened up his valise and got out +the ammunition he had purchased in Tarpon and a small, but excellent +pocket compass. These he placed in his bunk where they would be handy +if needed quickly. + +When breakfast was over, the diving boat was brought alongside and all +got on board except the cook and four men left to take care of the +schooner and clean the sponges gathered the previous day. + +"We have decided to go down and have one more look at those sea +gardens," Charley told Manuel when the sponging ground was reached. +"They are beautiful enough to invite another visit." + +The Greeks' face expressed satisfaction. "They are beautiful," he +agreed, "but the young gentlemen are rash to go down. Let the divers +take the risks--they are paid to do it." + +"We will be very careful," Charley said, cheerfully. "Walt, we had +better look over the hose before we go down, the divers always do." + +The greased hose had been recoiled in the tubs and the boys proceeded +to overhaul them, foot by foot, searching them closely for cracks or +punctures. + +Walter was puzzled to comprehend his chum's plan. After what he had +discovered, surely he did not intend to risk using the dangerous +things, but he was well enough acquainted with Charley's shrewdness +to hold his tongue and keep his face from betraying his uneasiness. +He felt sure that there was a good reason for his chum's actions. He +had but just reached this decision when he came upon a gapping hole in +the hose. It looked much as though it had been cut in two with a sharp +knife. + +"Here's a bad place," he announced. "It's lucky I found it. Air can't +be pumped through this thing." + +"And here's a hole in mine, too," Charley declared in accents so +surprised that no one would have dreamed that he had made both slits +the night before to serve as an excuse for the rejection of the +dangerous hose. "We can't use either one of them, we'll have to get out +the new hose." + +Manuel's face for a second was a picture of bewilderment and baffled +rage, but in a moment he was again suave and smiling. "I don't see what +can have made those cuts," he declared. "They can be patched in a few +minutes, however. It would be a pity to throw away such hose, it is as +good as new except for those two little places which can be speedily +fixed." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +TOO LATE. + + +"NO patched hose for me," Charley said, decidedly. "If the divers want +to risk using it, they can." + +It was not just the reply the wily Greek had expected and he hastened +to answer. + +"You are right, it does not pay to take risks. I will get the new hose +and put it on." + +But Charley was ahead of him. He did not intend to give the wily Greek +any chance to play tricks with the new hose. He brought it out from +the lockers in which it was kept and, after examining it carefully +connected it to the air pumps and helmets. Before putting on his +head-piece, he tried the air pump also. It proved to be in perfect +working order and sent the air gushing through the hose. Manuel +fastened the life-line below his arms, but Charley called the captain +to adjust the heavy helmet over his head. + +As soon as his feet touched the bottom, Charley moved forward for +the wreck, Walter at his side. Neither lad wished to remain below a +second longer than was necessary for they fully realized that they were +running a terrible risk in descending at all. They found the box they +had discovered the day before entirely empty, the divers had brought +another out from the wreck's hold and broken it open. The gold was in +twenty dollar pieces and in a few minutes the lads had transferred +several hundred dollars from the box to the baskets. It was hard to +resist taking more but the risks were too great to permit it. Quickly +hastening back to the patch of sponges, they tore up several baskets +full of the mud and covered fungus and, making a slit in each with +their sheaf knives, stuffed in the coins. It was the very plan the +divers had followed but Charley had decided that they would not be +looking for the adopting of their own trick. As soon as the last coin +was hidden and the loaded sponges placed in the basket with others on +top of them to complete the load, Charley signed to Walter to ascend +and stood watching him until he had been drawn to the surface, then he +gave the signal to be drawn up himself. He was raised a few feet up +from the bottom then he sank quickly back to the place from which he +had risen and he saw the end of the life-line dangling in the water +twenty feet above his head. _It had been pulled loose from his body._ + +Charley stood for a moment looking at it in terrified dismay while his +quick brain took in the awful significance of his position. Frightened +as he was, he could not but admire the quickness with which Manuel had +hit upon another scheme for his undoing after that of the greased hose, +had failed, for he had not a doubt that the Greek had fastened the +life-line to him in such a manner that it would pull loose with a hard +jerk. He was in no immediate danger of death for the air hose still +connected him with the surface and the fresh air still came gushing in +a welcome stream into his helmet, but a moment's reflection convinced +him that this was not all of Manuel's scheme, for the Greek would know +that the captain and Walter would soon become uneasy over his delay +and would start an investigation which would quickly reveal that the +life-line was no longer attached to him. Clearly, the Greek had another +card up his sleeve which he would soon play and Charley waited for it +with every nerve strained to keenest tension. He felt longingly of +the air hose, wondering if the frail tube would hold for him to pull +himself up to the surface by it, but he quickly decided that it would +not stand the heavy strain and to break it would mean his instant +death. Keeping one eye on the life-line so tantalizingly out of his +reach he moved slowly forward until he stood beneath the diving boat +which showed like a dim shadow above him. Suddenly a thrill of horror +went through him, the diving boat was slowly drifting away--Manuel had +played his trump card. In a flash the terror-stricken lad comprehended +the situation. Some one of the Greeks, under Manuel's instructions, had +stealthily severed the cable, relying on the boat's slow drift being +unnoticed by the captain and Walter until it had dragged apart the +frail air hose. But, just as Charley had given up all hope and waited +for the parting of the hose which would mean his death, the dangling +life-line was jerked up out of sight,--his companions had discovered a +part at least of his plight--upon their next actions depended his life +or death. + +The next few seconds seemed like hours to the helpless lad, then a dark +speck appeared in the water above him quickly growing in size until he +could see that it was Chris fighting his way downward with long steady +strokes and following the air hose in his descent. The little negro +was nearly exhausted when he reached the bottom. Thrusting the end of +the line he had brought into Charley's hand, he turned upward and shot +to the surface like a rocket. Charley whipped the line about his waist +and gave the signal to pull up. He was swiftly pulled to the surface, +hauled aboard the boat, and his helmet removed. Chris, breathing +heavily, was standing by the mast, the water dripping from him. Walter +and the captain, pale with fear, stood close beside him. + +"Thank God, you're safe, lad," cried the old sailor, tears in his +eyes. "We feared the air hose would part before Chris could get to you. +We had just pulled on the life-line and found it had come loose from +you when we discovered the boat had gone adrift. I reckon, she must +have chafed her cable in two against a sharp piece of coral. Queer how +everything happens all at once that way, sometimes." + +It was clear the simple old sailor did not suspect that the trouble was +anything but an accident, and Charley hastened to reply, + +"All is well that ends well, but I've nearly had the life scart out of +me. I don't think I'll ever want to go down again." + +He was watching Manuel closely as he spoke and he noted with +satisfaction the expression of relief on the Greek's swarthy face. +If he could only keep him from thinking that he knew anything about +the gold and had not discovered his treachery, he hoped to be able to +avoid open violence until they were prepared and ready for it. He was +convinced that the Greek was too cowardly to risk the danger of being +shot in open mutiny so long as he thought himself unsuspected and free +to scheme their removal without danger to himself. + +The diving boat was worked back to her old position, another anchor +dropped, and donning their suits the divers resumed operations below. +When they came to the surface at the end of their two hour trick below +they seemed strangely excited and conversed eagerly with Manuel and the +rest of the crew. Charley was for awhile puzzled to account for their +excitement, but 'ere long the solution came to him. Like all plans +intended to deceive, his had contained a fatal defect. + +"Walt," he whispered to his chum, "those chaps have noticed that some +of the gold has been removed from that box. We are in for trouble, now, +I fear." The Captain and Chris were warned to be on their guard but +it seemed that the warning was unnecessary, the excited talk amongst +the crew soon ceased and the fresh divers quietly prepared for their +descent. + +But in spite of the quietness, there was a tension and earnestness +in the crew's manner which made the anxious little party of chums +feel that they were standing at the edge of a powder mine which might +explode at any minute. + +"I would rather have open fighting than this awful waiting," Walter +whispered. + +"We will have that soon enough," said his chum, grimly. "It will come +as soon as we try to make them get the schooner under way." + +The long anxious day at last drew to its close, anchor was got up on +the diving boat, and she was headed back for the schooner. + +As they passed a large piece of driftwood covered with large black +birds with very long necks, Manuel pointed at them, "Those are fine +eating," he said wistfully. "If the young gentlemen could kill a few it +would give us all a great feast." + +Walter looked at Charley who nodded assent, for he was not loath that +the Greek should witness their skill with the revolver. + +Both boys had practiced often with their revolvers and were better than +average marksmen. Their pistols were automatics, a style of weapon with +which even the unskillful can shoot fairly accurately. Walter fired six +shots in as many seconds, killing four birds and wounding one. Charley +fired four shots at the same time, killing two birds and crippling a +third. The rest of the birds took flight before the boys could shoot +more. The captain and Chris emptied their pistols at the flying flock +without success. + +The diving boat was run alongside the dead birds and they were picked +up by the crew. Manuel seemed delighted, "The young gentlemen are +wonderful shots," he declared. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +OUTWITTED. + + +THE chums hastened below when the schooner was reached for they were +eager to talk over the next move to be made. + +"Things have got to be brought to a head right off," declared the +captain when Charley had acquainted him with his suspicions of Manuel's +foul play. "It's rank foolishness to linger along an' give them more +chances to work out their devilish tricks. It's better to have trouble +with them right now while we are prepared than to wait and perhaps have +them take us unawares." + +"Thank goodness the time for action is close at hand," Charley agreed, +"I could not stand this anxiety and suspense much longer. Let's go over +our plan once more and make sure that we each know our parts so that +there will be no hitch when we come to carry them out. Now as soon as +we have supper Chris and I will get into the dingy and pretend that we +are going to row around for fun. We will pull back and forth until it +gets good and dark, then we'll gradually work out to that buoy. We +will cut it adrift, take it aboard, pull due East from the schooner for +a mile and anchor it again. That will throw them way off the scent if +they should manage to get back here again before us, while it will tell +us just where to look for the wreck. That part is easy, the trouble +will come when we get back to the boat. First thing we had better do is +to stretch several ropes across the deck from rail to rail just forward +of the mainmast. That will delay and bother them if they should try to +rush us in a body. The next move will be to get Manuel aft and get the +irons on him. We had better get him down here in the cabin to attempt +that. As soon as we get him helpless, we will carry him up and make him +give our orders to get up anchor and get sail on the schooner. He's too +great a coward to encourage his shipmates to make a rush for us so long +as he is in our power. They may try it in spite of him, however, when +they realize that the gold is going to be lost to them. If they do we +will have to fight them off while Chris tends to the wheel. We don't +want any bloodshed if we can help it but we mustn't let them get aft of +the mainmast, they would make short work of us if it ever came to close +quarters. Do you all understand now what we have to do?" + +His companions nodded. + +"Then we had better reload our pistols, fill up our cartridge belts, +and get ready," he continued. "I'll get the ammunition." + +But in a moment he was back from his cabin, his face pale and grave. + +"How many shells have you got left in your pistol?" he demanded. + +"One," Walter replied, while Chris and the captain broke open their +weapons to show only empty chambers. + +"I have got three shots left, that makes four altogether," Charley +said, hopelessly. "All the rest of our ammunition has been stolen out +of my bunk." + +His companions grew as grave and pale as himself at the announcement. +With only four shots left they were practically helpless in the hands +of the Greeks. + +"There is just one chance left," Charley declared, desperately. "We +have got to get Manuel in our power and try to control the crew through +him. It may work and it may not, but it's our only hope. Chris, go tell +him we want to see him here in the cabin." + +As soon as the little negro had gone, Charley brought out a pair of +handcuffs from his grip and placed them in his pocket. "When I give +the signal, get them on him," he said. "I'll lock the door so that he +cannot get out or the crew come to help him. He'll likely put up a +fight and we'll have to watch out for his knife, but the three of us +had ought to be able to handle him. But hush, here they come now." + +Footsteps sounded on the companionway stairs, the cabin door opened, +and Chris appeared, closely followed by the Greek. The little negro +stepped inside but Manuel paused on the threshold and swept a keen +glance over the assembled party. Perhaps some instinct warned him of +his danger, perhaps he decided that the time had come for his last +treacherous move. With a quick leap, he sprang back through the open +doorway, slammed the door to, and bolted it outside, and the little +band of chums were prisoners in the cabin of their own ship. + +Charley leaped from his chair, but he was too late. + +"Outwitted," he cried as he sank back into his seat. "Beaten at every +point of the game. What fools, what bunglers we are." There was as much +chagrin as fear in his exclamations. To be so badly beaten after all +his vigilance and careful planning was hard to bear. + +His companions sat silent with despair. So suddenly had it all happened +they had not yet had time to realize that they were completely in the +hands of the Greeks who could do with them as they pleased. + +Charley flipped open his pistol and handed one of his remaining +cartridges to his chum, "That gives us two apiece," he observed, +"although I doubt if we will either of us need them." He retired to +his cabin and reappeared with a blanket and a book. He spread out the +blanket on the floor and stretching himself out on it prepared to read. +"Might as well get what enjoyment we can," he said. "There's nothing we +can do, so we might as well take it easy while we may." + +"How can you be so careless?" his chum exclaimed, "any minute they may +come down upon us." + +"Little danger of that," the other replied, coolly. "They know we've +got four shots left yet. What would be the use of their taking chances +when they have got everything in their own hands." + +But his companions could not view their position with the same hopeless +resignation. While he read on apparently unconcerned, they discussed +plan after plan for escape from their prison and perilous situation, +only to reject one after the other as wildly impracticable. At last +they abandoned the discussion in despair. + +"Better turn in and try to get a good night's rest," Charley advised +them calmly. "I will keep watch for the first four hours, although I +don't believe there's the slightest use of it." + +"I'm too hungry to sleep," Walter declared. "I wonder why they do not +send us down our supper." + +"Bless your simple little soul," his chum exclaimed, "They do not +intend us to have anything to eat. I thought you understood that." + +His companions looked at each other in dismay. This, the greatest of +all their perils, had not before occurred to them. They understood now +the awfulness of their position. All the food and water were stored +forward. The Greeks had only to let them alone and they would slowly +die of hunger and thirst. + +"They will not get us that way," declared Walter, desperately. "Before +I'll die of hunger and thirst I'll set the schooner on fire." + +Charley nodded approval. "I've been thinking of that myself," he said. +"A quick death is better than a slow torturing one. But there is plenty +of time to talk of that. While there is life there is hope and I have +a feeling that something is going to turn up to help us out of this +scrape. I've just happened to think of one thing that's in our favor." + +He was prevented from explaining the new hope which had occurred to him +by a knock on the cabin door and Manuel's sneering voice enquiring, + +"Are the gentlemen quite comfortable?" + +"Quite," Charley assured him, calmly. "Much more comfortable than you +and your mates will be when the law reckons with you." + +"There is no law at sea but the law of the strongest and most cunning," +the Greek said, smoothly. "But I bear a proposal from my shipmates for +your distinguished consideration." + +"State it," replied the lad, briefly. + +"You are all in a bad position," stated the Greek with oily +maliciousness. "You were cunning but not cunning enough or our +positions would now be reversed. We have only to do nothing now and you +will all die. It would sadden our hearts to lose such loving friends +but we would strive to bear up bravely under the blow. But why should +you all die when we are willing to spare one. All that one would have +to do would be to take an oath to be faithful and true to us and do as +we bid him. Not only would his life be spared, but he would receive a +share of the great wealth we have discovered." + +"Why are you so very generous in your offers?" Walter demanded, +sarcastically. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +IMPRISONED. + + +"WE need one of you," explained Manuel, with startling frankness. +"Perhaps we could get along without but it does not pay to take +chances. There is a government cutter which patrols the banks to see +that the sponging vessels are complying with the laws. She may come +upon us accidentally any time and it would be awkward explaining why we +continued to work without American officers. It would very likely get +us into trouble. But if one of you takes the part of the captain and +shows the papers and explains that the rest have died from fever, all +will go smoothly." + +"I suppose you have decided which one of us you want?" Charley asked, +curiously. + +"Any one of you will do, but we prefer you. You have brains enough to +realize where your own interests lie. It is easier to handle a smart +man than a fool. Consider the chance we are giving you, on the one hand +slow, painful, certain death; on the other, an honored position, great +wealth and safety--we are generous indeed." + +"But how do you know that I will play fair?" + +"The moment you joined us you would be as liable to the law as the rest +of us," Manuel said calmly, "We would live or hang together. You would +not dare to trifle with us, and I should watch you closely all the +time." + +"Here is my answer," declared Charley, whose indignation had been +steadily rising at the cold-blooded proposal. "If you would all keep +your part of the agreement,--which I am convinced you would not do, I'd +die rather than join such a pack of dirty murderers." + +"You are a bigger fool than I thought," replied the Greek calmly. +"I will leave you to consider the matter better. Hunger is a great +persuader, and I am in hopes that you will soon see where your best +interests lie. Good-night, gentlemen, good-night, may your dreams be of +the pleasantest." + +"He's evidently somewhat worried," said Charley, hopefully, when the +Greek's mocking voice had ceased. "He believes, I guess, that there is +a good chance of the cutter coming upon him or he would not make such +a proposal, although he would not keep his part of it any longer than +the danger lasted. Our only hope is to keep up our strength and spirits +as long as possible. There is a chance that the cutter may come along +before it is too late. Better all turn in and get some rest while you +are still not too hungry to sleep. I will call one of you to take my +place as soon as my four hours are up, although I do not believe that +they will trouble us." + +The lad was right in his belief. The night passed away without any +alarm and they were able by turns to get some little sleep. With the +coming of daylight, they crowded to the windows and searched the dreary +waste of waters for sign of smoke or sail, but found none. The crew +were going about their work in cheerful unconcern. Leaving a half dozen +men on the schooner, the balance got aboard the diving boat and sailed +out to the sponge ground where they could be seen working steadily all +day bringing up the gold from the bottom. The prisoners suffered much +during the long day from their increasing hunger and thirst. + +At night the diving boat returned to the schooner and the dispirited +watchers could see that the crew had not wasted their day by any means. +Both sponge baskets were nearly full of the gold coins. + +"We've got to do something, I don't care how desperate it is," declared +Captain Westfield. "Anything is better than this keeping still and +suffering. By to-morrow this time we'll be too weak to do much and thar +ain't no certainty that the cutter will come along this way at all. I'm +in for doing something, no matter what." + +Charley turned from his gazing out of the window, "Look here, +Captain," he called, softly. "Speak low," he cautioned as the old +sailor crept to his side, "we don't want them to hear us on deck." + +"Geewhilikens!" whispered the old seaman in swift comprehension, +"they've left the diving boat fastened right under our windows." + +"God grant that they may not think to move it," the lad replied, +trembling with excitement. "We can do nothing until it gets dark and +they retire to the forecastle." + +Walter and Chris were quickly made acquainted with the suddenly-offered +chance of escape and their joy knew no bounds. + +Then followed hours which seemed like days to the breathless, anxious +watchers. The Greeks ate their supper and lounged around the deck +talking and laughing. It seemed as though they would never retire to +their bunks. But at last their voices gradually ceased and silence +settled down upon the schooner. Charley cautiously opened one of the +big windows and swung it outward, then climbing softly toward the +opening, lowered himself to the diving boat's deck. The Captain, +Walter, and Chris followed. Not a word was spoken for each realized +the terrible risk they were running. As soon as all were crouched +motionless aboard, Charley, with his knife, severed the rope which +bound them to the schooner and the boat drifted slowly away from the +ship's side. + +No one moved until the schooner was at last lost in the darkness. + +"Start up the engine," said Charley, as he took the helm, and Walter +slipped down amongst the machinery. After a few minutes' fumbling in +the darkness, he crept back. + +"There's no gasoline in the tank," he announced. + +"Everything seems against us," Charley sighed. "Well, get sail on her. +We will have to do the best we can." + +In a few minutes the great square sail was spread, and, leaning over, +the little craft sent a line of foam rippling from her bow. + +"They'll have hard work finding us in this darkness," exulted the +captain as he took the helm from Charley. "I reckon, we'd better shape +a course for the nearest port,--that's Judson. As soon as we get thar, +we can telegraph to all the ports along the coast to watch out for +the schooner. We've got 'em now, I reckon, lads, they'll have to put +in somewhere sooner or later, an' they'll be nabbed. I feel just like +yelling for joy." + +The rising spirits of the little party were helped by Chris' discovery +of a couple of loaves of stale black bread, and part of a bottle of +ripe olives in one of the lockers. They made a meagre but very welcome +repast upon the uninviting food. + +But their joy over their lucky escape was soon dampened by the +threatening appearance of the Western sky. A heavy bank of clouds was +slowly rising there from which came flashes of lightning and the rumble +of distant thunder. + +"I reckon, it ain't nothin' but a thunder squall," the captain assured +them. "Thar ain't no call to be uneasy, this is a mighty seaworthy +little craft. I reckon, we could ride out a right smart gale in her if +we had it to do." + +Before they ran much further the captain gave the order to lower and +reef the great sail. When hoisted again, it was only a tiny patch of +canvas, as compared with its former size. + +"Thar's only one thing for us to do when that squall strikes us an' +that's to scud before it," the old captain declared. "We can't heave +her to under that sail. Luckily, the way it's coming won't blow us out +of our course much." + +They had not long to wait for the storm to burst. The wind soon +descended with a violence that threatened to bury the diving boat in +the seas it brought with it. But the little craft had been built to +stand just such weather, and, quickly gathering headway, she darted +away before the gale. With the wind came the rain in great driving, +blinding sheets. The boys hailed its appearance with joy. They spread +out their jackets, bits of sail, and even their hats to catch the +precious drops. In a short while they had secured enough to quench +their intense thirst. This done, they gathered around the captain at +the helm ready to render any assistance in their power. There was +little they could do for the old sailor would trust no one but himself +to steer in the heavy sea-way. As the hours passed by without showing +any abatement of the storm, it became evident to his companions that he +was growing anxious. + +"I don't like the way it's hanging on," he declared. "We must be making +at least twelve miles an hour and, at that rate, we will have the land +close aboard before daylight. Crawl forward, Charley, an' keep a sharp +look-out, the sky is clearing some an', I reckon, you can see a few +hundred feet ahead." + +The lad obediently worked his way up into the bow, and bracing himself +against the anchor bitts, peered ahead into the darkness. He could make +out nothing at first but the heavy foam-flecked, tossing water. He sat +watching intently till, at last, Walter crawled forward to take his +place. He had only got part way back to the stern when there came a cry +from his chum, + +"Hard down! hard down!" + +With true seaman's quickness, the Captain jammed the long tiller over +and the little craft, escaping broaching in the trough of the seas by a +miracle, shot up into the wind--a second too late. + +"Hang on for your lives!" the old sailor cried. + +Black masses loomed out of the darkness to leeward. A great wave picked +up the helpless boat and flung it with crashing, breaking timbers, upon +the rocks. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +WRECKED. + + +THE boys had obeyed the old sailor's order, and, though greatly shaken +by the shock, they retained their hold on the boat. + +"Quick, get on the rocks," shouted the Captain. "She'll pound to pieces +in a jiffy." + +Fortunately, the boat's bow had been driven up on the ledge nearly +out of the water. The boys dropped over the side followed by the +old sailor, and, though beaten and bruised against the sharp rocks +succeeded in struggling out upon the one which reared itself above +the water. They glanced back to where the boat had struck, but, short +as had been their struggle out, it had witnessed the destruction +of the staunch craft. Only that portion of her bow lodged upon the +reef remained intact, the balance of her hull was a mass of twisted, +splintered, broken planks. + +Great as was the danger from which they had escaped, their present +position was still far from safe. The slippery rock afforded but +insecure footing and it was frequently swept by the larger seas. At +such times, they had all they could do to keep from being swept off its +slimy surface. + +"I reckon, we've struck on a reef," the Captain said, anxiously. "It +all depends upon the tide whether we are safe or not. If it's low tide, +now, high tide will cover this rock so deep that we'll not be able to +hang on to it." + +It soon became evident that the tide was still rising, though slowly. +The waves began sweeping over the flat rock with such violence that +the tired, wretched, anxious, little party could hardly maintain their +footing. To the right and left of them, rose other higher masses of +rock, but they did not dare to attempt to reach them through the +darkness and the boiling surf. Wet, cold, hungry, and wretched; they +clung to their insecure refuge until day began to break in the East. +With the coming of light they strained their brine-smarting eyes to +discover what manner of place it was upon which they had been thrown. +The outlook was not reassuring. They were, as the Captain had surmised, +on a point of low-lying reef, most of which was constantly wave-swept +by the monstrous surges. To the East of them, lay a low, marshy shore +dotted here and there with small islands covered with cedar hammocks, +but between them and the islands was at least two miles of foaming +water. The boys gazed wistfully at the longed-for land. + +"We can't make it," Charley said, sadly. "Chris might, perhaps, be +able to swim it, but it would be a long swim for the rest of us at any +time, and, tired and weak as we are now, it would be impossible. We +will have to stick it out here until the storm goes down a bit, then, +try to fashion some kind of a raft out of the planks of the diving +boat." + +"We can't be far from Judson," said the Captain, with an attempt at +cheerfulness. "A boat may come by an' pick us up any minute." + +But the boys were not cheered by any such prospect. They knew that the +chance of any boat being out in such weather was very small indeed. +One fact, however, gave them a little hope; the tide was undoubtedly +falling. It had evidently been almost at its height when they had +landed on the rock. + +"I wish we had something to eat," Walter sighed, "we have had nothing +but a little bread in two days. I begin to feel weak all over." + +Chris gazed thoughtfully at the water on the shore-side of the rock. "I +reckon, I might find somethin' down dar," he observed. "I'se goin' to +try it anyway. You white chilluns has sho' got to hab somethin' to eat." + +Although the water was somewhat smoother to the lee of the rocks, +it boiled and foamed there threateningly and the boys endeavored to +dissuade the plucky little negro from the attempt, but their objections +only made him the more determined. + +"Golly! you chilluns doan know what a diver dis nigger is," he said, +proudly. "You jes' stay still an' watch him now." He removed his +clothes, handing them to Charley to hold, slipped over the side of the +rock, and sank down beneath the surface. He was gone so long that the +watchers had begun to grow anxious when he reappeared, blowing like a +porpoise. In one hand, he held tightly clenched, a big stone crab and a +large conch. + +"Take 'em," he exclaimed, "I'se goin' down again. Dar's heaps more of +dem on de bottom." + +He continued diving until he had brought up six more conchs and two +more crabs, then he crawled out on the rock completely exhausted, and +held up one foot for their inspection. There was a tiny puncture in the +sole of it from which the blood was slowly trickling. + +"I reckon, I'se goin' to hab some trubble wid dat foot," he observed, +gravely. "Ole Mister Stingaree gib me a dig dar. He warn't much bigger +dan a plate, but der horns are powerful poison." + +His announcement sent a chill of fear to the hearts of his companions, +for they all well-knew the dangerous character of the flat, horn-tailed +fish which lurks on the bottom in Florida waters. The Captain did not +lose a second in whipping out his sheath knife and cutting open the +puncture which he washed out thoroughly with sea water. He then made +Chris sit on the edge of the rock and hang his foot over in the water. + +The plucky little negro bore the operation with unflinching +cheerfulness. "I sho' wish you'd open up one ob dem conch for me, Massa +Charley," he observed. "If dis ting's goin' to make me sick, I wants to +be dat much ahead." + +Charley quickly broke open one of the conchs and gave him the meat,--a +big lump of tough flesh, almost sufficient for an entire meal. He also +opened several others for the Captain, Walter, and himself, upon which +they made a hearty and strengthening, if somewhat tasteless, meal. +Chris ate but little of the tough meat, he soon pushed it away from him +with a weary little sigh. + +"I doan want no moah," he said, quietly. "I'ze gettin' berry sick. +Reckon ole Mister Stingaree dun got dis nigger for sho'." + +His little ebony face soon took on a dull-ashen hue and he began to +vomit violently; passing from these spells into a heavy stupor, the +mysterious subtle poison from the stingaree was getting in its work. +His grieving companions watched him in helpless suspense, there was +nothing they could do to relieve his sufferings. + +"We can't let him die like this," Charley cried, as the little sufferer +twitched in spasms of pain. "I am going to try to reach shore and find +help. He has taken bigger risks for us many a time." + +Neither Walter or the Captain tried to stop him. They would have gladly +offered to make the attempt in his place but he was the strongest and +best swimmer of the three. + +He removed his jacket and shoes and with a last good-bye, plunged off +of the rock and headed for the distant shore. He had not gone more than +twenty yards when he stopped with a cry of joy. + +"Come on," he called back, "the water isn't more than three feet deep +here. There's only a deep place near the rocks and you can get across +that easily." + +But he had to return to help them get Chris across the deep narrow +channel, for the little negro's struggles in his spasms threatened +to drown his helpers. At last, the dangerous stretch of water was +safely crossed, and, leaving Walter and the Captain to half float and +half carry Chris between them, the lad waded ahead, picking out the +shoalest and smoothest path to the shore. They arrived there spent and +panting and sank down for a moment to recover their breath. It was not +an inviting-looking place where they had landed. A low rock-strewn +marsh, covered with tall, rank grass stretched away before them for +two or three miles before it met the higher, heavily-wooded mainland. +Here and there the marsh was dotted with small, island-like clumps of +dark green cedar trees, and, picking up the light, little negro in his +strong, young arms, Charley headed for the nearest of these, followed +by his exhausted companions. The passage was made with difficulty; low +needle-pointed rocks strewed the way, and here and there lay pools +of soft, boggy mud, tenanted by repulsive, swollen looking moccasins. +It needed care to avoid the one without stepping on the other, but, +at last, the patch of high ground was reached and, laying his burden +beneath a wide-spreading cedar, Charley turned to his companions. + +"We have got to work quick if we are to stand a chance even of saving +him," he said, crisply. "Walter, get in to the mainland as quick as +you can and bring me all the palmetto berries you can find,--hurry. +Captain, let me take your flint and steel and then get me a lot of soft +mud from the marsh." + +Tired though they were, the two hastened away to execute his orders, +while Charley worked swiftly to carry out the plan he had formed while +coming ashore. It was a heroic one, but rough measures were the only +ones it was in his power to apply. Hastily gathering together a pile +of dead cedar limbs, he lit a fire with the flint and steel. While it +was blazing up, he stripped off his belt and, tying it above Chris' +knee, with a stick twisted it tight until it was embedded in the flesh, +shutting off the flow of blood from below to the heart. He next heated +a small stone in the now blazing fire and applied it while hot to the +swollen wound. The smell of the crisping flesh sickened him, but he +doggedly stuck to his task until he judged the wound was sufficiently +cauterized. Chris lay mercifully lost to the pain in a deep stupor. The +lad had just finished burning the wound when the Captain returned with +his jacket full of soft mud, and, emptying it out, hastened back for +another load. Charley heaped a lot of rocks upon the fire, and, as soon +as they were hot, ranged them close on each side of the wounded limb, +heaping the soft mud on top of them until he had formed an air-tight +mound over the leg. He now had a great poultice of hot mud of great +drawing power, the danger was that Chris might be attacked by other +spasms and succeed in working his leg out from the hot covering. To +prevent this, the lad tore his shirt up into strips and, binding the +little negro tightly, piled stones around the encased leg so that it +could not be easily moved. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +HUNTING HELP. + + +CHARLEY next cut off small branches of cedar and placed them under +the unconscious little fellow's head and back so that he might rest +as comfortably as possible. This done, he sat back breathless and +exhausted and waited impatiently for Walter's return. + +Captain Westfield surveyed the young physician's work with hopeful +admiration. "If Chris lives, it will be you as has saved his life," he +declared. + +"He has saved mine more than once," Charley replied, "but I am afraid +he is not going to live. I don't like this deep stupor he has fallen +into. I wish Walter would hurry." + +Walter had been hurrying as fast as he could, and he soon appeared +bearing a hatful of ripe palmetto berries. His riddled shoes and +bleeding feet told of reckless running over the sharp rocks. + +Charley smashed the ripe berries between two stones, catching the juice +in his cap. Chris' teeth were tightly set, but he managed to pry them +apart with his knife blade and forced some of the sticky liquid down +his throat. + +"I don't know whether it will help him or not, but I am in hopes it +will," he said, as, tired out, he sat down by the little fellow's side. +"Those berries make a powerful tonic and stimulant, and I believe that +is what is needed. The poison seems to have deadened the heart's action +and brought on that stupor. A few minutes will tell whether it is going +to do any good." + +It soon became evident that the rude remedies were performing their +mission well, the sufferer's pulse, which had grown slow and feeble, +quickened, and his little face began to lose some of its ashen hue. + +As soon as he became sure that a change for the better was taking +place, Charley arose from his brief rest. + +"I am going to find help," he declared. "We must get him to some place +where he can have proper attention. How far do you think we are from +Judson, Captain?" + +"Not more than twenty miles to the north of it, I judge. Maybe not more +than ten miles. But you must not dream of starting yet awhile, lad. You +must rest for a bit, an' have something to eat first." + +"And I am going with you when you start," Walter declared. "Something +might happen to you amongst those slippery rocks and awful bog holes. +The Captain can do all that can be done for Chris while you are gone." + +There was no disputing the wisdom of both suggestions and they busied +themselves with the first proposition, the finding of something to eat. +This demanded more time and trouble. Another trip had to be made down +to the water and considerable searching was necessary before they could +collect enough of crabs and shell fish to make the full meal that their +hunger craved. Their rest they gained while their dinner was roasting +in the coals. + +Their rest, meal, and Chris' steadily improving condition, put them all +in better strength and spirits, and the boys were cheerful when they +bid the old sailor good-bye and made their start in search of help. + +"We'll be back as soon as we can get back, Captain," Charley said, "but +you don't want to worry if we take longer than you expect." + +"I reckon, I'll keep too busy to have much time for worryin'," the old +sailor replied. "Jes' be careful, lads, an' get back as soon as you +can." + +He watched until the rank marsh grass hid the two lads from sight, +then busied himself with making the camp a little more comfortable for +himself and his sick companion. Chris' welfare was the first thing to +claim his attention. With his sheath knife he cut armful after armful +of marsh grass and added it to the rough couch Charley had fashioned +for the little negro, converting it into a soft, comfortable bed. +The low-hanging cedar boughs formed a kind of rude shelter over the +little lad, but the captain was not entirely satisfied with it. The +rainy season was near at hand and heavy showers might be expected at +any time. A thick layer of marsh grass placed over the lowest cedar +limbs quickly made the covering more to his satisfaction. This done, +he paused for a brief rest and to decide what should be his next task. +Although, he knew that the port of Judson could not be more than twenty +miles away, he realized that, owing to the necessarily slow traveling +amongst the sharp rocks and bog holes, it might be at least three days +before the boys could succeed in getting back with help. His duties, +then, would be the care of Chris, the providing of food for them both, +and the gathering of firewood. Water was luckily plentiful, there was +an abundance of it in a cup-like depression near the center of the +island. + +In a Northern country with no weapons but his sheath knife, these tasks +would have seemed almost impossible of accomplishment, but the captain +was not discouraged. The first thing, of course, was to see that the +little negro's marked improvement was not checked. Heating more stones +in the fire, the old sailor piled them around the mound of mud covering +the wounded leg. Then, as the berries Walter had brought were nearly +exhausted, he decided that the next thing of importance was to lay in +a fresh supply. He found the trip to the mainland slow and dangerous. +Where the way was not strewn with sharp-pointed rocks, it was dotted +with forbidding-looking sink holes of soft, slimy mud. Rank-growing +marsh grass covered the whole, making it extremely difficult to pick +out a safe passage through the dangers. At last, however, he gained +the mainland where he found the oily black berries growing in greatest +profusion. He gathered his jacket full of them and then sat down on a +fallen log to rest a minute and look around. It was an inviting spot in +which he found himself. The land rose up from the marsh to form a high, +sloping bluff through which trickled a stream of clear, reddish water. + +The bluff was covered with a dense growth of palms, satinwoods, bays, +rubber trees, and low-ground palmettos. It was an ideal place for a +camp, and the captain eyed it regretfully, wishing that it was possible +to bring Chris there from the little marsh-surrounded island. But +that was impossible until the little fellow was able to walk and he +dismissed the idea with a sigh. He was just gathering up his jacket of +berries to leave when a noise in the undergrowth close at hand made +him sink back to his seat on the log. The brushes before him parted +suddenly and a large deer stepped out into an open place not twenty +feet from where he sat. For a full two minutes, he and the timid animal +remained motionless, looking directly into each other's eyes, then the +old sailor pulled out his sheath knife and sprang for it with some +wild notion of securing it for food, but the deer leaped lightly away +a few steps and stopped again as if in deepest wonder and curiosity. +The captain sheathed his knife with a sigh. "I reckon, you don't know +how wicked men are," he addressed the graceful animal. "Guess you ain't +ever seed many men or you wouldn't be so powerful tame. Some steaks +from you would taste right good, but you ain't aiming to let me get +close enough for that. Well, good-bye, old fellow, I hope I'll meet you +again sometime when I've got a good gun." + +Saying which, the old sailor picked up his burden and headed back for +the island, the deer gazing after him in innocent-eyed wonder. + +He had nearly reached the little camp when a scream from Chris sent him +forward at a run, regardless of rocks and sink holes. + +The scene that met his gaze as he burst into the little clearing +chilled him with horror and dismay. + +Attracted, no doubt, by its warmth, two huge, swollen-looking moccasins +had crawled up on the little heap of mud and now lay with their flat, +ugly heads within a few inches of the little negro's trembling body. + +"Don't move an inch, Chris," he shouted, as he broke off a dead limb +from a cedar tree. + +The caution was useless, for, bound as he was, hand and foot, Chris +could only lay and stare in horror and helplessness. + +A couple of well-aimed blows from the stick killed the two poisonous, +sluggish serpents, and, dragging them to the edge of the island, the +captain pitched them out into the marsh. + +"They ain't very pleasant visitors," he remarked as he returned to his +helpless companion, "but I reckon, they've done you a heap of good. You +was laying like a dead man when I went ashore and now you look right +pert and lively." + +"Dey's too sudden an' powerful medicine," grumbled Chris. "Dis nigger +might jes' as well die as be scart to death. Golly! how my leg does +burn and smart. Please take dat stuff off ob hit, Massa Captain, an' +unloose my han's." + +But the old sailor feared to remove the mud poultice, dreading another +relapse. However, he untied the little negro's hands, upon his promise +that he would lie still and not move. He was delighted with the change +in the little lad. Whether the shock from the snakes, or, what was much +more probable, the continued effects of the palmetto juice had done the +work, the stupor which had frightened them all was entirely gone, and +the patient soon declared himself decidedly hungry. + +Cutting a stick and laying it within Chris' reach so that he would +have the means of protecting himself from other possible visitors, the +Captain departed in search of food. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +THE CASTAWAYS. + + +IT was lucky for the captain that he was wise to the resources of the +Florida coast. A stranger to the country would not have known where to +look for food and would likely have soon perished of hunger. Although +he had no other weapon than his sheath knife, he went about his task +with the air of a man who was confident of success. Before leaving the +island, he cut a long, straight cypress pole and sharpened one end to +a keen point. With this in his hand, he made his way down to the Gulf. +The tide was high again but there was a mass of rock some two hundred +feet from shore which protruded a couple of feet above the water. +Removing his shoes, he waded cautiously out, prodding the bottom before +him with his pole and picking his way carefully to avoid stepping on a +stingaree. + +The rock reached, he perched himself on its edge and sat peeping down +into the water which was clear as crystal. He had not long to wait. In +a few minutes a fish swam slowly past close to the rock, and, taking +careful aim, the old sailor dove his rude spear down with all his +force. Its point struck just behind the fish's head, passing entirely +through its body. It died without a struggle, and the captain lifted it +out upon the rock with a shout of triumph. It was a beautifully-specked +sea trout about three feet in length and weighed at least twelve +pounds. Although there was plenty of other fish within sight, the +trout was enough for their present needs and, scaling and washing it +carefully, the captain waded ashore with his prize. But he was not yet +quite satisfied. Laying his fish down upon a bunch of clean sea moss, +he examined carefully the muddy beach near the water's edge. Here and +there, tiny jets of water squirted up from the mud, and, where they +seemed to be most numerous, he began to dig. In a few minutes he had +unearthed a couple of dozen large clams. With these and the fish, and a +huge armful of moist sea moss in his arms, he made his way back to camp +where Chris was eagerly awaiting his return. + +"I sho' wish I could get up from hyah," mourned the little negro. +"Golly! I reckon, I'd show you how to cook dat fish so dat you nebber +could eat nuff ob hit." + +"You jes' lie still thar," commanded the captain. "I'm a Cape Cod man, +an' thar ain't any cook living that can show a Cape Cod man how to cook +this kind of grub. You just watch and learn somethin'." + +Chris watched him with professional jealousy and interest. He +firmly believed that no one on earth could cook as good as he but +he reluctantly admitted to himself that the old sailor made his +preparations with considerable promise of success. + +First, he scooped out a hole in the ground about three feet deep and +two feet square and kindled a small fire in the bottom upon which he +placed a layer of small rocks, as soon as it was going good, then, he +paused to remark regretfully, + +"I wish we had some potatoes. I never heard of a clam bake yet without +potatoes." + +"Dar's something jes' as good as 'taters," declared Chris, pointing to +a low-growing plant. "Jes' you dig up some ob dem roots an' try 'em. +Hit's wild cassava, an' hit taste jes' like Irish 'taters." + +The captain dug down with his sheath knife and unearthed several tubers +a couple of feet in length and about three inches in circumference. He +regarded them dubiously, but, on Chris' repeated assurances that they +were good and wholesome, he cut off several pieces and washed them +carefully. By the time this was done, the fire in the pit had burned +low, and the stones were smoking hot. Cutting several broad, green, +palmetto leaves, he laid them on the stones and spread over them a thin +layer of the moist sea moss. Upon the moss he laid the fish and over it +spread another layer of moss upon which he placed the clams, covering +them with more moss, upon which he placed the cassava, and, piling a +thick layer of sea grass over the whole, built a small fire on top of +it. Then he sat down and watched the fire while he and Chris waited +hungrily the slow cooking of their meal. At last, the captain declared +that it must be done. The fire on top was raked away, the contents of +the pit were taken out and placed upon green, clean palmetto leaves, +and the two castaways fell-to with appetites sharpened by their long +wait. And what a feast it was,--the clams cooked to perfection in their +own juice, the fish juicy and delicious, the cassava snow-white and +mealy and all rendered doubly delicious by the salt spicy taste of the +seaweed in which they had been cooked. And what a joy it was to feel +that the worst of their troubles were over. Chris getting better, the +boys soon to be back with help, all the worry and anxiety they had +suffered past, the next few days to see them all safely back in Tarpon, +where they would all wait in comfort and safety, ready to claim their +ship when the Greeks brought her in, and, after that, they would return +for the gold and with it they would secure the many things they had +longed for all their lives. + +Surely the prospect was bright enough to make the two lonely castaways +chatter brightly, cheerfully, and hopefully over their evening meal. +They could not see the dangers, worries, and misfortunes yet to befall +them, and it was well they could not for it would have robbed the two +of the happiest hour they had had in many days. + +At last, the feast was over and Chris had paid the cook the highest +compliment of which he could conceive. + +"Golly! Massa Capt., you cooked dem tings might nigh as good as I could +have done." + +Although there were many things which the captain wished to do, +darkness was fast coming on and he had to complete his final +preparations for the night. First, he cut a lot of small boughs which +he piled up under the shelter close to Chris to serve as his own bed. +This done, he gathered piles of wood which he spread in a circle around +the big cedar and set on fire to protect them both from chance visits +of snakes during the night. By the time this was finished, it was dark +and he crept in under the shelter close to his dusky little companion +in misfortune, and, after a short, simple prayer full of thankfulness +for their deliverance from the dangers that had threatened them, he +quickly fell into the deep sleep of total exhaustion. But sleep did not +come so readily to Chris. He had slept, or been unconscious, much of +the time since his accident and the stimulating effect of the palmetto +medicine helped to drive slumber away from him. He lay very quiet to +avoid disturbing the old sailor's rest, but, try as he would, he could +not get to sleep. At last he gave up the attempt and lay with eyes +wide open looking out at the stars and the twinkling camp-fires. From +the marsh about came strange noises of the night, the croaking of +multitudes of frogs, the cackle of marsh hens, the squawking of cranes, +and the rustling of the marsh grass in the wind. Slowly the circle of +fire died down, smouldered and went out. Only the big main camp-fire +was left a glowing mass of embers. + +Suddenly the wakeful little negro's ears caught another sound mingled +with the voices of the night,--a slow, heavy, creeping noise. For a +time he lay quiet listening, his hearing strained to the utmost to +catch the new strange sound. He waited until there was no doubt that it +was close at hand and steadily drawing nearer, then, he reached over +and shook his snoring companion. + +"Wake up, Massa Captain," he cried, "dar's some wild beast a creepin' +into de camp." + +"I hear it," agreed the captain, instantly wide awake. "Jes' lay still, +lad, an' don't be frightened. I'll stir up the fire a bit, that will +run it off." + +He arose from his couch and strode boldly for the smouldering fire. + +"Look out!" Chris yelled, suddenly, "Foah de Lawd's sake, look out!" +His keen eyes had caught a glimpse of a black shape passing between the +old sailor and the mass of glowing embers, but his warning came too +late,--the captain was upon the moving shape before he saw it. + +A swishing noise rent the air, a loud thud, the old sailor was knocked +backward several feet flat on the ground, and, with a loud, sharp +bellowing, the mysterious visitor glided away into the darkness. + +"Is you hurt? Is you hurt, Massa Cap?" cried the terror-stricken lad. + +"A little bit, a little bit," called back the old sailor, his voice +hoarse with pain. + +He came creeping back into the shelter on hands and knees. + +"It was a big bull alligator," he explained, painfully. "Must have been +twelve feet long. It caught me a fearful blow on the legs with its +tail. I hope thar ain't no bones broken but it feels as though thar +was." + +A close examination proved his fears groundless, but the terrible blow +had done all but break the bones. In spite of the pain, however, he +crawled forth again and replenished the fire, but he was faint and +giddy with pain before he succeeded in getting back into the shelter +and stretched out on his couch once more. + +"I reckon, I'll be all right by morning," he said, hopefully, "but I +don't calculate I'll be able to sleep any more to-night, my legs hurt +too bad for that. Don't make any difference though, I 'low I've had +enough sleep for one night--it can't be more than a couple of hours +'till daylight." + +It proved to be even less and with the coming of light he removed his +trousers and examined his limbs anxiously. He had indeed received a +terrible blow from the prowling monster, both legs were bruised and +swollen where the tail had struck it and it seemed a miracle that the +bones had not been broken. It caused him exquisite pain to rise upon +his feet, but there was work which had to be done, and, in spite of his +suffering, he must do it. So, hiding his pain as well as he could, he +prepared to sally forth to secure food for the day. + +But in spite of all his efforts he could not entirely hide his intense +suffering. + +"You jes' lay down an' let me go out an' find grub, Massa Cap," Chris +pleaded. "I feels jes' as well as can be again now." + +But the sturdy old sailor would not listen to his pleadings. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +ANOTHER DANGER. + + +"DAR'S one thing I want you to do 'fore you go projectin' off," said +the little negro. "I wants you to cut me some ob dem palmetto buds. +I'se goin' to braid you a hat. Hit's a plum wonder dat you ain't got +sun struck goin' bareheaded like you is." + +"I ain't had time to remember that I lost my hat when we were wrecked. +I'se been so worried an' busy," said the captain. "Now you speak of it, +my head does feel sort of dull an' heavy. I hope the boys will think to +cover their heads with something--this sun does beat down right hot." + +"Mass Charley will sho' rig up some kind ob hat," Chris declared, +confidently. "'Sides dey's both young an' can stand a heap more sun den +what you kin. You jes' be mighty careful dis mornin' an' by noon dis +nigger will hab a fine hat fixed for you. I'se done made lots ob dem on +Cat Island." + +There was a few young cabbage palms scattered over the island and +the captain cut out several of the buds with his sheath knife and +placed them beside the little negro, then, knotting up the ends of his +bandanna handkerchief to form a turban, he took his spear and started +for the shore. + +Chris watched his slow, faltering, painful steps until he was out of +sight then began on his proposed task. The buds were really young fresh +leaves yet unfolded, soft and pliable, yet very strong. He shredded +them into strips about half an inch in width until he had accumulated +quite a pile; then, taking four of the pieces at a time, with deft, +skillful fingers, he wove them into a braid about an inch in width. + +In a couple of hours, he had a string of braid several yards long. + +The fashioning of the braid into a hat, without needle and thread and +while lying flat on his back was a more difficult task, but he attacked +it with cheerful energy, using the point of his knife for a needle and +small strips of palmetto for thread. At last, his task was completed, +and, although the hat was grotesque in shape and appearance, it was +soft, strong, and light, and would prove an effective protection from +the fierce rays of the tropic sun. The little worker was not yet +satisfied but at once set about the manufacture of a basket from the +same material realizing how useful it would be for the carrying of +clams, fish, and other things. + +He was still engaged upon it when the captain came stumbling into +camp bearing a large fish and several dozen more of the clams. The +old sailor's face was red, his movement weak and uncertain, and his +breathing heavy and labored, while he was trembling violently from head +to foot. He sank down in the cedar's shade and wiped his flaming face. + +"I reckon, I've got a touch of the sun," he said, feebly. "I feel weak +and dizzy. I'll lie down in the shade for a bit an' it will pass off. +Don't be worried, lad, it will pass off in a jiffy." + +But pass off it did not. By the end of half an hour the sturdy old +seaman was lying unconscious, his breath coming in short, wheezy gasps. + +Chris watched him for a while in anxiety and fear. He knew that it +might be dangerous for him to move his wounded leg but all thought +of his own danger was lost in the fear that the stricken old sailor +was dying before his eyes. He attempted to pull his leg out from the +mound but could not move it. The heat of the stones had baked the mud +hard. With great effort he raised himself into a sitting position, +and, with his sheath knife cut and dug away frantically at the baked +mud until he had the leg uncovered, then, severing the bandage above +his knee, he attempted to rise but could not move the injured limb. He +fell back and viewed it with frightened dismay. It was not a pretty +sight for it was a mass of blisters where the hot mud had clung, and a +large bluish swelling marked the place where the stingaree's horn had +entered. The tight bandage, shutting off the blood supply for so long, +had rendered it paralyzed and useless. Although the breaking blisters +caused him exquisite pain, he fell to rubbing the numbed limb briskly +with both hands until the blood crept slowly back into the veins. At +last, he was able to gain his feet and by resting most of his weight +on his uninjured leg managed to limp over to the unconscious sailor. +Luckily, he had been raised in a torrid country where sunstrokes were +of frequent occurrence. He knew just what to do and he did it quickly +and surely. His first act was to raise the unconscious man's head and +place a high pillow of twigs beneath it. Then, stirring the smouldering +fire, he placed several large stones in the glowing coals. While they +were heating he removed the captain's shoes and bathed his hot head +and flushed face with cool water, and tearing his shirt to pieces, wet +it and bound it around the sufferer's head. By the time this was done, +the stones were hot, and, rolling a couple up in his jacket, he placed +them at the captain's feet, then, seated by his side, he awaited the +result with fear and trembling. A terrible dread gripped his heart that +the remedies had been applied too late, for the old sailor had all the +appearance of a dying man. Thirty minutes dragged slowly away without +apparent change, then, slowly, the old sailor's breathing grew less +labored and his face began to lose some of its fiery hue. Chris hailed +these favorable signs with joy as indicated that the crisis had been +safely passed, but his joy was somewhat dampened when the hours passed +by without the stricken man showing signs of consciousness. He seemed +to pass from his stupor to a deep sleep from which the little negro +dreaded awakening him. It was evident that the old seaman was in for a +long spell of weakness from the heat stroke he had suffered. There was +nothing more his little companion could do to relieve his sufferings +and he remained seated by his side watching him anxiously until the +waning of the afternoon warned him that it was time to partake of food +and make preparations for the night. He had eaten nothing since the +night before and he was conscious of a sense of growing weakness. The +fish the captain had caught was already tainted from the heat and the +little negro felt too weak as yet to venture forth to secure more, so +he dug up a few of the cassava roots which he roasted in the coals. +These, together with a handful of palmetto berries, constituted his +supper. As soon as it was finished he began his preparations for the +night. Slowly and painfully, he gathered together broken limbs to keep +the circles of fire going until daylight came again. By the time this +was accomplished and the fires lit he was weak and trembling from pain +and exhaustion and was glad to crawl onto his couch by the captain's +side. The old sailor roused into momentary wakefulness at the noise of +the snapping twigs. + +"How you is, Massa Capt.?" demanded the little negro, eagerly. + +"Weak, mighty weak. Feel as though I couldn't lift my hand to my head, +but I will be all right by morning, I reckon. I guess, we have got no +cause to worry now. The boys will be back to-night or early in the +morning at the latest. How do you feel, lad?" + +"Fine," lied the little negro, cheerfully. "Jes' you go back to sleep +again. I'll keep de fires up all right." + +With a sigh of satisfaction, the captain closed his eyes and was +soon sound asleep again, but there was no such rest for his little +companion. Twice Chris hobbled out and renewed the fires. The third +time he had to crawl forth on hands and knees. His wound was again +swelling rapidly and he could no longer bear his weight on the injured +limb. He tried vainly to sleep. The wounded leg throbbed with intense +pain which gradually crept over his whole body, making him feel sick +and faint all over. He understood the reason for his sufferings. Some +of the poison still left in his wound had, with the removal of the +tight bandages from his leg, found its way back into the blood and was +coursing through his little body poisoning as it went. + +"Golly!" he remarked, grimly, to himself, "if dem white chillens doan +get back wid help an' medicine by mornin', I reckon dis nigger ain't +agoin' to see Cat Island and his old mammy no moah. An' if Chris gits +plum helpless what's goin' to become ob Massa Captain wid no one to +tend to him. He tinks he'll be all right in de mornin' but hits goin' +to take a powerful long time for him to get real peart again." + +The long night dragged slowly away. Occasionally the little negro crept +forth and replenished the fires, the balance of the time he lay quiet +listening for cry or sound that would tell of the boys' return, but +nothing fell upon his strained hearing but the croak of frogs, the +bellowing of alligators and the strange night noises of the marsh. + +At daylight the captain awoke and attempted to rise, but, although he +was greatly improved, he was yet too weak to stand erect. + +"You jes' lie still," Chris counseled him, "dar ain't no call for you +to go projectin' around none. I'se goin' out an' git somethin' for us +to eat." + +Although it cost him intense pain, the little negro managed to walk +erect until he was out of the old sailor's sight, then he dropped down +on hands and knees and crawled painfully down to the shore. + +The touch of the cool salt water helped the throbbing pain in his leg +and he succeeded in wading out to the rocks where he was not long in +spearing a large, fat mackerel. With this, he returned to the camp, +for he did not dare in his growing weakness to search for clams or +other food. He found the old sailor asleep again, and, cleaning the +fish he broiled it over the coals. As soon as it was done he awakened +the sleeper. + +"Hyah is youah breakfas' all nice an' hot," he announced. "You want to +eat a plenty ob hit. I'se agoin' to lay down a spell. I didn't sleep +berry good last night." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +THE RELAPSE. + + +CAPTAIN WESTFIELD ate heartily of the delicious fish. Much to his +delight, he found that, except for the extreme weakness following his +heat prostration, he felt unusually well. He wisely decided not to +invite a relapse by getting up at once, and, as soon as he had finished +eating, he lay back upon his couch and quietly fell asleep again. It +was midday when he awoke feeling much better and stronger. The first +thing that met his gaze as he gained a sitting position was Chris lying +in the same position in which he had first flung himself. He called +to him several times but the little negro lay still and motionless. +Thoroughly alarmed, he crawled over and surveyed the unconscious lad. +The sight of the enormously swollen leg and a few minutes' fingering +of the dark little wrist told him what was the matter. The slow pulse +beats showed that the subtile poison, released from its confinement by +the removal of the bandage, had found its way to the plucky, loyal, +little heart. + +The captain sat down by the little fellow's side and dashed the +stinging tears from his eyes. + +"He's killed himself for me," he moaned. "If he had laid still just as +he was he would have been all right. But, God bless him, he risked his +life for a poor, old, worthless hulk like me. An' thar ain't nothing I +can do to save him now." + +Although he had but small faith that it would do any good in such a +desperate case, he hastily crushed out a cupful of juice from the +palmetto berries and forced it down Chris' throat, then, resuming his +seat by his side, he watched to see if the powerful stimulant would +have any effect. + +As the hours dragged slowly away he rejoiced to see that the lad's +condition apparently grew no worse. Encouraged, he crushed out more of +the juice and administered it at regular intervals. "I believe he's got +a good fighting chance to pull through. If the boys would only get back +with some whiskey an' drugs, now, I reckon, we could save him. I wonder +what can be keepin' them so long. They've had plenty of time to make +Judson and back." + +But the afternoon wore away without sign of the rescuers, and a new +fear crept into the old sailor's worries. Something must have happened +to the two boys. Late in the afternoon, he left Chris long enough +to hurry down to the shore in quest of fish or clams for supper. He +found the rock from which he had fished completely submerged and a +heavy surf thundering far up into the marsh. Under such conditions +it was impossible to secure fish or clams, and he returned to camp +hungry, disappointed, and with further cause for worry. The heavy surf +indicated another storm in the Gulf which might reach where they were. +If it did, it would render their position still more uncomfortable and +dangerous. A heavy blow would continue to cut off their supply of fish +and clams and would likely flood the low-lying marsh shutting them in +on their little island. If Chris had been well enough to walk, the +captain would have at once moved camp to the mainland, but that was +impossible now. By sunset his fears were in a fair way to be realized. +The wind was steadily increasing in force, and, blowing out of a clear +sky, gave promise of still greater violence. Supperless and worried, +the old sailor watched the night fall with but one thing to cheer his +drooping spirits--Chris was evidently slowly improving. Likely much of +the poison had been drawn out from his wound by the hot mud and the +balance remaining had been overcome in its paralyzing effects by the +powerful stimulant. The lad's pulse was slowly growing stronger and it +was clear that the crisis had been safely passed. + +The old sailor was too worried about the absent lads to compose himself +to sleep. Already, the surf was sending up small wavelets far into the +marsh. If the boys were returning the way they went, their journey +would be fraught with perils. + +The sky was covered with fleecy clouds but they disappeared with the +rising of the moon and by its bright light he could see far out on the +water where the huge waves broke foaming white on the outer bar. + +Suddenly he gave a shout that made Chris stir in his stupor; "The boys! +The boys!" he cried in delight. + +In the broad path of moonlight, a small schooner appeared feeling her +way through a passage in the reef under close-reefed sails. + +"They must have someone aboard that knows the reef," he mused as he +watched the little ship cautiously weaving her way in between the +dangerous rocks. + +She held steadily for the shore until she was scarce two cable lengths +from it, then, she shot up into the wind, her anchor was dropped, and +her sails lowered. + +The captain was down on the shore, heedless of the flying spray, when +the anchor hit the bottom. + +"Walt! Charley!" he roared at the top of his voice. + +There was no answer and he hailed again. + +"Ahoy! Shore!" came an answering hail from the schooner. "Who air yo' +and what do yo' want?" + +The captain was silent for a moment with disappointment. It was not the +boys after all, but any help was welcome at such a time and he made +haste to reply. + +"We're two shipwrecks in bad shape an' need help. Who are you?" + +"The Hattie Roberts, sponger, from Key West. Stan' by, an' we'll send a +boat." + +While the strangers were launching a boat, the captain had time to +observe that the schooner's decks were piled full of small boats and +that, small as she was, she carried a crew of at least thirty men. + +"An old style, pole an' hook sponger," he decided. "I didn't reckon +there was any of them left. I 'lowed the Greeks had run 'em all out of +business." + +Manned by half a dozen men, the little boat came tearing through the +waves towards the shore. Flung up by a huge roller, she grounded almost +at the captain's feet. The instant she touched bottom, her crew sprang +over the side and drew her up safely beyond the reach of the next +roller. Even by the dimmed light of the moon, the old sailor could see +that the new-comers were dark-skinned men with heavy coarse features. +He recognized them without the aid of the peculiar accent as Conchs,--a +kind of mixed race belonging to the Florida Keys. + +"Whar's yo's companion?" demanded one, who from his air of authority +was evidently the captain. + +"He's on a little island just a little ways from here. I'll have to get +one of your men to help me down with him." + +"All right, Sam here will go with yo'. Step lively, we have got to pull +out from hyar quick. There ain't as good anchorage as I 'lowed to find +behind the reef. We'll have to make foah a better harbor." + +The captain, with the sailor detailed to help him, was hurrying off on +their mission when the Conch's skippers curiosity caused him to stop +him in spite of the preciousness of time. + +"How did yo's git hyah in such a fix," he demanded. + +"Been sponging with a Greek crew. Crew mutinied. We escaped in a diving +boat. Got wrecked in the night on the reef out thar," replied Captain +Westfield, briefly. + +"Sponging with the Greeks!" snarled the Conch with an oath. "Then the +Greeks can help yo' out of yo'r fix, by all that's Holy, I won't. Hyah, +Sam, jump aboard with yo'." + +"You are not agoin' to desert us?" cried the captain in bewildered +consternation. "For the love of humanity, man, what do you mean?" + +"I mean that I won't raise a finger to help any mons who deals with +the Greeks--blast 'em," cried the Conch, fiercely. "They've ruined +us an' our people. We used to be a happy an' prosperous race a'fore +they came with their diving suits an' tramped all over the bottom of +the Gulf. Killing the little baby sponges with their iron shoes, an' +stripping the bottom clean as a Conch's floor. We've been run out of +the business, an' they did it. We've lost our homes, an' they caused +it. Our families don't have enough to eat an' wear any more, an' they +are the reason--curse 'em, curse 'em, curse 'em." + +"But you are leaving us to certain death, man!" pleaded Captain +Westfield, "The water is rising over the marsh, already." + +"An' it will be flooded inside of ten hours," declared the Conch with +cruel satisfaction. "All aboard mons an' shove off." + +Captain Westfield grasped the gunwale of the boat and tried to hold +it while he reasoned and argued with the fanatical Conch, but the +infuriated man rapped his knuckles with an oar and gave him a shove +with the blade that sent him struggling backwards. By the time the old +sailor recovered his balance, the boat had been shoved off and was out +of his reach. He shook his clenched fist at the Conch's receding figure. + +"You'll pay for this," he shouted. "No good will come to you after such +a trick." But it is doubtful if the Conch even heard his voice above +the roar of the wind. + +The captain stood watching grimly until the boat reached the +schooner's side, and her close-reefed sails were hoisted, her anchor +broke and she headed to the South inside the line of reef. When she +had faded away into the night, he turned back for the camp filled with +disappointment and dismay. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +THE FLOOD. + + +AS the old sailor made his way back to the island, he was alarmed +to see how rapidly the water was rising over the marsh. He splashed +knee-deep in the water at every step and it was easy to see that it +still continued to rise with astonishing rapidity. + +His first act on reaching the island was to move the camp to the +highest knoll of ground, already the lowest lying portions of the +island were submerged. Chris had regained consciousness though he was +still too weak to move without assistance. He watched the old sailor's +preparations with evident interest and looked at the rapidly rising +water with evident anxiety. + +"If dat water doan stop comin' up, we is sho' goin' to hab a hard time +gettin' anythin' to eat," he observed. "Can't get ober dem rock no +way when dey is covered wid water, sho' to break a leg in one ob dem +holes." + +"The Lord will watch out for us, lad," encouraged the captain. "Look +at all that He has brought us through. He has never deserted us in our +hour of need." + +"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little darkey, thoughtfully. +He remained quiet for a few minutes then said quaintly, "'Spect's we +oughter ask him to look out foah Massa Charley an' Massa Walt. I'ze +getting plum anxious 'bout dem two white chillins. Dey had oughter been +back long 'fore dis. Massa Charley's mighty clever, but I 'spect dat +it wouldn't do no harm to ax de Lawd to help him out a bit if he's in +trouble." + +"No one can do without the Lord's help, Chris," the captain said, +gravely, "an', I reckon, them lads need it powerful bad. Something +pretty serious has happened, I 'low, to keep them from coming back. +We'll ask the Good Lord to watch out for them an' protect them." + +The old sailor knelt by the little negro's side and in simple seafaring +language prayed that the Heavenly Father would watch over and protect +the missing ones. + +The simple steadfast faith of the old seaman and the trusting little +negro filled them with a sense of security and peace. They doubted not +that their humble petition would be answered and that now a Heavenly +Eye was watching over them and their absent companions and that a +Divine Hand would guide them through their trials and danger. They +stretched out on their leafy couches and went fast to sleep, while the +storm raged and howled around them and the rising water crept slowly up +on their little island. + +It was broad daylight when they awoke and looked about them. It was +a wild and terrifying scene that met their eyes. The marsh between +them and the sea was completely submerged and covered with rolling +white-caps. Far out on the reef they could see the mighty rollers +flinging their spray forty feet in the air when they struck the sunken +rocks. Of the island, none remained except the high sands and knoll +upon which was their camp. Between the island and the mainland was two +miles of swirling, foaming water. + +"Can't get to shore, no ways, now, Massa Captain," Chris observed. +"You had oughter gone in las' night when you had a chance an' left dis +nigger behind." + +"The Lord will look out for us, lad," said the old sailor cheerfully. +"I don't calculate that the water's going to rise high enough to cover +this knoll we are on an' as soon as the wind drops a bit, the boys will +be back for us with a boat. It's just a matter of being patient for a +little while. We may get a little bit hungry, but, I reckon, we can +stand that without grumbling." + +"Sho' we can," agreed Chris, bravely. "Tho' hit do seem like I was +gettin' powerful hungry already. Ain't dar none of dem cassava roots +dat we can get at?" + +A close search revealed that most of the patch of tubers was covered by +the rising water. A few plants however still showed on the little knoll +and these the captain dug at once. There was only a scant half peck of +the roots but that was better than nothing. + +The old sailor kindled a little fire and roasted all the roots in the +coals. + +"We might as well have one good full meal," he observed, "I never did +take much stock in this idea of going on short rations when grub is +scarce. I always 'lowed that one good feed would carry a man further +than a dozen pesky little ones that only tantalize the stomach." + +But the roots shrank greatly in the cooking, by the time the skins were +removed, there was but little left for the hungry castaways. They still +felt empty after their meal was finished. + +The day dragged wearily away with no sign of abatement of the storm. +The water continued to rise slowly, but so slowly that the two anxious +watchers were not without hope that the little knoll on which they +were would escape the overflow. Their position was by no means +uncomfortable. There was no rain and the weather was so warm that the +wind did not cause them to suffer any from cold. Aside from their +growing hunger and their anxiety about their missing companions, they +were quite comfortable. Chris, in fact, was in better shape than at any +time since they had been cast on shore. + +"I don' reckon dis storm can las' berry much longer," he observed, +cheerfully, when the sun went down in a perfectly clear sky. "Dar ain't +no clouds to back up de wind an' hit's bound to play out 'fore long." + +"That's just where you're wrong, lad," said the captain. "A gale from a +clear sky is the worst of all. I ain't ever seen many of them but what +I have seen were all hummers." + +The two sat looking out on the gloomy waste of waters until the moon, +now at its full, rose and lit up the wild scene about them almost as +brightly as day. At last they tired of the wild, gloomy, disheartening +scene, and, after a short prayer together, stretched out on their +couches. Chris was almost instantly asleep but the captain lay long +awake, his mind full of their helpless situation, and, of anxious +conjectures as to the fate of the two absent lads. His own position +and that of his little companion was such as to awaken his deepest +fears. So long as the storm continued, their rescue by land or Gulf +was impossible. No boat could live amongst the rocks and raging waters +which now surrounded them. His long experience told him that the storm +was likely to continue at least two days longer.--He had seen similar +gales blow for an entire week without a let up. Even after the gale +was over, it would take some little time for the waves and water to +subside. At the best, they would suffer greatly from hunger before +their rescue would be possible. But, to do the old sailor justice, his +thoughts were not so much of their own situation as of the absent lads. +He could only hope and pray that they had not started to return by +water before the breaking of the storm. + +As he lay motionless musing, his ear caught a low grating sound as of +heavy objects drawn on coarse sand. He quickly sat up on his couch and +looked around. In the bright moonlight he could see large dark objects +moving over the white sand. + +"'Gators, an' a regular drove of them," he exclaimed. "Wake up, Chris! +Wake up!" + +The little negro struggled up into a sitting position, still half +asleep. + +"What's de matter, Massa Cap?" he inquired. + +"Look at them 'gators, thar's dozens of them. We've got to have a fire +mighty quick an' stick close to it." + +Chris greeted the sight of the dark objects with a cry of joy. + +"Oh, Golly! De Good Lord's dun answered our prayers. Dem's turtles." + +The old sailor sprang to his feet and would have dashed for the nearest +object if the little negro had not restrained him. + +"You sho' scare dem all away if you do dat way," he cautioned. "Jus' +wait till dey gets to layin' an' you can walk right up on 'em." + +The huge creatures crept steadily on up the shelving knoll. Their +progress was slow and clumsy, and their lower shells dragging over the +sand had made the grinding noise the captain had heard. They crept up +to within ten feet of where the two watchers lay, then, they halted, +and, with their hind flippers began to dig deep holes in the soft sand. + +"Dey lays der eggs in dem holes an' covers dem up wid sand," Chris +explained in a whisper. "Dey each lays mighty nigh two hundred eggs. De +warm sand hatches out de little turtles." + +The two castaways waited until the great sea hens had begun to lay, +then Chris arose and walked directly for them without any attempt at +concealment. The turtles did not pay the slightest attention to his +approach. + +"We'll take dese two smallest ones," he announced. "Dey will be de +tenderest. Jus' grab de shell wid me, Massa Cap, back by de hind +flippers an' we'll flop 'em over on his back. Keep youah eyes an' mouth +shut." + +But the old sailor was too excited to heed the advice. He grabbed the +turtle's shell and heaved, then staggered back spitting and coughing +with mouth, eyes, and ears full of sand, which the creature with it's +flippers sent flying in a cloud about it. + +Chris waited until he had relieved himself of the stinging sand and +this time the captain, following his advice, kept mouth and eyes +tightly closed. A few seconds sufficed to turn the two turtles on their +backs where they lay helpless. + +There must have been at least thirty turtles in the bunch but the +castaways contented themselves with only turning the two, any more +would have been useless slaughter. Those unmolested quickly completed +their laying, covered the eggs and retreated to the water. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +THE FLOATING HATCH. + + +THE castaways lost no time in rejoicing over their good fortune. The +Captain hastily kindled a fire while Chris, with his sheath knife, +proceeded to butcher the smallest of the two turtles. Much experience +had made the little negro expert at the work and in a few minutes he +had severed the two shells and cut off several thick steaks from one +of the hind flippers. Then, squatting before the fire, each impaled a +steak on the end of a pointed stick and toasted it over the coals. + +How good the steaming juicy meat tasted to the two hungry ones. Steak +after steak was broiled and eaten before their ravenous appetites were +satisfied and they could eat no more. + +"Midnight is a sorter unusual hour for a feed," Captain Westfield +observed, "but, I reckon, we will sleep none the worse for it. I 'low, +we ain't got to lay awake none worryin' about food now. Thar's meat +enough to last us for two weeks at least." + +"An' maybe, Ole Mister Gale will blow hisself out," said Chris, +hopefully, as, yawning sleepily he stretched himself again on his couch. + +It was broad day when the castaways awoke from the heavy slumber which +had followed their hearty midnight supper. They found the gale still +blowing with undiminished violence and the sky still brightly blue. One +thing, however, gave them great satisfaction, the water had ceased to +encroach upon their little knoll. It had evidently reached its height. + +After a hearty breakfast of turtle steaks, the two proceeded at once +to dress and cure the turtles, for they well knew that under the sun's +heat the fresh meat would soon spoil. + +They had neither salt nor smoke house with which to cure it, but they +went at the task with sure confidence in the result. The meat was first +cut away from the shells and skinned, care being taken to remove every +particle of the greenish-colored fat. Then, cutting across the grain, +the meat was divided into thin strips and spread upon leaves to dry in +the hot sun. It only remained for them to protect it from the dews of +night and chance rains and a few days would see it thoroughly cured and +capable of keeping sweet and good so long as it was kept dry. + +With some hazy idea that they might be of some future use, the captain +cleaned and washed out the two, great, trough-like, upper shells of the +turtles. + +"Dat looks like a lump of wreckage out dar by de reef, Massa Cap," +Chris observed as he straightened up from his task of spreading out the +meat. "Pears like de tide is settin' hit in dis way." + +"It is a bit of wreckage or a clump of seaweed," the captain agreed +after a brief survey. "It's drifting in all right, but it's going to +miss the island by a good hundred yards." + +The two suspended work while they watched the drifting object slowly +near their island. + +"It looks like a hatch with something like a stack atop of it," he +observed to the captain as the object drew close. + +"Hit's a man or 'ooman atop ob hit," cried Chris, whose eyes were +keener than the old sailor's. "He's layin' plum still, jes' like he was +dead." + +Closer approach of the object convinced the captain that the little +negro was correct. There was beyond doubt a motionless body lying on +the low floating hatch. It was evident too that the hatch with its +burden would pass the island at a distance of at least one hundred and +fifty yards. To venture out and attempt to tow it in was to assume +a terrible risk. The water between it and the island was raging and +tossing over dozens of dangerous hidden rocks. Only the strongest +swimmer would have the slightest chance of success, and, even should he +succeed, it might be to find that he had risked his life to rescue a +corpse. But the ocean breeds in its followers a brotherhood that leads +them to deeds of quiet heroism. They never know when they may be in +need of a rescuing hand and it is seldom that one turns aside from the +rendering of service, no matter how dangerous it may be to himself. + +When the hatch with its burden was nearly abreast of the island Chris +began to strip off his clothes, but the Captain stopped him. + +"You're still too weak to attempt it, lad," he declared. "You couldn't +make it thar an' back, I reckon I can fight it out all right. I've +mighty nigh got back all my strength." + +Hastily stripping off the pants and shirt in which he was clothed, the +old sailor slipped off into the water and struck out for the wreckage +with long steady strokes, warily avoiding the foaming spots which +marked the positions of the larger rocks. The swim was not difficult +for so experienced a swimmer. The struggle would come when he attempted +to return with his burden. In a few minutes, he reached the wreckage +and, resting his hand upon the hatch gazed down at the burden it bore. +He saw a man, apparently about forty years of age, attired in rough +seaman's garb, his face bronzed and seamed from long years of exposure +to wind and weather. The stranger was lying flat on his back on the +hatch, his legs dangling over the end. A rope passed around his body +and under the wood work prevented the larger seas from washing him off +his frail support. He was unconscious and the captain reached over and +placed his ear close to his chest. He could detect a faint beating of +the heart. It was slow and feeble but still it was beating,--the man +was alive. + +Once satisfied of this fact, the old sailor quickly shifted to the end +of the hatch, and, resting one hand upon it, and striking out with the +other hand and both feet, strove to force it back to the island. He had +not accomplished half the distance with his burden when he saw that +he could not hope to succeed. The tide was slowly but surely sweeping +him in past the island direct for the mainland. Still, he battled +desperately on, swimming with all his strength. Suddenly the little +raft seemed to move forward with increased speed. + +"Take it easy, Massa Cap," sounded Chris' voice close to his elbow. "We +can make it togedder all right." The plucky little negro had been quick +to see the danger and equally quick to come to the rescue. + +Between the two, after half an hour of heartbreaking battling with +the current, they managed to shove the raft ashore, where they sank +exhausted and panting upon the sand. + +As soon as they were able to move, they unlashed the unconscious sailor +from the hatch, and, carrying him up, laid him upon the captain's +couch. The man seemed nearly dead, and for hours the two, wet, +exhausted castaways worked over him, struggling to coax the spark of +life into a flame. At last they were rewarded by seeing a tinge of +color creep into the bronzed face. At length the sailor sighed and +opened his eyes. + +"Water," he gasped, faintly. + +"Golly! I should reckon he's had 'bout enough water," Chris exclaimed. + +"Get some for him quick," Captain Westfield commanded. "The salt brine +he has swallowed has parched his throat and stomach." + +The sailor took only one mouthful of the proffered water, then spat it +out with his face twitching. + +"Salt, salt," he murmured. + +A horrible fear seized the captain. He snatched the shell from Chris' +hand and took a swallow of the water. His fear was confirmed, it was +salt. The Gulf had risen close enough to their little well to percolate +through the sand into it and render it as salt as itself. + +The little negro divined the situation from the captain's face. "Golly! +dat's bad," he cried. "Doin' widout water is a heap wurser den doin' +widout food." + +"Water, give me water," pleaded the rescued man. "My throat's parched, +parched." + +"You shall have some water as soon as we can get it," Captain Westfield +assured him. There was something vaguely familiar to the old sailor in +the man's queerly accented speech. It was more puzzling as he had no +recollection of ever having seen the man before. + +Considering his low condition the sailor recovered his full senses +and a measure of his strength with astonishing rapidity. It was plain +that he had not been deprived of either food or water for any great +length of time. He was soon able to sit up and take notice of his +surroundings. A curious look stole over his bronzed face as his gaze +took in the two castaways. + +"How did I get hyah?" he demanded. + +Captain Westfield related the story of the rescue briefly. + +The sailor's rough features worked with emotion. "I remember part," he +cried. "Our vessel struck on Needle Rocks in the darkness an' went down +like a stone. I had just time to throw myself on the hatch an' pass +a rope around my waist. The crew," he shuddered--"must have all been +dashed to pieces against the rocks. God knows how I escaped. An' yo' +risked yo'r lives to save mine, yo' an' that boy. Mon, how could yo' +forgive me enough to do such a deed?" + +"Forgive you?" echoed the captain, puzzled. "I had nothin' to forgive." + +"I am Rufus Sanders, the Key West sponger who refused yo'r appeals for +help an' left yo' to yo'r fate," cried the man, excitedly. + +"I did not know that, but it would have made no difference," said the +captain, gently. "You were a helpless, shipwrecked man." He checked the +flood of thanks on the sponger captain's lips. "You have nothing to +thank us for," he declared. "We have only saved you from one fate to +suffer a worse with us. We are hopelessly imprisoned on this island, +an' we have no water. All we can do is endure, pray an' hope." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +WITH THE BOYS. + + +CONSIDERING the misfortunes which had befallen them, the two chums +were in surprisingly good spirits, as they picked their way through +the marsh, headed South. It was a relief to be free from the dread and +apprehension under which they had labored for so many days. + +"I feel almost as though we were on a picnic, instead of being +shipwrecked sailors who have been robbed of their ship, and have lost +all except the clothes on their backs," Charley declared. + +"Everything is going to turn out all right after all," agreed Walter, +hopefully. "Chris is going to get over his wound all right. He and the +captain will have no trouble in getting plenty of food and water. We +had ought to reach Judson by dark, and we'll get a boat or wagon and +return for them at once. We can easily get from Judson to Tarpon, and +there we can get the United States Commissioner to take up our case, +and the minute the 'Beauty' enters port she will be seized and held +for us. At the worst it will only mean the loss of our diving boat and +a little patient waiting. And think of the store of gold which will be +ours for a little work." + +But his chum was not quite so optimistic. "I do not think that we had +better build too great hopes on recovering either our ship or the +gold," he observed. "That Manuel is a clever rascal. I fear he will +rise to the occasion. He may think that we are wrecked in the storm +but I am convinced he will take no chances. He will plan and scheme to +the last to secure the ship and money and save his own neck from the +halter. He may be caught at last but he will not sail boldly into any +port. He's too wary for that." + +His words did not dampen Walter's high spirits. "There is a revenue +cutter at Tarpon," reminded his chum. "As soon as we get to Judson, we +will telegraph to the Commissioner. He will not wait for the 'Beauty' +to touch a port if we can put our case strong enough. He will start the +cutter out in search of her at once." + +"I hope you are right. If we are going to make Judson before dark, +however, we are going to have to travel faster than we are going now. +It's slow going amongst this mud and rock. Let us make our way inshore +and see if it's any better traveling there." + +But as they approached close to the mainland they saw that there was +no hopes of easier traveling in that direction. The dense hammock +jungle extended down to the edge of the marsh. To make one's way +through it would be far slower than to continue over the marsh. They, +accordingly, retraced their steps to the water's edge. It was slightly +easier traveling close to the water. The waves had beat down the marsh +grass along the edge leaving a kind of beach of rock and mud. It was +hard and dangerous walking but safer than over the marsh itself, where +the rank growth hid the treacherous bog holes. + +The boys often paused in their march to examine the masses of stuff +that had been cast up by the waves. The squall of the night before had +robbed the bottom of great masses of seaweed and had taken heavy toll +of the life in the water. Every few minutes the lads would pass great +clumps of seaweed tangled together in beautiful rainbows of bright +scarlets, yellows, crimsons and purples. Curiously enough, the storm +had dealt very harshly with the finny tribe. Likely many of the fish +had been caught in shoal water and their lives beaten out against the +cruel rocks. They dotted the shore and the chums frequently halted to +admire one's curious shape or coloring. + +"I wonder what kind this one is?" said Walter, pointing to a long slim +fish of a beautiful brilliant green. + +"That is a parrot fish," his chum enlightened him. "I think they are +one of the most beautiful fishes that swim. They are of all colors, +some are violet, some of golden, some scarlet, and in fact, they are +found of every shade and hue. They get their names from their many +brilliant colors, I guess." + +"What a wonderful mysterious thing the sea is," Walter commented. "I +never realized before how much of strange life it contains." + +"What we see along the beach this morning is only a very small sample +of its population," his chum replied. "Sometimes, I think that all +life must have come first from the sea. There is hardly an animal on +land which has not a grotesque likeness in some creature of the sea. +Take that fish there with the peculiarly shaped head and horns. Its +resemblance to a cow is so striking that it has been named the cow +fish. There is another little fish with a head just like a horse. It is +called the sea horse. Then there is the toad fish, the frog fish, the +snake fish, and hundreds of others closely resembling the animals after +which they are named. But here," he concluded, "is, in my opinion, the +most wonderful fish I have ever heard of. I have seen many of them but +one always has a puzzling fascination to me." + +He had stopped before a flat round-shaped fish which lay stranded +in the edge of the water. It was still alive and struggling feebly +to get back into deeper water. It was of a light-tan color and was +covered with spots of darker hue. On its upper surface was a soft, +spongy-looking, circular spot It was not a pretty looking object and +Walter viewed it with disgust. + +"I don't see anything fascinating about it," he commented. + +"Just put your finger on that soft spongy place," Charley directed, +"that's where it's wonderful secret is concealed. It is not poisonous," +he added as his chum hesitated. + +Walter bent down and pressed his finger against the spongy mass. The +next instant he leaped back with a cry of alarm, shaking his arm madly. +"Jerusalem!" he exclaimed. "What is it?" + +"Got a shock did you?" laughed his chum. "That's an electrical fish. +Their mystery to me lies in where they get the electricity with which +they are charged. Even a small one like that contains enough to give a +powerful shock." + +The morning had been advancing rapidly as they walked and talked and +the sun was shining down hot on their bare heads. Charley, justifying +Chris' confidence in him, was quick to recognize the danger from its +torrid rays. + +He cast a look up at the sun. "It is nearly noon," he declared. "We +must get something to cover our heads with and then find something to +eat. I am getting as hungry as a wolf." + +There was nothing along the rocky, muddy beach that would do for hats +and the two bent their steps in towards the mainland. There, they broke +off small leafy branches and thrust the stems down the backs of their +shirts so that the leaves would tower above, and shade their heads. +These made only a poor substitute for hats, but shed off the fiercest +rays of the sun. + +Close to where they broke off the boughs was a small running stream and +the boys drank thankfully of its cold sweet water. + +"We have no time to waste in cooking and I fear our bill-o-fare for +dinner will be rather scanty," Charley said. "Let's look around here +and see if we cannot find fruit of some kind." + +There were palmetto berries in plenty all along the high bank but the +lads had no desire to partake of them except in a case of necessity. +Seeing nothing promising along the edge of the jungle, they scrambled +up the bank and made their way slowly and cautiously into the hammock, +keeping a wary eye out for snakes. They found fruit of several kinds +in abundance, but most of it Charley rejected as being poisonous, or +not fit to eat. They gathered two kinds which he declared were both +palatable and nourishing. One was a golden-red fruit about the size of +a pear. It contained a large nut to which the meat clung closely. One +bite into it and the boys' hands and faces were smeared with sticky +juice. "I would recognize that smeary juice and strong turpentine +flavor, anywhere," laughed Walter, "these are mangoes, the fruit, they +say, you have got to get into a bath-tub to eat if you want to keep +clean." + +The second fruit was about the size of a large plum and snow white in +color with a blotch of red on the sides. Its meat was sweet, milky and +slightly puckering. + +"They are cocoa-plums," Charley explained. "They are considered quite +nutritious but I would be afraid to eat a great many of them at a time +on account of their puckerishness. We can eat all we want to of the +mangoes however, they will not hurt us." + +As soon as their repast was finished the boys filled their pockets with +mangoes and cocoa-plums and hastened back to the shore. + +They plodded steadily along while the afternoon wore away, but their +progress over the rocks and mud was slow and they realized that they +would not be able to reach Judson before darkness rendered further +traveling dangerous. + +They were passing a matted clump of seaweed on the shore when Charley, +stopping with a cry of delight, fished out from its midst a round piece +of wood about four feet in length, from which trailed a long, light +line badly frayed in places by the rock. + +"Do you recognize this?" he shouted. + +"No," replied his chum in wonder at his excitement. + +"It's the buoy that marked the place where the gold ship lay. The +Greeks will have a job to locate the gold now. That storm must have +chafed the rope in two against a ledge of coral. Hurrah, hurrah." + +"I don't see but that is as bad news for us as for the Greeks," Walter +said, dubiously. + +"It is, in a way," his chum replied. "Of course it will make it harder +for us to find the exact spot where the treasure lays, but the Greeks +will be delayed by it and that will give us a chance to get there with +the revenue cutter and catch them before they get all the gold removed +and get away." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +THE JOURNEY. + + +IT still lacked about an hour to sundown when Charley called a halt. +"We cannot possibly make Judson before night, and it would be sheer +foolishness to try to travel over these rocks after it gets dark," he +declared. "We would be sure to get some bad falls and very likely break +an arm or leg. The best thing we can do is to find a good place to camp +while it is still light and make ourselves as snug as possible for the +night." + +Walter, who was beginning to feel tired out from the long day's tramp, +was quick to agree with his proposal and the two lads headed in for the +mainland, for neither felt any desire to spend the night on the wet, +muddy marsh. + +Good fortune seemed to guide their footsteps for they struck the +mainland just where a little stream of clear water bubbled forth +amongst a clump of towering cedars. + +"The very place for our camp," Charley exclaimed. "You see what you can +fix up in the way of a shelter, Walt, while I look around and see what +I can find for our supper." + +Walter was fast becoming an adept at the science of woodcraft and he +went about his task with certainty and dispatch. First, he broke off +armsful of small boughs which he spread in two piles upon the ground +close to the trunks of two big cedar trees. These were to serve as +their couches and over them he proceeded to erect a rough lean-to to +protect them from the wind and dew. There were plenty of dead boughs +all around, and, selecting two of the longest and straightest, he +leaned them against the trunk of the two trees about six feet from the +ground, embedding their other ends firmly in the ground. Across these, +he laid other limbs a couple of feet apart and upon them piled palmetto +leaves and boughs to form a roof. Before the open front of the rude +structure, he built a roaring fire of dead cedar limbs. Close beside it +he piled up a huge heap of wood with which to keep the fire replenished +throughout the night. This completed his labors, and stretching himself +upon his springy, fragrant couch before the crackling fire, he waited +hungrily for his chum's return. He was becoming alarmed over his long +absence when there came a crackling of boughs and Charley strode into +the circle of firelight, bearing in one hand a snow-white heart, or +bud, of a cabbage palmetto and in the other, a chunk of fresh meat +several pounds in weight. + +"What have you got there?" he inquired, eagerly. + +Charley grinned, "I'm too hungry to stop and tell you now. Sharpen up a +couple of sticks and we'll broil some steaks, then, I'll give you three +guesses as to what it is, and bet that you don't guess right." + +Walter hastily cut two long green palmetto stems and sharpened them +to points at the ends. By the time he had them ready, Charley had cut +a couple of generous-sized steaks from the hunk of meat. The balance +of it he wrapped up in a couple of green palmetto leaves and buried +in the coals. While the steaks impaled upon the sticks were sizzling +appetizingly before the fire, he wrapped up the palmetto heart in green +leaves and buried it beside the roasting meat. + +So hungry was Walter that he cut bits from his steak before it was +fairly done and devoured them with eager appetite. + +"Like it?" inquired his chum with a twinkle in his eye. + +"Fine, it only needs a little salt to make it perfect," Walter +declared. "I can't quite place it though. It tastes like a cross +between pork and beefsteak. What is it anyway?" + +"Guess." + +"Pork?" + +"Nit." + +"Coon?" + +"Nit." + +"Opossum?" + +"Nit." + +"I give it up then. What kind of animal is it?" + +"I found it on the bank of a little creek not far from here," said +Charley, dreamily. "It was sound asleep and it did not look very pretty +or innocent even in its slumber, but beggars can't be choosers, so I +got me a good heavy club and crept up on it softly. When it woke up +I was near enough to give it a good rap over the head. It gave me a +couple of good licks in the shins with its tail, however, before I got +it killed." + +Walter rose in his indignation, "Why didn't you tell me at the start +that it was alligator meat," he demanded, "I would not have eaten a +mouthful of it." + +"And you'd gone hungry to bed," said his chum with a chuckle. "You'd +have let your prejudice cheat you out of a good meal. It tastes all +right, don't it." + +"Yes," Walter admitted, ruefully, "and, now that I've eaten some of it, +I might as well keep right on eating." + +"Wise lad," Charley approved. "Let me tell you there are lots worse +things than alligator steaks when one is hungry." + +The steaks disposed of, the boys attacked the roasted meat and +palmetto cabbage with such vigorous appetites that there was but little +left when their hunger was at last appeased. + +"Pretty slim show for breakfast," said Charley, ruefully, as he eyed +the scanty remains. "Let's see if we can't fix up some way to catch +something during the night." + +The plan which they finally decided upon to accomplish this was very +simple. With their sharp knives, they whittled out several sets of +figure-four setters, and, dragging several small logs just outside the +circle of firelight, they placed a figure-four setter under an end of +each and baited the triggers with bits of meat left from their supper. +An animal nosing around after the bait would be sure to spring the +setter and cause the log to descend upon it. + +"We will surely get a coon or opossum before morning," Charley +declared. "Animals have lots of curiosity and some of them are sure to +be attracted by the light of our camp-fire. The smell of the cooked +meat will attract them also." + +This last task completed, the boys stretched themselves on their soft +couches before the cheery fire whose rays danced and flickered amongst +the leafy greenness of their shelter. It was a cozy, cheery little +camp and the two lads lay long awake, talking hopefully with the +cheery optimism that waits upon a hearty supper and healthy vigorous +youth. When at last they fell asleep, it was with confident hope of a +successful morrow. + +It seemed to Walter that he had barely fallen asleep when he was +struggling in that nightmare state which lies halfway between slumber +and entire wakefulness. He struggled pantingly for breath, but every +breath he drew seemed to stifle him. Oppressed with black horror, he +fought his way back to consciousness. But wakefulness brought small +relief. The air was heavy with a stench that nauseated and sickened him. + +Charley, crouched beside the fire, was holding his nose with one hand, +his face expressing unutterable disgust. + +"What in the world is the matter?" Walter demanded. + +"One of our traps worked," announced his chum, grimly. "It's only a +little skunk, but my, what a big smell." + +"I should say so," Walter agreed. "We can't stay here. We'll have to +move camp." + +"I second the motion to adjourn," said his chum, solemnly. + +No time was lost in debating the question and the lads quickly took +their departure from their cozy camp. They made their way cautiously +along the edge of the hammock until the raucous odor was left behind, +then they halted and built another fire. + +"The measly little varmint," said Walter, wrathfully, as they crouched +beside the blaze. "He's gone and cheated us out of a good night's +sleep." + +"Oh, it isn't as bad as all that," said his chum, cheerfully. "It's +nearly morning now. See, there's the morning star in the East. +Besides," he added, whimsically, "That poor little fellow isn't to +blame. He didn't ask us to set a trap for him. I bet he regrets the +accident as much as we do." Then throwing back his head he sang in his +clear tenor voice, "Driven From Home." + +As the humor of the incident dawned upon Walter, he burst into laughter +in which he was joined by his fun-loving chum. + +It was too near morning to consider selecting another shelter so the +two sat beside the fire until day broke, then they made their way back +to the camp to examine their traps. All were sprung, but, outside of +the skunk, the only victims were an opossum and a coon which they bore +back to their new fire. The opossum they broiled and ate for breakfast +while the coon they roasted to carry along with them for dinner. + +Sunrise found them once more on the march headed South. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +JUDSON.[A] + + +BY noon the two lads estimated that they must have come at least twenty +miles from where they had left the captain and Chris, and, if the old +sailor had been right in his reckoning, they could not be far from +their objective point, the town of Judson. They began now to keep a +sharp watch ahead and ere long were rewarded by the sight of a low +black line projecting out from the marsh ahead. A closer approach +resolved the low black line into a long, shaky, decrepit wharf, its +piling rotting from age and neglect and its timbers and planking fast +falling into decay. On the mainland back of the marsh a few rude +cabins, each at least a half a mile distant from its nearest neighbor, +rose from the middles of wide neglected fields. One lone, aged sloop +rode at anchor near the wharf. The little port and the hamlet itself +seemed to wear an air of deadly decay, sadness and gloom. + +"Not a very cheerful or prosperous-looking place," Charley observed as +they clambered up on the wharf and made their way ashore over its shaky +timbers. + +"No," his chum agreed, "but I am thankful to reach it, poor as it is. +My feet are getting sore from tramping over these rocks, I can tell +you." + +At the shore end of the dock the two paused long enough to take a more +careful survey of the place. + +"I declare it looks as though it was deserted or all the inhabitants +dead," Walter said nervously, "See how the roads are all grown up with +weeds as though they were never used. There is no sign of anyone about +either." + +"Just notice those cabins," his chum exclaimed, "They look just +like the pictures I have seen of houses the first settlers used to +build during the Indian times. They are built of great logs and have +loopholes like the forts of those days. What a queer place!" + +"Well, there's smoke coming from the chimney of that nearest cabin, and +there seems to be someone working out in the field by it," said Walter +with a sigh of relief. "I was beginning to think it was an abandoned +village." + +The two bent their steps towards the cabin indicated. It was set in +a square clearing of about twenty acres, that was surrounded by a +strip of pine woods which separated it from its nearest neighbor. As +they drew nearer, they could see a man at work near the cabin. He was +ploughing up the ground with a rude plow hitched to a yoke of oxen. + +As the boys stepped out of the road into the clearing, they were +greeted by savage barks, and a pack of dogs lolling around the cabin +woke into sudden life and came tearing towards them. + +The man at the plough let go the handles and sprang into the cabin. The +next minute a rifle barrel protruded from one of the loopholes, "Halt +right where you-all is," called a voice from behind the rifle. + +"Call off your dogs," shouted Charley, as he and Walter, snatching up a +couple of sticks, endeavored to keep the growling, snapping curs at bay. + +"Who are you-alls an' what do you want?" demanded the holder of the +rifle. + +"We were shipwrecked twenty-five miles up the coast. We want supplies +and help to bring in two companions, one of whom is badly hurt," +answered Charley. + +"Come closer an' let me have a good look at you-all," commanded the +cabin's occupant, "Here yu Bet, yu Tige, yu Jim, be still thar," he +called to the snarling pack which slunk growling away at his harsh +commands. + +The boys drew near the cabin in obedience to his order. A brief survey +of them seemed to convince its owner that they were not what he feared. +The cabin door was flung open, and, rifle in hand, he appeared in the +doorway. + +"Come in you-alls an' have a cheer," he invited. "I'll jis' unhitch +them oxen an' then, while I'm rustling up a bit of supper, you-alls can +give me your story." + +The tired, hungry boys accepted his invitation with alacrity, and, +while he was busy unharnessing the yoke of steers, they seated +themselves in a couple of rude home-made chairs, and gazed curiously +about them. + +The cabin was about twenty feet square. Its rough log walls were +whitewashed, and its pine-slab floor spotlessly clean. At one end +was a big old-fashioned fireplace from the rafters above which hung +home-cured hams, slabs of bacon, and strings of sausages. A barrel +in a corner was heaped high with huge, sweet, sugary yams. Several +boxes beside it were heaped with onions, cabbages, carrots, pumpkins, +and other vegetables. In another corner stood a barrel of home-ground +corn meal and a big hogshead of water. Taken all in all, the little +cabin's interior was a sight to fill the two hungry lads with satisfied +anticipation. They had hardly completed their survey of it when their +strange host entered latching and bolting the heavy door behind him. + +He was a man about forty years of age, strongly built, but sallow +with the sallowness of the native Floridian. His face was kindly in +expression but stamped on its every line was a look of uneasiness and +apprehension. It was not an expression of fear but rather the look of +a brave man who was simply on his guard every moment against expected +dangers. + +"I sho' have got to ask you-all to excuse me fur the way I dun greeted +you," he apologized, "but, you see, strangers are mighty scarse around +hyar an' one has to be plum' careful. I'se powerful glad to see a new +face though--it's been mighty nigh two years since I had talk with a +stranger. I reckon, you-alls must be some hungry. I'll rustle up a +little supper while you-all gives me your tale." + +With a deftness that indicated long batching experience, he cut great +slices of ham and placed them to broil over the coals, mixed a pone +of corn bread and put it to bake in a Dutch oven, and buried a dozen +big yams to roast among the embers. While he was thus engaged, Charley +related the story of their voyage and shipwreck omitting only any +mention of the gold. His story was frequently interrupted by his host's +exclamations, "I swan, an' dew tell." When the lad had finished, the +stranger beamed upon him with evident pleasure. "I swan, hit's jis' +like a novel I read once," he declared, "hit was writ by a fellow +called Russell, Clark Russell, if I don't disremember his name. I don't +reckon his story was true though. I 'lows he just made it up outer his +head--but the vittals is ready now, you-alls jis' back up to the table +thar an' helps yourselves." + +The hungry boys needed no second invitation but fell to work on the +tender juicy ham and sugary yams with hearty appetites while their host +as he ate, watched them with evident pleasure at their enjoyment. When +all had finished, he put away the dishes, filled his corn-cob pipe, and +leaned back in his chair against the wall. + +"You-alls can't go back to whar yu left the captain an' the little +nigger to-night, noways," he observed. + +"No," Charley agreed, "but we would like to start back early in the +morning if we can get a wagon or a boat." + +"Thar ain't no fitten road for a wagon leading up the coast," observed +their host. "I owns that little sloop anchored down thar by the dock. I +reckon, you-alls could make out with her. I don't reckon them Wrights +would stop you-alls from going if they understood jis' how things +stood. I don't 'low they would be so pesky pisen mean as all that. +I'd like to go with you-alls an' see that ole captain an' that little +nigger, I sho' would." + +"We would like to have you go with us," said Walter, eagerly. "Why +can't you?" + +"'Cause I don't ever expect to leave this hyar cabin alive," said his +host, calmly. + +The boys stared at him in uneasy astonishment. + +"No, I ain't crazy," said the man quietly. "Hush, jis' lis'en' a bit." + +A long prolonged growl came from one of the dogs outside. The man arose +and taking up his rifle stepped over to the loophole beckoning to the +lads to follow. The moon lit up the little clearing almost as light as +day. The dogs were moving around outside, sniffing and uttering low +growls. + +The boys could see nothing unusual in the clearing but they felt a +sense of danger in the very air. Their host's eyes, more accustomed to +the surroundings than their own, evidently detected something ominous +in one of the shadows thrown out from the belt of pines. He thrust +the barrel of his rifle out through the loophole and the next instant +its sharp crack rent the stillness of the night. The lurking shadow +vanished amongst the pines with a whoop of defiance. + +Their host pulled in his rifle, "A plum' miss," he said, disgustedly, +"Wall, the war is on for fair now. Better outen that light an' draw +your cheers up by the fire an' I'll tell you'alls about hit." + +FOOTNOTE: + +[A] This account of Judson is the description of a little West Florida +town as it actually has been, and is to-day. Nineteen of its scanty +population have died by a fierce war. The author has only changed the +first letter of the town's real name. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +THE FEUD. + + +"THAR ain't no call to keep watch at the loopholes," said their host +as the alarmed lads' glances kept wandering towards the dark openings. +"The dogs will tell we-alls if anyone tries to come near the cabin." He +leaned back in his chair in silence for a few minutes gazing into the +heart of the fire whose flickering rays lit up his bronzed, thoughtful, +kindly face. + +"Hit all began years ago when I warn't but a little bit of a shaver," +he began, quietly. "Judson was a right-prosperous, happy, contented, +little place, then. Thar was mighty nigh a hundred people living in +the town, an' in the woods nigh about hyar. Each family had hit's own +little cabin an' farm an' raised all hit's own living of meat, corn, +taters, an' sugar cane, an' each family had hit's patch of cotton +with which they bought what things they needed that they didn't raise +themselves. We had a right tidy little schoolhouse. I went to hit two +terms when I was a little shaver," he said with evident pride, "an' +I learned how to read an' write pretty well--the reading's been a +heap of company to me during the years since then. Each family had a +plenty to eat an' wear, an' thar warn't none that you could call real +poor people like I hearn tell you-alls have in the North. We used to +have dances and barbecues, an' picnics an' a right sociable time. The +town was started by two families, the Turners an' the Wrights--I'm +a Turner,--an' all the people about was kin to one or the other +family, which made everybody friendly and sociable with each other. +Hit was jis' a little Eden on earth, this place, 'till the serpent +came twisting an' crawlin' in. The devil must have sho' had a hand in +making some of the men folks believe that the Good Lord intended the +honest corn they raised for anything but food for man an' beast. Yes, +I reckon, hit sho' must have been ole Satan that made a few of the +Turners an' Wrights get together an' start a little whiskey still over +thar in the woods yonder. The womin folks was again hit from the start, +as, bless their hearts, they've always been again the cursed stuff. Hit +was Christmas week that the still was started goin', an' Christmas Eve +the ones running hit gave a big barbecue at the still to celebrate it. +Most everyone went, as they always did to doin's in the neighborhood. +Even my daddy an' two brothers, Ben an' Abe, went to see the fun as +they called hit, but mammy she was a good, religious woman, she staid +at home an' kept me with her. She would have liked to keep the other +boys with her too, but they had grown out of her control as boys +sometimes do." His bronzed face grew sadly thoughtful, as he continued, +"I recollect, I cried because I couldn't go too, but mother sang to me +an' tole me stories--mother was a powerful hand at telling the kind of +stories boys like an' I soon quit cryin' an' went to sleep quiet an' +happy with mother singing to me. Hit was the last time I ever heard +mammy sing. I reckon hit was 'bout midnight when a noise woke me up. +The door had been flung open--hit was never locked in them days--an' +father an' Abe came rushin' in. Father's face was white as a sheet +an' I'll never forget the look on mammy's face. Hit seemed as if she +knowed without a word from daddy what had happened. Thar was a curious +tremble in her voice as she asked, 'Whar's Ben?' At the sound of her +voice father broke down an' sobbed like a child. 'He's dead,' he cried. +'They've killed my boy Ben. Those Wrights have killed my boy Ben.'" + +The man paused as the recollection of that terrible scene crowded his +mind, while the two lads looked at each other with sympathetic horror. + +"No one seemed to know just how the trouble started," went on their +host, quietly. "All hands had taken a little too much liquor, there had +been a few hot words, a blow, an' Ben had keeled over with a knife in +his side. Then the fightin' started between the kin of both families, +an' daddy an' Abe had run home to git their guns. Sore at heart as +mammy was, she begged 'em not to shed no more blood but to leave it +to the cotes, for mammy, as I have said, was a religious woman. But +both Wrights and Turners came first from the mountains of Kentucky +whar man don't go to law again' man but settles his quarrels with his +rifle, An' so the blood-feud began. Thar was more than Ben killed that +night,--Wrights as well as Turners. When all had sobered up from the +liquor thar came a kind of lull or truce, but war always bruk out again +when either families got to drinkin'. They got Abe the followin' year, +but not 'fore he had shot a couple of Wrights. Hit was three years +afore they got father. Mother, she pined away an' died soon after they +got him. I think she was kinder glad to go, such things are wearin' on +a woman. An' so the killin's been goin' on ever since by spells when +the liquor gets to flowin'. I am the only Turner alive, now, though +thar's a few of my kin still scattered around hyar. I've been shot at +a powerful lot of times, but, I reckon, I've been lucky. Then too, +they ain't none of them hunted me so powerful hard, for I ain't took +no part in any of the killin's. I've shot a couple of times to scare +them away but not to kill. My own kin 'lows that I'm poor-spirited, but +somehow or other, I can't forget the look on mammy's face the night +Ben was killed. I don't want to be the cause of puttin' no such look +on any woman's face. I've knowed all these years though that my time +must come sooner or later. I heard to-day that the Wrights have got in +a lot of liquor from Tarpon Springs an' they are sayin' that the last +Turner has got to be wiped out of Judson. So, I got me in a store of +water an' grub an' fixed to lay low for awhile. I may be able to hold +out until their liquor is gone an' the danger is past, but I reckon hit +doan' make so powerful much of difference. They air plum' sho' to get +me sooner or later. Wall, that's the story, young fellows, hit's been +a right smart relief to have someone sympathetic to tell hit to. Don't +you worry none though. As soon as comes mornin' I'll hist a flag of +truce an' arrange to have you fellows let out peaceful. You can take +my boat an' go after your captain an' that little nigger, but I sho' +advise you not to stop hyar on youah way back. Keep right on to Tarpon +Springs. Some of my kin folks kin bring the sloop back from thar." + +"You are very good," Charley exclaimed. "But tell me why you have never +left this awful place. There are hundreds of places where you could +have made as good a living and been free from dread and worry." + +"Mammy's grave is out thar among them pines," said the man, simply, +"an' daddy's, an' Ben's, an' Abe's, then, atter all, this place is +home, no other place could be that." + +"I see," said Charley, much abashed. + +"I am proud to have met you, Mr. Turner," declared Walter, warmly. "I +think you are a noble man." + +"No? I sho' reckon you is mistaken," said the man in surprise. "Me +noble? I reckon not. My own kin 'lows I'm mighty poor-spirited 'cause I +won't take no hand in the killin'." + +"I don't care a cent what your kin says," began Walter, hotly, but he +was interrupted by the crack of a rifle, the whistle of a bullet, and +the howl of a dog outside. + +His host winced as if the bullet had struck his own body. "They've +killed Bet," he cried. "Bet, what I raised from a little bit of puppy. +They hadn't ought to go an' shoot a poor defenceless, dumb animal, hit +ain't right. My God, be they goin' to kill all my poor faithful dawgs," +he cried, as another shot rang out followed by another pitiless howl. + +Rifle shot followed rifle shot while the man stood trembling with eyes +flashing as he listened to the whining of the animals outside. At last, +heedless of the bullets pattering against the logs, he flung the door +wide open and called to the hounds. They came crowding in, a whining, +mangy, ill-looking pack, but disreputable as they were, they had been +the man's only friends through his lonely years and the two lads +respected him for his act. + +As soon as he had bolted the door again, he rummaged in a corner and +brought out three rifles. He handed one to each of the boys. "I reckon, +we'll have to watch at the loopholes now the dawgs air inside," he said +quietly. "You-alls can take the ones at the ends, I'll tend to the +sides. Be right careful 'bout standin' in front of 'em, a bullet might +pass through. An' don't shoot to kill if you can help it." + +"An' his kin people call that man poor-spirited," whispered Walter in +wonder to his chum as they took up their positions. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + +BESIEGED. + + +THE boys had little opportunity for conversation in their new rôle as +guards, being separated from each other by the length of the cabin. +Strange as was the position in which they found themselves, they felt +but little fear. The massive logs of which the cabin was constructed +bid defiance to the entry of a bullet, and neither of them could +believe that the affair would amount to more than a few shots being +fired at the building while the attacking party was under the influence +of the liquor they had drank. They believed that with the coming of +day the feudalists would disband and retire to their homes, while they +would be free to return to the rescue of their friends on the island. +Nevertheless, they were not going to take any chances in the duties as +sentinels. They stood well to one side of their loopholes and peeped +out at the little clearing plainly visible in the bright moonlight. + +"I reckon they can't see to shot through the loopholes, but you-alls +want to keep youah bodies out of line with them," cautioned Mr. Turner. +"Hit mought be that a stray bullet would pass through one of them. An' +don't either of you young fellows fire 'less you jes' have to. You +doan't want to get mixed up in this hyar quarrel. If yu' jis' naturally +have to shoot, aim low an' give it to 'em in the laigs." + +"There seems to be several of them gathering together at the edge of +the woods," called Charley anxiously. "Here they come straight for the +house!" + +His host darted to his side. "They've got a long pole an' air aiming to +batter down the door," he announced. "Keep back, boys, an' let me do +the talking an' shootin', if thar's got to be any." + +But the boys crowded close to his side, eager to view the coming +attack. + +There were about a dozen men in the approaching party and they advanced +at a rapid trot, bearing between them a huge pine log. + +"Halt whar you air," commanded Turner when they had approached to +within sixty feet of the house. "If you-alls come any closer meanin' +trouble, someone is goin' to get hurt." + +There were enough of timid spirits in the party to cause a halt in the +advance. + +"We're goin' to get youah hide this time, Bill Turner," shouted +the foremost of the gang, a big, heavily-whiskered man. "Hit's a +disgrace on us Wrights to have one of youah name livin' still in this +settlement. You're goin' to be done for this time." + +"Now, I ain't done nothin' to you-alls in all these years," said Turner +quietly and argumentatively. "You ain't got no cause to come 'round +hectoring me." + +"More shame for you," shouted the big man. "We're goin' to do you, +first, 'cause you're a Turner, second, 'cause you've been too +poor-spirited all these years to put up a man's fight." + +"Pears lak hit needs a powerful lot of yu to do fo' one, lone, +mean-spirited critter," said Turner, mildly. + +The big man stamped his foot with rage. "Hit don't take none but me," +he roared. "Yu come out hyar an' we'll have it out, man to man." + +"I ain't a-doubting you're courage, Jim Wright," returned the other, +slowly, "but I ain't aimin' to hurt no man 'less I have to. Besides, if +I did get the best of yu, all the rest of youah gang would come down on +me. Jes' keep away from my cabin, that's all I've got to say." + +"Come on, boys," roared the leader. "He's too mean-spirited to hurt a +fly. He can't shoot all of us, anyway." + +There was some hesitation, but his fellows, evidently, believed that +the man inside would not fire. Under the urging of their leader they +picked up the log and started on a run for the door. + +But they quickly discovered their mistake. From the loophole shot +out quick jets of flame as the man inside worked the lever of his +Winchester. The log dropped unheeded to the ground as its bearers +broke for the cover of the woods. Some were not able to run but limped +away groaning with pain. After the fleeing ones strode the big leader, +cursing them for cowards and imploring them to return to the assault. + +"I don't reckon I've hurt any one of them very much," Turner remarked, +as he slipped more shells into his rifle. "I jes' aimed for their +laigs." + +"Thank God, it has all ended without loss of life," Charley said +earnestly, but his host shook his head. + +"Hit ain't ended, hit's jes' begun, Jim Wright ain't one to be scart +out by a little lead. He don't know what fear is. If he can't get none +of 'em to come back with him, he'll come back alone. I wish you young +fellows were safe outer hyar, but it won't do for you to try to leave +now. Crazy drunk, like them fellows is, hit wouldn't be safe for you. +Maybe by morning they'll be sobered up enough to listen to reason." + +In spite of his words, the boys were hopeful that the night would pass +off without further trouble, but they were soon undeceived. Half an +hour had not passed when the big leader emerged from the woods followed +by a half a dozen of his fellow feudalists. + +His followers halted by the fallen log but he advanced boldly direct +for the loophole. + +"Keep away, for Gawd's sake, keep away, Jim," Turner implored. "I don't +want to have to shoot you." + +"Hit's you or me this time!" shouted the other, "The sun don't rise on +no living Turner in this town." + +"Keep back," warned Turner, thrusting his rifle through the loophole, +but even in his desperate situation, the boys, crowded close beside +him, and could see that he aimed only at the legs of the advancing man. + +Ruffian though he was, the other was not without brute courage. He +never paused in his advance. "Shoot," he shouted as he whipped out a +pistol, "Shoot, that's what I want yu to do." + +The two reports came almost together, but the pistol shot was a +fraction of a second ahead of the other. Like a fire-swept weed Turner +crumpled to the floor, his rifle exploding as he fell. + +The big man clapped one hand to his side and fell to the ground. + +With the report of his rifle, his followers had grabbed up the log and +rushed for the door, but Charley had been quick to see the danger. +Snatching up the rifle from the fallen man, he fired at the moving +legs as fast as he could work the lever. The whistling lead was more +than the assaulters could stand. Three dropped their hold on the log +and limped hurriedly for cover while their fellows, deprived of their +aid, could no longer sustain the heavy timber, which sank again to the +ground while they hastened after their wounded companions. + +The boys watched them in silence until they entered the woods then +Charley set down the rifle. + +"I don't think they will be back right away again," he said. "Anyway, +we have got to risk a light. Perhaps Mr. Turner is not dead." + +With hands that trembled with excitement Walter struck a match and lit +the lamp, then, the two boys lifted the prostrate man and laid him upon +the bed. "Keep watch at the loophole while I see if anything can be +done for him," Charley commanded. + +The man's shirt was matted with blood and the lad did not attempt +to take it off, but cut it away with his sheath knife, exposing the +white chest in the center of which gapped a horrible hole. "He's badly +wounded," he announced after a careful examination of the wound. +"There's two holes, one in his chest and one in his side. I believe the +bullet struck a rib and glanced, coming out at his side. If so, he will +pull through if I can only stop the blood flowing. I'll have to keep +this lamp lit for awhile even it is risky. I'll be as quick as I can." + +There was little in the rude cabin with which to do in such a case, +but the resourceful lad made the best of the situation, working with +feverish speed so as to be able to extinguish the lamp as soon as +possible. First, he washed out the wash basin thoroughly and filling it +with clean water from the barrel added to the water a generous handful +of salt. With this he washed the ugly-looking wound, then tearing into +pieces a fresh sheet he found lying on a shelf, he made a little wad +of rags with which, after soaking them in salt water, he plugged up +the gaping hole. Over this he bound wet strips of the sheet to hold it +securely in place. He was rewarded for his labor by seeing that the +flow of blood was quickly checked and soon ceased entirely. As soon as +he made certain of this, he extinguished the light and crept to his +chum's side. + +"I think he will pull out all right," he announced. "He is unconscious +yet, and when he does come to he'll be very weak from loss of blood. +Have you seen any more of those fellows?" + +"They're still in the woods around the clearing. Listen and you'll hear +their voices every now and then." + +"Has the man who was shot moved any?" + +"No, he lays just as he fell. I guess he's dead." + +"It's a horrible affair," said Charley with a shudder. "I'll never +forget this night. It has put us in a bad fix. We can't leave here now, +and I don't like the way the wind is coming up. If there's a heavy +storm, the captain and Chris will be in danger, it wouldn't take a very +heavy sea to cover that marsh. Just listen how it's blowing." + +Walter seemed not to hear what his chum was saying. He stood staring +out at the still figure stretched on the ground. "He hasn't moved, but +maybe he isn't dead," he said at last. "Perhaps, he is bleeding to +death and a little attention might save his life." + +"You're right," Charley exclaimed. "We must bring him in." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + +THE ENEMIES. + + +IT was a risky thing to attempt. To venture outside would be to expose +themselves in the bright moonlight to the bullets of the feudalists, +but the two plucky lads never hesitated. The body lay not a dozen steps +from the cabin and it would not do to let his fellows approach that +close to the little fort. Either they must save him themselves, if he +was not already dead, or leave him to die alone in the night. + +"We must be quick about it," Charley declared. "As soon as I unlatch +the door, we must run out, grab him by the shoulders, and drag him +in--he's too heavy to lift." + +In this bold move fortune seemed to favor the lads. They got their +heavy burden to the door before a shot was fired and, then, the bullets +whistled harmlessly above their heads. + +"We were lucky that time," Charley panted as he barred the door again. +"Now keep a sharp lookout. I'll have to light that lamp again." + +"This fellow is not so very badly hurt," he announced, as soon as he +had examined his new patient. "The bullet has gone right through the +fleshy part of his shoulder. He will come out of it all right if the +wound is kept clean." In a few minutes he had washed and dressed the +wound as he had the other man's, then, putting out the light once more, +he rejoined his companion at the loophole. "Anything stirring?" he +inquired. + +"No, I don't even hear their voices now. Perhaps they will not bother +us again to-night," Walter replied, hopefully. + +"I am not worrying about them as much as I am this wind," said his chum +gloomily. "We are safe enough here so long as the grub and water holds +out, but, God knows how it is faring with Chris and the captain." + +The gale was now howling and whistling around the little cabin with a +force to justify Charley's gloomy apprehension. The boys had to speak +loudly to make themselves heard above its uproar. They soon abandoned +all attempts at conversation and waited wearily and silently for +another assault from the feudalists and for the coming of day. + +Either the ruffians had at last become over-powered by the liquor they +had drank or else they had decided to wait the coming of day, for they +did not again show themselves in the clearing. Day, however, came at +last, after what seemed to the exhausted lads an age of waiting. + +As soon as it became light enough to see, Charley removed the bandages +from their stricken host and redressed his wound more carefully. "His +pulse is getting stronger and there is some color in his face," he +remarked to his chum. "I believe, I could bring him to, but I guess +it's best to let him lie unconscious as long as he can. He will suffer +enough when he does regain consciousness." + +As soon as he finished with Turner, Charley turned to his other +patient who was beginning to move uneasily and show signs of returning +consciousness. While he was yet bathing his wound the man opened his +eyes. + +"Gosh! how my shoulder hurts," he growled. "Be mighty careful how you +touch it, young fellow, or I'll skin you alive." + +Charley set aside the basin of water and rising to his feet looked down +on the fellow with a face full of scorn. + +"You great, big, drunken, cowardly murderer," he exclaimed. "It's a +pity that bullet didn't kill you. You are not fit to live on God's +green earth. You're shot when trying, with a crowd of your fellows, to +kill a lone, inoffensive man. Your friends don't think enough of you to +come back and get your carcass. We bring you in and care for you and +instead of thanks, your first words are a growl and a threat. You are a +cowardly, disgraceful cur,--that's what you are." + +Astonished rage filled the man's face. "No man ever said words like +that to Jim Wright and lived," he gasped. He attempted to rise but was +too weak to gain his feet, and sank back with a groan. + +"Oh, I guess you won't do any killing for a little while," sneered +Charley, whose anger was at white heat. "I've no doubt people have +been afraid to tell you the truth before, but you are going to hear +it for once in your life. I've no doubt with your strength and +disposition you've bullied everything until they are afraid to do +anything but flatter you, but, now you are going to take a dose of your +own medicine." Then, seating himself just out of reach of the man's +powerful arms, he proceeded to tell him what he thought of him in words +that stung with contempt and scorn. Then, as his anger subsided, he +repeated the story Turner had told him, contrasting Turner's quiet, +patient, peaceful heroism with the other's blood-thirstiness and +violence, with all the power of the earnestness he felt. + +At first the man kept interrupting him with curses and abuse, but as +he went calmly on ignoring the interruptions the fellow lay quiet, his +face turned to the wall. + +Once Charley stopped, thinking he might have fainted he lay so still, +but he spoke up gruffly. + +"Did I kill him?" + +"No, but it's not your fault that you didn't," the lad replied, curtly, +and went on with his arraignment. "I don't care a hang what you and +your cowardly fellows think," he concluded, "all decent people would +say that that poor fellow lying there is a brave hero while you are the +mean-spirited, cowardly one. And, now, if you'll lie quiet and keep +your mouth shut, I'll dress that wound. I hate to pollute my hands by +touching you, but it's got to be done." + +The man lay quiet while the lad washed and bound up his wound. Charley +could see that his features were working convulsively, but whether from +rage or pain he could not determine. + +As soon as his task was completed, Charley relieved his chum at the +loophole and Walter set about making coffee and cooking some breakfast. +They were both sadly in need of food and felt much better after they +had eaten. As soon as they had finished, Charley made his chum lie down +to take a nap, promising to call him, and lie down himself in a couple +of hours. + +While Walter was asleep Turner came out of the deep swoon which had +followed his wound. He was weak and in terrible pain but in full +possession of his senses. It was evident that he was greatly bewildered +at the sight of his enemy lying helpless on the floor, and Charley +explained the situation to him in a few words. + +"I sho' am glad I didn't kill him," said the sick man, thankfully. "I +jes' shot at his laigs, the gun must have gone off when I fell. I am +sho' sorry I hurt you so bad, Jim, I didn't aim for to do hit." + +But Wright kept his face turned to the wall and answered not a word. + +As the morning advanced Charley was much puzzled by the constant sound +of hammering coming from the woods near the clearing. It was evident +their enemies were preparing another surprise but he could not guess at +its nature. + +All the morning long the hammering continued, then shortly before noon +there emerged from the woods an object which caused him at first, to +stare in bewildered surprise, and, then, as it drew nearer the cabin to +send him to shaking Walter, whom he had let sleep on. + +"Wake up! Wake up!" he cried. "We have got to fight for our lives. +Those fellows have built a heavy breastwork on the front of a wagon and +are shoving it ahead of them up to the cabin." + +"Young fellows! help me up and help me to that loophole," gruffly +commanded the wounded man on the floor. "Don't hesitate," he cried as +the lad was about to refuse the surprising command, "them fellows have +got a couple of sticks of dynamite in that cart an' if they get near +enough to throw it thar won't be enough left of this cabin to make a +good toothpick. We was aiming to use it last night if we couldn't get +Turner no other way." + +Between them the two startled lads got the big fellow on his feet and +supported him to the loophole where he leaned against the logs, his +face twitching with the pain of his effort. + +It was just in time, for the wagon with its burden of death was scarce +a hundred feet away when he shouted: "Stop where yer are, boys. Thar +ain't no call to throw any of that stuff." + +"Is that you, Cap?" called one of the men. "Why, we 'lowed yer was +dead." + +"An' I might have been for all of yu fellows, leaving me to die on the +ground like a poisoned dog." + +He paused while a chorus of excuses came from the men behind the +breastwork. + +"Well, I ain't dead, but it ain't no thanks to yu fellows," he went on +slowly and painfully. "Now, yu fellows jes' roll that wagon back whar +hit came from an' go home and behave yerselves. Yu fellows know me +an' know I'll do what I say. Hit's jes' come to me, an' hit's come in +a powerful rough way, that I've been powerful mean, pisen an' onery. +My eyes am sho' opened at last, an' I'm powerful ashamed of how I've +been carryin' on. But hit's all over now. From now on Bill Turner is +my friend, an' the man that lifts a finger again' him lifts it again' +me, an' me an' my close kin will make this place too hot to hold him. +That's all I've got to say. Now, go home." + +Murmurs of astonishment arose from the men behind the wagon as they +slowly but obediently backed the wagon towards the woods. Over the face +of the wounded man on the bed stole a look of joy unspeakable. + +The bewildered but delighted boys helped Wright back to his place on +the floor. + +"I want to shake hands with you, Mr. Wright," said Charley, earnestly. +"I am afraid I talked pretty rough to you." + +"I needed hit," said the other as he took the proffered hand. "Hit's a +pity, young fellow, that thar ain't more like yu down in this neck of +thar woods." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + +THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN. + + +LEAVING the boys safe from the danger that had threatened them, let us +return to the castaways whom we left confronted by that menace, the +most grewsome of all to shipwrecked sailors, the lack of water. + +The sponger captain needed no explanation but the captain's simple +words to realize the terrible tortures and awful death that awaited +them all if help in some shape did not soon come to their rescue. His +bronzed face grew white beneath it's coat of tan. + +"I am frightfully thirsty, already," he exclaimed, "Is there no way we +can reach the mainland. Thar's water in plenty thar." + +"If we were birds or fish, we might get thar, I reckon," replied +Captain Westfield, "but, being as we are only human beings, I calculate +it ain't no way possible." + +The Conch eyed the raging water that stretched between the little +island and the shore. + +"A strong swimmer might make it," he observed, musingly. "I've swum +farther many a time but it was when I was in a sight better shape than +I am now." + +"Yes, I reckon a right powerful swimmer might make it," assented the +captain, "but this little fellow and I are not equal to it, we'd never +reach the land." + +"I believe I could do it even now," said the sponger calculatingly, +"but I won't desert yo' two Yo' saved my life an' I'd be worse than a +Greek to leave yo' here." + +"If you can do it, go ahead, man," said the old sailor. "You can't do +us any good by staying. Better save your own life," but the Conch shook +his head sadly. + +"My life ain't worth much, now," he said sadly. "My little ship's +gone, all my brave comrades drowned, an' everything I had in the world +lost. I've not much to live for now." + +"Bosh, man," said the old sailor, "I reckon, thar's always something +for a man to live for as long as the Good Lord let him live. If thar +wasn't the Lord wouldn't let him live." + +But the Conch was not to be comforted, the full extent of his loss was +beginning to make itself felt as he regained his strength and the full +possession of his senses after his terrible ordeal. He soon moved a +little apart from the two castaways, and, seating himself on the sand +buried his face in his hands. The two watchers could see the tears +trickling between his fingers and they turned away greatly moved at +that most impressive of sights, the grief of a strong man, ashamed of +displaying his tears. When they looked again he was on his knees and +his bowed head showed that he was praying. When he rejoined them, his +manner was filled with the calm and quietness of one who has found +peace for his afflictions. + +"I see there is no wood here with which to build a raft," he observed. +"Things look pretty bad, but they say the darkest hour is just before +the dawn. We must take courage. Yo'r young friends may return with help +at any hour." + +The captain shook his head sadly. "Something has happened to them or +they would have been back long ago. They cannot return now until the +storm is over." + +"It cannot last much longer," declared the Conch, confidently. "It is +losing force now, I believe it will blow out by morning." + +"Maybe, but it will take a long time for the sea to go down so a boat +can live in it, and, in the meantime we have no water." + +"We must not give way to despair," said the Conch, who seemed like +another man after his devotions. "Let's dig another well right in the +midst of the island, perhaps we can get water fit to drink." + +With but little hope the three fell to work and by noon had dug a hole +to water, but they had only their labor for their pains, the water +was salt, bitter, and undrinkable. Indeed their labor was worse than +fruitless for their exertions had greatly increased their thirst. + +Chris kindled a fire and roasted some of the turtle meat and eggs, but +the castaways only partook of a few mouthfuls, as eating seemed but to +increase their thirst. + +The Conch had lost his hat when wrecked and Chris, observing his bare +head, set about braiding him another hat from the green palmetto leaves. + +The Sponger watched him with interest. "Do yo' think yo' could make a +water-tight mat of that stuff?" he enquired, eagerly. + +"Golly! I reckon, dis nigger could," declared the little darkey. "I'se +done made baskets ob hit dat would hold water like a bucket." + +"How long would it take yo' to make a mat four feet square?" + +The little negro considered, "I guess I could do hit in a day." + +"Then drop that hat business and get to work on hit. Work like yo' +never did before. There's a chance, jes' a chance, that it will be the +saving of us. Captain, there is work for us to do. Get the entrails out +of one of those turtle shells. Clean them out good, pack them full of +sand, and stretch them out in the sun to dry. I've got a plan in mind. +It may fail, but it's worth trying. Be careful not to break the skins." + +It was evident from the man's manner that he was intensely in earnest +and the old sailor lost no time in asking idle questions but went +quickly to work at the task assigned him. In a short time he had +cleaned and washed out the turtle entrails and filling them with dry +sand stretched them out to dry in the hot sun. When thus prepared they +formed a kind of small hose some thirty feet in length. + +While he was thus engaged, the Conch dragged the empty shell down to +the water and cleaned and washed it out thoroughly. Leaving it near +the water's edge, he collected and piled close beside it, a heap of +dry wood. Then he returned to where Chris was working and fell to +helping him by stripping and preparing the palmetto buds for the little +darkey's nimble fingers. + +Just before sundown he carefully removed the sand from the dried +entrails and was in possession of a long, tough waterproof hose without +hole or break in it. + +Night brought no cessation of the strange labor. A fire was kindled +beside the little darkey and he plaited on by its light while the +captain and the Conch kept him supplied with palmetto strips. + +About midnight Chris held up his work with a weary sigh; "Hit's done," +he announced. + +"Now for the test," cried the Conch, trembling with excitement. + +Taking the strong, flexible, green mat he hurried down to the turtle +shell which he had filled half full of sea water. Placing the mat +over the top of the shell, he bound it firmly in place with wisps of +palmetto leaves. Then, cutting a small hole in the center of the mat, +he inserted in it one end of the strange hose, packing wet sand around +it to make it air-tight. He next coiled down the hose in the edge of +the sea and placed the other end of it in the empty turtle shell. Then, +heaping wood around the mat-covered shell, he started a fire. + +The Captain and Chris at last understood his plan. With his rude +contrivance, he was going to try to distill fresh water from salt after +the manner they do on big steamships with costly and complicated +apparatus. The steam from the heated water was supposed to escape from +the shell through the hose. In passing through it it would become +chilled when the hose was coiled down in the cold sea water and, +condensing into water again, reach the other shell fresh and free from +salt. + +In theory the plan was perfect, but would the rude contrivance do the +work? + +The three thirsty watchers fairly held their breath as they kept the +fire roaring around the shell and awaited results. At last tiny wisps +of steam began to trickle through the closely-woven mat. Tiny drops of +moisture were dropping from the end of the hose. These grew larger and +larger until at last a tiny stream of water trickled forth. + +They danced and shouted for joy. "It works! It works!" they cried. + +But thirsty though they were they had to possess their souls in +patience and wait for the process worked very slowly. All night they +staid by the shells keeping the fire going. Just at day-break the Conch +gave the command to put out the fire. In the other shell was several +gallons of clear, pure water. As soon as it had cooled sufficiently +they dipped it up with shells and drank greedily. It was slightly +bitter and tasteless but never did drink taste better to parched +throats. With the satisfying of their thirst, came hunger and they all +made a hearty meal off the roasted meat and eggs left from dinner. +Just as the sun arose they lay down to sleep completely exhausted but +with thankfulness to God in their hearts. Their greatest danger was +past. They had water and food in abundance, and the storm was slowly +but surely subsiding. + +They slept through the long day, awakening only when the shades of +night began to fall. Then after satisfying their hunger and thirst, +they lay down and slept until morning came. + +They opened their eyes upon a clear, still day. The storm had gone and +the sea was growing calm. Far to the South there showed on the blue +water a tiny patch of white,--a sail. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + +THE RESCUE. + + +THE castaways watched the distant sail with mingled feelings of joy and +suspense. Was it the boys, or was it merely a strange craft beating up +the coast? Would it pass near the island or would it go by too far out +for them to make their presence known? These were the questions they +debated as they strained their eyes on the distant patch of white. + +One thing soon became evident to the eager watchers, the sail was +steadily growing larger. Although the storm had passed and the sea +subsided there was still a brisk breeze blowing and each passing hour +brought the stranger craft visibly nearer. No thought of breakfast +entered the castaways' minds, all their attention was fixed on the +approaching sail. + +At last it became evident that the vessel was a small sloop, that it +was headed directly for the island and that it was rolling and pitching +frightfully in the still heavy seas. + +On it came, plunging and tossing like a frightened steed and sending +showers of spray from its cut water. At last it was close enough to +discover two figures on its decks, one at the wheel, the other forward, +tending the jib sheet. + +"Hit's Massa Charley and Massa Walter," shouted the sharp-eyed Chris. +"Praise de Lawd, Praise de Lawd," and his over-joyed companions shouted +a fervent "Amen." + +The sloop came steadily on, passing the island and rounding up under +its lee as near as its young captain dared to approach. Anchor was +dropped, sails lowered, and launching a small boat it carried on deck, +its crew of two came sculling for the shore. + +And what a demonstration of joy there was when it grounded on the sands +and the chums so long separated and so long beset with perils were +once more reunited. Such hand-wringings and congratulations, and eager +questions and chorused answers. All happy. All excited. All talking at +once, and no one making himself thoroughly understood in the general +clamor. + +But Charley soon interrupted the talk-feast. "We will be here all day +at this rate," he said, laughing. "We had better get on board and get +under way. That sloop is pretty old and cranky for these waters and +we'd better get back as soon as we can for fear another squall will +come up. We can tell our stories on the way." + +The suggestion was wise and as none cared to linger long on the +dreary little island which had been the scene of so much anxiety and +suffering, there was no delay in carrying it out. All climbed into the +little boat and were carried out to the sloop. Her sails were hoisted, +her anchor weighed, and her bowsprit headed South for Tarpon. Down in +the sloop's cabin the castaways found a hot meal of ham, eggs, potatoes +and coffee waiting for them, which Walter had prepared as a pleasant +surprise. In their excitement they had forgotten they were hungry, but +they remembered it now and fell upon the tasty food with appetites that +only left bare dishes when satisfied, at last. The boys had brought a +pile of clothing with them, and after a wash-down in cool sea water, +the castaways threw away their soiled, tattered garments, and, fed, +washed, and freshly clothed, felt like new men. + +The Captain's eyes danced with joy when Walter presented him with a +pipe and tobacco he had brought with him. + +Later all gathered around the wheel and stories and experiences were +exchanged, but the reader is already familiar with the most of them. + +"Even after the trouble was all over we couldn't get away at once," +Charley said, concluding his tale. "I can tell you we were worried to +have to lay around and wait for the storm to pass, knowing that you and +Chris must be in danger on the island. The people were awfully good to +us after the feud was ended. They could not do enough for us. They even +wanted to give us money, but of course we couldn't take that. As soon +as the wind went down we borrowed this boat of Mr. Turner and started +out. We are to leave her at Tarpon and he will get her from there." + +"Well, all's well that ends well, I reckon," said the captain, puffing +in supreme content. "We are safe an' well now an' while we ain't got +much money, we will have the 'Beauty' as soon as she comes into port, +an' she's jes' the same as two thousand dollars in the bank." + +"And we will have another try for that gold when we get her," Charley +declared. "I figure that those fellows had to cast loose during the +storm and scud before it. They could not ride it out at anchor. Now +that the buoy's gone, it will take them a long time to locate the gold +again. We, knowing the latitude and longitude can get back to the spot +before they can find it and get all the gold removed, if we can get a +revenue cutter at Tarpon, as I think we can." + +The Captain's face was filled with dismay. "I've clean forgot the +figures, boys," he exclaimed. "I put it down in the log all ship-shape, +the latitude and longitude, but I've clean forgot what it was. I ain't +got no memory for figures." + +It was a heavy blow for the golden-hopes of the two boys and a silence +of disappointment followed the old sailor's announcement. + +"It's no use crying over spilt milk," said Charley, at last, +cheerfully. "We have still got the schooner, and, with the money we get +from her, we can make a good start at something else." + +"You have still good cause for rejoicing," observed the sponger +captain. "You will still have your vessel, but I have lost my all." + +The two chums were not the boys to give way to repining and they were +soon again as bright and cheerful spirits as if their brightest hopes +had been realized. + +It was midnight when the little sloop at last crept into the harbor of +Tarpon. It was useless to go ashore at such an hour so the little party +made everything snug aboard and turned in on deck for a few hours' +sleep. + +They were up early next morning, and, after a hasty breakfast, hurried +ashore to notify the Commissioner of their arrival and get him to take +steps for the seizure of the "Beauty" as soon as she reached port. + +Mr. Driver was standing out in front of his store as they came up the +street. Amazement and incredulity filled his face when he sighted them. + +"You!" he cried, "Why, I thought you were all at the bottom of the +Gulf." + +"No, we are slightly disfigured but still in the ring," laughed Charley +as he shook hands. "Our schooner has not come in yet, has she?" + +Mr. Driver stared at him for a second. "There's a mystery here," he +declared. "Come on into the store, and let's hear your story." + +Seated in the store's little back room, Charley recounted their +adventures while Mr. Driver listened attentively. When he had +concluded, Mr. Driver remained silent for a moment. + +"I hate to be the teller of bad news," he said, at last, "but you must +learn it, and it had better come from a friend. Your schooner is lost +with all hands on board." + +"Lost!" cried all together. + +"Yes, she went down at anchor during the storm. The Greek sponger +'Zenephone' was passing when she went under. Not a man was saved. +Every one on the 'Zenephone' wondered why she did not scud before it +instead of hanging to her anchor. I understand now. They did not want +to leave the neighborhood of the gold." + +It was a heavy blow. At one sweep they were robbed of their all. The +little band of chums sat paralyzed with grief, looking helplessly at +each other. Mr. Driver arose quietly and closed the door softly behind +him, leaving them alone with their grief. + +For a few moments no one spoke. "It's hard, but it must be met," sighed +Walter at last. "What are we going to do? We have nothing left now, not +even the clothes we wear." + +"God knows," answered Charley, hopelessly, at a loss for once. "I +suppose we will have to hunt work at something or other." + +"And likely be scattered and separated for the first time in years," +exclaimed the captain. + +"That's the worst of it," agreed Walter, sadly. "I don't mind working +but I hate for us all to have to drift apart." + +"Me too," wailed Chris. "Golly! I don't want to be with no one but +you-alls." + +"I don't believe the 'Beauty' is lost," Charley declared. "I believe +this is just another of Manuel's tricks. He is as sharp a rascal as +ever lived. I'll bet she is safe and sound somewhere and that Manuel +just bought the Greeks on the 'Zenephone' to tell that story." + +"Maybe," admitted the captain, doubtfully. "The story rings true, +though. It would have been likely for them to hang to their anchor by +the gold." + +"And it would be just the kind of details Manuel would think of, +knowing we would be more likely to believe the story if we escaped +alive. He is an artist at rascality." + +"Even if you're right, I reckon it won't help us much," said the old +sailor. "The story's tied our hands all right. The Commissioner won't +do anything just on our suspicions, an' we ain't got any money to do +anything ourselves." + +"I feel that Charley is right," Walter declared, "but we've got only +one chance to prove it. Get to work, get some money and hire a Greek +detective to look into the matter for us. The first question is, what +can we do to earn money?" + +They were engaged in a fruitless discussion on this point when Mr. +Driver entered. He heard their discussion with sympathetic interest. + +"There is no work around here," he declared. "The Greeks work cheaper +than an American can. It's hard for an American to earn a bare living +here. I understand from what you say that you do not want to be +separated. I might find work for one of you, but I couldn't for all. +There is only one suggestion I can make in such a case." + +"Please give it to us," Walter requested. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + +CONCLUSION. + + +"WELL," said Mr. Driver, "there is a large fish-house at Clearwater, +twenty miles below here. You probably could get a job fishing for it. +You could all work together then. It is hard, dirty work but there is +pretty good money in it if a man works hard." + +The chums exchanged glances. + +"I believe we will try it," Charley said. "Of course we will have to +talk it over before we decide, but there does not seem to be anything +else we can do." + +"Very well," said Mr. Driver, "I'll give you a letter to the fish boss, +I know him personally. And you'll need a little money to pay your fares +there. You can return it when you get to earning." + +The chums thanked the kind-hearted storekeeper for his advice and +assistance and adjourned to the sidewalk where they discussed the +matter earnestly. It did not take them long to decide to follow Mr. +Driver's suggestion. They bid good-bye to the sponger captain, who +decided to remain in Tarpon and try to get service on one of Mr. +Williams' schooners, and, accepting the loan of ten dollars, which Mr. +Driver pressed upon them, they boarded the first train going South and +soon landed in the little town of Clearwater. And there, we must leave +them for the present. + + +THE END. + + * * * * * + +Transcriber's Notes: + +Obvious punctuation errors repaired. The original text had no table of +contents. One was created to aid the reader. Chapter I is untitled. + +Page 3, "tatooed" changed to "tattooed" (tattooed arms and rolling) + +Page 10, two lines were transposed. The original read: + + shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoul- + up with the money by to-morrow night I'll close up + ders. "You know what I say. If you don't come + this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining + +Page 14, "hundreth" changed "hundredth" (a hundredth part of) + +Page 43, "alloted" changed to "allotted" (allotted to their boat) + +Page 62, "along" changed to "alone" (worse than being alone) + +Page 74, repeated word "see" removed from text Original read: (I don't +see see what his object) + +Page 78, "Manual" changed to "Manuel" (Manuel approached Captain) + +Page 85, "blow" changed to "below" (been below for only) + +Page 89, "exclaimation" changed to "exclamation" (an exclamation of +surprise) + +Page 93, "captian" changed to "captain" (the captain declared) + +Page 100, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (gaping hole in her) + +Page 101, "was" changed to "were" (There were no) + +Page 102, "that" changed to "than" (time than it has) + +Page 105, "aim" changed to "air" (working the air pump) + +Page 109, "baton" changed to "beaten" (Greeks had been badly beaten) + +Page 128, "averge" changed to "average" (better than average marksmen) + +Page 164, "squaking" changed "squawking" (marsh hens, the squawking) + +Page 190, "minues" changed to "minutes" (in a few minutes he) + +Page 203, "taveling" changed to "traveling" (further traveling +dangerous) + +Page 231, repeated word "is" removed from text. Original read: (awhile +even it is is risky) + +Page 231, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (up the gaping hole) + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by +Wilmer M. Ely + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 44394 *** diff --git a/44394-h/44394-h.htm b/44394-h/44394-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..15db458 --- /dev/null +++ b/44394-h/44394-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,8805 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=UTF-8" /> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by Wilmer M. Ely. + </title> + <style type="text/css"> + +body { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + + p {margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + text-indent: 1.25em; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + img {border: 0;} + .tnote {border: dashed 1px; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em;} + .copyright {text-align: center; font-size: 70%;} + .adtitle2 {font-size: 150%; font-weight: bold; text-align: center;} + + .author {font-size: 120%; text-align: center;} + .authorof {font-size: 70%; text-align: center;} + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold; font-size: 90%;} + .poem2 {margin-left: 15%; text-align: left;} + .footnotes {border: dashed 1px;} + .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} + .fnanchor {vertical-align:baseline; + position: relative; + bottom: 0.33em; + font-size: .8em; + text-decoration: none;} + + + h1,h2,h3 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; +} + + +hr { + width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; +} + +hr.chap {width: 65%} + + + +table { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; +} + +.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ + /* visibility: hidden; */ + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; +} /* page numbers */ + + +/* Images */ +.figcenter { + margin: auto; + text-align: center; +} + + + + + </style> + </head> +<body> +<div>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 44394 ***</div> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 502px;"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" width="502" height="800" alt="cover" /> +</div> +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 303px;"> +<img src="images/i002.jpg" width="303" height="500" alt="Charley pointing rifle" /> +<div class="caption">"Charley leveled his gun and sent sixteen shrieking bullets just +above the wheelman's head."</div> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[1]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 310px;"> +<img src="images/i003.jpg" width="310" height="500" alt="title page" /> +</div> +<h1>The Boy Chums<br /> +In the Gulf of Mexico</h1> + + +<div class='center'><small>OR</small><br /> +<br /> +On a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek<br /> +Spongers<br /> +<br /> +<span class='author'><span class="smcap">By</span> WILMER M. ELY</span><br /> +<span class='authorof'>Author of "The Boy Chums on Indian River," "The Boy<br /> +Chums on Haunted Island," "The Boy Chums in<br /> +the Forest," "The Boy Chums' Perilous Cruise."</span><br /> + +<br /><br /> +A. L. BURT COMPANY<br /> +NEW YORK<br /> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[2]</a></span></p> + + + + +<div class='copyright'> +Copyright 1913<br /> +<span class="smcap">By A. L. Burt Company</span><br /> +<br /> +THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO<br /> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + + + + +<div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="contents and book spine"> +<tr><td align="left"><img src="images/spine.jpg" width="97" height="500" alt="spine" /> +</td> +<td align="left"><div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> +<tr><td align="right">I.</td> +<td align="left"> </td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_3">3</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">II.</td> +<td align="left">MR. DRIVER.</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_11">11</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">III.</td> +<td align="left">PREPARATIONS</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_19">19</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">IV.</td> +<td align="left">THE START</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_27">27</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">V.</td> +<td align="left">THE START</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_36">36</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">VI.</td> +<td align="left">FIRST TROUBLE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_45">45</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">VII.</td> +<td align="left">SPONGING</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_53">53</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">VIII.</td> +<td align="left">TROUBLE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_61">61</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">IX.</td> +<td align="left">MANUEL'S RELEASE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_68">68</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">X.</td> +<td align="left">A RASH RESOLVE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_76">76</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XI.</td> +<td align="left">A MYSTERY</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_84">84</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XII.</td> +<td align="left">IN A DIVING SUIT</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_94">94</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XIII.</td> +<td align="left">A CLOSE CALL</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_100">100</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XIV.</td> +<td align="left">THE DISCUSSION</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_107">107</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XV.</td> +<td align="left">A DESPERATE PLAN</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_115">115</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XVI.</td> +<td align="left">TOO LATE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_122">122</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XVII.</td> +<td align="left">OUTWITTED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XVIII.</td> +<td align="left">IMPRISONED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_136">136</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XIX.</td> +<td align="left">WRECKED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_144">144</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XX.</td> +<td align="left">HUNTING HELP</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_152">152</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXI.</td> +<td align="left">THE CASTAWAYS</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_159">159</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXII.</td> +<td align="left">ANOTHER DANGER</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_167">167</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXIII.</td> +<td align="left">THE RELAPSE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_175">175</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXIV.</td> +<td align="left">THE FLOOD</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_182">182</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXV.</td> +<td align="left">THE FLOATING HATCH</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_189">189</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXVI.</td> +<td align="left">WITH THE BOYS</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_197">197</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXVII.</td> +<td align="left">THE JOURNEY</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_205">205</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXVIII.</td> +<td align="left">JUDSON</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_212">212</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXIX.</td> +<td align="left">THE FEUD</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_219">219</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXX.</td> +<td align="left">BESIEGED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_225">225</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXI.</td> +<td align="left">THE ENEMIES</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_233">233</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXII.</td> +<td align="left">THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_240">240</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXIII.</td> +<td align="left">THE RESCUE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_247">247</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXIV.</td> +<td align="left">CONCLUSION</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_255">255</a></td> +</tr> +</table></div></td></tr> +</table></div> + + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[3]</a></span></p> + + + + +<div class='adtitle2'>THE BOY CHUMS<br /> + +IN THE GULF OF MEXICO</div> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER I.</h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">It's</span> just like stepping suddenly into a strange +country. I am glad we came even if we decide not +to go into the business."</p> + +<p>The speaker, a sturdy, manly-looking boy of eighteen, +was one of a party of four persons who were +strolling along a street in the Greek section of +Tarpon Springs, a small Florida town, located on +the Anclote River, a few miles from the Gulf of +Mexico. His companions were a boy about his +own age but of less robust appearance, a little negro +lad with a good-humored intelligent face, and a +middle-aged, heavily-bearded, blue-eyed man whose +tattooed arms and rolling gait told of a life spent on +tossing seas and whose confident bearing and air of +authority stamped him as one above the rank of a +common sailor.</p> + +<p>Those who have followed The Boy Chums<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[4]</a></span> +through their many adventures will recognize in +the little party their old friends Charley West, +Walter Hazard, Captain Westfield and the Bahama +lad, Chris, who lately returned from a perilous trip +along the Atlantic beach searching for wreckage, +and now seeking some promising venture in which +to invest the Fifteen Hundred Dollars they earned +on that voyage.</p> + +<p>"You're right, Charley," agreed the other boy. +"I didn't know before that there was a sight like +this in Florida. Here's a bench. Let's set down +and rest a bit. I am tired from walking."</p> + +<p>"Golly, I reckon dis nigger's tired some too," +chimed in the little darkey, "I'se dun had de toothache +in mah legs for most an hour, but I'se had to +keep up wid you-alls. Don't dare let you white +chillen prognostracate 'round a queer place like dis +alone."</p> + +<p>The seat selected was a long bench standing on +the edge of the sidewalk, its back to the sandy street. +The four seated themselves at one end and gazed +around with eager interest at the strange scene, unconscious +of the curious glances bestowed upon them +by a large, deeply-tanned man, who, seated on +the other end of the bench, was languidly whittling +on a piece of white pine with a large sheaf knife.</p> + +<p>The scene was one to arouse more than passing +interest. Up and down the sidewalk hurried<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[5]</a></span> +swarthy-faced, powerfully-built men of all ages and +appearances, but all possessed of the same clear-cut +features and straight noses. Singly and in groups +of two and three, they hurried past, picturesque in +their bright-colored clothing with gaudy sashes +knotted about their waists. About all clustered an +air of energy and bustle uncommon to sleepy Florida +towns.</p> + +<p>Built up close to the inner edge of the sidewalk +was a row of large buildings startling in their coats +of bright yellow, red, blue, and green paint. +Stretching away, close together in the distance, they +gave one the impression of a gigantic rainbow. +Through their wide-open doors and windows the interested +onlookers could gain a plain view of the interiors, +from which came the confused jangle of +foreign tongues. To the right of where the little +party sat was a busy grocery store, its windows +filled with strings of dried garlic, strange-looking +cheeses, queer nuts and fruits and a multitude of +eatables strange to American eyes. To the left of +them was a tobacco factory, the whirling machines +shredding up the huge brown leaves into hair-like +fibers and binding them up into pound packages. +Directly before them was a great hall filled with +little tables around which were seated groups of the +regular-featured men, playing cards, eating, or puffing +at strange pipes, with a small hose for a stem, +the smoke passing through great glass vessels partly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span> +filled with rose water before it reached the smoker's +lips.</p> + +<p>"That's the fifteenth place of that kind I've +counted to-day," remarked Charley West. "From +their numbers, one would imagine that these people +did nothing but eat and play cards."</p> + +<p>"I'd like to try one of them pipes," said Captain +Westfield, wistfully. "I'll bet they give a good, +cool smoke."</p> + +<p>"Let's go in and get dinner," Walter suggested. +"I am hungry as a wolf and that food smells +mighty good. You can try a pipe after we eat, Captain."</p> + +<p>The man at the end of the bench shifted his position +closer to them.</p> + +<p>"Strangers here?" he enquired.</p> + +<p>"Just came in this morning. We're looking into +the sponge business a bit," replied the Captain.</p> + +<p>Charley eyed the tanned man closely. There was +a sinister expression to the fellow's face, and his +eyes shifted uneasily away from the lad's level +glance. The keen-witted boy was not favorably +impressed with the stranger's appearance, but the +man's cordiality drove away his faint feeling of +distrust.</p> + +<p>"I'll go in with you then," he offered. "Those +fellows don't speak much English and you would +have a hard job making them understand what<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[7]</a></span> +you wanted. I know a little Greek and may be able +to help you out a bit."</p> + +<p>"Much obliged to you," said the Captain, gratefully. +"We don't understand a word of their +lingo. I'll stand treat to the dinner if you'll eat with +us."</p> + +<p>"It's a go," agreed the stranger, quickly. "Come +on. My name's Robert, Captain Roberts," he volunteered +when the little party were seated around +one of the tables, "I'm a retired ship's master."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield introduced himself and his +companions. "As I said, we are lookin' into this +sponge business a bit, but it's hard to pick out the +proper course from these twisted-tongued furriners," +he said. "Do you happen to know anything +about it?"</p> + +<p>"I used to be in the business myself," Captain +Roberts replied promptly. "I made enough money +in it to quit the sea for good."</p> + +<p>"Then I reckon you're the very man to give us a +few pointers. Is there as much money in it as one +hears tell of?"</p> + +<p>"More," declared the other. "These Greeks are +getting rich off sponging. It is not anything unusual +for a schooner's crew to clear up three or four +thousand dollars from a single trip. It takes quite +a bit of money to make a start, though."</p> + +<p>"We have got a little change in our clothes,"<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span> +said the Captain, modestly. "Do you reckon a person +could get started good on a Thousand dollars?"</p> + +<p>"That would do nicely," declared Captain Roberts, +"and I can tell you just how to lay it out to the +best advantage, but let's order dinner first. We can +talk while we are eating."</p> + +<p>He beckoned to a dark-skinned, ill-favored waiter +and gave an order in low-pitched fluent Greek.</p> + +<p>The waiter was back almost instantly with a tray-load +of steaming dishes which he placed upon the +table. The boys could not determine the exact nature +of the strange viands, but they were too hungry +to be critical, and attacked the food with hearty +appetites.</p> + +<p>"This mutton stew is delicious," Charley declared +as he took another helping. "I don't know +as I ever tasted anything better."</p> + +<p>Captain Roberts grinned. "You don't want to +make any guesses about Greek food," he declared. +"That isn't mutton, but just tough old Billy-goat, +fattened on a diet of tin cans. These fellows have +the knack of fixing up such things so they can't +recognize them themselves. Just wait till the +coffee is served. You'll say you never drank any +better. But let's get back to that sponging business +now, Captain."</p> + +<p>He and Captain Westfield were soon plunged in +a tangled maze of talk about schooners, diving boats, +sponges, and divers.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys gave but little heed to the discussion for +their attention was partly diverted by the unusual +scene around them.</p> + +<p>"It's just like being in another country," Walter +whispered to his chum.</p> + +<p>"Yes, but I don't like the attention we seem +to receive," Charley replied. "Those fellows are +staring at us as though there was something wrong +in our being here."</p> + +<p>The Greeks gathered around the other tables +indeed seemed more than casually interested in the +little party. They stared frequently at them and +their new acquaintance, and exchanged significant +glances and low words with each other.</p> + +<p>"I guess we appear as odd to them as they do to +us," Walter said, carelessly. "There is a man who +is not a Greek. That fellow leaning against the +end of the counter in the corner."</p> + +<p>The man indicated was unmistakably an American. +He was short, heavily-built and had a determined, +aggressive face. He was engaged in a heated +discussion with the proprietor of the cafe and his +heavy face was flushed with anger. As the boys +gazed curiously, he brought down his clenched fist +on the counter with a force that shattered some of +the dishes piled upon it.</p> + +<p>"You needn't smirk, grin, and make excuses," he +thundered at the suave, smiling Greek. "You've +got to pay me that bill you owe me. It's been standing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span> +for months and I happen to know that you are +making money all the time, hand over fist. It's no +use pretending you don't understand me," he +shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoulders. +"You know what I say. If you don't come +up with the money by to-morrow night I'll close up +this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining +goods under false pretences. And it will not be any +use for you to try your nice little Greek trick of a +knife in my back in the dark. I go heeled and I +don't go to sleep when I walk this street. The +fellow who tries that trick on me will stop enough +lead to start a cartridge factory."</p> + +<p>He turned and was walking towards the door +when his glance rested for a moment on the boys +and their companions. His glance swept swiftly +over each member of the little party. He paused, +hesitated a moment, then turning, walked swiftly +towards their table.</p> + +<p>Captain Roberts rose hastily at his approach. +"There's a friend of mine over there," he said hurriedly, +"who I want to speak to. I'll be back in a +minute."</p> + +<p>The approaching stranger noted his departure +with a grim smile. He stopped beside the Captain +and stood gazing down for one brief minute.</p> + +<p>"Are you fools or strangers?" he demanded, +crisply.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER II.<br /> + +<small>MR. DRIVER.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> stranger's smile robbed his words of their +hardness.</p> + +<p>"Strangers, yes," Charley replied, "Fools, no."</p> + +<p>"No offense intended," said the man, quickly. +"Strangers will sometimes take advice but fools +will not. My advice to you strangers is to keep out +of places like this and not to make friends with +other strangers. I don't suppose you know who +that man is who just left you."</p> + +<p>"He's a retired sea captain," said Captain Westfield. +"He was giving us some pointers about the +sponge business. Mighty pleasant an' obligin' fellow. +Mighty fair-spoken."</p> + +<p>"Bless your simple little souls," exclaimed the +stranger. "He's no captain, active or retired. He's +the runner for this place. Lucky you haven't any +of you drank your coffee yet. You'd be waking up +in some alley bye-and-bye with your heads aching +from knock-out drops and your pockets turned inside +out. My, but you were easy."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I don't reckon any one would dare do such a +thing in broad daylight," Captain Westfield declared.</p> + +<p>"It's been done in this place a dozen times. +And the victim's kicks never did any good after it +happened, for there was always a dozen Greeks +ready to go on the stand and swear that it was only +a case of drunkenness on the victim's part. Better +get out of here."</p> + +<p>The humbled little party arose and followed their +conductor out to the sidewalk. As they passed +through the crowd they could not help but notice +the wrathful glances the sitters bestowed upon the +one who had cheated them of their victims.</p> + +<p>"I guess we have acted pretty green," Charley +admitted, as they passed outside, "but we were so +eager to learn about the sponge business that we +forgot caution. Besides, one does not look for such +tricks in a little town like this. It's not like a big +city where one has to be always on his guard against +strangers."</p> + +<p>The stranger favored the members of the little +party with a closer scrutiny than he had yet bestowed +upon them.</p> + +<p>"So you are figuring on going into the sponge +business, eh?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"We may try it a bit if we find out that it pays as +well as we have heard tell of," answered Captain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span> +Westfield, cautiously, "but it's mighty hard to find +out anything definite about it from these Greeks."</p> + +<p>"Oh, there's big money in it all right," said their +new friend. "You might make a go of it. You +are a pretty husky, determined-looking lot and +would soon get on to the Greekish tricks. It's a +risky business, though. I don't advise anyone to +take it up."</p> + +<p>"We've encountered a few risks in other lines," +said Charlie, modestly. "We are willing to take a +few chances if there's money enough in it to tempt +us."</p> + +<p>The stranger pulled out his watch and looked at +the time. "My name is Driver," he remarked. "I +own a store over on the next street in the American +section. Business is slack at this time of day and I +will show you around a bit, if you wish. My clerks +can look out for the trade for an hour or two."</p> + +<p>"No need of thanks," he said as the Captain accepted +his offer gratefully. "If you decide to go +into the sponge business, you will need lots of provisions +and I hope to sell them to you. We Americans +do not get any of the Greek trade and we are +always glad to secure a new customer. Now I suppose +you want to know about the profit side of the +business first. Well, I can not give you exact figures +but I know that all engaged in the business are making +big money. All these big buildings you see have +been built out of sponging, and they do not represent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span> +a hundredth part of the money made out of the +business. There is an enormous amount sent back +to Greece every month through the post-office and +bank here. I know Greeks who landed here only a +few years ago with nothing but the clothes on their +backs—and those were mighty poor—that are +wealthy men now and they made their fortunes out +of sponges. Oh, there's big money in it all right. +But you can look into that part of the business +closer later on. Now, I want to show you something +of the sponges themselves. We will go down +to the harbor first."</p> + +<p>The interested little party followed him as he led +the way along a soft sand road flanked by scrub +palmettos.</p> + +<p>Their guide paused beside one of the several large +buildings standing close to the road. "This is a +clipping shed," he said.</p> + +<p>The building was open on one side and was filled +with a crowd of old men, women and young boys, +all Greeks. Before each was a pile of rough sponges +from which they were clipping the spoilt parts with +great shearing shears. In one corner, a man worked +over a big screw-press, pressing the severed fragments +of sponges into huge compact bales.</p> + +<p>"That part isn't important enough to waste much +time looking at," Mr. Driver said, as he turned +away. "Come on and I'll show you something +worth seeing."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span></p> + +<p>As they followed along behind their guide, the +boys became sensible of a strong, pleasant, appetizing +odor in the air, an odor which grew stronger as +they advanced. A turn in the road brought them +suddenly upon the source of the odor. On the shore +of a quiet little land-locked harbor, blazed dozens of +small camp-fires over which sat great iron kettles. +On pieces of canvas laid upon the ground were piles +of fresh beef and mutton. Over each pile worked +several Greeks cutting the meat with the sheaf +knives into tiny squares about an inch in size. Other +Greeks were dumping the little square pieces into +the kettles, while still others kept the contents stirred +and the fires under the kettles burning briskly.</p> + +<p>"They are putting down the meat for their next +voyage," explained Mr. Driver. "They roast it in +its own fat, put it into stone jars, and pour the fat +over it. As soon as the fat cools and congeals it +forms an air-tight covering which keeps the meat +from spoiling."</p> + +<p>"If it tastes half as good as it smells, it must be +delicious," Charley remarked.</p> + +<p>Chris viewed the cooking operation with professional +jealousy. "Golly, I bet dey can't cook like +dis nigger," he declared, "I spect dem kettles ain't +none too clean noway."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield gave but scant attention to the +trying-out process. His interest was centered on the +big fleet of schooners anchored near shore. They<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span> +were over a hundred in number and were of all +sizes and designs. They made a pretty sight lying +gracefully close together in the little harbor. But +the old sailor soon strolled on to where groups of +Greeks were building and repairing boats on the +shore. He inspected their work with a critical eye, +but he was soon lost in admiration.</p> + +<p>"Lads," he exclaimed, "I never saw such workmen +before. They are turnin' out tight, neat seaworthy +little crafts with no tools but a saw and a +hatchet. Ain't those queer lookin' crafts though."</p> + +<p>The boats were about thirty feet in length, sharp +at both bow and stern, and of enormous depth for +their size. True to their love for bright colors the +Greeks had painted each plank a different hue and +the little vessels looked like floating rainbows.</p> + +<p>The captain viewed their single masts, which inclined +aft at an angle of forty-five degrees, with +deep-sea scorn.</p> + +<p>"It's clean against Nature for a mast to be set +that way," he declared. "It ain't regular or ship-shape."</p> + +<p>"Those small crafts are used as diving boats," +Mr. Driver explained. "They carry a big square +sail, but most of them are equipped with engines +also. They are great sea boats and will ride out a +gale almost as well as the schooners."</p> + +<p>His explanations were interrupted by loud talking<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span> +close at hand and the little party, full of curiosity, +hastened to the spot from which the uproar came.</p> + +<p>In the center of a circle of curious onlookers, a +large man wearing a marshal's badge was slipping a +pair of handcuffs on the wrists of a slender boyish-looking +young fellow.</p> + +<p>"No need to put those things on me, Mr. Officer," +the lad was protesting, passionately. "I'll go along +with you without any trouble. I've only acted +within my rights and all I want is a fair trial."</p> + +<p>"Anything you say can be used against you at +your trial," cautioned the marshal.</p> + +<p>"I don't care, I admit I shot two of those +treacherous Greeks. It was the only thing to do. +When it came on to blow a gale, they refused to cut +the cable, and work the schooner. It was a case of +making them obey orders and get her off before the +seas or lose my ship. I only wish I had shot more +of them. They have been laying for me ever since +to slip a knife into me and chuck me overboard. I +haven't dared take a wink of sleep for three days +and two nights."</p> + +<p>"Poor fellow," said Mr. Driver, as the marshal +led away his protesting captive. "I expect it happened +just as he says—an open mutiny, compelling +him to shoot—but every Greek in his crew will go on +the stand and swear that it was a case of cold-blooded +murder. Fortunately, the judge is wise to +Greek methods and the law deals gently with commanders."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span></p> + +<p>"He looked mighty young to be a captain," said +Captain Westfield.</p> + +<p>"It's this way," Mr. Driver explained, "the law +compels the Greeks to have an American captain for +each schooner and diving boat, and they hire the +youngest and, therefore, cheapest man that they can +get. It's a dog's life, out alone for months with a +gang that doesn't speak a word of English. As long +as the captain is content to be a mere figurehead he +can get along without serious trouble, but the minute +he runs counter to their wishes there is a row. +But time is flying, and I must get back to the store. +If you will come back with me I'll introduce you to +a man who knows more about sponging than another +American in the country."</p> + +<p>"Just a moment, lads," said the Captain, as they +turned to go. "Which of those schooners do you +like the best?"</p> + +<p>The two chums unhesitatingly indicated a beautiful +two-masted, snow-white schooner that seemed +to rest as loftily on the water as a floating swan. +The grace and beauty of exquisite lines marked her +out from the many shapely schooners surrounding +her. In large gilt letters on either side of her bow +was her name "Beauty".</p> + +<p>"She's my choice too," declared the Captain. "I +wish we owned her. I ain't never seen a prettier +model."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER III.<br /> + +<small>PREPARATIONS.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">As</span> soon as they got back into town, Mr. Driver +hunted up the man of whom he had spoken, and, +introducing him to each of the little party, hurried +back to his store.</p> + +<p>Mr. Williams was a young man still in his +twenties. He was a stocky, well-built young fellow +with an intelligent face, determined manner, and a +short, crisp way of speaking. He sized up the little +party with one quick appraising glance as Captain +Westfield stated their errand.</p> + +<p>"If you are not willing to stand hardships, dirt, +discomfort, and danger, you want nothing to do +with sponging," he declared.</p> + +<p>"We can stand anything that it pays us to stand," +Charley replied, quickly.</p> + +<p>"Well, that's the right kind of spirit," approved +the young man, "but, of course you don't any of +you realize what you will have to meet. I've seen +others start in with the same confidence and get cold +feet before the first trip was over. It isn't any nice, +ladies' pink-tea business. It's a game for real men,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span> +but if the men are the right kind, they get their reward +for what they endure, all right, all right. I +landed here with an empty pocket and emptier +stomach, and now,—well, I am not a John D. Rockefeller +yet, but I've got enough laid by to keep the +wolf from the door for a good many years. Better +men than I have done better than I have. It's like +everything else, the best man wins, and wins something +worth winning, but, as I have said, it's no +business for nice, tender, little Willie boys, it's a +man's game."</p> + +<p>Charley grinned in sympathy with the reliant, +independent spirit of the young fellow which was +close kin to his own traits. "We left off our short +pants last summer," he observed, gravely, "we are +fast learning to dress ourselves, and the Captain +there can even comb his own hair."</p> + +<p>"Good," chuckled the other, "I guess <i>you</i> will +pass muster anyway, so I will give you some idea +of what you will have to expect. First, there is the +loneliness. For three months at a time you'll be at +sea without another soul to talk to, for there are +very few of the Greeks who speak English. With a +party like yours it would not be so bad for you +would be company for each other, but for the +American captains who go out alone with a crew +of Greeks, it's awful. I've known some to go crazy +for sheer loneliness, and few ever make a second +trip,—I'll never forget my first experience. Second,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span> +sponging is a dirty business, the stench from dying +sponges will upset any but the strongest stomachs. +Third, there are the dangers, storms, accidents, and +troubles with the crew. I have never had any +serious trouble with my own men, but then I understand +their lingo and that counts for a good deal, +and, besides they all know me around here and +know that I will shoot first and explain afterwards—that +counts for still more."</p> + +<p>"All that is interesting, but it ain't to the pint," +said Captain Westfield. "The question is what can +one make off a trip. I reckon them little things +you're telling about is just details."</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid you'll find them pretty serious details," +Mr. Williams said with a laugh, "but you are +right, the money point is the main thing. That's the +only thing that has kept me in the business. Well, +I had considerable <i>bad</i> luck last trip but I cleaned +up three thousand dollars. I've been doing better +than that."</p> + +<p>The chums looked at each other with expressive +faces while Mr. Williams' keen black eyes twinkled +as he watched them.</p> + +<p>"I seed a schooner down at the harbor," observed +Captain Westfield, carelessly. "She was a pretty +looking little craft and her name just seemed to fit +her—'The Beauty'. If she's good an' sound an' +for sale, I might be willing to give a thousand dollars +for her."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span></p> + +<p>Mr. Williams laughed, "You are not the first +sailor who has fallen in love with the 'Beauty'. She +is the finest ever. She has led the sponging fleet for +three seasons. Many have tried to buy her but +couldn't. You are in luck, however. Her owner +died last week and I have just received a letter from +his widow asking me to find a purchaser for her. +You can have her as she lays for thirteen hundred +dollars, and she is dirt cheap at that."</p> + +<p>"Will you hold that offer open until ten o'clock +to-night?" asked the captain, "we will want to talk +it all over a bit."</p> + +<p>Mr. Williams agreed to his request, and, after +thanking him gratefully for his information, the +little party took their departure.</p> + +<p>"Back to the harbor," said the captain as soon as +they were out of hearing. "I want to take a good +look at the 'Beauty'. If she is anyway near as good +as she looks from a distance she's worth at least +twenty-five hundred dollars. Why we could make a +tidy sum by buying her, sailing her around to Jacksonville, +and selling her again."</p> + +<p>They soon arrived at the harbor again where for +a quarter they hired a young Greek to row them out +to the schooner.</p> + +<p>They found the little vessel all that her name implied. +She was about sixty-five feet long and broad +for her length. She looked more like a gentleman's +yacht than a sponging vessel and they were all delighted<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span> +with her appearance. But pleased as they +were with her on deck, they were even more pleased +with her below. There, they found a large main +cabin with swinging lamps, hanging sideboard, easy +chairs, and comfortable furnishings. Opening into +the main cabin were found roomy staterooms, two +on a side, furnished with large bunks containing +springy mattresses. Instead of the small portholes, +common with crafts of her size, each stateroom was +provided with windows of heavy glass to admit air +and light.</p> + +<p>Up forward at the foremast was the forecastle, or +crew's quarters. It was large, comfortable and well +equipped with bunks. Aft of it was the cook's galley, +containing a good stove and plenty of pots, pans +and kettles. Everything was exquisitely neat and +clean. But Captain Westfield was not content with +a mere survey of cabin and furnishings. He unfurled +several of the sails and examined the canvas +closely. He tested the strength of rope after rope. +He climbed aloft and looked over blocks, stays, and +running gear. Lastly, he descended into the hold +and examined all that was visible of the vessel's ribs +and planking.</p> + +<p>"She's as tidy a little craft as I ever saw," he +declared, when he at last rejoined the boys back by +the wheel. "She ain't over six years old an' her +sails an' rigging are all new. She's worth twenty-five +hundred dollars of any man's money if she's<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span> +worth a cent. All we have got to do it to buy her +and carry her around to some lively port an' we can +make twelve hundred dollars as easy as finding it."</p> + +<p>"What's the use of selling her right off if we +buy her," Walter suggested, "Surely a few months' +use will not lessen her value to any great extent. +Why not make a couple of trips sponging in her. +I am anxious to have a try for some of that big +money they all talk about. We will never have a +better chance than now. At the worst, we would +only lose the price of a few months' provisions, we +would still have our vessel worth far more than we +paid for her."</p> + +<p>"You've hit the nail right on the head," the captain +exclaimed, delightedly. "That's just what +I've been studying over, but I reckoned I'd wait an' +see if either of you boys proposed it."</p> + +<p>Charley hesitated before agreeing to his chum's +proposal. "I confess, I am not so anxious to try the +sponge business as I was," he remarked. "First, +we know nothing about it ourselves, and would +have to depend entirely upon hired help—which is +a bad thing to have to do in any business. Second, +I don't like the Greeks, I don't like their appearances, +I don't like the reputation they have, and I +don't like the idea of being with a gang that doesn't +understand English."</p> + +<p>"Bosh," Walter replied, lightly, "we will get +along all right with them. It isn't like one lone man<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span> +being out with them, there are four of us and they +wouldn't dare start trouble with so many. As for +making them understand, why we can hire a man as +interpreter. I believe it's the best chance to make +money we've had yet."</p> + +<p>"And I too," Captain Westfield agreed. "I +reckon we'd be foolish to let such a chance slip by. +That young fellow Williams says he's made considerable."</p> + +<p>"But he made several trips and learned the business +before he went into it on his own hook," +Charley objected. "However, I am not going to +hold back if the rest of you want to try it."</p> + +<p>"Good," exclaimed the captain, "we will go right +back and settle the deal with Williams. We'll make +money off the schooner if we don't off the sponging."</p> + +<p>They found Mr. Williams still in his office. The +thirteen hundred dollars was paid over and they received +a bill of sale for the 'Beauty', one diving +boat and everything the schooner contained.</p> + +<p>"You've got a good boat at a mighty low price," +he said. "There is no reason why you shouldn't +make well with her, if you just use common sense. +Doubtless, you have heard lots of hard things about +the Greeks, but I don't believe they are half as bad +as they are painted. Half of the trouble captains +have with them comes from their not understanding +each other. Get a reliable man to translate your<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span> +orders, and you will get along all right although you +will find it a hard life. I wish I could help you +select your crew but I have to go to Tampa to-morrow, +and will not be back until the fleet sails. We +will see each other again on the sponging grounds, +if not before. I wish you the best of luck until we +meet."</p> + +<p>The now tired little party bade the hustling young +man good-bye and repaired to the small hotel where +they engaged rooms and meals.</p> + +<p>After supper Charley unpacked his valise and got +out the silver-mounted revolver presented to him +by Mr. Weston. He noted its calibre and sauntering +down to the hardware store purchased several +boxes of cartridges of a size to fit. He gave a couple +of boxes to Walter who possessed the exact duplicate +of his weapon.</p> + +<p>"That's my first preparation for our trip," he +said laughing.</p> + +<p>But, although he spoke lightly, he was troubled +by vague misgivings that their new venture was not +going to be the smooth sailing his companions believed. +For one thing, he doubted if rough, blunt, +quick-tempered Captain Westfield was just the man +to successfully handle the suave, oily, treacherous +Greeks.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER IV.<br /> + +<small>THE START.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">We</span> have got to get a move on us," Captain +Westfield said as the four chums gathered together +at the breakfast table. "I've been out enquirin' +around this mornin' an' I've larned that the sponging +fleet sails in two days. Of course we don't have +to go with the fleet, but, bein' as it's our first trip +an' we're green at the business, I reckon, we had +better keep with the crowd an' learn all we can. +I've been up to see the United States Commissioner +an' got charts of the sponging grounds an' took out +papers for the ship. We're all officers on the papers, +lads. He put me down as captain of the schooner, +Chris is mate. You, Charley, are captain of the +diving boats, an' Walter's chief engineer."</p> + +<p>"I don't want to be no mate," Chris protested. +"I wants to be de cook. Dat's schooner's got a +powerful fine galley an' a sight ob pots an' kettles. +Golly! I reckon dis nigger can fix up de grub better +dan any of dem ignorant furriners. A mate +ain't no manner ob count on board a little ship. De<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span> +captain's always blamin' him for somethin' or udder +an' de crew always hates him. He's always in +trubble wid one or the udder. Now de cook's always +his own boss, he don't hab to stay out nights +in de cold an' de rain an' ebbery one is powerful perlite +to him, 'cause dey wants to keep on de bes' side +ob de one dat handles de grub. I'd rather be a cook +dan an ole mate any day."</p> + +<p>"But you don't know how to rig up their queer +furrin dishes, lad," the captain explained. "They +ain't used to eatin' grub fixed up good like you fix +it."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little +negro, pompously. "I spect dey doan know much +'bout cookin'. Reckon dey wouldn't eat any more +ob der own if dey got a taste ob mine."</p> + +<p>"That's the trouble," the captain agreed craftily, +"an' we don't want to spoil them. Besides, I +reckoned you'd like to be mate. Why, I was at sea +ten years before I got a mate's berth. I reckon your +folks on Cat Island would be mighty proud to hear +that you were one an' was wearing a blue suit with +big brass buttons, an' a cap with Mate on it in big +gilt letters."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the +little negro, delightedly, rising hastily from the +table. "I'se goin' to buy dem clothes right now an' +hab my picture took in 'em an' send 'bout twenty ob +dem to de folks on Cat Island."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You got around that pretty neatly, Captain," +Charley said, as soon as Chris was gone. "I expected +him to insist upon being cook. He thinks no +one else can do it so well. But, seriously, don't you +think we are all rather young to be ship's officers. +Men are quite apt to resent having to take orders +from mere boys."</p> + +<p>"The law requires that those four offices be filled +by Americans an' we can't afford to hire men to fill +the places. Chris will be under my orders all the +time an' will be mate only in name. But you boys +are already smart sailors an' I expect you to be real +officers on your boats. If you weren't on the papers +proper you might have trouble with your men, but +the fact that you are regular commissioned officers +will make smooth sailing for you. Any refusal to +obey your orders would be mutiny."</p> + +<p>"Very well, Captain," agreed Walter. "What +do you want Captain West and I to do next?"</p> + +<p>"Just lay around an' enjoy yourselves this mornin', +I guess. The first thing is to get a fellow who +talks Greek an' to hire a crew. I want to pick them +out myself. As soon as we get them there will be +plenty to do stockin' up with grub an' water. Better +spend the time lookin' over your new command an' +pickin' up what you can about the business."</p> + +<p>The advice was good, and, as soon as they had +finished breakfast, the boys hastened down to the +harbor to inspect the diving boats they had acquired<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span> +with the purchase of the 'Beauty'. Upon a close +inspection, they were delighted with their new commands. +The little vessel was quite new and its +model promised great seaworthiness. Besides the +huge square sail it carried, it was equipped with a +ten-horse power gasoline engine. Its rig was different +from any the boys had ever seen, and they +spent several hours studying it, and making themselves +acquainted with the working of the engine.</p> + +<p>"I believe I can handle it by myself now, if I had +to do it," Charley declared, at last. "The engine +may give us a little trouble at first, but we will soon +get on to it and it's likely there will be several Greeks +in the crew who know how to run it. Now, the next +thing is to settle on a name for our craft."</p> + +<p>"I thought of calling it 'Flora'," Walter said, +with a little sheepish smile.</p> + +<p>"And I was thinking of naming it 'Ola'," declared +Charley promptly.</p> + +<p>After a spirited debate over the two names they +held in such esteem, the two lads at last came to a +compromise by agreeing to call their little ship "The +Two Sisters". This decided, they rummaged +around in the lockers until they found paint and +brushes with which they proceeded to letter on the +bow of their crafts the name chosen.</p> + +<p>As soon as this task was finished, they returned to +the village and made a round of the shops purchasing +clothing for their trip, pricing provisions, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span> +learning all they could from the various merchants +about the Greeks and the sponge business.</p> + +<p>They were passing a little photo studio when +Chris' voice hailed them from inside. It was hard +for them to refrain from laughter at the figure the +little negro presented.</p> + +<p>A common blue suit had been too tame a color for +Chris' brilliant-loving soul. He was clothed in a +pair of baggish yellow trousers, many sizes too +large for him, a coat of vivid scarlet hue, and a cap +of deepest purple. But in spite of his brilliant attire, +his little ebony face expressed deepest satisfaction. +On a chair beside him was a great pile of +finished tin-types and the Greek proprietor, beaming +at the unusual rush of business, was just adjusting +his camera to take another.</p> + +<p>"Why, what do you want with any more of them, +Chris?" Walter exclaimed. "You've got enough +already to supply everyone on Cat Island."</p> + +<p>"Dey ain't no good," replied the little darkey, +mournfully, "I 'spect dis man doan know his business."</p> + +<p>Charley examined one of the despised tintypes. +"Why, they look just like you," he declared.</p> + +<p>"Dey's just black an' white," protested the little +negro. "Dey doan show de colors at all."</p> + +<p>The chums turned their heads aside to hide their +grins.</p> + +<p>"That's a Greek camera, Chris," Charley said<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span> +with a wink at Walter. "You can't expect it to +take American colors. I tell you what to do. Just +write at the bottom of each picture: Pants, yellow; +coat, scarlet; cap, purple."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the +little darkey, brightening. "But it hain't like habbing +de colors show," he added, mournfully.</p> + +<p>The three were making their way back to the hotel +when their progress was arrested by piercing +screams coming from the rear of a large Greek +restaurant.</p> + +<p>The boys hesitated and looked at each other.</p> + +<p>"Sounds as though someone was hurt pretty +bad," Charley commented, "but I guess we had better +go along about our business. We are likely to +get ourselves into trouble if we meddle with things +in this section," but as he spoke the screams rang +out afresh. The chums looked at each other; there +was no need for words between them.</p> + +<p>"Well, it's foolish, but here goes," Charley exclaimed.</p> + +<p>A narrow alley led into the rear of the building +and down it has hastened followed by his two companions.</p> + +<p>A minute's walk brought them to the scene of the +screams.</p> + +<p>In a little back yard stood a small Greek boy +about thirteen years of age. He was clad only in +short trousers and his bare back and legs were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span> +covered with angry welts. Above him towered a +dark, scowling Greek, who was swinging a heavy +cowhide whip, while at each descent of the cruel, +stinging lash the lad's screams rose in piteous protests. +Clustered around was some dozen men and +boys looking on with unconcern.</p> + +<p>Charley caught the Greek's arm as it rose for +another blow. "Stop that, you big brute," he cried, +trembling with anger. "You have no right to beat +a little fellow like that, no matter what he has done. +If you hit him another blow, I'll have you arrested."</p> + +<p>"He won't understand you, Charley," Walter +cautioned.</p> + +<p>But the Greek did understand. He turned a look +of the deepest hate on the plucky lad. For a second +he seemed in the act of striking him with the heavy +whip, but Charley did not flinch. "Try it, if you +dare," he cried.</p> + +<p>The Greek lowered his upraised arm. "Why +should I not strike him?" He demanded savagely, +but in perfect English. "He is mine, I pay his fare +all the way from Greece. All day he plays on the +street and brings home no money. I will beat him +if I wish."</p> + +<p>"You will not," declared Charley, firmly. "If +you do, you will be arrested very quickly. Lad, if +this man attempts to beat you again, you come to us; +you will find us on board the schooner 'Beauty'. If +she is not in the harbor you go to Mr. Driver who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span> +owns the store, I will tell him about you and he will +see that you are not abused. Do you understand +what I say?"</p> + +<p>"Yes sir, I speak English good," the little lad +replied proudly. "He teach me so I can beg the +pennies."</p> + +<p>The Greek's manner had suddenly changed. His +frown disappeared and he wore a smile that he endeavored +to make pleasant.</p> + +<p>"The noble young gentleman need not worry," he +said, smoothly, "I love the boy and already regret +having whipped him—he is very bad. But it shall +happen no more."</p> + +<p>"It had better not," Charley replied shortly, as he +turned away. "Come on, Walt, I am going to +speak to Mr. Driver about it now."</p> + +<p>Mr. Driver listened to the lad's story with a very +grave face. "I'm afraid you boys have made a +dangerous enemy," he said. "That Greek is Manuel +George, and he is a very bad character. He was +arrested once for the murder of another Greek, but +they could not prove the charge against him although +everyone believed that he had done it. You +want to be very careful as long as you are in Tarpon. +I will gladly have him arrested if the boy +makes any complaint to me."</p> + +<p>The boys found the captain waiting for them at +the hotel. "I've had the best of luck," the old +sailor declared. "I found the very Greek we need<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span> +to make our orders plain to the crew. He talks +English as good as you or I. I did not lose any time +in gettin' his name on the ship's papers. He +promised to meet us here at the hotel this noon. +There he comes now."</p> + +<p>The chums exchanged a glance of dismay, for approaching +their table, bowing, smiling, and as suave +as though they were his dearest friends was Mr. +Manuel George.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER V.<br /> + +<small>THE START.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> captain introduced the boys to the Greek +who beamed upon them as though nothing unpleasant +had ever passed between them. The lads met +his smiling advances with a cold silence which the +captain noticed with puzzled concern.</p> + +<p>As soon as he could do so without attracting too +much notice, Walter drew the old sailor to one side. +"We don't want anything to do with that man," he +declared, and he hurriedly told about the whipping +and repeated what Mr. Driver had said.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield looked troubled. "I wish I'd +known that two hours ago," he said. "He's signed +on with us now an' if I try to get rid of him he can +make a lot of trouble for us. We have got to take +him along. If we don't, he's liable to libel the +schooner an' cost us no end of money and delay."</p> + +<p>Walter's face showed his anxiety and concern.</p> + +<p>"He said he was going to bring a boy along with +him to act as cabin boy," said the old sailor after an +uncomfortable pause. "Maybe it will all work out +for the best. He won't be able to abuse the lad on +the schooner, an' I don't see how he can make us any<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span> +trouble. All he's to do is to make our orders plain +to the men, it ain't as though he was an officer over +them."</p> + +<p>"Well, if it can't be helped, we have just got to +make the best of it," Walter agreed, "I am going to +keep a mighty close watch on him all the time, +though. We will talk more about it later on. He +keeps glancing at us as though he knew we were +talking about him."</p> + +<p>As soon as he got the chance, Walter told his +chum what the captain had said.</p> + +<p>"I don't like the idea of that fellow going with +us," Charley declared, "but if it has got to be, we +had better start in by treating him friendly. It +won't help matters any to quarrel with him."</p> + +<p>That was sound sense and the boys at once began +to treat the Greek pleasantly, in spite of the dislike +they felt for him.</p> + +<p>There was no doubt but what the fellow understood +his position thoroughly. With his able assistance, +the captain, in a short time, secured a full +crew of fifteen men, including four professional +divers who brought their queer looking suits with +lead shoes and heavy helmets along with them. +The boys were pleased with the appearance of the +men. They were well-built, husky fellows and +looked to be capable sailors. They were much alike +in looks, all being broad-shouldered and swarthy +with clean-cut features and straight noses. One<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span> +alone seemed to differ greatly from the rest. He +was a tall, powerful, handsome fellow with unusually +small hands and feet. He seemed to be +shunned by the others and left very much to himself. +He was evidently a good sailor and when the +captain set his new crew at work to getting the +schooner ready for sea he performed his part with +a quickness and intelligence that won the old sailor's +approval.</p> + +<p>As soon as the work was well under way, Charley +and Walter, taking the interpreter with them, went +back up town to purchase their stores. The bulk of +their purchases were made at Mr. Driver's store, +but there were many articles that he did not carry +in stock which they had to buy at the Greek stores. +Manuel directed them as to the kind of food their +crew were accustomed to. The bulk of the stores +consisted of ripe black olives in small kegs; queer +looking cheeses, rice, black flour and an abundance +of tea and coffee. The boys bought three whole +beeves and four lambs, directing that all their purchases +should be sent down to the schooner at once.</p> + +<p>"Whew," whistled Charley as he paid the last +bill, "we have only got five dollars left of our fifteen +hundred."</p> + +<p>"Don't you care," Walter replied, confidently. +"We will have a couple of thousand dollars anyway +coming to us when we get back, and still have the +'Beauty' besides."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys next visited the hotel and got their +valises and belongings which they carried down to +their new floating home.</p> + +<p>They found that the Greeks already had the meat +cut up and sizzling merrily in the great iron kettles.</p> + +<p>The new crew were a quick and willing lot and before +dark the last article was stored aboard, and, +with the diving boat towing along behind, they +dropped the schooner down the river to the mouth +and anchored for the night just outside amongst a +great fleet of schooners lying ready for an early +morning start for the sponging ground.</p> + +<p>Long after they had eaten their supper and all of +the crew but the anchor watch had retired to the +forecastle, the four chums sat on deck admiring the +beauty of the scene around them. A thousand +lights twinkled from the fleet and high in the air +ahead of them the great lantern of the Anclote lighthouse +on its little island of barren rock.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield awoke the boys early next +morning, "Hurry up on deck if you want to see the +prettiest sight you ever saw," he said. The lads +hustled into their clothing and followed him up the +ladder. As they gained the deck they paused with +exclamations of deepest admiration.</p> + +<p>It was blowing a stiff breeze and the blue water +of the Gulf was dancing and sparkling with white-crested +waves. Around them was the fleet all under +sail, their snowy canvas towering high above their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span> +shapely hulls. Some lay with sails slatting, still +clinging to their anchorage while their brightly attired +crews worked over windlasses, reeling in the +dripping cables. Some already under way lay +hove-to in the open Gulf waiting for their fellows; +while still others, anchors tripped and sails drawing, +heeling over to the brisk breeze, darted away, sending +the water tossing and foaming from their bows.</p> + +<p>The boys drew a long breath of pure delight at +the beautiful picture.</p> + +<p>"It's grand," Charley cried.</p> + +<p>"Aye, lad," agreed the captain with satisfaction. +"There's no place like the sea for beautiful scenes. +But thar ain't a ship in the whole fleet as pretty as +our own. Just watch her now."</p> + +<p>The old sailor gave a few short orders which the +interpreter repeated to the crew. A dozen of them +sprang to the windlass, while others stood by the +halyards, ready to hoist the big jibs the second the +anchor broke ground. The "Beauty's" huge main +and foresails were already hoisted and her cable +hove short.</p> + +<p>The men at the windlass shouted some words.</p> + +<p>"Anchor broke," translated Manuel.</p> + +<p>"Up helm," commanded the captain, "give her +the jibs."</p> + +<p>The great sails mounted their stays, the +"Beauty's" head played off, and, careening over<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span> +'till her lee rail touched the water, she surged +through the waters like a thing alive.</p> + +<p>The chums watched the foam sweep past in transports +of delight.</p> + +<p>"My, but she's fast," Walter cried.</p> + +<p>"Aye, lad," the captain agreed, joyfully. "I +ain't never seen a faster, except maybe Black Sam's +schooner. We'll have to shorten sail in an hour if +we don't want to run away from the rest of the +fleet."</p> + +<p>The boys watched with delight as the Beauty +overhauled and passed schooner after schooner.</p> + +<p>As she surged past a large black-hulled vessel with +three diving boats in tow, a man on the stranger's +deck waved his cap and shouted,</p> + +<p>"Good luck to you. Better keep with the fleet."</p> + +<p>"That's Mr. Williams," Charley exclaimed. "I +am glad that we are going to be near somebody we +know."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it is Mr. Williams," affirmed Manuel, who +was standing near. "But here is my little boy to +say that your breakfast is ready."</p> + +<p>"What is your name?" Walter enquired of the +little fellow as they all followed him below. "I +could never remember that," he said, when the lad +replied with a very long Greek name. "I guess we +will have to call you Ben for short."</p> + +<p>The band of chums were very hungry and they +seated themselves around the table before the steaming<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span> +cups of coffee and waited impatiently for the +food to be brought on, but the little Greek lad took +a position behind their chairs and waited.</p> + +<p>"Hurry up, Ben, and bring the breakfast," the +captain ordered.</p> + +<p>"Breakfast there," the lad replied.</p> + +<p>The old sailor repeated his order but Ben replied +as before.</p> + +<p>"I reckon he don't understand," the captain remarked, +"Go up and tell your father, owner, or +whoever he is, to come down."</p> + +<p>The lad was back in a minute with the smiling +Greek.</p> + +<p>"We want our breakfast," the captain explained, +"the boy don't seem to understand."</p> + +<p>"He understands all right, but, I see the cook +does not comprehend. It is the custom to have +coffee only in the morning on sponging ships."</p> + +<p>"Nothing but coffee for breakfast?" roared the +old sailor.</p> + +<p>"We eat but one meal a day and that at night," +the Greek explained. "If the rest of the crew ate +the divers would want to eat also, and that would +be fatal for them. The stomach must be empty +when they descend to the bottom in deep water, +otherwise they die."</p> + +<p>"Well, they can't see us eat an' I want my three +square meals a day," said the hungry sailor.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span> +"Right saving plan for us though if they only eat +once a day."</p> + +<p>"They eat the whole three meals in one," the +Greek said with a smile. "I will speak to the cook +at once and he will soon have something ready for +you."</p> + +<p>In a very short time they were served with a substantial +meal to which they all did full justice. As +soon as it was finished, they returned to the deck +where they learned that the "Beauty" was already +so far in the lead of the fleet that sail had to be shortened.</p> + +<p>With Manuel's aid the boys picked out their +crews for the diving boat. They found that many +of the Greeks were familiar with gasoline engines +and they selected one of the youngest and most intelligent-looking +for an engineer. The four divers +were, of course, allotted to their boat, but besides +them they had to have two men to work the air +pump and two others to tend to the life-lines, which +made a crew of nine, besides the young officers, and +would leave only Captain Westfield, Chris and the +cook and five men on board the schooner.</p> + +<p>The divers at once began preparations for their +future dangerous work. They examined pump and +air hose very carefully, for a slight leak in either one +would mean death by suffocation beneath the surface. +They brought out their diving suits and went +over them inch by inch for possible rents or tears.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span> +Many of the suits were old and covered with a multitude +of rubber patches. The boys were amazed +that their owners would dare descend in such worn +suits, but Manuel assured them that the patches were +so cunningly put on that not only would they exclude +water, but they would outlast the suit itself.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VI.<br /> + +<small>FIRST TROUBLE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">One</span> of the sailors Charley had selected for his +crew was the tall handsome fellow whom the others +seemed to shun.</p> + +<p>"I can't understand what the rest have against +him," the young captain remarked to his chum. +"He seems very quiet and well behaved, and he is +every inch a sailor. I would ask Manuel about him +but it is bad policy to discuss one of the crew with +another. It always makes trouble. Likely, Manuel +would lie about him anyway, he seems to hate him, +look at him glaring at him now."</p> + +<p>The Greek was leaning against the railing staring +at the sailor who was coiling down a rope near him. +Suddenly the Greek addressed the man in a low +savage tone. The sailor's face grew red with anger, +and he replied shortly in a few hissing words. With +a bound, the Greek cleared the space between the two +and struck the sailor full in the mouth. The man +reeled back against the main mast, but, recovering +himself in a second, sprang for his assailant. The<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span> +Greek leaped to one side and whipped out a long +wicked knife.</p> + +<p>Before he could use it, Captain Westfield, belaying +pin in hand, rushed in between the two.</p> + +<p>"Put up that knife," he roared. "I'll do what +fighting there is to be done on this ship."</p> + +<p>The Greek shot one quick glance at him, venomous +with hate, then he glanced beyond him at the +two lads who waited expectantly with hands on their +pistols.</p> + +<p>"He cursed me," he said sullenly, as he slowly +replaced the knife in his pocket.</p> + +<p>"When anyone curses you, report it to me an' +don't take the law in your own hands. I'm master +of this schooner, an' you might as well understand +it right off. Tell that fellow just what I've told +you."</p> + +<p>The sailor's face darkened as the Greek spoke to +him rapidly, but he turned slowly away and walked +forward.</p> + +<p>"That's a bad beginning," Charley remarked to +his chum. "I wish we had never seen that Greek. +I believe he insulted that sailor. The fellow was +behaving himself and tending to his own business."</p> + +<p>He repeated the remark to the captain a little +later.</p> + +<p>"I reckon you're right, lad," agreed the old +sailor, "that Greek seems to be a trouble-maker but +he'll find he's got the wrong man to deal with. I've<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span> +handled too many crews of tough roughnecks to be +bested by a dirty furriner."</p> + +<p>"I'll bet he will keep you busy with complaints," +Walter said. "How are you going to get at the +truth of it if he does complain about the others of +the crew?"</p> + +<p>"You'll see, I reckon, he will try something like +that but I'm ready for him."</p> + +<p>Sure enough, in less than an hour the Greek approached +the Captain.</p> + +<p>"I hate to trouble you, but I must complain as +you have directed," he said suavely. "The cook, +he is very abusive, I tried to instruct him about +your meals but he answers me with vile names."</p> + +<p>"Bring the cook aft," Captain Westfield commanded.</p> + +<p>Manuel escorted the bewildered-looking cook aft +with a look of sly triumph on his face.</p> + +<p>The captain looked the man over appraisingly. +He was a broad-shouldered, well-muscled fellow. +He spoke to him briefly but the cook shook his +head. He could not understand.</p> + +<p>The old sailor picked up a rope and spread it in +a big circle on the deck.</p> + +<p>"This insulting of you has got to be stopped +right off," he declared, addressing the interpreter. +"Give me your knife."</p> + +<p>The Greek surrendered his weapon.</p> + +<p>"Now both of you get inside that ring and fight it<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span> +out to a finish," he ordered. "Lick him good for +calling you names."</p> + +<p>Manuel's face fell, and, turning he spoke rapidly +to the cook. "He has apologized and my honor is +satisfied," he declared.</p> + +<p>"All right," the captain said with a wink at the +grinning boys. "Next time any one insults you, +I am going to make you give him a good licking in a +square fist fight. I'm not agoing to let any of the +crew swear at you and call you names—it ain't +right."</p> + +<p>"I guess we won't have any more complaints +from him right off," he chuckled as the disappointed +Greek retired forward.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid we're going to have more or less +trouble through not understanding their language," +Charley said, gravely. "I don't believe he had a bit +of trouble with the cook. He was just aiming to +have you punish the fellow and get you disliked by +the crew."</p> + +<p>"I can handle him all right," the captain declared, +confidently. "If he gets troublesome I'll +iron him and put him down in the hold. I reckon I +can make the rest understand what I want done by +signs, though it would be mighty awkward if a gale +struck us."</p> + +<p>The old sailor soon left the boys in charge of the +deck and went below to write up the log and look +over the charts.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span></p> + +<p>"If this wind holds we'll be on the edge of the +sponging grounds by night," he said when he returned. +"I didn't realize before how big they are. +Why, they reach clear from Cedar Keys to Cape +Sable, about seven hundred miles."</p> + +<p>"One thing that has puzzled me is that all these +schooners seem to come from Key West," Charley +remarked, '"Of Key West' is lettered on the stern +of every one of them."</p> + +<p>"Key West used to be the headquarters for the +sponging business in the old days," the captain explained. +"They used to gather sponges different +from what they do now. A schooner would take +out about twenty small boats an' a crew of forty +men. When she got to the sponge grounds, the +small boats would scatter out around her, two men +in each boat. One man would do the sculling and +the other would lean over the bow with a water +glass in one hand—a pail with a pane of glass for a +bottom—and a long pole with a hook in the end in +the other. When he spied a sponge on the bottom +through the glass he'd have the other stop sculling +and he would hook it up with his pole. It was +slow, hard work, but they made money at it until +the Greeks came with their expert divers. They +could not compete with them so they either sold or +leased their schooners to the Greeks and went out of +business."</p> + +<p>The old sailor's explanation was interrupted by a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span> +howl of "Oh, Golly!" from the cook' galley forward +and Chris, dripping with water, bounded out +of the open door of the little structure, and rushed +aft.</p> + +<p>"I want you to put dat cook in irons, Massa Captain," +he cried. "He's done 'saulted his superior +officer."</p> + +<p>"What did he do to you," the captain asked with +a twinkle in his eye.</p> + +<p>"Throwed a hull pan of dirty, nasty dishwater +obber me. I was jus' tellin' him how he had outer +do, an' tryin' to show de ignorant man how to cook, +when—slosh—he let fly dat big pan full all obber +me."</p> + +<p>The dirty water was streaming from the little +negro's brilliant clothing and his face was streaked +with purple from his cap.</p> + +<p>The captain checked his desire to laugh.</p> + +<p>"The cook did just right," he said, gravely. +"You've got no business in his galley. A cook is always +boss there. Even the Captain seldom interferes +with him."</p> + +<p>Chris seemed inclined to protest indignantly, but +the old sailor continued.</p> + +<p>"How would you like to be cook an' have some +one poking around an' tellin' you what to do?"</p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon you is right," the little darkey +admitted, "I wouldn't stand such doin's. 'Spect<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span> +dough dat my good clothes is all spoiled. Dat +water was powerful greasy."</p> + +<p>"Better dry them out and lay them away," Walter +suggested. "They are too fine to wear at sea. +You had ought to save them 'till we get in port."</p> + +<p>Both boys were glad when Chris accepted the suggestion. +They could see that the crew regarded the +little fellow in his gay apparel with a contempt and +ridicule that the plucky, loyal little lad did not deserve.</p> + +<p>Under her shortened canvas, the "Beauty" had +dropped to the rear of the fleet. Late in the afternoon +the schooners ahead began to shorten sail. +Soon one rounded up into the wind, dropped anchor +and lowered sail. A mile further on another one +anchored, a mile beyond another took in sail, until +at last the whole fleet was strung out in a long line +reaching many miles North and South.</p> + +<p>The captain held the "Beauty" on her course +until the last schooner was passed then anchored, +lowered sails and made everything snug.</p> + +<p>"We are on the sponging grounds," he explained +to the boys who had been puzzled by the fleet's +maneuvers. "To-morrow we make our first try as +spongers."</p> + +<p>As soon as their supper was finished the boys +strolled forward to view the crew at their meal.</p> + +<p>The Greeks ate in groups of four. Each group +had a great tin pan filled with some kind of stew.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span> +This they divided into four equal portions with their +big spoons, all eating from the same pan.</p> + +<p>The stew, black bread as hard as a rock, and ripe +olives constituted their meal, but the boys, hearty +eaters themselves, were astounded at the amount of +food each Greek disposed of.</p> + +<p>"I never dreamed a man could stow away so +much grub," Charley remarked. "They are not +eating three meals in one, but six."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VII.<br /> + +<small>SPONGING.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> morning sun rose over a scene of bustle and +activity. From the hundred schooners strung out +two or three hundred diving boats with sails hoisted +and engines chugging.</p> + +<p>The young officers were up and away with the +earliest.</p> + +<p>"Go slow," Captain Westfield cautioned them as +they stepped aboard their craft. "Keep your eyes +open an' learn all you can. Don't give any orders +unless they are absolutely needed. But if you have +to give them an order make them obey it, don't let +them trifle with you. You can take Manuel along +if you want to, I reckon I can manage to get along +without him."</p> + +<p>But the boys declined the offer. They had both +taken a great dislike to the suave, smiling Greek.</p> + +<p>The Captain had given their crew general instructions +before they left the schooner and the young +officers had but little to do but signify by waves of +their hands which direction they wished to go.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span></p> + +<p>All places looked alike to the inexperienced boys, +and as soon as their craft was a quarter of a mile +from the schooner, Charley signed to his crew to +anchor and proceed with their work.</p> + +<p>The divers at once prepared for their descent to +the bottom. The lead was first hove to find out the +depth of the water, which proved to be about thirty-five +feet. Before donning their waterproof suits, +the divers tested the air pump carefully and examined +the air hose minutely, for upon these two things +their lives would depend when once they sank beneath +the surface. While they were putting on the +strange looking suits and heavy leaded shoes, the +crew slung short ladders over the sides. The divers +put on their headpieces last of all, these were large +globe-shaped coverings of metal with two heavy +glasses in front through which to see. But two +divers were to descend at a time. Their places +would be taken by two others at the end of two +hours, which is about as long as one can safely work +at a time beneath the surface. Those in reserve assisted +their companions in adjusting the heavy headpieces. +As soon as the helmets were on they screwed +in the air hose, and connected the other ends to the +pumps. A line by which to lower and raise them +was fastened around each diver's body and he was +then assisted onto the ladder, for it was almost impossible +for them to move in their cumbersome suits +and lead shoes. As soon as they had been helped to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span> +the lowest step on the ladder, each was given a large +basket to which a long line had been fastened, and +they were slowly and gently lowered to the bottom.</p> + +<p>The young officers watched their operations with +eager interest. What impressed them most was the +vigilant care shown by the divers remaining on +board. One took charge of the tub in which the air +hose was coiled and paid it out carefully as the diver +sank, the other held the life-line instantly ready for +the jerks which would signal to him the wishes of +the one below. Not once did either's eyes shift or +his attention waver from his task.</p> + +<p>"It's easy to see that this is a dangerous business," +Walter remarked.</p> + +<p>"Yes," his chum agreed, "I am beginning to see +that Mr. Williams was right when he said sponging +was a man's game. It certainly takes nerve to descend +like those divers have, knowing that there is +nothing between them and death but that little air +hose. But have you noticed how they are treating +that strange handsome fellow? They all seem to be +afraid to have him near."</p> + +<p>The mysterious sailor had approached the men +working the air pumps, apparently with the purpose +of helping with the pumping, but the pumpers drove +him away with menacing gestures and upraised fists. +He moved over near the coiled air hose but the diver +in charge of that met him with a torrent of fiercely-uttered +words and he slunk dejectedly forward, and,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span> +seating himself by the mast, buried his face in his +hands.</p> + +<p>"Poor chap," Walter remarked, "he seems to be +hated by the whole crew. I wonder what is the +reason."</p> + +<p>"We will find out, I guess, when we meet up with +Mr. Williams again," his chum replied. "He will +likely know, or be able to find out quickly from some +of his crew. But look, we are about to see our first +sponges."</p> + +<p>There had been a couple of quick jerks on the life-line. +The diver holding it called to one of the crew +who seized the line that had been attached to the +basket, and began hauling it carefully in hand over +hand.</p> + +<p>The boys leaned over the side, eager for the first +glimpse of their future cargo. When the basket +came into view they both uttered an exclamation of +disgust and disappointment.</p> + +<p>Instead of bright, clean, yellow sponges with +which they were familiar, the basket was heaped +with what looked like huge lumps of dirty mud.</p> + +<p>The man dumped the contents out on deck and +lowered the basket down again.</p> + +<p>"What greenies we are," Charley said as he +glanced at his chum's crestfallen face. "We might +have known if we had stopped to think, that sponges +have to be cleaned and cured before they look like +those we saw on shore. I expect that pile is worth<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span> +a lot of money in spite of its unattractive appearance."</p> + +<p>Five times did the basket appear loaded to the +brim before the divers' two hour spell below expired. +As soon as their time was up they were +hauled aboard, their suits removed and the other +two took their places.</p> + +<p>"Whew, but I am getting hungry," Walter exclaimed +as noon time drew near, "and we came off +from the schooner without bringing a lunch with +us."</p> + +<p>"I am glad we did," Charley said. "It's all +right having our meals regular when we are on +board the schooner and out of sight of the crew, but +it would hardly seem right to eat now before these +hungry fellows. I guess we can stand it to go without +dinner of they can stand it to go without both +dinner and breakfast. Besides, I don't believe I +could eat any lunch if we had it. Whew, but that +smell is getting awful."</p> + +<p>The hot sun was getting in its work on the rapidly +increasing pile of sponges on deck. Adhering to +them were multitudes of muscles and little fish +which were beginning to send forth a fearful stench.</p> + +<p>"I am beginning to realize that a sponger's life is +anything but a bed of roses," Walter laughed. "It's +easy to understand now why they only eat one meal +a day."</p> + +<p>The novelty of the diving operations soon wore<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span> +off and the boys, to pass the time, busied themselves +with an attempt to learn something of the Greek +language. They selected the engineer for their +teacher. He was a young fellow with an intelligent, +good-humored face and seemed to take great interest +in their efforts. Touching different parts of +the boat and engine the boys repeated the English +names for them. The young fellow grasped the idea +instantly and repeated the names in Greek, laughing +heartily over their attempts to pronounce the +words after him.</p> + +<p>In this manner the time passed quickly and pleasantly +and the lads were delighted with the rapid +progress they made.</p> + +<p>"At this rate we will be able to speak the language +a little in a week's time," Charley declared. +"I'm—" but he never finished the sentence.</p> + +<p>From around them rose cries that brought the +lads springing to their feet.</p> + +<p>The crew were all crowded against the rail staring +as if fascinated over the side, while the diver +holding one of the life-lines was hauling it in with +feverish energy.</p> + +<p>As the boys sprang to the rail, the diver's headpiece +appeared above the surface One glance, and +they understood the reason for the sudden commotion—from +the metal helmet dangled a short piece +of severed air hose.</p> + +<p>The luckless man was quickly dragged aboard,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span> +the head-piece quickly removed, and his rubber +clothing cut away, but his eyes were closed and his +face purple—he was dead. A long, weird, prolonged +wailing came from his shipmates which +arose and fell strangely, like the strains of the +mournful death march.</p> + +<p>The two chums gazed at each other with pale, +horror-stricken faces.</p> + +<p>"Poor fellow," Walter murmured, "His life +went out like a candle in a gale. Alive one minute, +dead the next. What could have cut that hose?"</p> + +<p>"Chafed against a sharp branch of coral or bitten +in two by a shark," Charley replied, sadly. +"Well, I guess it means the last of our sponging, +the other divers will hardly want to go down after +such an accident, and I don't blame them."</p> + +<p>But, to his amazement, as soon as the wailing +chant ceased, one of the remaining divers began +coolly to prepare to take the dead man's place.</p> + +<p>"My, but those fellows have got nerve," he declared, +admiringly, but he stopped the man as he +began to put on his diving suit and by signs ordered +the crew to get up anchor and return to the schooner.</p> + +<p>"It's only a couple of hours to dark and we have +had enough for one day anyway," he remarked to +his chum.</p> + +<p>When the diving boat reached the schooner his +shipmates prepared the dead man for burial. The +body was sewed up in stout canvas and a piece of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span> +iron fastened to it. It was then gently lowered over +the side and sank slowly beneath the waves.</p> + +<p>With its disappearance all vestige of gloom disappeared +from the crew. The dead man's scanty belongings +were brought forth and auctioned off to the +various bidders, and an hour after the crew were +chatting and laughing with each other as cheerfully +as ever.</p> + +<p>"Mr. Williams was right, this is a man's game, +and a game for rough, fearless men only," Walter +remarked thoughtfully, for a second time.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VIII.<br /> + +<small>TROUBLE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">After</span> the crew had eaten their supper and rested +a bit, the captain had them transfer the sponges +from the diving boat to the deck of the schooner. +The sponges made quite an imposing pile which the +old sailor surveyed with satisfaction. "You've +done well to-day," he remarked, "if every day's +work is as good we'll have a valuable cargo before +our three months are up. I reckon, thar's all of +two hundred dollars' worth of sponges in that +heap."</p> + +<p>"Are you sure that you know how to clean and +cure them right?" Charley enquired.</p> + +<p>"I don't, but Chris knows that part of the business +from A to Z. Where he comes from the people +live by sponging and pearl fishing."</p> + +<p>"Golly, dat's right," observed the little darkey. +"I'se helped my daddy fix sponges many a time. +First off, you'se got to beat de mud out ob dem wid +sticks, den you got to let dem lay foah a day or two +to die, 'cause dey's alive jus' like fishes. When +dey's good an' dead, you puts dem in nets an' hangs +dem ober de side for de water to wash dem out clean.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span> +Den you dry dem out on deck an' string dem out on +strings 'bout two yards long. Dat makes dem all +ready for market 'cept for clipping de bad parts off +of dem, which is done on shore. Dar ain't nothin' +'bout fixin' up sponges dat dis nigger doan know."</p> + +<p>Just then a small boat came alongside the schooner +and the boys hastened to the side to welcome the +two men it contained. They were the captain and +mate of the schooner anchored nearest to the +"Beauty". Both were young fellows hardly out +of their teens. They introduced themselves as +Steve Ward, and Ray Lowe.</p> + +<p>"We thought we'd drop over and have a little +chat with you," said Ward, who was the captain. +"You, of course, don't realize it yet, but an American +face looks mighty good amongst this army of +Greeks, especially after one has been out for a +month or two. We all start out together but before +the season ends we get pretty widely scattered and +to meet up with another schooner with an American +aboard is like coming across a long-lost brother. +This is my fifth trip and I am getting pretty well +hardened to the loneliness now, but the first time I +was out I nearly went crazy. After we parted from +the rest of the fleet, it was worse than being alone +on a desert island, for I had the misery of seeing +others talk, laugh and enjoy themselves without +being able to understand a word. When, at last, +we came across a ship with someone aboard I could<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span> +talk to I nearly cried for joy. It seemed so good to +be able to understand and make myself understood +once more." His glance fell upon Manuel +George, who was leaning against the rail, and his +gray eyes narrowed.</p> + +<p>"What made you bring that fellow with you?" +he asked.</p> + +<p>"We had to have someone along who could talk +their lingo," Captain Westfield replied. "Do you +know him?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know anything good of him," said the +other shortly. "I came near killing him once and +I've always half regretted that I didn't do it. It +was on my first trip," he explained. "It was just +such another case as that young fellow's who was +arrested the other day. Although I was captain, +the Greeks owned the schooner, and, because I +was young and inexperienced, they got the idea they +could run over me and do as they pleased. Manuel +was always stirring them up and encouraging them +to disobey orders. One day I had some words with +him about it, and,"—the young fellow's face darkened—"well, +he carries a bullet in his leg yet. The +others set on me and I had to lock myself up in the +cabin. Likely, they would have got me in the end +and thrown me overboard to feed the sharks, but +we happened to come across another schooner and +they had to let me go."</p> + +<p>"He don't want to try any tricks with me," Captain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span> +Westfield declared. "I got him to talk their +lingo but had him sign on as one of the crew. If he +tries to act up, I'll put him at the hardest work on +the schooner."</p> + +<p>"Well, keep your eye on him," advised the other. +"He has never made a trip yet without making +trouble. He's a mighty bad egg and as sly and cunning +as he is mean."</p> + +<p>The two men remained for over two hours, and +from them the little party learned many new and +interesting things about their new business and about +the Greeks.</p> + +<p>"We have no reason to complain of a dull trip +so far," Charley said, when the two Americans had +left. "Only two days out and one of our crew is +dead, another is supposed to be on the watch to make +us trouble, and a third is a mystery worth solving, +judging from the way the others treat him. If +things keep on as they have started, we will have a +voyage exciting enough to satisfy anyone."</p> + +<p>If the lad could have known of the exciting events +soon to follow close on each other's heels, he would +have had even less reason to complain of dullness.</p> + +<p>The next day's sponging was the same as the +first. They seemed to have happened upon a spot +where the sponges were unusually plentiful. The +basket came frequently to the surface loaded with +the big mud-covered masses and by nightfall the +diving boat's deck was well covered. All day the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span> +two lads persisted in their attempt to learn the Greek +names for the things about them. By night Charley +was able to direct the operation of getting under +way for the schooner. Of course, he was yet unable +to construct sentences in Greek, but he could call the +Greek names for sails, anchor, and different parts of +the rigging and the crew managed to guess the rest. +Though it was a crude and imperfect way of giving +orders, it succeeded better than the slow, imperfect +signs he had been obliged to depend upon before.</p> + +<p>"If we keep on as fast, we will be able to make +them understand us well within two weeks," he declared +gleefully.</p> + +<p>It was still light enough for them to see distinctly +when they reached the schooner, and they looked +about them with regret as they climbed aboard. +Her snow-white decks were filthy from the pounding +out of the sponges, and bulwarks, sails and rigging +were spattered with the foul mud, while the +strong, rank odor of dead fish hung heavy in the air.</p> + +<p>Chris and the captain had just knocked off work. +Their faces, hands and clothing were black as soot. +The old sailor's face showed set and stern through +its coating of mud. He said little until all were +washed up and seated around the supper table.</p> + +<p>"Well, lads, I reckon our troubles have begun," +he remarked, grimly. "Manuel an' I had a row to-day."</p> + +<p>"What about? How did it come out?" the boys +questioned, eagerly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I told him to help us with the sponge cleaning +and he refused to do it. When I insisted he flew +into a rage, cursed me, an' shook his fist in my face. +I couldn't stand for that an' he's down in the hold +now with the irons on him."</p> + +<p>"Well, I feel easier with him there than with him +mixing in with the crew," Charley declared.</p> + +<p>"My row with him ain't the worst of the matter," +the old sailor said gravely. "I called on the crew to +help me iron him and they all pretended they didn't +understand my sign, but they knew what I wanted +all right. I had to handle him alone an' we had +quite a struggle before I got the best of him." He +rolled up his sleeve and showed an ugly-looking cut +on his arm. "He came near getting me with his +knife an' I had to give him a couple of taps with a +belaying pin. That cut don't amount to anything, +but what worries me is that the crew stood around +an' watched him try to kill me without interfering—it's +a mighty bad sign."</p> + +<p>"That does look bad," Charley agreed, anxiously. +"I guess we had better keep him a close +prisoner and not let any of the crew go near him, he +might try to stir them up and make things hot for +us."</p> + +<p>"But that means that someone will have to guard +him an' carry his meals to him. It wouldn't do to +have one of the Greeks do it, I reckon."</p> + +<p>"No," Charley agreed, thoughtfully, "but I believe<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span> +I've got the very man for the job—that handsome +fellow the others seem to hate so. Manuel +tried to kill him and he is not likely to be easy with +him."</p> + +<p>The mysterious sailor was at once sent for by +Ben. As soon as he came the captain loaded a tray +with food and a bottle of water and signed for him +to carry it and follow him. Charley and Walter accompanied +the two.</p> + +<p>As they passed along the deck on their way to the +hold, they met angry glances and frowns from the +crew.</p> + +<p>The mysterious sailor was very intelligent and +they soon made him understand that he was to +guard the prisoner. He grinned with enjoyment +and, seating himself a little way from the Greek, +took out his long keen sheath knife and laid it handy +beside him.</p> + +<p>The prisoner's face grew black with rage at sight +of his guard, but he maintained a sulky silence.</p> + +<p>"I guess he's safe enough now," the captain said +as they returned to their cabin. "I believe that +fellow will guard him faithfully. They seem to +hate each other like poison—I wish I knew the reason +for it."</p> + +<p>"It would not seem so strange if the hatred was +confined to him and Manuel, but all the others seem +to share in the feeling," Charley remarked. "It +seems very queer to me."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER IX.<br /> + +<small>MANUEL'S RELEASE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Before</span> the boys left the schooner next morning, +the guard they had set over Manuel approached the +captain, and by signs and gestures intimated that +the prisoner wished to speak to him.</p> + +<p>Manuel's sullen demeanor had entirely disappeared +and he looked humble and penitent.</p> + +<p>"I wish to make my most humble apologies to +you, noble captain," he declared. "All night long +I have thought over my hasty actions with shame +and regret. You were right and I wrong. I will +work hard at whatever you set me to do, and in the +future you will have no cause to complain if you +will set me at liberty."</p> + +<p>There were tears in the fellow's eyes and his +voice trembled as he spoke.</p> + +<p>"Stop that blubbering," said the blunt old sailor, +who detested tears in men. "I reckon, if you are +sure that you've learned your lesson an' won't try to +act smart again, I'll set you free; but the minute +you try to start any trouble again, I'll put you down +here for keeps."</p> + +<p>As he removed the irons from the prisoner, the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span> +strange sailor burst into a torrent of passionate +speech.</p> + +<p>The captain paid no attention to him for he could +not understand a word of it, but Charley, who was +watching closely, saw Manuel give the fellow a +quick glance of sly triumph.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid you have made a mistake in setting +that fellow free, Captain," the lad said, as they returned +to the deck. "I believe it would have been +wiser to have kept him in irons until we could +touch some port and put him ashore."</p> + +<p>"I never feel like being hard on a man when he's +sorry for what he has done," the old sailor replied. +"I guess it will make the crew feel better tempered +to have him set free. I'm going to put him ashore +at the first port we touch. In the meanwhile we'll +keep him hard at work an' keep a eye on him all the +time."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we had better take him with us and put +him to work at the pump," Walter suggested. +"That's good hard work."</p> + +<p>Charley approved the suggestion, for in spite of +the Greek's seeming repentance, the lad did not trust +him in the least and thought it wisest that he and +the captain should be kept separated for awhile after +their quarrel.</p> + +<p>Manuel went at the hard labor at the air pump +with a willingness and cheerfulness which seemed +to show the sincerity of his repentance. At first, he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span> +seemed inclined to talk overmuch with the rest of +the crew, but Charley cut short his talkativeness +with a curt command.</p> + +<p>"I believe that fellow is a regular Jonah," he confided +to his chum during the noon hour rest. "Yesterday +and the day before we got lots of sponges, +but we haven't taken in enough this morning to pay +expenses."</p> + +<p>"I guess this part of the ground is getting worked +out, perhaps," Walter replied. "I've noticed several +schooners pulling up anchor and getting under +way."</p> + +<p>His surmise proved correct for during the afternoon +many of the fleet passed them headed North. +Evidently others were finding the ground as poor +as they did.</p> + +<p>Late in the afternoon the captain recalled them +to the schooner with a signal previously agreed +upon,—a flag hoisted to the foremast head.</p> + +<p>"I reckon we'd better be getting under way," +the old sailor said when they got aboard. "I want +to keep with the fleet an' all the schooners seem to +be getting under sail. I've noted the course they +are takin' an' with this wind they'll be a long ways +from us if we wait until morning. I hailed one of +the captains and he said they intended to sail all +night an' anchor an' get to work early in the morning."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span></p> + +<p>By the time the sails were all hoisted and the +anchor tripped, it had grown quite dark so the +schooner's great side-lights of red and green were +filled, lit, and lashed to the foremast shrouds, for, +with so many boats around them every caution must +be taken to avoid running one down, or being run +down themselves. The crew was divided into three +watches. Of which Walter was to have charge of +the first, from eight to twelve o'clock. Charley to +have command of the second, or middle watch, from +twelve to four o'clock, while the captain would take +the third, or morning watch, from four to eight +<span class="smcap">A. M.</span></p> + +<p>The breeze held steady and strong and the night +passed away without any exciting incident.</p> + +<p>The boys were up again at first peep of day, expecting +to have to start out with the diving boat as +soon as the sun arose. But, when they gained the +deck, they found the "Beauty" still swinging along +on her course and the captain pacing the deck +greatly perplexed.</p> + +<p>"It's mighty queer, but thar ain't one of the fleet +in sight," he exclaimed as he caught sight of the lads. +"I don't understand it at all. Go aloft, Charley, an' +see if you can see any of them."</p> + +<p>The lad swung himself into the shrouds and made +his way up to the mainmast cross trees, but, although +he gazed all around, his eyes met nothing but the +broad expanse of the blue sparkling waters.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Maybe we've run them all out of sight during +the night," he suggested when he regained the deck, +but the old sailor shook his head.</p> + +<p>"The 'Beauty's' mighty fast, but she's not +speedy enough to do that," he declared. "Some of +those schooners were ten miles ahead of us when we +started. Besides, I shortened sail as soon as I took +my watch, because I did not want to get in the lead."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we have dropped away behind the rest," +Walter said, but the others knew that that was impossible. +The "Beauty" was far too fast a boat to +be left so far behind.</p> + +<p>The Captain examined the log. "We have come +a hundred and ten miles," he said. "Do you reckon +either of you boys could have made a mistake in the +course during your watch?"</p> + +<p>"We didn't vary a quarter of a point from the +direction you gave during my four hours," Charley +declared. "I kept watch of the compass most of +the time and the needle held steady at North."</p> + +<p>"I was careful about that, also," Walter said. +"We were headed exactly North during my entire +watch."</p> + +<p>"Well, that compass is true," the captain declared. +"I tested it carefully before we left port. I reckon +thar's only one explanation; the fleet must have +changed their course during the night. We'd better +heave-to until noon when I can take the sun an' tell +exactly where we are at. It ain't no use trying to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span> +pick up the fleet again, now they are out of sight—it +would be like hunting for a needle in a hay stack."</p> + +<p>The crew were immediately set to taking in sail +and in a few minutes the little ship was lying head +to the wind under reefed foresail sail.</p> + +<p>When the noon hour drew near, Captain Westfield +brought his instruments on deck and prepared to +take an observation of the sun. As soon as he secured +it he went below to work out their position on +the chart.</p> + +<p>When he reappeared his face wore a very puzzled +expression. "Heave the lead and find out how +deep the water is an' what kind of bottom," he said, +briefly.</p> + +<p>Charley took the lead, a heavy cone-shaped piece +of lead, slightly hollowed at the bottom, and with a +long line attached to the small end. Filling the +hollow end with soft soap, he dropped the lead over +the side and let it sink until it struck the bottom. +Then he pulled it aboard again, noting carefully the +water mark on the line and examining the soap to +which some particles of the bottom had adhered.</p> + +<p>"Depth, six fathoms, (36 feet) bottom, soft gray +mud," he announced.</p> + +<p>The captain strode back to the compass and stared +at it with a puzzled frown on his face.</p> + +<p>"We're forty miles from where we should be," +he said as the boys gathered around him, "Sure<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span> +neither of you boys made a mistake in the course last +night?"</p> + +<p>"Sure," declared both lads positively.</p> + +<p>The four puzzled over the strange situation in +silence for several minutes. Then the captain with +his knife loosened the screws and removed the compass' +face of glass.</p> + +<p>"I wonder how that got there," he suddenly exclaimed.</p> + +<p>Cunningly placed, so as to draw the magnetic +needle West of North was a small bright iron nail.</p> + +<p>"It couldn't have got there by itself," Charley +declared, excitedly. "It must have been put there +by someone while we were all at supper last night."</p> + +<p>"I guess there is no doubt as to who that someone +was," with an inclination of his head towards +Manuel who, standing a little ways off was watching +them closely. The Greek, as soon as he saw the +attention he was receiving, turned and strolled carelessly +forward.</p> + +<p>The captain pondered gravely, "I don't see +what his object was," he said, at last. "If we held +on that course long it would only have carried us +further out into the Gulf, so he couldn't have been +aiming to get us wrecked."</p> + +<p>"He planned to get us separated from the fleet," +Charley declared. "Do you think we could find it +again, captain?"</p> + +<p>The old sailor shook his head. "There's no telling<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span> +where we are now," he said, gloomily, "we +might hunt for days without coming across them. +If that fellow did put that nail there to make us lose +them, he's succeeded all right."</p> + +<p>"What had we better do, captain?" Walter +asked, anxiously.</p> + +<p>"Well, we aint got no real proof that the fellow +put that nail thar so we can't do anything with him. +It might have been in thar all the time, though I'm +willing to take an oath that the compass was true +when we left port. Thar ain't much chance of picking +up the fleet again an' I don't reckon we'd better +waste time trying it. The lead shows we are still +on the sponge banks an' I reckon we'd best just get +to work, say nothing, an' keep a close watch on that +oil Greek chap."</p> + +<p>The "Beauty" was anchored accordingly, sails +lowered and furled, and everything made snug. As +soon as that was done, the boys ordered their crew +into the diving boat and, running out a little ways +from the schooner, gave the signal to resume the +diving operations.</p> + +<p>By sheer accident, they had chanced upon a spot +rich in sponges and the lads watched with satisfaction +the steady reappearance of the lowered basket.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER X.<br /> + +<small>A RASH RESOLVE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> boys watched Manuel closely throughout the +entire afternoon, but they could detect nothing +amiss in his manner or actions. He did his work +willingly and cheerfully, humming a tune most of +the time, apparently he was at peace with himself +and the world.</p> + +<p>They were not the only ones who watched the +Greek closely. Whenever the lads glanced at the +handsome sailor, they found him gazing intently +at the suspected man, much as a cat watches a +mouse, ready to spring at its slightest movement.</p> + +<p>The boys kept well apart from the crew, watchful +for any threatened outbreak on their part. But the +men seemed so cheerful, willing and contented that +they soon grew ashamed of their distrust.</p> + +<p>Once the handsome sailor approached them +respectfully, hat in hand, and, halting before them, +spoke rapidly in a low voice. The lads shook their +heads to show that they did not understand, and, +with a look of helpless resignation on his face, the +fellow returned to his work.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I wish we could understand what he says," +Charley said, wistfully. "He, evidently, has something +important he wishes to tell us."</p> + +<p>"We will be able to make out what he says before +long," Walter said, cheerfully. "We are learning +lots of new words every day."</p> + +<p>"Yes, we are getting along pretty well," his chum +agreed, "but we are not picking up the language near +as well as Chris. It's really wonderful how fast he +is learning."</p> + +<p>The little negro and the Greek boy had become +great friends and Chris, naturally quick witted, was +learning with astonishing rapidity to talk to his new +chum.</p> + +<p>"It's the best day we've had yet," Charley declared +as they returned to the schooner in the evening. +"We have got as many sponges this afternoon +as we have during any entire day."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield was elated over their success. +"It's turned out all right after all," he said. +"We've stumbled upon a mighty rich part of the +banks, an' I reckon, we ain't lost the fleet either, +as we feared, thar's some twenty sails coming up +from the South'ard."</p> + +<p>The vessels, which the boys had not noticed before, +were approaching rapidly, coming before the +stiff breeze. Before dark settled down, they were +plainly visible but the eager watchers could not +recognize any of them, they seemed larger schooners<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span> +than any they had seen in the fleet. The strangers +anchored for the night near the "Beauty" and the +captain got out his night glass and studied them +carefully.</p> + +<p>"They ain't any of the fleet," he declared with +keen disappointment. "They're Spanish smacks +from Cuba. They fish around this coast regularly +every season."</p> + +<p>"Well, they'll be some company, anyway, as long +as they stay near us," Charley said, cheerfully. "I +can speak Spanish if I can't Greek, we can go over +and call on them in the morning. I'd like to go +to-night, but I feel too tired out to move."</p> + +<p>Soon after supper, Manuel approached Captain +Westfield, respectfully.</p> + +<p>"We would like to go aboard the schooners, if +you will permit," he requested. "We are nearly out +of tobacco and the Cubans always carry a lot for +which we can trade."</p> + +<p>The old sailor thought for a few minutes. "You +can go," he said, shortly, "you an' one man. Take +the dingy. I don't want the diving boat used. An' +be sure you're back aboard early."</p> + +<p>The Greek thanked him effusively for the permission, +and, calling one of his shipmates, the two got +the schooner's little boat over the side and sculled +away for the nearest smack.</p> + +<p>"They have got plenty of tobacco," growled the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span> +captain, as soon as the two were out of hearing. +"Thar was enough sent aboard at Tarpon to last +them for months. I reckon he's figuring on deserting, +that's why I let him go. I'd be willing to lose +the boat and the other man to be well rid of him."</p> + +<p>It seemed that the old sailor was correct for when +eight o'clock came Manuel had not returned.</p> + +<p>"After what happened last night, I don't reckon +it's wise to leave the deck alone," the captain said as +the boys prepared to retire to their bunks. "One +of us had ought to keep watch to see that no one +monkeys with the wheel or compass."</p> + +<p>Walter offered to take the first watch from eight +to twelve, and, leaving him pacing back and forth +aft of the mainmast, the others retired to rest.</p> + +<p>Charley was awakened by a vigorous shaking and +his chum's voice calling to him to get up.</p> + +<p>"My watch so soon," grumbled the lad sleepily, +"Seems like I just got to sleep."</p> + +<p>"It's only eleven o'clock," said Walter in excited +tones, "but Manuel came aboard an hour ago very +drunk. He must have brought liquor with him for +they are all raising merry Ned in the forecastle now. +The captain and Chris are on deck. Hurry up, +there's likely to be trouble any minute."</p> + +<p>Charley slipped hastily into his clothing and securing +his revolver ran on deck. His three companions +with revolvers in their hands were ranged across +the deck just aft of the mainmast. From the forecastle,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span> +forward, came an uproar of shouting, cursing, +and fighting.</p> + +<p>The old sailor was blaming himself, bitterly. +"I'd ought to have thought of it," he exclaimed, +"Auguident is cheap as water in Cuba an' those +smacks always carry a lot of it to trade off for other +things. What an old fool I was."</p> + +<p>"What shall we do?" Charley asked.</p> + +<p>"Nothing, but let 'em fight it out amongst themselves +an' keep 'em from crowding aft on us. Our +lives wouldn't be worth a pinch of snuff if we went +down to quiet them. If any of 'em tries to come aft +of the mainmast, shoot him."</p> + +<p>The words were hardly out of his mouth when +a figure burst out of the forecastle and came running +aft followed by several others staggering, shouting +and cursing.</p> + +<p>The captain raised his pistol and took deliberate +aim as the flying man drew near.</p> + +<p>"Stop, or I'll shoot," he commanded.</p> + +<p>Charley knocked aside his upraised arm. "Let +him pass," he cried, "it's the strange sailor, they +have been trying to kill him."</p> + +<p>The handsome fellow was bleeding from a dozen +knife wounds, and was breathing short and heavily. +As he reached the little party of chums, he turned +about and faced his pursuers. It was evident that +he did not lack courage.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span></p> + +<p>The pursuing Greeks stopped short at sight of the +little band stretched across the deck with leveled +revolvers. For a minute they seemed about to dash +forward regardless of consequences, but, after a +moment's hesitation, with a volley of curses they +turned and slunk back to the forecastle. They were +yet sober enough to realize the danger of open +mutiny.</p> + +<p>"I don't think they'll try to bother us," said the +captain with a sigh of relief. "They ain't drunk +enough for that yet, an' I reckon they've about +drank up all their liquor by now. It wouldn't last +long amongst so many of them."</p> + +<p>The strange sailor had sunk to the deck in a dead +faint, and, leaving the boys to guard the deck, the +Captain and Chris carried him below, and, laying +him in one of the bunks, hurried back to their companions.</p> + +<p>"He ain't going to die," the old sailor informed +them. "He's just weak from loss of blood. I +didn't take time to look him over close, but I +counted nineteen knife cuts on his body an' likely +thar's some I didn't notice."</p> + +<p>"We will have to keep him back aft with us. +They would likely kill him if we sent him back to +the forecastle, for he is unable to defend himself +now," Charley said, and his chums agreed with him.</p> + +<p>The uproar in the forecastle continued for a long +time then gradually subsided. Evidently, the crew<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span> +had disposed of the last of the liquor and its effects +were slowly wearing off.</p> + +<p>Not until four o'clock, however, did the last noise +cease, and the little party of chums remained on +deck until the sun rose, ready for any violence from +the drunken Greeks. Daylight found them pale and +tired from their long, anxious vigil.</p> + +<p>"Better go below, lads, and have a good nap," +the captain advised. "They have all quieted down +and there is no danger of trouble for the present. +They are going to feel mighty sick and weak from +the drink."</p> + +<p>"I'm not going to give them a chance to sleep +off their bad feelings," declared Charley, grimly. +"My crew have got to turn to and work as usual. +I'm going to turn them out as soon as Ben awakes."</p> + +<p>When the little Greek lad appeared, looking pale +and frightened, Charley sent him below to rouse +Manuel.</p> + +<p>The lad, apparently, did not relish the task but he +went, and, after a long time, reappeared accompanied +by the Greek.</p> + +<p>Manuel plainly showed the effects of the liquor. +He looked sick and haggard and one eye was much +discolored from a blow he had received. He was +ready, however, with an excuse for the night's disorder. +"I did my best to stop the noise and trouble, +and it was thus I received a blow in the eye."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You were drunk when you came aboard," +accused Walter.</p> + +<p>"I took a drink on the schooner," admitted +Manuel, "only one little drink. It was foolish, for +I am unused to liquor and it went to my legs, but my +head was clear. I regret the disorder of the others."</p> + +<p>There was no doubt in the minds of the captain +and the boys that he was really the author of all +the trouble, but they could not prove it and Charley +dismissed him with a curt command to call the crew.</p> + +<p>They were a sick-looking crowd when they were +at last collected on deck. All showed the effect of +the liquor and many were the black eyes and bruised +faces. Their fighting humor seemed to have departed, +however, and they went about their tasks +quietly, sullenly, and listlessly.</p> + +<p>After they had finished their morning coffee, +Charley ordered his crew into the diving boat and +set out for the spot where they had found so many +sponges.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XI.<br /> + +<small>A MYSTERY.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> two boys kept well apart from the crew, +and watched closely for any signs of threatened +trouble, but, although the men looked sullen and +ugly enough for any kind of act, they seemed much +subdued and went about their tasks quietly saying +little, even to each other.</p> + +<p>"I guess we are giving ourselves a lot of worry +without cause," Walter remarked, softly. "Those +fellows seem quiet enough now. It was the liquor +that made them act as they did last night, but they +have drank it all up now and I do not believe we will +have any more trouble with them."</p> + +<p>"I wish I could agree with you," his chum said, +gravely, "but I can't. I believe in the old Latin +proverb—'in vino veritas'—there is truth in wine. +I've always noticed that when a man gets intoxicated, +he reveals just the kind of man he really is. +If he is naturally quarrelsome when sober he is sure +to want to fight when drinking. If he is good-hearted +and kind when sober, he is generally good-humored<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span> +when drunk. Liquor seems to destroy +a man's caution and make him reveal his real character. +Now these fellows showed plainly their feelings +towards us last night when they were drinking. +To-day they are sober and more cautious, but +I believe they feel just the same towards us. It +only needs some real or fancied wrong to bring their +hatred to the surface again. I believe if we had a +clash with one of them now we would have a first-class +mutiny on our hands; but, I guess, we had +not better do any more whimpering. They will +suspect that we are discussing them and it will not +improve matters any."</p> + +<p>For awhile the sponges came up from below every +half hour, but towards noon a full hour went by +without the basket making its appearance. The +lads, at last, became somewhat alarmed at the delay.</p> + +<p>"Do you suppose they are in any trouble down +below?" Charley enquired of Manuel.</p> + +<p>The Greek shook his head. "They would have +signaled if anything had been wrong. There, they +are signaling now."</p> + +<p>There came several jerks on the life-lines and the +Greeks in charge of them pulled the divers up and +into the boat. The men had been below for only an +hour and the boys were puzzled to account for their +coming up before their time had expired. When +their head-pieces were removed the lads could see +that the divers were greatly excited. They spoke<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span> +rapidly to those around them, and a hum of excited +conversation arose from the before listless crew.</p> + +<p>"What's the matter?" Charley demanded of +Manuel, who seemed to be the most excited of all.</p> + +<p>"It is nothing," was the quick reply. "The men +grew faint for a minute but they will be all right +soon. That often happens to one when diving."</p> + +<p>The Greek's excitement was too great for such a +trivial cause and Charley decided promptly that he +was lying.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the divers resumed their head-pieces +and prepared to descend again. As they +stood on the ladders one of the crew handed one of +them a coil of light rope to the end of which was +attached a piece of light wood.</p> + +<p>"What does he want with that buoy?" Charley +demanded, sharply.</p> + +<p>"There's a bad hole in the bottom which he +wishes to mark so that there will be no danger of his +blundering into it," replied Manuel promptly, but, +again, Charley decided that the fellow was lying.</p> + +<p>"There's something in the wind," he remarked +to Walter. "The crew seem greatly excited, and +Manuel, I am sure, is lying."</p> + +<p>A strange change had suddenly taken place in the +crew's manner. Before, they had been silent, sullen +and listless, now, they were animated, their eyes +glittered with excitement, and they chattered back +and forth like so many magpies.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span></p> + +<p>Manuel evidently noticed that the boys were +watching them closely, for he addressed them in a +low tone and their chattering ceased. They resumed +their work with something like a return of their +former manner, but it was easy to see that their +sullenness was now assumed.</p> + +<p>The lads turned their attention to the course the +diver was taking, and watched for the appearance +of the buoy which would show the whereabouts of +the bad place on the bottom. The bit of wood soon +floated into view not a hundred feet from the boat.</p> + +<p>Apparently, the divers were still suffering from +their faintness, for it was a long time after they +descended before the first basket load of sponges +appeared, and it was nearly an hour before the +second one was hoisted aboard.</p> + +<p>"We are not getting many to-day," Walter +grumbled. "If we don't do better pretty soon, we +had better move and try another place."</p> + +<p>"There is something queer doing," Charley declared. +"Just watch those life-lines and see what +you make of it."</p> + +<p>The ropes which were fastened to the divers +showed plainly the direction taken by the men below. +The lines were kept faintly taut to permit of the +signals being clearly felt, and their slant gave an +accurate idea of just where the divers were working.</p> + +<p>Walter watched for awhile, a puzzled frown +gathering on his face.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Why," he exclaimed, "they are right on that +bad part of bottom, and they haven't stirred for the +last fifteen minutes."</p> + +<p>The lads continued to watch the tell-tale lines. +For another fifteen minutes the ropes remained +motionless, then from their twitching it became +evident that the divers were once more moving +around. In a short time thereafter, the usual signal +was given and two baskets of sponges were hoisted +up.</p> + +<p>"That's got me puzzled," said Charley, as the +peculiar performance was repeated. "I guess we +had better appear not to have noticed it. The crew +is not looking at us in a very friendly way."</p> + +<p>The attitude of the Greeks seemed to be growing +hostile. Many were the unfriendly glances they cast +at the two lads and the boys could hear their names +repeated in the low-toned conversation going on.</p> + +<p>The two lads retired to the bow where, though +they effected to be taking their ease, they kept on the +alert for the first signs of trouble.</p> + +<p>Though nothing happened to further arouse their +fears, it was a trying situation and both were glad +when the time came to return to the schooner.</p> + +<p>They found the captain and Chris both tired from +a hard day's labor cleaning sponges. The wounded +sailor was sitting back by the wheel, looking somewhat +pale and haggard, but not a great deal the +worse for his many wounds.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span></p> + +<p>"His troubles' been sorter praying on his mind all +day," said the captain. "He got a hold of my pad +and pencil this morning an' he's been drawing +pictures of the fight and other things—here's one of +them."</p> + +<p>The old sailor produced a crumpled piece of +paper from his pocket.</p> + +<p>Walter examined the sketch closely. It was not +without a certain cleverness and was better than +one would expect of a humble sailor before the mast. +It depicted a struggle between two groups of men. +In one of the groups, the lad could recognize some +of the faces of the Greeks, who, armed with knives +and clubs, were assailing the other party. As the +lad bent over to examine the other group more +closely, he uttered an exclamation of surprise. At +first glance there was nothing startling about those +whom the Greeks were fighting, but a second glance +showed something familiar about the figures composing +it. He passed the sketch to Charley.</p> + +<p>"What do you make of it?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Why, that little group is intended to represent +us," his chum exclaimed. "See they are just four +in number. That big one with the beard is meant +for the captain and the little one for Chris, the other +two are you and I. Why, the likeness to us is quite +striking when you look at it closely."</p> + +<p>"I believe he intended this for a warning to us,"<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span> +Walter declared. "Where are the rest of the things +he drew, Captain?"</p> + +<p>"I threw them all away, I didn't reckon they +meant anything," the old sailor replied, regretfully.</p> + +<p>"Well, never mind," said Charley cheerfully, +"we will get him to draw them over again. He +seems a very intelligent fellow. I wish he could +talk so as to tell us what the crew are saying now. +Just look at him."</p> + +<p>The strange sailor was leaning forward listening +eagerly to the buzz of conversation going on between +the Greeks. The diving boat's crew seemed +to have conveyed the excitement under which they +had been laboring all day to their shipmates who +had remained aboard the schooner. Groups of two +or three were gathered here and there, talking +eagerly together.</p> + +<p>Walter called the little Greek lad to him.</p> + +<p>"What are the men talking about, Ben?"</p> + +<p>The little fellow hesitated before replying. It +was plain that he was greatly troubled and +frightened. "They talk about nothing much," he +stammered.</p> + +<p>Walter was pressing him with further questions +when his chum interfered.</p> + +<p>"It's hardly fair to make him tell," he said. +"It might cause him a lot of trouble. His uncle +is glaring at him now, as though he would like to +kill him."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span></p> + +<p>There was nothing to be learned by watching the +crew's actions, so, signing to the wounded sailor to +follow them, the four chums descended to the cabin +where the Greek cook had supper waiting for them.</p> + +<p>Charley was unusually quiet during the meal, but +when the Greek cook and Ben had at last retired +carrying the dishes with them, he arose and closed +the cabin door.</p> + +<p>"Captain," he said as he returned to his companions, +"I am going down in a diving suit to-morrow."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XII.<br /> + +<small>IN A DIVING SUIT.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> old sailor stared at Charley as though he +feared the lad had taken leave of his senses.</p> + +<p>"Why, you must be crazy," he exclaimed. "You +don't know anything about that kind of diving."</p> + +<p>"I fancy there is not much to learn about it," +Charley replied. "I've been watching the divers +closely and it appears very simple. The main thing +seems to be to keep the air hose clear. I've been +wanting to go down ever since the first day, and +the strange way the crew have acted to-day has +decided me to try it. I want to see what it is that +has so excited them."</p> + +<p>"It's a fool notion and I ain't going to let you +do it," the captain stormed, but Charley only +grinned, cheerfully.</p> + +<p>"It's no use scolding, Captain, I've quite made +up my mind to try it. I've been thinking it over the +whole day."</p> + +<p>"I say you sha'n't do it," roared the old sailor. +"I'll put you in irons first, I'm captain of this +schooner."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span></p> + +<p>"But I'm captain of the diving boat," Charley +reminded him with a grin, "If anyone interferes +with my doings on my own ship it's mutiny, you +know."</p> + +<p>"Walt, say something to get him out of that fool +notion," pleaded the old sailor, helplessly.</p> + +<p>Walter turned to his chum with a twinkle in his +eye, "If you go down, I'm going too," he said, +decidedly.</p> + +<p>"You're two young lunatics," the captain declared, +wrathfully. "You're bound to always run +yourselves into danger whenever you get a show. +Neither one of you will ever live to see twenty."</p> + +<p>But, although he fumed and threatened for a long +time, the matter ended, as was always the case +when the boys had determined upon a thing, in +his, at last, giving a grudging consent to their plan.</p> + +<p>Chris had followed his little friend Ben on deck +as soon as he finished his supper, but soon after the +discussion was ended he returned below grumbling.</p> + +<p>"Dat white child ain't no fitten company to-night," +he declared. "He acts plum scart to death +an' won't talk none tall."</p> + +<p>"You go up and stay around the wheel, 'till we +come up," the captain ordered. "I thought you were +there all the time or I'd been up myself, I don't want +none of those fellows fooling around the compass."</p> + +<p>When Chris had retired, still grumbling, Walter +brought out a pad and pencil and handed them to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span> +the sailor who had been watching their faces closely +during their animated debate.</p> + +<p>The man seized them eagerly and bending over +the pad began to draw slowly with awkward, clumsy +fingers. When the sketch was finished he tore off +the sheet of paper and handed it to Charley whom +he seemed to recognize as the real leader of the +little party.</p> + +<p>The lad examined the sketch with eager interest. +"He must be a very cheerful sort of fellow," he +remarked, as he passed it to his chum. "First, he +prophesies a fight with the crew, and, now, he has +got us all shipwrecked. Can't say much for his skill +with the pencil though; that hulk does not look +much like our pretty 'Beauty'."</p> + +<p>The rude sketch pictured a forlorn, dismasted +wreck, covered with seaweed and with one side +badly stove in.</p> + +<p>The sailor had immediately commenced upon another +picture which he soon passed over.</p> + +<p>The boys looked it over but could not decide what +it was intended to represent.</p> + +<p>"It looks like a box full of crackers," Charley +said with a grin. "Well, if he's decided to have us +shipwrecked, it's thoughtful of him to provide us +with something to eat."</p> + +<p>But the sailor did not seem to regard it as any +laughing matter. He watched their expressions<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span> +with a face full of concern, and, when Walter shook +his head to show that he did not understand the +sketch, he laid aside the pad with a heavy sigh.</p> + +<p>"He has given it up," Charley said. "We had +better go to bed, I guess we have a hard day ahead +of us to-morrow."</p> + +<p>Chris was recalled from the deck and Walter +took his place while the others turned into their +bunks and were soon fast asleep. At midnight he +awakened Charley and at four o'clock Charley was +relieved by the captain. The watches passed away +without any alarm, but one thing struck both of +the lads as being curious. All during their watches +three or four of the Greeks remained on deck instead +of seeking their bunks as they usually did right +after eating supper. They sat around up by the +forecastle smoking and talking quietly together and +the boys came to the conclusion that they were +merely wakeful from the effects of the liquor they +had drank the night before.</p> + +<p>The boys looked longingly at the tempting breakfast +served by the Greek cook, but as they had +decided to make the descent to the bottom that +morning they were obliged to be content with a cup +of coffee.</p> + +<p>The captain and Chris followed them aboard the +diving boat. "We're going with you," the old +sailor explained. "It's a risky thing you're planning +to do an' I'd be too nervous and anxious about<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span> +you to stay on the schooner. She will be all right +without us for a little while."</p> + +<p>Manuel seemed to note the presence of the captain +and Chris with satisfaction. Before the boat was +shoved off from the schooner, he called the cook +to the rail and conversed with him a few minutes in +low tones.</p> + +<p>But his satisfaction changed to frowning anger +when the boys began to don the diving suits.</p> + +<p>"You are foolish to attempt to go down, young +sirs," he said, angrily. "It is dangerous, very +dangerous."</p> + +<p>"We are the only ones at all likely to suffer," +Charley replied shortly. "Tend strictly to your +pumping, when we think we need advice, we will ask +you for it."</p> + +<p>Before his head-piece was adjusted, he found +opportunity to whisper to Walter. "We won't be +able to talk when we get below, so I want you to +follow me and do just what you see me do."</p> + +<p>"I will," promised his chum. "My, don't these +things feel queer. I can hardly lift my feet, they +are so heavy. They make me feel helpless as a +little baby."</p> + +<p>The divers adjusted the helmets to the lads' heads +and, assisting them to the rail, helped them down +the ladder, and lowered them gently to the bottom.</p> + +<p>Charley laughed to himself as he caught sight +of Walter in the clear water. His chum looked<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span> +like some strange monster in the grotesque diving +suit. He waved his hand to him and Walter placed +one great paw over his helmet where his mouth was +supposed to be, to show that he was endeavoring +politely to stifle a laugh.</p> + +<p>But the boys' merriment at each other's grotesque +appearance was quickly lost in admiration of the +strange scene about them.</p> + +<p>It was as though they were standing in the midst +of a beautiful garden. Here and there were patches +of soft white bottom, like winding paths amongst +the marine growth. On every side of the bare places +rose lace-like sea fans of purple, yellow, and red, +and feather-like sea plumes swaying gently to and +fro to the motion of the water caused by the lads' +descent. At their bases lay scattered multitudes of +shells of every conceivable shape, size, and hue, +while, towering far above the riot of color, rose +mighty trees of snow-white coral among the +branches of which hovered golden, silver, crimson, +and every shade of fish, great and small, their fins +flashing gracefully as they darted to and fro.</p> + +<p>For some moments, the lads stood motionless +drinking in the beauty of the wonderful garden, but +they had not descended merely to admire and +Charley, after a long look around, hauled gently on +the life-line until he had some hundred feet coiled +neatly at his feet. Walter, though not comprehending +his chum's plan, followed his example. The<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span> +ruse was to serve a two-fold purpose, first to lead +those on the diving boat to think that the two were +a considerable distance from the boat, and, second, +to deceive them as to the real direction taken by +those below.</p> + +<p>As soon as Walter had got his life-line neatly +coiled down, Charley turned at right angles from +the spot and moved slowly forward for the place +where he calculated lay the supposed bad place in +the Gulf's bottom.</p> + +<p>He was surprised to find that he could walk with +perfect ease and comfort. The suit, which had been +so heavy and cumbersome above the surface, now +rested on him lightly as a feather. He could have +walked with considerable speed had it not been for +the care he had to take to keep his life-line free and +clear from the numerous branches of coral. He +watched Walter anxiously to see that he used the +same care with the rope upon which their very lives +depended and he was relieved to see that his chum +used every possible precaution.</p> + +<p>Although the water was clear as crystal, neither +lad could see far ahead at that depth below the +surface for it was too far for the sun's light to +penetrate brightly. Charley was almost upon the +rope with its floating buoy above before he perceived +it. He moved forward now with the greatest +caution for, if Manuel's statement was true, a hasty +step might plunge him suddenly into a nasty hole or<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span> +a dangerous patch of quicksand. But the bottom +did not seem any different from that over which +they had passed. The rope was fastened to a +branch of coral where there was no indication of +a hole or quicksand, but, a little beyond where the +rope was fastened, the lad could see dimly a large +black mass rising up from the bottom. Towards it +he slowly made his way, followed by his chum.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XIII.<br /> + +<small>A CLOSE CALL.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Charley's</span> eyes were becoming accustomed to +the semi-gloom and a few steps forward gave him a +clear view of the dark object. One glance, and he +turned to his chum with a cry which was lost in his +muffling helmet.</p> + +<p>Before the two lads lay the wreck of a once +stately ship, her masts broken short off and a great +gaping hole in her side. She had evidently lain +long in her bed amongst the coral and sponges for +long tendrils of sea moss streamed out from her +barnacle-covered sides.</p> + +<p>Someone had been there before them for the +moss and marine growth had been scraped from the +vessel's stern revealing the name, "Golden Hope".</p> + +<p>Charley turned from the spelling out of the +indistinct letters to see his chum beckoning to him +wildly and he hurried to his side.</p> + +<p>Walter was stooping over an opened box partly +filled with what had once been shining gold pieces +but which were now tarnished and almost unrecognizable<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span> +in their coat of gray slime. The box had +been recently torn open as was evident from the +freshly-splintered wood.</p> + +<p>Charley sat down on the box's edge and did some +rapid thinking. The crew's excitement was now +accounted for. They had not come upon a rich +bed of sponges as he had suspected but had discovered +a treasure such as men for ages have fought, +struggled, and died to attain. The half emptied +box showed that the divers had already begun to remove +the gold. For a moment, the lad was puzzled +to know how they had been able to bring up what +was missing without its being seen. There were no +pockets to the diving suits and they could have +carried but a few pieces at a time in their closed +hands. A moment's reflection, however, brought +him to the only possible explanation; the gold must +have been sent up in the sponge basket hidden +amongst the lumps of mud from which it could +have been removed by the crew without much risk +of discovery. But it was not the removal of the +gold which gave the quick-witted lad the most concern. +The amount taken by the Greeks was likely +but a mere trifle when compared with that which remained. +It was the effects the discovery of such a +treasure would have upon an already unruly crew +that he feared. As he had said to Walter but the +day before, he believed it needed but a trifle to fan +the Greeks' growing discontent into open mutiny.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span> +Here was riches enough to tempt the most steady +band of sailors and it was but reasonable to suppose +that it would tempt the lawless Greeks to deeds of +violence and bloodshed. These thoughts surged +through the lad's mind in far less time than it has +taken to tell of them. He would have liked to have +talked the matter over with his chum and settled +upon the wisest plan to follow, but that was impossible +below the surface and signs were useless to +convey exact ideas. He must decide alone upon +their immediate course of action and trust to +Walter's quick wit to fall in with what he decided +upon.</p> + +<p>Arising he turned to his chum and laid one finger +across his lips. Walter nodded his ponderous head-piece +to show that he understood the sign for silence +regarding their discovery.</p> + +<p>Taking up his sponge basket, Charley retraced his +steps to the spot where they had descended followed +by his observant chum. Here the sponges grew in +abundance and he at once began to fill his basket, +an example which Walter immediately followed.</p> + +<p>As he bent over to tear up an unusually large +sponge he became suddenly sensible of an agitation +of the water near him. Straightening up, he stood +frozen to his tracks with fear and horror. Not ten +feet from where he stood lay a gigantic shark, its +belly gleaming white through the clear water. Its +little green eyes were fixed upon him with a wicked<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span> +unblinking stare. He let the basket drop from his +grasp and flung up his arms with an unreasoning +instinct to protect his head from the impending +attack. At his sudden movement the great fish +darted away. Evidently, it was equally as +frightened of the strange unknown monster it had +encountered.</p> + +<p>The shock had left the frightened lad weak and +trembling and he had to rest a few minutes before +he could resume the filling of his basket.</p> + +<p>As he placed the last sponge in the basket he +turned to signal to his chum to ascend, but Walter +was already gone, his figure, grotesque in the diving +suit, was already well up from the bottom and +shooting up with astonishing swiftness. At the +same moment Charley became aware of a strange +sickening sensation. He was choking and gasping +for breath. Before he could realize what had happened +the frightful sensation had passed and he +was able to breathe fully and freely, and he felt +himself being pulled swiftly to the surface.</p> + +<p>In a moment he was hoisted above the surface, +hauled aboard the boat and his helmet removed. +The captain, white-faced and shaken was leaning +against the mast his revolver in his hand. Chris, +ashen-hued, and a sailor, was still pumping faintly. +Close beside the air pump lay Manuel in apparent +unconsciousness.</p> + +<p>"What's happened?" Charley cried.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Manuel keeled over in a fit or something," said +the captain, brokenly. "I thought you would both +be dead before we could get you to the surface. It +seemed ages before I could get Chris to the pump +and the fellows to hauling you up. They seemed +to move mighty slow 'till I threatened to shoot. +They maybe didn't understand what I said but the +sight of the gun made 'em more lively," he concluded, +grimly.</p> + +<p>Charley walked over to the prostrate Greek and +stood gazing down at his upturned face.</p> + +<p>"He has no business to faint when he's working +the air pump," he said savagely. "I guess I'll kick +him a good hard one in the face for punishment."</p> + +<p>The manly lad had no such intention of carrying +out such a brutal threat but he wanted to test +whether the treacherous Greek was, as he suspected, +really shamming.</p> + +<p>The prostrate man's features twitched, he sighed +heavily and rolled over on his side, Charley's suspicions +were confirmed.</p> + +<p>"Captain," said the lad distinctly, "if anything +happens to Walter and I when we are below the +surface, I want you to shoot this man without the +slightest hesitation. He is the only one who can +understand your orders and he must be made +responsible for our safety."</p> + +<p>"I'll shoot him the first time anything goes +wrong," the captain declared wrathfully, as he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span> +caught the wink of Charley's eye. "I feel like +killing him now, for the fright he gave me."</p> + +<p>The shamming Greek did not seem to relish this +threatening talk. He showed signs of surprisingly +rapid recovery. In a few minutes he was able to sit +up and look around.</p> + +<p>"I am overjoyed to find you both alive," he said +faintly to the two boys. "Everything grew suddenly +black before me when I was pumping and I +knew no more. It is my heart, it troubles me at +times. You young gentlemen must go down no +more, it is too risky."</p> + +<p>"We have had enough of it for to-day, but we +may try it again to-morrow," Charley replied, +cheerfully. "It is very beautiful and interesting +down below."</p> + +<p>"I hope you avoided the bad place on the +bottom," said the Greek, anxiously. "The divers +say it is a dangerous hole."</p> + +<p>"You must think we are fools to venture near +such a place," said Charley, indignantly, and the +man looked greatly relieved.</p> + +<p>Above all, the prudent lad wished to keep the +crew from thinking that he and Walter had come +upon the treasure. As long as they believed them +ignorant of its existence they would likely continue +the work of secretly removing it without open +violence.</p> + +<p>He could not talk over the matter with his chums<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span> +without danger of being overheard, and he was +forced to appear unconcerned and look on with indifference +while the divers sent up basket after +basket of sponges, in every load of which he was +convinced was hidden several hundred dollars of +the gold coins.</p> + +<p>He greatly admired Walter's manner. The lad +chattered over the beautiful gardens they had seen +below without a hint in his voice or manner of the +secret they had stumbled upon.</p> + +<p>From time to time the crew shot glances of scowling +suspicion at the little group, but they were +evidently reassured by the boys' cheerfulness and +apparent unconcern.</p> + +<p>It was like sitting beside a powder mine with a +lighted fuse in it, and both lads were greatly relieved +when the long day dragged away to its close +and the diving boat was headed back for the +schooner.</p> + +<p>They were met at the schooner's rail by the cook +who seemed greatly excited and who greeted them +with a torrent of rapidly spoken words.</p> + +<p>Manuel listened with a look of sadness, real or +assumed, on his face.</p> + +<p>"He says," he interpreted swiftly, "that the +wounded man went suddenly crazy this morning +and flung himself into the sea."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XIV.<br /> + +<small>THE DISCUSSION.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> chums looked at each other in silent comprehension. +There was not a doubt in the mind of +either that the sailor had been made away with during +their absence from the ship. They recalled +Manuel's talk with the cook before they left the +schooner and the look of satisfaction in his face +when he learned that they were all going on the +diving boat. Even the captain was not slow to grasp +the horrible truth.</p> + +<p>"It's a terrible business, but don't let on that you +suspect them," he whispered. "We've got to have +a long talk and decide what it's best to do." To +Manuel, he said, curtly, "I reckon, it's the fellow's +own business if he wanted to drown himself, so you +ain't got no cause to grieve. Better divide his +things up amongst the crew."</p> + +<p>Although they were eager for a talk alone, the +four lounged carelessly about the deck, striving to +appear unconcerned, until the Greek boy summoned +them to supper below. They talked cheerfully until<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span> +the cook had retired bearing the empty dishes with +him. Then Charley arose and noiselessly closed +the cabin windows and door so that their words +would not reach the deck. Returning to his seat, +he called the pale-faced little Greek lad to him, and, +resting his hand on his head, said kindly,</p> + +<p>"Ben, we are not going to repeat anything you +say to us, and we want you to tell us just what has +been troubling you the last few days."</p> + +<p>The little lad burst into tears, "They'll kill me," +he sobbed, "they'll kill me."</p> + +<p>"They will never know you told us," Charley +assured him. "We will never let anyone know you +told us."</p> + +<p>"They are going to kill you all," faltered the boy +as soon as he could control his sobs.</p> + +<p>"Why do they want to kill us," Charley questioned.</p> + +<p>"My uncle makes them mad. When you give +orders he adds lots of bad names and swear words +to them. He tells the crew that you always take +that sailor's part. He tells them you're going to +have them all put in jail when you get back to Tarpon. +He tells them you love that sailor and hate +Greeks."</p> + +<p>"But why did they hate that sailor so?" Walter +questioned.</p> + +<p>"He Turk," explained the lad. "Greeks hate +Turks."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span></p> + +<p>The chums glanced at each other in swift comprehension. +They knew of the deadly hatred that +existed between the two races. A hatred that had +led to the bitter war in which the Greeks had been +badly beaten. They understood now why the handsome +sailor had been shunned by all his shipmates. +They could see, too, how the wily Manuel had used +their defense of the man to arouse the crew's resentment +against them. The cunning Greek had woven +about them a net of lies which it would be impossible +to explain away.</p> + +<p>"Then they find gold," Ben continued, "that +makes them crazy. Manuel tells them to leave you +alone if you don't find out about the money, but kill +you if you do."</p> + +<p>"The infernal rascal," exploded the captain. +"He goes in irons and down in the hold to stay 'till +we get to port."</p> + +<p>"Don't do that!" cried the alarmed Greek lad. +"They kill you right off if you do."</p> + +<p>"One thing more," said Charley, as the little +fellow's tears began to flow afresh. "Who killed +that sailor?"</p> + +<p>But Ben did not know although it was evident +that he did not doubt that the man had been killed.</p> + +<p>Charley waited until the lad had dried his tears, +then let him go with the caution to tell none of the +crew that he had told them.</p> + +<p>"We are in the tightest fix of our lives," he declared,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span> +when Ben had gone. "It seems, from what +he says, that we are safe so long as they do not +suspect that we know anything about the gold but +I fancy that Manuel suspects that we have found it +and I do not believe we can count on their being +willing to let us reach port alive. The question is, +what had we better do."</p> + +<p>"I don't understand all this talk about gold," said +the captain.</p> + +<p>The boys hurriedly told of the discovery they +had made while the old sailor listened with sparkling +eyes.</p> + +<p>"Boys," he exclaimed, when their tale was concluded, +"you've found what will make rich men of +us all. I remember the excitement caused by the +loss of that ship. It happened twelve years ago. +For months tugs and steamers were scouring the +Gulf searching for her. She had cleared from New +Orleans for New York with two million dollars +in gold aboard."</p> + +<p>"She might as well contain two million toothpicks +so far as we are concerned," said Charley, +impatiently. "I'd give up every cent of it willingly +to be safe in port this minute."</p> + +<p>The captain, brought abruptly back to a realization +of their desperate situation, thought deeply for +several moments before he spoke. "We had ought +to be able to hold our own against them fellows," he, +at last, observed. "We are well armed and I don't<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span> +believe they have got any weapons except their sheaf +knives which ain't no good except at close quarters."</p> + +<p>"It is not open violence but treachery that I fear," +Charley explained. "We have had two samples already +of the way they work. First in that stoppage +of the air hose and, second, in the making away of +that sailor. No, that Manuel is too cunning a rascal +to risk open rebellion when he can accomplish his +ends without any personal risk."</p> + +<p>"Why not let them continue to get up the gold +and hide it as they have been doing?" Walter +suggested. "We can pretend that we do not know +what is going on. Then when we get to port we +can turn them over to the authorities and recover +the money without any trouble."</p> + +<p>Charley shook his head doubtfully. "That will +not do," he said. "I am as convinced as I am that +I am living, that we would never reach port alive. +Manuel is too wise to take any chances and he +knows that they could not remove such a large +amount of gold from the schooner without arousing +suspicion. I believe he has entrusted the crew to +spare us for the present only because he thinks that +some of the fleet might happen along and grow +curious if we were all missing. Besides, it is +doubtful if any of them know enough about navigation +to sail the 'Beauty' home. Us boys, he probably +will not hesitate to remove at any time if he can +give the act the appearance of accident, like what<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span> +occurred to-day. The captain, he will likely permit +to remain alive until near port. He will have a +long story made up to account for our disappearance +and the gold will likely be well hidden amongst the +ballast from where he can remove it without exciting +comment so long as we are not on board."</p> + +<p>The lad spoke confidently for he was putting himself +in the place of the cunning Greek and reasoning +just what he would do in a like position.</p> + +<p>"I've got it," exclaimed the captain in triumph. +"When they are asleep we'll batten down the forecastle +hatch on them and keep them there until we +get to port. We four can work the schooner in, I +guess."</p> + +<p>"I tell you, you don't realize what a cunning +rascal that fellow is," Charley declared in reluctant +admiration. "He has provided against just such +an attempt. I did not understand the reason for it +last night, but I noticed that all during my watch +on deck there were three or four men hanging +around the deck up forward. It's a great stake +they are playing for and they are not taking the +slightest chances."</p> + +<p>"I noticed the men hanging around," admitted +the captain, "but I didn't think much of it at the +time. Let's have your plan, if you've got one, lad."</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid we can't get out of this hole without +some violence and danger," Charley replied. "I +have been thinking over it all day and this is the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span> +only thing I can think of that seems to offer any +hope of success. First thing in the morning Walter +and I must descend to the wreck again and bring up +enough gold to pay off the men when we get to +port. It's a risky thing to do, but it is necessary to +carry out my plan. You see," he paused to explain, +"the men were shipped for three months and they +could demand pay for that time. We haven't got +the money and we have not gathered up enough +sponges yet to make up so large an amount. They +could tie the schooner up for their wages and make +us a lot of trouble and expense, a thing Manuel +would be sure to do."</p> + +<p>"But they have got a lot of gold which belongs to +us, already," Walter suggested.</p> + +<p>"We would have hard work to prove that it is +ours, and it would mean a lot of delay," replied his +chum quickly.</p> + +<p>"Go on with your plan, lad," said the captain, +who perceived that Charley had thought over all +sides of the question with his usual clearness.</p> + +<p>"After we have brought up the money. We will +use their own plan for bringing it up without its +being noticed—we will hang around and let them +go on with the work as usual all day, for it would +not do to fight it out on the diving boat. When we +get back to the schooner at night, we will bring +matters to a head. We will make them get up +anchor and sails and head back for Tarpon. There's<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span> +bound to be trouble and plenty of it but we'll be +prepared for it and Tarpon is only two days' sail. +What do you think of the plan?"</p> + +<p>He did not have to wait long for a chorus of +objections.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XV.<br /> + +<small>A DESPERATE PLAN.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">I don't</span> see that your plan is any better than +mine," Walter objected.</p> + +<p>"To tarry along while they remove the gold +would give them time enough to remove us one by +one," Charley replied, "While by doing as I have +suggested they will have but little chance for +treachery, and, although we will be sure to have +trouble with them as soon as we order them to get +up anchor, I think we can manage to keep the upper +hand of them for the short time it will take to +reach Tarpon."</p> + +<p>"Golly, dis nigger plum hates to run off an' lebe +all dat gole," Chris observed.</p> + +<p>"We'll come back for it," Charley declared. "As +soon as we have paid off the Greeks and got rid of +them, we'll pick a crew of Americans and hurry +back."</p> + +<p>"And while we are wasting time in getting a new +crew, the Greeks will have spread the news and a +dozen boats will be here before we can get back."</p> + +<p>"You forget that the captain is the only one who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span> +knows where we are by the latitude and longitude. +Without knowing that, fifty boats might hunt for +a month without seeing that little buoy. It would +be like looking for a needle in a haystack."</p> + +<p>"Hang that pesky Greek," exclaimed the captain. +"He asked me this morning for the schooner's position, +an' I gave it to him."</p> + +<p>Charley's face fell, "That fellow seems to think +of everything," he sighed. "But it's hard to get an +exact position by latitude and longitude alone, isn't +it, Captain?"</p> + +<p>"A navigator is lucky if he hits within four or +five miles of the place he's aiming for. Of course +it can be done if one is extra careful, but I could +not swear to our exact position on the chart now, +'though I reckon I could come within a couple of +miles of it."</p> + +<p>"Good," Charley exclaimed, "I guess, we can +make it impossible for them to find the wreck again, +if they should manage to get back before us. It +will mean a little change in my plan, though. +Instead of getting off to-morrow night, we will have +to wait until the next morning." He hastily outlined +his amended plan, which, after they had discussed +it carefully, his companions agreed was as +promising as any they could think of.</p> + +<p>They had hardly finished their discussion when +there came a knock at the cabin door and Manuel +entered, smiling.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I wished to enquire if the young gentlemen +intend to go down in the suits again to-morrow?" +he said, suavely.</p> + +<p>"We haven't decided yet," Charley said, carelessly, +"Why do you wish to know?"</p> + +<p>"Because, if you are, the air hose had better be +greased. If it is left dry for long the rubber sometimes +cracks and makes leaks."</p> + +<p>"Then have it well greased," the captain ordered.</p> + +<p>"I guess he's afraid of being shot if anything +happens, an' is taking every precaution," chuckled +the captain when the Greek had retired.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps," agreed Charley, doubtfully, "but, I +confess, I am afraid of that fellow. I'll certainly +look over that hose carefully before I go down to-morrow."</p> + +<p>When they ascended to the deck, which they had +forgotten to have watched in the excitement of their +discussion, they found Manuel and two of the +divers busily engaged in greasing the rubber air +hose with bacon slush from the cook's galley.</p> + +<p>Charley's was the first watch on deck and, long +after his companions had retired to their bunks, he +paced back and forth aft of the main mast pondering +thoughtfully over the plan he had suggested. +It was the best he could conceive under the circumstances +but he realized that its execution would be +attended with the gravest dangers. Most of all, he +dreaded the proposed descent to the bottom for the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span> +gold. He was convinced that Manuel had hit upon +some scheme to get rid of him and Walter without +danger to himself. Again and again the lad's +thoughts came back to the greasing of the hose. If +the operation was so important, why had the divers +not done it before—They were not the kind of men +to take any unnecessary risks in their dangerous +work below the surface. He had often noted the +care with which they had examined hose and pump +before each descent.</p> + +<p>But, while the lad puzzled over the matter, he did +not neglect to keep a watchful eye upon the three +or four Greeks who lingered on the forward deck. +If he had needed any reminder of the peril of their +situation, it would have been found in the sight of +those watchful, restless figures.</p> + +<p>Near the end of his watch, he gave vent to a low +exclamation—He had discovered the reason for +the greasing of the hose. For a few minutes he +was appalled by the cunning fiendishness which had +prompted the act. The two hoses lay coiled close +together in great heaps on deck. Sauntering over to +them, the lad stooped over each pile for a second, +then, straightening up, he resumed his slow steady +pacing.</p> + +<p>At midnight he awoke Walter to take his place. +"I've solved it," he told him.</p> + +<p>"Solved what?" asked Walter, sleepily.</p> + +<p>"Their reason for greasing the hose."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span></p> + +<p>"What is it?"</p> + +<p>"To attract sharks and lead them to bite it in +two."</p> + +<p>"The fiends!" Walter cried as the devilish +ingenuity of the plot dawned upon him. "What +are you going to do about it?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing, until we are ready to descend," his +chum replied, "then it will be too late for them to +practice another surprise for us."</p> + +<p>"Are you sure you are right," asked Walter, +doubtfully. "They are not sure that we are going +to descend, you know."</p> + +<p>"I think Manuel feels pretty confident that we +will. If we fail to do so, he likely will find some +excuse for replacing the greased hose with new ones. +You can bet, he's got it all figured out. He is the +brainiest villain I ever met up with. Better hurry +on deck now, and keep a close watch out. There's +no telling what other scheme he's got hatched up."</p> + +<p>Although he retired to his bunk at once, Charley +lay long awake. The morrow would be filled with +danger and his nerves were already growing tense +for the struggle which he foresaw. The Captain +had relieved Walter on deck before he at last fell +into a troubled slumber from which he awoke just +as day was beginning to break.</p> + +<p>By the time it was light enough to see, he was up +and dressed and making preparations for the carrying +out of his hazardous plan. From the lazerette,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span> +he procured a long coil of light rope which he +placed in one corner of his cabin. He next opened +up his valise and got out the ammunition he had +purchased in Tarpon and a small, but excellent +pocket compass. These he placed in his bunk where +they would be handy if needed quickly.</p> + +<p>When breakfast was over, the diving boat was +brought alongside and all got on board except the +cook and four men left to take care of the schooner +and clean the sponges gathered the previous day.</p> + +<p>"We have decided to go down and have one more +look at those sea gardens," Charley told Manuel +when the sponging ground was reached. "They are +beautiful enough to invite another visit."</p> + +<p>The Greeks' face expressed satisfaction. "They +are beautiful," he agreed, "but the young gentlemen +are rash to go down. Let the divers take the +risks—they are paid to do it."</p> + +<p>"We will be very careful," Charley said, cheerfully. +"Walt, we had better look over the hose +before we go down, the divers always do."</p> + +<p>The greased hose had been recoiled in the tubs +and the boys proceeded to overhaul them, foot by +foot, searching them closely for cracks or punctures.</p> + +<p>Walter was puzzled to comprehend his chum's +plan. After what he had discovered, surely he did +not intend to risk using the dangerous things, but he +was well enough acquainted with Charley's shrewdness +to hold his tongue and keep his face from betraying<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span> +his uneasiness. He felt sure that there was +a good reason for his chum's actions. He had but +just reached this decision when he came upon a +gapping hole in the hose. It looked much as though +it had been cut in two with a sharp knife.</p> + +<p>"Here's a bad place," he announced. "It's lucky +I found it. Air can't be pumped through this thing."</p> + +<p>"And here's a hole in mine, too," Charley declared +in accents so surprised that no one would +have dreamed that he had made both slits the night +before to serve as an excuse for the rejection of the +dangerous hose. "We can't use either one of them, +we'll have to get out the new hose."</p> + +<p>Manuel's face for a second was a picture of +bewilderment and baffled rage, but in a moment he +was again suave and smiling. "I don't see what +can have made those cuts," he declared. "They +can be patched in a few minutes, however. It would +be a pity to throw away such hose, it is as good as +new except for those two little places which can be +speedily fixed."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XVI.<br /> + +<small>TOO LATE.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">No</span> patched hose for me," Charley said, decidedly. +"If the divers want to risk using it, they +can."</p> + +<p>It was not just the reply the wily Greek had expected +and he hastened to answer.</p> + +<p>"You are right, it does not pay to take risks. +I will get the new hose and put it on."</p> + +<p>But Charley was ahead of him. He did not intend +to give the wily Greek any chance to play tricks +with the new hose. He brought it out from the +lockers in which it was kept and, after examining it +carefully connected it to the air pumps and helmets. +Before putting on his head-piece, he tried the air +pump also. It proved to be in perfect working order +and sent the air gushing through the hose. Manuel +fastened the life-line below his arms, but Charley +called the captain to adjust the heavy helmet over +his head.</p> + +<p>As soon as his feet touched the bottom, Charley +moved forward for the wreck, Walter at his side.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span> +Neither lad wished to remain below a second longer +than was necessary for they fully realized that they +were running a terrible risk in descending at all. +They found the box they had discovered the day +before entirely empty, the divers had brought another +out from the wreck's hold and broken it open. +The gold was in twenty dollar pieces and in a few +minutes the lads had transferred several hundred +dollars from the box to the baskets. It was hard to +resist taking more but the risks were too great to +permit it. Quickly hastening back to the patch of +sponges, they tore up several baskets full of the mud +and covered fungus and, making a slit in each with +their sheaf knives, stuffed in the coins. It was the +very plan the divers had followed but Charley had +decided that they would not be looking for the +adopting of their own trick. As soon as the last +coin was hidden and the loaded sponges placed in the +basket with others on top of them to complete the +load, Charley signed to Walter to ascend and stood +watching him until he had been drawn to the surface, +then he gave the signal to be drawn up himself. +He was raised a few feet up from the bottom then +he sank quickly back to the place from which he +had risen and he saw the end of the life-line dangling +in the water twenty feet above his head. <i>It +had been pulled loose from his body.</i></p> + +<p>Charley stood for a moment looking at it in +terrified dismay while his quick brain took in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span> +awful significance of his position. Frightened as he +was, he could not but admire the quickness with +which Manuel had hit upon another scheme for his +undoing after that of the greased hose, had failed, +for he had not a doubt that the Greek had fastened +the life-line to him in such a manner that it would +pull loose with a hard jerk. He was in no immediate +danger of death for the air hose still connected +him with the surface and the fresh air still +came gushing in a welcome stream into his helmet, +but a moment's reflection convinced him that this +was not all of Manuel's scheme, for the Greek would +know that the captain and Walter would soon become +uneasy over his delay and would start an +investigation which would quickly reveal that the +life-line was no longer attached to him. Clearly, +the Greek had another card up his sleeve which he +would soon play and Charley waited for it with +every nerve strained to keenest tension. He felt +longingly of the air hose, wondering if the frail tube +would hold for him to pull himself up to the surface +by it, but he quickly decided that it would not +stand the heavy strain and to break it would mean +his instant death. Keeping one eye on the life-line +so tantalizingly out of his reach he moved slowly +forward until he stood beneath the diving boat which +showed like a dim shadow above him. Suddenly a +thrill of horror went through him, the diving boat +was slowly drifting away—Manuel had played his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span> +trump card. In a flash the terror-stricken lad comprehended +the situation. Some one of the Greeks, +under Manuel's instructions, had stealthily severed +the cable, relying on the boat's slow drift being +unnoticed by the captain and Walter until it had +dragged apart the frail air hose. But, just as +Charley had given up all hope and waited for the +parting of the hose which would mean his death, the +dangling life-line was jerked up out of sight,—his +companions had discovered a part at least of his +plight—upon their next actions depended his life or +death.</p> + +<p>The next few seconds seemed like hours to the +helpless lad, then a dark speck appeared in the +water above him quickly growing in size until he +could see that it was Chris fighting his way downward +with long steady strokes and following the air +hose in his descent. The little negro was nearly exhausted +when he reached the bottom. Thrusting the +end of the line he had brought into Charley's hand, +he turned upward and shot to the surface like a +rocket. Charley whipped the line about his waist +and gave the signal to pull up. He was swiftly +pulled to the surface, hauled aboard the boat, and +his helmet removed. Chris, breathing heavily, was +standing by the mast, the water dripping from him. +Walter and the captain, pale with fear, stood close +beside him.</p> + +<p>"Thank God, you're safe, lad," cried the old<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span> +sailor, tears in his eyes. "We feared the air hose +would part before Chris could get to you. We had +just pulled on the life-line and found it had come +loose from you when we discovered the boat had +gone adrift. I reckon, she must have chafed her +cable in two against a sharp piece of coral. Queer +how everything happens all at once that way, sometimes."</p> + +<p>It was clear the simple old sailor did not suspect +that the trouble was anything but an accident, and +Charley hastened to reply,</p> + +<p>"All is well that ends well, but I've nearly had the +life scart out of me. I don't think I'll ever want to +go down again."</p> + +<p>He was watching Manuel closely as he spoke and +he noted with satisfaction the expression of relief +on the Greek's swarthy face. If he could only keep +him from thinking that he knew anything about the +gold and had not discovered his treachery, he hoped +to be able to avoid open violence until they were +prepared and ready for it. He was convinced that +the Greek was too cowardly to risk the danger of +being shot in open mutiny so long as he thought +himself unsuspected and free to scheme their removal +without danger to himself.</p> + +<p>The diving boat was worked back to her old +position, another anchor dropped, and donning their +suits the divers resumed operations below. When +they came to the surface at the end of their two hour<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span> +trick below they seemed strangely excited and conversed +eagerly with Manuel and the rest of the crew. +Charley was for awhile puzzled to account for their +excitement, but 'ere long the solution came to him. +Like all plans intended to deceive, his had contained +a fatal defect.</p> + +<p>"Walt," he whispered to his chum, "those chaps +have noticed that some of the gold has been removed +from that box. We are in for trouble, now, I fear." +The Captain and Chris were warned to be on their +guard but it seemed that the warning was unnecessary, +the excited talk amongst the crew soon ceased +and the fresh divers quietly prepared for their +descent.</p> + +<p>But in spite of the quietness, there was a tension +and earnestness in the crew's manner which made +the anxious little party of chums feel that they were +standing at the edge of a powder mine which might +explode at any minute.</p> + +<p>"I would rather have open fighting than this +awful waiting," Walter whispered.</p> + +<p>"We will have that soon enough," said his chum, +grimly. "It will come as soon as we try to make +them get the schooner under way."</p> + +<p>The long anxious day at last drew to its close, +anchor was got up on the diving boat, and she was +headed back for the schooner.</p> + +<p>As they passed a large piece of driftwood covered +with large black birds with very long necks, Manuel<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span> +pointed at them, "Those are fine eating," he said +wistfully. "If the young gentlemen could kill a few +it would give us all a great feast."</p> + +<p>Walter looked at Charley who nodded assent, for +he was not loath that the Greek should witness their +skill with the revolver.</p> + +<p>Both boys had practiced often with their revolvers +and were better than average marksmen. Their +pistols were automatics, a style of weapon with +which even the unskillful can shoot fairly accurately. +Walter fired six shots in as many seconds, killing +four birds and wounding one. Charley fired four +shots at the same time, killing two birds and crippling +a third. The rest of the birds took flight before +the boys could shoot more. The captain and +Chris emptied their pistols at the flying flock without +success.</p> + +<p>The diving boat was run alongside the dead birds +and they were picked up by the crew. Manuel +seemed delighted, "The young gentlemen are +wonderful shots," he declared.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XVII.<br /> + +<small>OUTWITTED.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> chums hastened below when the schooner +was reached for they were eager to talk over the +next move to be made.</p> + +<p>"Things have got to be brought to a head right +off," declared the captain when Charley had +acquainted him with his suspicions of Manuel's foul +play. "It's rank foolishness to linger along an' give +them more chances to work out their devilish tricks. +It's better to have trouble with them right now while +we are prepared than to wait and perhaps have +them take us unawares."</p> + +<p>"Thank goodness the time for action is close at +hand," Charley agreed, "I could not stand this +anxiety and suspense much longer. Let's go over +our plan once more and make sure that we each +know our parts so that there will be no hitch when +we come to carry them out. Now as soon as we +have supper Chris and I will get into the dingy and +pretend that we are going to row around for fun. +We will pull back and forth until it gets good and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span> +dark, then we'll gradually work out to that buoy. +We will cut it adrift, take it aboard, pull due East +from the schooner for a mile and anchor it again. +That will throw them way off the scent if they +should manage to get back here again before us, +while it will tell us just where to look for the wreck. +That part is easy, the trouble will come when we +get back to the boat. First thing we had better do +is to stretch several ropes across the deck from rail +to rail just forward of the mainmast. That will +delay and bother them if they should try to rush +us in a body. The next move will be to get Manuel +aft and get the irons on him. We had better get +him down here in the cabin to attempt that. As +soon as we get him helpless, we will carry him up +and make him give our orders to get up anchor and +get sail on the schooner. He's too great a coward +to encourage his shipmates to make a rush for us +so long as he is in our power. They may try it in +spite of him, however, when they realize that the +gold is going to be lost to them. If they do we will +have to fight them off while Chris tends to the wheel. +We don't want any bloodshed if we can help it but +we mustn't let them get aft of the mainmast, they +would make short work of us if it ever came to close +quarters. Do you all understand now what we have +to do?"</p> + +<p>His companions nodded.</p> + +<p>"Then we had better reload our pistols, fill up our<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span> +cartridge belts, and get ready," he continued. "I'll +get the ammunition."</p> + +<p>But in a moment he was back from his cabin, his +face pale and grave.</p> + +<p>"How many shells have you got left in your +pistol?" he demanded.</p> + +<p>"One," Walter replied, while Chris and the captain +broke open their weapons to show only empty +chambers.</p> + +<p>"I have got three shots left, that makes four altogether," +Charley said, hopelessly. "All the rest +of our ammunition has been stolen out of my bunk."</p> + +<p>His companions grew as grave and pale as himself +at the announcement. With only four shots left +they were practically helpless in the hands of the +Greeks.</p> + +<p>"There is just one chance left," Charley declared, +desperately. "We have got to get Manuel in +our power and try to control the crew through +him. It may work and it may not, but it's our only +hope. Chris, go tell him we want to see him here +in the cabin."</p> + +<p>As soon as the little negro had gone, Charley +brought out a pair of handcuffs from his grip and +placed them in his pocket. "When I give the signal, +get them on him," he said. "I'll lock the door so +that he cannot get out or the crew come to help him. +He'll likely put up a fight and we'll have to watch +out for his knife, but the three of us had ought to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span> +be able to handle him. But hush, here they come +now."</p> + +<p>Footsteps sounded on the companionway stairs, +the cabin door opened, and Chris appeared, closely +followed by the Greek. The little negro stepped inside +but Manuel paused on the threshold and swept a +keen glance over the assembled party. Perhaps +some instinct warned him of his danger, perhaps he +decided that the time had come for his last treacherous +move. With a quick leap, he sprang back +through the open doorway, slammed the door to, +and bolted it outside, and the little band of chums +were prisoners in the cabin of their own ship.</p> + +<p>Charley leaped from his chair, but he was too +late.</p> + +<p>"Outwitted," he cried as he sank back into his +seat. "Beaten at every point of the game. What +fools, what bunglers we are." There was as much +chagrin as fear in his exclamations. To be so badly +beaten after all his vigilance and careful planning +was hard to bear.</p> + +<p>His companions sat silent with despair. So suddenly +had it all happened they had not yet had time +to realize that they were completely in the hands of +the Greeks who could do with them as they pleased.</p> + +<p>Charley flipped open his pistol and handed one of +his remaining cartridges to his chum, "That gives +us two apiece," he observed, "although I doubt if +we will either of us need them." He retired to his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span> +cabin and reappeared with a blanket and a book. +He spread out the blanket on the floor and stretching +himself out on it prepared to read. "Might +as well get what enjoyment we can," he said. +"There's nothing we can do, so we might as well +take it easy while we may."</p> + +<p>"How can you be so careless?" his chum exclaimed, +"any minute they may come down upon +us."</p> + +<p>"Little danger of that," the other replied, coolly. +"They know we've got four shots left yet. What +would be the use of their taking chances when they +have got everything in their own hands."</p> + +<p>But his companions could not view their position +with the same hopeless resignation. While he read +on apparently unconcerned, they discussed plan after +plan for escape from their prison and perilous situation, +only to reject one after the other as wildly +impracticable. At last they abandoned the discussion +in despair.</p> + +<p>"Better turn in and try to get a good night's +rest," Charley advised them calmly. "I will keep +watch for the first four hours, although I don't believe +there's the slightest use of it."</p> + +<p>"I'm too hungry to sleep," Walter declared. "I +wonder why they do not send us down our supper."</p> + +<p>"Bless your simple little soul," his chum exclaimed, +"They do not intend us to have anything to +eat. I thought you understood that."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span></p> + +<p>His companions looked at each other in dismay. +This, the greatest of all their perils, had not before +occurred to them. They understood now the awfulness +of their position. All the food and water were +stored forward. The Greeks had only to let them +alone and they would slowly die of hunger and +thirst.</p> + +<p>"They will not get us that way," declared Walter, +desperately. "Before I'll die of hunger and thirst +I'll set the schooner on fire."</p> + +<p>Charley nodded approval. "I've been thinking +of that myself," he said. "A quick death is better +than a slow torturing one. But there is plenty of +time to talk of that. While there is life there is hope +and I have a feeling that something is going to turn +up to help us out of this scrape. I've just happened +to think of one thing that's in our favor."</p> + +<p>He was prevented from explaining the new hope +which had occurred to him by a knock on the cabin +door and Manuel's sneering voice enquiring,</p> + +<p>"Are the gentlemen quite comfortable?"</p> + +<p>"Quite," Charley assured him, calmly. "Much +more comfortable than you and your mates will be +when the law reckons with you."</p> + +<p>"There is no law at sea but the law of the strongest +and most cunning," the Greek said, smoothly. +"But I bear a proposal from my shipmates for +your distinguished consideration."</p> + +<p>"State it," replied the lad, briefly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You are all in a bad position," stated the Greek +with oily maliciousness. "You were cunning but +not cunning enough or our positions would now be +reversed. We have only to do nothing now and you +will all die. It would sadden our hearts to lose such +loving friends but we would strive to bear up +bravely under the blow. But why should you all die +when we are willing to spare one. All that one +would have to do would be to take an oath to be +faithful and true to us and do as we bid him. Not +only would his life be spared, but he would receive +a share of the great wealth we have discovered."</p> + +<p>"Why are you so very generous in your offers?" +Walter demanded, sarcastically.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XVIII.<br /> + +<small>IMPRISONED.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">We</span> need one of you," explained Manuel, with +startling frankness. "Perhaps we could get along +without but it does not pay to take chances. There +is a government cutter which patrols the banks to +see that the sponging vessels are complying with the +laws. She may come upon us accidentally any time +and it would be awkward explaining why we continued +to work without American officers. It would +very likely get us into trouble. But if one of you +takes the part of the captain and shows the papers +and explains that the rest have died from fever, all +will go smoothly."</p> + +<p>"I suppose you have decided which one of us you +want?" Charley asked, curiously.</p> + +<p>"Any one of you will do, but we prefer you. +You have brains enough to realize where your own +interests lie. It is easier to handle a smart man than +a fool. Consider the chance we are giving you, on +the one hand slow, painful, certain death; on the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span> +other, an honored position, great wealth and +safety—we are generous indeed."</p> + +<p>"But how do you know that I will play fair?"</p> + +<p>"The moment you joined us you would be as +liable to the law as the rest of us," Manuel said +calmly, "We would live or hang together. You +would not dare to trifle with us, and I should watch +you closely all the time."</p> + +<p>"Here is my answer," declared Charley, whose +indignation had been steadily rising at the cold-blooded +proposal. "If you would all keep your +part of the agreement,—which I am convinced you +would not do, I'd die rather than join such a pack of +dirty murderers."</p> + +<p>"You are a bigger fool than I thought," replied +the Greek calmly. "I will leave you to consider +the matter better. Hunger is a great persuader, and +I am in hopes that you will soon see where your +best interests lie. Good-night, gentlemen, good-night, +may your dreams be of the pleasantest."</p> + +<p>"He's evidently somewhat worried," said +Charley, hopefully, when the Greek's mocking voice +had ceased. "He believes, I guess, that there is a +good chance of the cutter coming upon him or he +would not make such a proposal, although he would +not keep his part of it any longer than the danger +lasted. Our only hope is to keep up our strength and +spirits as long as possible. There is a chance that +the cutter may come along before it is too late. Better<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span> +all turn in and get some rest while you are still +not too hungry to sleep. I will call one of you to +take my place as soon as my four hours are up, although +I do not believe that they will trouble us."</p> + +<p>The lad was right in his belief. The night passed +away without any alarm and they were able by turns +to get some little sleep. With the coming of daylight, +they crowded to the windows and searched the +dreary waste of waters for sign of smoke or sail, +but found none. The crew were going about their +work in cheerful unconcern. Leaving a half dozen +men on the schooner, the balance got aboard the +diving boat and sailed out to the sponge ground +where they could be seen working steadily all day +bringing up the gold from the bottom. The prisoners +suffered much during the long day from their +increasing hunger and thirst.</p> + +<p>At night the diving boat returned to the schooner +and the dispirited watchers could see that the crew +had not wasted their day by any means. Both +sponge baskets were nearly full of the gold coins.</p> + +<p>"We've got to do something, I don't care how +desperate it is," declared Captain Westfield. "Anything +is better than this keeping still and suffering. +By to-morrow this time we'll be too weak to do +much and thar ain't no certainty that the cutter will +come along this way at all. I'm in for doing something, +no matter what."</p> + +<p>Charley turned from his gazing out of the window,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[139]</a></span> +"Look here, Captain," he called, softly. +"Speak low," he cautioned as the old sailor crept +to his side, "we don't want them to hear us on +deck."</p> + +<p>"Geewhilikens!" whispered the old seaman in +swift comprehension, "they've left the diving boat +fastened right under our windows."</p> + +<p>"God grant that they may not think to move it," +the lad replied, trembling with excitement. "We +can do nothing until it gets dark and they retire to +the forecastle."</p> + +<p>Walter and Chris were quickly made acquainted +with the suddenly-offered chance of escape and their +joy knew no bounds.</p> + +<p>Then followed hours which seemed like days to +the breathless, anxious watchers. The Greeks ate +their supper and lounged around the deck talking +and laughing. It seemed as though they would +never retire to their bunks. But at last their voices +gradually ceased and silence settled down upon the +schooner. Charley cautiously opened one of the +big windows and swung it outward, then climbing +softly toward the opening, lowered himself to the +diving boat's deck. The Captain, Walter, and Chris +followed. Not a word was spoken for each realized +the terrible risk they were running. As soon as all +were crouched motionless aboard, Charley, with his +knife, severed the rope which bound them to the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[140]</a></span> +schooner and the boat drifted slowly away from the +ship's side.</p> + +<p>No one moved until the schooner was at last lost +in the darkness.</p> + +<p>"Start up the engine," said Charley, as he took +the helm, and Walter slipped down amongst the +machinery. After a few minutes' fumbling in the +darkness, he crept back.</p> + +<p>"There's no gasoline in the tank," he announced.</p> + +<p>"Everything seems against us," Charley sighed. +"Well, get sail on her. We will have to do the +best we can."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the great square sail was spread, +and, leaning over, the little craft sent a line of foam +rippling from her bow.</p> + +<p>"They'll have hard work finding us in this darkness," +exulted the captain as he took the helm from +Charley. "I reckon, we'd better shape a course for +the nearest port,—that's Judson. As soon as we get +thar, we can telegraph to all the ports along the +coast to watch out for the schooner. We've got +'em now, I reckon, lads, they'll have to put in somewhere +sooner or later, an' they'll be nabbed. I feel +just like yelling for joy."</p> + +<p>The rising spirits of the little party were helped +by Chris' discovery of a couple of loaves of stale +black bread, and part of a bottle of ripe olives in +one of the lockers. They made a meagre but very +welcome repast upon the uninviting food.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[141]</a></span></p> + +<p>But their joy over their lucky escape was soon +dampened by the threatening appearance of the +Western sky. A heavy bank of clouds was slowly +rising there from which came flashes of lightning +and the rumble of distant thunder.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, it ain't nothin' but a thunder squall," +the captain assured them. "Thar ain't no call to be +uneasy, this is a mighty seaworthy little craft. I +reckon, we could ride out a right smart gale in her +if we had it to do."</p> + +<p>Before they ran much further the captain gave +the order to lower and reef the great sail. When +hoisted again, it was only a tiny patch of canvas, as +compared with its former size.</p> + +<p>"Thar's only one thing for us to do when that +squall strikes us an' that's to scud before it," the old +captain declared. "We can't heave her to under +that sail. Luckily, the way it's coming won't blow +us out of our course much."</p> + +<p>They had not long to wait for the storm to burst. +The wind soon descended with a violence that +threatened to bury the diving boat in the seas it +brought with it. But the little craft had been built +to stand just such weather, and, quickly gathering +headway, she darted away before the gale. With +the wind came the rain in great driving, blinding +sheets. The boys hailed its appearance with joy. +They spread out their jackets, bits of sail, and even +their hats to catch the precious drops. In a short<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[142]</a></span> +while they had secured enough to quench their intense +thirst. This done, they gathered around the +captain at the helm ready to render any assistance +in their power. There was little they could do for +the old sailor would trust no one but himself to +steer in the heavy sea-way. As the hours passed by +without showing any abatement of the storm, it became +evident to his companions that he was growing +anxious.</p> + +<p>"I don't like the way it's hanging on," he declared. +"We must be making at least twelve miles +an hour and, at that rate, we will have the land close +aboard before daylight. Crawl forward, Charley, +an' keep a sharp look-out, the sky is clearing some +an', I reckon, you can see a few hundred feet +ahead."</p> + +<p>The lad obediently worked his way up into the +bow, and bracing himself against the anchor bitts, +peered ahead into the darkness. He could make out +nothing at first but the heavy foam-flecked, tossing +water. He sat watching intently till, at last, Walter +crawled forward to take his place. He had only +got part way back to the stern when there came a +cry from his chum,</p> + +<p>"Hard down! hard down!"</p> + +<p>With true seaman's quickness, the Captain +jammed the long tiller over and the little craft, escaping +broaching in the trough of the seas by a +miracle, shot up into the wind—a second too late.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[143]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Hang on for your lives!" the old sailor cried.</p> + +<p>Black masses loomed out of the darkness to leeward. +A great wave picked up the helpless boat and +flung it with crashing, breaking timbers, upon the +rocks.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[144]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XIX.<br /> + +<small>WRECKED.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> boys had obeyed the old sailor's order, and, +though greatly shaken by the shock, they retained +their hold on the boat.</p> + +<p>"Quick, get on the rocks," shouted the Captain. +"She'll pound to pieces in a jiffy."</p> + +<p>Fortunately, the boat's bow had been driven up +on the ledge nearly out of the water. The boys +dropped over the side followed by the old sailor, +and, though beaten and bruised against the sharp +rocks succeeded in struggling out upon the one +which reared itself above the water. They glanced +back to where the boat had struck, but, short as had +been their struggle out, it had witnessed the destruction +of the staunch craft. Only that portion of her +bow lodged upon the reef remained intact, the balance +of her hull was a mass of twisted, splintered, +broken planks.</p> + +<p>Great as was the danger from which they had +escaped, their present position was still far from +safe. The slippery rock afforded but insecure footing +and it was frequently swept by the larger seas.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[145]</a></span> +At such times, they had all they could do to keep +from being swept off its slimy surface.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, we've struck on a reef," the Captain +said, anxiously. "It all depends upon the tide +whether we are safe or not. If it's low tide, now, +high tide will cover this rock so deep that we'll not +be able to hang on to it."</p> + +<p>It soon became evident that the tide was still rising, +though slowly. The waves began sweeping +over the flat rock with such violence that the tired, +wretched, anxious, little party could hardly maintain +their footing. To the right and left of them, +rose other higher masses of rock, but they did not +dare to attempt to reach them through the darkness +and the boiling surf. Wet, cold, hungry, and +wretched; they clung to their insecure refuge until +day began to break in the East. With the coming +of light they strained their brine-smarting eyes to +discover what manner of place it was upon which +they had been thrown. The outlook was not reassuring. +They were, as the Captain had surmised, +on a point of low-lying reef, most of which was constantly +wave-swept by the monstrous surges. To +the East of them, lay a low, marshy shore dotted +here and there with small islands covered with +cedar hammocks, but between them and the islands +was at least two miles of foaming water. The boys +gazed wistfully at the longed-for land.</p> + +<p>"We can't make it," Charley said, sadly. "Chris<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[146]</a></span> +might, perhaps, be able to swim it, but it would be +a long swim for the rest of us at any time, and, tired +and weak as we are now, it would be impossible. +We will have to stick it out here until the storm goes +down a bit, then, try to fashion some kind of a raft +out of the planks of the diving boat."</p> + +<p>"We can't be far from Judson," said the Captain, +with an attempt at cheerfulness. "A boat may +come by an' pick us up any minute."</p> + +<p>But the boys were not cheered by any such prospect. +They knew that the chance of any boat being +out in such weather was very small indeed. One +fact, however, gave them a little hope; the tide was +undoubtedly falling. It had evidently been almost +at its height when they had landed on the rock.</p> + +<p>"I wish we had something to eat," Walter sighed, +"we have had nothing but a little bread in two +days. I begin to feel weak all over."</p> + +<p>Chris gazed thoughtfully at the water on the +shore-side of the rock. "I reckon, I might find +somethin' down dar," he observed. "I'se goin' to +try it anyway. You white chilluns has sho' got to +hab somethin' to eat."</p> + +<p>Although the water was somewhat smoother to +the lee of the rocks, it boiled and foamed there +threateningly and the boys endeavored to dissuade +the plucky little negro from the attempt, but their +objections only made him the more determined.</p> + +<p>"Golly! you chilluns doan know what a diver dis<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[147]</a></span> +nigger is," he said, proudly. "You jes' stay still an' +watch him now." He removed his clothes, handing +them to Charley to hold, slipped over the side of the +rock, and sank down beneath the surface. He was +gone so long that the watchers had begun to grow +anxious when he reappeared, blowing like a porpoise. +In one hand, he held tightly clenched, a big +stone crab and a large conch.</p> + +<p>"Take 'em," he exclaimed, "I'se goin' down +again. Dar's heaps more of dem on de bottom."</p> + +<p>He continued diving until he had brought up six +more conchs and two more crabs, then he crawled +out on the rock completely exhausted, and held up +one foot for their inspection. There was a tiny +puncture in the sole of it from which the blood was +slowly trickling.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I'se goin' to hab some trubble wid dat +foot," he observed, gravely. "Ole Mister Stingaree +gib me a dig dar. He warn't much bigger dan +a plate, but der horns are powerful poison."</p> + +<p>His announcement sent a chill of fear to the +hearts of his companions, for they all well-knew the +dangerous character of the flat, horn-tailed fish +which lurks on the bottom in Florida waters. The +Captain did not lose a second in whipping out his +sheath knife and cutting open the puncture which he +washed out thoroughly with sea water. He then +made Chris sit on the edge of the rock and hang his +foot over in the water.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[148]</a></span></p> + +<p>The plucky little negro bore the operation with +unflinching cheerfulness. "I sho' wish you'd open +up one ob dem conch for me, Massa Charley," he observed. +"If dis ting's goin' to make me sick, I +wants to be dat much ahead."</p> + +<p>Charley quickly broke open one of the conchs +and gave him the meat,—a big lump of tough flesh, +almost sufficient for an entire meal. He also opened +several others for the Captain, Walter, and himself, +upon which they made a hearty and strengthening, +if somewhat tasteless, meal. Chris ate but little of +the tough meat, he soon pushed it away from him +with a weary little sigh.</p> + +<p>"I doan want no moah," he said, quietly. "I'ze +gettin' berry sick. Reckon ole Mister Stingaree +dun got dis nigger for sho'."</p> + +<p>His little ebony face soon took on a dull-ashen +hue and he began to vomit violently; passing from +these spells into a heavy stupor, the mysterious subtle +poison from the stingaree was getting in its +work. His grieving companions watched him in +helpless suspense, there was nothing they could do +to relieve his sufferings.</p> + +<p>"We can't let him die like this," Charley cried, as +the little sufferer twitched in spasms of pain. "I +am going to try to reach shore and find help. He +has taken bigger risks for us many a time."</p> + +<p>Neither Walter or the Captain tried to stop him. +They would have gladly offered to make the attempt<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[149]</a></span> +in his place but he was the strongest and best swimmer +of the three.</p> + +<p>He removed his jacket and shoes and with a last +good-bye, plunged off of the rock and headed for the +distant shore. He had not gone more than twenty +yards when he stopped with a cry of joy.</p> + +<p>"Come on," he called back, "the water isn't more +than three feet deep here. There's only a deep place +near the rocks and you can get across that easily."</p> + +<p>But he had to return to help them get Chris across +the deep narrow channel, for the little negro's struggles +in his spasms threatened to drown his helpers. +At last, the dangerous stretch of water was safely +crossed, and, leaving Walter and the Captain to half +float and half carry Chris between them, the lad +waded ahead, picking out the shoalest and smoothest +path to the shore. They arrived there spent and +panting and sank down for a moment to recover +their breath. It was not an inviting-looking place +where they had landed. A low rock-strewn marsh, +covered with tall, rank grass stretched away before +them for two or three miles before it met the higher, +heavily-wooded mainland. Here and there the +marsh was dotted with small, island-like clumps of +dark green cedar trees, and, picking up the light, +little negro in his strong, young arms, Charley +headed for the nearest of these, followed by his exhausted +companions. The passage was made with +difficulty; low needle-pointed rocks strewed the way,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[150]</a></span> +and here and there lay pools of soft, boggy mud, +tenanted by repulsive, swollen looking moccasins. +It needed care to avoid the one without stepping on +the other, but, at last, the patch of high ground was +reached and, laying his burden beneath a wide-spreading +cedar, Charley turned to his companions.</p> + +<p>"We have got to work quick if we are to stand a +chance even of saving him," he said, crisply. "Walter, +get in to the mainland as quick as you can and +bring me all the palmetto berries you can find,—hurry. +Captain, let me take your flint and steel and +then get me a lot of soft mud from the marsh."</p> + +<p>Tired though they were, the two hastened away to +execute his orders, while Charley worked swiftly to +carry out the plan he had formed while coming +ashore. It was a heroic one, but rough measures +were the only ones it was in his power to apply. +Hastily gathering together a pile of dead cedar +limbs, he lit a fire with the flint and steel. While it +was blazing up, he stripped off his belt and, tying it +above Chris' knee, with a stick twisted it tight until +it was embedded in the flesh, shutting off the flow of +blood from below to the heart. He next heated a +small stone in the now blazing fire and applied it +while hot to the swollen wound. The smell of the +crisping flesh sickened him, but he doggedly stuck to +his task until he judged the wound was sufficiently +cauterized. Chris lay mercifully lost to the pain in +a deep stupor. The lad had just finished burning<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[151]</a></span> +the wound when the Captain returned with his +jacket full of soft mud, and, emptying it out, +hastened back for another load. Charley heaped a +lot of rocks upon the fire, and, as soon as they were +hot, ranged them close on each side of the wounded +limb, heaping the soft mud on top of them until he +had formed an air-tight mound over the leg. He +now had a great poultice of hot mud of great drawing +power, the danger was that Chris might be attacked +by other spasms and succeed in working his +leg out from the hot covering. To prevent this, the +lad tore his shirt up into strips and, binding the little +negro tightly, piled stones around the encased leg +so that it could not be easily moved.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[152]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XX.<br /> + +<small>HUNTING HELP.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Charley</span> next cut off small branches of cedar +and placed them under the unconscious little fellow's +head and back so that he might rest as comfortably +as possible. This done, he sat back breathless and +exhausted and waited impatiently for Walter's return.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield surveyed the young physician's +work with hopeful admiration. "If Chris lives, it +will be you as has saved his life," he declared.</p> + +<p>"He has saved mine more than once," Charley +replied, "but I am afraid he is not going to live. I +don't like this deep stupor he has fallen into. I +wish Walter would hurry."</p> + +<p>Walter had been hurrying as fast as he could, and +he soon appeared bearing a hatful of ripe palmetto +berries. His riddled shoes and bleeding feet told of +reckless running over the sharp rocks.</p> + +<p>Charley smashed the ripe berries between two +stones, catching the juice in his cap. Chris' teeth +were tightly set, but he managed to pry them apart +with his knife blade and forced some of the sticky +liquid down his throat.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[153]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I don't know whether it will help him or not, +but I am in hopes it will," he said, as, tired out, he +sat down by the little fellow's side. "Those berries +make a powerful tonic and stimulant, and I believe +that is what is needed. The poison seems to have +deadened the heart's action and brought on that +stupor. A few minutes will tell whether it is going +to do any good."</p> + +<p>It soon became evident that the rude remedies +were performing their mission well, the sufferer's +pulse, which had grown slow and feeble, quickened, +and his little face began to lose some of its +ashen hue.</p> + +<p>As soon as he became sure that a change for the +better was taking place, Charley arose from his +brief rest.</p> + +<p>"I am going to find help," he declared. "We +must get him to some place where he can have +proper attention. How far do you think we are +from Judson, Captain?"</p> + +<p>"Not more than twenty miles to the north of it, +I judge. Maybe not more than ten miles. But you +must not dream of starting yet awhile, lad. You +must rest for a bit, an' have something to eat first."</p> + +<p>"And I am going with you when you start," +Walter declared. "Something might happen to you +amongst those slippery rocks and awful bog holes. +The Captain can do all that can be done for Chris +while you are gone."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[154]</a></span></p> + +<p>There was no disputing the wisdom of both suggestions +and they busied themselves with the first +proposition, the finding of something to eat. This +demanded more time and trouble. Another trip had +to be made down to the water and considerable +searching was necessary before they could collect +enough of crabs and shell fish to make the full meal +that their hunger craved. Their rest they gained +while their dinner was roasting in the coals.</p> + +<p>Their rest, meal, and Chris' steadily improving +condition, put them all in better strength and spirits, +and the boys were cheerful when they bid the old +sailor good-bye and made their start in search of +help.</p> + +<p>"We'll be back as soon as we can get back, Captain," +Charley said, "but you don't want to worry +if we take longer than you expect."</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I'll keep too busy to have much time +for worryin'," the old sailor replied. "Jes' be careful, +lads, an' get back as soon as you can."</p> + +<p>He watched until the rank marsh grass hid the +two lads from sight, then busied himself with making +the camp a little more comfortable for himself +and his sick companion. Chris' welfare was the +first thing to claim his attention. With his sheath +knife he cut armful after armful of marsh grass and +added it to the rough couch Charley had fashioned +for the little negro, converting it into a soft, comfortable +bed. The low-hanging cedar boughs<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[155]</a></span> +formed a kind of rude shelter over the little lad, but +the captain was not entirely satisfied with it. The +rainy season was near at hand and heavy showers +might be expected at any time. A thick layer of +marsh grass placed over the lowest cedar limbs +quickly made the covering more to his satisfaction. +This done, he paused for a brief rest and to decide +what should be his next task. Although, he knew +that the port of Judson could not be more than +twenty miles away, he realized that, owing to the +necessarily slow traveling amongst the sharp rocks +and bog holes, it might be at least three days before +the boys could succeed in getting back with help. +His duties, then, would be the care of Chris, the providing +of food for them both, and the gathering of +firewood. Water was luckily plentiful, there was an +abundance of it in a cup-like depression near the +center of the island.</p> + +<p>In a Northern country with no weapons but his +sheath knife, these tasks would have seemed almost +impossible of accomplishment, but the captain was +not discouraged. The first thing, of course, was to +see that the little negro's marked improvement was +not checked. Heating more stones in the fire, the +old sailor piled them around the mound of mud covering +the wounded leg. Then, as the berries Walter +had brought were nearly exhausted, he decided that +the next thing of importance was to lay in a fresh +supply. He found the trip to the mainland slow and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[156]</a></span> +dangerous. Where the way was not strewn with +sharp-pointed rocks, it was dotted with forbidding-looking +sink holes of soft, slimy mud. Rank-growing +marsh grass covered the whole, making it extremely +difficult to pick out a safe passage through +the dangers. At last, however, he gained the mainland +where he found the oily black berries growing +in greatest profusion. He gathered his jacket full +of them and then sat down on a fallen log to rest a +minute and look around. It was an inviting spot in +which he found himself. The land rose up from the +marsh to form a high, sloping bluff through which +trickled a stream of clear, reddish water.</p> + +<p>The bluff was covered with a dense growth of +palms, satinwoods, bays, rubber trees, and low-ground +palmettos. It was an ideal place for a +camp, and the captain eyed it regretfully, wishing +that it was possible to bring Chris there from the +little marsh-surrounded island. But that was impossible +until the little fellow was able to walk and +he dismissed the idea with a sigh. He was just +gathering up his jacket of berries to leave when a +noise in the undergrowth close at hand made him +sink back to his seat on the log. The brushes before +him parted suddenly and a large deer stepped +out into an open place not twenty feet from where +he sat. For a full two minutes, he and the timid +animal remained motionless, looking directly into +each other's eyes, then the old sailor pulled out his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[157]</a></span> +sheath knife and sprang for it with some wild notion +of securing it for food, but the deer leaped lightly +away a few steps and stopped again as if in deepest +wonder and curiosity. The captain sheathed his +knife with a sigh. "I reckon, you don't know how +wicked men are," he addressed the graceful animal. +"Guess you ain't ever seed many men or you +wouldn't be so powerful tame. Some steaks from +you would taste right good, but you ain't aiming to +let me get close enough for that. Well, good-bye, +old fellow, I hope I'll meet you again sometime +when I've got a good gun."</p> + +<p>Saying which, the old sailor picked up his burden +and headed back for the island, the deer gazing after +him in innocent-eyed wonder.</p> + +<p>He had nearly reached the little camp when a +scream from Chris sent him forward at a run, regardless +of rocks and sink holes.</p> + +<p>The scene that met his gaze as he burst into the +little clearing chilled him with horror and dismay.</p> + +<p>Attracted, no doubt, by its warmth, two huge, +swollen-looking moccasins had crawled up on the +little heap of mud and now lay with their flat, ugly +heads within a few inches of the little negro's trembling +body.</p> + +<p>"Don't move an inch, Chris," he shouted, as he +broke off a dead limb from a cedar tree.</p> + +<p>The caution was useless, for, bound as he was, +hand and foot, Chris could only lay and stare in +horror and helplessness.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[158]</a></span></p> + +<p>A couple of well-aimed blows from the stick +killed the two poisonous, sluggish serpents, and, +dragging them to the edge of the island, the captain +pitched them out into the marsh.</p> + +<p>"They ain't very pleasant visitors," he remarked +as he returned to his helpless companion, "but I +reckon, they've done you a heap of good. You was +laying like a dead man when I went ashore and now +you look right pert and lively."</p> + +<p>"Dey's too sudden an' powerful medicine," +grumbled Chris. "Dis nigger might jes' as well +die as be scart to death. Golly! how my leg does +burn and smart. Please take dat stuff off ob hit, +Massa Captain, an' unloose my han's."</p> + +<p>But the old sailor feared to remove the mud poultice, +dreading another relapse. However, he untied +the little negro's hands, upon his promise that he +would lie still and not move. He was delighted +with the change in the little lad. Whether the shock +from the snakes, or, what was much more probable, +the continued effects of the palmetto juice had done +the work, the stupor which had frightened them all +was entirely gone, and the patient soon declared +himself decidedly hungry.</p> + +<p>Cutting a stick and laying it within Chris' reach +so that he would have the means of protecting himself +from other possible visitors, the Captain departed +in search of food.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[159]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXI.<br /> + +<small>THE CASTAWAYS.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was lucky for the captain that he was wise to +the resources of the Florida coast. A stranger to +the country would not have known where to look +for food and would likely have soon perished of +hunger. Although he had no other weapon than +his sheath knife, he went about his task with the +air of a man who was confident of success. Before +leaving the island, he cut a long, straight cypress +pole and sharpened one end to a keen point. With +this in his hand, he made his way down to the Gulf. +The tide was high again but there was a mass of +rock some two hundred feet from shore which protruded +a couple of feet above the water. Removing +his shoes, he waded cautiously out, prodding +the bottom before him with his pole and picking +his way carefully to avoid stepping on a stingaree.</p> + +<p>The rock reached, he perched himself on its edge +and sat peeping down into the water which was +clear as crystal. He had not long to wait. In a few +minutes a fish swam slowly past close to the rock, +and, taking careful aim, the old sailor dove his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[160]</a></span> +rude spear down with all his force. Its point struck +just behind the fish's head, passing entirely through +its body. It died without a struggle, and the captain +lifted it out upon the rock with a shout of triumph. +It was a beautifully-specked sea trout about +three feet in length and weighed at least twelve +pounds. Although there was plenty of other fish +within sight, the trout was enough for their present +needs and, scaling and washing it carefully, the captain +waded ashore with his prize. But he was not +yet quite satisfied. Laying his fish down upon a +bunch of clean sea moss, he examined carefully the +muddy beach near the water's edge. Here and +there, tiny jets of water squirted up from the mud, +and, where they seemed to be most numerous, he +began to dig. In a few minutes he had unearthed a +couple of dozen large clams. With these and the +fish, and a huge armful of moist sea moss in his +arms, he made his way back to camp where Chris +was eagerly awaiting his return.</p> + +<p>"I sho' wish I could get up from hyah," mourned +the little negro. "Golly! I reckon, I'd show you +how to cook dat fish so dat you nebber could eat +nuff ob hit."</p> + +<p>"You jes' lie still thar," commanded the captain. +"I'm a Cape Cod man, an' thar ain't any +cook living that can show a Cape Cod man how to +cook this kind of grub. You just watch and learn +somethin'."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[161]</a></span></p> + +<p>Chris watched him with professional jealousy +and interest. He firmly believed that no one on +earth could cook as good as he but he reluctantly +admitted to himself that the old sailor made his +preparations with considerable promise of success.</p> + +<p>First, he scooped out a hole in the ground about +three feet deep and two feet square and kindled a +small fire in the bottom upon which he placed a +layer of small rocks, as soon as it was going good, +then, he paused to remark regretfully,</p> + +<p>"I wish we had some potatoes. I never heard of +a clam bake yet without potatoes."</p> + +<p>"Dar's something jes' as good as 'taters," declared +Chris, pointing to a low-growing plant. +"Jes' you dig up some ob dem roots an' try 'em. +Hit's wild cassava, an' hit taste jes' like Irish +'taters."</p> + +<p>The captain dug down with his sheath knife and +unearthed several tubers a couple of feet in length +and about three inches in circumference. He regarded +them dubiously, but, on Chris' repeated +assurances that they were good and wholesome, he +cut off several pieces and washed them carefully. +By the time this was done, the fire in the pit had +burned low, and the stones were smoking hot. Cutting +several broad, green, palmetto leaves, he laid +them on the stones and spread over them a thin +layer of the moist sea moss. Upon the moss he laid +the fish and over it spread another layer of moss<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[162]</a></span> +upon which he placed the clams, covering them with +more moss, upon which he placed the cassava, and, +piling a thick layer of sea grass over the whole, +built a small fire on top of it. Then he sat down +and watched the fire while he and Chris waited +hungrily the slow cooking of their meal. At last, +the captain declared that it must be done. The fire +on top was raked away, the contents of the pit were +taken out and placed upon green, clean palmetto +leaves, and the two castaways fell-to with appetites +sharpened by their long wait. And what a feast it +was,—the clams cooked to perfection in their own +juice, the fish juicy and delicious, the cassava snow-white +and mealy and all rendered doubly delicious +by the salt spicy taste of the seaweed in which they +had been cooked. And what a joy it was to feel +that the worst of their troubles were over. Chris +getting better, the boys soon to be back with help, +all the worry and anxiety they had suffered past, +the next few days to see them all safely back in +Tarpon, where they would all wait in comfort and +safety, ready to claim their ship when the Greeks +brought her in, and, after that, they would return +for the gold and with it they would secure the +many things they had longed for all their lives.</p> + +<p>Surely the prospect was bright enough to make +the two lonely castaways chatter brightly, cheerfully, +and hopefully over their evening meal. They +could not see the dangers, worries, and misfortunes<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[163]</a></span> +yet to befall them, and it was well they could not for +it would have robbed the two of the happiest hour +they had had in many days.</p> + +<p>At last, the feast was over and Chris had paid +the cook the highest compliment of which he could +conceive.</p> + +<p>"Golly! Massa Capt., you cooked dem tings +might nigh as good as I could have done."</p> + +<p>Although there were many things which the +captain wished to do, darkness was fast coming +on and he had to complete his final preparations for +the night. First, he cut a lot of small boughs which +he piled up under the shelter close to Chris to serve +as his own bed. This done, he gathered piles of +wood which he spread in a circle around the big +cedar and set on fire to protect them both from +chance visits of snakes during the night. By the +time this was finished, it was dark and he crept in +under the shelter close to his dusky little companion +in misfortune, and, after a short, simple prayer +full of thankfulness for their deliverance from the +dangers that had threatened them, he quickly fell +into the deep sleep of total exhaustion. But sleep +did not come so readily to Chris. He had slept, or +been unconscious, much of the time since his accident +and the stimulating effect of the palmetto +medicine helped to drive slumber away from him. +He lay very quiet to avoid disturbing the old sailor's +rest, but, try as he would, he could not get to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[164]</a></span> +sleep. At last he gave up the attempt and lay with +eyes wide open looking out at the stars and the +twinkling camp-fires. From the marsh about came +strange noises of the night, the croaking of multitudes +of frogs, the cackle of marsh hens, the squawking +of cranes, and the rustling of the marsh grass +in the wind. Slowly the circle of fire died down, +smouldered and went out. Only the big main camp-fire +was left a glowing mass of embers.</p> + +<p>Suddenly the wakeful little negro's ears caught +another sound mingled with the voices of the +night,—a slow, heavy, creeping noise. For a time +he lay quiet listening, his hearing strained to the +utmost to catch the new strange sound. He waited +until there was no doubt that it was close at hand +and steadily drawing nearer, then, he reached +over and shook his snoring companion.</p> + +<p>"Wake up, Massa Captain," he cried, "dar's +some wild beast a creepin' into de camp."</p> + +<p>"I hear it," agreed the captain, instantly wide +awake. "Jes' lay still, lad, an' don't be frightened. +I'll stir up the fire a bit, that will run it off."</p> + +<p>He arose from his couch and strode boldly for +the smouldering fire.</p> + +<p>"Look out!" Chris yelled, suddenly, "Foah de +Lawd's sake, look out!" His keen eyes had caught +a glimpse of a black shape passing between the old +sailor and the mass of glowing embers, but his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[165]</a></span> +warning came too late,—the captain was upon the +moving shape before he saw it.</p> + +<p>A swishing noise rent the air, a loud thud, the +old sailor was knocked backward several feet flat +on the ground, and, with a loud, sharp bellowing, +the mysterious visitor glided away into the darkness.</p> + +<p>"Is you hurt? Is you hurt, Massa Cap?" cried +the terror-stricken lad.</p> + +<p>"A little bit, a little bit," called back the old +sailor, his voice hoarse with pain.</p> + +<p>He came creeping back into the shelter on hands +and knees.</p> + +<p>"It was a big bull alligator," he explained, painfully. +"Must have been twelve feet long. It +caught me a fearful blow on the legs with its tail. +I hope thar ain't no bones broken but it feels as +though thar was."</p> + +<p>A close examination proved his fears groundless, +but the terrible blow had done all but break the +bones. In spite of the pain, however, he crawled +forth again and replenished the fire, but he was +faint and giddy with pain before he succeeded in +getting back into the shelter and stretched out on +his couch once more.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I'll be all right by morning," he said, +hopefully, "but I don't calculate I'll be able to +sleep any more to-night, my legs hurt too bad for +that. Don't make any difference though, I 'low<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[166]</a></span> +I've had enough sleep for one night—it can't be +more than a couple of hours 'till daylight."</p> + +<p>It proved to be even less and with the coming of +light he removed his trousers and examined his +limbs anxiously. He had indeed received a terrible +blow from the prowling monster, both legs were +bruised and swollen where the tail had struck it and +it seemed a miracle that the bones had not been +broken. It caused him exquisite pain to rise upon +his feet, but there was work which had to be done, +and, in spite of his suffering, he must do it. So, +hiding his pain as well as he could, he prepared to +sally forth to secure food for the day.</p> + +<p>But in spite of all his efforts he could not entirely +hide his intense suffering.</p> + +<p>"You jes' lay down an' let me go out an' find +grub, Massa Cap," Chris pleaded. "I feels jes' as +well as can be again now."</p> + +<p>But the sturdy old sailor would not listen to his +pleadings.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[167]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXII.<br /> + +<small>ANOTHER DANGER.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Dar's</span> one thing I want you to do 'fore you go +projectin' off," said the little negro. "I wants you +to cut me some ob dem palmetto buds. I'se goin' to +braid you a hat. Hit's a plum wonder dat you ain't +got sun struck goin' bareheaded like you is."</p> + +<p>"I ain't had time to remember that I lost my hat +when we were wrecked. I'se been so worried an' +busy," said the captain. "Now you speak of it, +my head does feel sort of dull an' heavy. I hope +the boys will think to cover their heads with something—this +sun does beat down right hot."</p> + +<p>"Mass Charley will sho' rig up some kind ob +hat," Chris declared, confidently. "'Sides dey's +both young an' can stand a heap more sun den +what you kin. You jes' be mighty careful dis +mornin' an' by noon dis nigger will hab a fine hat +fixed for you. I'se done made lots ob dem on Cat +Island."</p> + +<p>There was a few young cabbage palms scattered +over the island and the captain cut out several of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[168]</a></span> +the buds with his sheath knife and placed them beside +the little negro, then, knotting up the ends of +his bandanna handkerchief to form a turban, he +took his spear and started for the shore.</p> + +<p>Chris watched his slow, faltering, painful steps +until he was out of sight then began on his proposed +task. The buds were really young fresh +leaves yet unfolded, soft and pliable, yet very +strong. He shredded them into strips about half +an inch in width until he had accumulated quite a +pile; then, taking four of the pieces at a time, with +deft, skillful fingers, he wove them into a braid +about an inch in width.</p> + +<p>In a couple of hours, he had a string of braid +several yards long.</p> + +<p>The fashioning of the braid into a hat, without +needle and thread and while lying flat on his back +was a more difficult task, but he attacked it with +cheerful energy, using the point of his knife for a +needle and small strips of palmetto for thread. At +last, his task was completed, and, although the hat +was grotesque in shape and appearance, it was soft, +strong, and light, and would prove an effective protection +from the fierce rays of the tropic sun. The +little worker was not yet satisfied but at once set +about the manufacture of a basket from the same +material realizing how useful it would be for the +carrying of clams, fish, and other things.</p> + +<p>He was still engaged upon it when the captain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[169]</a></span> +came stumbling into camp bearing a large fish and +several dozen more of the clams. The old sailor's +face was red, his movement weak and uncertain, +and his breathing heavy and labored, while he was +trembling violently from head to foot. He sank +down in the cedar's shade and wiped his flaming +face.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I've got a touch of the sun," he said, +feebly. "I feel weak and dizzy. I'll lie down in +the shade for a bit an' it will pass off. Don't be +worried, lad, it will pass off in a jiffy."</p> + +<p>But pass off it did not. By the end of half an +hour the sturdy old seaman was lying unconscious, +his breath coming in short, wheezy gasps.</p> + +<p>Chris watched him for a while in anxiety and +fear. He knew that it might be dangerous for him +to move his wounded leg but all thought of his own +danger was lost in the fear that the stricken old +sailor was dying before his eyes. He attempted to +pull his leg out from the mound but could not move +it. The heat of the stones had baked the mud hard. +With great effort he raised himself into a sitting position, +and, with his sheath knife cut and dug away +frantically at the baked mud until he had the leg +uncovered, then, severing the bandage above his +knee, he attempted to rise but could not move the +injured limb. He fell back and viewed it with +frightened dismay. It was not a pretty sight for it +was a mass of blisters where the hot mud had clung,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[170]</a></span> +and a large bluish swelling marked the place where +the stingaree's horn had entered. The tight +bandage, shutting off the blood supply for so long, +had rendered it paralyzed and useless. Although +the breaking blisters caused him exquisite pain, he +fell to rubbing the numbed limb briskly with both +hands until the blood crept slowly back into the +veins. At last, he was able to gain his feet and by +resting most of his weight on his uninjured leg +managed to limp over to the unconscious sailor. +Luckily, he had been raised in a torrid country +where sunstrokes were of frequent occurrence. He +knew just what to do and he did it quickly and +surely. His first act was to raise the unconscious +man's head and place a high pillow of twigs +beneath it. Then, stirring the smouldering fire, he +placed several large stones in the glowing coals. +While they were heating he removed the captain's +shoes and bathed his hot head and flushed face with +cool water, and tearing his shirt to pieces, wet it and +bound it around the sufferer's head. By the time +this was done, the stones were hot, and, rolling a +couple up in his jacket, he placed them at the captain's +feet, then, seated by his side, he awaited the +result with fear and trembling. A terrible dread +gripped his heart that the remedies had been applied +too late, for the old sailor had all the appearance of +a dying man. Thirty minutes dragged slowly away +without apparent change, then, slowly, the old sailor's<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[171]</a></span> +breathing grew less labored and his face began +to lose some of its fiery hue. Chris hailed these +favorable signs with joy as indicated that the crisis +had been safely passed, but his joy was somewhat +dampened when the hours passed by without the +stricken man showing signs of consciousness. He +seemed to pass from his stupor to a deep sleep from +which the little negro dreaded awakening him. It +was evident that the old seaman was in for a long +spell of weakness from the heat stroke he had suffered. +There was nothing more his little companion +could do to relieve his sufferings and he +remained seated by his side watching him anxiously +until the waning of the afternoon warned him that +it was time to partake of food and make preparations +for the night. He had eaten nothing since the +night before and he was conscious of a sense of +growing weakness. The fish the captain had caught +was already tainted from the heat and the little +negro felt too weak as yet to venture forth to +secure more, so he dug up a few of the cassava roots +which he roasted in the coals. These, together with +a handful of palmetto berries, constituted his supper. +As soon as it was finished he began his preparations +for the night. Slowly and painfully, he +gathered together broken limbs to keep the circles +of fire going until daylight came again. By the +time this was accomplished and the fires lit he was +weak and trembling from pain and exhaustion and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[172]</a></span> +was glad to crawl onto his couch by the captain's +side. The old sailor roused into momentary wakefulness +at the noise of the snapping twigs.</p> + +<p>"How you is, Massa Capt.?" demanded the little +negro, eagerly.</p> + +<p>"Weak, mighty weak. Feel as though I couldn't +lift my hand to my head, but I will be all right by +morning, I reckon. I guess, we have got no cause +to worry now. The boys will be back to-night or +early in the morning at the latest. How do you feel, +lad?"</p> + +<p>"Fine," lied the little negro, cheerfully. "Jes' +you go back to sleep again. I'll keep de fires up all +right."</p> + +<p>With a sigh of satisfaction, the captain closed his +eyes and was soon sound asleep again, but there was +no such rest for his little companion. Twice Chris +hobbled out and renewed the fires. The third time +he had to crawl forth on hands and knees. His +wound was again swelling rapidly and he could no +longer bear his weight on the injured limb. He +tried vainly to sleep. The wounded leg throbbed +with intense pain which gradually crept over his +whole body, making him feel sick and faint all over. +He understood the reason for his sufferings. Some +of the poison still left in his wound had, with the +removal of the tight bandages from his leg, found +its way back into the blood and was coursing +through his little body poisoning as it went.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[173]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Golly!" he remarked, grimly, to himself, "if +dem white chillens doan get back wid help an' +medicine by mornin', I reckon dis nigger ain't agoin' +to see Cat Island and his old mammy no moah. +An' if Chris gits plum helpless what's goin' to become +ob Massa Captain wid no one to tend to him. +He tinks he'll be all right in de mornin' but hits +goin' to take a powerful long time for him to get +real peart again."</p> + +<p>The long night dragged slowly away. Occasionally +the little negro crept forth and replenished +the fires, the balance of the time he lay quiet listening +for cry or sound that would tell of the boys' +return, but nothing fell upon his strained hearing +but the croak of frogs, the bellowing of alligators +and the strange night noises of the marsh.</p> + +<p>At daylight the captain awoke and attempted to +rise, but, although he was greatly improved, he was +yet too weak to stand erect.</p> + +<p>"You jes' lie still," Chris counseled him, "dar +ain't no call for you to go projectin' around none. +I'se goin' out an' git somethin' for us to eat."</p> + +<p>Although it cost him intense pain, the little negro +managed to walk erect until he was out of the old +sailor's sight, then he dropped down on hands and +knees and crawled painfully down to the shore.</p> + +<p>The touch of the cool salt water helped the +throbbing pain in his leg and he succeeded in wading +out to the rocks where he was not long in spearing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[174]</a></span> +a large, fat mackerel. With this, he returned +to the camp, for he did not dare in his growing +weakness to search for clams or other food. He +found the old sailor asleep again, and, cleaning the +fish he broiled it over the coals. As soon as it was +done he awakened the sleeper.</p> + +<p>"Hyah is youah breakfas' all nice an' hot," he +announced. "You want to eat a plenty ob hit. +I'se agoin' to lay down a spell. I didn't sleep berry +good last night."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[175]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIII.<br /> + +<small>THE RELAPSE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Captain Westfield</span> ate heartily of the delicious +fish. Much to his delight, he found that, except for +the extreme weakness following his heat prostration, +he felt unusually well. He wisely decided not +to invite a relapse by getting up at once, and, as +soon as he had finished eating, he lay back upon +his couch and quietly fell asleep again. It was +midday when he awoke feeling much better and +stronger. The first thing that met his gaze as he +gained a sitting position was Chris lying in the +same position in which he had first flung himself. +He called to him several times but the little negro +lay still and motionless. Thoroughly alarmed, he +crawled over and surveyed the unconscious lad. +The sight of the enormously swollen leg and a few +minutes' fingering of the dark little wrist told him +what was the matter. The slow pulse beats showed +that the subtile poison, released from its confinement +by the removal of the bandage, had found its way +to the plucky, loyal, little heart.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[176]</a></span></p> + +<p>The captain sat down by the little fellow's side +and dashed the stinging tears from his eyes.</p> + +<p>"He's killed himself for me," he moaned. "If +he had laid still just as he was he would have been +all right. But, God bless him, he risked his life for +a poor, old, worthless hulk like me. An' thar ain't +nothing I can do to save him now."</p> + +<p>Although he had but small faith that it would do +any good in such a desperate case, he hastily crushed +out a cupful of juice from the palmetto berries and +forced it down Chris' throat, then, resuming his seat +by his side, he watched to see if the powerful +stimulant would have any effect.</p> + +<p>As the hours dragged slowly away he rejoiced +to see that the lad's condition apparently grew no +worse. Encouraged, he crushed out more of the +juice and administered it at regular intervals. "I +believe he's got a good fighting chance to pull +through. If the boys would only get back with +some whiskey an' drugs, now, I reckon, we could +save him. I wonder what can be keepin' them so +long. They've had plenty of time to make Judson +and back."</p> + +<p>But the afternoon wore away without sign of the +rescuers, and a new fear crept into the old sailor's +worries. Something must have happened to the two +boys. Late in the afternoon, he left Chris long +enough to hurry down to the shore in quest of fish +or clams for supper. He found the rock from<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[177]</a></span> +which he had fished completely submerged and a +heavy surf thundering far up into the marsh. +Under such conditions it was impossible to secure +fish or clams, and he returned to camp hungry, disappointed, +and with further cause for worry. The +heavy surf indicated another storm in the Gulf +which might reach where they were. If it did, it +would render their position still more uncomfortable +and dangerous. A heavy blow would continue to +cut off their supply of fish and clams and would +likely flood the low-lying marsh shutting them in on +their little island. If Chris had been well enough +to walk, the captain would have at once moved camp +to the mainland, but that was impossible now. By +sunset his fears were in a fair way to be realized. +The wind was steadily increasing in force, and, +blowing out of a clear sky, gave promise of still +greater violence. Supperless and worried, the old +sailor watched the night fall with but one thing to +cheer his drooping spirits—Chris was evidently +slowly improving. Likely much of the poison had +been drawn out from his wound by the hot mud +and the balance remaining had been overcome in +its paralyzing effects by the powerful stimulant. +The lad's pulse was slowly growing stronger and +it was clear that the crisis had been safely passed.</p> + +<p>The old sailor was too worried about the absent +lads to compose himself to sleep. Already, the surf +was sending up small wavelets far into the marsh.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[178]</a></span> +If the boys were returning the way they went, their +journey would be fraught with perils.</p> + +<p>The sky was covered with fleecy clouds but they +disappeared with the rising of the moon and by its +bright light he could see far out on the water where +the huge waves broke foaming white on the outer +bar.</p> + +<p>Suddenly he gave a shout that made Chris stir +in his stupor; "The boys! The boys!" he cried +in delight.</p> + +<p>In the broad path of moonlight, a small schooner +appeared feeling her way through a passage in the +reef under close-reefed sails.</p> + +<p>"They must have someone aboard that knows the +reef," he mused as he watched the little ship cautiously +weaving her way in between the dangerous +rocks.</p> + +<p>She held steadily for the shore until she was +scarce two cable lengths from it, then, she shot up +into the wind, her anchor was dropped, and her +sails lowered.</p> + +<p>The captain was down on the shore, heedless of +the flying spray, when the anchor hit the bottom.</p> + +<p>"Walt! Charley!" he roared at the top of his +voice.</p> + +<p>There was no answer and he hailed again.</p> + +<p>"Ahoy! Shore!" came an answering hail from +the schooner. "Who air yo' and what do yo' +want?"</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[179]</a></span></p> + +<p>The captain was silent for a moment with disappointment. +It was not the boys after all, but any +help was welcome at such a time and he made haste +to reply.</p> + +<p>"We're two shipwrecks in bad shape an' need +help. Who are you?"</p> + +<p>"The Hattie Roberts, sponger, from Key West. +Stan' by, an' we'll send a boat."</p> + +<p>While the strangers were launching a boat, the +captain had time to observe that the schooner's +decks were piled full of small boats and that, small +as she was, she carried a crew of at least thirty +men.</p> + +<p>"An old style, pole an' hook sponger," he decided. +"I didn't reckon there was any of them +left. I 'lowed the Greeks had run 'em all out of +business."</p> + +<p>Manned by half a dozen men, the little boat +came tearing through the waves towards the shore. +Flung up by a huge roller, she grounded almost at +the captain's feet. The instant she touched bottom, +her crew sprang over the side and drew her up safely +beyond the reach of the next roller. Even by the +dimmed light of the moon, the old sailor could see +that the new-comers were dark-skinned men with +heavy coarse features. He recognized them without +the aid of the peculiar accent as Conchs,—a +kind of mixed race belonging to the Florida Keys.</p> + +<p>"Whar's yo's companion?" demanded one, who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[180]</a></span> +from his air of authority was evidently the captain.</p> + +<p>"He's on a little island just a little ways from +here. I'll have to get one of your men to help me +down with him."</p> + +<p>"All right, Sam here will go with yo'. Step +lively, we have got to pull out from hyar quick. +There ain't as good anchorage as I 'lowed to find +behind the reef. We'll have to make foah a better +harbor."</p> + +<p>The captain, with the sailor detailed to help him, +was hurrying off on their mission when the Conch's +skippers curiosity caused him to stop him in spite of +the preciousness of time.</p> + +<p>"How did yo's git hyah in such a fix," he demanded.</p> + +<p>"Been sponging with a Greek crew. Crew +mutinied. We escaped in a diving boat. Got +wrecked in the night on the reef out thar," replied +Captain Westfield, briefly.</p> + +<p>"Sponging with the Greeks!" snarled the Conch +with an oath. "Then the Greeks can help yo' out +of yo'r fix, by all that's Holy, I won't. Hyah, Sam, +jump aboard with yo'."</p> + +<p>"You are not agoin' to desert us?" cried the +captain in bewildered consternation. "For the love +of humanity, man, what do you mean?"</p> + +<p>"I mean that I won't raise a finger to help any +mons who deals with the Greeks—blast 'em," cried +the Conch, fiercely. "They've ruined us an' our<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[181]</a></span> +people. We used to be a happy an' prosperous race +a'fore they came with their diving suits an' tramped +all over the bottom of the Gulf. Killing the little +baby sponges with their iron shoes, an' stripping the +bottom clean as a Conch's floor. We've been run +out of the business, an' they did it. We've lost our +homes, an' they caused it. Our families don't have +enough to eat an' wear any more, an' they are the +reason—curse 'em, curse 'em, curse 'em."</p> + +<p>"But you are leaving us to certain death, man!" +pleaded Captain Westfield, "The water is rising +over the marsh, already."</p> + +<p>"An' it will be flooded inside of ten hours," declared +the Conch with cruel satisfaction. "All +aboard mons an' shove off."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield grasped the gunwale of the +boat and tried to hold it while he reasoned and +argued with the fanatical Conch, but the infuriated +man rapped his knuckles with an oar and gave him +a shove with the blade that sent him struggling +backwards. By the time the old sailor recovered his +balance, the boat had been shoved off and was out +of his reach. He shook his clenched fist at the +Conch's receding figure.</p> + +<p>"You'll pay for this," he shouted. "No good +will come to you after such a trick." But it is +doubtful if the Conch even heard his voice above +the roar of the wind.</p> + +<p>The captain stood watching grimly until the boat<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[182]</a></span> +reached the schooner's side, and her close-reefed +sails were hoisted, her anchor broke and she headed +to the South inside the line of reef. When she had +faded away into the night, he turned back for the +camp filled with disappointment and dismay.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXIV.<br /> + +<small>THE FLOOD.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">As</span> the old sailor made his way back to the +island, he was alarmed to see how rapidly the water +was rising over the marsh. He splashed knee-deep +in the water at every step and it was easy to see +that it still continued to rise with astonishing +rapidity.</p> + +<p>His first act on reaching the island was to move +the camp to the highest knoll of ground, already +the lowest lying portions of the island were submerged. +Chris had regained consciousness though +he was still too weak to move without assistance. +He watched the old sailor's preparations with +evident interest and looked at the rapidly rising +water with evident anxiety.</p> + +<p>"If dat water doan stop comin' up, we is sho' +goin' to hab a hard time gettin' anythin' to eat," +he observed. "Can't get ober dem rock no way when<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[183]</a></span> +dey is covered wid water, sho' to break a leg in one +ob dem holes."</p> + +<p>"The Lord will watch out for us, lad," encouraged +the captain. "Look at all that He has brought +us through. He has never deserted us in our hour +of need."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little +darkey, thoughtfully. He remained quiet for a +few minutes then said quaintly, "'Spect's we +oughter ask him to look out foah Massa Charley +an' Massa Walt. I'ze getting plum anxious 'bout +dem two white chillins. Dey had oughter been back +long 'fore dis. Massa Charley's mighty clever, but +I 'spect dat it wouldn't do no harm to ax de Lawd +to help him out a bit if he's in trouble."</p> + +<p>"No one can do without the Lord's help, Chris," +the captain said, gravely, "an', I reckon, them lads +need it powerful bad. Something pretty serious +has happened, I 'low, to keep them from coming +back. We'll ask the Good Lord to watch out for +them an' protect them."</p> + +<p>The old sailor knelt by the little negro's side +and in simple seafaring language prayed that the +Heavenly Father would watch over and protect the +missing ones.</p> + +<p>The simple steadfast faith of the old seaman +and the trusting little negro filled them with a sense +of security and peace. They doubted not that their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[184]</a></span> +humble petition would be answered and that now a +Heavenly Eye was watching over them and their +absent companions and that a Divine Hand would +guide them through their trials and danger. They +stretched out on their leafy couches and went fast +to sleep, while the storm raged and howled around +them and the rising water crept slowly up on their +little island.</p> + +<p>It was broad daylight when they awoke and +looked about them. It was a wild and terrifying +scene that met their eyes. The marsh between them +and the sea was completely submerged and covered +with rolling white-caps. Far out on the reef they +could see the mighty rollers flinging their spray +forty feet in the air when they struck the sunken +rocks. Of the island, none remained except the +high sands and knoll upon which was their camp. +Between the island and the mainland was two miles +of swirling, foaming water.</p> + +<p>"Can't get to shore, no ways, now, Massa Captain," +Chris observed. "You had oughter gone +in las' night when you had a chance an' left dis +nigger behind."</p> + +<p>"The Lord will look out for us, lad," said the +old sailor cheerfully. "I don't calculate that the +water's going to rise high enough to cover this +knoll we are on an' as soon as the wind drops a +bit, the boys will be back for us with a boat. It's +just a matter of being patient for a little while.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[185]</a></span> +We may get a little bit hungry, but, I reckon, we +can stand that without grumbling."</p> + +<p>"Sho' we can," agreed Chris, bravely. "Tho' +hit do seem like I was gettin' powerful hungry already. +Ain't dar none of dem cassava roots dat +we can get at?"</p> + +<p>A close search revealed that most of the patch +of tubers was covered by the rising water. A few +plants however still showed on the little knoll and +these the captain dug at once. There was only a +scant half peck of the roots but that was better +than nothing.</p> + +<p>The old sailor kindled a little fire and roasted +all the roots in the coals.</p> + +<p>"We might as well have one good full meal," he +observed, "I never did take much stock in this idea +of going on short rations when grub is scarce. I +always 'lowed that one good feed would carry a +man further than a dozen pesky little ones that +only tantalize the stomach."</p> + +<p>But the roots shrank greatly in the cooking, by +the time the skins were removed, there was but little +left for the hungry castaways. They still felt empty +after their meal was finished.</p> + +<p>The day dragged wearily away with no sign of +abatement of the storm. The water continued to +rise slowly, but so slowly that the two anxious +watchers were not without hope that the little knoll +on which they were would escape the overflow.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[186]</a></span> +Their position was by no means uncomfortable. +There was no rain and the weather was so warm +that the wind did not cause them to suffer any from +cold. Aside from their growing hunger and their +anxiety about their missing companions, they were +quite comfortable. Chris, in fact, was in better +shape than at any time since they had been cast on +shore.</p> + +<p>"I don' reckon dis storm can las' berry much +longer," he observed, cheerfully, when the sun went +down in a perfectly clear sky. "Dar ain't no +clouds to back up de wind an' hit's bound to play +out 'fore long."</p> + +<p>"That's just where you're wrong, lad," said the +captain. "A gale from a clear sky is the worst of +all. I ain't ever seen many of them but what I have +seen were all hummers."</p> + +<p>The two sat looking out on the gloomy waste of +waters until the moon, now at its full, rose and lit +up the wild scene about them almost as brightly as +day. At last they tired of the wild, gloomy, disheartening +scene, and, after a short prayer together, +stretched out on their couches. Chris was almost +instantly asleep but the captain lay long awake, his +mind full of their helpless situation, and, of anxious +conjectures as to the fate of the two absent lads. +His own position and that of his little companion +was such as to awaken his deepest fears. So long +as the storm continued, their rescue by land or Gulf<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[187]</a></span> +was impossible. No boat could live amongst the +rocks and raging waters which now surrounded +them. His long experience told him that the storm +was likely to continue at least two days longer.—He +had seen similar gales blow for an entire week +without a let up. Even after the gale was over, +it would take some little time for the waves and +water to subside. At the best, they would suffer +greatly from hunger before their rescue would be +possible. But, to do the old sailor justice, his +thoughts were not so much of their own situation +as of the absent lads. He could only hope and +pray that they had not started to return by water +before the breaking of the storm.</p> + +<p>As he lay motionless musing, his ear caught a +low grating sound as of heavy objects drawn on +coarse sand. He quickly sat up on his couch and +looked around. In the bright moonlight he could +see large dark objects moving over the white sand.</p> + +<p>"'Gators, an' a regular drove of them," he exclaimed. +"Wake up, Chris! Wake up!"</p> + +<p>The little negro struggled up into a sitting position, +still half asleep.</p> + +<p>"What's de matter, Massa Cap?" he inquired.</p> + +<p>"Look at them 'gators, thar's dozens of them. +We've got to have a fire mighty quick an' stick close +to it."</p> + +<p>Chris greeted the sight of the dark objects with +a cry of joy.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[188]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Oh, Golly! De Good Lord's dun answered our +prayers. Dem's turtles."</p> + +<p>The old sailor sprang to his feet and would have +dashed for the nearest object if the little negro had +not restrained him.</p> + +<p>"You sho' scare dem all away if you do dat way," +he cautioned. "Jus' wait till dey gets to layin' an' +you can walk right up on 'em."</p> + +<p>The huge creatures crept steadily on up the shelving +knoll. Their progress was slow and clumsy, +and their lower shells dragging over the sand had +made the grinding noise the captain had heard. +They crept up to within ten feet of where the two +watchers lay, then, they halted, and, with their hind +flippers began to dig deep holes in the soft sand.</p> + +<p>"Dey lays der eggs in dem holes an' covers dem +up wid sand," Chris explained in a whisper. "Dey +each lays mighty nigh two hundred eggs. De warm +sand hatches out de little turtles."</p> + +<p>The two castaways waited until the great sea +hens had begun to lay, then Chris arose and walked +directly for them without any attempt at concealment. +The turtles did not pay the slightest attention +to his approach.</p> + +<p>"We'll take dese two smallest ones," he announced. +"Dey will be de tenderest. Jus' grab de +shell wid me, Massa Cap, back by de hind flippers +an' we'll flop 'em over on his back. Keep youah +eyes an' mouth shut."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[189]</a></span></p> + +<p>But the old sailor was too excited to heed the +advice. He grabbed the turtle's shell and heaved, +then staggered back spitting and coughing with +mouth, eyes, and ears full of sand, which the +creature with it's flippers sent flying in a cloud about +it.</p> + +<p>Chris waited until he had relieved himself of the +stinging sand and this time the captain, following +his advice, kept mouth and eyes tightly closed. A +few seconds sufficed to turn the two turtles on their +backs where they lay helpless.</p> + +<p>There must have been at least thirty turtles in +the bunch but the castaways contented themselves +with only turning the two, any more would have +been useless slaughter. Those unmolested quickly +completed their laying, covered the eggs and retreated +to the water.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXV.<br /> + +<small>THE FLOATING HATCH.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> castaways lost no time in rejoicing over +their good fortune. The Captain hastily kindled a +fire while Chris, with his sheath knife, proceeded to +butcher the smallest of the two turtles. Much experience +had made the little negro expert at the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[190]</a></span> +work and in a few minutes he had severed the two +shells and cut off several thick steaks from one of +the hind flippers. Then, squatting before the fire, +each impaled a steak on the end of a pointed stick +and toasted it over the coals.</p> + +<p>How good the steaming juicy meat tasted to the +two hungry ones. Steak after steak was broiled +and eaten before their ravenous appetites were +satisfied and they could eat no more.</p> + +<p>"Midnight is a sorter unusual hour for a feed," +Captain Westfield observed, "but, I reckon, we will +sleep none the worse for it. I 'low, we ain't got to +lay awake none worryin' about food now. Thar's +meat enough to last us for two weeks at least."</p> + +<p>"An' maybe, Ole Mister Gale will blow hisself +out," said Chris, hopefully, as, yawning sleepily he +stretched himself again on his couch.</p> + +<p>It was broad day when the castaways awoke from +the heavy slumber which had followed their hearty +midnight supper. They found the gale still blowing +with undiminished violence and the sky still brightly +blue. One thing, however, gave them great satisfaction, +the water had ceased to encroach upon their +little knoll. It had evidently reached its height.</p> + +<p>After a hearty breakfast of turtle steaks, the +two proceeded at once to dress and cure the turtles, +for they well knew that under the sun's heat the +fresh meat would soon spoil.</p> + +<p>They had neither salt nor smoke house with<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[191]</a></span> +which to cure it, but they went at the task with sure +confidence in the result. The meat was first cut +away from the shells and skinned, care being taken +to remove every particle of the greenish-colored +fat. Then, cutting across the grain, the meat was +divided into thin strips and spread upon leaves to +dry in the hot sun. It only remained for them to +protect it from the dews of night and chance rains +and a few days would see it thoroughly cured and +capable of keeping sweet and good so long as it was +kept dry.</p> + +<p>With some hazy idea that they might be of some +future use, the captain cleaned and washed out the +two, great, trough-like, upper shells of the turtles.</p> + +<p>"Dat looks like a lump of wreckage out dar by +de reef, Massa Cap," Chris observed as he +straightened up from his task of spreading out the +meat. "Pears like de tide is settin' hit in dis +way."</p> + +<p>"It is a bit of wreckage or a clump of seaweed," +the captain agreed after a brief survey. "It's drifting +in all right, but it's going to miss the island by +a good hundred yards."</p> + +<p>The two suspended work while they watched the +drifting object slowly near their island.</p> + +<p>"It looks like a hatch with something like a stack +atop of it," he observed to the captain as the object +drew close.</p> + +<p>"Hit's a man or 'ooman atop ob hit," cried Chris,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[192]</a></span> +whose eyes were keener than the old sailor's. "He's +layin' plum still, jes' like he was dead."</p> + +<p>Closer approach of the object convinced the captain +that the little negro was correct. There was +beyond doubt a motionless body lying on the low +floating hatch. It was evident too that the hatch +with its burden would pass the island at a distance +of at least one hundred and fifty yards. To venture +out and attempt to tow it in was to assume a terrible +risk. The water between it and the island was raging +and tossing over dozens of dangerous hidden +rocks. Only the strongest swimmer would have the +slightest chance of success, and, even should he +succeed, it might be to find that he had risked his +life to rescue a corpse. But the ocean breeds in its +followers a brotherhood that leads them to deeds of +quiet heroism. They never know when they may +be in need of a rescuing hand and it is seldom that +one turns aside from the rendering of service, no +matter how dangerous it may be to himself.</p> + +<p>When the hatch with its burden was nearly +abreast of the island Chris began to strip off his +clothes, but the Captain stopped him.</p> + +<p>"You're still too weak to attempt it, lad," he declared. +"You couldn't make it thar an' back, I +reckon I can fight it out all right. I've mighty nigh +got back all my strength."</p> + +<p>Hastily stripping off the pants and shirt in which +he was clothed, the old sailor slipped off into the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[193]</a></span> +water and struck out for the wreckage with long +steady strokes, warily avoiding the foaming spots +which marked the positions of the larger rocks. +The swim was not difficult for so experienced a +swimmer. The struggle would come when he +attempted to return with his burden. In a few +minutes, he reached the wreckage and, resting his +hand upon the hatch gazed down at the burden it +bore. He saw a man, apparently about forty years +of age, attired in rough seaman's garb, his face +bronzed and seamed from long years of exposure +to wind and weather. The stranger was lying flat +on his back on the hatch, his legs dangling over the +end. A rope passed around his body and under the +wood work prevented the larger seas from washing +him off his frail support. He was unconscious and +the captain reached over and placed his ear close +to his chest. He could detect a faint beating of +the heart. It was slow and feeble but still it was +beating,—the man was alive.</p> + +<p>Once satisfied of this fact, the old sailor quickly +shifted to the end of the hatch, and, resting one +hand upon it, and striking out with the other hand +and both feet, strove to force it back to the island. +He had not accomplished half the distance with his +burden when he saw that he could not hope to succeed. +The tide was slowly but surely sweeping him +in past the island direct for the mainland. Still, +he battled desperately on, swimming with all his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[194]</a></span> +strength. Suddenly the little raft seemed to move +forward with increased speed.</p> + +<p>"Take it easy, Massa Cap," sounded Chris' voice +close to his elbow. "We can make it togedder all +right." The plucky little negro had been quick to +see the danger and equally quick to come to the +rescue.</p> + +<p>Between the two, after half an hour of heartbreaking +battling with the current, they managed +to shove the raft ashore, where they sank exhausted +and panting upon the sand.</p> + +<p>As soon as they were able to move, they unlashed +the unconscious sailor from the hatch, and, carrying +him up, laid him upon the captain's couch. The +man seemed nearly dead, and for hours the +two, wet, exhausted castaways worked over him, +struggling to coax the spark of life into a flame. At +last they were rewarded by seeing a tinge of color +creep into the bronzed face. At length the sailor +sighed and opened his eyes.</p> + +<p>"Water," he gasped, faintly.</p> + +<p>"Golly! I should reckon he's had 'bout enough +water," Chris exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"Get some for him quick," Captain Westfield +commanded. "The salt brine he has swallowed +has parched his throat and stomach."</p> + +<p>The sailor took only one mouthful of the proffered +water, then spat it out with his face twitching.</p> + +<p>"Salt, salt," he murmured.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[195]</a></span></p> + +<p>A horrible fear seized the captain. He snatched +the shell from Chris' hand and took a swallow of +the water. His fear was confirmed, it was salt. +The Gulf had risen close enough to their little well +to percolate through the sand into it and render it +as salt as itself.</p> + +<p>The little negro divined the situation from the +captain's face. "Golly! dat's bad," he cried. +"Doin' widout water is a heap wurser den doin' +widout food."</p> + +<p>"Water, give me water," pleaded the rescued +man. "My throat's parched, parched."</p> + +<p>"You shall have some water as soon as we can +get it," Captain Westfield assured him. There was +something vaguely familiar to the old sailor in the +man's queerly accented speech. It was more puzzling +as he had no recollection of ever having seen +the man before.</p> + +<p>Considering his low condition the sailor recovered +his full senses and a measure of his strength with +astonishing rapidity. It was plain that he had not +been deprived of either food or water for any great +length of time. He was soon able to sit up and take +notice of his surroundings. A curious look stole +over his bronzed face as his gaze took in the two +castaways.</p> + +<p>"How did I get hyah?" he demanded.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield related the story of the rescue +briefly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[196]</a></span></p> + +<p>The sailor's rough features worked with emotion. +"I remember part," he cried. "Our vessel struck +on Needle Rocks in the darkness an' went down like +a stone. I had just time to throw myself on the +hatch an' pass a rope around my waist. The crew," +he shuddered—"must have all been dashed to +pieces against the rocks. God knows how I escaped. +An' yo' risked yo'r lives to save mine, yo' an' that +boy. Mon, how could yo' forgive me enough to do +such a deed?"</p> + +<p>"Forgive you?" echoed the captain, puzzled. +"I had nothin' to forgive."</p> + +<p>"I am Rufus Sanders, the Key West sponger who +refused yo'r appeals for help an' left yo' to yo'r +fate," cried the man, excitedly.</p> + +<p>"I did not know that, but it would have made no +difference," said the captain, gently. "You were a +helpless, shipwrecked man." He checked the flood +of thanks on the sponger captain's lips. "You have +nothing to thank us for," he declared. "We have +only saved you from one fate to suffer a worse with +us. We are hopelessly imprisoned on this island, +an' we have no water. All we can do is endure, +pray an' hope."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[197]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVI.<br /> + +<small>WITH THE BOYS.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Considering</span> the misfortunes which had befallen +them, the two chums were in surprisingly good +spirits, as they picked their way through the marsh, +headed South. It was a relief to be free from the +dread and apprehension under which they had labored +for so many days.</p> + +<p>"I feel almost as though we were on a picnic, +instead of being shipwrecked sailors who have been +robbed of their ship, and have lost all except the +clothes on their backs," Charley declared.</p> + +<p>"Everything is going to turn out all right after +all," agreed Walter, hopefully. "Chris is going to +get over his wound all right. He and the captain +will have no trouble in getting plenty of food and +water. We had ought to reach Judson by dark, and +we'll get a boat or wagon and return for them at +once. We can easily get from Judson to Tarpon, +and there we can get the United States Commissioner +to take up our case, and the minute the +'Beauty' enters port she will be seized and held for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[198]</a></span> +us. At the worst it will only mean the loss of our +diving boat and a little patient waiting. And think +of the store of gold which will be ours for a little +work."</p> + +<p>But his chum was not quite so optimistic. "I do +not think that we had better build too great hopes +on recovering either our ship or the gold," he observed. +"That Manuel is a clever rascal. I fear +he will rise to the occasion. He may think that we +are wrecked in the storm but I am convinced he +will take no chances. He will plan and scheme to +the last to secure the ship and money and save his +own neck from the halter. He may be caught at +last but he will not sail boldly into any port. He's +too wary for that."</p> + +<p>His words did not dampen Walter's high spirits. +"There is a revenue cutter at Tarpon," reminded +his chum. "As soon as we get to Judson, we will +telegraph to the Commissioner. He will not wait +for the 'Beauty' to touch a port if we can put our +case strong enough. He will start the cutter out in +search of her at once."</p> + +<p>"I hope you are right. If we are going to make +Judson before dark, however, we are going to have +to travel faster than we are going now. It's slow +going amongst this mud and rock. Let us make our +way inshore and see if it's any better traveling +there."</p> + +<p>But as they approached close to the mainland<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[199]</a></span> +they saw that there was no hopes of easier traveling +in that direction. The dense hammock jungle extended +down to the edge of the marsh. To make +one's way through it would be far slower than to +continue over the marsh. They, accordingly, retraced +their steps to the water's edge. It was +slightly easier traveling close to the water. The +waves had beat down the marsh grass along the +edge leaving a kind of beach of rock and mud. It +was hard and dangerous walking but safer than over +the marsh itself, where the rank growth hid the +treacherous bog holes.</p> + +<p>The boys often paused in their march to examine +the masses of stuff that had been cast up by the +waves. The squall of the night before had robbed +the bottom of great masses of seaweed and had +taken heavy toll of the life in the water. Every few +minutes the lads would pass great clumps of seaweed +tangled together in beautiful rainbows of +bright scarlets, yellows, crimsons and purples. Curiously +enough, the storm had dealt very harshly with +the finny tribe. Likely many of the fish had been +caught in shoal water and their lives beaten out +against the cruel rocks. They dotted the shore and +the chums frequently halted to admire one's curious +shape or coloring.</p> + +<p>"I wonder what kind this one is?" said Walter, +pointing to a long slim fish of a beautiful brilliant +green.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[200]</a></span></p> + +<p>"That is a parrot fish," his chum enlightened +him. "I think they are one of the most beautiful +fishes that swim. They are of all colors, some are +violet, some of golden, some scarlet, and in fact, +they are found of every shade and hue. They get +their names from their many brilliant colors, I +guess."</p> + +<p>"What a wonderful mysterious thing the sea is," +Walter commented. "I never realized before how +much of strange life it contains."</p> + +<p>"What we see along the beach this morning is +only a very small sample of its population," his +chum replied. "Sometimes, I think that all life +must have come first from the sea. There is hardly +an animal on land which has not a grotesque likeness +in some creature of the sea. Take that fish there +with the peculiarly shaped head and horns. Its +resemblance to a cow is so striking that it has been +named the cow fish. There is another little fish with +a head just like a horse. It is called the sea horse. +Then there is the toad fish, the frog fish, the snake +fish, and hundreds of others closely resembling the +animals after which they are named. But here," he +concluded, "is, in my opinion, the most wonderful +fish I have ever heard of. I have seen many of them +but one always has a puzzling fascination to me."</p> + +<p>He had stopped before a flat round-shaped fish +which lay stranded in the edge of the water. It was +still alive and struggling feebly to get back into<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[201]</a></span> +deeper water. It was of a light-tan color and was +covered with spots of darker hue. On its upper +surface was a soft, spongy-looking, circular spot +It was not a pretty looking object and Walter +viewed it with disgust.</p> + +<p>"I don't see anything fascinating about it," he +commented.</p> + +<p>"Just put your finger on that soft spongy place," +Charley directed, "that's where it's wonderful +secret is concealed. It is not poisonous," he added +as his chum hesitated.</p> + +<p>Walter bent down and pressed his finger against +the spongy mass. The next instant he leaped back +with a cry of alarm, shaking his arm madly. +"Jerusalem!" he exclaimed. "What is it?"</p> + +<p>"Got a shock did you?" laughed his chum. +"That's an electrical fish. Their mystery to me +lies in where they get the electricity with which they +are charged. Even a small one like that contains +enough to give a powerful shock."</p> + +<p>The morning had been advancing rapidly as they +walked and talked and the sun was shining down +hot on their bare heads. Charley, justifying Chris' +confidence in him, was quick to recognize the danger +from its torrid rays.</p> + +<p>He cast a look up at the sun. "It is nearly +noon," he declared. "We must get something to +cover our heads with and then find something to +eat. I am getting as hungry as a wolf."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[202]</a></span></p> + +<p>There was nothing along the rocky, muddy beach +that would do for hats and the two bent their steps +in towards the mainland. There, they broke off +small leafy branches and thrust the stems down +the backs of their shirts so that the leaves would +tower above, and shade their heads. These made +only a poor substitute for hats, but shed off the +fiercest rays of the sun.</p> + +<p>Close to where they broke off the boughs was a +small running stream and the boys drank thankfully +of its cold sweet water.</p> + +<p>"We have no time to waste in cooking and I fear +our bill-o-fare for dinner will be rather scanty," +Charley said. "Let's look around here and see if +we cannot find fruit of some kind."</p> + +<p>There were palmetto berries in plenty all along +the high bank but the lads had no desire to partake +of them except in a case of necessity. Seeing nothing +promising along the edge of the jungle, they +scrambled up the bank and made their way slowly +and cautiously into the hammock, keeping a wary +eye out for snakes. They found fruit of several +kinds in abundance, but most of it Charley rejected +as being poisonous, or not fit to eat. They gathered +two kinds which he declared were both palatable +and nourishing. One was a golden-red fruit about +the size of a pear. It contained a large nut to which +the meat clung closely. One bite into it and the +boys' hands and faces were smeared with sticky<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[203]</a></span> +juice. "I would recognize that smeary juice and +strong turpentine flavor, anywhere," laughed +Walter, "these are mangoes, the fruit, they say, +you have got to get into a bath-tub to eat if you +want to keep clean."</p> + +<p>The second fruit was about the size of a large +plum and snow white in color with a blotch of red +on the sides. Its meat was sweet, milky and +slightly puckering.</p> + +<p>"They are cocoa-plums," Charley explained. +"They are considered quite nutritious but I would +be afraid to eat a great many of them at a time on +account of their puckerishness. We can eat all we +want to of the mangoes however, they will not +hurt us."</p> + +<p>As soon as their repast was finished the boys +filled their pockets with mangoes and cocoa-plums +and hastened back to the shore.</p> + +<p>They plodded steadily along while the afternoon +wore away, but their progress over the rocks and +mud was slow and they realized that they would +not be able to reach Judson before darkness +rendered further traveling dangerous.</p> + +<p>They were passing a matted clump of seaweed +on the shore when Charley, stopping with a cry of +delight, fished out from its midst a round piece of +wood about four feet in length, from which trailed +a long, light line badly frayed in places by the rock.</p> + +<p>"Do you recognize this?" he shouted.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[204]</a></span></p> + +<p>"No," replied his chum in wonder at his excitement.</p> + +<p>"It's the buoy that marked the place where the +gold ship lay. The Greeks will have a job to locate +the gold now. That storm must have chafed the +rope in two against a ledge of coral. Hurrah, +hurrah."</p> + +<p>"I don't see but that is as bad news for us as for +the Greeks," Walter said, dubiously.</p> + +<p>"It is, in a way," his chum replied. "Of course +it will make it harder for us to find the exact spot +where the treasure lays, but the Greeks will be +delayed by it and that will give us a chance to get +there with the revenue cutter and catch them before +they get all the gold removed and get away."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[205]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVII.<br /> + +<small>THE JOURNEY.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> still lacked about an hour to sundown when +Charley called a halt. "We cannot possibly make +Judson before night, and it would be sheer foolishness +to try to travel over these rocks after it gets +dark," he declared. "We would be sure to get +some bad falls and very likely break an arm or leg. +The best thing we can do is to find a good place to +camp while it is still light and make ourselves as +snug as possible for the night."</p> + +<p>Walter, who was beginning to feel tired out from +the long day's tramp, was quick to agree with his +proposal and the two lads headed in for the mainland, +for neither felt any desire to spend the night +on the wet, muddy marsh.</p> + +<p>Good fortune seemed to guide their footsteps for +they struck the mainland just where a little stream +of clear water bubbled forth amongst a clump of +towering cedars.</p> + +<p>"The very place for our camp," Charley exclaimed. +"You see what you can fix up in the way<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[206]</a></span> +of a shelter, Walt, while I look around and see +what I can find for our supper."</p> + +<p>Walter was fast becoming an adept at the science +of woodcraft and he went about his task with certainty +and dispatch. First, he broke off armsful of +small boughs which he spread in two piles upon the +ground close to the trunks of two big cedar trees. +These were to serve as their couches and over them +he proceeded to erect a rough lean-to to protect them +from the wind and dew. There were plenty of dead +boughs all around, and, selecting two of the longest +and straightest, he leaned them against the trunk +of the two trees about six feet from the ground, +embedding their other ends firmly in the ground. +Across these, he laid other limbs a couple of feet +apart and upon them piled palmetto leaves and +boughs to form a roof. Before the open front of +the rude structure, he built a roaring fire of dead +cedar limbs. Close beside it he piled up a huge +heap of wood with which to keep the fire replenished +throughout the night. This completed his labors, +and stretching himself upon his springy, fragrant +couch before the crackling fire, he waited hungrily +for his chum's return. He was becoming alarmed +over his long absence when there came a crackling +of boughs and Charley strode into the circle of firelight, +bearing in one hand a snow-white heart, or +bud, of a cabbage palmetto and in the other, a chunk +of fresh meat several pounds in weight.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[207]</a></span></p> + +<p>"What have you got there?" he inquired, +eagerly.</p> + +<p>Charley grinned, "I'm too hungry to stop and tell +you now. Sharpen up a couple of sticks and we'll +broil some steaks, then, I'll give you three guesses +as to what it is, and bet that you don't guess right."</p> + +<p>Walter hastily cut two long green palmetto stems +and sharpened them to points at the ends. By the +time he had them ready, Charley had cut a couple of +generous-sized steaks from the hunk of meat. The +balance of it he wrapped up in a couple of green +palmetto leaves and buried in the coals. While the +steaks impaled upon the sticks were sizzling appetizingly +before the fire, he wrapped up the palmetto +heart in green leaves and buried it beside the roasting +meat.</p> + +<p>So hungry was Walter that he cut bits from his +steak before it was fairly done and devoured them +with eager appetite.</p> + +<p>"Like it?" inquired his chum with a twinkle in +his eye.</p> + +<p>"Fine, it only needs a little salt to make it +perfect," Walter declared. "I can't quite place it +though. It tastes like a cross between pork and +beefsteak. What is it anyway?"</p> + +<p>"Guess."</p> + +<p>"Pork?"</p> + +<p>"Nit."</p> + +<p>"Coon?"</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[208]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Nit."</p> + +<p>"Opossum?"</p> + +<p>"Nit."</p> + +<p>"I give it up then. What kind of animal is it?"</p> + +<p>"I found it on the bank of a little creek not far +from here," said Charley, dreamily. "It was sound +asleep and it did not look very pretty or innocent +even in its slumber, but beggars can't be choosers, +so I got me a good heavy club and crept up on it +softly. When it woke up I was near enough to give +it a good rap over the head. It gave me a couple +of good licks in the shins with its tail, however, before +I got it killed."</p> + +<p>Walter rose in his indignation, "Why didn't you +tell me at the start that it was alligator meat," he +demanded, "I would not have eaten a mouthful of +it."</p> + +<p>"And you'd gone hungry to bed," said his chum +with a chuckle. "You'd have let your prejudice +cheat you out of a good meal. It tastes all right, +don't it."</p> + +<p>"Yes," Walter admitted, ruefully, "and, now +that I've eaten some of it, I might as well keep right +on eating."</p> + +<p>"Wise lad," Charley approved. "Let me tell +you there are lots worse things than alligator steaks +when one is hungry."</p> + +<p>The steaks disposed of, the boys attacked the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[209]</a></span> +roasted meat and palmetto cabbage with such +vigorous appetites that there was but little left when +their hunger was at last appeased.</p> + +<p>"Pretty slim show for breakfast," said Charley, +ruefully, as he eyed the scanty remains. "Let's see +if we can't fix up some way to catch something during +the night."</p> + +<p>The plan which they finally decided upon to +accomplish this was very simple. With their sharp +knives, they whittled out several sets of figure-four +setters, and, dragging several small logs just outside +the circle of firelight, they placed a figure-four +setter under an end of each and baited the triggers +with bits of meat left from their supper. An +animal nosing around after the bait would be sure +to spring the setter and cause the log to descend +upon it.</p> + +<p>"We will surely get a coon or opossum before +morning," Charley declared. "Animals have lots +of curiosity and some of them are sure to be +attracted by the light of our camp-fire. The smell +of the cooked meat will attract them also."</p> + +<p>This last task completed, the boys stretched themselves +on their soft couches before the cheery fire +whose rays danced and flickered amongst the leafy +greenness of their shelter. It was a cozy, cheery +little camp and the two lads lay long awake, talking +hopefully with the cheery optimism that waits +upon a hearty supper and healthy vigorous youth.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[210]</a></span> +When at last they fell asleep, it was with confident +hope of a successful morrow.</p> + +<p>It seemed to Walter that he had barely fallen +asleep when he was struggling in that nightmare +state which lies halfway between slumber and +entire wakefulness. He struggled pantingly for +breath, but every breath he drew seemed to stifle +him. Oppressed with black horror, he fought his +way back to consciousness. But wakefulness +brought small relief. The air was heavy with a +stench that nauseated and sickened him.</p> + +<p>Charley, crouched beside the fire, was holding his +nose with one hand, his face expressing unutterable +disgust.</p> + +<p>"What in the world is the matter?" Walter demanded.</p> + +<p>"One of our traps worked," announced his chum, +grimly. "It's only a little skunk, but my, what a +big smell."</p> + +<p>"I should say so," Walter agreed. "We can't +stay here. We'll have to move camp."</p> + +<p>"I second the motion to adjourn," said his chum, +solemnly.</p> + +<p>No time was lost in debating the question and the +lads quickly took their departure from their cozy +camp. They made their way cautiously along the +edge of the hammock until the raucous odor was +left behind, then they halted and built another fire.</p> + +<p>"The measly little varmint," said Walter,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[211]</a></span> +wrathfully, as they crouched beside the blaze. +"He's gone and cheated us out of a good night's +sleep."</p> + +<p>"Oh, it isn't as bad as all that," said his chum, +cheerfully. "It's nearly morning now. See, there's +the morning star in the East. Besides," he added, +whimsically, "That poor little fellow isn't to blame. +He didn't ask us to set a trap for him. I bet he +regrets the accident as much as we do." Then +throwing back his head he sang in his clear tenor +voice, "Driven From Home."</p> + +<p>As the humor of the incident dawned upon +Walter, he burst into laughter in which he was +joined by his fun-loving chum.</p> + +<p>It was too near morning to consider selecting +another shelter so the two sat beside the fire until +day broke, then they made their way back to the +camp to examine their traps. All were sprung, but, +outside of the skunk, the only victims were an opossum +and a coon which they bore back to their new +fire. The opossum they broiled and ate for breakfast +while the coon they roasted to carry along with +them for dinner.</p> + +<p>Sunrise found them once more on the march +headed South.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[212]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVIII.<br /> + +<small>JUDSON.<a name="FNanchor_A_1" id="FNanchor_A_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_1" class="fnanchor">[A]</a></small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">By</span> noon the two lads estimated that they must +have come at least twenty miles from where they +had left the captain and Chris, and, if the old sailor +had been right in his reckoning, they could not be +far from their objective point, the town of Judson. +They began now to keep a sharp watch ahead and +ere long were rewarded by the sight of a low black +line projecting out from the marsh ahead. A closer +approach resolved the low black line into a long, +shaky, decrepit wharf, its piling rotting from age +and neglect and its timbers and planking fast falling +into decay. On the mainland back of the marsh a +few rude cabins, each at least a half a mile distant +from its nearest neighbor, rose from the middles of +wide neglected fields. One lone, aged sloop rode at +anchor near the wharf. The little port and the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[213]</a></span> +hamlet itself seemed to wear an air of deadly decay, +sadness and gloom.</p> + +<p>"Not a very cheerful or prosperous-looking +place," Charley observed as they clambered up on +the wharf and made their way ashore over its shaky +timbers.</p> + +<p>"No," his chum agreed, "but I am thankful to +reach it, poor as it is. My feet are getting sore +from tramping over these rocks, I can tell you."</p> + +<p>At the shore end of the dock the two paused long +enough to take a more careful survey of the place.</p> + +<p>"I declare it looks as though it was deserted or +all the inhabitants dead," Walter said nervously, +"See how the roads are all grown up with weeds as +though they were never used. There is no sign of +anyone about either."</p> + +<p>"Just notice those cabins," his chum exclaimed, +"They look just like the pictures I have seen of +houses the first settlers used to build during the +Indian times. They are built of great logs and +have loopholes like the forts of those days. What +a queer place!"</p> + +<p>"Well, there's smoke coming from the chimney +of that nearest cabin, and there seems to be someone +working out in the field by it," said Walter with +a sigh of relief. "I was beginning to think it was +an abandoned village."</p> + +<p>The two bent their steps towards the cabin +indicated. It was set in a square clearing of about<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[214]</a></span> +twenty acres, that was surrounded by a strip of +pine woods which separated it from its nearest +neighbor. As they drew nearer, they could see a +man at work near the cabin. He was ploughing up +the ground with a rude plow hitched to a yoke of +oxen.</p> + +<p>As the boys stepped out of the road into the +clearing, they were greeted by savage barks, and a +pack of dogs lolling around the cabin woke into +sudden life and came tearing towards them.</p> + +<p>The man at the plough let go the handles and +sprang into the cabin. The next minute a rifle +barrel protruded from one of the loopholes, "Halt +right where you-all is," called a voice from behind +the rifle.</p> + +<p>"Call off your dogs," shouted Charley, as he and +Walter, snatching up a couple of sticks, endeavored +to keep the growling, snapping curs at bay.</p> + +<p>"Who are you-alls an' what do you want?" demanded +the holder of the rifle.</p> + +<p>"We were shipwrecked twenty-five miles up the +coast. We want supplies and help to bring in two +companions, one of whom is badly hurt," answered +Charley.</p> + +<p>"Come closer an' let me have a good look at you-all," +commanded the cabin's occupant, "Here yu +Bet, yu Tige, yu Jim, be still thar," he called to the +snarling pack which slunk growling away at his +harsh commands.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[215]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys drew near the cabin in obedience to +his order. A brief survey of them seemed to convince +its owner that they were not what he feared. +The cabin door was flung open, and, rifle in hand, +he appeared in the doorway.</p> + +<p>"Come in you-alls an' have a cheer," he invited. +"I'll jis' unhitch them oxen an' then, while I'm +rustling up a bit of supper, you-alls can give me +your story."</p> + +<p>The tired, hungry boys accepted his invitation +with alacrity, and, while he was busy unharnessing +the yoke of steers, they seated themselves in a couple +of rude home-made chairs, and gazed curiously +about them.</p> + +<p>The cabin was about twenty feet square. Its +rough log walls were whitewashed, and its pine-slab +floor spotlessly clean. At one end was a big old-fashioned +fireplace from the rafters above which +hung home-cured hams, slabs of bacon, and strings +of sausages. A barrel in a corner was heaped high +with huge, sweet, sugary yams. Several boxes beside +it were heaped with onions, cabbages, carrots, +pumpkins, and other vegetables. In another corner +stood a barrel of home-ground corn meal and a big +hogshead of water. Taken all in all, the little +cabin's interior was a sight to fill the two hungry +lads with satisfied anticipation. They had hardly +completed their survey of it when their strange host<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[216]</a></span> +entered latching and bolting the heavy door behind +him.</p> + +<p>He was a man about forty years of age, strongly +built, but sallow with the sallowness of the native +Floridian. His face was kindly in expression but +stamped on its every line was a look of uneasiness +and apprehension. It was not an expression of +fear but rather the look of a brave man who was +simply on his guard every moment against expected +dangers.</p> + +<p>"I sho' have got to ask you-all to excuse me fur +the way I dun greeted you," he apologized, "but, +you see, strangers are mighty scarse around hyar +an' one has to be plum' careful. I'se powerful glad +to see a new face though—it's been mighty nigh +two years since I had talk with a stranger. I +reckon, you-alls must be some hungry. I'll rustle +up a little supper while you-all gives me your tale."</p> + +<p>With a deftness that indicated long batching experience, +he cut great slices of ham and placed them +to broil over the coals, mixed a pone of corn bread +and put it to bake in a Dutch oven, and buried a +dozen big yams to roast among the embers. While +he was thus engaged, Charley related the story of +their voyage and shipwreck omitting only any mention +of the gold. His story was frequently interrupted +by his host's exclamations, "I swan, an' dew +tell." When the lad had finished, the stranger +beamed upon him with evident pleasure. "I swan,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[217]</a></span> +hit's jis' like a novel I read once," he declared, "hit +was writ by a fellow called Russell, Clark Russell, +if I don't disremember his name. I don't reckon +his story was true though. I 'lows he just made it +up outer his head—but the vittals is ready now, you-alls +jis' back up to the table thar an' helps yourselves."</p> + +<p>The hungry boys needed no second invitation but +fell to work on the tender juicy ham and sugary +yams with hearty appetites while their host as he +ate, watched them with evident pleasure at their +enjoyment. When all had finished, he put away the +dishes, filled his corn-cob pipe, and leaned back in +his chair against the wall.</p> + +<p>"You-alls can't go back to whar yu left the +captain an' the little nigger to-night, noways," he +observed.</p> + +<p>"No," Charley agreed, "but we would like to +start back early in the morning if we can get a +wagon or a boat."</p> + +<p>"Thar ain't no fitten road for a wagon leading up +the coast," observed their host. "I owns that little +sloop anchored down thar by the dock. I reckon, +you-alls could make out with her. I don't reckon +them Wrights would stop you-alls from going if +they understood jis' how things stood. I don't 'low +they would be so pesky pisen mean as all that. I'd +like to go with you-alls an' see that ole captain an' +that little nigger, I sho' would."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[218]</a></span></p> + +<p>"We would like to have you go with us," said +Walter, eagerly. "Why can't you?"</p> + +<p>"'Cause I don't ever expect to leave this hyar +cabin alive," said his host, calmly.</p> + +<p>The boys stared at him in uneasy astonishment.</p> + +<p>"No, I ain't crazy," said the man quietly. +"Hush, jis' lis'en' a bit."</p> + +<p>A long prolonged growl came from one of the +dogs outside. The man arose and taking up his +rifle stepped over to the loophole beckoning to the +lads to follow. The moon lit up the little clearing +almost as light as day. The dogs were moving +around outside, sniffing and uttering low growls.</p> + +<p>The boys could see nothing unusual in the clearing +but they felt a sense of danger in the very air. +Their host's eyes, more accustomed to the surroundings +than their own, evidently detected something +ominous in one of the shadows thrown out +from the belt of pines. He thrust the barrel of his +rifle out through the loophole and the next instant +its sharp crack rent the stillness of the night. The +lurking shadow vanished amongst the pines with +a whoop of defiance.</p> + +<p>Their host pulled in his rifle, "A plum' miss," +he said, disgustedly, "Wall, the war is on for fair +now. Better outen that light an' draw your cheers +up by the fire an' I'll tell you'alls about hit."</p> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTE:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"> + +<p><a name="Footnote_A_1" id="Footnote_A_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_1">[A]</a> This account of Judson is the description of a little West +Florida town as it actually has been, and is to-day. Nineteen +of its scanty population have died by a fierce war. The author +has only changed the first letter of the town's real name.</p></div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[219]</a></span></p> + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIX.<br /> + +<small>THE FEUD.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Thar</span> ain't no call to keep watch at the loopholes," +said their host as the alarmed lads' glances +kept wandering towards the dark openings. "The +dogs will tell we-alls if anyone tries to come near +the cabin." He leaned back in his chair in silence +for a few minutes gazing into the heart of the fire +whose flickering rays lit up his bronzed, thoughtful, +kindly face.</p> + +<p>"Hit all began years ago when I warn't but a +little bit of a shaver," he began, quietly. "Judson +was a right-prosperous, happy, contented, little +place, then. Thar was mighty nigh a hundred people +living in the town, an' in the woods nigh about +hyar. Each family had hit's own little cabin an' +farm an' raised all hit's own living of meat, corn, +taters, an' sugar cane, an' each family had hit's patch +of cotton with which they bought what things they +needed that they didn't raise themselves. We had a +right tidy little schoolhouse. I went to hit two terms +when I was a little shaver," he said with evident<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[220]</a></span> +pride, "an' I learned how to read an' write pretty +well—the reading's been a heap of company to me +during the years since then. Each family had a +plenty to eat an' wear, an' thar warn't none that +you could call real poor people like I hearn tell you-alls +have in the North. We used to have dances +and barbecues, an' picnics an' a right sociable time. +The town was started by two families, the Turners +an' the Wrights—I'm a Turner,—an' all the people +about was kin to one or the other family, which +made everybody friendly and sociable with each +other. Hit was jis' a little Eden on earth, this +place, 'till the serpent came twisting an' crawlin' in. +The devil must have sho' had a hand in making +some of the men folks believe that the Good Lord +intended the honest corn they raised for anything +but food for man an' beast. Yes, I reckon, hit sho' +must have been ole Satan that made a few of the +Turners an' Wrights get together an' start a little +whiskey still over thar in the woods yonder. The +womin folks was again hit from the start, as, bless +their hearts, they've always been again the cursed +stuff. Hit was Christmas week that the still was +started goin', an' Christmas Eve the ones running +hit gave a big barbecue at the still to celebrate it. +Most everyone went, as they always did to doin's in +the neighborhood. Even my daddy an' two brothers, +Ben an' Abe, went to see the fun as they called +hit, but mammy she was a good, religious woman<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[221]</a></span>, +she staid at home an' kept me with her. She would +have liked to keep the other boys with her too, but +they had grown out of her control as boys sometimes +do." His bronzed face grew sadly thoughtful, +as he continued, "I recollect, I cried because I +couldn't go too, but mother sang to me an' tole me +stories—mother was a powerful hand at telling the +kind of stories boys like an' I soon quit cryin' an' +went to sleep quiet an' happy with mother singing +to me. Hit was the last time I ever heard mammy +sing. I reckon hit was 'bout midnight when a noise +woke me up. The door had been flung open—hit +was never locked in them days—an' father an' Abe +came rushin' in. Father's face was white as a sheet +an' I'll never forget the look on mammy's face. Hit +seemed as if she knowed without a word from +daddy what had happened. Thar was a curious +tremble in her voice as she asked, 'Whar's Ben?' +At the sound of her voice father broke down an' +sobbed like a child. 'He's dead,' he cried. +'They've killed my boy Ben. Those Wrights have +killed my boy Ben.'"</p> + +<p>The man paused as the recollection of that terrible +scene crowded his mind, while the two lads +looked at each other with sympathetic horror.</p> + +<p>"No one seemed to know just how the trouble +started," went on their host, quietly. "All hands +had taken a little too much liquor, there had been a +few hot words, a blow, an' Ben had keeled over<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[222]</a></span> +with a knife in his side. Then the fightin' started +between the kin of both families, an' daddy an' Abe +had run home to git their guns. Sore at heart as +mammy was, she begged 'em not to shed no more +blood but to leave it to the cotes, for mammy, as I +have said, was a religious woman. But both +Wrights and Turners came first from the mountains +of Kentucky whar man don't go to law again' +man but settles his quarrels with his rifle, An' so +the blood-feud began. Thar was more than Ben +killed that night,—Wrights as well as Turners. +When all had sobered up from the liquor thar came +a kind of lull or truce, but war always bruk out +again when either families got to drinkin'. They +got Abe the followin' year, but not 'fore he had +shot a couple of Wrights. Hit was three years +afore they got father. Mother, she pined away an' +died soon after they got him. I think she was +kinder glad to go, such things are wearin' on a +woman. An' so the killin's been goin' on ever since +by spells when the liquor gets to flowin'. I am the +only Turner alive, now, though thar's a few of my +kin still scattered around hyar. I've been shot at a +powerful lot of times, but, I reckon, I've been lucky. +Then too, they ain't none of them hunted me so +powerful hard, for I ain't took no part in any of +the killin's. I've shot a couple of times to scare +them away but not to kill. My own kin 'lows that +I'm poor-spirited, but somehow or other, I can't<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[223]</a></span> +forget the look on mammy's face the night Ben was +killed. I don't want to be the cause of puttin' no +such look on any woman's face. I've knowed all +these years though that my time must come sooner +or later. I heard to-day that the Wrights have got +in a lot of liquor from Tarpon Springs an' they are +sayin' that the last Turner has got to be wiped out +of Judson. So, I got me in a store of water an' +grub an' fixed to lay low for awhile. I may be able +to hold out until their liquor is gone an' the danger +is past, but I reckon hit doan' make so powerful +much of difference. They air plum' sho' to get me +sooner or later. Wall, that's the story, young fellows, +hit's been a right smart relief to have someone +sympathetic to tell hit to. Don't you worry none +though. As soon as comes mornin' I'll hist a flag +of truce an' arrange to have you fellows let out +peaceful. You can take my boat an' go after your +captain an' that little nigger, but I sho' advise you +not to stop hyar on youah way back. Keep right +on to Tarpon Springs. Some of my kin folks kin +bring the sloop back from thar."</p> + +<p>"You are very good," Charley exclaimed. "But +tell me why you have never left this awful place. +There are hundreds of places where you could have +made as good a living and been free from dread and +worry."</p> + +<p>"Mammy's grave is out thar among them pines," +said the man, simply, "an' daddy's, an' Ben's, an'<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[224]</a></span> +Abe's, then, atter all, this place is home, no other +place could be that."</p> + +<p>"I see," said Charley, much abashed.</p> + +<p>"I am proud to have met you, Mr. Turner," declared +Walter, warmly. "I think you are a noble +man."</p> + +<p>"No? I sho' reckon you is mistaken," said the +man in surprise. "Me noble? I reckon not. My +own kin 'lows I'm mighty poor-spirited 'cause I +won't take no hand in the killin'."</p> + +<p>"I don't care a cent what your kin says," began +Walter, hotly, but he was interrupted by the crack +of a rifle, the whistle of a bullet, and the howl of +a dog outside.</p> + +<p>His host winced as if the bullet had struck his +own body. "They've killed Bet," he cried. "Bet, +what I raised from a little bit of puppy. They +hadn't ought to go an' shoot a poor defenceless, +dumb animal, hit ain't right. My God, be they goin' +to kill all my poor faithful dawgs," he cried, as another +shot rang out followed by another pitiless +howl.</p> + +<p>Rifle shot followed rifle shot while the man stood +trembling with eyes flashing as he listened to the +whining of the animals outside. At last, heedless +of the bullets pattering against the logs, he flung +the door wide open and called to the hounds. They +came crowding in, a whining, mangy, ill-looking +pack, but disreputable as they were, they had been<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[225]</a></span> +the man's only friends through his lonely years and +the two lads respected him for his act.</p> + +<p>As soon as he had bolted the door again, he rummaged +in a corner and brought out three rifles. He +handed one to each of the boys. "I reckon, we'll +have to watch at the loopholes now the dawgs air +inside," he said quietly. "You-alls can take the +ones at the ends, I'll tend to the sides. Be right +careful 'bout standin' in front of 'em, a bullet might +pass through. An' don't shoot to kill if you can +help it."</p> + +<p>"An' his kin people call that man poor-spirited," +whispered Walter in wonder to his chum as they +took up their positions.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXX.<br /> + +<small>BESIEGED.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> boys had little opportunity for conversation +in their new rôle as guards, being separated from +each other by the length of the cabin. Strange as +was the position in which they found themselves, +they felt but little fear. The massive logs of which +the cabin was constructed bid defiance to the entry +of a bullet, and neither of them could believe that +the affair would amount to more than a few shots<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[226]</a></span> +being fired at the building while the attacking party +was under the influence of the liquor they had +drank. They believed that with the coming of day +the feudalists would disband and retire to their +homes, while they would be free to return to the +rescue of their friends on the island. Nevertheless, +they were not going to take any chances in the +duties as sentinels. They stood well to one side of +their loopholes and peeped out at the little clearing +plainly visible in the bright moonlight.</p> + +<p>"I reckon they can't see to shot through the loopholes, +but you-alls want to keep youah bodies out of +line with them," cautioned Mr. Turner. "Hit +mought be that a stray bullet would pass through +one of them. An' don't either of you young fellows +fire 'less you jes' have to. You doan't want to get +mixed up in this hyar quarrel. If yu' jis' naturally +have to shoot, aim low an' give it to 'em in the +laigs."</p> + +<p>"There seems to be several of them gathering together +at the edge of the woods," called Charley +anxiously. "Here they come straight for the +house!"</p> + +<p>His host darted to his side. "They've got a long +pole an' air aiming to batter down the door," he announced. +"Keep back, boys, an' let me do the talking +an' shootin', if thar's got to be any."</p> + +<p>But the boys crowded close to his side, eager to +view the coming attack.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[227]</a></span></p> + +<p>There were about a dozen men in the approaching +party and they advanced at a rapid trot, bearing +between them a huge pine log.</p> + +<p>"Halt whar you air," commanded Turner when +they had approached to within sixty feet of the +house. "If you-alls come any closer meanin' +trouble, someone is goin' to get hurt."</p> + +<p>There were enough of timid spirits in the party +to cause a halt in the advance.</p> + +<p>"We're goin' to get youah hide this time, Bill +Turner," shouted the foremost of the gang, a big, +heavily-whiskered man. "Hit's a disgrace on us +Wrights to have one of youah name livin' still in +this settlement. You're goin' to be done for this +time."</p> + +<p>"Now, I ain't done nothin' to you-alls in all these +years," said Turner quietly and argumentatively. +"You ain't got no cause to come 'round hectoring +me."</p> + +<p>"More shame for you," shouted the big man. +"We're goin' to do you, first, 'cause you're a +Turner, second, 'cause you've been too poor-spirited +all these years to put up a man's fight."</p> + +<p>"Pears lak hit needs a powerful lot of yu to do +fo' one, lone, mean-spirited critter," said Turner, +mildly.</p> + +<p>The big man stamped his foot with rage. "Hit +don't take none but me," he roared. "Yu come out +hyar an' we'll have it out, man to man."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[228]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I ain't a-doubting you're courage, Jim Wright," +returned the other, slowly, "but I ain't aimin' to +hurt no man 'less I have to. Besides, if I did get +the best of yu, all the rest of youah gang would +come down on me. Jes' keep away from my cabin, +that's all I've got to say."</p> + +<p>"Come on, boys," roared the leader. "He's too +mean-spirited to hurt a fly. He can't shoot all of +us, anyway."</p> + +<p>There was some hesitation, but his fellows, evidently, +believed that the man inside would not fire. +Under the urging of their leader they picked up the +log and started on a run for the door.</p> + +<p>But they quickly discovered their mistake. From +the loophole shot out quick jets of flame as the man +inside worked the lever of his Winchester. The log +dropped unheeded to the ground as its bearers +broke for the cover of the woods. Some were not +able to run but limped away groaning with pain. +After the fleeing ones strode the big leader, cursing +them for cowards and imploring them to return to +the assault.</p> + +<p>"I don't reckon I've hurt any one of them very +much," Turner remarked, as he slipped more shells +into his rifle. "I jes' aimed for their laigs."</p> + +<p>"Thank God, it has all ended without loss of +life," Charley said earnestly, but his host shook his +head.</p> + +<p>"Hit ain't ended, hit's jes' begun, Jim Wright<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[229]</a></span> +ain't one to be scart out by a little lead. He don't +know what fear is. If he can't get none of 'em to +come back with him, he'll come back alone. I wish +you young fellows were safe outer hyar, but it +won't do for you to try to leave now. Crazy drunk, +like them fellows is, hit wouldn't be safe for you. +Maybe by morning they'll be sobered up enough to +listen to reason."</p> + +<p>In spite of his words, the boys were hopeful that +the night would pass off without further trouble, +but they were soon undeceived. Half an hour had +not passed when the big leader emerged from the +woods followed by a half a dozen of his fellow +feudalists.</p> + +<p>His followers halted by the fallen log but he advanced +boldly direct for the loophole.</p> + +<p>"Keep away, for Gawd's sake, keep away, Jim," +Turner implored. "I don't want to have to shoot +you."</p> + +<p>"Hit's you or me this time!" shouted the other, +"The sun don't rise on no living Turner in this +town."</p> + +<p>"Keep back," warned Turner, thrusting his rifle +through the loophole, but even in his desperate situation, +the boys, crowded close beside him, and could +see that he aimed only at the legs of the advancing +man.</p> + +<p>Ruffian though he was, the other was not without +brute courage. He never paused in his advance.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[230]</a></span> +"Shoot," he shouted as he whipped out a pistol, +"Shoot, that's what I want yu to do."</p> + +<p>The two reports came almost together, but the +pistol shot was a fraction of a second ahead of the +other. Like a fire-swept weed Turner crumpled to +the floor, his rifle exploding as he fell.</p> + +<p>The big man clapped one hand to his side and fell +to the ground.</p> + +<p>With the report of his rifle, his followers had +grabbed up the log and rushed for the door, but +Charley had been quick to see the danger. Snatching +up the rifle from the fallen man, he fired at the +moving legs as fast as he could work the lever. The +whistling lead was more than the assaulters could +stand. Three dropped their hold on the log and +limped hurriedly for cover while their fellows, deprived +of their aid, could no longer sustain the +heavy timber, which sank again to the ground while +they hastened after their wounded companions.</p> + +<p>The boys watched them in silence until they entered +the woods then Charley set down the rifle.</p> + +<p>"I don't think they will be back right away +again," he said. "Anyway, we have got to risk a +light. Perhaps Mr. Turner is not dead."</p> + +<p>With hands that trembled with excitement Walter +struck a match and lit the lamp, then, the two boys +lifted the prostrate man and laid him upon the bed. +"Keep watch at the loophole while I see if anything +can be done for him," Charley commanded.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[231]</a></span></p> + +<p>The man's shirt was matted with blood and the +lad did not attempt to take it off, but cut it away +with his sheath knife, exposing the white chest in +the center of which gapped a horrible hole. "He's +badly wounded," he announced after a careful +examination of the wound. "There's two holes, +one in his chest and one in his side. I believe +the bullet struck a rib and glanced, coming out at his +side. If so, he will pull through if I can only +stop the blood flowing. I'll have to keep this lamp +lit for awhile even it is risky. I'll be as quick as +I can."</p> + +<p>There was little in the rude cabin with which +to do in such a case, but the resourceful lad made +the best of the situation, working with feverish +speed so as to be able to extinguish the lamp as +soon as possible. First, he washed out the wash +basin thoroughly and filling it with clean water +from the barrel added to the water a generous handful +of salt. With this he washed the ugly-looking +wound, then tearing into pieces a fresh sheet he +found lying on a shelf, he made a little wad of rags +with which, after soaking them in salt water, he +plugged up the gaping hole. Over this he bound +wet strips of the sheet to hold it securely in place. +He was rewarded for his labor by seeing that the +flow of blood was quickly checked and soon ceased +entirely. As soon as he made certain of this, he +extinguished the light and crept to his chum's side.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[232]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I think he will pull out all right," he announced. +"He is unconscious yet, and when he does come to +he'll be very weak from loss of blood. Have you +seen any more of those fellows?"</p> + +<p>"They're still in the woods around the clearing. +Listen and you'll hear their voices every now and +then."</p> + +<p>"Has the man who was shot moved any?"</p> + +<p>"No, he lays just as he fell. I guess he's dead."</p> + +<p>"It's a horrible affair," said Charley with a shudder. +"I'll never forget this night. It has put us in +a bad fix. We can't leave here now, and I don't +like the way the wind is coming up. If there's a +heavy storm, the captain and Chris will be in danger, +it wouldn't take a very heavy sea to cover that +marsh. Just listen how it's blowing."</p> + +<p>Walter seemed not to hear what his chum was +saying. He stood staring out at the still figure +stretched on the ground. "He hasn't moved, but +maybe he isn't dead," he said at last. "Perhaps, he +is bleeding to death and a little attention might save +his life."</p> + +<p>"You're right," Charley exclaimed. "We must +bring him in."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[233]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXI.<br /> + +<small>THE ENEMIES.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was a risky thing to attempt. To venture outside +would be to expose themselves in the bright +moonlight to the bullets of the feudalists, but the +two plucky lads never hesitated. The body lay not a +dozen steps from the cabin and it would not do to +let his fellows approach that close to the little fort. +Either they must save him themselves, if he was not +already dead, or leave him to die alone in the night.</p> + +<p>"We must be quick about it," Charley declared. +"As soon as I unlatch the door, we must run out, +grab him by the shoulders, and drag him in—he's +too heavy to lift."</p> + +<p>In this bold move fortune seemed to favor the +lads. They got their heavy burden to the door before +a shot was fired and, then, the bullets whistled +harmlessly above their heads.</p> + +<p>"We were lucky that time," Charley panted as +he barred the door again. "Now keep a sharp +lookout. I'll have to light that lamp again."</p> + +<p>"This fellow is not so very badly hurt," he announced,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[234]</a></span> +as soon as he had examined his new patient. +"The bullet has gone right through the +fleshy part of his shoulder. He will come out of it +all right if the wound is kept clean." In a few minutes +he had washed and dressed the wound as he +had the other man's, then, putting out the light once +more, he rejoined his companion at the loophole. +"Anything stirring?" he inquired.</p> + +<p>"No, I don't even hear their voices now. Perhaps +they will not bother us again to-night," Walter +replied, hopefully.</p> + +<p>"I am not worrying about them as much as I +am this wind," said his chum gloomily. "We are +safe enough here so long as the grub and water +holds out, but, God knows how it is faring with +Chris and the captain."</p> + +<p>The gale was now howling and whistling around +the little cabin with a force to justify Charley's +gloomy apprehension. The boys had to speak +loudly to make themselves heard above its uproar. +They soon abandoned all attempts at conversation +and waited wearily and silently for another assault +from the feudalists and for the coming of day.</p> + +<p>Either the ruffians had at last become over-powered +by the liquor they had drank or else they had +decided to wait the coming of day, for they did not +again show themselves in the clearing. Day, however, +came at last, after what seemed to the exhausted +lads an age of waiting.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[235]</a></span></p> + +<p>As soon as it became light enough to see, Charley +removed the bandages from their stricken host and +redressed his wound more carefully. "His pulse is +getting stronger and there is some color in his face," +he remarked to his chum. "I believe, I could bring +him to, but I guess it's best to let him lie unconscious +as long as he can. He will suffer enough +when he does regain consciousness."</p> + +<p>As soon as he finished with Turner, Charley +turned to his other patient who was beginning to +move uneasily and show signs of returning consciousness. +While he was yet bathing his wound +the man opened his eyes.</p> + +<p>"Gosh! how my shoulder hurts," he growled. +"Be mighty careful how you touch it, young fellow, +or I'll skin you alive."</p> + +<p>Charley set aside the basin of water and rising +to his feet looked down on the fellow with a face +full of scorn.</p> + +<p>"You great, big, drunken, cowardly murderer," +he exclaimed. "It's a pity that bullet didn't kill +you. You are not fit to live on God's green earth. +You're shot when trying, with a crowd of your fellows, +to kill a lone, inoffensive man. Your friends +don't think enough of you to come back and get +your carcass. We bring you in and care for you +and instead of thanks, your first words are a growl +and a threat. You are a cowardly, disgraceful +cur,—that's what you are."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[236]</a></span></p> + +<p>Astonished rage filled the man's face. "No man +ever said words like that to Jim Wright and lived," +he gasped. He attempted to rise but was too weak +to gain his feet, and sank back with a groan.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I guess you won't do any killing for a little +while," sneered Charley, whose anger was at white +heat. "I've no doubt people have been afraid to +tell you the truth before, but you are going to hear +it for once in your life. I've no doubt with your +strength and disposition you've bullied everything +until they are afraid to do anything but flatter you, +but, now you are going to take a dose of your own +medicine." Then, seating himself just out of reach +of the man's powerful arms, he proceeded to tell +him what he thought of him in words that stung +with contempt and scorn. Then, as his anger subsided, +he repeated the story Turner had told him, +contrasting Turner's quiet, patient, peaceful heroism +with the other's blood-thirstiness and violence, +with all the power of the earnestness he felt.</p> + +<p>At first the man kept interrupting him with curses +and abuse, but as he went calmly on ignoring the interruptions +the fellow lay quiet, his face turned to +the wall.</p> + +<p>Once Charley stopped, thinking he might have +fainted he lay so still, but he spoke up gruffly.</p> + +<p>"Did I kill him?"</p> + +<p>"No, but it's not your fault that you didn't," the +lad replied, curtly, and went on with his arraignment.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[237]</a></span> +"I don't care a hang what you and your +cowardly fellows think," he concluded, "all decent +people would say that that poor fellow lying there +is a brave hero while you are the mean-spirited, +cowardly one. And, now, if you'll lie quiet and +keep your mouth shut, I'll dress that wound. I hate +to pollute my hands by touching you, but it's got to +be done."</p> + +<p>The man lay quiet while the lad washed and +bound up his wound. Charley could see that his +features were working convulsively, but whether +from rage or pain he could not determine.</p> + +<p>As soon as his task was completed, Charley relieved +his chum at the loophole and Walter set about +making coffee and cooking some breakfast. They +were both sadly in need of food and felt much +better after they had eaten. As soon as they had +finished, Charley made his chum lie down to take a +nap, promising to call him, and lie down himself in +a couple of hours.</p> + +<p>While Walter was asleep Turner came out of the +deep swoon which had followed his wound. He was +weak and in terrible pain but in full possession of +his senses. It was evident that he was greatly bewildered +at the sight of his enemy lying helpless on +the floor, and Charley explained the situation to him +in a few words.</p> + +<p>"I sho' am glad I didn't kill him," said the sick +man, thankfully. "I jes' shot at his laigs, the gun<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[238]</a></span> +must have gone off when I fell. I am sho' sorry I +hurt you so bad, Jim, I didn't aim for to do hit."</p> + +<p>But Wright kept his face turned to the wall and +answered not a word.</p> + +<p>As the morning advanced Charley was much puzzled +by the constant sound of hammering coming +from the woods near the clearing. It was evident +their enemies were preparing another surprise but +he could not guess at its nature.</p> + +<p>All the morning long the hammering continued, +then shortly before noon there emerged from the +woods an object which caused him at first, to stare +in bewildered surprise, and, then, as it drew nearer +the cabin to send him to shaking Walter, whom he +had let sleep on.</p> + +<p>"Wake up! Wake up!" he cried. "We have +got to fight for our lives. Those fellows have built +a heavy breastwork on the front of a wagon and +are shoving it ahead of them up to the cabin."</p> + +<p>"Young fellows! help me up and help me to that +loophole," gruffly commanded the wounded man on +the floor. "Don't hesitate," he cried as the lad was +about to refuse the surprising command, "them fellows +have got a couple of sticks of dynamite in that +cart an' if they get near enough to throw it thar +won't be enough left of this cabin to make a good +toothpick. We was aiming to use it last night if +we couldn't get Turner no other way."</p> + +<p>Between them the two startled lads got the big<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[239]</a></span> +fellow on his feet and supported him to the loophole +where he leaned against the logs, his face +twitching with the pain of his effort.</p> + +<p>It was just in time, for the wagon with its burden +of death was scarce a hundred feet away when he +shouted: "Stop where yer are, boys. Thar ain't +no call to throw any of that stuff."</p> + +<p>"Is that you, Cap?" called one of the men. +"Why, we 'lowed yer was dead."</p> + +<p>"An' I might have been for all of yu fellows, +leaving me to die on the ground like a poisoned +dog."</p> + +<p>He paused while a chorus of excuses came from +the men behind the breastwork.</p> + +<p>"Well, I ain't dead, but it ain't no thanks to yu +fellows," he went on slowly and painfully. "Now, +yu fellows jes' roll that wagon back whar hit came +from an' go home and behave yerselves. Yu fellows +know me an' know I'll do what I say. Hit's +jes' come to me, an' hit's come in a powerful rough +way, that I've been powerful mean, pisen an' onery. +My eyes am sho' opened at last, an' I'm powerful +ashamed of how I've been carryin' on. But hit's all +over now. From now on Bill Turner is my friend, +an' the man that lifts a finger again' him lifts it +again' me, an' me an' my close kin will make this +place too hot to hold him. That's all I've got to say. +Now, go home."</p> + +<p>Murmurs of astonishment arose from the men<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[240]</a></span> +behind the wagon as they slowly but obediently +backed the wagon towards the woods. Over the +face of the wounded man on the bed stole a look of +joy unspeakable.</p> + +<p>The bewildered but delighted boys helped Wright +back to his place on the floor.</p> + +<p>"I want to shake hands with you, Mr. Wright," +said Charley, earnestly. "I am afraid I talked +pretty rough to you."</p> + +<p>"I needed hit," said the other as he took the proffered +hand. "Hit's a pity, young fellow, that thar +ain't more like yu down in this neck of thar woods."</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXXII.<br /> + +<small>THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Leaving</span> the boys safe from the danger that had +threatened them, let us return to the castaways +whom we left confronted by that menace, the most +grewsome of all to shipwrecked sailors, the lack of +water.</p> + +<p>The sponger captain needed no explanation but +the captain's simple words to realize the terrible +tortures and awful death that awaited them all if +help in some shape did not soon come to their rescue.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">[241]</a></span> +His bronzed face grew white beneath it's coat of +tan.</p> + +<p>"I am frightfully thirsty, already," he exclaimed, +"Is there no way we can reach the mainland. +Thar's water in plenty thar."</p> + +<p>"If we were birds or fish, we might get thar, I +reckon," replied Captain Westfield, "but, being as +we are only human beings, I calculate it ain't no way +possible."</p> + +<p>The Conch eyed the raging water that stretched +between the little island and the shore.</p> + +<p>"A strong swimmer might make it," he observed, +musingly. "I've swum farther many a time but it +was when I was in a sight better shape than I am +now."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I reckon a right powerful swimmer might +make it," assented the captain, "but this little fellow +and I are not equal to it, we'd never reach the +land."</p> + +<p>"I believe I could do it even now," said the +sponger calculatingly, "but I won't desert yo' two +Yo' saved my life an' I'd be worse than a Greek to +leave yo' here."</p> + +<p>"If you can do it, go ahead, man," said the old +sailor. "You can't do us any good by staying. +Better save your own life," but the Conch shook his +head sadly.</p> + +<p>"My life ain't worth much, now," he said sadly.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[242]</a></span> +"My little ship's gone, all my brave comrades +drowned, an' everything I had in the world lost. +I've not much to live for now."</p> + +<p>"Bosh, man," said the old sailor, "I reckon, +thar's always something for a man to live for as +long as the Good Lord let him live. If thar wasn't +the Lord wouldn't let him live."</p> + +<p>But the Conch was not to be comforted, the full +extent of his loss was beginning to make itself felt +as he regained his strength and the full possession +of his senses after his terrible ordeal. He soon +moved a little apart from the two castaways, and, +seating himself on the sand buried his face in his +hands. The two watchers could see the tears trickling +between his fingers and they turned away +greatly moved at that most impressive of sights, +the grief of a strong man, ashamed of displaying +his tears. When they looked again he was on his +knees and his bowed head showed that he was praying. +When he rejoined them, his manner was filled +with the calm and quietness of one who has found +peace for his afflictions.</p> + +<p>"I see there is no wood here with which to build +a raft," he observed. "Things look pretty bad, +but they say the darkest hour is just before the +dawn. We must take courage. Yo'r young friends +may return with help at any hour."</p> + +<p>The captain shook his head sadly. "Something +has happened to them or they would have been back<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[243]</a></span> +long ago. They cannot return now until the storm +is over."</p> + +<p>"It cannot last much longer," declared the Conch, +confidently. "It is losing force now, I believe it +will blow out by morning."</p> + +<p>"Maybe, but it will take a long time for the sea to +go down so a boat can live in it, and, in the meantime +we have no water."</p> + +<p>"We must not give way to despair," said the +Conch, who seemed like another man after his +devotions. "Let's dig another well right in the +midst of the island, perhaps we can get water fit to +drink."</p> + +<p>With but little hope the three fell to work and by +noon had dug a hole to water, but they had only +their labor for their pains, the water was salt, bitter, +and undrinkable. Indeed their labor was worse +than fruitless for their exertions had greatly increased +their thirst.</p> + +<p>Chris kindled a fire and roasted some of the turtle +meat and eggs, but the castaways only partook of a +few mouthfuls, as eating seemed but to increase +their thirst.</p> + +<p>The Conch had lost his hat when wrecked and +Chris, observing his bare head, set about braiding +him another hat from the green palmetto leaves.</p> + +<p>The Sponger watched him with interest. "Do +yo' think yo' could make a water-tight mat of that +stuff?" he enquired, eagerly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[244]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon, dis nigger could," declared +the little darkey. "I'se done made baskets ob hit dat +would hold water like a bucket."</p> + +<p>"How long would it take yo' to make a mat four +feet square?"</p> + +<p>The little negro considered, "I guess I could do +hit in a day."</p> + +<p>"Then drop that hat business and get to work on +hit. Work like yo' never did before. There's a +chance, jes' a chance, that it will be the saving of +us. Captain, there is work for us to do. Get the +entrails out of one of those turtle shells. Clean +them out good, pack them full of sand, and stretch +them out in the sun to dry. I've got a plan in mind. +It may fail, but it's worth trying. Be careful not +to break the skins."</p> + +<p>It was evident from the man's manner that he +was intensely in earnest and the old sailor lost no +time in asking idle questions but went quickly to +work at the task assigned him. In a short time he +had cleaned and washed out the turtle entrails and +filling them with dry sand stretched them out to dry +in the hot sun. When thus prepared they formed a +kind of small hose some thirty feet in length.</p> + +<p>While he was thus engaged, the Conch dragged +the empty shell down to the water and cleaned and +washed it out thoroughly. Leaving it near the +water's edge, he collected and piled close beside it, a +heap of dry wood. Then he returned to where<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[245]</a></span> +Chris was working and fell to helping him by stripping +and preparing the palmetto buds for the little +darkey's nimble fingers.</p> + +<p>Just before sundown he carefully removed the +sand from the dried entrails and was in possession +of a long, tough waterproof hose without hole or +break in it.</p> + +<p>Night brought no cessation of the strange labor. +A fire was kindled beside the little darkey and he +plaited on by its light while the captain and the +Conch kept him supplied with palmetto strips.</p> + +<p>About midnight Chris held up his work with a +weary sigh; "Hit's done," he announced.</p> + +<p>"Now for the test," cried the Conch, trembling +with excitement.</p> + +<p>Taking the strong, flexible, green mat he hurried +down to the turtle shell which he had filled half full +of sea water. Placing the mat over the top of the +shell, he bound it firmly in place with wisps of +palmetto leaves. Then, cutting a small hole in the +center of the mat, he inserted in it one end of the +strange hose, packing wet sand around it to make it +air-tight. He next coiled down the hose in the edge +of the sea and placed the other end of it in the +empty turtle shell. Then, heaping wood around +the mat-covered shell, he started a fire.</p> + +<p>The Captain and Chris at last understood his +plan. With his rude contrivance, he was going to +try to distill fresh water from salt after the manner<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[246]</a></span> +they do on big steamships with costly and complicated +apparatus. The steam from the heated water +was supposed to escape from the shell through the +hose. In passing through it it would become chilled +when the hose was coiled down in the cold sea +water and, condensing into water again, reach the +other shell fresh and free from salt.</p> + +<p>In theory the plan was perfect, but would the +rude contrivance do the work?</p> + +<p>The three thirsty watchers fairly held their breath +as they kept the fire roaring around the shell and +awaited results. At last tiny wisps of steam began +to trickle through the closely-woven mat. Tiny +drops of moisture were dropping from the end of +the hose. These grew larger and larger until at last +a tiny stream of water trickled forth.</p> + +<p>They danced and shouted for joy. "It works! +It works!" they cried.</p> + +<p>But thirsty though they were they had to possess +their souls in patience and wait for the process +worked very slowly. All night they staid by the +shells keeping the fire going. Just at day-break the +Conch gave the command to put out the fire. In +the other shell was several gallons of clear, pure +water. As soon as it had cooled sufficiently they +dipped it up with shells and drank greedily. It was +slightly bitter and tasteless but never did drink taste +better to parched throats. With the satisfying of +their thirst, came hunger and they all made a hearty<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[247]</a></span> +meal off the roasted meat and eggs left from dinner. +Just as the sun arose they lay down to sleep completely +exhausted but with thankfulness to God in +their hearts. Their greatest danger was past. They +had water and food in abundance, and the storm +was slowly but surely subsiding.</p> + +<p>They slept through the long day, awakening only +when the shades of night began to fall. Then after +satisfying their hunger and thirst, they lay down +and slept until morning came.</p> + +<p>They opened their eyes upon a clear, still day. +The storm had gone and the sea was growing calm. +Far to the South there showed on the blue water a +tiny patch of white,—a sail.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXXIII.<br /> + +<small>THE RESCUE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> castaways watched the distant sail with +mingled feelings of joy and suspense. Was it the +boys, or was it merely a strange craft beating up +the coast? Would it pass near the island or would +it go by too far out for them to make their presence +known? These were the questions they debated as +they strained their eyes on the distant patch of +white.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[248]</a></span></p> + +<p>One thing soon became evident to the eager +watchers, the sail was steadily growing larger. Although +the storm had passed and the sea subsided +there was still a brisk breeze blowing and each passing +hour brought the stranger craft visibly nearer. +No thought of breakfast entered the castaways' +minds, all their attention was fixed on the approaching +sail.</p> + +<p>At last it became evident that the vessel was a +small sloop, that it was headed directly for the +island and that it was rolling and pitching frightfully +in the still heavy seas.</p> + +<p>On it came, plunging and tossing like a frightened +steed and sending showers of spray from its +cut water. At last it was close enough to discover +two figures on its decks, one at the wheel, the other +forward, tending the jib sheet.</p> + +<p>"Hit's Massa Charley and Massa Walter," +shouted the sharp-eyed Chris. "Praise de Lawd, +Praise de Lawd," and his over-joyed companions +shouted a fervent "Amen."</p> + +<p>The sloop came steadily on, passing the island +and rounding up under its lee as near as its young +captain dared to approach. Anchor was dropped, +sails lowered, and launching a small boat it carried +on deck, its crew of two came sculling for the shore.</p> + +<p>And what a demonstration of joy there was +when it grounded on the sands and the chums so<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[249]</a></span> +long separated and so long beset with perils were +once more reunited. Such hand-wringings and congratulations, +and eager questions and chorused answers. +All happy. All excited. All talking at +once, and no one making himself thoroughly understood +in the general clamor.</p> + +<p>But Charley soon interrupted the talk-feast. +"We will be here all day at this rate," he said, +laughing. "We had better get on board and get +under way. That sloop is pretty old and cranky for +these waters and we'd better get back as soon as +we can for fear another squall will come up. We +can tell our stories on the way."</p> + +<p>The suggestion was wise and as none cared to +linger long on the dreary little island which had +been the scene of so much anxiety and suffering, +there was no delay in carrying it out. All climbed +into the little boat and were carried out to the sloop. +Her sails were hoisted, her anchor weighed, and +her bowsprit headed South for Tarpon. Down in +the sloop's cabin the castaways found a hot meal of +ham, eggs, potatoes and coffee waiting for them, +which Walter had prepared as a pleasant surprise. +In their excitement they had forgotten they were +hungry, but they remembered it now and fell upon +the tasty food with appetites that only left bare +dishes when satisfied, at last. The boys had brought +a pile of clothing with them, and after a wash-down +in cool sea water, the castaways threw away their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">[250]</a></span> +soiled, tattered garments, and, fed, washed, and +freshly clothed, felt like new men.</p> + +<p>The Captain's eyes danced with joy when Walter +presented him with a pipe and tobacco he had +brought with him.</p> + +<p>Later all gathered around the wheel and stories +and experiences were exchanged, but the reader is +already familiar with the most of them.</p> + +<p>"Even after the trouble was all over we couldn't +get away at once," Charley said, concluding his tale. +"I can tell you we were worried to have to lay +around and wait for the storm to pass, knowing that +you and Chris must be in danger on the island. The +people were awfully good to us after the feud was +ended. They could not do enough for us. They +even wanted to give us money, but of course we +couldn't take that. As soon as the wind went down +we borrowed this boat of Mr. Turner and started +out. We are to leave her at Tarpon and he will get +her from there."</p> + +<p>"Well, all's well that ends well, I reckon," said +the captain, puffing in supreme content. "We are +safe an' well now an' while we ain't got much +money, we will have the 'Beauty' as soon as she +comes into port, an' she's jes' the same as two thousand +dollars in the bank."</p> + +<p>"And we will have another try for that gold +when we get her," Charley declared. "I figure +that those fellows had to cast loose during the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">[251]</a></span> +storm and scud before it. They could not ride it +out at anchor. Now that the buoy's gone, it will +take them a long time to locate the gold again. We, +knowing the latitude and longitude can get back +to the spot before they can find it and get all the +gold removed, if we can get a revenue cutter at +Tarpon, as I think we can."</p> + +<p>The Captain's face was filled with dismay. "I've +clean forgot the figures, boys," he exclaimed. "I +put it down in the log all ship-shape, the latitude and +longitude, but I've clean forgot what it was. I +ain't got no memory for figures."</p> + +<p>It was a heavy blow for the golden-hopes of the +two boys and a silence of disappointment followed +the old sailor's announcement.</p> + +<p>"It's no use crying over spilt milk," said Charley, +at last, cheerfully. "We have still got the schooner, +and, with the money we get from her, we can make +a good start at something else."</p> + +<p>"You have still good cause for rejoicing," observed +the sponger captain. "You will still have +your vessel, but I have lost my all."</p> + +<p>The two chums were not the boys to give way to +repining and they were soon again as bright and +cheerful spirits as if their brightest hopes had been +realized.</p> + +<p>It was midnight when the little sloop at last crept +into the harbor of Tarpon. It was useless to go +ashore at such an hour so the little party made<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">[252]</a></span> +everything snug aboard and turned in on deck for +a few hours' sleep.</p> + +<p>They were up early next morning, and, after a +hasty breakfast, hurried ashore to notify the Commissioner +of their arrival and get him to take steps +for the seizure of the "Beauty" as soon as she +reached port.</p> + +<p>Mr. Driver was standing out in front of his +store as they came up the street. Amazement and +incredulity filled his face when he sighted them.</p> + +<p>"You!" he cried, "Why, I thought you were all +at the bottom of the Gulf."</p> + +<p>"No, we are slightly disfigured but still in the +ring," laughed Charley as he shook hands. "Our +schooner has not come in yet, has she?"</p> + +<p>Mr. Driver stared at him for a second. "There's +a mystery here," he declared. "Come on into the +store, and let's hear your story."</p> + +<p>Seated in the store's little back room, Charley +recounted their adventures while Mr. Driver listened +attentively. When he had concluded, Mr. Driver +remained silent for a moment.</p> + +<p>"I hate to be the teller of bad news," he said, at +last, "but you must learn it, and it had better come +from a friend. Your schooner is lost with all hands +on board."</p> + +<p>"Lost!" cried all together.</p> + +<p>"Yes, she went down at anchor during the storm. +The Greek sponger 'Zenephone' was passing when<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253">[253]</a></span> +she went under. Not a man was saved. Every one +on the 'Zenephone' wondered why she did not scud +before it instead of hanging to her anchor. I understand +now. They did not want to leave the +neighborhood of the gold."</p> + +<p>It was a heavy blow. At one sweep they were +robbed of their all. The little band of chums sat +paralyzed with grief, looking helplessly at each +other. Mr. Driver arose quietly and closed the door +softly behind him, leaving them alone with their +grief.</p> + +<p>For a few moments no one spoke. "It's hard, +but it must be met," sighed Walter at last. "What +are we going to do? We have nothing left now, +not even the clothes we wear."</p> + +<p>"God knows," answered Charley, hopelessly, at a +loss for once. "I suppose we will have to hunt +work at something or other."</p> + +<p>"And likely be scattered and separated for the +first time in years," exclaimed the captain.</p> + +<p>"That's the worst of it," agreed Walter, sadly. +"I don't mind working but I hate for us all to +have to drift apart."</p> + +<p>"Me too," wailed Chris. "Golly! I don't want +to be with no one but you-alls."</p> + +<p>"I don't believe the 'Beauty' is lost," Charley +declared. "I believe this is just another of Manuel's +tricks. He is as sharp a rascal as ever lived. I'll bet +she is safe and sound somewhere and that Manuel<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_254" id="Page_254">[254]</a></span> +just bought the Greeks on the 'Zenephone' to tell +that story."</p> + +<p>"Maybe," admitted the captain, doubtfully. +"The story rings true, though. It would have been +likely for them to hang to their anchor by the gold."</p> + +<p>"And it would be just the kind of details Manuel +would think of, knowing we would be more likely +to believe the story if we escaped alive. He is an +artist at rascality."</p> + +<p>"Even if you're right, I reckon it won't help us +much," said the old sailor. "The story's tied our +hands all right. The Commissioner won't do anything +just on our suspicions, an' we ain't got any +money to do anything ourselves."</p> + +<p>"I feel that Charley is right," Walter declared, +"but we've got only one chance to prove it. Get to +work, get some money and hire a Greek detective to +look into the matter for us. The first question is, +what can we do to earn money?"</p> + +<p>They were engaged in a fruitless discussion on +this point when Mr. Driver entered. He heard +their discussion with sympathetic interest.</p> + +<p>"There is no work around here," he declared. +"The Greeks work cheaper than an American can. +It's hard for an American to earn a bare living here. +I understand from what you say that you do not +want to be separated. I might find work for one of +you, but I couldn't for all. There is only one suggestion +I can make in such a case."</p> + +<p>"Please give it to us," Walter requested.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255">[255]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXIV.<br /> + +<small>CONCLUSION.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Well</span>," said Mr. Driver, "there is a large fish-house +at Clearwater, twenty miles below here. You +probably could get a job fishing for it. You could +all work together then. It is hard, dirty work but +there is pretty good money in it if a man works +hard."</p> + +<p>The chums exchanged glances.</p> + +<p>"I believe we will try it," Charley said. "Of +course we will have to talk it over before we decide, +but there does not seem to be anything else we can +do."</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Mr. Driver, "I'll give you a +letter to the fish boss, I know him personally. And +you'll need a little money to pay your fares there. +You can return it when you get to earning."</p> + +<p>The chums thanked the kind-hearted storekeeper +for his advice and assistance and adjourned to the +sidewalk where they discussed the matter earnestly. +It did not take them long to decide to follow Mr. +Driver's suggestion. They bid good-bye to the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_256" id="Page_256">[256]</a></span> +sponger captain, who decided to remain in Tarpon +and try to get service on one of Mr. Williams' +schooners, and, accepting the loan of ten dollars, +which Mr. Driver pressed upon them, they boarded +the first train going South and soon landed in the +little town of Clearwater. And there, we must leave +them for the present.</p> + + +<div class='center'><br />THE END.</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class='tnote'><div class='center'><b>Transcriber's Notes:</b></div> + +<p>Obvious punctuation errors repaired. The original text had no table of +contents. One was created to aid the reader. Chapter I is untitled.</p> + +<p>Page 3, "tatooed" changed to "tattooed" (tattooed arms and rolling)</p> + +<p>Page 10, two lines were transposed. The original read:</p> + +<div class='poem2'> +shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoul-<br /> +up with the money by to-morrow night I'll close up<br /> +ders. "You know what I say. If you don't come<br /> +this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining<br /> +</div> + +<p>Page 14, "hundreth" changed "hundredth" (a hundredth part of)</p> + +<p>Page 43, "alloted" changed to "allotted" (allotted to their boat)</p> + +<p>Page 62, "along" changed to "alone" (worse than being alone)</p> + +<p>Page 74, repeated word "see" removed from text Original read: (I don't see see +what his object)</p> + +<p>Page 78, "Manual" changed to "Manuel" (Manuel approached Captain)</p> + +<p>Page 85, "blow" changed to "below" (been below for only)</p> + +<p>Page 89, "exclaimation" changed to "exclamation" (an exclamation of surprise)</p> + +<p>Page 93, "captian" changed to "captain" (the captain declared)</p> + +<p>Page 100, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (gaping hole in her)</p> + +<p>Page 101, "was" changed to "were" (There were no)</p> + +<p>Page 102, "that" changed to "than" (time than it has)</p> + +<p>Page 105, "aim" changed to "air" (working +the air pump)</p> + +<p>Page 109, "baton" changed to "beaten" (Greeks had been +badly beaten)</p> + +<p>Page 128, "averge" changed to "average" (better than average marksmen)</p> + +<p>Page 164, "squaking" changed "squawking" (marsh hens, the squawking)</p> + +<p>Page 190, "minues" changed to "minutes" (in a few minutes he)</p> + +<p>Page 203, "taveling" changed to "traveling" (further traveling dangerous)</p> + +<p>Page 231, repeated word "is" removed from text. Original read: (awhile +even it is is risky)</p> + +<p>Page 231, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (up the gaping hole)</p> +</div> + +<div>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 44394 ***</div> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/44394-h/images/cover.jpg b/44394-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d041b81 --- /dev/null +++ b/44394-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/44394-h/images/i002.jpg b/44394-h/images/i002.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..196e138 --- /dev/null +++ b/44394-h/images/i002.jpg diff --git a/44394-h/images/i003.jpg b/44394-h/images/i003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e5645c --- /dev/null +++ b/44394-h/images/i003.jpg diff --git a/44394-h/images/spine.jpg b/44394-h/images/spine.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f801a1e --- /dev/null +++ b/44394-h/images/spine.jpg diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ae0b62 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #44394 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/44394) diff --git a/old/44394-8.txt b/old/44394-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7c5da3f --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6963 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by Wilmer M. Ely + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico + or, On a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek Spongers + +Author: Wilmer M. Ely + +Release Date: December 9, 2013 [EBook #44394] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY CHUMS IN GULF OF MEXICO *** + + + + +Produced by The Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + + +[Illustration: "Charley leveled his gun and sent sixteen shrieking +bullets just above the wheelman's head."] + + + + +The Boy Chums In the Gulf of Mexico + + OR + + On a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek + Spongers + + BY WILMER M. ELY + + Author of "The Boy Chums on Indian River," "The Boy + Chums on Haunted Island," "The Boy Chums in + the Forest," "The Boy Chums' Perilous Cruise." + +[Illustration] + + A. L. BURT COMPANY + NEW YORK + + + + + Copyright 1913 + + BY A. L. BURT COMPANY + + THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO + + + + +CONTENTS + + + I. 3 + II. MR. DRIVER. 11 + III. PREPARATIONS 19 + IV. THE START 27 + V. THE START 36 + VI. FIRST TROUBLE 45 + VII. SPONGING 53 + VIII. TROUBLE 61 + IX. MANUEL'S RELEASE 68 + X. A RASH RESOLVE 76 + XI. A MYSTERY 84 + XII. IN A DIVING SUIT 94 + XIII. A CLOSE CALL 100 + XIV. THE DISCUSSION 107 + XV. A DESPERATE PLAN 115 + XVI. TOO LATE 122 + XVII. OUTWITTED 129 + XVIII. IMPRISONED 136 + XIX. WRECKED 144 + XX. HUNTING HELP 152 + XXI. THE CASTAWAYS 159 + XXII. ANOTHER DANGER 167 + XXIII. THE RELAPSE 175 + XXIV. THE FLOOD 182 + XXV. THE FLOATING HATCH 189 + XXVI. WITH THE BOYS 197 + XXVII. THE JOURNEY 205 + XXVIII. JUDSON 212 + XXIX. THE FEUD 219 + XXX. BESIEGED 225 + XXXI. THE ENEMIES 233 + XXXII. THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN 240 + XXXIII. THE RESCUE 247 + XXXIV. CONCLUSION 255 + + + + +THE BOY CHUMS + +IN THE GULF OF MEXICO + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +"IT'S just like stepping suddenly into a strange country. I am glad we +came even if we decide not to go into the business." + +The speaker, a sturdy, manly-looking boy of eighteen, was one of a +party of four persons who were strolling along a street in the Greek +section of Tarpon Springs, a small Florida town, located on the +Anclote River, a few miles from the Gulf of Mexico. His companions +were a boy about his own age but of less robust appearance, a little +negro lad with a good-humored intelligent face, and a middle-aged, +heavily-bearded, blue-eyed man whose tattooed arms and rolling gait +told of a life spent on tossing seas and whose confident bearing and +air of authority stamped him as one above the rank of a common sailor. + +Those who have followed The Boy Chums through their many adventures +will recognize in the little party their old friends Charley West, +Walter Hazard, Captain Westfield and the Bahama lad, Chris, who lately +returned from a perilous trip along the Atlantic beach searching for +wreckage, and now seeking some promising venture in which to invest the +Fifteen Hundred Dollars they earned on that voyage. + +"You're right, Charley," agreed the other boy. "I didn't know before +that there was a sight like this in Florida. Here's a bench. Let's set +down and rest a bit. I am tired from walking." + +"Golly, I reckon dis nigger's tired some too," chimed in the little +darkey, "I'se dun had de toothache in mah legs for most an hour, but +I'se had to keep up wid you-alls. Don't dare let you white chillen +prognostracate 'round a queer place like dis alone." + +The seat selected was a long bench standing on the edge of the +sidewalk, its back to the sandy street. The four seated themselves at +one end and gazed around with eager interest at the strange scene, +unconscious of the curious glances bestowed upon them by a large, +deeply-tanned man, who, seated on the other end of the bench, was +languidly whittling on a piece of white pine with a large sheaf knife. + +The scene was one to arouse more than passing interest. Up and down +the sidewalk hurried swarthy-faced, powerfully-built men of all ages +and appearances, but all possessed of the same clear-cut features and +straight noses. Singly and in groups of two and three, they hurried +past, picturesque in their bright-colored clothing with gaudy sashes +knotted about their waists. About all clustered an air of energy and +bustle uncommon to sleepy Florida towns. + +Built up close to the inner edge of the sidewalk was a row of large +buildings startling in their coats of bright yellow, red, blue, and +green paint. Stretching away, close together in the distance, they +gave one the impression of a gigantic rainbow. Through their wide-open +doors and windows the interested onlookers could gain a plain view of +the interiors, from which came the confused jangle of foreign tongues. +To the right of where the little party sat was a busy grocery store, +its windows filled with strings of dried garlic, strange-looking +cheeses, queer nuts and fruits and a multitude of eatables strange to +American eyes. To the left of them was a tobacco factory, the whirling +machines shredding up the huge brown leaves into hair-like fibers and +binding them up into pound packages. Directly before them was a great +hall filled with little tables around which were seated groups of the +regular-featured men, playing cards, eating, or puffing at strange +pipes, with a small hose for a stem, the smoke passing through great +glass vessels partly filled with rose water before it reached the +smoker's lips. + +"That's the fifteenth place of that kind I've counted to-day," remarked +Charley West. "From their numbers, one would imagine that these people +did nothing but eat and play cards." + +"I'd like to try one of them pipes," said Captain Westfield, wistfully. +"I'll bet they give a good, cool smoke." + +"Let's go in and get dinner," Walter suggested. "I am hungry as a wolf +and that food smells mighty good. You can try a pipe after we eat, +Captain." + +The man at the end of the bench shifted his position closer to them. + +"Strangers here?" he enquired. + +"Just came in this morning. We're looking into the sponge business a +bit," replied the Captain. + +Charley eyed the tanned man closely. There was a sinister expression to +the fellow's face, and his eyes shifted uneasily away from the lad's +level glance. The keen-witted boy was not favorably impressed with the +stranger's appearance, but the man's cordiality drove away his faint +feeling of distrust. + +"I'll go in with you then," he offered. "Those fellows don't speak much +English and you would have a hard job making them understand what you +wanted. I know a little Greek and may be able to help you out a bit." + +"Much obliged to you," said the Captain, gratefully. "We don't +understand a word of their lingo. I'll stand treat to the dinner if +you'll eat with us." + +"It's a go," agreed the stranger, quickly. "Come on. My name's Robert, +Captain Roberts," he volunteered when the little party were seated +around one of the tables, "I'm a retired ship's master." + +Captain Westfield introduced himself and his companions. "As I said, we +are lookin' into this sponge business a bit, but it's hard to pick out +the proper course from these twisted-tongued furriners," he said. "Do +you happen to know anything about it?" + +"I used to be in the business myself," Captain Roberts replied +promptly. "I made enough money in it to quit the sea for good." + +"Then I reckon you're the very man to give us a few pointers. Is there +as much money in it as one hears tell of?" + +"More," declared the other. "These Greeks are getting rich off +sponging. It is not anything unusual for a schooner's crew to clear up +three or four thousand dollars from a single trip. It takes quite a bit +of money to make a start, though." + +"We have got a little change in our clothes," said the Captain, +modestly. "Do you reckon a person could get started good on a Thousand +dollars?" + +"That would do nicely," declared Captain Roberts, "and I can tell you +just how to lay it out to the best advantage, but let's order dinner +first. We can talk while we are eating." + +He beckoned to a dark-skinned, ill-favored waiter and gave an order in +low-pitched fluent Greek. + +The waiter was back almost instantly with a tray-load of steaming +dishes which he placed upon the table. The boys could not determine +the exact nature of the strange viands, but they were too hungry to be +critical, and attacked the food with hearty appetites. + +"This mutton stew is delicious," Charley declared as he took another +helping. "I don't know as I ever tasted anything better." + +Captain Roberts grinned. "You don't want to make any guesses about +Greek food," he declared. "That isn't mutton, but just tough old +Billy-goat, fattened on a diet of tin cans. These fellows have the +knack of fixing up such things so they can't recognize them themselves. +Just wait till the coffee is served. You'll say you never drank any +better. But let's get back to that sponging business now, Captain." + +He and Captain Westfield were soon plunged in a tangled maze of talk +about schooners, diving boats, sponges, and divers. + +The boys gave but little heed to the discussion for their attention was +partly diverted by the unusual scene around them. + +"It's just like being in another country," Walter whispered to his chum. + +"Yes, but I don't like the attention we seem to receive," Charley +replied. "Those fellows are staring at us as though there was something +wrong in our being here." + +The Greeks gathered around the other tables indeed seemed more than +casually interested in the little party. They stared frequently at them +and their new acquaintance, and exchanged significant glances and low +words with each other. + +"I guess we appear as odd to them as they do to us," Walter said, +carelessly. "There is a man who is not a Greek. That fellow leaning +against the end of the counter in the corner." + +The man indicated was unmistakably an American. He was short, +heavily-built and had a determined, aggressive face. He was engaged in +a heated discussion with the proprietor of the cafe and his heavy face +was flushed with anger. As the boys gazed curiously, he brought down +his clenched fist on the counter with a force that shattered some of +the dishes piled upon it. + +"You needn't smirk, grin, and make excuses," he thundered at the suave, +smiling Greek. "You've got to pay me that bill you owe me. It's been +standing for months and I happen to know that you are making money all +the time, hand over fist. It's no use pretending you don't understand +me," he shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoulders. "You know +what I say. If you don't come up with the money by to-morrow night I'll +close up this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining goods under +false pretences. And it will not be any use for you to try your nice +little Greek trick of a knife in my back in the dark. I go heeled and +I don't go to sleep when I walk this street. The fellow who tries that +trick on me will stop enough lead to start a cartridge factory." + +He turned and was walking towards the door when his glance rested for a +moment on the boys and their companions. His glance swept swiftly over +each member of the little party. He paused, hesitated a moment, then +turning, walked swiftly towards their table. + +Captain Roberts rose hastily at his approach. "There's a friend of mine +over there," he said hurriedly, "who I want to speak to. I'll be back +in a minute." + +The approaching stranger noted his departure with a grim smile. He +stopped beside the Captain and stood gazing down for one brief minute. + +"Are you fools or strangers?" he demanded, crisply. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +MR. DRIVER. + + +THE stranger's smile robbed his words of their hardness. + +"Strangers, yes," Charley replied, "Fools, no." + +"No offense intended," said the man, quickly. "Strangers will sometimes +take advice but fools will not. My advice to you strangers is to keep +out of places like this and not to make friends with other strangers. I +don't suppose you know who that man is who just left you." + +"He's a retired sea captain," said Captain Westfield. "He was giving us +some pointers about the sponge business. Mighty pleasant an' obligin' +fellow. Mighty fair-spoken." + +"Bless your simple little souls," exclaimed the stranger. "He's no +captain, active or retired. He's the runner for this place. Lucky you +haven't any of you drank your coffee yet. You'd be waking up in some +alley bye-and-bye with your heads aching from knock-out drops and your +pockets turned inside out. My, but you were easy." + +"I don't reckon any one would dare do such a thing in broad daylight," +Captain Westfield declared. + +"It's been done in this place a dozen times. And the victim's kicks +never did any good after it happened, for there was always a dozen +Greeks ready to go on the stand and swear that it was only a case of +drunkenness on the victim's part. Better get out of here." + +The humbled little party arose and followed their conductor out to the +sidewalk. As they passed through the crowd they could not help but +notice the wrathful glances the sitters bestowed upon the one who had +cheated them of their victims. + +"I guess we have acted pretty green," Charley admitted, as they passed +outside, "but we were so eager to learn about the sponge business that +we forgot caution. Besides, one does not look for such tricks in a +little town like this. It's not like a big city where one has to be +always on his guard against strangers." + +The stranger favored the members of the little party with a closer +scrutiny than he had yet bestowed upon them. + +"So you are figuring on going into the sponge business, eh?" he asked. + +"We may try it a bit if we find out that it pays as well as we have +heard tell of," answered Captain Westfield, cautiously, "but it's +mighty hard to find out anything definite about it from these Greeks." + +"Oh, there's big money in it all right," said their new friend. "You +might make a go of it. You are a pretty husky, determined-looking lot +and would soon get on to the Greekish tricks. It's a risky business, +though. I don't advise anyone to take it up." + +"We've encountered a few risks in other lines," said Charlie, modestly. +"We are willing to take a few chances if there's money enough in it to +tempt us." + +The stranger pulled out his watch and looked at the time. "My name is +Driver," he remarked. "I own a store over on the next street in the +American section. Business is slack at this time of day and I will show +you around a bit, if you wish. My clerks can look out for the trade for +an hour or two." + +"No need of thanks," he said as the Captain accepted his offer +gratefully. "If you decide to go into the sponge business, you will +need lots of provisions and I hope to sell them to you. We Americans +do not get any of the Greek trade and we are always glad to secure a +new customer. Now I suppose you want to know about the profit side of +the business first. Well, I can not give you exact figures but I know +that all engaged in the business are making big money. All these big +buildings you see have been built out of sponging, and they do not +represent a hundredth part of the money made out of the business. +There is an enormous amount sent back to Greece every month through the +post-office and bank here. I know Greeks who landed here only a few +years ago with nothing but the clothes on their backs--and those were +mighty poor--that are wealthy men now and they made their fortunes out +of sponges. Oh, there's big money in it all right. But you can look +into that part of the business closer later on. Now, I want to show +you something of the sponges themselves. We will go down to the harbor +first." + +The interested little party followed him as he led the way along a soft +sand road flanked by scrub palmettos. + +Their guide paused beside one of the several large buildings standing +close to the road. "This is a clipping shed," he said. + +The building was open on one side and was filled with a crowd of old +men, women and young boys, all Greeks. Before each was a pile of rough +sponges from which they were clipping the spoilt parts with great +shearing shears. In one corner, a man worked over a big screw-press, +pressing the severed fragments of sponges into huge compact bales. + +"That part isn't important enough to waste much time looking at," Mr. +Driver said, as he turned away. "Come on and I'll show you something +worth seeing." + +As they followed along behind their guide, the boys became sensible +of a strong, pleasant, appetizing odor in the air, an odor which grew +stronger as they advanced. A turn in the road brought them suddenly +upon the source of the odor. On the shore of a quiet little land-locked +harbor, blazed dozens of small camp-fires over which sat great iron +kettles. On pieces of canvas laid upon the ground were piles of fresh +beef and mutton. Over each pile worked several Greeks cutting the meat +with the sheaf knives into tiny squares about an inch in size. Other +Greeks were dumping the little square pieces into the kettles, while +still others kept the contents stirred and the fires under the kettles +burning briskly. + +"They are putting down the meat for their next voyage," explained Mr. +Driver. "They roast it in its own fat, put it into stone jars, and pour +the fat over it. As soon as the fat cools and congeals it forms an +air-tight covering which keeps the meat from spoiling." + +"If it tastes half as good as it smells, it must be delicious," Charley +remarked. + +Chris viewed the cooking operation with professional jealousy. "Golly, +I bet dey can't cook like dis nigger," he declared, "I spect dem +kettles ain't none too clean noway." + +Captain Westfield gave but scant attention to the trying-out process. +His interest was centered on the big fleet of schooners anchored near +shore. They were over a hundred in number and were of all sizes and +designs. They made a pretty sight lying gracefully close together in +the little harbor. But the old sailor soon strolled on to where groups +of Greeks were building and repairing boats on the shore. He inspected +their work with a critical eye, but he was soon lost in admiration. + +"Lads," he exclaimed, "I never saw such workmen before. They are +turnin' out tight, neat seaworthy little crafts with no tools but a saw +and a hatchet. Ain't those queer lookin' crafts though." + +The boats were about thirty feet in length, sharp at both bow and +stern, and of enormous depth for their size. True to their love for +bright colors the Greeks had painted each plank a different hue and the +little vessels looked like floating rainbows. + +The captain viewed their single masts, which inclined aft at an angle +of forty-five degrees, with deep-sea scorn. + +"It's clean against Nature for a mast to be set that way," he declared. +"It ain't regular or ship-shape." + +"Those small crafts are used as diving boats," Mr. Driver explained. +"They carry a big square sail, but most of them are equipped with +engines also. They are great sea boats and will ride out a gale almost +as well as the schooners." + +His explanations were interrupted by loud talking close at hand and +the little party, full of curiosity, hastened to the spot from which +the uproar came. + +In the center of a circle of curious onlookers, a large man wearing a +marshal's badge was slipping a pair of handcuffs on the wrists of a +slender boyish-looking young fellow. + +"No need to put those things on me, Mr. Officer," the lad was +protesting, passionately. "I'll go along with you without any trouble. +I've only acted within my rights and all I want is a fair trial." + +"Anything you say can be used against you at your trial," cautioned the +marshal. + +"I don't care, I admit I shot two of those treacherous Greeks. It was +the only thing to do. When it came on to blow a gale, they refused to +cut the cable, and work the schooner. It was a case of making them obey +orders and get her off before the seas or lose my ship. I only wish I +had shot more of them. They have been laying for me ever since to slip +a knife into me and chuck me overboard. I haven't dared take a wink of +sleep for three days and two nights." + +"Poor fellow," said Mr. Driver, as the marshal led away his protesting +captive. "I expect it happened just as he says--an open mutiny, +compelling him to shoot--but every Greek in his crew will go on the +stand and swear that it was a case of cold-blooded murder. Fortunately, +the judge is wise to Greek methods and the law deals gently with +commanders." + +"He looked mighty young to be a captain," said Captain Westfield. + +"It's this way," Mr. Driver explained, "the law compels the Greeks to +have an American captain for each schooner and diving boat, and they +hire the youngest and, therefore, cheapest man that they can get. It's +a dog's life, out alone for months with a gang that doesn't speak +a word of English. As long as the captain is content to be a mere +figurehead he can get along without serious trouble, but the minute +he runs counter to their wishes there is a row. But time is flying, +and I must get back to the store. If you will come back with me I'll +introduce you to a man who knows more about sponging than another +American in the country." + +"Just a moment, lads," said the Captain, as they turned to go. "Which +of those schooners do you like the best?" + +The two chums unhesitatingly indicated a beautiful two-masted, +snow-white schooner that seemed to rest as loftily on the water as a +floating swan. The grace and beauty of exquisite lines marked her out +from the many shapely schooners surrounding her. In large gilt letters +on either side of her bow was her name "Beauty". + +"She's my choice too," declared the Captain. "I wish we owned her. I +ain't never seen a prettier model." + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +PREPARATIONS. + + +AS soon as they got back into town, Mr. Driver hunted up the man of +whom he had spoken, and, introducing him to each of the little party, +hurried back to his store. + +Mr. Williams was a young man still in his twenties. He was a stocky, +well-built young fellow with an intelligent face, determined manner, +and a short, crisp way of speaking. He sized up the little party with +one quick appraising glance as Captain Westfield stated their errand. + +"If you are not willing to stand hardships, dirt, discomfort, and +danger, you want nothing to do with sponging," he declared. + +"We can stand anything that it pays us to stand," Charley replied, +quickly. + +"Well, that's the right kind of spirit," approved the young man, "but, +of course you don't any of you realize what you will have to meet. I've +seen others start in with the same confidence and get cold feet before +the first trip was over. It isn't any nice, ladies' pink-tea business. +It's a game for real men, but if the men are the right kind, they +get their reward for what they endure, all right, all right. I landed +here with an empty pocket and emptier stomach, and now,--well, I am +not a John D. Rockefeller yet, but I've got enough laid by to keep the +wolf from the door for a good many years. Better men than I have done +better than I have. It's like everything else, the best man wins, and +wins something worth winning, but, as I have said, it's no business for +nice, tender, little Willie boys, it's a man's game." + +Charley grinned in sympathy with the reliant, independent spirit of the +young fellow which was close kin to his own traits. "We left off our +short pants last summer," he observed, gravely, "we are fast learning +to dress ourselves, and the Captain there can even comb his own hair." + +"Good," chuckled the other, "I guess _you_ will pass muster anyway, so +I will give you some idea of what you will have to expect. First, there +is the loneliness. For three months at a time you'll be at sea without +another soul to talk to, for there are very few of the Greeks who speak +English. With a party like yours it would not be so bad for you would +be company for each other, but for the American captains who go out +alone with a crew of Greeks, it's awful. I've known some to go crazy +for sheer loneliness, and few ever make a second trip,--I'll never +forget my first experience. Second, sponging is a dirty business, the +stench from dying sponges will upset any but the strongest stomachs. +Third, there are the dangers, storms, accidents, and troubles with the +crew. I have never had any serious trouble with my own men, but then I +understand their lingo and that counts for a good deal, and, besides +they all know me around here and know that I will shoot first and +explain afterwards--that counts for still more." + +"All that is interesting, but it ain't to the pint," said Captain +Westfield. "The question is what can one make off a trip. I reckon them +little things you're telling about is just details." + +"I'm afraid you'll find them pretty serious details," Mr. Williams +said with a laugh, "but you are right, the money point is the main +thing. That's the only thing that has kept me in the business. Well, I +had considerable _bad_ luck last trip but I cleaned up three thousand +dollars. I've been doing better than that." + +The chums looked at each other with expressive faces while Mr. +Williams' keen black eyes twinkled as he watched them. + +"I seed a schooner down at the harbor," observed Captain Westfield, +carelessly. "She was a pretty looking little craft and her name just +seemed to fit her--'The Beauty'. If she's good an' sound an' for sale, +I might be willing to give a thousand dollars for her." + +Mr. Williams laughed, "You are not the first sailor who has fallen +in love with the 'Beauty'. She is the finest ever. She has led the +sponging fleet for three seasons. Many have tried to buy her but +couldn't. You are in luck, however. Her owner died last week and I have +just received a letter from his widow asking me to find a purchaser for +her. You can have her as she lays for thirteen hundred dollars, and she +is dirt cheap at that." + +"Will you hold that offer open until ten o'clock to-night?" asked the +captain, "we will want to talk it all over a bit." + +Mr. Williams agreed to his request, and, after thanking him gratefully +for his information, the little party took their departure. + +"Back to the harbor," said the captain as soon as they were out of +hearing. "I want to take a good look at the 'Beauty'. If she is +anyway near as good as she looks from a distance she's worth at least +twenty-five hundred dollars. Why we could make a tidy sum by buying +her, sailing her around to Jacksonville, and selling her again." + +They soon arrived at the harbor again where for a quarter they hired a +young Greek to row them out to the schooner. + +They found the little vessel all that her name implied. She was about +sixty-five feet long and broad for her length. She looked more like a +gentleman's yacht than a sponging vessel and they were all delighted +with her appearance. But pleased as they were with her on deck, they +were even more pleased with her below. There, they found a large +main cabin with swinging lamps, hanging sideboard, easy chairs, and +comfortable furnishings. Opening into the main cabin were found roomy +staterooms, two on a side, furnished with large bunks containing +springy mattresses. Instead of the small portholes, common with crafts +of her size, each stateroom was provided with windows of heavy glass to +admit air and light. + +Up forward at the foremast was the forecastle, or crew's quarters. It +was large, comfortable and well equipped with bunks. Aft of it was +the cook's galley, containing a good stove and plenty of pots, pans +and kettles. Everything was exquisitely neat and clean. But Captain +Westfield was not content with a mere survey of cabin and furnishings. +He unfurled several of the sails and examined the canvas closely. He +tested the strength of rope after rope. He climbed aloft and looked +over blocks, stays, and running gear. Lastly, he descended into the +hold and examined all that was visible of the vessel's ribs and +planking. + +"She's as tidy a little craft as I ever saw," he declared, when he at +last rejoined the boys back by the wheel. "She ain't over six years old +an' her sails an' rigging are all new. She's worth twenty-five hundred +dollars of any man's money if she's worth a cent. All we have got to +do it to buy her and carry her around to some lively port an' we can +make twelve hundred dollars as easy as finding it." + +"What's the use of selling her right off if we buy her," Walter +suggested, "Surely a few months' use will not lessen her value to any +great extent. Why not make a couple of trips sponging in her. I am +anxious to have a try for some of that big money they all talk about. +We will never have a better chance than now. At the worst, we would +only lose the price of a few months' provisions, we would still have +our vessel worth far more than we paid for her." + +"You've hit the nail right on the head," the captain exclaimed, +delightedly. "That's just what I've been studying over, but I reckoned +I'd wait an' see if either of you boys proposed it." + +Charley hesitated before agreeing to his chum's proposal. "I confess, +I am not so anxious to try the sponge business as I was," he remarked. +"First, we know nothing about it ourselves, and would have to depend +entirely upon hired help--which is a bad thing to have to do in +any business. Second, I don't like the Greeks, I don't like their +appearances, I don't like the reputation they have, and I don't like +the idea of being with a gang that doesn't understand English." + +"Bosh," Walter replied, lightly, "we will get along all right with +them. It isn't like one lone man being out with them, there are four +of us and they wouldn't dare start trouble with so many. As for making +them understand, why we can hire a man as interpreter. I believe it's +the best chance to make money we've had yet." + +"And I too," Captain Westfield agreed. "I reckon we'd be foolish to +let such a chance slip by. That young fellow Williams says he's made +considerable." + +"But he made several trips and learned the business before he went into +it on his own hook," Charley objected. "However, I am not going to hold +back if the rest of you want to try it." + +"Good," exclaimed the captain, "we will go right back and settle the +deal with Williams. We'll make money off the schooner if we don't off +the sponging." + +They found Mr. Williams still in his office. The thirteen hundred +dollars was paid over and they received a bill of sale for the +'Beauty', one diving boat and everything the schooner contained. + +"You've got a good boat at a mighty low price," he said. "There is no +reason why you shouldn't make well with her, if you just use common +sense. Doubtless, you have heard lots of hard things about the Greeks, +but I don't believe they are half as bad as they are painted. Half of +the trouble captains have with them comes from their not understanding +each other. Get a reliable man to translate your orders, and you will +get along all right although you will find it a hard life. I wish I +could help you select your crew but I have to go to Tampa to-morrow, +and will not be back until the fleet sails. We will see each other +again on the sponging grounds, if not before. I wish you the best of +luck until we meet." + +The now tired little party bade the hustling young man good-bye and +repaired to the small hotel where they engaged rooms and meals. + +After supper Charley unpacked his valise and got out the silver-mounted +revolver presented to him by Mr. Weston. He noted its calibre and +sauntering down to the hardware store purchased several boxes of +cartridges of a size to fit. He gave a couple of boxes to Walter who +possessed the exact duplicate of his weapon. + +"That's my first preparation for our trip," he said laughing. + +But, although he spoke lightly, he was troubled by vague misgivings +that their new venture was not going to be the smooth sailing his +companions believed. For one thing, he doubted if rough, blunt, +quick-tempered Captain Westfield was just the man to successfully +handle the suave, oily, treacherous Greeks. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE START. + + +"WE have got to get a move on us," Captain Westfield said as the +four chums gathered together at the breakfast table. "I've been out +enquirin' around this mornin' an' I've larned that the sponging fleet +sails in two days. Of course we don't have to go with the fleet, but, +bein' as it's our first trip an' we're green at the business, I reckon, +we had better keep with the crowd an' learn all we can. I've been up +to see the United States Commissioner an' got charts of the sponging +grounds an' took out papers for the ship. We're all officers on the +papers, lads. He put me down as captain of the schooner, Chris is mate. +You, Charley, are captain of the diving boats, an' Walter's chief +engineer." + +"I don't want to be no mate," Chris protested. "I wants to be de cook. +Dat's schooner's got a powerful fine galley an' a sight ob pots an' +kettles. Golly! I reckon dis nigger can fix up de grub better dan any +of dem ignorant furriners. A mate ain't no manner ob count on board a +little ship. De captain's always blamin' him for somethin' or udder +an' de crew always hates him. He's always in trubble wid one or the +udder. Now de cook's always his own boss, he don't hab to stay out +nights in de cold an' de rain an' ebbery one is powerful perlite to +him, 'cause dey wants to keep on de bes' side ob de one dat handles de +grub. I'd rather be a cook dan an ole mate any day." + +"But you don't know how to rig up their queer furrin dishes, lad," the +captain explained. "They ain't used to eatin' grub fixed up good like +you fix it." + +"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little negro, pompously. "I +spect dey doan know much 'bout cookin'. Reckon dey wouldn't eat any +more ob der own if dey got a taste ob mine." + +"That's the trouble," the captain agreed craftily, "an' we don't want +to spoil them. Besides, I reckoned you'd like to be mate. Why, I was at +sea ten years before I got a mate's berth. I reckon your folks on Cat +Island would be mighty proud to hear that you were one an' was wearing +a blue suit with big brass buttons, an' a cap with Mate on it in big +gilt letters." + +"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the little negro, +delightedly, rising hastily from the table. "I'se goin' to buy dem +clothes right now an' hab my picture took in 'em an' send 'bout twenty +ob dem to de folks on Cat Island." + +"You got around that pretty neatly, Captain," Charley said, as soon as +Chris was gone. "I expected him to insist upon being cook. He thinks no +one else can do it so well. But, seriously, don't you think we are all +rather young to be ship's officers. Men are quite apt to resent having +to take orders from mere boys." + +"The law requires that those four offices be filled by Americans an' +we can't afford to hire men to fill the places. Chris will be under my +orders all the time an' will be mate only in name. But you boys are +already smart sailors an' I expect you to be real officers on your +boats. If you weren't on the papers proper you might have trouble with +your men, but the fact that you are regular commissioned officers will +make smooth sailing for you. Any refusal to obey your orders would be +mutiny." + +"Very well, Captain," agreed Walter. "What do you want Captain West and +I to do next?" + +"Just lay around an' enjoy yourselves this mornin', I guess. The first +thing is to get a fellow who talks Greek an' to hire a crew. I want to +pick them out myself. As soon as we get them there will be plenty to +do stockin' up with grub an' water. Better spend the time lookin' over +your new command an' pickin' up what you can about the business." + +The advice was good, and, as soon as they had finished breakfast, the +boys hastened down to the harbor to inspect the diving boats they had +acquired with the purchase of the 'Beauty'. Upon a close inspection, +they were delighted with their new commands. The little vessel was +quite new and its model promised great seaworthiness. Besides the huge +square sail it carried, it was equipped with a ten-horse power gasoline +engine. Its rig was different from any the boys had ever seen, and they +spent several hours studying it, and making themselves acquainted with +the working of the engine. + +"I believe I can handle it by myself now, if I had to do it," Charley +declared, at last. "The engine may give us a little trouble at first, +but we will soon get on to it and it's likely there will be several +Greeks in the crew who know how to run it. Now, the next thing is to +settle on a name for our craft." + +"I thought of calling it 'Flora'," Walter said, with a little sheepish +smile. + +"And I was thinking of naming it 'Ola'," declared Charley promptly. + +After a spirited debate over the two names they held in such esteem, +the two lads at last came to a compromise by agreeing to call their +little ship "The Two Sisters". This decided, they rummaged around +in the lockers until they found paint and brushes with which they +proceeded to letter on the bow of their crafts the name chosen. + +As soon as this task was finished, they returned to the village and +made a round of the shops purchasing clothing for their trip, pricing +provisions, and learning all they could from the various merchants +about the Greeks and the sponge business. + +They were passing a little photo studio when Chris' voice hailed them +from inside. It was hard for them to refrain from laughter at the +figure the little negro presented. + +A common blue suit had been too tame a color for Chris' +brilliant-loving soul. He was clothed in a pair of baggish yellow +trousers, many sizes too large for him, a coat of vivid scarlet hue, +and a cap of deepest purple. But in spite of his brilliant attire, his +little ebony face expressed deepest satisfaction. On a chair beside +him was a great pile of finished tin-types and the Greek proprietor, +beaming at the unusual rush of business, was just adjusting his camera +to take another. + +"Why, what do you want with any more of them, Chris?" Walter exclaimed. +"You've got enough already to supply everyone on Cat Island." + +"Dey ain't no good," replied the little darkey, mournfully, "I 'spect +dis man doan know his business." + +Charley examined one of the despised tintypes. "Why, they look just +like you," he declared. + +"Dey's just black an' white," protested the little negro. "Dey doan +show de colors at all." + +The chums turned their heads aside to hide their grins. + +"That's a Greek camera, Chris," Charley said with a wink at Walter. +"You can't expect it to take American colors. I tell you what to do. +Just write at the bottom of each picture: Pants, yellow; coat, scarlet; +cap, purple." + +"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the little darkey, +brightening. "But it hain't like habbing de colors show," he added, +mournfully. + +The three were making their way back to the hotel when their progress +was arrested by piercing screams coming from the rear of a large Greek +restaurant. + +The boys hesitated and looked at each other. + +"Sounds as though someone was hurt pretty bad," Charley commented, "but +I guess we had better go along about our business. We are likely to +get ourselves into trouble if we meddle with things in this section," +but as he spoke the screams rang out afresh. The chums looked at each +other; there was no need for words between them. + +"Well, it's foolish, but here goes," Charley exclaimed. + +A narrow alley led into the rear of the building and down it has +hastened followed by his two companions. + +A minute's walk brought them to the scene of the screams. + +In a little back yard stood a small Greek boy about thirteen years of +age. He was clad only in short trousers and his bare back and legs +were covered with angry welts. Above him towered a dark, scowling +Greek, who was swinging a heavy cowhide whip, while at each descent of +the cruel, stinging lash the lad's screams rose in piteous protests. +Clustered around was some dozen men and boys looking on with unconcern. + +Charley caught the Greek's arm as it rose for another blow. "Stop that, +you big brute," he cried, trembling with anger. "You have no right to +beat a little fellow like that, no matter what he has done. If you hit +him another blow, I'll have you arrested." + +"He won't understand you, Charley," Walter cautioned. + +But the Greek did understand. He turned a look of the deepest hate on +the plucky lad. For a second he seemed in the act of striking him with +the heavy whip, but Charley did not flinch. "Try it, if you dare," he +cried. + +The Greek lowered his upraised arm. "Why should I not strike him?" He +demanded savagely, but in perfect English. "He is mine, I pay his fare +all the way from Greece. All day he plays on the street and brings home +no money. I will beat him if I wish." + +"You will not," declared Charley, firmly. "If you do, you will be +arrested very quickly. Lad, if this man attempts to beat you again, +you come to us; you will find us on board the schooner 'Beauty'. If +she is not in the harbor you go to Mr. Driver who owns the store, I +will tell him about you and he will see that you are not abused. Do you +understand what I say?" + +"Yes sir, I speak English good," the little lad replied proudly. "He +teach me so I can beg the pennies." + +The Greek's manner had suddenly changed. His frown disappeared and he +wore a smile that he endeavored to make pleasant. + +"The noble young gentleman need not worry," he said, smoothly, "I love +the boy and already regret having whipped him--he is very bad. But it +shall happen no more." + +"It had better not," Charley replied shortly, as he turned away. "Come +on, Walt, I am going to speak to Mr. Driver about it now." + +Mr. Driver listened to the lad's story with a very grave face. "I'm +afraid you boys have made a dangerous enemy," he said. "That Greek is +Manuel George, and he is a very bad character. He was arrested once +for the murder of another Greek, but they could not prove the charge +against him although everyone believed that he had done it. You want to +be very careful as long as you are in Tarpon. I will gladly have him +arrested if the boy makes any complaint to me." + +The boys found the captain waiting for them at the hotel. "I've had +the best of luck," the old sailor declared. "I found the very Greek we +need to make our orders plain to the crew. He talks English as good +as you or I. I did not lose any time in gettin' his name on the ship's +papers. He promised to meet us here at the hotel this noon. There he +comes now." + +The chums exchanged a glance of dismay, for approaching their table, +bowing, smiling, and as suave as though they were his dearest friends +was Mr. Manuel George. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +THE START. + + +THE captain introduced the boys to the Greek who beamed upon them as +though nothing unpleasant had ever passed between them. The lads met +his smiling advances with a cold silence which the captain noticed with +puzzled concern. + +As soon as he could do so without attracting too much notice, Walter +drew the old sailor to one side. "We don't want anything to do with +that man," he declared, and he hurriedly told about the whipping and +repeated what Mr. Driver had said. + +Captain Westfield looked troubled. "I wish I'd known that two hours +ago," he said. "He's signed on with us now an' if I try to get rid of +him he can make a lot of trouble for us. We have got to take him along. +If we don't, he's liable to libel the schooner an' cost us no end of +money and delay." + +Walter's face showed his anxiety and concern. + +"He said he was going to bring a boy along with him to act as cabin +boy," said the old sailor after an uncomfortable pause. "Maybe it will +all work out for the best. He won't be able to abuse the lad on the +schooner, an' I don't see how he can make us any trouble. All he's to +do is to make our orders plain to the men, it ain't as though he was an +officer over them." + +"Well, if it can't be helped, we have just got to make the best of it," +Walter agreed, "I am going to keep a mighty close watch on him all the +time, though. We will talk more about it later on. He keeps glancing at +us as though he knew we were talking about him." + +As soon as he got the chance, Walter told his chum what the captain had +said. + +"I don't like the idea of that fellow going with us," Charley declared, +"but if it has got to be, we had better start in by treating him +friendly. It won't help matters any to quarrel with him." + +That was sound sense and the boys at once began to treat the Greek +pleasantly, in spite of the dislike they felt for him. + +There was no doubt but what the fellow understood his position +thoroughly. With his able assistance, the captain, in a short time, +secured a full crew of fifteen men, including four professional divers +who brought their queer looking suits with lead shoes and heavy helmets +along with them. The boys were pleased with the appearance of the men. +They were well-built, husky fellows and looked to be capable sailors. +They were much alike in looks, all being broad-shouldered and swarthy +with clean-cut features and straight noses. One alone seemed to differ +greatly from the rest. He was a tall, powerful, handsome fellow with +unusually small hands and feet. He seemed to be shunned by the others +and left very much to himself. He was evidently a good sailor and when +the captain set his new crew at work to getting the schooner ready for +sea he performed his part with a quickness and intelligence that won +the old sailor's approval. + +As soon as the work was well under way, Charley and Walter, taking the +interpreter with them, went back up town to purchase their stores. The +bulk of their purchases were made at Mr. Driver's store, but there were +many articles that he did not carry in stock which they had to buy at +the Greek stores. Manuel directed them as to the kind of food their +crew were accustomed to. The bulk of the stores consisted of ripe black +olives in small kegs; queer looking cheeses, rice, black flour and an +abundance of tea and coffee. The boys bought three whole beeves and +four lambs, directing that all their purchases should be sent down to +the schooner at once. + +"Whew," whistled Charley as he paid the last bill, "we have only got +five dollars left of our fifteen hundred." + +"Don't you care," Walter replied, confidently. "We will have a couple +of thousand dollars anyway coming to us when we get back, and still +have the 'Beauty' besides." + +The boys next visited the hotel and got their valises and belongings +which they carried down to their new floating home. + +They found that the Greeks already had the meat cut up and sizzling +merrily in the great iron kettles. + +The new crew were a quick and willing lot and before dark the last +article was stored aboard, and, with the diving boat towing along +behind, they dropped the schooner down the river to the mouth and +anchored for the night just outside amongst a great fleet of schooners +lying ready for an early morning start for the sponging ground. + +Long after they had eaten their supper and all of the crew but the +anchor watch had retired to the forecastle, the four chums sat on +deck admiring the beauty of the scene around them. A thousand lights +twinkled from the fleet and high in the air ahead of them the great +lantern of the Anclote lighthouse on its little island of barren rock. + +Captain Westfield awoke the boys early next morning, "Hurry up on deck +if you want to see the prettiest sight you ever saw," he said. The lads +hustled into their clothing and followed him up the ladder. As they +gained the deck they paused with exclamations of deepest admiration. + +It was blowing a stiff breeze and the blue water of the Gulf was +dancing and sparkling with white-crested waves. Around them was the +fleet all under sail, their snowy canvas towering high above their +shapely hulls. Some lay with sails slatting, still clinging to their +anchorage while their brightly attired crews worked over windlasses, +reeling in the dripping cables. Some already under way lay hove-to in +the open Gulf waiting for their fellows; while still others, anchors +tripped and sails drawing, heeling over to the brisk breeze, darted +away, sending the water tossing and foaming from their bows. + +The boys drew a long breath of pure delight at the beautiful picture. + +"It's grand," Charley cried. + +"Aye, lad," agreed the captain with satisfaction. "There's no place +like the sea for beautiful scenes. But thar ain't a ship in the whole +fleet as pretty as our own. Just watch her now." + +The old sailor gave a few short orders which the interpreter repeated +to the crew. A dozen of them sprang to the windlass, while others stood +by the halyards, ready to hoist the big jibs the second the anchor +broke ground. The "Beauty's" huge main and foresails were already +hoisted and her cable hove short. + +The men at the windlass shouted some words. + +"Anchor broke," translated Manuel. + +"Up helm," commanded the captain, "give her the jibs." + +The great sails mounted their stays, the "Beauty's" head played off, +and, careening over 'till her lee rail touched the water, she surged +through the waters like a thing alive. + +The chums watched the foam sweep past in transports of delight. + +"My, but she's fast," Walter cried. + +"Aye, lad," the captain agreed, joyfully. "I ain't never seen a faster, +except maybe Black Sam's schooner. We'll have to shorten sail in an +hour if we don't want to run away from the rest of the fleet." + +The boys watched with delight as the Beauty overhauled and passed +schooner after schooner. + +As she surged past a large black-hulled vessel with three diving boats +in tow, a man on the stranger's deck waved his cap and shouted, + +"Good luck to you. Better keep with the fleet." + +"That's Mr. Williams," Charley exclaimed. "I am glad that we are going +to be near somebody we know." + +"Yes, it is Mr. Williams," affirmed Manuel, who was standing near. "But +here is my little boy to say that your breakfast is ready." + +"What is your name?" Walter enquired of the little fellow as they all +followed him below. "I could never remember that," he said, when the +lad replied with a very long Greek name. "I guess we will have to call +you Ben for short." + +The band of chums were very hungry and they seated themselves around +the table before the steaming cups of coffee and waited impatiently +for the food to be brought on, but the little Greek lad took a position +behind their chairs and waited. + +"Hurry up, Ben, and bring the breakfast," the captain ordered. + +"Breakfast there," the lad replied. + +The old sailor repeated his order but Ben replied as before. + +"I reckon he don't understand," the captain remarked, "Go up and tell +your father, owner, or whoever he is, to come down." + +The lad was back in a minute with the smiling Greek. + +"We want our breakfast," the captain explained, "the boy don't seem to +understand." + +"He understands all right, but, I see the cook does not comprehend. It +is the custom to have coffee only in the morning on sponging ships." + +"Nothing but coffee for breakfast?" roared the old sailor. + +"We eat but one meal a day and that at night," the Greek explained. "If +the rest of the crew ate the divers would want to eat also, and that +would be fatal for them. The stomach must be empty when they descend to +the bottom in deep water, otherwise they die." + +"Well, they can't see us eat an' I want my three square meals a day," +said the hungry sailor. "Right saving plan for us though if they only +eat once a day." + +"They eat the whole three meals in one," the Greek said with a smile. +"I will speak to the cook at once and he will soon have something ready +for you." + +In a very short time they were served with a substantial meal to which +they all did full justice. As soon as it was finished, they returned to +the deck where they learned that the "Beauty" was already so far in the +lead of the fleet that sail had to be shortened. + +With Manuel's aid the boys picked out their crews for the diving boat. +They found that many of the Greeks were familiar with gasoline engines +and they selected one of the youngest and most intelligent-looking for +an engineer. The four divers were, of course, allotted to their boat, +but besides them they had to have two men to work the air pump and two +others to tend to the life-lines, which made a crew of nine, besides +the young officers, and would leave only Captain Westfield, Chris and +the cook and five men on board the schooner. + +The divers at once began preparations for their future dangerous work. +They examined pump and air hose very carefully, for a slight leak in +either one would mean death by suffocation beneath the surface. They +brought out their diving suits and went over them inch by inch for +possible rents or tears. Many of the suits were old and covered with +a multitude of rubber patches. The boys were amazed that their owners +would dare descend in such worn suits, but Manuel assured them that +the patches were so cunningly put on that not only would they exclude +water, but they would outlast the suit itself. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +FIRST TROUBLE. + + +ONE of the sailors Charley had selected for his crew was the tall +handsome fellow whom the others seemed to shun. + +"I can't understand what the rest have against him," the young captain +remarked to his chum. "He seems very quiet and well behaved, and he is +every inch a sailor. I would ask Manuel about him but it is bad policy +to discuss one of the crew with another. It always makes trouble. +Likely, Manuel would lie about him anyway, he seems to hate him, look +at him glaring at him now." + +The Greek was leaning against the railing staring at the sailor who was +coiling down a rope near him. Suddenly the Greek addressed the man in a +low savage tone. The sailor's face grew red with anger, and he replied +shortly in a few hissing words. With a bound, the Greek cleared the +space between the two and struck the sailor full in the mouth. The man +reeled back against the main mast, but, recovering himself in a second, +sprang for his assailant. The Greek leaped to one side and whipped out +a long wicked knife. + +Before he could use it, Captain Westfield, belaying pin in hand, rushed +in between the two. + +"Put up that knife," he roared. "I'll do what fighting there is to be +done on this ship." + +The Greek shot one quick glance at him, venomous with hate, then he +glanced beyond him at the two lads who waited expectantly with hands on +their pistols. + +"He cursed me," he said sullenly, as he slowly replaced the knife in +his pocket. + +"When anyone curses you, report it to me an' don't take the law in +your own hands. I'm master of this schooner, an' you might as well +understand it right off. Tell that fellow just what I've told you." + +The sailor's face darkened as the Greek spoke to him rapidly, but he +turned slowly away and walked forward. + +"That's a bad beginning," Charley remarked to his chum. "I wish we had +never seen that Greek. I believe he insulted that sailor. The fellow +was behaving himself and tending to his own business." + +He repeated the remark to the captain a little later. + +"I reckon you're right, lad," agreed the old sailor, "that Greek seems +to be a trouble-maker but he'll find he's got the wrong man to deal +with. I've handled too many crews of tough roughnecks to be bested by +a dirty furriner." + +"I'll bet he will keep you busy with complaints," Walter said. "How +are you going to get at the truth of it if he does complain about the +others of the crew?" + +"You'll see, I reckon, he will try something like that but I'm ready +for him." + +Sure enough, in less than an hour the Greek approached the Captain. + +"I hate to trouble you, but I must complain as you have directed," he +said suavely. "The cook, he is very abusive, I tried to instruct him +about your meals but he answers me with vile names." + +"Bring the cook aft," Captain Westfield commanded. + +Manuel escorted the bewildered-looking cook aft with a look of sly +triumph on his face. + +The captain looked the man over appraisingly. He was a +broad-shouldered, well-muscled fellow. He spoke to him briefly but the +cook shook his head. He could not understand. + +The old sailor picked up a rope and spread it in a big circle on the +deck. + +"This insulting of you has got to be stopped right off," he declared, +addressing the interpreter. "Give me your knife." + +The Greek surrendered his weapon. + +"Now both of you get inside that ring and fight it out to a finish," +he ordered. "Lick him good for calling you names." + +Manuel's face fell, and, turning he spoke rapidly to the cook. "He has +apologized and my honor is satisfied," he declared. + +"All right," the captain said with a wink at the grinning boys. "Next +time any one insults you, I am going to make you give him a good +licking in a square fist fight. I'm not agoing to let any of the crew +swear at you and call you names--it ain't right." + +"I guess we won't have any more complaints from him right off," he +chuckled as the disappointed Greek retired forward. + +"I'm afraid we're going to have more or less trouble through not +understanding their language," Charley said, gravely. "I don't believe +he had a bit of trouble with the cook. He was just aiming to have you +punish the fellow and get you disliked by the crew." + +"I can handle him all right," the captain declared, confidently. "If he +gets troublesome I'll iron him and put him down in the hold. I reckon I +can make the rest understand what I want done by signs, though it would +be mighty awkward if a gale struck us." + +The old sailor soon left the boys in charge of the deck and went below +to write up the log and look over the charts. + +"If this wind holds we'll be on the edge of the sponging grounds by +night," he said when he returned. "I didn't realize before how big they +are. Why, they reach clear from Cedar Keys to Cape Sable, about seven +hundred miles." + +"One thing that has puzzled me is that all these schooners seem to come +from Key West," Charley remarked, '"Of Key West' is lettered on the +stern of every one of them." + +"Key West used to be the headquarters for the sponging business in +the old days," the captain explained. "They used to gather sponges +different from what they do now. A schooner would take out about +twenty small boats an' a crew of forty men. When she got to the sponge +grounds, the small boats would scatter out around her, two men in each +boat. One man would do the sculling and the other would lean over the +bow with a water glass in one hand--a pail with a pane of glass for +a bottom--and a long pole with a hook in the end in the other. When +he spied a sponge on the bottom through the glass he'd have the other +stop sculling and he would hook it up with his pole. It was slow, hard +work, but they made money at it until the Greeks came with their expert +divers. They could not compete with them so they either sold or leased +their schooners to the Greeks and went out of business." + +The old sailor's explanation was interrupted by a howl of "Oh, Golly!" +from the cook' galley forward and Chris, dripping with water, bounded +out of the open door of the little structure, and rushed aft. + +"I want you to put dat cook in irons, Massa Captain," he cried. "He's +done 'saulted his superior officer." + +"What did he do to you," the captain asked with a twinkle in his eye. + +"Throwed a hull pan of dirty, nasty dishwater obber me. I was jus' +tellin' him how he had outer do, an' tryin' to show de ignorant man how +to cook, when--slosh--he let fly dat big pan full all obber me." + +The dirty water was streaming from the little negro's brilliant +clothing and his face was streaked with purple from his cap. + +The captain checked his desire to laugh. + +"The cook did just right," he said, gravely. "You've got no business +in his galley. A cook is always boss there. Even the Captain seldom +interferes with him." + +Chris seemed inclined to protest indignantly, but the old sailor +continued. + +"How would you like to be cook an' have some one poking around an' +tellin' you what to do?" + +"Golly! I reckon you is right," the little darkey admitted, "I wouldn't +stand such doin's. 'Spect dough dat my good clothes is all spoiled. +Dat water was powerful greasy." + +"Better dry them out and lay them away," Walter suggested. "They are +too fine to wear at sea. You had ought to save them 'till we get in +port." + +Both boys were glad when Chris accepted the suggestion. They could see +that the crew regarded the little fellow in his gay apparel with a +contempt and ridicule that the plucky, loyal little lad did not deserve. + +Under her shortened canvas, the "Beauty" had dropped to the rear of the +fleet. Late in the afternoon the schooners ahead began to shorten sail. +Soon one rounded up into the wind, dropped anchor and lowered sail. +A mile further on another one anchored, a mile beyond another took +in sail, until at last the whole fleet was strung out in a long line +reaching many miles North and South. + +The captain held the "Beauty" on her course until the last schooner was +passed then anchored, lowered sails and made everything snug. + +"We are on the sponging grounds," he explained to the boys who had been +puzzled by the fleet's maneuvers. "To-morrow we make our first try as +spongers." + +As soon as their supper was finished the boys strolled forward to view +the crew at their meal. + +The Greeks ate in groups of four. Each group had a great tin pan filled +with some kind of stew. This they divided into four equal portions +with their big spoons, all eating from the same pan. + +The stew, black bread as hard as a rock, and ripe olives constituted +their meal, but the boys, hearty eaters themselves, were astounded at +the amount of food each Greek disposed of. + +"I never dreamed a man could stow away so much grub," Charley remarked. +"They are not eating three meals in one, but six." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +SPONGING. + + +THE morning sun rose over a scene of bustle and activity. From the +hundred schooners strung out two or three hundred diving boats with +sails hoisted and engines chugging. + +The young officers were up and away with the earliest. + +"Go slow," Captain Westfield cautioned them as they stepped aboard +their craft. "Keep your eyes open an' learn all you can. Don't give any +orders unless they are absolutely needed. But if you have to give them +an order make them obey it, don't let them trifle with you. You can +take Manuel along if you want to, I reckon I can manage to get along +without him." + +But the boys declined the offer. They had both taken a great dislike to +the suave, smiling Greek. + +The Captain had given their crew general instructions before they left +the schooner and the young officers had but little to do but signify by +waves of their hands which direction they wished to go. + +All places looked alike to the inexperienced boys, and as soon as their +craft was a quarter of a mile from the schooner, Charley signed to his +crew to anchor and proceed with their work. + +The divers at once prepared for their descent to the bottom. The lead +was first hove to find out the depth of the water, which proved to +be about thirty-five feet. Before donning their waterproof suits, +the divers tested the air pump carefully and examined the air hose +minutely, for upon these two things their lives would depend when once +they sank beneath the surface. While they were putting on the strange +looking suits and heavy leaded shoes, the crew slung short ladders +over the sides. The divers put on their headpieces last of all, these +were large globe-shaped coverings of metal with two heavy glasses in +front through which to see. But two divers were to descend at a time. +Their places would be taken by two others at the end of two hours, +which is about as long as one can safely work at a time beneath the +surface. Those in reserve assisted their companions in adjusting the +heavy headpieces. As soon as the helmets were on they screwed in the +air hose, and connected the other ends to the pumps. A line by which to +lower and raise them was fastened around each diver's body and he was +then assisted onto the ladder, for it was almost impossible for them to +move in their cumbersome suits and lead shoes. As soon as they had been +helped to the lowest step on the ladder, each was given a large basket +to which a long line had been fastened, and they were slowly and gently +lowered to the bottom. + +The young officers watched their operations with eager interest. +What impressed them most was the vigilant care shown by the divers +remaining on board. One took charge of the tub in which the air hose +was coiled and paid it out carefully as the diver sank, the other held +the life-line instantly ready for the jerks which would signal to him +the wishes of the one below. Not once did either's eyes shift or his +attention waver from his task. + +"It's easy to see that this is a dangerous business," Walter remarked. + +"Yes," his chum agreed, "I am beginning to see that Mr. Williams was +right when he said sponging was a man's game. It certainly takes nerve +to descend like those divers have, knowing that there is nothing +between them and death but that little air hose. But have you noticed +how they are treating that strange handsome fellow? They all seem to be +afraid to have him near." + +The mysterious sailor had approached the men working the air pumps, +apparently with the purpose of helping with the pumping, but the +pumpers drove him away with menacing gestures and upraised fists. He +moved over near the coiled air hose but the diver in charge of that met +him with a torrent of fiercely-uttered words and he slunk dejectedly +forward, and, seating himself by the mast, buried his face in his +hands. + +"Poor chap," Walter remarked, "he seems to be hated by the whole crew. +I wonder what is the reason." + +"We will find out, I guess, when we meet up with Mr. Williams again," +his chum replied. "He will likely know, or be able to find out quickly +from some of his crew. But look, we are about to see our first sponges." + +There had been a couple of quick jerks on the life-line. The diver +holding it called to one of the crew who seized the line that had been +attached to the basket, and began hauling it carefully in hand over +hand. + +The boys leaned over the side, eager for the first glimpse of their +future cargo. When the basket came into view they both uttered an +exclamation of disgust and disappointment. + +Instead of bright, clean, yellow sponges with which they were familiar, +the basket was heaped with what looked like huge lumps of dirty mud. + +The man dumped the contents out on deck and lowered the basket down +again. + +"What greenies we are," Charley said as he glanced at his chum's +crestfallen face. "We might have known if we had stopped to think, that +sponges have to be cleaned and cured before they look like those we saw +on shore. I expect that pile is worth a lot of money in spite of its +unattractive appearance." + +Five times did the basket appear loaded to the brim before the divers' +two hour spell below expired. As soon as their time was up they were +hauled aboard, their suits removed and the other two took their places. + +"Whew, but I am getting hungry," Walter exclaimed as noon time drew +near, "and we came off from the schooner without bringing a lunch with +us." + +"I am glad we did," Charley said. "It's all right having our meals +regular when we are on board the schooner and out of sight of the crew, +but it would hardly seem right to eat now before these hungry fellows. +I guess we can stand it to go without dinner of they can stand it to go +without both dinner and breakfast. Besides, I don't believe I could eat +any lunch if we had it. Whew, but that smell is getting awful." + +The hot sun was getting in its work on the rapidly increasing pile of +sponges on deck. Adhering to them were multitudes of muscles and little +fish which were beginning to send forth a fearful stench. + +"I am beginning to realize that a sponger's life is anything but a bed +of roses," Walter laughed. "It's easy to understand now why they only +eat one meal a day." + +The novelty of the diving operations soon wore off and the boys, to +pass the time, busied themselves with an attempt to learn something of +the Greek language. They selected the engineer for their teacher. He +was a young fellow with an intelligent, good-humored face and seemed to +take great interest in their efforts. Touching different parts of the +boat and engine the boys repeated the English names for them. The young +fellow grasped the idea instantly and repeated the names in Greek, +laughing heartily over their attempts to pronounce the words after him. + +In this manner the time passed quickly and pleasantly and the lads were +delighted with the rapid progress they made. + +"At this rate we will be able to speak the language a little in a +week's time," Charley declared. "I'm--" but he never finished the +sentence. + +From around them rose cries that brought the lads springing to their +feet. + +The crew were all crowded against the rail staring as if fascinated +over the side, while the diver holding one of the life-lines was +hauling it in with feverish energy. + +As the boys sprang to the rail, the diver's headpiece appeared above +the surface One glance, and they understood the reason for the sudden +commotion--from the metal helmet dangled a short piece of severed air +hose. + +The luckless man was quickly dragged aboard, the head-piece quickly +removed, and his rubber clothing cut away, but his eyes were closed and +his face purple--he was dead. A long, weird, prolonged wailing came +from his shipmates which arose and fell strangely, like the strains of +the mournful death march. + +The two chums gazed at each other with pale, horror-stricken faces. + +"Poor fellow," Walter murmured, "His life went out like a candle in a +gale. Alive one minute, dead the next. What could have cut that hose?" + +"Chafed against a sharp branch of coral or bitten in two by a shark," +Charley replied, sadly. "Well, I guess it means the last of our +sponging, the other divers will hardly want to go down after such an +accident, and I don't blame them." + +But, to his amazement, as soon as the wailing chant ceased, one of the +remaining divers began coolly to prepare to take the dead man's place. + +"My, but those fellows have got nerve," he declared, admiringly, but +he stopped the man as he began to put on his diving suit and by signs +ordered the crew to get up anchor and return to the schooner. + +"It's only a couple of hours to dark and we have had enough for one day +anyway," he remarked to his chum. + +When the diving boat reached the schooner his shipmates prepared the +dead man for burial. The body was sewed up in stout canvas and a piece +of iron fastened to it. It was then gently lowered over the side and +sank slowly beneath the waves. + +With its disappearance all vestige of gloom disappeared from the crew. +The dead man's scanty belongings were brought forth and auctioned off +to the various bidders, and an hour after the crew were chatting and +laughing with each other as cheerfully as ever. + +"Mr. Williams was right, this is a man's game, and a game for rough, +fearless men only," Walter remarked thoughtfully, for a second time. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +TROUBLE. + + +AFTER the crew had eaten their supper and rested a bit, the captain +had them transfer the sponges from the diving boat to the deck of the +schooner. The sponges made quite an imposing pile which the old sailor +surveyed with satisfaction. "You've done well to-day," he remarked, +"if every day's work is as good we'll have a valuable cargo before our +three months are up. I reckon, thar's all of two hundred dollars' worth +of sponges in that heap." + +"Are you sure that you know how to clean and cure them right?" Charley +enquired. + +"I don't, but Chris knows that part of the business from A to Z. Where +he comes from the people live by sponging and pearl fishing." + +"Golly, dat's right," observed the little darkey. "I'se helped my daddy +fix sponges many a time. First off, you'se got to beat de mud out ob +dem wid sticks, den you got to let dem lay foah a day or two to die, +'cause dey's alive jus' like fishes. When dey's good an' dead, you puts +dem in nets an' hangs dem ober de side for de water to wash dem out +clean. Den you dry dem out on deck an' string dem out on strings 'bout +two yards long. Dat makes dem all ready for market 'cept for clipping +de bad parts off of dem, which is done on shore. Dar ain't nothin' +'bout fixin' up sponges dat dis nigger doan know." + +Just then a small boat came alongside the schooner and the boys +hastened to the side to welcome the two men it contained. They were +the captain and mate of the schooner anchored nearest to the "Beauty". +Both were young fellows hardly out of their teens. They introduced +themselves as Steve Ward, and Ray Lowe. + +"We thought we'd drop over and have a little chat with you," said Ward, +who was the captain. "You, of course, don't realize it yet, but an +American face looks mighty good amongst this army of Greeks, especially +after one has been out for a month or two. We all start out together +but before the season ends we get pretty widely scattered and to meet +up with another schooner with an American aboard is like coming across +a long-lost brother. This is my fifth trip and I am getting pretty +well hardened to the loneliness now, but the first time I was out I +nearly went crazy. After we parted from the rest of the fleet, it was +worse than being alone on a desert island, for I had the misery of +seeing others talk, laugh and enjoy themselves without being able to +understand a word. When, at last, we came across a ship with someone +aboard I could talk to I nearly cried for joy. It seemed so good to be +able to understand and make myself understood once more." His glance +fell upon Manuel George, who was leaning against the rail, and his gray +eyes narrowed. + +"What made you bring that fellow with you?" he asked. + +"We had to have someone along who could talk their lingo," Captain +Westfield replied. "Do you know him?" + +"I don't know anything good of him," said the other shortly. "I came +near killing him once and I've always half regretted that I didn't do +it. It was on my first trip," he explained. "It was just such another +case as that young fellow's who was arrested the other day. Although I +was captain, the Greeks owned the schooner, and, because I was young +and inexperienced, they got the idea they could run over me and do +as they pleased. Manuel was always stirring them up and encouraging +them to disobey orders. One day I had some words with him about it, +and,"--the young fellow's face darkened--"well, he carries a bullet +in his leg yet. The others set on me and I had to lock myself up in +the cabin. Likely, they would have got me in the end and thrown me +overboard to feed the sharks, but we happened to come across another +schooner and they had to let me go." + +"He don't want to try any tricks with me," Captain Westfield declared. +"I got him to talk their lingo but had him sign on as one of the +crew. If he tries to act up, I'll put him at the hardest work on the +schooner." + +"Well, keep your eye on him," advised the other. "He has never made a +trip yet without making trouble. He's a mighty bad egg and as sly and +cunning as he is mean." + +The two men remained for over two hours, and from them the little party +learned many new and interesting things about their new business and +about the Greeks. + +"We have no reason to complain of a dull trip so far," Charley said, +when the two Americans had left. "Only two days out and one of our crew +is dead, another is supposed to be on the watch to make us trouble, and +a third is a mystery worth solving, judging from the way the others +treat him. If things keep on as they have started, we will have a +voyage exciting enough to satisfy anyone." + +If the lad could have known of the exciting events soon to follow close +on each other's heels, he would have had even less reason to complain +of dullness. + +The next day's sponging was the same as the first. They seemed to have +happened upon a spot where the sponges were unusually plentiful. The +basket came frequently to the surface loaded with the big mud-covered +masses and by nightfall the diving boat's deck was well covered. All +day the two lads persisted in their attempt to learn the Greek names +for the things about them. By night Charley was able to direct the +operation of getting under way for the schooner. Of course, he was yet +unable to construct sentences in Greek, but he could call the Greek +names for sails, anchor, and different parts of the rigging and the +crew managed to guess the rest. Though it was a crude and imperfect way +of giving orders, it succeeded better than the slow, imperfect signs he +had been obliged to depend upon before. + +"If we keep on as fast, we will be able to make them understand us well +within two weeks," he declared gleefully. + +It was still light enough for them to see distinctly when they reached +the schooner, and they looked about them with regret as they climbed +aboard. Her snow-white decks were filthy from the pounding out of the +sponges, and bulwarks, sails and rigging were spattered with the foul +mud, while the strong, rank odor of dead fish hung heavy in the air. + +Chris and the captain had just knocked off work. Their faces, hands and +clothing were black as soot. The old sailor's face showed set and stern +through its coating of mud. He said little until all were washed up and +seated around the supper table. + +"Well, lads, I reckon our troubles have begun," he remarked, grimly. +"Manuel an' I had a row to-day." + +"What about? How did it come out?" the boys questioned, eagerly. + +"I told him to help us with the sponge cleaning and he refused to do +it. When I insisted he flew into a rage, cursed me, an' shook his fist +in my face. I couldn't stand for that an' he's down in the hold now +with the irons on him." + +"Well, I feel easier with him there than with him mixing in with the +crew," Charley declared. + +"My row with him ain't the worst of the matter," the old sailor said +gravely. "I called on the crew to help me iron him and they all +pretended they didn't understand my sign, but they knew what I wanted +all right. I had to handle him alone an' we had quite a struggle +before I got the best of him." He rolled up his sleeve and showed an +ugly-looking cut on his arm. "He came near getting me with his knife +an' I had to give him a couple of taps with a belaying pin. That cut +don't amount to anything, but what worries me is that the crew stood +around an' watched him try to kill me without interfering--it's a +mighty bad sign." + +"That does look bad," Charley agreed, anxiously. "I guess we had better +keep him a close prisoner and not let any of the crew go near him, he +might try to stir them up and make things hot for us." + +"But that means that someone will have to guard him an' carry his meals +to him. It wouldn't do to have one of the Greeks do it, I reckon." + +"No," Charley agreed, thoughtfully, "but I believe I've got the very +man for the job--that handsome fellow the others seem to hate so. +Manuel tried to kill him and he is not likely to be easy with him." + +The mysterious sailor was at once sent for by Ben. As soon as he came +the captain loaded a tray with food and a bottle of water and signed +for him to carry it and follow him. Charley and Walter accompanied the +two. + +As they passed along the deck on their way to the hold, they met angry +glances and frowns from the crew. + +The mysterious sailor was very intelligent and they soon made him +understand that he was to guard the prisoner. He grinned with enjoyment +and, seating himself a little way from the Greek, took out his long +keen sheath knife and laid it handy beside him. + +The prisoner's face grew black with rage at sight of his guard, but he +maintained a sulky silence. + +"I guess he's safe enough now," the captain said as they returned to +their cabin. "I believe that fellow will guard him faithfully. They +seem to hate each other like poison--I wish I knew the reason for it." + +"It would not seem so strange if the hatred was confined to him and +Manuel, but all the others seem to share in the feeling," Charley +remarked. "It seems very queer to me." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +MANUEL'S RELEASE. + + +BEFORE the boys left the schooner next morning, the guard they had set +over Manuel approached the captain, and by signs and gestures intimated +that the prisoner wished to speak to him. + +Manuel's sullen demeanor had entirely disappeared and he looked humble +and penitent. + +"I wish to make my most humble apologies to you, noble captain," he +declared. "All night long I have thought over my hasty actions with +shame and regret. You were right and I wrong. I will work hard at +whatever you set me to do, and in the future you will have no cause to +complain if you will set me at liberty." + +There were tears in the fellow's eyes and his voice trembled as he +spoke. + +"Stop that blubbering," said the blunt old sailor, who detested tears +in men. "I reckon, if you are sure that you've learned your lesson an' +won't try to act smart again, I'll set you free; but the minute you try +to start any trouble again, I'll put you down here for keeps." + +As he removed the irons from the prisoner, the strange sailor burst +into a torrent of passionate speech. + +The captain paid no attention to him for he could not understand a +word of it, but Charley, who was watching closely, saw Manuel give the +fellow a quick glance of sly triumph. + +"I'm afraid you have made a mistake in setting that fellow free, +Captain," the lad said, as they returned to the deck. "I believe it +would have been wiser to have kept him in irons until we could touch +some port and put him ashore." + +"I never feel like being hard on a man when he's sorry for what he has +done," the old sailor replied. "I guess it will make the crew feel +better tempered to have him set free. I'm going to put him ashore at +the first port we touch. In the meanwhile we'll keep him hard at work +an' keep a eye on him all the time." + +"Perhaps we had better take him with us and put him to work at the +pump," Walter suggested. "That's good hard work." + +Charley approved the suggestion, for in spite of the Greek's seeming +repentance, the lad did not trust him in the least and thought it +wisest that he and the captain should be kept separated for awhile +after their quarrel. + +Manuel went at the hard labor at the air pump with a willingness and +cheerfulness which seemed to show the sincerity of his repentance. At +first, he seemed inclined to talk overmuch with the rest of the crew, +but Charley cut short his talkativeness with a curt command. + +"I believe that fellow is a regular Jonah," he confided to his chum +during the noon hour rest. "Yesterday and the day before we got lots of +sponges, but we haven't taken in enough this morning to pay expenses." + +"I guess this part of the ground is getting worked out, perhaps," +Walter replied. "I've noticed several schooners pulling up anchor and +getting under way." + +His surmise proved correct for during the afternoon many of the fleet +passed them headed North. Evidently others were finding the ground as +poor as they did. + +Late in the afternoon the captain recalled them to the schooner with a +signal previously agreed upon,--a flag hoisted to the foremast head. + +"I reckon we'd better be getting under way," the old sailor said when +they got aboard. "I want to keep with the fleet an' all the schooners +seem to be getting under sail. I've noted the course they are takin' +an' with this wind they'll be a long ways from us if we wait until +morning. I hailed one of the captains and he said they intended to sail +all night an' anchor an' get to work early in the morning." + +By the time the sails were all hoisted and the anchor tripped, it had +grown quite dark so the schooner's great side-lights of red and green +were filled, lit, and lashed to the foremast shrouds, for, with so many +boats around them every caution must be taken to avoid running one +down, or being run down themselves. The crew was divided into three +watches. Of which Walter was to have charge of the first, from eight to +twelve o'clock. Charley to have command of the second, or middle watch, +from twelve to four o'clock, while the captain would take the third, or +morning watch, from four to eight A. M. + +The breeze held steady and strong and the night passed away without any +exciting incident. + +The boys were up again at first peep of day, expecting to have to start +out with the diving boat as soon as the sun arose. But, when they +gained the deck, they found the "Beauty" still swinging along on her +course and the captain pacing the deck greatly perplexed. + +"It's mighty queer, but thar ain't one of the fleet in sight," he +exclaimed as he caught sight of the lads. "I don't understand it at +all. Go aloft, Charley, an' see if you can see any of them." + +The lad swung himself into the shrouds and made his way up to the +mainmast cross trees, but, although he gazed all around, his eyes met +nothing but the broad expanse of the blue sparkling waters. + +"Maybe we've run them all out of sight during the night," he suggested +when he regained the deck, but the old sailor shook his head. + +"The 'Beauty's' mighty fast, but she's not speedy enough to do that," +he declared. "Some of those schooners were ten miles ahead of us when +we started. Besides, I shortened sail as soon as I took my watch, +because I did not want to get in the lead." + +"Perhaps we have dropped away behind the rest," Walter said, but the +others knew that that was impossible. The "Beauty" was far too fast a +boat to be left so far behind. + +The Captain examined the log. "We have come a hundred and ten miles," +he said. "Do you reckon either of you boys could have made a mistake in +the course during your watch?" + +"We didn't vary a quarter of a point from the direction you gave during +my four hours," Charley declared. "I kept watch of the compass most of +the time and the needle held steady at North." + +"I was careful about that, also," Walter said. "We were headed exactly +North during my entire watch." + +"Well, that compass is true," the captain declared. "I tested it +carefully before we left port. I reckon thar's only one explanation; +the fleet must have changed their course during the night. We'd better +heave-to until noon when I can take the sun an' tell exactly where we +are at. It ain't no use trying to pick up the fleet again, now they +are out of sight--it would be like hunting for a needle in a hay stack." + +The crew were immediately set to taking in sail and in a few minutes +the little ship was lying head to the wind under reefed foresail sail. + +When the noon hour drew near, Captain Westfield brought his instruments +on deck and prepared to take an observation of the sun. As soon as he +secured it he went below to work out their position on the chart. + +When he reappeared his face wore a very puzzled expression. "Heave the +lead and find out how deep the water is an' what kind of bottom," he +said, briefly. + +Charley took the lead, a heavy cone-shaped piece of lead, slightly +hollowed at the bottom, and with a long line attached to the small +end. Filling the hollow end with soft soap, he dropped the lead over +the side and let it sink until it struck the bottom. Then he pulled it +aboard again, noting carefully the water mark on the line and examining +the soap to which some particles of the bottom had adhered. + +"Depth, six fathoms, (36 feet) bottom, soft gray mud," he announced. + +The captain strode back to the compass and stared at it with a puzzled +frown on his face. + +"We're forty miles from where we should be," he said as the boys +gathered around him, "Sure neither of you boys made a mistake in the +course last night?" + +"Sure," declared both lads positively. + +The four puzzled over the strange situation in silence for several +minutes. Then the captain with his knife loosened the screws and +removed the compass' face of glass. + +"I wonder how that got there," he suddenly exclaimed. + +Cunningly placed, so as to draw the magnetic needle West of North was a +small bright iron nail. + +"It couldn't have got there by itself," Charley declared, excitedly. +"It must have been put there by someone while we were all at supper +last night." + +"I guess there is no doubt as to who that someone was," with an +inclination of his head towards Manuel who, standing a little ways off +was watching them closely. The Greek, as soon as he saw the attention +he was receiving, turned and strolled carelessly forward. + +The captain pondered gravely, "I don't see what his object was," he +said, at last. "If we held on that course long it would only have +carried us further out into the Gulf, so he couldn't have been aiming +to get us wrecked." + +"He planned to get us separated from the fleet," Charley declared. "Do +you think we could find it again, captain?" + +The old sailor shook his head. "There's no telling where we are now," +he said, gloomily, "we might hunt for days without coming across them. +If that fellow did put that nail there to make us lose them, he's +succeeded all right." + +"What had we better do, captain?" Walter asked, anxiously. + +"Well, we aint got no real proof that the fellow put that nail thar so +we can't do anything with him. It might have been in thar all the time, +though I'm willing to take an oath that the compass was true when we +left port. Thar ain't much chance of picking up the fleet again an' I +don't reckon we'd better waste time trying it. The lead shows we are +still on the sponge banks an' I reckon we'd best just get to work, say +nothing, an' keep a close watch on that oil Greek chap." + +The "Beauty" was anchored accordingly, sails lowered and furled, and +everything made snug. As soon as that was done, the boys ordered their +crew into the diving boat and, running out a little ways from the +schooner, gave the signal to resume the diving operations. + +By sheer accident, they had chanced upon a spot rich in sponges and the +lads watched with satisfaction the steady reappearance of the lowered +basket. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +A RASH RESOLVE. + + +THE boys watched Manuel closely throughout the entire afternoon, but +they could detect nothing amiss in his manner or actions. He did +his work willingly and cheerfully, humming a tune most of the time, +apparently he was at peace with himself and the world. + +They were not the only ones who watched the Greek closely. Whenever the +lads glanced at the handsome sailor, they found him gazing intently at +the suspected man, much as a cat watches a mouse, ready to spring at +its slightest movement. + +The boys kept well apart from the crew, watchful for any threatened +outbreak on their part. But the men seemed so cheerful, willing and +contented that they soon grew ashamed of their distrust. + +Once the handsome sailor approached them respectfully, hat in hand, +and, halting before them, spoke rapidly in a low voice. The lads shook +their heads to show that they did not understand, and, with a look of +helpless resignation on his face, the fellow returned to his work. + +"I wish we could understand what he says," Charley said, wistfully. +"He, evidently, has something important he wishes to tell us." + +"We will be able to make out what he says before long," Walter said, +cheerfully. "We are learning lots of new words every day." + +"Yes, we are getting along pretty well," his chum agreed, "but we +are not picking up the language near as well as Chris. It's really +wonderful how fast he is learning." + +The little negro and the Greek boy had become great friends and Chris, +naturally quick witted, was learning with astonishing rapidity to talk +to his new chum. + +"It's the best day we've had yet," Charley declared as they returned +to the schooner in the evening. "We have got as many sponges this +afternoon as we have during any entire day." + +Captain Westfield was elated over their success. "It's turned out all +right after all," he said. "We've stumbled upon a mighty rich part of +the banks, an' I reckon, we ain't lost the fleet either, as we feared, +thar's some twenty sails coming up from the South'ard." + +The vessels, which the boys had not noticed before, were approaching +rapidly, coming before the stiff breeze. Before dark settled down, they +were plainly visible but the eager watchers could not recognize any +of them, they seemed larger schooners than any they had seen in the +fleet. The strangers anchored for the night near the "Beauty" and the +captain got out his night glass and studied them carefully. + +"They ain't any of the fleet," he declared with keen disappointment. +"They're Spanish smacks from Cuba. They fish around this coast +regularly every season." + +"Well, they'll be some company, anyway, as long as they stay near us," +Charley said, cheerfully. "I can speak Spanish if I can't Greek, we can +go over and call on them in the morning. I'd like to go to-night, but I +feel too tired out to move." + +Soon after supper, Manuel approached Captain Westfield, respectfully. + +"We would like to go aboard the schooners, if you will permit," he +requested. "We are nearly out of tobacco and the Cubans always carry a +lot for which we can trade." + +The old sailor thought for a few minutes. "You can go," he said, +shortly, "you an' one man. Take the dingy. I don't want the diving boat +used. An' be sure you're back aboard early." + +The Greek thanked him effusively for the permission, and, calling one +of his shipmates, the two got the schooner's little boat over the side +and sculled away for the nearest smack. + +"They have got plenty of tobacco," growled the captain, as soon as the +two were out of hearing. "Thar was enough sent aboard at Tarpon to last +them for months. I reckon he's figuring on deserting, that's why I let +him go. I'd be willing to lose the boat and the other man to be well +rid of him." + +It seemed that the old sailor was correct for when eight o'clock came +Manuel had not returned. + +"After what happened last night, I don't reckon it's wise to leave the +deck alone," the captain said as the boys prepared to retire to their +bunks. "One of us had ought to keep watch to see that no one monkeys +with the wheel or compass." + +Walter offered to take the first watch from eight to twelve, and, +leaving him pacing back and forth aft of the mainmast, the others +retired to rest. + +Charley was awakened by a vigorous shaking and his chum's voice calling +to him to get up. + +"My watch so soon," grumbled the lad sleepily, "Seems like I just got +to sleep." + +"It's only eleven o'clock," said Walter in excited tones, "but Manuel +came aboard an hour ago very drunk. He must have brought liquor with +him for they are all raising merry Ned in the forecastle now. The +captain and Chris are on deck. Hurry up, there's likely to be trouble +any minute." + +Charley slipped hastily into his clothing and securing his revolver +ran on deck. His three companions with revolvers in their hands were +ranged across the deck just aft of the mainmast. From the forecastle, +forward, came an uproar of shouting, cursing, and fighting. + +The old sailor was blaming himself, bitterly. "I'd ought to have +thought of it," he exclaimed, "Auguident is cheap as water in Cuba an' +those smacks always carry a lot of it to trade off for other things. +What an old fool I was." + +"What shall we do?" Charley asked. + +"Nothing, but let 'em fight it out amongst themselves an' keep 'em +from crowding aft on us. Our lives wouldn't be worth a pinch of snuff +if we went down to quiet them. If any of 'em tries to come aft of the +mainmast, shoot him." + +The words were hardly out of his mouth when a figure burst out of the +forecastle and came running aft followed by several others staggering, +shouting and cursing. + +The captain raised his pistol and took deliberate aim as the flying man +drew near. + +"Stop, or I'll shoot," he commanded. + +Charley knocked aside his upraised arm. "Let him pass," he cried, "it's +the strange sailor, they have been trying to kill him." + +The handsome fellow was bleeding from a dozen knife wounds, and was +breathing short and heavily. As he reached the little party of chums, +he turned about and faced his pursuers. It was evident that he did not +lack courage. + +The pursuing Greeks stopped short at sight of the little band stretched +across the deck with leveled revolvers. For a minute they seemed about +to dash forward regardless of consequences, but, after a moment's +hesitation, with a volley of curses they turned and slunk back to the +forecastle. They were yet sober enough to realize the danger of open +mutiny. + +"I don't think they'll try to bother us," said the captain with a sigh +of relief. "They ain't drunk enough for that yet, an' I reckon they've +about drank up all their liquor by now. It wouldn't last long amongst +so many of them." + +The strange sailor had sunk to the deck in a dead faint, and, leaving +the boys to guard the deck, the Captain and Chris carried him below, +and, laying him in one of the bunks, hurried back to their companions. + +"He ain't going to die," the old sailor informed them. "He's just weak +from loss of blood. I didn't take time to look him over close, but I +counted nineteen knife cuts on his body an' likely thar's some I didn't +notice." + +"We will have to keep him back aft with us. They would likely kill +him if we sent him back to the forecastle, for he is unable to defend +himself now," Charley said, and his chums agreed with him. + +The uproar in the forecastle continued for a long time then gradually +subsided. Evidently, the crew had disposed of the last of the liquor +and its effects were slowly wearing off. + +Not until four o'clock, however, did the last noise cease, and the +little party of chums remained on deck until the sun rose, ready for +any violence from the drunken Greeks. Daylight found them pale and +tired from their long, anxious vigil. + +"Better go below, lads, and have a good nap," the captain advised. +"They have all quieted down and there is no danger of trouble for the +present. They are going to feel mighty sick and weak from the drink." + +"I'm not going to give them a chance to sleep off their bad feelings," +declared Charley, grimly. "My crew have got to turn to and work as +usual. I'm going to turn them out as soon as Ben awakes." + +When the little Greek lad appeared, looking pale and frightened, +Charley sent him below to rouse Manuel. + +The lad, apparently, did not relish the task but he went, and, after a +long time, reappeared accompanied by the Greek. + +Manuel plainly showed the effects of the liquor. He looked sick and +haggard and one eye was much discolored from a blow he had received. He +was ready, however, with an excuse for the night's disorder. "I did my +best to stop the noise and trouble, and it was thus I received a blow +in the eye." + +"You were drunk when you came aboard," accused Walter. + +"I took a drink on the schooner," admitted Manuel, "only one little +drink. It was foolish, for I am unused to liquor and it went to my +legs, but my head was clear. I regret the disorder of the others." + +There was no doubt in the minds of the captain and the boys that he was +really the author of all the trouble, but they could not prove it and +Charley dismissed him with a curt command to call the crew. + +They were a sick-looking crowd when they were at last collected on +deck. All showed the effect of the liquor and many were the black +eyes and bruised faces. Their fighting humor seemed to have departed, +however, and they went about their tasks quietly, sullenly, and +listlessly. + +After they had finished their morning coffee, Charley ordered his crew +into the diving boat and set out for the spot where they had found so +many sponges. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +A MYSTERY. + + +THE two boys kept well apart from the crew, and watched closely for +any signs of threatened trouble, but, although the men looked sullen +and ugly enough for any kind of act, they seemed much subdued and went +about their tasks quietly saying little, even to each other. + +"I guess we are giving ourselves a lot of worry without cause," Walter +remarked, softly. "Those fellows seem quiet enough now. It was the +liquor that made them act as they did last night, but they have drank +it all up now and I do not believe we will have any more trouble with +them." + +"I wish I could agree with you," his chum said, gravely, "but I can't. +I believe in the old Latin proverb--'in vino veritas'--there is +truth in wine. I've always noticed that when a man gets intoxicated, +he reveals just the kind of man he really is. If he is naturally +quarrelsome when sober he is sure to want to fight when drinking. If he +is good-hearted and kind when sober, he is generally good-humored when +drunk. Liquor seems to destroy a man's caution and make him reveal his +real character. Now these fellows showed plainly their feelings towards +us last night when they were drinking. To-day they are sober and more +cautious, but I believe they feel just the same towards us. It only +needs some real or fancied wrong to bring their hatred to the surface +again. I believe if we had a clash with one of them now we would have a +first-class mutiny on our hands; but, I guess, we had not better do any +more whimpering. They will suspect that we are discussing them and it +will not improve matters any." + +For awhile the sponges came up from below every half hour, but towards +noon a full hour went by without the basket making its appearance. The +lads, at last, became somewhat alarmed at the delay. + +"Do you suppose they are in any trouble down below?" Charley enquired +of Manuel. + +The Greek shook his head. "They would have signaled if anything had +been wrong. There, they are signaling now." + +There came several jerks on the life-lines and the Greeks in charge of +them pulled the divers up and into the boat. The men had been below +for only an hour and the boys were puzzled to account for their coming +up before their time had expired. When their head-pieces were removed +the lads could see that the divers were greatly excited. They spoke +rapidly to those around them, and a hum of excited conversation arose +from the before listless crew. + +"What's the matter?" Charley demanded of Manuel, who seemed to be the +most excited of all. + +"It is nothing," was the quick reply. "The men grew faint for a minute +but they will be all right soon. That often happens to one when diving." + +The Greek's excitement was too great for such a trivial cause and +Charley decided promptly that he was lying. + +In a few minutes the divers resumed their head-pieces and prepared to +descend again. As they stood on the ladders one of the crew handed one +of them a coil of light rope to the end of which was attached a piece +of light wood. + +"What does he want with that buoy?" Charley demanded, sharply. + +"There's a bad hole in the bottom which he wishes to mark so that there +will be no danger of his blundering into it," replied Manuel promptly, +but, again, Charley decided that the fellow was lying. + +"There's something in the wind," he remarked to Walter. "The crew seem +greatly excited, and Manuel, I am sure, is lying." + +A strange change had suddenly taken place in the crew's manner. Before, +they had been silent, sullen and listless, now, they were animated, +their eyes glittered with excitement, and they chattered back and forth +like so many magpies. + +Manuel evidently noticed that the boys were watching them closely, +for he addressed them in a low tone and their chattering ceased. They +resumed their work with something like a return of their former manner, +but it was easy to see that their sullenness was now assumed. + +The lads turned their attention to the course the diver was taking, and +watched for the appearance of the buoy which would show the whereabouts +of the bad place on the bottom. The bit of wood soon floated into view +not a hundred feet from the boat. + +Apparently, the divers were still suffering from their faintness, for +it was a long time after they descended before the first basket load of +sponges appeared, and it was nearly an hour before the second one was +hoisted aboard. + +"We are not getting many to-day," Walter grumbled. "If we don't do +better pretty soon, we had better move and try another place." + +"There is something queer doing," Charley declared. "Just watch those +life-lines and see what you make of it." + +The ropes which were fastened to the divers showed plainly the +direction taken by the men below. The lines were kept faintly taut +to permit of the signals being clearly felt, and their slant gave an +accurate idea of just where the divers were working. + +Walter watched for awhile, a puzzled frown gathering on his face. + +"Why," he exclaimed, "they are right on that bad part of bottom, and +they haven't stirred for the last fifteen minutes." + +The lads continued to watch the tell-tale lines. For another fifteen +minutes the ropes remained motionless, then from their twitching it +became evident that the divers were once more moving around. In a short +time thereafter, the usual signal was given and two baskets of sponges +were hoisted up. + +"That's got me puzzled," said Charley, as the peculiar performance was +repeated. "I guess we had better appear not to have noticed it. The +crew is not looking at us in a very friendly way." + +The attitude of the Greeks seemed to be growing hostile. Many were the +unfriendly glances they cast at the two lads and the boys could hear +their names repeated in the low-toned conversation going on. + +The two lads retired to the bow where, though they effected to be +taking their ease, they kept on the alert for the first signs of +trouble. + +Though nothing happened to further arouse their fears, it was a trying +situation and both were glad when the time came to return to the +schooner. + +They found the captain and Chris both tired from a hard day's labor +cleaning sponges. The wounded sailor was sitting back by the wheel, +looking somewhat pale and haggard, but not a great deal the worse for +his many wounds. + +"His troubles' been sorter praying on his mind all day," said the +captain. "He got a hold of my pad and pencil this morning an' he's been +drawing pictures of the fight and other things--here's one of them." + +The old sailor produced a crumpled piece of paper from his pocket. + +Walter examined the sketch closely. It was not without a certain +cleverness and was better than one would expect of a humble sailor +before the mast. It depicted a struggle between two groups of men. In +one of the groups, the lad could recognize some of the faces of the +Greeks, who, armed with knives and clubs, were assailing the other +party. As the lad bent over to examine the other group more closely, he +uttered an exclamation of surprise. At first glance there was nothing +startling about those whom the Greeks were fighting, but a second +glance showed something familiar about the figures composing it. He +passed the sketch to Charley. + +"What do you make of it?" he asked. + +"Why, that little group is intended to represent us," his chum +exclaimed. "See they are just four in number. That big one with the +beard is meant for the captain and the little one for Chris, the other +two are you and I. Why, the likeness to us is quite striking when you +look at it closely." + +"I believe he intended this for a warning to us," Walter declared. +"Where are the rest of the things he drew, Captain?" + +"I threw them all away, I didn't reckon they meant anything," the old +sailor replied, regretfully. + +"Well, never mind," said Charley cheerfully, "we will get him to draw +them over again. He seems a very intelligent fellow. I wish he could +talk so as to tell us what the crew are saying now. Just look at him." + +The strange sailor was leaning forward listening eagerly to the buzz of +conversation going on between the Greeks. The diving boat's crew seemed +to have conveyed the excitement under which they had been laboring all +day to their shipmates who had remained aboard the schooner. Groups of +two or three were gathered here and there, talking eagerly together. + +Walter called the little Greek lad to him. + +"What are the men talking about, Ben?" + +The little fellow hesitated before replying. It was plain that he was +greatly troubled and frightened. "They talk about nothing much," he +stammered. + +Walter was pressing him with further questions when his chum interfered. + +"It's hardly fair to make him tell," he said. "It might cause him a lot +of trouble. His uncle is glaring at him now, as though he would like to +kill him." + +There was nothing to be learned by watching the crew's actions, so, +signing to the wounded sailor to follow them, the four chums descended +to the cabin where the Greek cook had supper waiting for them. + +Charley was unusually quiet during the meal, but when the Greek cook +and Ben had at last retired carrying the dishes with them, he arose and +closed the cabin door. + +"Captain," he said as he returned to his companions, "I am going down +in a diving suit to-morrow." + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +IN A DIVING SUIT. + + +THE old sailor stared at Charley as though he feared the lad had taken +leave of his senses. + +"Why, you must be crazy," he exclaimed. "You don't know anything about +that kind of diving." + +"I fancy there is not much to learn about it," Charley replied. "I've +been watching the divers closely and it appears very simple. The main +thing seems to be to keep the air hose clear. I've been wanting to go +down ever since the first day, and the strange way the crew have acted +to-day has decided me to try it. I want to see what it is that has so +excited them." + +"It's a fool notion and I ain't going to let you do it," the captain +stormed, but Charley only grinned, cheerfully. + +"It's no use scolding, Captain, I've quite made up my mind to try it. +I've been thinking it over the whole day." + +"I say you sha'n't do it," roared the old sailor. "I'll put you in +irons first, I'm captain of this schooner." + +"But I'm captain of the diving boat," Charley reminded him with a grin, +"If anyone interferes with my doings on my own ship it's mutiny, you +know." + +"Walt, say something to get him out of that fool notion," pleaded the +old sailor, helplessly. + +Walter turned to his chum with a twinkle in his eye, "If you go down, +I'm going too," he said, decidedly. + +"You're two young lunatics," the captain declared, wrathfully. "You're +bound to always run yourselves into danger whenever you get a show. +Neither one of you will ever live to see twenty." + +But, although he fumed and threatened for a long time, the matter +ended, as was always the case when the boys had determined upon a +thing, in his, at last, giving a grudging consent to their plan. + +Chris had followed his little friend Ben on deck as soon as he finished +his supper, but soon after the discussion was ended he returned below +grumbling. + +"Dat white child ain't no fitten company to-night," he declared. "He +acts plum scart to death an' won't talk none tall." + +"You go up and stay around the wheel, 'till we come up," the captain +ordered. "I thought you were there all the time or I'd been up myself, +I don't want none of those fellows fooling around the compass." + +When Chris had retired, still grumbling, Walter brought out a pad and +pencil and handed them to the sailor who had been watching their faces +closely during their animated debate. + +The man seized them eagerly and bending over the pad began to draw +slowly with awkward, clumsy fingers. When the sketch was finished he +tore off the sheet of paper and handed it to Charley whom he seemed to +recognize as the real leader of the little party. + +The lad examined the sketch with eager interest. "He must be a very +cheerful sort of fellow," he remarked, as he passed it to his chum. +"First, he prophesies a fight with the crew, and, now, he has got us +all shipwrecked. Can't say much for his skill with the pencil though; +that hulk does not look much like our pretty 'Beauty'." + +The rude sketch pictured a forlorn, dismasted wreck, covered with +seaweed and with one side badly stove in. + +The sailor had immediately commenced upon another picture which he soon +passed over. + +The boys looked it over but could not decide what it was intended to +represent. + +"It looks like a box full of crackers," Charley said with a grin. +"Well, if he's decided to have us shipwrecked, it's thoughtful of him +to provide us with something to eat." + +But the sailor did not seem to regard it as any laughing matter. He +watched their expressions with a face full of concern, and, when +Walter shook his head to show that he did not understand the sketch, he +laid aside the pad with a heavy sigh. + +"He has given it up," Charley said. "We had better go to bed, I guess +we have a hard day ahead of us to-morrow." + +Chris was recalled from the deck and Walter took his place while the +others turned into their bunks and were soon fast asleep. At midnight +he awakened Charley and at four o'clock Charley was relieved by the +captain. The watches passed away without any alarm, but one thing +struck both of the lads as being curious. All during their watches +three or four of the Greeks remained on deck instead of seeking their +bunks as they usually did right after eating supper. They sat around +up by the forecastle smoking and talking quietly together and the boys +came to the conclusion that they were merely wakeful from the effects +of the liquor they had drank the night before. + +The boys looked longingly at the tempting breakfast served by the Greek +cook, but as they had decided to make the descent to the bottom that +morning they were obliged to be content with a cup of coffee. + +The captain and Chris followed them aboard the diving boat. "We're +going with you," the old sailor explained. "It's a risky thing you're +planning to do an' I'd be too nervous and anxious about you to stay on +the schooner. She will be all right without us for a little while." + +Manuel seemed to note the presence of the captain and Chris with +satisfaction. Before the boat was shoved off from the schooner, he +called the cook to the rail and conversed with him a few minutes in low +tones. + +But his satisfaction changed to frowning anger when the boys began to +don the diving suits. + +"You are foolish to attempt to go down, young sirs," he said, angrily. +"It is dangerous, very dangerous." + +"We are the only ones at all likely to suffer," Charley replied +shortly. "Tend strictly to your pumping, when we think we need advice, +we will ask you for it." + +Before his head-piece was adjusted, he found opportunity to whisper to +Walter. "We won't be able to talk when we get below, so I want you to +follow me and do just what you see me do." + +"I will," promised his chum. "My, don't these things feel queer. I can +hardly lift my feet, they are so heavy. They make me feel helpless as a +little baby." + +The divers adjusted the helmets to the lads' heads and, assisting them +to the rail, helped them down the ladder, and lowered them gently to +the bottom. + +Charley laughed to himself as he caught sight of Walter in the clear +water. His chum looked like some strange monster in the grotesque +diving suit. He waved his hand to him and Walter placed one great paw +over his helmet where his mouth was supposed to be, to show that he was +endeavoring politely to stifle a laugh. + +But the boys' merriment at each other's grotesque appearance was +quickly lost in admiration of the strange scene about them. + +It was as though they were standing in the midst of a beautiful garden. +Here and there were patches of soft white bottom, like winding paths +amongst the marine growth. On every side of the bare places rose +lace-like sea fans of purple, yellow, and red, and feather-like sea +plumes swaying gently to and fro to the motion of the water caused by +the lads' descent. At their bases lay scattered multitudes of shells of +every conceivable shape, size, and hue, while, towering far above the +riot of color, rose mighty trees of snow-white coral among the branches +of which hovered golden, silver, crimson, and every shade of fish, +great and small, their fins flashing gracefully as they darted to and +fro. + +For some moments, the lads stood motionless drinking in the beauty of +the wonderful garden, but they had not descended merely to admire and +Charley, after a long look around, hauled gently on the life-line until +he had some hundred feet coiled neatly at his feet. Walter, though not +comprehending his chum's plan, followed his example. The ruse was to +serve a two-fold purpose, first to lead those on the diving boat to +think that the two were a considerable distance from the boat, and, +second, to deceive them as to the real direction taken by those below. + +As soon as Walter had got his life-line neatly coiled down, Charley +turned at right angles from the spot and moved slowly forward for the +place where he calculated lay the supposed bad place in the Gulf's +bottom. + +He was surprised to find that he could walk with perfect ease and +comfort. The suit, which had been so heavy and cumbersome above the +surface, now rested on him lightly as a feather. He could have walked +with considerable speed had it not been for the care he had to take to +keep his life-line free and clear from the numerous branches of coral. +He watched Walter anxiously to see that he used the same care with the +rope upon which their very lives depended and he was relieved to see +that his chum used every possible precaution. + +Although the water was clear as crystal, neither lad could see far +ahead at that depth below the surface for it was too far for the sun's +light to penetrate brightly. Charley was almost upon the rope with its +floating buoy above before he perceived it. He moved forward now with +the greatest caution for, if Manuel's statement was true, a hasty step +might plunge him suddenly into a nasty hole or a dangerous patch of +quicksand. But the bottom did not seem any different from that over +which they had passed. The rope was fastened to a branch of coral where +there was no indication of a hole or quicksand, but, a little beyond +where the rope was fastened, the lad could see dimly a large black mass +rising up from the bottom. Towards it he slowly made his way, followed +by his chum. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +A CLOSE CALL. + + +CHARLEY'S eyes were becoming accustomed to the semi-gloom and a few +steps forward gave him a clear view of the dark object. One glance, and +he turned to his chum with a cry which was lost in his muffling helmet. + +Before the two lads lay the wreck of a once stately ship, her masts +broken short off and a great gaping hole in her side. She had evidently +lain long in her bed amongst the coral and sponges for long tendrils of +sea moss streamed out from her barnacle-covered sides. + +Someone had been there before them for the moss and marine growth had +been scraped from the vessel's stern revealing the name, "Golden Hope". + +Charley turned from the spelling out of the indistinct letters to see +his chum beckoning to him wildly and he hurried to his side. + +Walter was stooping over an opened box partly filled with what had +once been shining gold pieces but which were now tarnished and almost +unrecognizable in their coat of gray slime. The box had been recently +torn open as was evident from the freshly-splintered wood. + +Charley sat down on the box's edge and did some rapid thinking. The +crew's excitement was now accounted for. They had not come upon a +rich bed of sponges as he had suspected but had discovered a treasure +such as men for ages have fought, struggled, and died to attain. The +half emptied box showed that the divers had already begun to remove +the gold. For a moment, the lad was puzzled to know how they had been +able to bring up what was missing without its being seen. There were +no pockets to the diving suits and they could have carried but a few +pieces at a time in their closed hands. A moment's reflection, however, +brought him to the only possible explanation; the gold must have been +sent up in the sponge basket hidden amongst the lumps of mud from which +it could have been removed by the crew without much risk of discovery. +But it was not the removal of the gold which gave the quick-witted +lad the most concern. The amount taken by the Greeks was likely but a +mere trifle when compared with that which remained. It was the effects +the discovery of such a treasure would have upon an already unruly +crew that he feared. As he had said to Walter but the day before, he +believed it needed but a trifle to fan the Greeks' growing discontent +into open mutiny. Here was riches enough to tempt the most steady band +of sailors and it was but reasonable to suppose that it would tempt +the lawless Greeks to deeds of violence and bloodshed. These thoughts +surged through the lad's mind in far less time than it has taken to +tell of them. He would have liked to have talked the matter over with +his chum and settled upon the wisest plan to follow, but that was +impossible below the surface and signs were useless to convey exact +ideas. He must decide alone upon their immediate course of action and +trust to Walter's quick wit to fall in with what he decided upon. + +Arising he turned to his chum and laid one finger across his lips. +Walter nodded his ponderous head-piece to show that he understood the +sign for silence regarding their discovery. + +Taking up his sponge basket, Charley retraced his steps to the spot +where they had descended followed by his observant chum. Here the +sponges grew in abundance and he at once began to fill his basket, an +example which Walter immediately followed. + +As he bent over to tear up an unusually large sponge he became suddenly +sensible of an agitation of the water near him. Straightening up, he +stood frozen to his tracks with fear and horror. Not ten feet from +where he stood lay a gigantic shark, its belly gleaming white through +the clear water. Its little green eyes were fixed upon him with a +wicked unblinking stare. He let the basket drop from his grasp and +flung up his arms with an unreasoning instinct to protect his head from +the impending attack. At his sudden movement the great fish darted +away. Evidently, it was equally as frightened of the strange unknown +monster it had encountered. + +The shock had left the frightened lad weak and trembling and he had to +rest a few minutes before he could resume the filling of his basket. + +As he placed the last sponge in the basket he turned to signal to his +chum to ascend, but Walter was already gone, his figure, grotesque in +the diving suit, was already well up from the bottom and shooting up +with astonishing swiftness. At the same moment Charley became aware of +a strange sickening sensation. He was choking and gasping for breath. +Before he could realize what had happened the frightful sensation had +passed and he was able to breathe fully and freely, and he felt himself +being pulled swiftly to the surface. + +In a moment he was hoisted above the surface, hauled aboard the boat +and his helmet removed. The captain, white-faced and shaken was leaning +against the mast his revolver in his hand. Chris, ashen-hued, and a +sailor, was still pumping faintly. Close beside the air pump lay Manuel +in apparent unconsciousness. + +"What's happened?" Charley cried. + +"Manuel keeled over in a fit or something," said the captain, brokenly. +"I thought you would both be dead before we could get you to the +surface. It seemed ages before I could get Chris to the pump and the +fellows to hauling you up. They seemed to move mighty slow 'till I +threatened to shoot. They maybe didn't understand what I said but the +sight of the gun made 'em more lively," he concluded, grimly. + +Charley walked over to the prostrate Greek and stood gazing down at his +upturned face. + +"He has no business to faint when he's working the air pump," he said +savagely. "I guess I'll kick him a good hard one in the face for +punishment." + +The manly lad had no such intention of carrying out such a brutal +threat but he wanted to test whether the treacherous Greek was, as he +suspected, really shamming. + +The prostrate man's features twitched, he sighed heavily and rolled +over on his side, Charley's suspicions were confirmed. + +"Captain," said the lad distinctly, "if anything happens to Walter and +I when we are below the surface, I want you to shoot this man without +the slightest hesitation. He is the only one who can understand your +orders and he must be made responsible for our safety." + +"I'll shoot him the first time anything goes wrong," the captain +declared wrathfully, as he caught the wink of Charley's eye. "I feel +like killing him now, for the fright he gave me." + +The shamming Greek did not seem to relish this threatening talk. He +showed signs of surprisingly rapid recovery. In a few minutes he was +able to sit up and look around. + +"I am overjoyed to find you both alive," he said faintly to the two +boys. "Everything grew suddenly black before me when I was pumping and +I knew no more. It is my heart, it troubles me at times. You young +gentlemen must go down no more, it is too risky." + +"We have had enough of it for to-day, but we may try it again +to-morrow," Charley replied, cheerfully. "It is very beautiful and +interesting down below." + +"I hope you avoided the bad place on the bottom," said the Greek, +anxiously. "The divers say it is a dangerous hole." + +"You must think we are fools to venture near such a place," said +Charley, indignantly, and the man looked greatly relieved. + +Above all, the prudent lad wished to keep the crew from thinking that +he and Walter had come upon the treasure. As long as they believed +them ignorant of its existence they would likely continue the work of +secretly removing it without open violence. + +He could not talk over the matter with his chums without danger of +being overheard, and he was forced to appear unconcerned and look on +with indifference while the divers sent up basket after basket of +sponges, in every load of which he was convinced was hidden several +hundred dollars of the gold coins. + +He greatly admired Walter's manner. The lad chattered over the +beautiful gardens they had seen below without a hint in his voice or +manner of the secret they had stumbled upon. + +From time to time the crew shot glances of scowling suspicion at +the little group, but they were evidently reassured by the boys' +cheerfulness and apparent unconcern. + +It was like sitting beside a powder mine with a lighted fuse in it, and +both lads were greatly relieved when the long day dragged away to its +close and the diving boat was headed back for the schooner. + +They were met at the schooner's rail by the cook who seemed greatly +excited and who greeted them with a torrent of rapidly spoken words. + +Manuel listened with a look of sadness, real or assumed, on his face. + +"He says," he interpreted swiftly, "that the wounded man went suddenly +crazy this morning and flung himself into the sea." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE DISCUSSION. + + +THE chums looked at each other in silent comprehension. There was not +a doubt in the mind of either that the sailor had been made away with +during their absence from the ship. They recalled Manuel's talk with +the cook before they left the schooner and the look of satisfaction in +his face when he learned that they were all going on the diving boat. +Even the captain was not slow to grasp the horrible truth. + +"It's a terrible business, but don't let on that you suspect them," he +whispered. "We've got to have a long talk and decide what it's best +to do." To Manuel, he said, curtly, "I reckon, it's the fellow's own +business if he wanted to drown himself, so you ain't got no cause to +grieve. Better divide his things up amongst the crew." + +Although they were eager for a talk alone, the four lounged carelessly +about the deck, striving to appear unconcerned, until the Greek boy +summoned them to supper below. They talked cheerfully until the cook +had retired bearing the empty dishes with him. Then Charley arose and +noiselessly closed the cabin windows and door so that their words would +not reach the deck. Returning to his seat, he called the pale-faced +little Greek lad to him, and, resting his hand on his head, said kindly, + +"Ben, we are not going to repeat anything you say to us, and we want +you to tell us just what has been troubling you the last few days." + +The little lad burst into tears, "They'll kill me," he sobbed, "they'll +kill me." + +"They will never know you told us," Charley assured him. "We will never +let anyone know you told us." + +"They are going to kill you all," faltered the boy as soon as he could +control his sobs. + +"Why do they want to kill us," Charley questioned. + +"My uncle makes them mad. When you give orders he adds lots of bad +names and swear words to them. He tells the crew that you always take +that sailor's part. He tells them you're going to have them all put in +jail when you get back to Tarpon. He tells them you love that sailor +and hate Greeks." + +"But why did they hate that sailor so?" Walter questioned. + +"He Turk," explained the lad. "Greeks hate Turks." + +The chums glanced at each other in swift comprehension. They knew of +the deadly hatred that existed between the two races. A hatred that +had led to the bitter war in which the Greeks had been badly beaten. +They understood now why the handsome sailor had been shunned by all +his shipmates. They could see, too, how the wily Manuel had used their +defense of the man to arouse the crew's resentment against them. The +cunning Greek had woven about them a net of lies which it would be +impossible to explain away. + +"Then they find gold," Ben continued, "that makes them crazy. Manuel +tells them to leave you alone if you don't find out about the money, +but kill you if you do." + +"The infernal rascal," exploded the captain. "He goes in irons and down +in the hold to stay 'till we get to port." + +"Don't do that!" cried the alarmed Greek lad. "They kill you right off +if you do." + +"One thing more," said Charley, as the little fellow's tears began to +flow afresh. "Who killed that sailor?" + +But Ben did not know although it was evident that he did not doubt that +the man had been killed. + +Charley waited until the lad had dried his tears, then let him go with +the caution to tell none of the crew that he had told them. + +"We are in the tightest fix of our lives," he declared, when Ben had +gone. "It seems, from what he says, that we are safe so long as they +do not suspect that we know anything about the gold but I fancy that +Manuel suspects that we have found it and I do not believe we can count +on their being willing to let us reach port alive. The question is, +what had we better do." + +"I don't understand all this talk about gold," said the captain. + +The boys hurriedly told of the discovery they had made while the old +sailor listened with sparkling eyes. + +"Boys," he exclaimed, when their tale was concluded, "you've found what +will make rich men of us all. I remember the excitement caused by the +loss of that ship. It happened twelve years ago. For months tugs and +steamers were scouring the Gulf searching for her. She had cleared from +New Orleans for New York with two million dollars in gold aboard." + +"She might as well contain two million toothpicks so far as we are +concerned," said Charley, impatiently. "I'd give up every cent of it +willingly to be safe in port this minute." + +The captain, brought abruptly back to a realization of their desperate +situation, thought deeply for several moments before he spoke. "We had +ought to be able to hold our own against them fellows," he, at last, +observed. "We are well armed and I don't believe they have got any +weapons except their sheaf knives which ain't no good except at close +quarters." + +"It is not open violence but treachery that I fear," Charley explained. +"We have had two samples already of the way they work. First in that +stoppage of the air hose and, second, in the making away of that +sailor. No, that Manuel is too cunning a rascal to risk open rebellion +when he can accomplish his ends without any personal risk." + +"Why not let them continue to get up the gold and hide it as they have +been doing?" Walter suggested. "We can pretend that we do not know what +is going on. Then when we get to port we can turn them over to the +authorities and recover the money without any trouble." + +Charley shook his head doubtfully. "That will not do," he said. "I am +as convinced as I am that I am living, that we would never reach port +alive. Manuel is too wise to take any chances and he knows that they +could not remove such a large amount of gold from the schooner without +arousing suspicion. I believe he has entrusted the crew to spare us for +the present only because he thinks that some of the fleet might happen +along and grow curious if we were all missing. Besides, it is doubtful +if any of them know enough about navigation to sail the 'Beauty' home. +Us boys, he probably will not hesitate to remove at any time if he can +give the act the appearance of accident, like what occurred to-day. +The captain, he will likely permit to remain alive until near port. He +will have a long story made up to account for our disappearance and the +gold will likely be well hidden amongst the ballast from where he can +remove it without exciting comment so long as we are not on board." + +The lad spoke confidently for he was putting himself in the place +of the cunning Greek and reasoning just what he would do in a like +position. + +"I've got it," exclaimed the captain in triumph. "When they are asleep +we'll batten down the forecastle hatch on them and keep them there +until we get to port. We four can work the schooner in, I guess." + +"I tell you, you don't realize what a cunning rascal that fellow is," +Charley declared in reluctant admiration. "He has provided against just +such an attempt. I did not understand the reason for it last night, but +I noticed that all during my watch on deck there were three or four men +hanging around the deck up forward. It's a great stake they are playing +for and they are not taking the slightest chances." + +"I noticed the men hanging around," admitted the captain, "but I didn't +think much of it at the time. Let's have your plan, if you've got one, +lad." + +"I'm afraid we can't get out of this hole without some violence and +danger," Charley replied. "I have been thinking over it all day and +this is the only thing I can think of that seems to offer any hope +of success. First thing in the morning Walter and I must descend to +the wreck again and bring up enough gold to pay off the men when we +get to port. It's a risky thing to do, but it is necessary to carry +out my plan. You see," he paused to explain, "the men were shipped for +three months and they could demand pay for that time. We haven't got +the money and we have not gathered up enough sponges yet to make up so +large an amount. They could tie the schooner up for their wages and +make us a lot of trouble and expense, a thing Manuel would be sure to +do." + +"But they have got a lot of gold which belongs to us, already," Walter +suggested. + +"We would have hard work to prove that it is ours, and it would mean a +lot of delay," replied his chum quickly. + +"Go on with your plan, lad," said the captain, who perceived that +Charley had thought over all sides of the question with his usual +clearness. + +"After we have brought up the money. We will use their own plan for +bringing it up without its being noticed--we will hang around and let +them go on with the work as usual all day, for it would not do to fight +it out on the diving boat. When we get back to the schooner at night, +we will bring matters to a head. We will make them get up anchor and +sails and head back for Tarpon. There's bound to be trouble and plenty +of it but we'll be prepared for it and Tarpon is only two days' sail. +What do you think of the plan?" + +He did not have to wait long for a chorus of objections. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +A DESPERATE PLAN. + + +"I DON'T see that your plan is any better than mine," Walter objected. + +"To tarry along while they remove the gold would give them time enough +to remove us one by one," Charley replied, "While by doing as I have +suggested they will have but little chance for treachery, and, although +we will be sure to have trouble with them as soon as we order them to +get up anchor, I think we can manage to keep the upper hand of them for +the short time it will take to reach Tarpon." + +"Golly, dis nigger plum hates to run off an' lebe all dat gole," Chris +observed. + +"We'll come back for it," Charley declared. "As soon as we have paid +off the Greeks and got rid of them, we'll pick a crew of Americans and +hurry back." + +"And while we are wasting time in getting a new crew, the Greeks will +have spread the news and a dozen boats will be here before we can get +back." + +"You forget that the captain is the only one who knows where we are +by the latitude and longitude. Without knowing that, fifty boats might +hunt for a month without seeing that little buoy. It would be like +looking for a needle in a haystack." + +"Hang that pesky Greek," exclaimed the captain. "He asked me this +morning for the schooner's position, an' I gave it to him." + +Charley's face fell, "That fellow seems to think of everything," +he sighed. "But it's hard to get an exact position by latitude and +longitude alone, isn't it, Captain?" + +"A navigator is lucky if he hits within four or five miles of the place +he's aiming for. Of course it can be done if one is extra careful, but +I could not swear to our exact position on the chart now, 'though I +reckon I could come within a couple of miles of it." + +"Good," Charley exclaimed, "I guess, we can make it impossible for them +to find the wreck again, if they should manage to get back before us. +It will mean a little change in my plan, though. Instead of getting +off to-morrow night, we will have to wait until the next morning." He +hastily outlined his amended plan, which, after they had discussed it +carefully, his companions agreed was as promising as any they could +think of. + +They had hardly finished their discussion when there came a knock at +the cabin door and Manuel entered, smiling. + +"I wished to enquire if the young gentlemen intend to go down in the +suits again to-morrow?" he said, suavely. + +"We haven't decided yet," Charley said, carelessly, "Why do you wish to +know?" + +"Because, if you are, the air hose had better be greased. If it is left +dry for long the rubber sometimes cracks and makes leaks." + +"Then have it well greased," the captain ordered. + +"I guess he's afraid of being shot if anything happens, an' is taking +every precaution," chuckled the captain when the Greek had retired. + +"Perhaps," agreed Charley, doubtfully, "but, I confess, I am afraid of +that fellow. I'll certainly look over that hose carefully before I go +down to-morrow." + +When they ascended to the deck, which they had forgotten to have +watched in the excitement of their discussion, they found Manuel and +two of the divers busily engaged in greasing the rubber air hose with +bacon slush from the cook's galley. + +Charley's was the first watch on deck and, long after his companions +had retired to their bunks, he paced back and forth aft of the main +mast pondering thoughtfully over the plan he had suggested. It was +the best he could conceive under the circumstances but he realized +that its execution would be attended with the gravest dangers. Most +of all, he dreaded the proposed descent to the bottom for the gold. +He was convinced that Manuel had hit upon some scheme to get rid of +him and Walter without danger to himself. Again and again the lad's +thoughts came back to the greasing of the hose. If the operation was +so important, why had the divers not done it before--They were not the +kind of men to take any unnecessary risks in their dangerous work below +the surface. He had often noted the care with which they had examined +hose and pump before each descent. + +But, while the lad puzzled over the matter, he did not neglect to +keep a watchful eye upon the three or four Greeks who lingered on the +forward deck. If he had needed any reminder of the peril of their +situation, it would have been found in the sight of those watchful, +restless figures. + +Near the end of his watch, he gave vent to a low exclamation--He had +discovered the reason for the greasing of the hose. For a few minutes +he was appalled by the cunning fiendishness which had prompted the +act. The two hoses lay coiled close together in great heaps on deck. +Sauntering over to them, the lad stooped over each pile for a second, +then, straightening up, he resumed his slow steady pacing. + +At midnight he awoke Walter to take his place. "I've solved it," he +told him. + +"Solved what?" asked Walter, sleepily. + +"Their reason for greasing the hose." + +"What is it?" + +"To attract sharks and lead them to bite it in two." + +"The fiends!" Walter cried as the devilish ingenuity of the plot dawned +upon him. "What are you going to do about it?" + +"Nothing, until we are ready to descend," his chum replied, "then it +will be too late for them to practice another surprise for us." + +"Are you sure you are right," asked Walter, doubtfully. "They are not +sure that we are going to descend, you know." + +"I think Manuel feels pretty confident that we will. If we fail to do +so, he likely will find some excuse for replacing the greased hose with +new ones. You can bet, he's got it all figured out. He is the brainiest +villain I ever met up with. Better hurry on deck now, and keep a close +watch out. There's no telling what other scheme he's got hatched up." + +Although he retired to his bunk at once, Charley lay long awake. The +morrow would be filled with danger and his nerves were already growing +tense for the struggle which he foresaw. The Captain had relieved +Walter on deck before he at last fell into a troubled slumber from +which he awoke just as day was beginning to break. + +By the time it was light enough to see, he was up and dressed and +making preparations for the carrying out of his hazardous plan. From +the lazerette, he procured a long coil of light rope which he placed +in one corner of his cabin. He next opened up his valise and got out +the ammunition he had purchased in Tarpon and a small, but excellent +pocket compass. These he placed in his bunk where they would be handy +if needed quickly. + +When breakfast was over, the diving boat was brought alongside and all +got on board except the cook and four men left to take care of the +schooner and clean the sponges gathered the previous day. + +"We have decided to go down and have one more look at those sea +gardens," Charley told Manuel when the sponging ground was reached. +"They are beautiful enough to invite another visit." + +The Greeks' face expressed satisfaction. "They are beautiful," he +agreed, "but the young gentlemen are rash to go down. Let the divers +take the risks--they are paid to do it." + +"We will be very careful," Charley said, cheerfully. "Walt, we had +better look over the hose before we go down, the divers always do." + +The greased hose had been recoiled in the tubs and the boys proceeded +to overhaul them, foot by foot, searching them closely for cracks or +punctures. + +Walter was puzzled to comprehend his chum's plan. After what he had +discovered, surely he did not intend to risk using the dangerous +things, but he was well enough acquainted with Charley's shrewdness +to hold his tongue and keep his face from betraying his uneasiness. +He felt sure that there was a good reason for his chum's actions. He +had but just reached this decision when he came upon a gapping hole in +the hose. It looked much as though it had been cut in two with a sharp +knife. + +"Here's a bad place," he announced. "It's lucky I found it. Air can't +be pumped through this thing." + +"And here's a hole in mine, too," Charley declared in accents so +surprised that no one would have dreamed that he had made both slits +the night before to serve as an excuse for the rejection of the +dangerous hose. "We can't use either one of them, we'll have to get out +the new hose." + +Manuel's face for a second was a picture of bewilderment and baffled +rage, but in a moment he was again suave and smiling. "I don't see what +can have made those cuts," he declared. "They can be patched in a few +minutes, however. It would be a pity to throw away such hose, it is as +good as new except for those two little places which can be speedily +fixed." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +TOO LATE. + + +"NO patched hose for me," Charley said, decidedly. "If the divers want +to risk using it, they can." + +It was not just the reply the wily Greek had expected and he hastened +to answer. + +"You are right, it does not pay to take risks. I will get the new hose +and put it on." + +But Charley was ahead of him. He did not intend to give the wily Greek +any chance to play tricks with the new hose. He brought it out from +the lockers in which it was kept and, after examining it carefully +connected it to the air pumps and helmets. Before putting on his +head-piece, he tried the air pump also. It proved to be in perfect +working order and sent the air gushing through the hose. Manuel +fastened the life-line below his arms, but Charley called the captain +to adjust the heavy helmet over his head. + +As soon as his feet touched the bottom, Charley moved forward for +the wreck, Walter at his side. Neither lad wished to remain below a +second longer than was necessary for they fully realized that they were +running a terrible risk in descending at all. They found the box they +had discovered the day before entirely empty, the divers had brought +another out from the wreck's hold and broken it open. The gold was in +twenty dollar pieces and in a few minutes the lads had transferred +several hundred dollars from the box to the baskets. It was hard to +resist taking more but the risks were too great to permit it. Quickly +hastening back to the patch of sponges, they tore up several baskets +full of the mud and covered fungus and, making a slit in each with +their sheaf knives, stuffed in the coins. It was the very plan the +divers had followed but Charley had decided that they would not be +looking for the adopting of their own trick. As soon as the last coin +was hidden and the loaded sponges placed in the basket with others on +top of them to complete the load, Charley signed to Walter to ascend +and stood watching him until he had been drawn to the surface, then he +gave the signal to be drawn up himself. He was raised a few feet up +from the bottom then he sank quickly back to the place from which he +had risen and he saw the end of the life-line dangling in the water +twenty feet above his head. _It had been pulled loose from his body._ + +Charley stood for a moment looking at it in terrified dismay while his +quick brain took in the awful significance of his position. Frightened +as he was, he could not but admire the quickness with which Manuel had +hit upon another scheme for his undoing after that of the greased hose, +had failed, for he had not a doubt that the Greek had fastened the +life-line to him in such a manner that it would pull loose with a hard +jerk. He was in no immediate danger of death for the air hose still +connected him with the surface and the fresh air still came gushing in +a welcome stream into his helmet, but a moment's reflection convinced +him that this was not all of Manuel's scheme, for the Greek would know +that the captain and Walter would soon become uneasy over his delay +and would start an investigation which would quickly reveal that the +life-line was no longer attached to him. Clearly, the Greek had another +card up his sleeve which he would soon play and Charley waited for it +with every nerve strained to keenest tension. He felt longingly of +the air hose, wondering if the frail tube would hold for him to pull +himself up to the surface by it, but he quickly decided that it would +not stand the heavy strain and to break it would mean his instant +death. Keeping one eye on the life-line so tantalizingly out of his +reach he moved slowly forward until he stood beneath the diving boat +which showed like a dim shadow above him. Suddenly a thrill of horror +went through him, the diving boat was slowly drifting away--Manuel had +played his trump card. In a flash the terror-stricken lad comprehended +the situation. Some one of the Greeks, under Manuel's instructions, had +stealthily severed the cable, relying on the boat's slow drift being +unnoticed by the captain and Walter until it had dragged apart the +frail air hose. But, just as Charley had given up all hope and waited +for the parting of the hose which would mean his death, the dangling +life-line was jerked up out of sight,--his companions had discovered a +part at least of his plight--upon their next actions depended his life +or death. + +The next few seconds seemed like hours to the helpless lad, then a dark +speck appeared in the water above him quickly growing in size until he +could see that it was Chris fighting his way downward with long steady +strokes and following the air hose in his descent. The little negro +was nearly exhausted when he reached the bottom. Thrusting the end of +the line he had brought into Charley's hand, he turned upward and shot +to the surface like a rocket. Charley whipped the line about his waist +and gave the signal to pull up. He was swiftly pulled to the surface, +hauled aboard the boat, and his helmet removed. Chris, breathing +heavily, was standing by the mast, the water dripping from him. Walter +and the captain, pale with fear, stood close beside him. + +"Thank God, you're safe, lad," cried the old sailor, tears in his +eyes. "We feared the air hose would part before Chris could get to you. +We had just pulled on the life-line and found it had come loose from +you when we discovered the boat had gone adrift. I reckon, she must +have chafed her cable in two against a sharp piece of coral. Queer how +everything happens all at once that way, sometimes." + +It was clear the simple old sailor did not suspect that the trouble was +anything but an accident, and Charley hastened to reply, + +"All is well that ends well, but I've nearly had the life scart out of +me. I don't think I'll ever want to go down again." + +He was watching Manuel closely as he spoke and he noted with +satisfaction the expression of relief on the Greek's swarthy face. +If he could only keep him from thinking that he knew anything about +the gold and had not discovered his treachery, he hoped to be able to +avoid open violence until they were prepared and ready for it. He was +convinced that the Greek was too cowardly to risk the danger of being +shot in open mutiny so long as he thought himself unsuspected and free +to scheme their removal without danger to himself. + +The diving boat was worked back to her old position, another anchor +dropped, and donning their suits the divers resumed operations below. +When they came to the surface at the end of their two hour trick below +they seemed strangely excited and conversed eagerly with Manuel and the +rest of the crew. Charley was for awhile puzzled to account for their +excitement, but 'ere long the solution came to him. Like all plans +intended to deceive, his had contained a fatal defect. + +"Walt," he whispered to his chum, "those chaps have noticed that some +of the gold has been removed from that box. We are in for trouble, now, +I fear." The Captain and Chris were warned to be on their guard but +it seemed that the warning was unnecessary, the excited talk amongst +the crew soon ceased and the fresh divers quietly prepared for their +descent. + +But in spite of the quietness, there was a tension and earnestness +in the crew's manner which made the anxious little party of chums +feel that they were standing at the edge of a powder mine which might +explode at any minute. + +"I would rather have open fighting than this awful waiting," Walter +whispered. + +"We will have that soon enough," said his chum, grimly. "It will come +as soon as we try to make them get the schooner under way." + +The long anxious day at last drew to its close, anchor was got up on +the diving boat, and she was headed back for the schooner. + +As they passed a large piece of driftwood covered with large black +birds with very long necks, Manuel pointed at them, "Those are fine +eating," he said wistfully. "If the young gentlemen could kill a few it +would give us all a great feast." + +Walter looked at Charley who nodded assent, for he was not loath that +the Greek should witness their skill with the revolver. + +Both boys had practiced often with their revolvers and were better than +average marksmen. Their pistols were automatics, a style of weapon with +which even the unskillful can shoot fairly accurately. Walter fired six +shots in as many seconds, killing four birds and wounding one. Charley +fired four shots at the same time, killing two birds and crippling a +third. The rest of the birds took flight before the boys could shoot +more. The captain and Chris emptied their pistols at the flying flock +without success. + +The diving boat was run alongside the dead birds and they were picked +up by the crew. Manuel seemed delighted, "The young gentlemen are +wonderful shots," he declared. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +OUTWITTED. + + +THE chums hastened below when the schooner was reached for they were +eager to talk over the next move to be made. + +"Things have got to be brought to a head right off," declared the +captain when Charley had acquainted him with his suspicions of Manuel's +foul play. "It's rank foolishness to linger along an' give them more +chances to work out their devilish tricks. It's better to have trouble +with them right now while we are prepared than to wait and perhaps have +them take us unawares." + +"Thank goodness the time for action is close at hand," Charley agreed, +"I could not stand this anxiety and suspense much longer. Let's go over +our plan once more and make sure that we each know our parts so that +there will be no hitch when we come to carry them out. Now as soon as +we have supper Chris and I will get into the dingy and pretend that we +are going to row around for fun. We will pull back and forth until it +gets good and dark, then we'll gradually work out to that buoy. We +will cut it adrift, take it aboard, pull due East from the schooner for +a mile and anchor it again. That will throw them way off the scent if +they should manage to get back here again before us, while it will tell +us just where to look for the wreck. That part is easy, the trouble +will come when we get back to the boat. First thing we had better do is +to stretch several ropes across the deck from rail to rail just forward +of the mainmast. That will delay and bother them if they should try to +rush us in a body. The next move will be to get Manuel aft and get the +irons on him. We had better get him down here in the cabin to attempt +that. As soon as we get him helpless, we will carry him up and make him +give our orders to get up anchor and get sail on the schooner. He's too +great a coward to encourage his shipmates to make a rush for us so long +as he is in our power. They may try it in spite of him, however, when +they realize that the gold is going to be lost to them. If they do we +will have to fight them off while Chris tends to the wheel. We don't +want any bloodshed if we can help it but we mustn't let them get aft of +the mainmast, they would make short work of us if it ever came to close +quarters. Do you all understand now what we have to do?" + +His companions nodded. + +"Then we had better reload our pistols, fill up our cartridge belts, +and get ready," he continued. "I'll get the ammunition." + +But in a moment he was back from his cabin, his face pale and grave. + +"How many shells have you got left in your pistol?" he demanded. + +"One," Walter replied, while Chris and the captain broke open their +weapons to show only empty chambers. + +"I have got three shots left, that makes four altogether," Charley +said, hopelessly. "All the rest of our ammunition has been stolen out +of my bunk." + +His companions grew as grave and pale as himself at the announcement. +With only four shots left they were practically helpless in the hands +of the Greeks. + +"There is just one chance left," Charley declared, desperately. "We +have got to get Manuel in our power and try to control the crew through +him. It may work and it may not, but it's our only hope. Chris, go tell +him we want to see him here in the cabin." + +As soon as the little negro had gone, Charley brought out a pair of +handcuffs from his grip and placed them in his pocket. "When I give +the signal, get them on him," he said. "I'll lock the door so that he +cannot get out or the crew come to help him. He'll likely put up a +fight and we'll have to watch out for his knife, but the three of us +had ought to be able to handle him. But hush, here they come now." + +Footsteps sounded on the companionway stairs, the cabin door opened, +and Chris appeared, closely followed by the Greek. The little negro +stepped inside but Manuel paused on the threshold and swept a keen +glance over the assembled party. Perhaps some instinct warned him of +his danger, perhaps he decided that the time had come for his last +treacherous move. With a quick leap, he sprang back through the open +doorway, slammed the door to, and bolted it outside, and the little +band of chums were prisoners in the cabin of their own ship. + +Charley leaped from his chair, but he was too late. + +"Outwitted," he cried as he sank back into his seat. "Beaten at every +point of the game. What fools, what bunglers we are." There was as much +chagrin as fear in his exclamations. To be so badly beaten after all +his vigilance and careful planning was hard to bear. + +His companions sat silent with despair. So suddenly had it all happened +they had not yet had time to realize that they were completely in the +hands of the Greeks who could do with them as they pleased. + +Charley flipped open his pistol and handed one of his remaining +cartridges to his chum, "That gives us two apiece," he observed, +"although I doubt if we will either of us need them." He retired to +his cabin and reappeared with a blanket and a book. He spread out the +blanket on the floor and stretching himself out on it prepared to read. +"Might as well get what enjoyment we can," he said. "There's nothing we +can do, so we might as well take it easy while we may." + +"How can you be so careless?" his chum exclaimed, "any minute they may +come down upon us." + +"Little danger of that," the other replied, coolly. "They know we've +got four shots left yet. What would be the use of their taking chances +when they have got everything in their own hands." + +But his companions could not view their position with the same hopeless +resignation. While he read on apparently unconcerned, they discussed +plan after plan for escape from their prison and perilous situation, +only to reject one after the other as wildly impracticable. At last +they abandoned the discussion in despair. + +"Better turn in and try to get a good night's rest," Charley advised +them calmly. "I will keep watch for the first four hours, although I +don't believe there's the slightest use of it." + +"I'm too hungry to sleep," Walter declared. "I wonder why they do not +send us down our supper." + +"Bless your simple little soul," his chum exclaimed, "They do not +intend us to have anything to eat. I thought you understood that." + +His companions looked at each other in dismay. This, the greatest of +all their perils, had not before occurred to them. They understood now +the awfulness of their position. All the food and water were stored +forward. The Greeks had only to let them alone and they would slowly +die of hunger and thirst. + +"They will not get us that way," declared Walter, desperately. "Before +I'll die of hunger and thirst I'll set the schooner on fire." + +Charley nodded approval. "I've been thinking of that myself," he said. +"A quick death is better than a slow torturing one. But there is plenty +of time to talk of that. While there is life there is hope and I have +a feeling that something is going to turn up to help us out of this +scrape. I've just happened to think of one thing that's in our favor." + +He was prevented from explaining the new hope which had occurred to him +by a knock on the cabin door and Manuel's sneering voice enquiring, + +"Are the gentlemen quite comfortable?" + +"Quite," Charley assured him, calmly. "Much more comfortable than you +and your mates will be when the law reckons with you." + +"There is no law at sea but the law of the strongest and most cunning," +the Greek said, smoothly. "But I bear a proposal from my shipmates for +your distinguished consideration." + +"State it," replied the lad, briefly. + +"You are all in a bad position," stated the Greek with oily +maliciousness. "You were cunning but not cunning enough or our +positions would now be reversed. We have only to do nothing now and you +will all die. It would sadden our hearts to lose such loving friends +but we would strive to bear up bravely under the blow. But why should +you all die when we are willing to spare one. All that one would have +to do would be to take an oath to be faithful and true to us and do as +we bid him. Not only would his life be spared, but he would receive a +share of the great wealth we have discovered." + +"Why are you so very generous in your offers?" Walter demanded, +sarcastically. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +IMPRISONED. + + +"WE need one of you," explained Manuel, with startling frankness. +"Perhaps we could get along without but it does not pay to take +chances. There is a government cutter which patrols the banks to see +that the sponging vessels are complying with the laws. She may come +upon us accidentally any time and it would be awkward explaining why we +continued to work without American officers. It would very likely get +us into trouble. But if one of you takes the part of the captain and +shows the papers and explains that the rest have died from fever, all +will go smoothly." + +"I suppose you have decided which one of us you want?" Charley asked, +curiously. + +"Any one of you will do, but we prefer you. You have brains enough to +realize where your own interests lie. It is easier to handle a smart +man than a fool. Consider the chance we are giving you, on the one hand +slow, painful, certain death; on the other, an honored position, great +wealth and safety--we are generous indeed." + +"But how do you know that I will play fair?" + +"The moment you joined us you would be as liable to the law as the rest +of us," Manuel said calmly, "We would live or hang together. You would +not dare to trifle with us, and I should watch you closely all the +time." + +"Here is my answer," declared Charley, whose indignation had been +steadily rising at the cold-blooded proposal. "If you would all keep +your part of the agreement,--which I am convinced you would not do, I'd +die rather than join such a pack of dirty murderers." + +"You are a bigger fool than I thought," replied the Greek calmly. +"I will leave you to consider the matter better. Hunger is a great +persuader, and I am in hopes that you will soon see where your best +interests lie. Good-night, gentlemen, good-night, may your dreams be of +the pleasantest." + +"He's evidently somewhat worried," said Charley, hopefully, when the +Greek's mocking voice had ceased. "He believes, I guess, that there is +a good chance of the cutter coming upon him or he would not make such +a proposal, although he would not keep his part of it any longer than +the danger lasted. Our only hope is to keep up our strength and spirits +as long as possible. There is a chance that the cutter may come along +before it is too late. Better all turn in and get some rest while you +are still not too hungry to sleep. I will call one of you to take my +place as soon as my four hours are up, although I do not believe that +they will trouble us." + +The lad was right in his belief. The night passed away without any +alarm and they were able by turns to get some little sleep. With the +coming of daylight, they crowded to the windows and searched the dreary +waste of waters for sign of smoke or sail, but found none. The crew +were going about their work in cheerful unconcern. Leaving a half dozen +men on the schooner, the balance got aboard the diving boat and sailed +out to the sponge ground where they could be seen working steadily all +day bringing up the gold from the bottom. The prisoners suffered much +during the long day from their increasing hunger and thirst. + +At night the diving boat returned to the schooner and the dispirited +watchers could see that the crew had not wasted their day by any means. +Both sponge baskets were nearly full of the gold coins. + +"We've got to do something, I don't care how desperate it is," declared +Captain Westfield. "Anything is better than this keeping still and +suffering. By to-morrow this time we'll be too weak to do much and thar +ain't no certainty that the cutter will come along this way at all. I'm +in for doing something, no matter what." + +Charley turned from his gazing out of the window, "Look here, +Captain," he called, softly. "Speak low," he cautioned as the old +sailor crept to his side, "we don't want them to hear us on deck." + +"Geewhilikens!" whispered the old seaman in swift comprehension, +"they've left the diving boat fastened right under our windows." + +"God grant that they may not think to move it," the lad replied, +trembling with excitement. "We can do nothing until it gets dark and +they retire to the forecastle." + +Walter and Chris were quickly made acquainted with the suddenly-offered +chance of escape and their joy knew no bounds. + +Then followed hours which seemed like days to the breathless, anxious +watchers. The Greeks ate their supper and lounged around the deck +talking and laughing. It seemed as though they would never retire to +their bunks. But at last their voices gradually ceased and silence +settled down upon the schooner. Charley cautiously opened one of the +big windows and swung it outward, then climbing softly toward the +opening, lowered himself to the diving boat's deck. The Captain, +Walter, and Chris followed. Not a word was spoken for each realized +the terrible risk they were running. As soon as all were crouched +motionless aboard, Charley, with his knife, severed the rope which +bound them to the schooner and the boat drifted slowly away from the +ship's side. + +No one moved until the schooner was at last lost in the darkness. + +"Start up the engine," said Charley, as he took the helm, and Walter +slipped down amongst the machinery. After a few minutes' fumbling in +the darkness, he crept back. + +"There's no gasoline in the tank," he announced. + +"Everything seems against us," Charley sighed. "Well, get sail on her. +We will have to do the best we can." + +In a few minutes the great square sail was spread, and, leaning over, +the little craft sent a line of foam rippling from her bow. + +"They'll have hard work finding us in this darkness," exulted the +captain as he took the helm from Charley. "I reckon, we'd better shape +a course for the nearest port,--that's Judson. As soon as we get thar, +we can telegraph to all the ports along the coast to watch out for +the schooner. We've got 'em now, I reckon, lads, they'll have to put +in somewhere sooner or later, an' they'll be nabbed. I feel just like +yelling for joy." + +The rising spirits of the little party were helped by Chris' discovery +of a couple of loaves of stale black bread, and part of a bottle of +ripe olives in one of the lockers. They made a meagre but very welcome +repast upon the uninviting food. + +But their joy over their lucky escape was soon dampened by the +threatening appearance of the Western sky. A heavy bank of clouds was +slowly rising there from which came flashes of lightning and the rumble +of distant thunder. + +"I reckon, it ain't nothin' but a thunder squall," the captain assured +them. "Thar ain't no call to be uneasy, this is a mighty seaworthy +little craft. I reckon, we could ride out a right smart gale in her if +we had it to do." + +Before they ran much further the captain gave the order to lower and +reef the great sail. When hoisted again, it was only a tiny patch of +canvas, as compared with its former size. + +"Thar's only one thing for us to do when that squall strikes us an' +that's to scud before it," the old captain declared. "We can't heave +her to under that sail. Luckily, the way it's coming won't blow us out +of our course much." + +They had not long to wait for the storm to burst. The wind soon +descended with a violence that threatened to bury the diving boat in +the seas it brought with it. But the little craft had been built to +stand just such weather, and, quickly gathering headway, she darted +away before the gale. With the wind came the rain in great driving, +blinding sheets. The boys hailed its appearance with joy. They spread +out their jackets, bits of sail, and even their hats to catch the +precious drops. In a short while they had secured enough to quench +their intense thirst. This done, they gathered around the captain at +the helm ready to render any assistance in their power. There was +little they could do for the old sailor would trust no one but himself +to steer in the heavy sea-way. As the hours passed by without showing +any abatement of the storm, it became evident to his companions that he +was growing anxious. + +"I don't like the way it's hanging on," he declared. "We must be making +at least twelve miles an hour and, at that rate, we will have the land +close aboard before daylight. Crawl forward, Charley, an' keep a sharp +look-out, the sky is clearing some an', I reckon, you can see a few +hundred feet ahead." + +The lad obediently worked his way up into the bow, and bracing himself +against the anchor bitts, peered ahead into the darkness. He could make +out nothing at first but the heavy foam-flecked, tossing water. He sat +watching intently till, at last, Walter crawled forward to take his +place. He had only got part way back to the stern when there came a cry +from his chum, + +"Hard down! hard down!" + +With true seaman's quickness, the Captain jammed the long tiller over +and the little craft, escaping broaching in the trough of the seas by a +miracle, shot up into the wind--a second too late. + +"Hang on for your lives!" the old sailor cried. + +Black masses loomed out of the darkness to leeward. A great wave picked +up the helpless boat and flung it with crashing, breaking timbers, upon +the rocks. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +WRECKED. + + +THE boys had obeyed the old sailor's order, and, though greatly shaken +by the shock, they retained their hold on the boat. + +"Quick, get on the rocks," shouted the Captain. "She'll pound to pieces +in a jiffy." + +Fortunately, the boat's bow had been driven up on the ledge nearly +out of the water. The boys dropped over the side followed by the +old sailor, and, though beaten and bruised against the sharp rocks +succeeded in struggling out upon the one which reared itself above +the water. They glanced back to where the boat had struck, but, short +as had been their struggle out, it had witnessed the destruction +of the staunch craft. Only that portion of her bow lodged upon the +reef remained intact, the balance of her hull was a mass of twisted, +splintered, broken planks. + +Great as was the danger from which they had escaped, their present +position was still far from safe. The slippery rock afforded but +insecure footing and it was frequently swept by the larger seas. At +such times, they had all they could do to keep from being swept off its +slimy surface. + +"I reckon, we've struck on a reef," the Captain said, anxiously. "It +all depends upon the tide whether we are safe or not. If it's low tide, +now, high tide will cover this rock so deep that we'll not be able to +hang on to it." + +It soon became evident that the tide was still rising, though slowly. +The waves began sweeping over the flat rock with such violence that +the tired, wretched, anxious, little party could hardly maintain their +footing. To the right and left of them, rose other higher masses of +rock, but they did not dare to attempt to reach them through the +darkness and the boiling surf. Wet, cold, hungry, and wretched; they +clung to their insecure refuge until day began to break in the East. +With the coming of light they strained their brine-smarting eyes to +discover what manner of place it was upon which they had been thrown. +The outlook was not reassuring. They were, as the Captain had surmised, +on a point of low-lying reef, most of which was constantly wave-swept +by the monstrous surges. To the East of them, lay a low, marshy shore +dotted here and there with small islands covered with cedar hammocks, +but between them and the islands was at least two miles of foaming +water. The boys gazed wistfully at the longed-for land. + +"We can't make it," Charley said, sadly. "Chris might, perhaps, be +able to swim it, but it would be a long swim for the rest of us at any +time, and, tired and weak as we are now, it would be impossible. We +will have to stick it out here until the storm goes down a bit, then, +try to fashion some kind of a raft out of the planks of the diving +boat." + +"We can't be far from Judson," said the Captain, with an attempt at +cheerfulness. "A boat may come by an' pick us up any minute." + +But the boys were not cheered by any such prospect. They knew that the +chance of any boat being out in such weather was very small indeed. +One fact, however, gave them a little hope; the tide was undoubtedly +falling. It had evidently been almost at its height when they had +landed on the rock. + +"I wish we had something to eat," Walter sighed, "we have had nothing +but a little bread in two days. I begin to feel weak all over." + +Chris gazed thoughtfully at the water on the shore-side of the rock. "I +reckon, I might find somethin' down dar," he observed. "I'se goin' to +try it anyway. You white chilluns has sho' got to hab somethin' to eat." + +Although the water was somewhat smoother to the lee of the rocks, +it boiled and foamed there threateningly and the boys endeavored to +dissuade the plucky little negro from the attempt, but their objections +only made him the more determined. + +"Golly! you chilluns doan know what a diver dis nigger is," he said, +proudly. "You jes' stay still an' watch him now." He removed his +clothes, handing them to Charley to hold, slipped over the side of the +rock, and sank down beneath the surface. He was gone so long that the +watchers had begun to grow anxious when he reappeared, blowing like a +porpoise. In one hand, he held tightly clenched, a big stone crab and a +large conch. + +"Take 'em," he exclaimed, "I'se goin' down again. Dar's heaps more of +dem on de bottom." + +He continued diving until he had brought up six more conchs and two +more crabs, then he crawled out on the rock completely exhausted, and +held up one foot for their inspection. There was a tiny puncture in the +sole of it from which the blood was slowly trickling. + +"I reckon, I'se goin' to hab some trubble wid dat foot," he observed, +gravely. "Ole Mister Stingaree gib me a dig dar. He warn't much bigger +dan a plate, but der horns are powerful poison." + +His announcement sent a chill of fear to the hearts of his companions, +for they all well-knew the dangerous character of the flat, horn-tailed +fish which lurks on the bottom in Florida waters. The Captain did not +lose a second in whipping out his sheath knife and cutting open the +puncture which he washed out thoroughly with sea water. He then made +Chris sit on the edge of the rock and hang his foot over in the water. + +The plucky little negro bore the operation with unflinching +cheerfulness. "I sho' wish you'd open up one ob dem conch for me, Massa +Charley," he observed. "If dis ting's goin' to make me sick, I wants to +be dat much ahead." + +Charley quickly broke open one of the conchs and gave him the meat,--a +big lump of tough flesh, almost sufficient for an entire meal. He also +opened several others for the Captain, Walter, and himself, upon which +they made a hearty and strengthening, if somewhat tasteless, meal. +Chris ate but little of the tough meat, he soon pushed it away from him +with a weary little sigh. + +"I doan want no moah," he said, quietly. "I'ze gettin' berry sick. +Reckon ole Mister Stingaree dun got dis nigger for sho'." + +His little ebony face soon took on a dull-ashen hue and he began to +vomit violently; passing from these spells into a heavy stupor, the +mysterious subtle poison from the stingaree was getting in its work. +His grieving companions watched him in helpless suspense, there was +nothing they could do to relieve his sufferings. + +"We can't let him die like this," Charley cried, as the little sufferer +twitched in spasms of pain. "I am going to try to reach shore and find +help. He has taken bigger risks for us many a time." + +Neither Walter or the Captain tried to stop him. They would have gladly +offered to make the attempt in his place but he was the strongest and +best swimmer of the three. + +He removed his jacket and shoes and with a last good-bye, plunged off +of the rock and headed for the distant shore. He had not gone more than +twenty yards when he stopped with a cry of joy. + +"Come on," he called back, "the water isn't more than three feet deep +here. There's only a deep place near the rocks and you can get across +that easily." + +But he had to return to help them get Chris across the deep narrow +channel, for the little negro's struggles in his spasms threatened +to drown his helpers. At last, the dangerous stretch of water was +safely crossed, and, leaving Walter and the Captain to half float and +half carry Chris between them, the lad waded ahead, picking out the +shoalest and smoothest path to the shore. They arrived there spent and +panting and sank down for a moment to recover their breath. It was not +an inviting-looking place where they had landed. A low rock-strewn +marsh, covered with tall, rank grass stretched away before them for +two or three miles before it met the higher, heavily-wooded mainland. +Here and there the marsh was dotted with small, island-like clumps of +dark green cedar trees, and, picking up the light, little negro in his +strong, young arms, Charley headed for the nearest of these, followed +by his exhausted companions. The passage was made with difficulty; low +needle-pointed rocks strewed the way, and here and there lay pools +of soft, boggy mud, tenanted by repulsive, swollen looking moccasins. +It needed care to avoid the one without stepping on the other, but, +at last, the patch of high ground was reached and, laying his burden +beneath a wide-spreading cedar, Charley turned to his companions. + +"We have got to work quick if we are to stand a chance even of saving +him," he said, crisply. "Walter, get in to the mainland as quick as +you can and bring me all the palmetto berries you can find,--hurry. +Captain, let me take your flint and steel and then get me a lot of soft +mud from the marsh." + +Tired though they were, the two hastened away to execute his orders, +while Charley worked swiftly to carry out the plan he had formed while +coming ashore. It was a heroic one, but rough measures were the only +ones it was in his power to apply. Hastily gathering together a pile +of dead cedar limbs, he lit a fire with the flint and steel. While it +was blazing up, he stripped off his belt and, tying it above Chris' +knee, with a stick twisted it tight until it was embedded in the flesh, +shutting off the flow of blood from below to the heart. He next heated +a small stone in the now blazing fire and applied it while hot to the +swollen wound. The smell of the crisping flesh sickened him, but he +doggedly stuck to his task until he judged the wound was sufficiently +cauterized. Chris lay mercifully lost to the pain in a deep stupor. The +lad had just finished burning the wound when the Captain returned with +his jacket full of soft mud, and, emptying it out, hastened back for +another load. Charley heaped a lot of rocks upon the fire, and, as soon +as they were hot, ranged them close on each side of the wounded limb, +heaping the soft mud on top of them until he had formed an air-tight +mound over the leg. He now had a great poultice of hot mud of great +drawing power, the danger was that Chris might be attacked by other +spasms and succeed in working his leg out from the hot covering. To +prevent this, the lad tore his shirt up into strips and, binding the +little negro tightly, piled stones around the encased leg so that it +could not be easily moved. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +HUNTING HELP. + + +CHARLEY next cut off small branches of cedar and placed them under +the unconscious little fellow's head and back so that he might rest +as comfortably as possible. This done, he sat back breathless and +exhausted and waited impatiently for Walter's return. + +Captain Westfield surveyed the young physician's work with hopeful +admiration. "If Chris lives, it will be you as has saved his life," he +declared. + +"He has saved mine more than once," Charley replied, "but I am afraid +he is not going to live. I don't like this deep stupor he has fallen +into. I wish Walter would hurry." + +Walter had been hurrying as fast as he could, and he soon appeared +bearing a hatful of ripe palmetto berries. His riddled shoes and +bleeding feet told of reckless running over the sharp rocks. + +Charley smashed the ripe berries between two stones, catching the juice +in his cap. Chris' teeth were tightly set, but he managed to pry them +apart with his knife blade and forced some of the sticky liquid down +his throat. + +"I don't know whether it will help him or not, but I am in hopes it +will," he said, as, tired out, he sat down by the little fellow's side. +"Those berries make a powerful tonic and stimulant, and I believe that +is what is needed. The poison seems to have deadened the heart's action +and brought on that stupor. A few minutes will tell whether it is going +to do any good." + +It soon became evident that the rude remedies were performing their +mission well, the sufferer's pulse, which had grown slow and feeble, +quickened, and his little face began to lose some of its ashen hue. + +As soon as he became sure that a change for the better was taking +place, Charley arose from his brief rest. + +"I am going to find help," he declared. "We must get him to some place +where he can have proper attention. How far do you think we are from +Judson, Captain?" + +"Not more than twenty miles to the north of it, I judge. Maybe not more +than ten miles. But you must not dream of starting yet awhile, lad. You +must rest for a bit, an' have something to eat first." + +"And I am going with you when you start," Walter declared. "Something +might happen to you amongst those slippery rocks and awful bog holes. +The Captain can do all that can be done for Chris while you are gone." + +There was no disputing the wisdom of both suggestions and they busied +themselves with the first proposition, the finding of something to eat. +This demanded more time and trouble. Another trip had to be made down +to the water and considerable searching was necessary before they could +collect enough of crabs and shell fish to make the full meal that their +hunger craved. Their rest they gained while their dinner was roasting +in the coals. + +Their rest, meal, and Chris' steadily improving condition, put them all +in better strength and spirits, and the boys were cheerful when they +bid the old sailor good-bye and made their start in search of help. + +"We'll be back as soon as we can get back, Captain," Charley said, "but +you don't want to worry if we take longer than you expect." + +"I reckon, I'll keep too busy to have much time for worryin'," the old +sailor replied. "Jes' be careful, lads, an' get back as soon as you +can." + +He watched until the rank marsh grass hid the two lads from sight, +then busied himself with making the camp a little more comfortable for +himself and his sick companion. Chris' welfare was the first thing to +claim his attention. With his sheath knife he cut armful after armful +of marsh grass and added it to the rough couch Charley had fashioned +for the little negro, converting it into a soft, comfortable bed. +The low-hanging cedar boughs formed a kind of rude shelter over the +little lad, but the captain was not entirely satisfied with it. The +rainy season was near at hand and heavy showers might be expected at +any time. A thick layer of marsh grass placed over the lowest cedar +limbs quickly made the covering more to his satisfaction. This done, +he paused for a brief rest and to decide what should be his next task. +Although, he knew that the port of Judson could not be more than twenty +miles away, he realized that, owing to the necessarily slow traveling +amongst the sharp rocks and bog holes, it might be at least three days +before the boys could succeed in getting back with help. His duties, +then, would be the care of Chris, the providing of food for them both, +and the gathering of firewood. Water was luckily plentiful, there was +an abundance of it in a cup-like depression near the center of the +island. + +In a Northern country with no weapons but his sheath knife, these tasks +would have seemed almost impossible of accomplishment, but the captain +was not discouraged. The first thing, of course, was to see that the +little negro's marked improvement was not checked. Heating more stones +in the fire, the old sailor piled them around the mound of mud covering +the wounded leg. Then, as the berries Walter had brought were nearly +exhausted, he decided that the next thing of importance was to lay in +a fresh supply. He found the trip to the mainland slow and dangerous. +Where the way was not strewn with sharp-pointed rocks, it was dotted +with forbidding-looking sink holes of soft, slimy mud. Rank-growing +marsh grass covered the whole, making it extremely difficult to pick +out a safe passage through the dangers. At last, however, he gained +the mainland where he found the oily black berries growing in greatest +profusion. He gathered his jacket full of them and then sat down on a +fallen log to rest a minute and look around. It was an inviting spot in +which he found himself. The land rose up from the marsh to form a high, +sloping bluff through which trickled a stream of clear, reddish water. + +The bluff was covered with a dense growth of palms, satinwoods, bays, +rubber trees, and low-ground palmettos. It was an ideal place for a +camp, and the captain eyed it regretfully, wishing that it was possible +to bring Chris there from the little marsh-surrounded island. But +that was impossible until the little fellow was able to walk and he +dismissed the idea with a sigh. He was just gathering up his jacket of +berries to leave when a noise in the undergrowth close at hand made +him sink back to his seat on the log. The brushes before him parted +suddenly and a large deer stepped out into an open place not twenty +feet from where he sat. For a full two minutes, he and the timid animal +remained motionless, looking directly into each other's eyes, then the +old sailor pulled out his sheath knife and sprang for it with some +wild notion of securing it for food, but the deer leaped lightly away +a few steps and stopped again as if in deepest wonder and curiosity. +The captain sheathed his knife with a sigh. "I reckon, you don't know +how wicked men are," he addressed the graceful animal. "Guess you ain't +ever seed many men or you wouldn't be so powerful tame. Some steaks +from you would taste right good, but you ain't aiming to let me get +close enough for that. Well, good-bye, old fellow, I hope I'll meet you +again sometime when I've got a good gun." + +Saying which, the old sailor picked up his burden and headed back for +the island, the deer gazing after him in innocent-eyed wonder. + +He had nearly reached the little camp when a scream from Chris sent him +forward at a run, regardless of rocks and sink holes. + +The scene that met his gaze as he burst into the little clearing +chilled him with horror and dismay. + +Attracted, no doubt, by its warmth, two huge, swollen-looking moccasins +had crawled up on the little heap of mud and now lay with their flat, +ugly heads within a few inches of the little negro's trembling body. + +"Don't move an inch, Chris," he shouted, as he broke off a dead limb +from a cedar tree. + +The caution was useless, for, bound as he was, hand and foot, Chris +could only lay and stare in horror and helplessness. + +A couple of well-aimed blows from the stick killed the two poisonous, +sluggish serpents, and, dragging them to the edge of the island, the +captain pitched them out into the marsh. + +"They ain't very pleasant visitors," he remarked as he returned to his +helpless companion, "but I reckon, they've done you a heap of good. You +was laying like a dead man when I went ashore and now you look right +pert and lively." + +"Dey's too sudden an' powerful medicine," grumbled Chris. "Dis nigger +might jes' as well die as be scart to death. Golly! how my leg does +burn and smart. Please take dat stuff off ob hit, Massa Captain, an' +unloose my han's." + +But the old sailor feared to remove the mud poultice, dreading another +relapse. However, he untied the little negro's hands, upon his promise +that he would lie still and not move. He was delighted with the change +in the little lad. Whether the shock from the snakes, or, what was much +more probable, the continued effects of the palmetto juice had done the +work, the stupor which had frightened them all was entirely gone, and +the patient soon declared himself decidedly hungry. + +Cutting a stick and laying it within Chris' reach so that he would +have the means of protecting himself from other possible visitors, the +Captain departed in search of food. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +THE CASTAWAYS. + + +IT was lucky for the captain that he was wise to the resources of the +Florida coast. A stranger to the country would not have known where to +look for food and would likely have soon perished of hunger. Although +he had no other weapon than his sheath knife, he went about his task +with the air of a man who was confident of success. Before leaving the +island, he cut a long, straight cypress pole and sharpened one end to +a keen point. With this in his hand, he made his way down to the Gulf. +The tide was high again but there was a mass of rock some two hundred +feet from shore which protruded a couple of feet above the water. +Removing his shoes, he waded cautiously out, prodding the bottom before +him with his pole and picking his way carefully to avoid stepping on a +stingaree. + +The rock reached, he perched himself on its edge and sat peeping down +into the water which was clear as crystal. He had not long to wait. In +a few minutes a fish swam slowly past close to the rock, and, taking +careful aim, the old sailor dove his rude spear down with all his +force. Its point struck just behind the fish's head, passing entirely +through its body. It died without a struggle, and the captain lifted it +out upon the rock with a shout of triumph. It was a beautifully-specked +sea trout about three feet in length and weighed at least twelve +pounds. Although there was plenty of other fish within sight, the +trout was enough for their present needs and, scaling and washing it +carefully, the captain waded ashore with his prize. But he was not yet +quite satisfied. Laying his fish down upon a bunch of clean sea moss, +he examined carefully the muddy beach near the water's edge. Here and +there, tiny jets of water squirted up from the mud, and, where they +seemed to be most numerous, he began to dig. In a few minutes he had +unearthed a couple of dozen large clams. With these and the fish, and a +huge armful of moist sea moss in his arms, he made his way back to camp +where Chris was eagerly awaiting his return. + +"I sho' wish I could get up from hyah," mourned the little negro. +"Golly! I reckon, I'd show you how to cook dat fish so dat you nebber +could eat nuff ob hit." + +"You jes' lie still thar," commanded the captain. "I'm a Cape Cod man, +an' thar ain't any cook living that can show a Cape Cod man how to cook +this kind of grub. You just watch and learn somethin'." + +Chris watched him with professional jealousy and interest. He +firmly believed that no one on earth could cook as good as he but +he reluctantly admitted to himself that the old sailor made his +preparations with considerable promise of success. + +First, he scooped out a hole in the ground about three feet deep and +two feet square and kindled a small fire in the bottom upon which he +placed a layer of small rocks, as soon as it was going good, then, he +paused to remark regretfully, + +"I wish we had some potatoes. I never heard of a clam bake yet without +potatoes." + +"Dar's something jes' as good as 'taters," declared Chris, pointing to +a low-growing plant. "Jes' you dig up some ob dem roots an' try 'em. +Hit's wild cassava, an' hit taste jes' like Irish 'taters." + +The captain dug down with his sheath knife and unearthed several tubers +a couple of feet in length and about three inches in circumference. He +regarded them dubiously, but, on Chris' repeated assurances that they +were good and wholesome, he cut off several pieces and washed them +carefully. By the time this was done, the fire in the pit had burned +low, and the stones were smoking hot. Cutting several broad, green, +palmetto leaves, he laid them on the stones and spread over them a thin +layer of the moist sea moss. Upon the moss he laid the fish and over it +spread another layer of moss upon which he placed the clams, covering +them with more moss, upon which he placed the cassava, and, piling a +thick layer of sea grass over the whole, built a small fire on top of +it. Then he sat down and watched the fire while he and Chris waited +hungrily the slow cooking of their meal. At last, the captain declared +that it must be done. The fire on top was raked away, the contents of +the pit were taken out and placed upon green, clean palmetto leaves, +and the two castaways fell-to with appetites sharpened by their long +wait. And what a feast it was,--the clams cooked to perfection in their +own juice, the fish juicy and delicious, the cassava snow-white and +mealy and all rendered doubly delicious by the salt spicy taste of the +seaweed in which they had been cooked. And what a joy it was to feel +that the worst of their troubles were over. Chris getting better, the +boys soon to be back with help, all the worry and anxiety they had +suffered past, the next few days to see them all safely back in Tarpon, +where they would all wait in comfort and safety, ready to claim their +ship when the Greeks brought her in, and, after that, they would return +for the gold and with it they would secure the many things they had +longed for all their lives. + +Surely the prospect was bright enough to make the two lonely castaways +chatter brightly, cheerfully, and hopefully over their evening meal. +They could not see the dangers, worries, and misfortunes yet to befall +them, and it was well they could not for it would have robbed the two +of the happiest hour they had had in many days. + +At last, the feast was over and Chris had paid the cook the highest +compliment of which he could conceive. + +"Golly! Massa Capt., you cooked dem tings might nigh as good as I could +have done." + +Although there were many things which the captain wished to do, +darkness was fast coming on and he had to complete his final +preparations for the night. First, he cut a lot of small boughs which +he piled up under the shelter close to Chris to serve as his own bed. +This done, he gathered piles of wood which he spread in a circle around +the big cedar and set on fire to protect them both from chance visits +of snakes during the night. By the time this was finished, it was dark +and he crept in under the shelter close to his dusky little companion +in misfortune, and, after a short, simple prayer full of thankfulness +for their deliverance from the dangers that had threatened them, he +quickly fell into the deep sleep of total exhaustion. But sleep did not +come so readily to Chris. He had slept, or been unconscious, much of +the time since his accident and the stimulating effect of the palmetto +medicine helped to drive slumber away from him. He lay very quiet to +avoid disturbing the old sailor's rest, but, try as he would, he could +not get to sleep. At last he gave up the attempt and lay with eyes +wide open looking out at the stars and the twinkling camp-fires. From +the marsh about came strange noises of the night, the croaking of +multitudes of frogs, the cackle of marsh hens, the squawking of cranes, +and the rustling of the marsh grass in the wind. Slowly the circle of +fire died down, smouldered and went out. Only the big main camp-fire +was left a glowing mass of embers. + +Suddenly the wakeful little negro's ears caught another sound mingled +with the voices of the night,--a slow, heavy, creeping noise. For a +time he lay quiet listening, his hearing strained to the utmost to +catch the new strange sound. He waited until there was no doubt that it +was close at hand and steadily drawing nearer, then, he reached over +and shook his snoring companion. + +"Wake up, Massa Captain," he cried, "dar's some wild beast a creepin' +into de camp." + +"I hear it," agreed the captain, instantly wide awake. "Jes' lay still, +lad, an' don't be frightened. I'll stir up the fire a bit, that will +run it off." + +He arose from his couch and strode boldly for the smouldering fire. + +"Look out!" Chris yelled, suddenly, "Foah de Lawd's sake, look out!" +His keen eyes had caught a glimpse of a black shape passing between the +old sailor and the mass of glowing embers, but his warning came too +late,--the captain was upon the moving shape before he saw it. + +A swishing noise rent the air, a loud thud, the old sailor was knocked +backward several feet flat on the ground, and, with a loud, sharp +bellowing, the mysterious visitor glided away into the darkness. + +"Is you hurt? Is you hurt, Massa Cap?" cried the terror-stricken lad. + +"A little bit, a little bit," called back the old sailor, his voice +hoarse with pain. + +He came creeping back into the shelter on hands and knees. + +"It was a big bull alligator," he explained, painfully. "Must have been +twelve feet long. It caught me a fearful blow on the legs with its +tail. I hope thar ain't no bones broken but it feels as though thar +was." + +A close examination proved his fears groundless, but the terrible blow +had done all but break the bones. In spite of the pain, however, he +crawled forth again and replenished the fire, but he was faint and +giddy with pain before he succeeded in getting back into the shelter +and stretched out on his couch once more. + +"I reckon, I'll be all right by morning," he said, hopefully, "but I +don't calculate I'll be able to sleep any more to-night, my legs hurt +too bad for that. Don't make any difference though, I 'low I've had +enough sleep for one night--it can't be more than a couple of hours +'till daylight." + +It proved to be even less and with the coming of light he removed his +trousers and examined his limbs anxiously. He had indeed received a +terrible blow from the prowling monster, both legs were bruised and +swollen where the tail had struck it and it seemed a miracle that the +bones had not been broken. It caused him exquisite pain to rise upon +his feet, but there was work which had to be done, and, in spite of his +suffering, he must do it. So, hiding his pain as well as he could, he +prepared to sally forth to secure food for the day. + +But in spite of all his efforts he could not entirely hide his intense +suffering. + +"You jes' lay down an' let me go out an' find grub, Massa Cap," Chris +pleaded. "I feels jes' as well as can be again now." + +But the sturdy old sailor would not listen to his pleadings. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +ANOTHER DANGER. + + +"DAR'S one thing I want you to do 'fore you go projectin' off," said +the little negro. "I wants you to cut me some ob dem palmetto buds. +I'se goin' to braid you a hat. Hit's a plum wonder dat you ain't got +sun struck goin' bareheaded like you is." + +"I ain't had time to remember that I lost my hat when we were wrecked. +I'se been so worried an' busy," said the captain. "Now you speak of it, +my head does feel sort of dull an' heavy. I hope the boys will think to +cover their heads with something--this sun does beat down right hot." + +"Mass Charley will sho' rig up some kind ob hat," Chris declared, +confidently. "'Sides dey's both young an' can stand a heap more sun den +what you kin. You jes' be mighty careful dis mornin' an' by noon dis +nigger will hab a fine hat fixed for you. I'se done made lots ob dem on +Cat Island." + +There was a few young cabbage palms scattered over the island and +the captain cut out several of the buds with his sheath knife and +placed them beside the little negro, then, knotting up the ends of his +bandanna handkerchief to form a turban, he took his spear and started +for the shore. + +Chris watched his slow, faltering, painful steps until he was out of +sight then began on his proposed task. The buds were really young fresh +leaves yet unfolded, soft and pliable, yet very strong. He shredded +them into strips about half an inch in width until he had accumulated +quite a pile; then, taking four of the pieces at a time, with deft, +skillful fingers, he wove them into a braid about an inch in width. + +In a couple of hours, he had a string of braid several yards long. + +The fashioning of the braid into a hat, without needle and thread and +while lying flat on his back was a more difficult task, but he attacked +it with cheerful energy, using the point of his knife for a needle and +small strips of palmetto for thread. At last, his task was completed, +and, although the hat was grotesque in shape and appearance, it was +soft, strong, and light, and would prove an effective protection from +the fierce rays of the tropic sun. The little worker was not yet +satisfied but at once set about the manufacture of a basket from the +same material realizing how useful it would be for the carrying of +clams, fish, and other things. + +He was still engaged upon it when the captain came stumbling into +camp bearing a large fish and several dozen more of the clams. The +old sailor's face was red, his movement weak and uncertain, and his +breathing heavy and labored, while he was trembling violently from head +to foot. He sank down in the cedar's shade and wiped his flaming face. + +"I reckon, I've got a touch of the sun," he said, feebly. "I feel weak +and dizzy. I'll lie down in the shade for a bit an' it will pass off. +Don't be worried, lad, it will pass off in a jiffy." + +But pass off it did not. By the end of half an hour the sturdy old +seaman was lying unconscious, his breath coming in short, wheezy gasps. + +Chris watched him for a while in anxiety and fear. He knew that it +might be dangerous for him to move his wounded leg but all thought +of his own danger was lost in the fear that the stricken old sailor +was dying before his eyes. He attempted to pull his leg out from the +mound but could not move it. The heat of the stones had baked the mud +hard. With great effort he raised himself into a sitting position, +and, with his sheath knife cut and dug away frantically at the baked +mud until he had the leg uncovered, then, severing the bandage above +his knee, he attempted to rise but could not move the injured limb. He +fell back and viewed it with frightened dismay. It was not a pretty +sight for it was a mass of blisters where the hot mud had clung, and a +large bluish swelling marked the place where the stingaree's horn had +entered. The tight bandage, shutting off the blood supply for so long, +had rendered it paralyzed and useless. Although the breaking blisters +caused him exquisite pain, he fell to rubbing the numbed limb briskly +with both hands until the blood crept slowly back into the veins. At +last, he was able to gain his feet and by resting most of his weight +on his uninjured leg managed to limp over to the unconscious sailor. +Luckily, he had been raised in a torrid country where sunstrokes were +of frequent occurrence. He knew just what to do and he did it quickly +and surely. His first act was to raise the unconscious man's head and +place a high pillow of twigs beneath it. Then, stirring the smouldering +fire, he placed several large stones in the glowing coals. While they +were heating he removed the captain's shoes and bathed his hot head +and flushed face with cool water, and tearing his shirt to pieces, wet +it and bound it around the sufferer's head. By the time this was done, +the stones were hot, and, rolling a couple up in his jacket, he placed +them at the captain's feet, then, seated by his side, he awaited the +result with fear and trembling. A terrible dread gripped his heart that +the remedies had been applied too late, for the old sailor had all the +appearance of a dying man. Thirty minutes dragged slowly away without +apparent change, then, slowly, the old sailor's breathing grew less +labored and his face began to lose some of its fiery hue. Chris hailed +these favorable signs with joy as indicated that the crisis had been +safely passed, but his joy was somewhat dampened when the hours passed +by without the stricken man showing signs of consciousness. He seemed +to pass from his stupor to a deep sleep from which the little negro +dreaded awakening him. It was evident that the old seaman was in for a +long spell of weakness from the heat stroke he had suffered. There was +nothing more his little companion could do to relieve his sufferings +and he remained seated by his side watching him anxiously until the +waning of the afternoon warned him that it was time to partake of food +and make preparations for the night. He had eaten nothing since the +night before and he was conscious of a sense of growing weakness. The +fish the captain had caught was already tainted from the heat and the +little negro felt too weak as yet to venture forth to secure more, so +he dug up a few of the cassava roots which he roasted in the coals. +These, together with a handful of palmetto berries, constituted his +supper. As soon as it was finished he began his preparations for the +night. Slowly and painfully, he gathered together broken limbs to keep +the circles of fire going until daylight came again. By the time this +was accomplished and the fires lit he was weak and trembling from pain +and exhaustion and was glad to crawl onto his couch by the captain's +side. The old sailor roused into momentary wakefulness at the noise of +the snapping twigs. + +"How you is, Massa Capt.?" demanded the little negro, eagerly. + +"Weak, mighty weak. Feel as though I couldn't lift my hand to my head, +but I will be all right by morning, I reckon. I guess, we have got no +cause to worry now. The boys will be back to-night or early in the +morning at the latest. How do you feel, lad?" + +"Fine," lied the little negro, cheerfully. "Jes' you go back to sleep +again. I'll keep de fires up all right." + +With a sigh of satisfaction, the captain closed his eyes and was +soon sound asleep again, but there was no such rest for his little +companion. Twice Chris hobbled out and renewed the fires. The third +time he had to crawl forth on hands and knees. His wound was again +swelling rapidly and he could no longer bear his weight on the injured +limb. He tried vainly to sleep. The wounded leg throbbed with intense +pain which gradually crept over his whole body, making him feel sick +and faint all over. He understood the reason for his sufferings. Some +of the poison still left in his wound had, with the removal of the +tight bandages from his leg, found its way back into the blood and was +coursing through his little body poisoning as it went. + +"Golly!" he remarked, grimly, to himself, "if dem white chillens doan +get back wid help an' medicine by mornin', I reckon dis nigger ain't +agoin' to see Cat Island and his old mammy no moah. An' if Chris gits +plum helpless what's goin' to become ob Massa Captain wid no one to +tend to him. He tinks he'll be all right in de mornin' but hits goin' +to take a powerful long time for him to get real peart again." + +The long night dragged slowly away. Occasionally the little negro crept +forth and replenished the fires, the balance of the time he lay quiet +listening for cry or sound that would tell of the boys' return, but +nothing fell upon his strained hearing but the croak of frogs, the +bellowing of alligators and the strange night noises of the marsh. + +At daylight the captain awoke and attempted to rise, but, although he +was greatly improved, he was yet too weak to stand erect. + +"You jes' lie still," Chris counseled him, "dar ain't no call for you +to go projectin' around none. I'se goin' out an' git somethin' for us +to eat." + +Although it cost him intense pain, the little negro managed to walk +erect until he was out of the old sailor's sight, then he dropped down +on hands and knees and crawled painfully down to the shore. + +The touch of the cool salt water helped the throbbing pain in his leg +and he succeeded in wading out to the rocks where he was not long in +spearing a large, fat mackerel. With this, he returned to the camp, +for he did not dare in his growing weakness to search for clams or +other food. He found the old sailor asleep again, and, cleaning the +fish he broiled it over the coals. As soon as it was done he awakened +the sleeper. + +"Hyah is youah breakfas' all nice an' hot," he announced. "You want to +eat a plenty ob hit. I'se agoin' to lay down a spell. I didn't sleep +berry good last night." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +THE RELAPSE. + + +CAPTAIN WESTFIELD ate heartily of the delicious fish. Much to his +delight, he found that, except for the extreme weakness following his +heat prostration, he felt unusually well. He wisely decided not to +invite a relapse by getting up at once, and, as soon as he had finished +eating, he lay back upon his couch and quietly fell asleep again. It +was midday when he awoke feeling much better and stronger. The first +thing that met his gaze as he gained a sitting position was Chris lying +in the same position in which he had first flung himself. He called +to him several times but the little negro lay still and motionless. +Thoroughly alarmed, he crawled over and surveyed the unconscious lad. +The sight of the enormously swollen leg and a few minutes' fingering +of the dark little wrist told him what was the matter. The slow pulse +beats showed that the subtile poison, released from its confinement by +the removal of the bandage, had found its way to the plucky, loyal, +little heart. + +The captain sat down by the little fellow's side and dashed the +stinging tears from his eyes. + +"He's killed himself for me," he moaned. "If he had laid still just as +he was he would have been all right. But, God bless him, he risked his +life for a poor, old, worthless hulk like me. An' thar ain't nothing I +can do to save him now." + +Although he had but small faith that it would do any good in such a +desperate case, he hastily crushed out a cupful of juice from the +palmetto berries and forced it down Chris' throat, then, resuming his +seat by his side, he watched to see if the powerful stimulant would +have any effect. + +As the hours dragged slowly away he rejoiced to see that the lad's +condition apparently grew no worse. Encouraged, he crushed out more of +the juice and administered it at regular intervals. "I believe he's got +a good fighting chance to pull through. If the boys would only get back +with some whiskey an' drugs, now, I reckon, we could save him. I wonder +what can be keepin' them so long. They've had plenty of time to make +Judson and back." + +But the afternoon wore away without sign of the rescuers, and a new +fear crept into the old sailor's worries. Something must have happened +to the two boys. Late in the afternoon, he left Chris long enough +to hurry down to the shore in quest of fish or clams for supper. He +found the rock from which he had fished completely submerged and a +heavy surf thundering far up into the marsh. Under such conditions +it was impossible to secure fish or clams, and he returned to camp +hungry, disappointed, and with further cause for worry. The heavy surf +indicated another storm in the Gulf which might reach where they were. +If it did, it would render their position still more uncomfortable and +dangerous. A heavy blow would continue to cut off their supply of fish +and clams and would likely flood the low-lying marsh shutting them in +on their little island. If Chris had been well enough to walk, the +captain would have at once moved camp to the mainland, but that was +impossible now. By sunset his fears were in a fair way to be realized. +The wind was steadily increasing in force, and, blowing out of a clear +sky, gave promise of still greater violence. Supperless and worried, +the old sailor watched the night fall with but one thing to cheer his +drooping spirits--Chris was evidently slowly improving. Likely much of +the poison had been drawn out from his wound by the hot mud and the +balance remaining had been overcome in its paralyzing effects by the +powerful stimulant. The lad's pulse was slowly growing stronger and it +was clear that the crisis had been safely passed. + +The old sailor was too worried about the absent lads to compose himself +to sleep. Already, the surf was sending up small wavelets far into the +marsh. If the boys were returning the way they went, their journey +would be fraught with perils. + +The sky was covered with fleecy clouds but they disappeared with the +rising of the moon and by its bright light he could see far out on the +water where the huge waves broke foaming white on the outer bar. + +Suddenly he gave a shout that made Chris stir in his stupor; "The boys! +The boys!" he cried in delight. + +In the broad path of moonlight, a small schooner appeared feeling her +way through a passage in the reef under close-reefed sails. + +"They must have someone aboard that knows the reef," he mused as he +watched the little ship cautiously weaving her way in between the +dangerous rocks. + +She held steadily for the shore until she was scarce two cable lengths +from it, then, she shot up into the wind, her anchor was dropped, and +her sails lowered. + +The captain was down on the shore, heedless of the flying spray, when +the anchor hit the bottom. + +"Walt! Charley!" he roared at the top of his voice. + +There was no answer and he hailed again. + +"Ahoy! Shore!" came an answering hail from the schooner. "Who air yo' +and what do yo' want?" + +The captain was silent for a moment with disappointment. It was not the +boys after all, but any help was welcome at such a time and he made +haste to reply. + +"We're two shipwrecks in bad shape an' need help. Who are you?" + +"The Hattie Roberts, sponger, from Key West. Stan' by, an' we'll send a +boat." + +While the strangers were launching a boat, the captain had time to +observe that the schooner's decks were piled full of small boats and +that, small as she was, she carried a crew of at least thirty men. + +"An old style, pole an' hook sponger," he decided. "I didn't reckon +there was any of them left. I 'lowed the Greeks had run 'em all out of +business." + +Manned by half a dozen men, the little boat came tearing through the +waves towards the shore. Flung up by a huge roller, she grounded almost +at the captain's feet. The instant she touched bottom, her crew sprang +over the side and drew her up safely beyond the reach of the next +roller. Even by the dimmed light of the moon, the old sailor could see +that the new-comers were dark-skinned men with heavy coarse features. +He recognized them without the aid of the peculiar accent as Conchs,--a +kind of mixed race belonging to the Florida Keys. + +"Whar's yo's companion?" demanded one, who from his air of authority +was evidently the captain. + +"He's on a little island just a little ways from here. I'll have to get +one of your men to help me down with him." + +"All right, Sam here will go with yo'. Step lively, we have got to pull +out from hyar quick. There ain't as good anchorage as I 'lowed to find +behind the reef. We'll have to make foah a better harbor." + +The captain, with the sailor detailed to help him, was hurrying off on +their mission when the Conch's skippers curiosity caused him to stop +him in spite of the preciousness of time. + +"How did yo's git hyah in such a fix," he demanded. + +"Been sponging with a Greek crew. Crew mutinied. We escaped in a diving +boat. Got wrecked in the night on the reef out thar," replied Captain +Westfield, briefly. + +"Sponging with the Greeks!" snarled the Conch with an oath. "Then the +Greeks can help yo' out of yo'r fix, by all that's Holy, I won't. Hyah, +Sam, jump aboard with yo'." + +"You are not agoin' to desert us?" cried the captain in bewildered +consternation. "For the love of humanity, man, what do you mean?" + +"I mean that I won't raise a finger to help any mons who deals with +the Greeks--blast 'em," cried the Conch, fiercely. "They've ruined +us an' our people. We used to be a happy an' prosperous race a'fore +they came with their diving suits an' tramped all over the bottom of +the Gulf. Killing the little baby sponges with their iron shoes, an' +stripping the bottom clean as a Conch's floor. We've been run out of +the business, an' they did it. We've lost our homes, an' they caused +it. Our families don't have enough to eat an' wear any more, an' they +are the reason--curse 'em, curse 'em, curse 'em." + +"But you are leaving us to certain death, man!" pleaded Captain +Westfield, "The water is rising over the marsh, already." + +"An' it will be flooded inside of ten hours," declared the Conch with +cruel satisfaction. "All aboard mons an' shove off." + +Captain Westfield grasped the gunwale of the boat and tried to hold +it while he reasoned and argued with the fanatical Conch, but the +infuriated man rapped his knuckles with an oar and gave him a shove +with the blade that sent him struggling backwards. By the time the old +sailor recovered his balance, the boat had been shoved off and was out +of his reach. He shook his clenched fist at the Conch's receding figure. + +"You'll pay for this," he shouted. "No good will come to you after such +a trick." But it is doubtful if the Conch even heard his voice above +the roar of the wind. + +The captain stood watching grimly until the boat reached the +schooner's side, and her close-reefed sails were hoisted, her anchor +broke and she headed to the South inside the line of reef. When she +had faded away into the night, he turned back for the camp filled with +disappointment and dismay. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +THE FLOOD. + + +AS the old sailor made his way back to the island, he was alarmed +to see how rapidly the water was rising over the marsh. He splashed +knee-deep in the water at every step and it was easy to see that it +still continued to rise with astonishing rapidity. + +His first act on reaching the island was to move the camp to the +highest knoll of ground, already the lowest lying portions of the +island were submerged. Chris had regained consciousness though he was +still too weak to move without assistance. He watched the old sailor's +preparations with evident interest and looked at the rapidly rising +water with evident anxiety. + +"If dat water doan stop comin' up, we is sho' goin' to hab a hard time +gettin' anythin' to eat," he observed. "Can't get ober dem rock no +way when dey is covered wid water, sho' to break a leg in one ob dem +holes." + +"The Lord will watch out for us, lad," encouraged the captain. "Look +at all that He has brought us through. He has never deserted us in our +hour of need." + +"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little darkey, thoughtfully. +He remained quiet for a few minutes then said quaintly, "'Spect's we +oughter ask him to look out foah Massa Charley an' Massa Walt. I'ze +getting plum anxious 'bout dem two white chillins. Dey had oughter been +back long 'fore dis. Massa Charley's mighty clever, but I 'spect dat +it wouldn't do no harm to ax de Lawd to help him out a bit if he's in +trouble." + +"No one can do without the Lord's help, Chris," the captain said, +gravely, "an', I reckon, them lads need it powerful bad. Something +pretty serious has happened, I 'low, to keep them from coming back. +We'll ask the Good Lord to watch out for them an' protect them." + +The old sailor knelt by the little negro's side and in simple seafaring +language prayed that the Heavenly Father would watch over and protect +the missing ones. + +The simple steadfast faith of the old seaman and the trusting little +negro filled them with a sense of security and peace. They doubted not +that their humble petition would be answered and that now a Heavenly +Eye was watching over them and their absent companions and that a +Divine Hand would guide them through their trials and danger. They +stretched out on their leafy couches and went fast to sleep, while the +storm raged and howled around them and the rising water crept slowly up +on their little island. + +It was broad daylight when they awoke and looked about them. It was +a wild and terrifying scene that met their eyes. The marsh between +them and the sea was completely submerged and covered with rolling +white-caps. Far out on the reef they could see the mighty rollers +flinging their spray forty feet in the air when they struck the sunken +rocks. Of the island, none remained except the high sands and knoll +upon which was their camp. Between the island and the mainland was two +miles of swirling, foaming water. + +"Can't get to shore, no ways, now, Massa Captain," Chris observed. +"You had oughter gone in las' night when you had a chance an' left dis +nigger behind." + +"The Lord will look out for us, lad," said the old sailor cheerfully. +"I don't calculate that the water's going to rise high enough to cover +this knoll we are on an' as soon as the wind drops a bit, the boys will +be back for us with a boat. It's just a matter of being patient for a +little while. We may get a little bit hungry, but, I reckon, we can +stand that without grumbling." + +"Sho' we can," agreed Chris, bravely. "Tho' hit do seem like I was +gettin' powerful hungry already. Ain't dar none of dem cassava roots +dat we can get at?" + +A close search revealed that most of the patch of tubers was covered by +the rising water. A few plants however still showed on the little knoll +and these the captain dug at once. There was only a scant half peck of +the roots but that was better than nothing. + +The old sailor kindled a little fire and roasted all the roots in the +coals. + +"We might as well have one good full meal," he observed, "I never did +take much stock in this idea of going on short rations when grub is +scarce. I always 'lowed that one good feed would carry a man further +than a dozen pesky little ones that only tantalize the stomach." + +But the roots shrank greatly in the cooking, by the time the skins were +removed, there was but little left for the hungry castaways. They still +felt empty after their meal was finished. + +The day dragged wearily away with no sign of abatement of the storm. +The water continued to rise slowly, but so slowly that the two anxious +watchers were not without hope that the little knoll on which they +were would escape the overflow. Their position was by no means +uncomfortable. There was no rain and the weather was so warm that the +wind did not cause them to suffer any from cold. Aside from their +growing hunger and their anxiety about their missing companions, they +were quite comfortable. Chris, in fact, was in better shape than at any +time since they had been cast on shore. + +"I don' reckon dis storm can las' berry much longer," he observed, +cheerfully, when the sun went down in a perfectly clear sky. "Dar ain't +no clouds to back up de wind an' hit's bound to play out 'fore long." + +"That's just where you're wrong, lad," said the captain. "A gale from a +clear sky is the worst of all. I ain't ever seen many of them but what +I have seen were all hummers." + +The two sat looking out on the gloomy waste of waters until the moon, +now at its full, rose and lit up the wild scene about them almost as +brightly as day. At last they tired of the wild, gloomy, disheartening +scene, and, after a short prayer together, stretched out on their +couches. Chris was almost instantly asleep but the captain lay long +awake, his mind full of their helpless situation, and, of anxious +conjectures as to the fate of the two absent lads. His own position +and that of his little companion was such as to awaken his deepest +fears. So long as the storm continued, their rescue by land or Gulf +was impossible. No boat could live amongst the rocks and raging waters +which now surrounded them. His long experience told him that the storm +was likely to continue at least two days longer.--He had seen similar +gales blow for an entire week without a let up. Even after the gale +was over, it would take some little time for the waves and water to +subside. At the best, they would suffer greatly from hunger before +their rescue would be possible. But, to do the old sailor justice, his +thoughts were not so much of their own situation as of the absent lads. +He could only hope and pray that they had not started to return by +water before the breaking of the storm. + +As he lay motionless musing, his ear caught a low grating sound as of +heavy objects drawn on coarse sand. He quickly sat up on his couch and +looked around. In the bright moonlight he could see large dark objects +moving over the white sand. + +"'Gators, an' a regular drove of them," he exclaimed. "Wake up, Chris! +Wake up!" + +The little negro struggled up into a sitting position, still half +asleep. + +"What's de matter, Massa Cap?" he inquired. + +"Look at them 'gators, thar's dozens of them. We've got to have a fire +mighty quick an' stick close to it." + +Chris greeted the sight of the dark objects with a cry of joy. + +"Oh, Golly! De Good Lord's dun answered our prayers. Dem's turtles." + +The old sailor sprang to his feet and would have dashed for the nearest +object if the little negro had not restrained him. + +"You sho' scare dem all away if you do dat way," he cautioned. "Jus' +wait till dey gets to layin' an' you can walk right up on 'em." + +The huge creatures crept steadily on up the shelving knoll. Their +progress was slow and clumsy, and their lower shells dragging over the +sand had made the grinding noise the captain had heard. They crept up +to within ten feet of where the two watchers lay, then, they halted, +and, with their hind flippers began to dig deep holes in the soft sand. + +"Dey lays der eggs in dem holes an' covers dem up wid sand," Chris +explained in a whisper. "Dey each lays mighty nigh two hundred eggs. De +warm sand hatches out de little turtles." + +The two castaways waited until the great sea hens had begun to lay, +then Chris arose and walked directly for them without any attempt at +concealment. The turtles did not pay the slightest attention to his +approach. + +"We'll take dese two smallest ones," he announced. "Dey will be de +tenderest. Jus' grab de shell wid me, Massa Cap, back by de hind +flippers an' we'll flop 'em over on his back. Keep youah eyes an' mouth +shut." + +But the old sailor was too excited to heed the advice. He grabbed the +turtle's shell and heaved, then staggered back spitting and coughing +with mouth, eyes, and ears full of sand, which the creature with it's +flippers sent flying in a cloud about it. + +Chris waited until he had relieved himself of the stinging sand and +this time the captain, following his advice, kept mouth and eyes +tightly closed. A few seconds sufficed to turn the two turtles on their +backs where they lay helpless. + +There must have been at least thirty turtles in the bunch but the +castaways contented themselves with only turning the two, any more +would have been useless slaughter. Those unmolested quickly completed +their laying, covered the eggs and retreated to the water. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +THE FLOATING HATCH. + + +THE castaways lost no time in rejoicing over their good fortune. The +Captain hastily kindled a fire while Chris, with his sheath knife, +proceeded to butcher the smallest of the two turtles. Much experience +had made the little negro expert at the work and in a few minutes he +had severed the two shells and cut off several thick steaks from one +of the hind flippers. Then, squatting before the fire, each impaled a +steak on the end of a pointed stick and toasted it over the coals. + +How good the steaming juicy meat tasted to the two hungry ones. Steak +after steak was broiled and eaten before their ravenous appetites were +satisfied and they could eat no more. + +"Midnight is a sorter unusual hour for a feed," Captain Westfield +observed, "but, I reckon, we will sleep none the worse for it. I 'low, +we ain't got to lay awake none worryin' about food now. Thar's meat +enough to last us for two weeks at least." + +"An' maybe, Ole Mister Gale will blow hisself out," said Chris, +hopefully, as, yawning sleepily he stretched himself again on his couch. + +It was broad day when the castaways awoke from the heavy slumber which +had followed their hearty midnight supper. They found the gale still +blowing with undiminished violence and the sky still brightly blue. One +thing, however, gave them great satisfaction, the water had ceased to +encroach upon their little knoll. It had evidently reached its height. + +After a hearty breakfast of turtle steaks, the two proceeded at once +to dress and cure the turtles, for they well knew that under the sun's +heat the fresh meat would soon spoil. + +They had neither salt nor smoke house with which to cure it, but they +went at the task with sure confidence in the result. The meat was first +cut away from the shells and skinned, care being taken to remove every +particle of the greenish-colored fat. Then, cutting across the grain, +the meat was divided into thin strips and spread upon leaves to dry in +the hot sun. It only remained for them to protect it from the dews of +night and chance rains and a few days would see it thoroughly cured and +capable of keeping sweet and good so long as it was kept dry. + +With some hazy idea that they might be of some future use, the captain +cleaned and washed out the two, great, trough-like, upper shells of the +turtles. + +"Dat looks like a lump of wreckage out dar by de reef, Massa Cap," +Chris observed as he straightened up from his task of spreading out the +meat. "Pears like de tide is settin' hit in dis way." + +"It is a bit of wreckage or a clump of seaweed," the captain agreed +after a brief survey. "It's drifting in all right, but it's going to +miss the island by a good hundred yards." + +The two suspended work while they watched the drifting object slowly +near their island. + +"It looks like a hatch with something like a stack atop of it," he +observed to the captain as the object drew close. + +"Hit's a man or 'ooman atop ob hit," cried Chris, whose eyes were +keener than the old sailor's. "He's layin' plum still, jes' like he was +dead." + +Closer approach of the object convinced the captain that the little +negro was correct. There was beyond doubt a motionless body lying on +the low floating hatch. It was evident too that the hatch with its +burden would pass the island at a distance of at least one hundred and +fifty yards. To venture out and attempt to tow it in was to assume +a terrible risk. The water between it and the island was raging and +tossing over dozens of dangerous hidden rocks. Only the strongest +swimmer would have the slightest chance of success, and, even should he +succeed, it might be to find that he had risked his life to rescue a +corpse. But the ocean breeds in its followers a brotherhood that leads +them to deeds of quiet heroism. They never know when they may be in +need of a rescuing hand and it is seldom that one turns aside from the +rendering of service, no matter how dangerous it may be to himself. + +When the hatch with its burden was nearly abreast of the island Chris +began to strip off his clothes, but the Captain stopped him. + +"You're still too weak to attempt it, lad," he declared. "You couldn't +make it thar an' back, I reckon I can fight it out all right. I've +mighty nigh got back all my strength." + +Hastily stripping off the pants and shirt in which he was clothed, the +old sailor slipped off into the water and struck out for the wreckage +with long steady strokes, warily avoiding the foaming spots which +marked the positions of the larger rocks. The swim was not difficult +for so experienced a swimmer. The struggle would come when he attempted +to return with his burden. In a few minutes, he reached the wreckage +and, resting his hand upon the hatch gazed down at the burden it bore. +He saw a man, apparently about forty years of age, attired in rough +seaman's garb, his face bronzed and seamed from long years of exposure +to wind and weather. The stranger was lying flat on his back on the +hatch, his legs dangling over the end. A rope passed around his body +and under the wood work prevented the larger seas from washing him off +his frail support. He was unconscious and the captain reached over and +placed his ear close to his chest. He could detect a faint beating of +the heart. It was slow and feeble but still it was beating,--the man +was alive. + +Once satisfied of this fact, the old sailor quickly shifted to the end +of the hatch, and, resting one hand upon it, and striking out with the +other hand and both feet, strove to force it back to the island. He had +not accomplished half the distance with his burden when he saw that +he could not hope to succeed. The tide was slowly but surely sweeping +him in past the island direct for the mainland. Still, he battled +desperately on, swimming with all his strength. Suddenly the little +raft seemed to move forward with increased speed. + +"Take it easy, Massa Cap," sounded Chris' voice close to his elbow. "We +can make it togedder all right." The plucky little negro had been quick +to see the danger and equally quick to come to the rescue. + +Between the two, after half an hour of heartbreaking battling with +the current, they managed to shove the raft ashore, where they sank +exhausted and panting upon the sand. + +As soon as they were able to move, they unlashed the unconscious sailor +from the hatch, and, carrying him up, laid him upon the captain's +couch. The man seemed nearly dead, and for hours the two, wet, +exhausted castaways worked over him, struggling to coax the spark of +life into a flame. At last they were rewarded by seeing a tinge of +color creep into the bronzed face. At length the sailor sighed and +opened his eyes. + +"Water," he gasped, faintly. + +"Golly! I should reckon he's had 'bout enough water," Chris exclaimed. + +"Get some for him quick," Captain Westfield commanded. "The salt brine +he has swallowed has parched his throat and stomach." + +The sailor took only one mouthful of the proffered water, then spat it +out with his face twitching. + +"Salt, salt," he murmured. + +A horrible fear seized the captain. He snatched the shell from Chris' +hand and took a swallow of the water. His fear was confirmed, it was +salt. The Gulf had risen close enough to their little well to percolate +through the sand into it and render it as salt as itself. + +The little negro divined the situation from the captain's face. "Golly! +dat's bad," he cried. "Doin' widout water is a heap wurser den doin' +widout food." + +"Water, give me water," pleaded the rescued man. "My throat's parched, +parched." + +"You shall have some water as soon as we can get it," Captain Westfield +assured him. There was something vaguely familiar to the old sailor in +the man's queerly accented speech. It was more puzzling as he had no +recollection of ever having seen the man before. + +Considering his low condition the sailor recovered his full senses +and a measure of his strength with astonishing rapidity. It was plain +that he had not been deprived of either food or water for any great +length of time. He was soon able to sit up and take notice of his +surroundings. A curious look stole over his bronzed face as his gaze +took in the two castaways. + +"How did I get hyah?" he demanded. + +Captain Westfield related the story of the rescue briefly. + +The sailor's rough features worked with emotion. "I remember part," he +cried. "Our vessel struck on Needle Rocks in the darkness an' went down +like a stone. I had just time to throw myself on the hatch an' pass +a rope around my waist. The crew," he shuddered--"must have all been +dashed to pieces against the rocks. God knows how I escaped. An' yo' +risked yo'r lives to save mine, yo' an' that boy. Mon, how could yo' +forgive me enough to do such a deed?" + +"Forgive you?" echoed the captain, puzzled. "I had nothin' to forgive." + +"I am Rufus Sanders, the Key West sponger who refused yo'r appeals for +help an' left yo' to yo'r fate," cried the man, excitedly. + +"I did not know that, but it would have made no difference," said the +captain, gently. "You were a helpless, shipwrecked man." He checked the +flood of thanks on the sponger captain's lips. "You have nothing to +thank us for," he declared. "We have only saved you from one fate to +suffer a worse with us. We are hopelessly imprisoned on this island, +an' we have no water. All we can do is endure, pray an' hope." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +WITH THE BOYS. + + +CONSIDERING the misfortunes which had befallen them, the two chums +were in surprisingly good spirits, as they picked their way through +the marsh, headed South. It was a relief to be free from the dread and +apprehension under which they had labored for so many days. + +"I feel almost as though we were on a picnic, instead of being +shipwrecked sailors who have been robbed of their ship, and have lost +all except the clothes on their backs," Charley declared. + +"Everything is going to turn out all right after all," agreed Walter, +hopefully. "Chris is going to get over his wound all right. He and the +captain will have no trouble in getting plenty of food and water. We +had ought to reach Judson by dark, and we'll get a boat or wagon and +return for them at once. We can easily get from Judson to Tarpon, and +there we can get the United States Commissioner to take up our case, +and the minute the 'Beauty' enters port she will be seized and held +for us. At the worst it will only mean the loss of our diving boat and +a little patient waiting. And think of the store of gold which will be +ours for a little work." + +But his chum was not quite so optimistic. "I do not think that we had +better build too great hopes on recovering either our ship or the +gold," he observed. "That Manuel is a clever rascal. I fear he will +rise to the occasion. He may think that we are wrecked in the storm +but I am convinced he will take no chances. He will plan and scheme to +the last to secure the ship and money and save his own neck from the +halter. He may be caught at last but he will not sail boldly into any +port. He's too wary for that." + +His words did not dampen Walter's high spirits. "There is a revenue +cutter at Tarpon," reminded his chum. "As soon as we get to Judson, we +will telegraph to the Commissioner. He will not wait for the 'Beauty' +to touch a port if we can put our case strong enough. He will start the +cutter out in search of her at once." + +"I hope you are right. If we are going to make Judson before dark, +however, we are going to have to travel faster than we are going now. +It's slow going amongst this mud and rock. Let us make our way inshore +and see if it's any better traveling there." + +But as they approached close to the mainland they saw that there was +no hopes of easier traveling in that direction. The dense hammock +jungle extended down to the edge of the marsh. To make one's way +through it would be far slower than to continue over the marsh. They, +accordingly, retraced their steps to the water's edge. It was slightly +easier traveling close to the water. The waves had beat down the marsh +grass along the edge leaving a kind of beach of rock and mud. It was +hard and dangerous walking but safer than over the marsh itself, where +the rank growth hid the treacherous bog holes. + +The boys often paused in their march to examine the masses of stuff +that had been cast up by the waves. The squall of the night before had +robbed the bottom of great masses of seaweed and had taken heavy toll +of the life in the water. Every few minutes the lads would pass great +clumps of seaweed tangled together in beautiful rainbows of bright +scarlets, yellows, crimsons and purples. Curiously enough, the storm +had dealt very harshly with the finny tribe. Likely many of the fish +had been caught in shoal water and their lives beaten out against the +cruel rocks. They dotted the shore and the chums frequently halted to +admire one's curious shape or coloring. + +"I wonder what kind this one is?" said Walter, pointing to a long slim +fish of a beautiful brilliant green. + +"That is a parrot fish," his chum enlightened him. "I think they are +one of the most beautiful fishes that swim. They are of all colors, +some are violet, some of golden, some scarlet, and in fact, they are +found of every shade and hue. They get their names from their many +brilliant colors, I guess." + +"What a wonderful mysterious thing the sea is," Walter commented. "I +never realized before how much of strange life it contains." + +"What we see along the beach this morning is only a very small sample +of its population," his chum replied. "Sometimes, I think that all +life must have come first from the sea. There is hardly an animal on +land which has not a grotesque likeness in some creature of the sea. +Take that fish there with the peculiarly shaped head and horns. Its +resemblance to a cow is so striking that it has been named the cow +fish. There is another little fish with a head just like a horse. It is +called the sea horse. Then there is the toad fish, the frog fish, the +snake fish, and hundreds of others closely resembling the animals after +which they are named. But here," he concluded, "is, in my opinion, the +most wonderful fish I have ever heard of. I have seen many of them but +one always has a puzzling fascination to me." + +He had stopped before a flat round-shaped fish which lay stranded +in the edge of the water. It was still alive and struggling feebly +to get back into deeper water. It was of a light-tan color and was +covered with spots of darker hue. On its upper surface was a soft, +spongy-looking, circular spot It was not a pretty looking object and +Walter viewed it with disgust. + +"I don't see anything fascinating about it," he commented. + +"Just put your finger on that soft spongy place," Charley directed, +"that's where it's wonderful secret is concealed. It is not poisonous," +he added as his chum hesitated. + +Walter bent down and pressed his finger against the spongy mass. The +next instant he leaped back with a cry of alarm, shaking his arm madly. +"Jerusalem!" he exclaimed. "What is it?" + +"Got a shock did you?" laughed his chum. "That's an electrical fish. +Their mystery to me lies in where they get the electricity with which +they are charged. Even a small one like that contains enough to give a +powerful shock." + +The morning had been advancing rapidly as they walked and talked and +the sun was shining down hot on their bare heads. Charley, justifying +Chris' confidence in him, was quick to recognize the danger from its +torrid rays. + +He cast a look up at the sun. "It is nearly noon," he declared. "We +must get something to cover our heads with and then find something to +eat. I am getting as hungry as a wolf." + +There was nothing along the rocky, muddy beach that would do for hats +and the two bent their steps in towards the mainland. There, they broke +off small leafy branches and thrust the stems down the backs of their +shirts so that the leaves would tower above, and shade their heads. +These made only a poor substitute for hats, but shed off the fiercest +rays of the sun. + +Close to where they broke off the boughs was a small running stream and +the boys drank thankfully of its cold sweet water. + +"We have no time to waste in cooking and I fear our bill-o-fare for +dinner will be rather scanty," Charley said. "Let's look around here +and see if we cannot find fruit of some kind." + +There were palmetto berries in plenty all along the high bank but the +lads had no desire to partake of them except in a case of necessity. +Seeing nothing promising along the edge of the jungle, they scrambled +up the bank and made their way slowly and cautiously into the hammock, +keeping a wary eye out for snakes. They found fruit of several kinds +in abundance, but most of it Charley rejected as being poisonous, or +not fit to eat. They gathered two kinds which he declared were both +palatable and nourishing. One was a golden-red fruit about the size of +a pear. It contained a large nut to which the meat clung closely. One +bite into it and the boys' hands and faces were smeared with sticky +juice. "I would recognize that smeary juice and strong turpentine +flavor, anywhere," laughed Walter, "these are mangoes, the fruit, they +say, you have got to get into a bath-tub to eat if you want to keep +clean." + +The second fruit was about the size of a large plum and snow white in +color with a blotch of red on the sides. Its meat was sweet, milky and +slightly puckering. + +"They are cocoa-plums," Charley explained. "They are considered quite +nutritious but I would be afraid to eat a great many of them at a time +on account of their puckerishness. We can eat all we want to of the +mangoes however, they will not hurt us." + +As soon as their repast was finished the boys filled their pockets with +mangoes and cocoa-plums and hastened back to the shore. + +They plodded steadily along while the afternoon wore away, but their +progress over the rocks and mud was slow and they realized that they +would not be able to reach Judson before darkness rendered further +traveling dangerous. + +They were passing a matted clump of seaweed on the shore when Charley, +stopping with a cry of delight, fished out from its midst a round piece +of wood about four feet in length, from which trailed a long, light +line badly frayed in places by the rock. + +"Do you recognize this?" he shouted. + +"No," replied his chum in wonder at his excitement. + +"It's the buoy that marked the place where the gold ship lay. The +Greeks will have a job to locate the gold now. That storm must have +chafed the rope in two against a ledge of coral. Hurrah, hurrah." + +"I don't see but that is as bad news for us as for the Greeks," Walter +said, dubiously. + +"It is, in a way," his chum replied. "Of course it will make it harder +for us to find the exact spot where the treasure lays, but the Greeks +will be delayed by it and that will give us a chance to get there with +the revenue cutter and catch them before they get all the gold removed +and get away." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +THE JOURNEY. + + +IT still lacked about an hour to sundown when Charley called a halt. +"We cannot possibly make Judson before night, and it would be sheer +foolishness to try to travel over these rocks after it gets dark," he +declared. "We would be sure to get some bad falls and very likely break +an arm or leg. The best thing we can do is to find a good place to camp +while it is still light and make ourselves as snug as possible for the +night." + +Walter, who was beginning to feel tired out from the long day's tramp, +was quick to agree with his proposal and the two lads headed in for the +mainland, for neither felt any desire to spend the night on the wet, +muddy marsh. + +Good fortune seemed to guide their footsteps for they struck the +mainland just where a little stream of clear water bubbled forth +amongst a clump of towering cedars. + +"The very place for our camp," Charley exclaimed. "You see what you can +fix up in the way of a shelter, Walt, while I look around and see what +I can find for our supper." + +Walter was fast becoming an adept at the science of woodcraft and he +went about his task with certainty and dispatch. First, he broke off +armsful of small boughs which he spread in two piles upon the ground +close to the trunks of two big cedar trees. These were to serve as +their couches and over them he proceeded to erect a rough lean-to to +protect them from the wind and dew. There were plenty of dead boughs +all around, and, selecting two of the longest and straightest, he +leaned them against the trunk of the two trees about six feet from the +ground, embedding their other ends firmly in the ground. Across these, +he laid other limbs a couple of feet apart and upon them piled palmetto +leaves and boughs to form a roof. Before the open front of the rude +structure, he built a roaring fire of dead cedar limbs. Close beside it +he piled up a huge heap of wood with which to keep the fire replenished +throughout the night. This completed his labors, and stretching himself +upon his springy, fragrant couch before the crackling fire, he waited +hungrily for his chum's return. He was becoming alarmed over his long +absence when there came a crackling of boughs and Charley strode into +the circle of firelight, bearing in one hand a snow-white heart, or +bud, of a cabbage palmetto and in the other, a chunk of fresh meat +several pounds in weight. + +"What have you got there?" he inquired, eagerly. + +Charley grinned, "I'm too hungry to stop and tell you now. Sharpen up a +couple of sticks and we'll broil some steaks, then, I'll give you three +guesses as to what it is, and bet that you don't guess right." + +Walter hastily cut two long green palmetto stems and sharpened them +to points at the ends. By the time he had them ready, Charley had cut +a couple of generous-sized steaks from the hunk of meat. The balance +of it he wrapped up in a couple of green palmetto leaves and buried +in the coals. While the steaks impaled upon the sticks were sizzling +appetizingly before the fire, he wrapped up the palmetto heart in green +leaves and buried it beside the roasting meat. + +So hungry was Walter that he cut bits from his steak before it was +fairly done and devoured them with eager appetite. + +"Like it?" inquired his chum with a twinkle in his eye. + +"Fine, it only needs a little salt to make it perfect," Walter +declared. "I can't quite place it though. It tastes like a cross +between pork and beefsteak. What is it anyway?" + +"Guess." + +"Pork?" + +"Nit." + +"Coon?" + +"Nit." + +"Opossum?" + +"Nit." + +"I give it up then. What kind of animal is it?" + +"I found it on the bank of a little creek not far from here," said +Charley, dreamily. "It was sound asleep and it did not look very pretty +or innocent even in its slumber, but beggars can't be choosers, so I +got me a good heavy club and crept up on it softly. When it woke up +I was near enough to give it a good rap over the head. It gave me a +couple of good licks in the shins with its tail, however, before I got +it killed." + +Walter rose in his indignation, "Why didn't you tell me at the start +that it was alligator meat," he demanded, "I would not have eaten a +mouthful of it." + +"And you'd gone hungry to bed," said his chum with a chuckle. "You'd +have let your prejudice cheat you out of a good meal. It tastes all +right, don't it." + +"Yes," Walter admitted, ruefully, "and, now that I've eaten some of it, +I might as well keep right on eating." + +"Wise lad," Charley approved. "Let me tell you there are lots worse +things than alligator steaks when one is hungry." + +The steaks disposed of, the boys attacked the roasted meat and +palmetto cabbage with such vigorous appetites that there was but little +left when their hunger was at last appeased. + +"Pretty slim show for breakfast," said Charley, ruefully, as he eyed +the scanty remains. "Let's see if we can't fix up some way to catch +something during the night." + +The plan which they finally decided upon to accomplish this was very +simple. With their sharp knives, they whittled out several sets of +figure-four setters, and, dragging several small logs just outside the +circle of firelight, they placed a figure-four setter under an end of +each and baited the triggers with bits of meat left from their supper. +An animal nosing around after the bait would be sure to spring the +setter and cause the log to descend upon it. + +"We will surely get a coon or opossum before morning," Charley +declared. "Animals have lots of curiosity and some of them are sure to +be attracted by the light of our camp-fire. The smell of the cooked +meat will attract them also." + +This last task completed, the boys stretched themselves on their soft +couches before the cheery fire whose rays danced and flickered amongst +the leafy greenness of their shelter. It was a cozy, cheery little +camp and the two lads lay long awake, talking hopefully with the +cheery optimism that waits upon a hearty supper and healthy vigorous +youth. When at last they fell asleep, it was with confident hope of a +successful morrow. + +It seemed to Walter that he had barely fallen asleep when he was +struggling in that nightmare state which lies halfway between slumber +and entire wakefulness. He struggled pantingly for breath, but every +breath he drew seemed to stifle him. Oppressed with black horror, he +fought his way back to consciousness. But wakefulness brought small +relief. The air was heavy with a stench that nauseated and sickened him. + +Charley, crouched beside the fire, was holding his nose with one hand, +his face expressing unutterable disgust. + +"What in the world is the matter?" Walter demanded. + +"One of our traps worked," announced his chum, grimly. "It's only a +little skunk, but my, what a big smell." + +"I should say so," Walter agreed. "We can't stay here. We'll have to +move camp." + +"I second the motion to adjourn," said his chum, solemnly. + +No time was lost in debating the question and the lads quickly took +their departure from their cozy camp. They made their way cautiously +along the edge of the hammock until the raucous odor was left behind, +then they halted and built another fire. + +"The measly little varmint," said Walter, wrathfully, as they crouched +beside the blaze. "He's gone and cheated us out of a good night's +sleep." + +"Oh, it isn't as bad as all that," said his chum, cheerfully. "It's +nearly morning now. See, there's the morning star in the East. +Besides," he added, whimsically, "That poor little fellow isn't to +blame. He didn't ask us to set a trap for him. I bet he regrets the +accident as much as we do." Then throwing back his head he sang in his +clear tenor voice, "Driven From Home." + +As the humor of the incident dawned upon Walter, he burst into laughter +in which he was joined by his fun-loving chum. + +It was too near morning to consider selecting another shelter so the +two sat beside the fire until day broke, then they made their way back +to the camp to examine their traps. All were sprung, but, outside of +the skunk, the only victims were an opossum and a coon which they bore +back to their new fire. The opossum they broiled and ate for breakfast +while the coon they roasted to carry along with them for dinner. + +Sunrise found them once more on the march headed South. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +JUDSON.[A] + + +BY noon the two lads estimated that they must have come at least twenty +miles from where they had left the captain and Chris, and, if the old +sailor had been right in his reckoning, they could not be far from +their objective point, the town of Judson. They began now to keep a +sharp watch ahead and ere long were rewarded by the sight of a low +black line projecting out from the marsh ahead. A closer approach +resolved the low black line into a long, shaky, decrepit wharf, its +piling rotting from age and neglect and its timbers and planking fast +falling into decay. On the mainland back of the marsh a few rude +cabins, each at least a half a mile distant from its nearest neighbor, +rose from the middles of wide neglected fields. One lone, aged sloop +rode at anchor near the wharf. The little port and the hamlet itself +seemed to wear an air of deadly decay, sadness and gloom. + +"Not a very cheerful or prosperous-looking place," Charley observed as +they clambered up on the wharf and made their way ashore over its shaky +timbers. + +"No," his chum agreed, "but I am thankful to reach it, poor as it is. +My feet are getting sore from tramping over these rocks, I can tell +you." + +At the shore end of the dock the two paused long enough to take a more +careful survey of the place. + +"I declare it looks as though it was deserted or all the inhabitants +dead," Walter said nervously, "See how the roads are all grown up with +weeds as though they were never used. There is no sign of anyone about +either." + +"Just notice those cabins," his chum exclaimed, "They look just +like the pictures I have seen of houses the first settlers used to +build during the Indian times. They are built of great logs and have +loopholes like the forts of those days. What a queer place!" + +"Well, there's smoke coming from the chimney of that nearest cabin, and +there seems to be someone working out in the field by it," said Walter +with a sigh of relief. "I was beginning to think it was an abandoned +village." + +The two bent their steps towards the cabin indicated. It was set in +a square clearing of about twenty acres, that was surrounded by a +strip of pine woods which separated it from its nearest neighbor. As +they drew nearer, they could see a man at work near the cabin. He was +ploughing up the ground with a rude plow hitched to a yoke of oxen. + +As the boys stepped out of the road into the clearing, they were +greeted by savage barks, and a pack of dogs lolling around the cabin +woke into sudden life and came tearing towards them. + +The man at the plough let go the handles and sprang into the cabin. The +next minute a rifle barrel protruded from one of the loopholes, "Halt +right where you-all is," called a voice from behind the rifle. + +"Call off your dogs," shouted Charley, as he and Walter, snatching up a +couple of sticks, endeavored to keep the growling, snapping curs at bay. + +"Who are you-alls an' what do you want?" demanded the holder of the +rifle. + +"We were shipwrecked twenty-five miles up the coast. We want supplies +and help to bring in two companions, one of whom is badly hurt," +answered Charley. + +"Come closer an' let me have a good look at you-all," commanded the +cabin's occupant, "Here yu Bet, yu Tige, yu Jim, be still thar," he +called to the snarling pack which slunk growling away at his harsh +commands. + +The boys drew near the cabin in obedience to his order. A brief survey +of them seemed to convince its owner that they were not what he feared. +The cabin door was flung open, and, rifle in hand, he appeared in the +doorway. + +"Come in you-alls an' have a cheer," he invited. "I'll jis' unhitch +them oxen an' then, while I'm rustling up a bit of supper, you-alls can +give me your story." + +The tired, hungry boys accepted his invitation with alacrity, and, +while he was busy unharnessing the yoke of steers, they seated +themselves in a couple of rude home-made chairs, and gazed curiously +about them. + +The cabin was about twenty feet square. Its rough log walls were +whitewashed, and its pine-slab floor spotlessly clean. At one end +was a big old-fashioned fireplace from the rafters above which hung +home-cured hams, slabs of bacon, and strings of sausages. A barrel +in a corner was heaped high with huge, sweet, sugary yams. Several +boxes beside it were heaped with onions, cabbages, carrots, pumpkins, +and other vegetables. In another corner stood a barrel of home-ground +corn meal and a big hogshead of water. Taken all in all, the little +cabin's interior was a sight to fill the two hungry lads with satisfied +anticipation. They had hardly completed their survey of it when their +strange host entered latching and bolting the heavy door behind him. + +He was a man about forty years of age, strongly built, but sallow +with the sallowness of the native Floridian. His face was kindly in +expression but stamped on its every line was a look of uneasiness and +apprehension. It was not an expression of fear but rather the look of +a brave man who was simply on his guard every moment against expected +dangers. + +"I sho' have got to ask you-all to excuse me fur the way I dun greeted +you," he apologized, "but, you see, strangers are mighty scarse around +hyar an' one has to be plum' careful. I'se powerful glad to see a new +face though--it's been mighty nigh two years since I had talk with a +stranger. I reckon, you-alls must be some hungry. I'll rustle up a +little supper while you-all gives me your tale." + +With a deftness that indicated long batching experience, he cut great +slices of ham and placed them to broil over the coals, mixed a pone +of corn bread and put it to bake in a Dutch oven, and buried a dozen +big yams to roast among the embers. While he was thus engaged, Charley +related the story of their voyage and shipwreck omitting only any +mention of the gold. His story was frequently interrupted by his host's +exclamations, "I swan, an' dew tell." When the lad had finished, the +stranger beamed upon him with evident pleasure. "I swan, hit's jis' +like a novel I read once," he declared, "hit was writ by a fellow +called Russell, Clark Russell, if I don't disremember his name. I don't +reckon his story was true though. I 'lows he just made it up outer his +head--but the vittals is ready now, you-alls jis' back up to the table +thar an' helps yourselves." + +The hungry boys needed no second invitation but fell to work on the +tender juicy ham and sugary yams with hearty appetites while their host +as he ate, watched them with evident pleasure at their enjoyment. When +all had finished, he put away the dishes, filled his corn-cob pipe, and +leaned back in his chair against the wall. + +"You-alls can't go back to whar yu left the captain an' the little +nigger to-night, noways," he observed. + +"No," Charley agreed, "but we would like to start back early in the +morning if we can get a wagon or a boat." + +"Thar ain't no fitten road for a wagon leading up the coast," observed +their host. "I owns that little sloop anchored down thar by the dock. I +reckon, you-alls could make out with her. I don't reckon them Wrights +would stop you-alls from going if they understood jis' how things +stood. I don't 'low they would be so pesky pisen mean as all that. +I'd like to go with you-alls an' see that ole captain an' that little +nigger, I sho' would." + +"We would like to have you go with us," said Walter, eagerly. "Why +can't you?" + +"'Cause I don't ever expect to leave this hyar cabin alive," said his +host, calmly. + +The boys stared at him in uneasy astonishment. + +"No, I ain't crazy," said the man quietly. "Hush, jis' lis'en' a bit." + +A long prolonged growl came from one of the dogs outside. The man arose +and taking up his rifle stepped over to the loophole beckoning to the +lads to follow. The moon lit up the little clearing almost as light as +day. The dogs were moving around outside, sniffing and uttering low +growls. + +The boys could see nothing unusual in the clearing but they felt a +sense of danger in the very air. Their host's eyes, more accustomed to +the surroundings than their own, evidently detected something ominous +in one of the shadows thrown out from the belt of pines. He thrust +the barrel of his rifle out through the loophole and the next instant +its sharp crack rent the stillness of the night. The lurking shadow +vanished amongst the pines with a whoop of defiance. + +Their host pulled in his rifle, "A plum' miss," he said, disgustedly, +"Wall, the war is on for fair now. Better outen that light an' draw +your cheers up by the fire an' I'll tell you'alls about hit." + +FOOTNOTE: + +[A] This account of Judson is the description of a little West Florida +town as it actually has been, and is to-day. Nineteen of its scanty +population have died by a fierce war. The author has only changed the +first letter of the town's real name. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +THE FEUD. + + +"THAR ain't no call to keep watch at the loopholes," said their host +as the alarmed lads' glances kept wandering towards the dark openings. +"The dogs will tell we-alls if anyone tries to come near the cabin." He +leaned back in his chair in silence for a few minutes gazing into the +heart of the fire whose flickering rays lit up his bronzed, thoughtful, +kindly face. + +"Hit all began years ago when I warn't but a little bit of a shaver," +he began, quietly. "Judson was a right-prosperous, happy, contented, +little place, then. Thar was mighty nigh a hundred people living in +the town, an' in the woods nigh about hyar. Each family had hit's own +little cabin an' farm an' raised all hit's own living of meat, corn, +taters, an' sugar cane, an' each family had hit's patch of cotton +with which they bought what things they needed that they didn't raise +themselves. We had a right tidy little schoolhouse. I went to hit two +terms when I was a little shaver," he said with evident pride, "an' +I learned how to read an' write pretty well--the reading's been a +heap of company to me during the years since then. Each family had a +plenty to eat an' wear, an' thar warn't none that you could call real +poor people like I hearn tell you-alls have in the North. We used to +have dances and barbecues, an' picnics an' a right sociable time. The +town was started by two families, the Turners an' the Wrights--I'm +a Turner,--an' all the people about was kin to one or the other +family, which made everybody friendly and sociable with each other. +Hit was jis' a little Eden on earth, this place, 'till the serpent +came twisting an' crawlin' in. The devil must have sho' had a hand in +making some of the men folks believe that the Good Lord intended the +honest corn they raised for anything but food for man an' beast. Yes, +I reckon, hit sho' must have been ole Satan that made a few of the +Turners an' Wrights get together an' start a little whiskey still over +thar in the woods yonder. The womin folks was again hit from the start, +as, bless their hearts, they've always been again the cursed stuff. Hit +was Christmas week that the still was started goin', an' Christmas Eve +the ones running hit gave a big barbecue at the still to celebrate it. +Most everyone went, as they always did to doin's in the neighborhood. +Even my daddy an' two brothers, Ben an' Abe, went to see the fun as +they called hit, but mammy she was a good, religious woman, she staid +at home an' kept me with her. She would have liked to keep the other +boys with her too, but they had grown out of her control as boys +sometimes do." His bronzed face grew sadly thoughtful, as he continued, +"I recollect, I cried because I couldn't go too, but mother sang to me +an' tole me stories--mother was a powerful hand at telling the kind of +stories boys like an' I soon quit cryin' an' went to sleep quiet an' +happy with mother singing to me. Hit was the last time I ever heard +mammy sing. I reckon hit was 'bout midnight when a noise woke me up. +The door had been flung open--hit was never locked in them days--an' +father an' Abe came rushin' in. Father's face was white as a sheet +an' I'll never forget the look on mammy's face. Hit seemed as if she +knowed without a word from daddy what had happened. Thar was a curious +tremble in her voice as she asked, 'Whar's Ben?' At the sound of her +voice father broke down an' sobbed like a child. 'He's dead,' he cried. +'They've killed my boy Ben. Those Wrights have killed my boy Ben.'" + +The man paused as the recollection of that terrible scene crowded his +mind, while the two lads looked at each other with sympathetic horror. + +"No one seemed to know just how the trouble started," went on their +host, quietly. "All hands had taken a little too much liquor, there had +been a few hot words, a blow, an' Ben had keeled over with a knife in +his side. Then the fightin' started between the kin of both families, +an' daddy an' Abe had run home to git their guns. Sore at heart as +mammy was, she begged 'em not to shed no more blood but to leave it +to the cotes, for mammy, as I have said, was a religious woman. But +both Wrights and Turners came first from the mountains of Kentucky +whar man don't go to law again' man but settles his quarrels with his +rifle, An' so the blood-feud began. Thar was more than Ben killed that +night,--Wrights as well as Turners. When all had sobered up from the +liquor thar came a kind of lull or truce, but war always bruk out again +when either families got to drinkin'. They got Abe the followin' year, +but not 'fore he had shot a couple of Wrights. Hit was three years +afore they got father. Mother, she pined away an' died soon after they +got him. I think she was kinder glad to go, such things are wearin' on +a woman. An' so the killin's been goin' on ever since by spells when +the liquor gets to flowin'. I am the only Turner alive, now, though +thar's a few of my kin still scattered around hyar. I've been shot at +a powerful lot of times, but, I reckon, I've been lucky. Then too, +they ain't none of them hunted me so powerful hard, for I ain't took +no part in any of the killin's. I've shot a couple of times to scare +them away but not to kill. My own kin 'lows that I'm poor-spirited, but +somehow or other, I can't forget the look on mammy's face the night +Ben was killed. I don't want to be the cause of puttin' no such look +on any woman's face. I've knowed all these years though that my time +must come sooner or later. I heard to-day that the Wrights have got in +a lot of liquor from Tarpon Springs an' they are sayin' that the last +Turner has got to be wiped out of Judson. So, I got me in a store of +water an' grub an' fixed to lay low for awhile. I may be able to hold +out until their liquor is gone an' the danger is past, but I reckon hit +doan' make so powerful much of difference. They air plum' sho' to get +me sooner or later. Wall, that's the story, young fellows, hit's been +a right smart relief to have someone sympathetic to tell hit to. Don't +you worry none though. As soon as comes mornin' I'll hist a flag of +truce an' arrange to have you fellows let out peaceful. You can take +my boat an' go after your captain an' that little nigger, but I sho' +advise you not to stop hyar on youah way back. Keep right on to Tarpon +Springs. Some of my kin folks kin bring the sloop back from thar." + +"You are very good," Charley exclaimed. "But tell me why you have never +left this awful place. There are hundreds of places where you could +have made as good a living and been free from dread and worry." + +"Mammy's grave is out thar among them pines," said the man, simply, +"an' daddy's, an' Ben's, an' Abe's, then, atter all, this place is +home, no other place could be that." + +"I see," said Charley, much abashed. + +"I am proud to have met you, Mr. Turner," declared Walter, warmly. "I +think you are a noble man." + +"No? I sho' reckon you is mistaken," said the man in surprise. "Me +noble? I reckon not. My own kin 'lows I'm mighty poor-spirited 'cause I +won't take no hand in the killin'." + +"I don't care a cent what your kin says," began Walter, hotly, but he +was interrupted by the crack of a rifle, the whistle of a bullet, and +the howl of a dog outside. + +His host winced as if the bullet had struck his own body. "They've +killed Bet," he cried. "Bet, what I raised from a little bit of puppy. +They hadn't ought to go an' shoot a poor defenceless, dumb animal, hit +ain't right. My God, be they goin' to kill all my poor faithful dawgs," +he cried, as another shot rang out followed by another pitiless howl. + +Rifle shot followed rifle shot while the man stood trembling with eyes +flashing as he listened to the whining of the animals outside. At last, +heedless of the bullets pattering against the logs, he flung the door +wide open and called to the hounds. They came crowding in, a whining, +mangy, ill-looking pack, but disreputable as they were, they had been +the man's only friends through his lonely years and the two lads +respected him for his act. + +As soon as he had bolted the door again, he rummaged in a corner and +brought out three rifles. He handed one to each of the boys. "I reckon, +we'll have to watch at the loopholes now the dawgs air inside," he said +quietly. "You-alls can take the ones at the ends, I'll tend to the +sides. Be right careful 'bout standin' in front of 'em, a bullet might +pass through. An' don't shoot to kill if you can help it." + +"An' his kin people call that man poor-spirited," whispered Walter in +wonder to his chum as they took up their positions. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + +BESIEGED. + + +THE boys had little opportunity for conversation in their new rôle as +guards, being separated from each other by the length of the cabin. +Strange as was the position in which they found themselves, they felt +but little fear. The massive logs of which the cabin was constructed +bid defiance to the entry of a bullet, and neither of them could +believe that the affair would amount to more than a few shots being +fired at the building while the attacking party was under the influence +of the liquor they had drank. They believed that with the coming of +day the feudalists would disband and retire to their homes, while they +would be free to return to the rescue of their friends on the island. +Nevertheless, they were not going to take any chances in the duties as +sentinels. They stood well to one side of their loopholes and peeped +out at the little clearing plainly visible in the bright moonlight. + +"I reckon they can't see to shot through the loopholes, but you-alls +want to keep youah bodies out of line with them," cautioned Mr. Turner. +"Hit mought be that a stray bullet would pass through one of them. An' +don't either of you young fellows fire 'less you jes' have to. You +doan't want to get mixed up in this hyar quarrel. If yu' jis' naturally +have to shoot, aim low an' give it to 'em in the laigs." + +"There seems to be several of them gathering together at the edge of +the woods," called Charley anxiously. "Here they come straight for the +house!" + +His host darted to his side. "They've got a long pole an' air aiming to +batter down the door," he announced. "Keep back, boys, an' let me do +the talking an' shootin', if thar's got to be any." + +But the boys crowded close to his side, eager to view the coming +attack. + +There were about a dozen men in the approaching party and they advanced +at a rapid trot, bearing between them a huge pine log. + +"Halt whar you air," commanded Turner when they had approached to +within sixty feet of the house. "If you-alls come any closer meanin' +trouble, someone is goin' to get hurt." + +There were enough of timid spirits in the party to cause a halt in the +advance. + +"We're goin' to get youah hide this time, Bill Turner," shouted +the foremost of the gang, a big, heavily-whiskered man. "Hit's a +disgrace on us Wrights to have one of youah name livin' still in this +settlement. You're goin' to be done for this time." + +"Now, I ain't done nothin' to you-alls in all these years," said Turner +quietly and argumentatively. "You ain't got no cause to come 'round +hectoring me." + +"More shame for you," shouted the big man. "We're goin' to do you, +first, 'cause you're a Turner, second, 'cause you've been too +poor-spirited all these years to put up a man's fight." + +"Pears lak hit needs a powerful lot of yu to do fo' one, lone, +mean-spirited critter," said Turner, mildly. + +The big man stamped his foot with rage. "Hit don't take none but me," +he roared. "Yu come out hyar an' we'll have it out, man to man." + +"I ain't a-doubting you're courage, Jim Wright," returned the other, +slowly, "but I ain't aimin' to hurt no man 'less I have to. Besides, if +I did get the best of yu, all the rest of youah gang would come down on +me. Jes' keep away from my cabin, that's all I've got to say." + +"Come on, boys," roared the leader. "He's too mean-spirited to hurt a +fly. He can't shoot all of us, anyway." + +There was some hesitation, but his fellows, evidently, believed that +the man inside would not fire. Under the urging of their leader they +picked up the log and started on a run for the door. + +But they quickly discovered their mistake. From the loophole shot +out quick jets of flame as the man inside worked the lever of his +Winchester. The log dropped unheeded to the ground as its bearers +broke for the cover of the woods. Some were not able to run but limped +away groaning with pain. After the fleeing ones strode the big leader, +cursing them for cowards and imploring them to return to the assault. + +"I don't reckon I've hurt any one of them very much," Turner remarked, +as he slipped more shells into his rifle. "I jes' aimed for their +laigs." + +"Thank God, it has all ended without loss of life," Charley said +earnestly, but his host shook his head. + +"Hit ain't ended, hit's jes' begun, Jim Wright ain't one to be scart +out by a little lead. He don't know what fear is. If he can't get none +of 'em to come back with him, he'll come back alone. I wish you young +fellows were safe outer hyar, but it won't do for you to try to leave +now. Crazy drunk, like them fellows is, hit wouldn't be safe for you. +Maybe by morning they'll be sobered up enough to listen to reason." + +In spite of his words, the boys were hopeful that the night would pass +off without further trouble, but they were soon undeceived. Half an +hour had not passed when the big leader emerged from the woods followed +by a half a dozen of his fellow feudalists. + +His followers halted by the fallen log but he advanced boldly direct +for the loophole. + +"Keep away, for Gawd's sake, keep away, Jim," Turner implored. "I don't +want to have to shoot you." + +"Hit's you or me this time!" shouted the other, "The sun don't rise on +no living Turner in this town." + +"Keep back," warned Turner, thrusting his rifle through the loophole, +but even in his desperate situation, the boys, crowded close beside +him, and could see that he aimed only at the legs of the advancing man. + +Ruffian though he was, the other was not without brute courage. He +never paused in his advance. "Shoot," he shouted as he whipped out a +pistol, "Shoot, that's what I want yu to do." + +The two reports came almost together, but the pistol shot was a +fraction of a second ahead of the other. Like a fire-swept weed Turner +crumpled to the floor, his rifle exploding as he fell. + +The big man clapped one hand to his side and fell to the ground. + +With the report of his rifle, his followers had grabbed up the log and +rushed for the door, but Charley had been quick to see the danger. +Snatching up the rifle from the fallen man, he fired at the moving +legs as fast as he could work the lever. The whistling lead was more +than the assaulters could stand. Three dropped their hold on the log +and limped hurriedly for cover while their fellows, deprived of their +aid, could no longer sustain the heavy timber, which sank again to the +ground while they hastened after their wounded companions. + +The boys watched them in silence until they entered the woods then +Charley set down the rifle. + +"I don't think they will be back right away again," he said. "Anyway, +we have got to risk a light. Perhaps Mr. Turner is not dead." + +With hands that trembled with excitement Walter struck a match and lit +the lamp, then, the two boys lifted the prostrate man and laid him upon +the bed. "Keep watch at the loophole while I see if anything can be +done for him," Charley commanded. + +The man's shirt was matted with blood and the lad did not attempt +to take it off, but cut it away with his sheath knife, exposing the +white chest in the center of which gapped a horrible hole. "He's badly +wounded," he announced after a careful examination of the wound. +"There's two holes, one in his chest and one in his side. I believe the +bullet struck a rib and glanced, coming out at his side. If so, he will +pull through if I can only stop the blood flowing. I'll have to keep +this lamp lit for awhile even it is risky. I'll be as quick as I can." + +There was little in the rude cabin with which to do in such a case, +but the resourceful lad made the best of the situation, working with +feverish speed so as to be able to extinguish the lamp as soon as +possible. First, he washed out the wash basin thoroughly and filling it +with clean water from the barrel added to the water a generous handful +of salt. With this he washed the ugly-looking wound, then tearing into +pieces a fresh sheet he found lying on a shelf, he made a little wad +of rags with which, after soaking them in salt water, he plugged up +the gaping hole. Over this he bound wet strips of the sheet to hold it +securely in place. He was rewarded for his labor by seeing that the +flow of blood was quickly checked and soon ceased entirely. As soon as +he made certain of this, he extinguished the light and crept to his +chum's side. + +"I think he will pull out all right," he announced. "He is unconscious +yet, and when he does come to he'll be very weak from loss of blood. +Have you seen any more of those fellows?" + +"They're still in the woods around the clearing. Listen and you'll hear +their voices every now and then." + +"Has the man who was shot moved any?" + +"No, he lays just as he fell. I guess he's dead." + +"It's a horrible affair," said Charley with a shudder. "I'll never +forget this night. It has put us in a bad fix. We can't leave here now, +and I don't like the way the wind is coming up. If there's a heavy +storm, the captain and Chris will be in danger, it wouldn't take a very +heavy sea to cover that marsh. Just listen how it's blowing." + +Walter seemed not to hear what his chum was saying. He stood staring +out at the still figure stretched on the ground. "He hasn't moved, but +maybe he isn't dead," he said at last. "Perhaps, he is bleeding to +death and a little attention might save his life." + +"You're right," Charley exclaimed. "We must bring him in." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + +THE ENEMIES. + + +IT was a risky thing to attempt. To venture outside would be to expose +themselves in the bright moonlight to the bullets of the feudalists, +but the two plucky lads never hesitated. The body lay not a dozen steps +from the cabin and it would not do to let his fellows approach that +close to the little fort. Either they must save him themselves, if he +was not already dead, or leave him to die alone in the night. + +"We must be quick about it," Charley declared. "As soon as I unlatch +the door, we must run out, grab him by the shoulders, and drag him +in--he's too heavy to lift." + +In this bold move fortune seemed to favor the lads. They got their +heavy burden to the door before a shot was fired and, then, the bullets +whistled harmlessly above their heads. + +"We were lucky that time," Charley panted as he barred the door again. +"Now keep a sharp lookout. I'll have to light that lamp again." + +"This fellow is not so very badly hurt," he announced, as soon as he +had examined his new patient. "The bullet has gone right through the +fleshy part of his shoulder. He will come out of it all right if the +wound is kept clean." In a few minutes he had washed and dressed the +wound as he had the other man's, then, putting out the light once more, +he rejoined his companion at the loophole. "Anything stirring?" he +inquired. + +"No, I don't even hear their voices now. Perhaps they will not bother +us again to-night," Walter replied, hopefully. + +"I am not worrying about them as much as I am this wind," said his chum +gloomily. "We are safe enough here so long as the grub and water holds +out, but, God knows how it is faring with Chris and the captain." + +The gale was now howling and whistling around the little cabin with a +force to justify Charley's gloomy apprehension. The boys had to speak +loudly to make themselves heard above its uproar. They soon abandoned +all attempts at conversation and waited wearily and silently for +another assault from the feudalists and for the coming of day. + +Either the ruffians had at last become over-powered by the liquor they +had drank or else they had decided to wait the coming of day, for they +did not again show themselves in the clearing. Day, however, came at +last, after what seemed to the exhausted lads an age of waiting. + +As soon as it became light enough to see, Charley removed the bandages +from their stricken host and redressed his wound more carefully. "His +pulse is getting stronger and there is some color in his face," he +remarked to his chum. "I believe, I could bring him to, but I guess +it's best to let him lie unconscious as long as he can. He will suffer +enough when he does regain consciousness." + +As soon as he finished with Turner, Charley turned to his other +patient who was beginning to move uneasily and show signs of returning +consciousness. While he was yet bathing his wound the man opened his +eyes. + +"Gosh! how my shoulder hurts," he growled. "Be mighty careful how you +touch it, young fellow, or I'll skin you alive." + +Charley set aside the basin of water and rising to his feet looked down +on the fellow with a face full of scorn. + +"You great, big, drunken, cowardly murderer," he exclaimed. "It's a +pity that bullet didn't kill you. You are not fit to live on God's +green earth. You're shot when trying, with a crowd of your fellows, to +kill a lone, inoffensive man. Your friends don't think enough of you to +come back and get your carcass. We bring you in and care for you and +instead of thanks, your first words are a growl and a threat. You are a +cowardly, disgraceful cur,--that's what you are." + +Astonished rage filled the man's face. "No man ever said words like +that to Jim Wright and lived," he gasped. He attempted to rise but was +too weak to gain his feet, and sank back with a groan. + +"Oh, I guess you won't do any killing for a little while," sneered +Charley, whose anger was at white heat. "I've no doubt people have +been afraid to tell you the truth before, but you are going to hear +it for once in your life. I've no doubt with your strength and +disposition you've bullied everything until they are afraid to do +anything but flatter you, but, now you are going to take a dose of your +own medicine." Then, seating himself just out of reach of the man's +powerful arms, he proceeded to tell him what he thought of him in words +that stung with contempt and scorn. Then, as his anger subsided, he +repeated the story Turner had told him, contrasting Turner's quiet, +patient, peaceful heroism with the other's blood-thirstiness and +violence, with all the power of the earnestness he felt. + +At first the man kept interrupting him with curses and abuse, but as +he went calmly on ignoring the interruptions the fellow lay quiet, his +face turned to the wall. + +Once Charley stopped, thinking he might have fainted he lay so still, +but he spoke up gruffly. + +"Did I kill him?" + +"No, but it's not your fault that you didn't," the lad replied, curtly, +and went on with his arraignment. "I don't care a hang what you and +your cowardly fellows think," he concluded, "all decent people would +say that that poor fellow lying there is a brave hero while you are the +mean-spirited, cowardly one. And, now, if you'll lie quiet and keep +your mouth shut, I'll dress that wound. I hate to pollute my hands by +touching you, but it's got to be done." + +The man lay quiet while the lad washed and bound up his wound. Charley +could see that his features were working convulsively, but whether from +rage or pain he could not determine. + +As soon as his task was completed, Charley relieved his chum at the +loophole and Walter set about making coffee and cooking some breakfast. +They were both sadly in need of food and felt much better after they +had eaten. As soon as they had finished, Charley made his chum lie down +to take a nap, promising to call him, and lie down himself in a couple +of hours. + +While Walter was asleep Turner came out of the deep swoon which had +followed his wound. He was weak and in terrible pain but in full +possession of his senses. It was evident that he was greatly bewildered +at the sight of his enemy lying helpless on the floor, and Charley +explained the situation to him in a few words. + +"I sho' am glad I didn't kill him," said the sick man, thankfully. "I +jes' shot at his laigs, the gun must have gone off when I fell. I am +sho' sorry I hurt you so bad, Jim, I didn't aim for to do hit." + +But Wright kept his face turned to the wall and answered not a word. + +As the morning advanced Charley was much puzzled by the constant sound +of hammering coming from the woods near the clearing. It was evident +their enemies were preparing another surprise but he could not guess at +its nature. + +All the morning long the hammering continued, then shortly before noon +there emerged from the woods an object which caused him at first, to +stare in bewildered surprise, and, then, as it drew nearer the cabin to +send him to shaking Walter, whom he had let sleep on. + +"Wake up! Wake up!" he cried. "We have got to fight for our lives. +Those fellows have built a heavy breastwork on the front of a wagon and +are shoving it ahead of them up to the cabin." + +"Young fellows! help me up and help me to that loophole," gruffly +commanded the wounded man on the floor. "Don't hesitate," he cried as +the lad was about to refuse the surprising command, "them fellows have +got a couple of sticks of dynamite in that cart an' if they get near +enough to throw it thar won't be enough left of this cabin to make a +good toothpick. We was aiming to use it last night if we couldn't get +Turner no other way." + +Between them the two startled lads got the big fellow on his feet and +supported him to the loophole where he leaned against the logs, his +face twitching with the pain of his effort. + +It was just in time, for the wagon with its burden of death was scarce +a hundred feet away when he shouted: "Stop where yer are, boys. Thar +ain't no call to throw any of that stuff." + +"Is that you, Cap?" called one of the men. "Why, we 'lowed yer was +dead." + +"An' I might have been for all of yu fellows, leaving me to die on the +ground like a poisoned dog." + +He paused while a chorus of excuses came from the men behind the +breastwork. + +"Well, I ain't dead, but it ain't no thanks to yu fellows," he went on +slowly and painfully. "Now, yu fellows jes' roll that wagon back whar +hit came from an' go home and behave yerselves. Yu fellows know me +an' know I'll do what I say. Hit's jes' come to me, an' hit's come in +a powerful rough way, that I've been powerful mean, pisen an' onery. +My eyes am sho' opened at last, an' I'm powerful ashamed of how I've +been carryin' on. But hit's all over now. From now on Bill Turner is +my friend, an' the man that lifts a finger again' him lifts it again' +me, an' me an' my close kin will make this place too hot to hold him. +That's all I've got to say. Now, go home." + +Murmurs of astonishment arose from the men behind the wagon as they +slowly but obediently backed the wagon towards the woods. Over the face +of the wounded man on the bed stole a look of joy unspeakable. + +The bewildered but delighted boys helped Wright back to his place on +the floor. + +"I want to shake hands with you, Mr. Wright," said Charley, earnestly. +"I am afraid I talked pretty rough to you." + +"I needed hit," said the other as he took the proffered hand. "Hit's a +pity, young fellow, that thar ain't more like yu down in this neck of +thar woods." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + +THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN. + + +LEAVING the boys safe from the danger that had threatened them, let us +return to the castaways whom we left confronted by that menace, the +most grewsome of all to shipwrecked sailors, the lack of water. + +The sponger captain needed no explanation but the captain's simple +words to realize the terrible tortures and awful death that awaited +them all if help in some shape did not soon come to their rescue. His +bronzed face grew white beneath it's coat of tan. + +"I am frightfully thirsty, already," he exclaimed, "Is there no way we +can reach the mainland. Thar's water in plenty thar." + +"If we were birds or fish, we might get thar, I reckon," replied +Captain Westfield, "but, being as we are only human beings, I calculate +it ain't no way possible." + +The Conch eyed the raging water that stretched between the little +island and the shore. + +"A strong swimmer might make it," he observed, musingly. "I've swum +farther many a time but it was when I was in a sight better shape than +I am now." + +"Yes, I reckon a right powerful swimmer might make it," assented the +captain, "but this little fellow and I are not equal to it, we'd never +reach the land." + +"I believe I could do it even now," said the sponger calculatingly, +"but I won't desert yo' two Yo' saved my life an' I'd be worse than a +Greek to leave yo' here." + +"If you can do it, go ahead, man," said the old sailor. "You can't do +us any good by staying. Better save your own life," but the Conch shook +his head sadly. + +"My life ain't worth much, now," he said sadly. "My little ship's +gone, all my brave comrades drowned, an' everything I had in the world +lost. I've not much to live for now." + +"Bosh, man," said the old sailor, "I reckon, thar's always something +for a man to live for as long as the Good Lord let him live. If thar +wasn't the Lord wouldn't let him live." + +But the Conch was not to be comforted, the full extent of his loss was +beginning to make itself felt as he regained his strength and the full +possession of his senses after his terrible ordeal. He soon moved a +little apart from the two castaways, and, seating himself on the sand +buried his face in his hands. The two watchers could see the tears +trickling between his fingers and they turned away greatly moved at +that most impressive of sights, the grief of a strong man, ashamed of +displaying his tears. When they looked again he was on his knees and +his bowed head showed that he was praying. When he rejoined them, his +manner was filled with the calm and quietness of one who has found +peace for his afflictions. + +"I see there is no wood here with which to build a raft," he observed. +"Things look pretty bad, but they say the darkest hour is just before +the dawn. We must take courage. Yo'r young friends may return with help +at any hour." + +The captain shook his head sadly. "Something has happened to them or +they would have been back long ago. They cannot return now until the +storm is over." + +"It cannot last much longer," declared the Conch, confidently. "It is +losing force now, I believe it will blow out by morning." + +"Maybe, but it will take a long time for the sea to go down so a boat +can live in it, and, in the meantime we have no water." + +"We must not give way to despair," said the Conch, who seemed like +another man after his devotions. "Let's dig another well right in the +midst of the island, perhaps we can get water fit to drink." + +With but little hope the three fell to work and by noon had dug a hole +to water, but they had only their labor for their pains, the water +was salt, bitter, and undrinkable. Indeed their labor was worse than +fruitless for their exertions had greatly increased their thirst. + +Chris kindled a fire and roasted some of the turtle meat and eggs, but +the castaways only partook of a few mouthfuls, as eating seemed but to +increase their thirst. + +The Conch had lost his hat when wrecked and Chris, observing his bare +head, set about braiding him another hat from the green palmetto leaves. + +The Sponger watched him with interest. "Do yo' think yo' could make a +water-tight mat of that stuff?" he enquired, eagerly. + +"Golly! I reckon, dis nigger could," declared the little darkey. "I'se +done made baskets ob hit dat would hold water like a bucket." + +"How long would it take yo' to make a mat four feet square?" + +The little negro considered, "I guess I could do hit in a day." + +"Then drop that hat business and get to work on hit. Work like yo' +never did before. There's a chance, jes' a chance, that it will be the +saving of us. Captain, there is work for us to do. Get the entrails out +of one of those turtle shells. Clean them out good, pack them full of +sand, and stretch them out in the sun to dry. I've got a plan in mind. +It may fail, but it's worth trying. Be careful not to break the skins." + +It was evident from the man's manner that he was intensely in earnest +and the old sailor lost no time in asking idle questions but went +quickly to work at the task assigned him. In a short time he had +cleaned and washed out the turtle entrails and filling them with dry +sand stretched them out to dry in the hot sun. When thus prepared they +formed a kind of small hose some thirty feet in length. + +While he was thus engaged, the Conch dragged the empty shell down to +the water and cleaned and washed it out thoroughly. Leaving it near +the water's edge, he collected and piled close beside it, a heap of +dry wood. Then he returned to where Chris was working and fell to +helping him by stripping and preparing the palmetto buds for the little +darkey's nimble fingers. + +Just before sundown he carefully removed the sand from the dried +entrails and was in possession of a long, tough waterproof hose without +hole or break in it. + +Night brought no cessation of the strange labor. A fire was kindled +beside the little darkey and he plaited on by its light while the +captain and the Conch kept him supplied with palmetto strips. + +About midnight Chris held up his work with a weary sigh; "Hit's done," +he announced. + +"Now for the test," cried the Conch, trembling with excitement. + +Taking the strong, flexible, green mat he hurried down to the turtle +shell which he had filled half full of sea water. Placing the mat +over the top of the shell, he bound it firmly in place with wisps of +palmetto leaves. Then, cutting a small hole in the center of the mat, +he inserted in it one end of the strange hose, packing wet sand around +it to make it air-tight. He next coiled down the hose in the edge of +the sea and placed the other end of it in the empty turtle shell. Then, +heaping wood around the mat-covered shell, he started a fire. + +The Captain and Chris at last understood his plan. With his rude +contrivance, he was going to try to distill fresh water from salt after +the manner they do on big steamships with costly and complicated +apparatus. The steam from the heated water was supposed to escape from +the shell through the hose. In passing through it it would become +chilled when the hose was coiled down in the cold sea water and, +condensing into water again, reach the other shell fresh and free from +salt. + +In theory the plan was perfect, but would the rude contrivance do the +work? + +The three thirsty watchers fairly held their breath as they kept the +fire roaring around the shell and awaited results. At last tiny wisps +of steam began to trickle through the closely-woven mat. Tiny drops of +moisture were dropping from the end of the hose. These grew larger and +larger until at last a tiny stream of water trickled forth. + +They danced and shouted for joy. "It works! It works!" they cried. + +But thirsty though they were they had to possess their souls in +patience and wait for the process worked very slowly. All night they +staid by the shells keeping the fire going. Just at day-break the Conch +gave the command to put out the fire. In the other shell was several +gallons of clear, pure water. As soon as it had cooled sufficiently +they dipped it up with shells and drank greedily. It was slightly +bitter and tasteless but never did drink taste better to parched +throats. With the satisfying of their thirst, came hunger and they all +made a hearty meal off the roasted meat and eggs left from dinner. +Just as the sun arose they lay down to sleep completely exhausted but +with thankfulness to God in their hearts. Their greatest danger was +past. They had water and food in abundance, and the storm was slowly +but surely subsiding. + +They slept through the long day, awakening only when the shades of +night began to fall. Then after satisfying their hunger and thirst, +they lay down and slept until morning came. + +They opened their eyes upon a clear, still day. The storm had gone and +the sea was growing calm. Far to the South there showed on the blue +water a tiny patch of white,--a sail. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + +THE RESCUE. + + +THE castaways watched the distant sail with mingled feelings of joy and +suspense. Was it the boys, or was it merely a strange craft beating up +the coast? Would it pass near the island or would it go by too far out +for them to make their presence known? These were the questions they +debated as they strained their eyes on the distant patch of white. + +One thing soon became evident to the eager watchers, the sail was +steadily growing larger. Although the storm had passed and the sea +subsided there was still a brisk breeze blowing and each passing hour +brought the stranger craft visibly nearer. No thought of breakfast +entered the castaways' minds, all their attention was fixed on the +approaching sail. + +At last it became evident that the vessel was a small sloop, that it +was headed directly for the island and that it was rolling and pitching +frightfully in the still heavy seas. + +On it came, plunging and tossing like a frightened steed and sending +showers of spray from its cut water. At last it was close enough to +discover two figures on its decks, one at the wheel, the other forward, +tending the jib sheet. + +"Hit's Massa Charley and Massa Walter," shouted the sharp-eyed Chris. +"Praise de Lawd, Praise de Lawd," and his over-joyed companions shouted +a fervent "Amen." + +The sloop came steadily on, passing the island and rounding up under +its lee as near as its young captain dared to approach. Anchor was +dropped, sails lowered, and launching a small boat it carried on deck, +its crew of two came sculling for the shore. + +And what a demonstration of joy there was when it grounded on the sands +and the chums so long separated and so long beset with perils were +once more reunited. Such hand-wringings and congratulations, and eager +questions and chorused answers. All happy. All excited. All talking at +once, and no one making himself thoroughly understood in the general +clamor. + +But Charley soon interrupted the talk-feast. "We will be here all day +at this rate," he said, laughing. "We had better get on board and get +under way. That sloop is pretty old and cranky for these waters and +we'd better get back as soon as we can for fear another squall will +come up. We can tell our stories on the way." + +The suggestion was wise and as none cared to linger long on the +dreary little island which had been the scene of so much anxiety and +suffering, there was no delay in carrying it out. All climbed into the +little boat and were carried out to the sloop. Her sails were hoisted, +her anchor weighed, and her bowsprit headed South for Tarpon. Down in +the sloop's cabin the castaways found a hot meal of ham, eggs, potatoes +and coffee waiting for them, which Walter had prepared as a pleasant +surprise. In their excitement they had forgotten they were hungry, but +they remembered it now and fell upon the tasty food with appetites that +only left bare dishes when satisfied, at last. The boys had brought a +pile of clothing with them, and after a wash-down in cool sea water, +the castaways threw away their soiled, tattered garments, and, fed, +washed, and freshly clothed, felt like new men. + +The Captain's eyes danced with joy when Walter presented him with a +pipe and tobacco he had brought with him. + +Later all gathered around the wheel and stories and experiences were +exchanged, but the reader is already familiar with the most of them. + +"Even after the trouble was all over we couldn't get away at once," +Charley said, concluding his tale. "I can tell you we were worried to +have to lay around and wait for the storm to pass, knowing that you and +Chris must be in danger on the island. The people were awfully good to +us after the feud was ended. They could not do enough for us. They even +wanted to give us money, but of course we couldn't take that. As soon +as the wind went down we borrowed this boat of Mr. Turner and started +out. We are to leave her at Tarpon and he will get her from there." + +"Well, all's well that ends well, I reckon," said the captain, puffing +in supreme content. "We are safe an' well now an' while we ain't got +much money, we will have the 'Beauty' as soon as she comes into port, +an' she's jes' the same as two thousand dollars in the bank." + +"And we will have another try for that gold when we get her," Charley +declared. "I figure that those fellows had to cast loose during the +storm and scud before it. They could not ride it out at anchor. Now +that the buoy's gone, it will take them a long time to locate the gold +again. We, knowing the latitude and longitude can get back to the spot +before they can find it and get all the gold removed, if we can get a +revenue cutter at Tarpon, as I think we can." + +The Captain's face was filled with dismay. "I've clean forgot the +figures, boys," he exclaimed. "I put it down in the log all ship-shape, +the latitude and longitude, but I've clean forgot what it was. I ain't +got no memory for figures." + +It was a heavy blow for the golden-hopes of the two boys and a silence +of disappointment followed the old sailor's announcement. + +"It's no use crying over spilt milk," said Charley, at last, +cheerfully. "We have still got the schooner, and, with the money we get +from her, we can make a good start at something else." + +"You have still good cause for rejoicing," observed the sponger +captain. "You will still have your vessel, but I have lost my all." + +The two chums were not the boys to give way to repining and they were +soon again as bright and cheerful spirits as if their brightest hopes +had been realized. + +It was midnight when the little sloop at last crept into the harbor of +Tarpon. It was useless to go ashore at such an hour so the little party +made everything snug aboard and turned in on deck for a few hours' +sleep. + +They were up early next morning, and, after a hasty breakfast, hurried +ashore to notify the Commissioner of their arrival and get him to take +steps for the seizure of the "Beauty" as soon as she reached port. + +Mr. Driver was standing out in front of his store as they came up the +street. Amazement and incredulity filled his face when he sighted them. + +"You!" he cried, "Why, I thought you were all at the bottom of the +Gulf." + +"No, we are slightly disfigured but still in the ring," laughed Charley +as he shook hands. "Our schooner has not come in yet, has she?" + +Mr. Driver stared at him for a second. "There's a mystery here," he +declared. "Come on into the store, and let's hear your story." + +Seated in the store's little back room, Charley recounted their +adventures while Mr. Driver listened attentively. When he had +concluded, Mr. Driver remained silent for a moment. + +"I hate to be the teller of bad news," he said, at last, "but you must +learn it, and it had better come from a friend. Your schooner is lost +with all hands on board." + +"Lost!" cried all together. + +"Yes, she went down at anchor during the storm. The Greek sponger +'Zenephone' was passing when she went under. Not a man was saved. +Every one on the 'Zenephone' wondered why she did not scud before it +instead of hanging to her anchor. I understand now. They did not want +to leave the neighborhood of the gold." + +It was a heavy blow. At one sweep they were robbed of their all. The +little band of chums sat paralyzed with grief, looking helplessly at +each other. Mr. Driver arose quietly and closed the door softly behind +him, leaving them alone with their grief. + +For a few moments no one spoke. "It's hard, but it must be met," sighed +Walter at last. "What are we going to do? We have nothing left now, not +even the clothes we wear." + +"God knows," answered Charley, hopelessly, at a loss for once. "I +suppose we will have to hunt work at something or other." + +"And likely be scattered and separated for the first time in years," +exclaimed the captain. + +"That's the worst of it," agreed Walter, sadly. "I don't mind working +but I hate for us all to have to drift apart." + +"Me too," wailed Chris. "Golly! I don't want to be with no one but +you-alls." + +"I don't believe the 'Beauty' is lost," Charley declared. "I believe +this is just another of Manuel's tricks. He is as sharp a rascal as +ever lived. I'll bet she is safe and sound somewhere and that Manuel +just bought the Greeks on the 'Zenephone' to tell that story." + +"Maybe," admitted the captain, doubtfully. "The story rings true, +though. It would have been likely for them to hang to their anchor by +the gold." + +"And it would be just the kind of details Manuel would think of, +knowing we would be more likely to believe the story if we escaped +alive. He is an artist at rascality." + +"Even if you're right, I reckon it won't help us much," said the old +sailor. "The story's tied our hands all right. The Commissioner won't +do anything just on our suspicions, an' we ain't got any money to do +anything ourselves." + +"I feel that Charley is right," Walter declared, "but we've got only +one chance to prove it. Get to work, get some money and hire a Greek +detective to look into the matter for us. The first question is, what +can we do to earn money?" + +They were engaged in a fruitless discussion on this point when Mr. +Driver entered. He heard their discussion with sympathetic interest. + +"There is no work around here," he declared. "The Greeks work cheaper +than an American can. It's hard for an American to earn a bare living +here. I understand from what you say that you do not want to be +separated. I might find work for one of you, but I couldn't for all. +There is only one suggestion I can make in such a case." + +"Please give it to us," Walter requested. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + +CONCLUSION. + + +"WELL," said Mr. Driver, "there is a large fish-house at Clearwater, +twenty miles below here. You probably could get a job fishing for it. +You could all work together then. It is hard, dirty work but there is +pretty good money in it if a man works hard." + +The chums exchanged glances. + +"I believe we will try it," Charley said. "Of course we will have to +talk it over before we decide, but there does not seem to be anything +else we can do." + +"Very well," said Mr. Driver, "I'll give you a letter to the fish boss, +I know him personally. And you'll need a little money to pay your fares +there. You can return it when you get to earning." + +The chums thanked the kind-hearted storekeeper for his advice and +assistance and adjourned to the sidewalk where they discussed the +matter earnestly. It did not take them long to decide to follow Mr. +Driver's suggestion. They bid good-bye to the sponger captain, who +decided to remain in Tarpon and try to get service on one of Mr. +Williams' schooners, and, accepting the loan of ten dollars, which Mr. +Driver pressed upon them, they boarded the first train going South and +soon landed in the little town of Clearwater. And there, we must leave +them for the present. + + +THE END. + + * * * * * + +Transcriber's Notes: + +Obvious punctuation errors repaired. The original text had no table of +contents. One was created to aid the reader. Chapter I is untitled. + +Page 3, "tatooed" changed to "tattooed" (tattooed arms and rolling) + +Page 10, two lines were transposed. The original read: + + shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoul- + up with the money by to-morrow night I'll close up + ders. "You know what I say. If you don't come + this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining + +Page 14, "hundreth" changed "hundredth" (a hundredth part of) + +Page 43, "alloted" changed to "allotted" (allotted to their boat) + +Page 62, "along" changed to "alone" (worse than being alone) + +Page 74, repeated word "see" removed from text Original read: (I don't +see see what his object) + +Page 78, "Manual" changed to "Manuel" (Manuel approached Captain) + +Page 85, "blow" changed to "below" (been below for only) + +Page 89, "exclaimation" changed to "exclamation" (an exclamation of +surprise) + +Page 93, "captian" changed to "captain" (the captain declared) + +Page 100, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (gaping hole in her) + +Page 101, "was" changed to "were" (There were no) + +Page 102, "that" changed to "than" (time than it has) + +Page 105, "aim" changed to "air" (working the air pump) + +Page 109, "baton" changed to "beaten" (Greeks had been badly beaten) + +Page 128, "averge" changed to "average" (better than average marksmen) + +Page 164, "squaking" changed "squawking" (marsh hens, the squawking) + +Page 190, "minues" changed to "minutes" (in a few minutes he) + +Page 203, "taveling" changed to "traveling" (further traveling +dangerous) + +Page 231, repeated word "is" removed from text. Original read: (awhile +even it is is risky) + +Page 231, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (up the gaping hole) + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by +Wilmer M. Ely + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY CHUMS IN GULF OF MEXICO *** + +***** This file should be named 44394-8.txt or 44394-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/4/3/9/44394/ + +Produced by The Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/44394-8.zip b/old/44394-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..744f7ab --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-8.zip diff --git a/old/44394-h.zip b/old/44394-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..702f195 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-h.zip diff --git a/old/44394-h/44394-h.htm b/old/44394-h/44394-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..02087fd --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-h/44394-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,9218 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by Wilmer M. Ely. + </title> + <style type="text/css"> + +body { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + + p {margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + text-indent: 1.25em; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + img {border: 0;} + .tnote {border: dashed 1px; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em;} + .copyright {text-align: center; font-size: 70%;} + .adtitle2 {font-size: 150%; font-weight: bold; text-align: center;} + + .author {font-size: 120%; text-align: center;} + .authorof {font-size: 70%; text-align: center;} + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold; font-size: 90%;} + .poem2 {margin-left: 15%; text-align: left;} + .footnotes {border: dashed 1px;} + .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} + .fnanchor {vertical-align:baseline; + position: relative; + bottom: 0.33em; + font-size: .8em; + text-decoration: none;} + + + h1,h2,h3 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; +} + + +hr { + width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; +} + +hr.chap {width: 65%} + + + +table { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; +} + +.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ + /* visibility: hidden; */ + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; +} /* page numbers */ + + +/* Images */ +.figcenter { + margin: auto; + text-align: center; +} + + + + + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by Wilmer M. Ely + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico + or, On a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek Spongers + +Author: Wilmer M. Ely + +Release Date: December 9, 2013 [EBook #44394] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY CHUMS IN GULF OF MEXICO *** + + + + +Produced by The Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + +</pre> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 502px;"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" width="502" height="800" alt="cover" /> +</div> +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 303px;"> +<img src="images/i002.jpg" width="303" height="500" alt="Charley pointing rifle" /> +<div class="caption">"Charley leveled his gun and sent sixteen shrieking bullets just +above the wheelman's head."</div> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[1]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 310px;"> +<img src="images/i003.jpg" width="310" height="500" alt="title page" /> +</div> +<h1>The Boy Chums<br /> +In the Gulf of Mexico</h1> + + +<div class='center'><small>OR</small><br /> +<br /> +On a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek<br /> +Spongers<br /> +<br /> +<span class='author'><span class="smcap">By</span> WILMER M. ELY</span><br /> +<span class='authorof'>Author of "The Boy Chums on Indian River," "The Boy<br /> +Chums on Haunted Island," "The Boy Chums in<br /> +the Forest," "The Boy Chums' Perilous Cruise."</span><br /> + +<br /><br /> +A. L. BURT COMPANY<br /> +NEW YORK<br /> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[2]</a></span></p> + + + + +<div class='copyright'> +Copyright 1913<br /> +<span class="smcap">By A. L. Burt Company</span><br /> +<br /> +THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO<br /> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + + + + +<div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="contents and book spine"> +<tr><td align="left"><img src="images/spine.jpg" width="97" height="500" alt="spine" /> +</td> +<td align="left"><div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> +<tr><td align="right">I.</td> +<td align="left"> </td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_3">3</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">II.</td> +<td align="left">MR. DRIVER.</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_11">11</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">III.</td> +<td align="left">PREPARATIONS</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_19">19</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">IV.</td> +<td align="left">THE START</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_27">27</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">V.</td> +<td align="left">THE START</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_36">36</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">VI.</td> +<td align="left">FIRST TROUBLE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_45">45</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">VII.</td> +<td align="left">SPONGING</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_53">53</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">VIII.</td> +<td align="left">TROUBLE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_61">61</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">IX.</td> +<td align="left">MANUEL'S RELEASE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_68">68</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">X.</td> +<td align="left">A RASH RESOLVE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_76">76</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XI.</td> +<td align="left">A MYSTERY</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_84">84</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XII.</td> +<td align="left">IN A DIVING SUIT</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_94">94</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XIII.</td> +<td align="left">A CLOSE CALL</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_100">100</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XIV.</td> +<td align="left">THE DISCUSSION</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_107">107</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XV.</td> +<td align="left">A DESPERATE PLAN</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_115">115</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XVI.</td> +<td align="left">TOO LATE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_122">122</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XVII.</td> +<td align="left">OUTWITTED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XVIII.</td> +<td align="left">IMPRISONED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_136">136</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XIX.</td> +<td align="left">WRECKED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_144">144</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XX.</td> +<td align="left">HUNTING HELP</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_152">152</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXI.</td> +<td align="left">THE CASTAWAYS</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_159">159</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXII.</td> +<td align="left">ANOTHER DANGER</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_167">167</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXIII.</td> +<td align="left">THE RELAPSE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_175">175</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXIV.</td> +<td align="left">THE FLOOD</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_182">182</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXV.</td> +<td align="left">THE FLOATING HATCH</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_189">189</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXVI.</td> +<td align="left">WITH THE BOYS</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_197">197</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXVII.</td> +<td align="left">THE JOURNEY</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_205">205</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXVIII.</td> +<td align="left">JUDSON</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_212">212</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXIX.</td> +<td align="left">THE FEUD</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_219">219</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXX.</td> +<td align="left">BESIEGED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_225">225</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXI.</td> +<td align="left">THE ENEMIES</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_233">233</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXII.</td> +<td align="left">THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_240">240</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXIII.</td> +<td align="left">THE RESCUE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_247">247</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXIV.</td> +<td align="left">CONCLUSION</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_255">255</a></td> +</tr> +</table></div></td></tr> +</table></div> + + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[3]</a></span></p> + + + + +<div class='adtitle2'>THE BOY CHUMS<br /> + +IN THE GULF OF MEXICO</div> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER I.</h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">It's</span> just like stepping suddenly into a strange +country. I am glad we came even if we decide not +to go into the business."</p> + +<p>The speaker, a sturdy, manly-looking boy of eighteen, +was one of a party of four persons who were +strolling along a street in the Greek section of +Tarpon Springs, a small Florida town, located on +the Anclote River, a few miles from the Gulf of +Mexico. His companions were a boy about his +own age but of less robust appearance, a little negro +lad with a good-humored intelligent face, and a +middle-aged, heavily-bearded, blue-eyed man whose +tattooed arms and rolling gait told of a life spent on +tossing seas and whose confident bearing and air of +authority stamped him as one above the rank of a +common sailor.</p> + +<p>Those who have followed The Boy Chums<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[4]</a></span> +through their many adventures will recognize in +the little party their old friends Charley West, +Walter Hazard, Captain Westfield and the Bahama +lad, Chris, who lately returned from a perilous trip +along the Atlantic beach searching for wreckage, +and now seeking some promising venture in which +to invest the Fifteen Hundred Dollars they earned +on that voyage.</p> + +<p>"You're right, Charley," agreed the other boy. +"I didn't know before that there was a sight like +this in Florida. Here's a bench. Let's set down +and rest a bit. I am tired from walking."</p> + +<p>"Golly, I reckon dis nigger's tired some too," +chimed in the little darkey, "I'se dun had de toothache +in mah legs for most an hour, but I'se had to +keep up wid you-alls. Don't dare let you white +chillen prognostracate 'round a queer place like dis +alone."</p> + +<p>The seat selected was a long bench standing on +the edge of the sidewalk, its back to the sandy street. +The four seated themselves at one end and gazed +around with eager interest at the strange scene, unconscious +of the curious glances bestowed upon them +by a large, deeply-tanned man, who, seated on +the other end of the bench, was languidly whittling +on a piece of white pine with a large sheaf knife.</p> + +<p>The scene was one to arouse more than passing +interest. Up and down the sidewalk hurried<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[5]</a></span> +swarthy-faced, powerfully-built men of all ages and +appearances, but all possessed of the same clear-cut +features and straight noses. Singly and in groups +of two and three, they hurried past, picturesque in +their bright-colored clothing with gaudy sashes +knotted about their waists. About all clustered an +air of energy and bustle uncommon to sleepy Florida +towns.</p> + +<p>Built up close to the inner edge of the sidewalk +was a row of large buildings startling in their coats +of bright yellow, red, blue, and green paint. +Stretching away, close together in the distance, they +gave one the impression of a gigantic rainbow. +Through their wide-open doors and windows the interested +onlookers could gain a plain view of the interiors, +from which came the confused jangle of +foreign tongues. To the right of where the little +party sat was a busy grocery store, its windows +filled with strings of dried garlic, strange-looking +cheeses, queer nuts and fruits and a multitude of +eatables strange to American eyes. To the left of +them was a tobacco factory, the whirling machines +shredding up the huge brown leaves into hair-like +fibers and binding them up into pound packages. +Directly before them was a great hall filled with +little tables around which were seated groups of the +regular-featured men, playing cards, eating, or puffing +at strange pipes, with a small hose for a stem, +the smoke passing through great glass vessels partly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span> +filled with rose water before it reached the smoker's +lips.</p> + +<p>"That's the fifteenth place of that kind I've +counted to-day," remarked Charley West. "From +their numbers, one would imagine that these people +did nothing but eat and play cards."</p> + +<p>"I'd like to try one of them pipes," said Captain +Westfield, wistfully. "I'll bet they give a good, +cool smoke."</p> + +<p>"Let's go in and get dinner," Walter suggested. +"I am hungry as a wolf and that food smells +mighty good. You can try a pipe after we eat, Captain."</p> + +<p>The man at the end of the bench shifted his position +closer to them.</p> + +<p>"Strangers here?" he enquired.</p> + +<p>"Just came in this morning. We're looking into +the sponge business a bit," replied the Captain.</p> + +<p>Charley eyed the tanned man closely. There was +a sinister expression to the fellow's face, and his +eyes shifted uneasily away from the lad's level +glance. The keen-witted boy was not favorably +impressed with the stranger's appearance, but the +man's cordiality drove away his faint feeling of +distrust.</p> + +<p>"I'll go in with you then," he offered. "Those +fellows don't speak much English and you would +have a hard job making them understand what<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[7]</a></span> +you wanted. I know a little Greek and may be able +to help you out a bit."</p> + +<p>"Much obliged to you," said the Captain, gratefully. +"We don't understand a word of their +lingo. I'll stand treat to the dinner if you'll eat with +us."</p> + +<p>"It's a go," agreed the stranger, quickly. "Come +on. My name's Robert, Captain Roberts," he volunteered +when the little party were seated around +one of the tables, "I'm a retired ship's master."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield introduced himself and his +companions. "As I said, we are lookin' into this +sponge business a bit, but it's hard to pick out the +proper course from these twisted-tongued furriners," +he said. "Do you happen to know anything +about it?"</p> + +<p>"I used to be in the business myself," Captain +Roberts replied promptly. "I made enough money +in it to quit the sea for good."</p> + +<p>"Then I reckon you're the very man to give us a +few pointers. Is there as much money in it as one +hears tell of?"</p> + +<p>"More," declared the other. "These Greeks are +getting rich off sponging. It is not anything unusual +for a schooner's crew to clear up three or four +thousand dollars from a single trip. It takes quite +a bit of money to make a start, though."</p> + +<p>"We have got a little change in our clothes,"<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span> +said the Captain, modestly. "Do you reckon a person +could get started good on a Thousand dollars?"</p> + +<p>"That would do nicely," declared Captain Roberts, +"and I can tell you just how to lay it out to the +best advantage, but let's order dinner first. We can +talk while we are eating."</p> + +<p>He beckoned to a dark-skinned, ill-favored waiter +and gave an order in low-pitched fluent Greek.</p> + +<p>The waiter was back almost instantly with a tray-load +of steaming dishes which he placed upon the +table. The boys could not determine the exact nature +of the strange viands, but they were too hungry +to be critical, and attacked the food with hearty +appetites.</p> + +<p>"This mutton stew is delicious," Charley declared +as he took another helping. "I don't know +as I ever tasted anything better."</p> + +<p>Captain Roberts grinned. "You don't want to +make any guesses about Greek food," he declared. +"That isn't mutton, but just tough old Billy-goat, +fattened on a diet of tin cans. These fellows have +the knack of fixing up such things so they can't +recognize them themselves. Just wait till the +coffee is served. You'll say you never drank any +better. But let's get back to that sponging business +now, Captain."</p> + +<p>He and Captain Westfield were soon plunged in +a tangled maze of talk about schooners, diving boats, +sponges, and divers.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys gave but little heed to the discussion for +their attention was partly diverted by the unusual +scene around them.</p> + +<p>"It's just like being in another country," Walter +whispered to his chum.</p> + +<p>"Yes, but I don't like the attention we seem +to receive," Charley replied. "Those fellows are +staring at us as though there was something wrong +in our being here."</p> + +<p>The Greeks gathered around the other tables +indeed seemed more than casually interested in the +little party. They stared frequently at them and +their new acquaintance, and exchanged significant +glances and low words with each other.</p> + +<p>"I guess we appear as odd to them as they do to +us," Walter said, carelessly. "There is a man who +is not a Greek. That fellow leaning against the +end of the counter in the corner."</p> + +<p>The man indicated was unmistakably an American. +He was short, heavily-built and had a determined, +aggressive face. He was engaged in a heated +discussion with the proprietor of the cafe and his +heavy face was flushed with anger. As the boys +gazed curiously, he brought down his clenched fist +on the counter with a force that shattered some of +the dishes piled upon it.</p> + +<p>"You needn't smirk, grin, and make excuses," he +thundered at the suave, smiling Greek. "You've +got to pay me that bill you owe me. It's been standing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span> +for months and I happen to know that you are +making money all the time, hand over fist. It's no +use pretending you don't understand me," he +shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoulders. +"You know what I say. If you don't come +up with the money by to-morrow night I'll close up +this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining +goods under false pretences. And it will not be any +use for you to try your nice little Greek trick of a +knife in my back in the dark. I go heeled and I +don't go to sleep when I walk this street. The +fellow who tries that trick on me will stop enough +lead to start a cartridge factory."</p> + +<p>He turned and was walking towards the door +when his glance rested for a moment on the boys +and their companions. His glance swept swiftly +over each member of the little party. He paused, +hesitated a moment, then turning, walked swiftly +towards their table.</p> + +<p>Captain Roberts rose hastily at his approach. +"There's a friend of mine over there," he said hurriedly, +"who I want to speak to. I'll be back in a +minute."</p> + +<p>The approaching stranger noted his departure +with a grim smile. He stopped beside the Captain +and stood gazing down for one brief minute.</p> + +<p>"Are you fools or strangers?" he demanded, +crisply.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER II.<br /> + +<small>MR. DRIVER.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> stranger's smile robbed his words of their +hardness.</p> + +<p>"Strangers, yes," Charley replied, "Fools, no."</p> + +<p>"No offense intended," said the man, quickly. +"Strangers will sometimes take advice but fools +will not. My advice to you strangers is to keep out +of places like this and not to make friends with +other strangers. I don't suppose you know who +that man is who just left you."</p> + +<p>"He's a retired sea captain," said Captain Westfield. +"He was giving us some pointers about the +sponge business. Mighty pleasant an' obligin' fellow. +Mighty fair-spoken."</p> + +<p>"Bless your simple little souls," exclaimed the +stranger. "He's no captain, active or retired. He's +the runner for this place. Lucky you haven't any +of you drank your coffee yet. You'd be waking up +in some alley bye-and-bye with your heads aching +from knock-out drops and your pockets turned inside +out. My, but you were easy."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I don't reckon any one would dare do such a +thing in broad daylight," Captain Westfield declared.</p> + +<p>"It's been done in this place a dozen times. +And the victim's kicks never did any good after it +happened, for there was always a dozen Greeks +ready to go on the stand and swear that it was only +a case of drunkenness on the victim's part. Better +get out of here."</p> + +<p>The humbled little party arose and followed their +conductor out to the sidewalk. As they passed +through the crowd they could not help but notice +the wrathful glances the sitters bestowed upon the +one who had cheated them of their victims.</p> + +<p>"I guess we have acted pretty green," Charley +admitted, as they passed outside, "but we were so +eager to learn about the sponge business that we +forgot caution. Besides, one does not look for such +tricks in a little town like this. It's not like a big +city where one has to be always on his guard against +strangers."</p> + +<p>The stranger favored the members of the little +party with a closer scrutiny than he had yet bestowed +upon them.</p> + +<p>"So you are figuring on going into the sponge +business, eh?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"We may try it a bit if we find out that it pays as +well as we have heard tell of," answered Captain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span> +Westfield, cautiously, "but it's mighty hard to find +out anything definite about it from these Greeks."</p> + +<p>"Oh, there's big money in it all right," said their +new friend. "You might make a go of it. You +are a pretty husky, determined-looking lot and +would soon get on to the Greekish tricks. It's a +risky business, though. I don't advise anyone to +take it up."</p> + +<p>"We've encountered a few risks in other lines," +said Charlie, modestly. "We are willing to take a +few chances if there's money enough in it to tempt +us."</p> + +<p>The stranger pulled out his watch and looked at +the time. "My name is Driver," he remarked. "I +own a store over on the next street in the American +section. Business is slack at this time of day and I +will show you around a bit, if you wish. My clerks +can look out for the trade for an hour or two."</p> + +<p>"No need of thanks," he said as the Captain accepted +his offer gratefully. "If you decide to go +into the sponge business, you will need lots of provisions +and I hope to sell them to you. We Americans +do not get any of the Greek trade and we are +always glad to secure a new customer. Now I suppose +you want to know about the profit side of the +business first. Well, I can not give you exact figures +but I know that all engaged in the business are making +big money. All these big buildings you see have +been built out of sponging, and they do not represent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span> +a hundredth part of the money made out of the +business. There is an enormous amount sent back +to Greece every month through the post-office and +bank here. I know Greeks who landed here only a +few years ago with nothing but the clothes on their +backs—and those were mighty poor—that are +wealthy men now and they made their fortunes out +of sponges. Oh, there's big money in it all right. +But you can look into that part of the business +closer later on. Now, I want to show you something +of the sponges themselves. We will go down +to the harbor first."</p> + +<p>The interested little party followed him as he led +the way along a soft sand road flanked by scrub +palmettos.</p> + +<p>Their guide paused beside one of the several large +buildings standing close to the road. "This is a +clipping shed," he said.</p> + +<p>The building was open on one side and was filled +with a crowd of old men, women and young boys, +all Greeks. Before each was a pile of rough sponges +from which they were clipping the spoilt parts with +great shearing shears. In one corner, a man worked +over a big screw-press, pressing the severed fragments +of sponges into huge compact bales.</p> + +<p>"That part isn't important enough to waste much +time looking at," Mr. Driver said, as he turned +away. "Come on and I'll show you something +worth seeing."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span></p> + +<p>As they followed along behind their guide, the +boys became sensible of a strong, pleasant, appetizing +odor in the air, an odor which grew stronger as +they advanced. A turn in the road brought them +suddenly upon the source of the odor. On the shore +of a quiet little land-locked harbor, blazed dozens of +small camp-fires over which sat great iron kettles. +On pieces of canvas laid upon the ground were piles +of fresh beef and mutton. Over each pile worked +several Greeks cutting the meat with the sheaf +knives into tiny squares about an inch in size. Other +Greeks were dumping the little square pieces into +the kettles, while still others kept the contents stirred +and the fires under the kettles burning briskly.</p> + +<p>"They are putting down the meat for their next +voyage," explained Mr. Driver. "They roast it in +its own fat, put it into stone jars, and pour the fat +over it. As soon as the fat cools and congeals it +forms an air-tight covering which keeps the meat +from spoiling."</p> + +<p>"If it tastes half as good as it smells, it must be +delicious," Charley remarked.</p> + +<p>Chris viewed the cooking operation with professional +jealousy. "Golly, I bet dey can't cook like +dis nigger," he declared, "I spect dem kettles ain't +none too clean noway."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield gave but scant attention to the +trying-out process. His interest was centered on the +big fleet of schooners anchored near shore. They<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span> +were over a hundred in number and were of all +sizes and designs. They made a pretty sight lying +gracefully close together in the little harbor. But +the old sailor soon strolled on to where groups of +Greeks were building and repairing boats on the +shore. He inspected their work with a critical eye, +but he was soon lost in admiration.</p> + +<p>"Lads," he exclaimed, "I never saw such workmen +before. They are turnin' out tight, neat seaworthy +little crafts with no tools but a saw and a +hatchet. Ain't those queer lookin' crafts though."</p> + +<p>The boats were about thirty feet in length, sharp +at both bow and stern, and of enormous depth for +their size. True to their love for bright colors the +Greeks had painted each plank a different hue and +the little vessels looked like floating rainbows.</p> + +<p>The captain viewed their single masts, which inclined +aft at an angle of forty-five degrees, with +deep-sea scorn.</p> + +<p>"It's clean against Nature for a mast to be set +that way," he declared. "It ain't regular or ship-shape."</p> + +<p>"Those small crafts are used as diving boats," +Mr. Driver explained. "They carry a big square +sail, but most of them are equipped with engines +also. They are great sea boats and will ride out a +gale almost as well as the schooners."</p> + +<p>His explanations were interrupted by loud talking<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span> +close at hand and the little party, full of curiosity, +hastened to the spot from which the uproar came.</p> + +<p>In the center of a circle of curious onlookers, a +large man wearing a marshal's badge was slipping a +pair of handcuffs on the wrists of a slender boyish-looking +young fellow.</p> + +<p>"No need to put those things on me, Mr. Officer," +the lad was protesting, passionately. "I'll go along +with you without any trouble. I've only acted +within my rights and all I want is a fair trial."</p> + +<p>"Anything you say can be used against you at +your trial," cautioned the marshal.</p> + +<p>"I don't care, I admit I shot two of those +treacherous Greeks. It was the only thing to do. +When it came on to blow a gale, they refused to cut +the cable, and work the schooner. It was a case of +making them obey orders and get her off before the +seas or lose my ship. I only wish I had shot more +of them. They have been laying for me ever since +to slip a knife into me and chuck me overboard. I +haven't dared take a wink of sleep for three days +and two nights."</p> + +<p>"Poor fellow," said Mr. Driver, as the marshal +led away his protesting captive. "I expect it happened +just as he says—an open mutiny, compelling +him to shoot—but every Greek in his crew will go on +the stand and swear that it was a case of cold-blooded +murder. Fortunately, the judge is wise to +Greek methods and the law deals gently with commanders."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span></p> + +<p>"He looked mighty young to be a captain," said +Captain Westfield.</p> + +<p>"It's this way," Mr. Driver explained, "the law +compels the Greeks to have an American captain for +each schooner and diving boat, and they hire the +youngest and, therefore, cheapest man that they can +get. It's a dog's life, out alone for months with a +gang that doesn't speak a word of English. As long +as the captain is content to be a mere figurehead he +can get along without serious trouble, but the minute +he runs counter to their wishes there is a row. +But time is flying, and I must get back to the store. +If you will come back with me I'll introduce you to +a man who knows more about sponging than another +American in the country."</p> + +<p>"Just a moment, lads," said the Captain, as they +turned to go. "Which of those schooners do you +like the best?"</p> + +<p>The two chums unhesitatingly indicated a beautiful +two-masted, snow-white schooner that seemed +to rest as loftily on the water as a floating swan. +The grace and beauty of exquisite lines marked her +out from the many shapely schooners surrounding +her. In large gilt letters on either side of her bow +was her name "Beauty".</p> + +<p>"She's my choice too," declared the Captain. "I +wish we owned her. I ain't never seen a prettier +model."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER III.<br /> + +<small>PREPARATIONS.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">As</span> soon as they got back into town, Mr. Driver +hunted up the man of whom he had spoken, and, +introducing him to each of the little party, hurried +back to his store.</p> + +<p>Mr. Williams was a young man still in his +twenties. He was a stocky, well-built young fellow +with an intelligent face, determined manner, and a +short, crisp way of speaking. He sized up the little +party with one quick appraising glance as Captain +Westfield stated their errand.</p> + +<p>"If you are not willing to stand hardships, dirt, +discomfort, and danger, you want nothing to do +with sponging," he declared.</p> + +<p>"We can stand anything that it pays us to stand," +Charley replied, quickly.</p> + +<p>"Well, that's the right kind of spirit," approved +the young man, "but, of course you don't any of +you realize what you will have to meet. I've seen +others start in with the same confidence and get cold +feet before the first trip was over. It isn't any nice, +ladies' pink-tea business. It's a game for real men,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span> +but if the men are the right kind, they get their reward +for what they endure, all right, all right. I +landed here with an empty pocket and emptier +stomach, and now,—well, I am not a John D. Rockefeller +yet, but I've got enough laid by to keep the +wolf from the door for a good many years. Better +men than I have done better than I have. It's like +everything else, the best man wins, and wins something +worth winning, but, as I have said, it's no +business for nice, tender, little Willie boys, it's a +man's game."</p> + +<p>Charley grinned in sympathy with the reliant, +independent spirit of the young fellow which was +close kin to his own traits. "We left off our short +pants last summer," he observed, gravely, "we are +fast learning to dress ourselves, and the Captain +there can even comb his own hair."</p> + +<p>"Good," chuckled the other, "I guess <i>you</i> will +pass muster anyway, so I will give you some idea +of what you will have to expect. First, there is the +loneliness. For three months at a time you'll be at +sea without another soul to talk to, for there are +very few of the Greeks who speak English. With a +party like yours it would not be so bad for you +would be company for each other, but for the +American captains who go out alone with a crew +of Greeks, it's awful. I've known some to go crazy +for sheer loneliness, and few ever make a second +trip,—I'll never forget my first experience. Second,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span> +sponging is a dirty business, the stench from dying +sponges will upset any but the strongest stomachs. +Third, there are the dangers, storms, accidents, and +troubles with the crew. I have never had any +serious trouble with my own men, but then I understand +their lingo and that counts for a good deal, +and, besides they all know me around here and +know that I will shoot first and explain afterwards—that +counts for still more."</p> + +<p>"All that is interesting, but it ain't to the pint," +said Captain Westfield. "The question is what can +one make off a trip. I reckon them little things +you're telling about is just details."</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid you'll find them pretty serious details," +Mr. Williams said with a laugh, "but you are +right, the money point is the main thing. That's the +only thing that has kept me in the business. Well, +I had considerable <i>bad</i> luck last trip but I cleaned +up three thousand dollars. I've been doing better +than that."</p> + +<p>The chums looked at each other with expressive +faces while Mr. Williams' keen black eyes twinkled +as he watched them.</p> + +<p>"I seed a schooner down at the harbor," observed +Captain Westfield, carelessly. "She was a pretty +looking little craft and her name just seemed to fit +her—'The Beauty'. If she's good an' sound an' +for sale, I might be willing to give a thousand dollars +for her."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span></p> + +<p>Mr. Williams laughed, "You are not the first +sailor who has fallen in love with the 'Beauty'. She +is the finest ever. She has led the sponging fleet for +three seasons. Many have tried to buy her but +couldn't. You are in luck, however. Her owner +died last week and I have just received a letter from +his widow asking me to find a purchaser for her. +You can have her as she lays for thirteen hundred +dollars, and she is dirt cheap at that."</p> + +<p>"Will you hold that offer open until ten o'clock +to-night?" asked the captain, "we will want to talk +it all over a bit."</p> + +<p>Mr. Williams agreed to his request, and, after +thanking him gratefully for his information, the +little party took their departure.</p> + +<p>"Back to the harbor," said the captain as soon as +they were out of hearing. "I want to take a good +look at the 'Beauty'. If she is anyway near as good +as she looks from a distance she's worth at least +twenty-five hundred dollars. Why we could make a +tidy sum by buying her, sailing her around to Jacksonville, +and selling her again."</p> + +<p>They soon arrived at the harbor again where for +a quarter they hired a young Greek to row them out +to the schooner.</p> + +<p>They found the little vessel all that her name implied. +She was about sixty-five feet long and broad +for her length. She looked more like a gentleman's +yacht than a sponging vessel and they were all delighted<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span> +with her appearance. But pleased as they +were with her on deck, they were even more pleased +with her below. There, they found a large main +cabin with swinging lamps, hanging sideboard, easy +chairs, and comfortable furnishings. Opening into +the main cabin were found roomy staterooms, two +on a side, furnished with large bunks containing +springy mattresses. Instead of the small portholes, +common with crafts of her size, each stateroom was +provided with windows of heavy glass to admit air +and light.</p> + +<p>Up forward at the foremast was the forecastle, or +crew's quarters. It was large, comfortable and well +equipped with bunks. Aft of it was the cook's galley, +containing a good stove and plenty of pots, pans +and kettles. Everything was exquisitely neat and +clean. But Captain Westfield was not content with +a mere survey of cabin and furnishings. He unfurled +several of the sails and examined the canvas +closely. He tested the strength of rope after rope. +He climbed aloft and looked over blocks, stays, and +running gear. Lastly, he descended into the hold +and examined all that was visible of the vessel's ribs +and planking.</p> + +<p>"She's as tidy a little craft as I ever saw," he +declared, when he at last rejoined the boys back by +the wheel. "She ain't over six years old an' her +sails an' rigging are all new. She's worth twenty-five +hundred dollars of any man's money if she's<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span> +worth a cent. All we have got to do it to buy her +and carry her around to some lively port an' we can +make twelve hundred dollars as easy as finding it."</p> + +<p>"What's the use of selling her right off if we +buy her," Walter suggested, "Surely a few months' +use will not lessen her value to any great extent. +Why not make a couple of trips sponging in her. +I am anxious to have a try for some of that big +money they all talk about. We will never have a +better chance than now. At the worst, we would +only lose the price of a few months' provisions, we +would still have our vessel worth far more than we +paid for her."</p> + +<p>"You've hit the nail right on the head," the captain +exclaimed, delightedly. "That's just what +I've been studying over, but I reckoned I'd wait an' +see if either of you boys proposed it."</p> + +<p>Charley hesitated before agreeing to his chum's +proposal. "I confess, I am not so anxious to try the +sponge business as I was," he remarked. "First, +we know nothing about it ourselves, and would +have to depend entirely upon hired help—which is +a bad thing to have to do in any business. Second, +I don't like the Greeks, I don't like their appearances, +I don't like the reputation they have, and I +don't like the idea of being with a gang that doesn't +understand English."</p> + +<p>"Bosh," Walter replied, lightly, "we will get +along all right with them. It isn't like one lone man<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span> +being out with them, there are four of us and they +wouldn't dare start trouble with so many. As for +making them understand, why we can hire a man as +interpreter. I believe it's the best chance to make +money we've had yet."</p> + +<p>"And I too," Captain Westfield agreed. "I +reckon we'd be foolish to let such a chance slip by. +That young fellow Williams says he's made considerable."</p> + +<p>"But he made several trips and learned the business +before he went into it on his own hook," +Charley objected. "However, I am not going to +hold back if the rest of you want to try it."</p> + +<p>"Good," exclaimed the captain, "we will go right +back and settle the deal with Williams. We'll make +money off the schooner if we don't off the sponging."</p> + +<p>They found Mr. Williams still in his office. The +thirteen hundred dollars was paid over and they received +a bill of sale for the 'Beauty', one diving +boat and everything the schooner contained.</p> + +<p>"You've got a good boat at a mighty low price," +he said. "There is no reason why you shouldn't +make well with her, if you just use common sense. +Doubtless, you have heard lots of hard things about +the Greeks, but I don't believe they are half as bad +as they are painted. Half of the trouble captains +have with them comes from their not understanding +each other. Get a reliable man to translate your<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span> +orders, and you will get along all right although you +will find it a hard life. I wish I could help you +select your crew but I have to go to Tampa to-morrow, +and will not be back until the fleet sails. We +will see each other again on the sponging grounds, +if not before. I wish you the best of luck until we +meet."</p> + +<p>The now tired little party bade the hustling young +man good-bye and repaired to the small hotel where +they engaged rooms and meals.</p> + +<p>After supper Charley unpacked his valise and got +out the silver-mounted revolver presented to him +by Mr. Weston. He noted its calibre and sauntering +down to the hardware store purchased several +boxes of cartridges of a size to fit. He gave a couple +of boxes to Walter who possessed the exact duplicate +of his weapon.</p> + +<p>"That's my first preparation for our trip," he +said laughing.</p> + +<p>But, although he spoke lightly, he was troubled +by vague misgivings that their new venture was not +going to be the smooth sailing his companions believed. +For one thing, he doubted if rough, blunt, +quick-tempered Captain Westfield was just the man +to successfully handle the suave, oily, treacherous +Greeks.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER IV.<br /> + +<small>THE START.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">We</span> have got to get a move on us," Captain +Westfield said as the four chums gathered together +at the breakfast table. "I've been out enquirin' +around this mornin' an' I've larned that the sponging +fleet sails in two days. Of course we don't have +to go with the fleet, but, bein' as it's our first trip +an' we're green at the business, I reckon, we had +better keep with the crowd an' learn all we can. +I've been up to see the United States Commissioner +an' got charts of the sponging grounds an' took out +papers for the ship. We're all officers on the papers, +lads. He put me down as captain of the schooner, +Chris is mate. You, Charley, are captain of the +diving boats, an' Walter's chief engineer."</p> + +<p>"I don't want to be no mate," Chris protested. +"I wants to be de cook. Dat's schooner's got a +powerful fine galley an' a sight ob pots an' kettles. +Golly! I reckon dis nigger can fix up de grub better +dan any of dem ignorant furriners. A mate +ain't no manner ob count on board a little ship. De<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span> +captain's always blamin' him for somethin' or udder +an' de crew always hates him. He's always in +trubble wid one or the udder. Now de cook's always +his own boss, he don't hab to stay out nights +in de cold an' de rain an' ebbery one is powerful perlite +to him, 'cause dey wants to keep on de bes' side +ob de one dat handles de grub. I'd rather be a cook +dan an ole mate any day."</p> + +<p>"But you don't know how to rig up their queer +furrin dishes, lad," the captain explained. "They +ain't used to eatin' grub fixed up good like you fix +it."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little +negro, pompously. "I spect dey doan know much +'bout cookin'. Reckon dey wouldn't eat any more +ob der own if dey got a taste ob mine."</p> + +<p>"That's the trouble," the captain agreed craftily, +"an' we don't want to spoil them. Besides, I +reckoned you'd like to be mate. Why, I was at sea +ten years before I got a mate's berth. I reckon your +folks on Cat Island would be mighty proud to hear +that you were one an' was wearing a blue suit with +big brass buttons, an' a cap with Mate on it in big +gilt letters."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the +little negro, delightedly, rising hastily from the +table. "I'se goin' to buy dem clothes right now an' +hab my picture took in 'em an' send 'bout twenty ob +dem to de folks on Cat Island."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You got around that pretty neatly, Captain," +Charley said, as soon as Chris was gone. "I expected +him to insist upon being cook. He thinks no +one else can do it so well. But, seriously, don't you +think we are all rather young to be ship's officers. +Men are quite apt to resent having to take orders +from mere boys."</p> + +<p>"The law requires that those four offices be filled +by Americans an' we can't afford to hire men to fill +the places. Chris will be under my orders all the +time an' will be mate only in name. But you boys +are already smart sailors an' I expect you to be real +officers on your boats. If you weren't on the papers +proper you might have trouble with your men, but +the fact that you are regular commissioned officers +will make smooth sailing for you. Any refusal to +obey your orders would be mutiny."</p> + +<p>"Very well, Captain," agreed Walter. "What +do you want Captain West and I to do next?"</p> + +<p>"Just lay around an' enjoy yourselves this mornin', +I guess. The first thing is to get a fellow who +talks Greek an' to hire a crew. I want to pick them +out myself. As soon as we get them there will be +plenty to do stockin' up with grub an' water. Better +spend the time lookin' over your new command an' +pickin' up what you can about the business."</p> + +<p>The advice was good, and, as soon as they had +finished breakfast, the boys hastened down to the +harbor to inspect the diving boats they had acquired<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span> +with the purchase of the 'Beauty'. Upon a close +inspection, they were delighted with their new commands. +The little vessel was quite new and its +model promised great seaworthiness. Besides the +huge square sail it carried, it was equipped with a +ten-horse power gasoline engine. Its rig was different +from any the boys had ever seen, and they +spent several hours studying it, and making themselves +acquainted with the working of the engine.</p> + +<p>"I believe I can handle it by myself now, if I had +to do it," Charley declared, at last. "The engine +may give us a little trouble at first, but we will soon +get on to it and it's likely there will be several Greeks +in the crew who know how to run it. Now, the next +thing is to settle on a name for our craft."</p> + +<p>"I thought of calling it 'Flora'," Walter said, +with a little sheepish smile.</p> + +<p>"And I was thinking of naming it 'Ola'," declared +Charley promptly.</p> + +<p>After a spirited debate over the two names they +held in such esteem, the two lads at last came to a +compromise by agreeing to call their little ship "The +Two Sisters". This decided, they rummaged +around in the lockers until they found paint and +brushes with which they proceeded to letter on the +bow of their crafts the name chosen.</p> + +<p>As soon as this task was finished, they returned to +the village and made a round of the shops purchasing +clothing for their trip, pricing provisions, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span> +learning all they could from the various merchants +about the Greeks and the sponge business.</p> + +<p>They were passing a little photo studio when +Chris' voice hailed them from inside. It was hard +for them to refrain from laughter at the figure the +little negro presented.</p> + +<p>A common blue suit had been too tame a color for +Chris' brilliant-loving soul. He was clothed in a +pair of baggish yellow trousers, many sizes too +large for him, a coat of vivid scarlet hue, and a cap +of deepest purple. But in spite of his brilliant attire, +his little ebony face expressed deepest satisfaction. +On a chair beside him was a great pile of +finished tin-types and the Greek proprietor, beaming +at the unusual rush of business, was just adjusting +his camera to take another.</p> + +<p>"Why, what do you want with any more of them, +Chris?" Walter exclaimed. "You've got enough +already to supply everyone on Cat Island."</p> + +<p>"Dey ain't no good," replied the little darkey, +mournfully, "I 'spect dis man doan know his business."</p> + +<p>Charley examined one of the despised tintypes. +"Why, they look just like you," he declared.</p> + +<p>"Dey's just black an' white," protested the little +negro. "Dey doan show de colors at all."</p> + +<p>The chums turned their heads aside to hide their +grins.</p> + +<p>"That's a Greek camera, Chris," Charley said<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span> +with a wink at Walter. "You can't expect it to +take American colors. I tell you what to do. Just +write at the bottom of each picture: Pants, yellow; +coat, scarlet; cap, purple."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the +little darkey, brightening. "But it hain't like habbing +de colors show," he added, mournfully.</p> + +<p>The three were making their way back to the hotel +when their progress was arrested by piercing +screams coming from the rear of a large Greek +restaurant.</p> + +<p>The boys hesitated and looked at each other.</p> + +<p>"Sounds as though someone was hurt pretty +bad," Charley commented, "but I guess we had better +go along about our business. We are likely to +get ourselves into trouble if we meddle with things +in this section," but as he spoke the screams rang +out afresh. The chums looked at each other; there +was no need for words between them.</p> + +<p>"Well, it's foolish, but here goes," Charley exclaimed.</p> + +<p>A narrow alley led into the rear of the building +and down it has hastened followed by his two companions.</p> + +<p>A minute's walk brought them to the scene of the +screams.</p> + +<p>In a little back yard stood a small Greek boy +about thirteen years of age. He was clad only in +short trousers and his bare back and legs were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span> +covered with angry welts. Above him towered a +dark, scowling Greek, who was swinging a heavy +cowhide whip, while at each descent of the cruel, +stinging lash the lad's screams rose in piteous protests. +Clustered around was some dozen men and +boys looking on with unconcern.</p> + +<p>Charley caught the Greek's arm as it rose for +another blow. "Stop that, you big brute," he cried, +trembling with anger. "You have no right to beat +a little fellow like that, no matter what he has done. +If you hit him another blow, I'll have you arrested."</p> + +<p>"He won't understand you, Charley," Walter +cautioned.</p> + +<p>But the Greek did understand. He turned a look +of the deepest hate on the plucky lad. For a second +he seemed in the act of striking him with the heavy +whip, but Charley did not flinch. "Try it, if you +dare," he cried.</p> + +<p>The Greek lowered his upraised arm. "Why +should I not strike him?" He demanded savagely, +but in perfect English. "He is mine, I pay his fare +all the way from Greece. All day he plays on the +street and brings home no money. I will beat him +if I wish."</p> + +<p>"You will not," declared Charley, firmly. "If +you do, you will be arrested very quickly. Lad, if +this man attempts to beat you again, you come to us; +you will find us on board the schooner 'Beauty'. If +she is not in the harbor you go to Mr. Driver who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span> +owns the store, I will tell him about you and he will +see that you are not abused. Do you understand +what I say?"</p> + +<p>"Yes sir, I speak English good," the little lad +replied proudly. "He teach me so I can beg the +pennies."</p> + +<p>The Greek's manner had suddenly changed. His +frown disappeared and he wore a smile that he endeavored +to make pleasant.</p> + +<p>"The noble young gentleman need not worry," he +said, smoothly, "I love the boy and already regret +having whipped him—he is very bad. But it shall +happen no more."</p> + +<p>"It had better not," Charley replied shortly, as he +turned away. "Come on, Walt, I am going to +speak to Mr. Driver about it now."</p> + +<p>Mr. Driver listened to the lad's story with a very +grave face. "I'm afraid you boys have made a +dangerous enemy," he said. "That Greek is Manuel +George, and he is a very bad character. He was +arrested once for the murder of another Greek, but +they could not prove the charge against him although +everyone believed that he had done it. You +want to be very careful as long as you are in Tarpon. +I will gladly have him arrested if the boy +makes any complaint to me."</p> + +<p>The boys found the captain waiting for them at +the hotel. "I've had the best of luck," the old +sailor declared. "I found the very Greek we need<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span> +to make our orders plain to the crew. He talks +English as good as you or I. I did not lose any time +in gettin' his name on the ship's papers. He +promised to meet us here at the hotel this noon. +There he comes now."</p> + +<p>The chums exchanged a glance of dismay, for approaching +their table, bowing, smiling, and as suave +as though they were his dearest friends was Mr. +Manuel George.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER V.<br /> + +<small>THE START.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> captain introduced the boys to the Greek +who beamed upon them as though nothing unpleasant +had ever passed between them. The lads met +his smiling advances with a cold silence which the +captain noticed with puzzled concern.</p> + +<p>As soon as he could do so without attracting too +much notice, Walter drew the old sailor to one side. +"We don't want anything to do with that man," he +declared, and he hurriedly told about the whipping +and repeated what Mr. Driver had said.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield looked troubled. "I wish I'd +known that two hours ago," he said. "He's signed +on with us now an' if I try to get rid of him he can +make a lot of trouble for us. We have got to take +him along. If we don't, he's liable to libel the +schooner an' cost us no end of money and delay."</p> + +<p>Walter's face showed his anxiety and concern.</p> + +<p>"He said he was going to bring a boy along with +him to act as cabin boy," said the old sailor after an +uncomfortable pause. "Maybe it will all work out +for the best. He won't be able to abuse the lad on +the schooner, an' I don't see how he can make us any<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span> +trouble. All he's to do is to make our orders plain +to the men, it ain't as though he was an officer over +them."</p> + +<p>"Well, if it can't be helped, we have just got to +make the best of it," Walter agreed, "I am going to +keep a mighty close watch on him all the time, +though. We will talk more about it later on. He +keeps glancing at us as though he knew we were +talking about him."</p> + +<p>As soon as he got the chance, Walter told his +chum what the captain had said.</p> + +<p>"I don't like the idea of that fellow going with +us," Charley declared, "but if it has got to be, we +had better start in by treating him friendly. It +won't help matters any to quarrel with him."</p> + +<p>That was sound sense and the boys at once began +to treat the Greek pleasantly, in spite of the dislike +they felt for him.</p> + +<p>There was no doubt but what the fellow understood +his position thoroughly. With his able assistance, +the captain, in a short time, secured a full +crew of fifteen men, including four professional +divers who brought their queer looking suits with +lead shoes and heavy helmets along with them. +The boys were pleased with the appearance of the +men. They were well-built, husky fellows and +looked to be capable sailors. They were much alike +in looks, all being broad-shouldered and swarthy +with clean-cut features and straight noses. One<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span> +alone seemed to differ greatly from the rest. He +was a tall, powerful, handsome fellow with unusually +small hands and feet. He seemed to be +shunned by the others and left very much to himself. +He was evidently a good sailor and when the +captain set his new crew at work to getting the +schooner ready for sea he performed his part with +a quickness and intelligence that won the old sailor's +approval.</p> + +<p>As soon as the work was well under way, Charley +and Walter, taking the interpreter with them, went +back up town to purchase their stores. The bulk of +their purchases were made at Mr. Driver's store, +but there were many articles that he did not carry +in stock which they had to buy at the Greek stores. +Manuel directed them as to the kind of food their +crew were accustomed to. The bulk of the stores +consisted of ripe black olives in small kegs; queer +looking cheeses, rice, black flour and an abundance +of tea and coffee. The boys bought three whole +beeves and four lambs, directing that all their purchases +should be sent down to the schooner at once.</p> + +<p>"Whew," whistled Charley as he paid the last +bill, "we have only got five dollars left of our fifteen +hundred."</p> + +<p>"Don't you care," Walter replied, confidently. +"We will have a couple of thousand dollars anyway +coming to us when we get back, and still have the +'Beauty' besides."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys next visited the hotel and got their +valises and belongings which they carried down to +their new floating home.</p> + +<p>They found that the Greeks already had the meat +cut up and sizzling merrily in the great iron kettles.</p> + +<p>The new crew were a quick and willing lot and before +dark the last article was stored aboard, and, +with the diving boat towing along behind, they +dropped the schooner down the river to the mouth +and anchored for the night just outside amongst a +great fleet of schooners lying ready for an early +morning start for the sponging ground.</p> + +<p>Long after they had eaten their supper and all of +the crew but the anchor watch had retired to the +forecastle, the four chums sat on deck admiring the +beauty of the scene around them. A thousand +lights twinkled from the fleet and high in the air +ahead of them the great lantern of the Anclote lighthouse +on its little island of barren rock.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield awoke the boys early next +morning, "Hurry up on deck if you want to see the +prettiest sight you ever saw," he said. The lads +hustled into their clothing and followed him up the +ladder. As they gained the deck they paused with +exclamations of deepest admiration.</p> + +<p>It was blowing a stiff breeze and the blue water +of the Gulf was dancing and sparkling with white-crested +waves. Around them was the fleet all under +sail, their snowy canvas towering high above their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span> +shapely hulls. Some lay with sails slatting, still +clinging to their anchorage while their brightly attired +crews worked over windlasses, reeling in the +dripping cables. Some already under way lay +hove-to in the open Gulf waiting for their fellows; +while still others, anchors tripped and sails drawing, +heeling over to the brisk breeze, darted away, sending +the water tossing and foaming from their bows.</p> + +<p>The boys drew a long breath of pure delight at +the beautiful picture.</p> + +<p>"It's grand," Charley cried.</p> + +<p>"Aye, lad," agreed the captain with satisfaction. +"There's no place like the sea for beautiful scenes. +But thar ain't a ship in the whole fleet as pretty as +our own. Just watch her now."</p> + +<p>The old sailor gave a few short orders which the +interpreter repeated to the crew. A dozen of them +sprang to the windlass, while others stood by the +halyards, ready to hoist the big jibs the second the +anchor broke ground. The "Beauty's" huge main +and foresails were already hoisted and her cable +hove short.</p> + +<p>The men at the windlass shouted some words.</p> + +<p>"Anchor broke," translated Manuel.</p> + +<p>"Up helm," commanded the captain, "give her +the jibs."</p> + +<p>The great sails mounted their stays, the +"Beauty's" head played off, and, careening over<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span> +'till her lee rail touched the water, she surged +through the waters like a thing alive.</p> + +<p>The chums watched the foam sweep past in transports +of delight.</p> + +<p>"My, but she's fast," Walter cried.</p> + +<p>"Aye, lad," the captain agreed, joyfully. "I +ain't never seen a faster, except maybe Black Sam's +schooner. We'll have to shorten sail in an hour if +we don't want to run away from the rest of the +fleet."</p> + +<p>The boys watched with delight as the Beauty +overhauled and passed schooner after schooner.</p> + +<p>As she surged past a large black-hulled vessel with +three diving boats in tow, a man on the stranger's +deck waved his cap and shouted,</p> + +<p>"Good luck to you. Better keep with the fleet."</p> + +<p>"That's Mr. Williams," Charley exclaimed. "I +am glad that we are going to be near somebody we +know."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it is Mr. Williams," affirmed Manuel, who +was standing near. "But here is my little boy to +say that your breakfast is ready."</p> + +<p>"What is your name?" Walter enquired of the +little fellow as they all followed him below. "I +could never remember that," he said, when the lad +replied with a very long Greek name. "I guess we +will have to call you Ben for short."</p> + +<p>The band of chums were very hungry and they +seated themselves around the table before the steaming<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span> +cups of coffee and waited impatiently for the +food to be brought on, but the little Greek lad took +a position behind their chairs and waited.</p> + +<p>"Hurry up, Ben, and bring the breakfast," the +captain ordered.</p> + +<p>"Breakfast there," the lad replied.</p> + +<p>The old sailor repeated his order but Ben replied +as before.</p> + +<p>"I reckon he don't understand," the captain remarked, +"Go up and tell your father, owner, or +whoever he is, to come down."</p> + +<p>The lad was back in a minute with the smiling +Greek.</p> + +<p>"We want our breakfast," the captain explained, +"the boy don't seem to understand."</p> + +<p>"He understands all right, but, I see the cook +does not comprehend. It is the custom to have +coffee only in the morning on sponging ships."</p> + +<p>"Nothing but coffee for breakfast?" roared the +old sailor.</p> + +<p>"We eat but one meal a day and that at night," +the Greek explained. "If the rest of the crew ate +the divers would want to eat also, and that would +be fatal for them. The stomach must be empty +when they descend to the bottom in deep water, +otherwise they die."</p> + +<p>"Well, they can't see us eat an' I want my three +square meals a day," said the hungry sailor.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span> +"Right saving plan for us though if they only eat +once a day."</p> + +<p>"They eat the whole three meals in one," the +Greek said with a smile. "I will speak to the cook +at once and he will soon have something ready for +you."</p> + +<p>In a very short time they were served with a substantial +meal to which they all did full justice. As +soon as it was finished, they returned to the deck +where they learned that the "Beauty" was already +so far in the lead of the fleet that sail had to be shortened.</p> + +<p>With Manuel's aid the boys picked out their +crews for the diving boat. They found that many +of the Greeks were familiar with gasoline engines +and they selected one of the youngest and most intelligent-looking +for an engineer. The four divers +were, of course, allotted to their boat, but besides +them they had to have two men to work the air +pump and two others to tend to the life-lines, which +made a crew of nine, besides the young officers, and +would leave only Captain Westfield, Chris and the +cook and five men on board the schooner.</p> + +<p>The divers at once began preparations for their +future dangerous work. They examined pump and +air hose very carefully, for a slight leak in either one +would mean death by suffocation beneath the surface. +They brought out their diving suits and went +over them inch by inch for possible rents or tears.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span> +Many of the suits were old and covered with a multitude +of rubber patches. The boys were amazed +that their owners would dare descend in such worn +suits, but Manuel assured them that the patches were +so cunningly put on that not only would they exclude +water, but they would outlast the suit itself.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VI.<br /> + +<small>FIRST TROUBLE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">One</span> of the sailors Charley had selected for his +crew was the tall handsome fellow whom the others +seemed to shun.</p> + +<p>"I can't understand what the rest have against +him," the young captain remarked to his chum. +"He seems very quiet and well behaved, and he is +every inch a sailor. I would ask Manuel about him +but it is bad policy to discuss one of the crew with +another. It always makes trouble. Likely, Manuel +would lie about him anyway, he seems to hate him, +look at him glaring at him now."</p> + +<p>The Greek was leaning against the railing staring +at the sailor who was coiling down a rope near him. +Suddenly the Greek addressed the man in a low +savage tone. The sailor's face grew red with anger, +and he replied shortly in a few hissing words. With +a bound, the Greek cleared the space between the two +and struck the sailor full in the mouth. The man +reeled back against the main mast, but, recovering +himself in a second, sprang for his assailant. The<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span> +Greek leaped to one side and whipped out a long +wicked knife.</p> + +<p>Before he could use it, Captain Westfield, belaying +pin in hand, rushed in between the two.</p> + +<p>"Put up that knife," he roared. "I'll do what +fighting there is to be done on this ship."</p> + +<p>The Greek shot one quick glance at him, venomous +with hate, then he glanced beyond him at the +two lads who waited expectantly with hands on their +pistols.</p> + +<p>"He cursed me," he said sullenly, as he slowly +replaced the knife in his pocket.</p> + +<p>"When anyone curses you, report it to me an' +don't take the law in your own hands. I'm master +of this schooner, an' you might as well understand +it right off. Tell that fellow just what I've told +you."</p> + +<p>The sailor's face darkened as the Greek spoke to +him rapidly, but he turned slowly away and walked +forward.</p> + +<p>"That's a bad beginning," Charley remarked to +his chum. "I wish we had never seen that Greek. +I believe he insulted that sailor. The fellow was +behaving himself and tending to his own business."</p> + +<p>He repeated the remark to the captain a little +later.</p> + +<p>"I reckon you're right, lad," agreed the old +sailor, "that Greek seems to be a trouble-maker but +he'll find he's got the wrong man to deal with. I've<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span> +handled too many crews of tough roughnecks to be +bested by a dirty furriner."</p> + +<p>"I'll bet he will keep you busy with complaints," +Walter said. "How are you going to get at the +truth of it if he does complain about the others of +the crew?"</p> + +<p>"You'll see, I reckon, he will try something like +that but I'm ready for him."</p> + +<p>Sure enough, in less than an hour the Greek approached +the Captain.</p> + +<p>"I hate to trouble you, but I must complain as +you have directed," he said suavely. "The cook, +he is very abusive, I tried to instruct him about +your meals but he answers me with vile names."</p> + +<p>"Bring the cook aft," Captain Westfield commanded.</p> + +<p>Manuel escorted the bewildered-looking cook aft +with a look of sly triumph on his face.</p> + +<p>The captain looked the man over appraisingly. +He was a broad-shouldered, well-muscled fellow. +He spoke to him briefly but the cook shook his +head. He could not understand.</p> + +<p>The old sailor picked up a rope and spread it in +a big circle on the deck.</p> + +<p>"This insulting of you has got to be stopped +right off," he declared, addressing the interpreter. +"Give me your knife."</p> + +<p>The Greek surrendered his weapon.</p> + +<p>"Now both of you get inside that ring and fight it<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span> +out to a finish," he ordered. "Lick him good for +calling you names."</p> + +<p>Manuel's face fell, and, turning he spoke rapidly +to the cook. "He has apologized and my honor is +satisfied," he declared.</p> + +<p>"All right," the captain said with a wink at the +grinning boys. "Next time any one insults you, +I am going to make you give him a good licking in a +square fist fight. I'm not agoing to let any of the +crew swear at you and call you names—it ain't +right."</p> + +<p>"I guess we won't have any more complaints +from him right off," he chuckled as the disappointed +Greek retired forward.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid we're going to have more or less +trouble through not understanding their language," +Charley said, gravely. "I don't believe he had a bit +of trouble with the cook. He was just aiming to +have you punish the fellow and get you disliked by +the crew."</p> + +<p>"I can handle him all right," the captain declared, +confidently. "If he gets troublesome I'll +iron him and put him down in the hold. I reckon I +can make the rest understand what I want done by +signs, though it would be mighty awkward if a gale +struck us."</p> + +<p>The old sailor soon left the boys in charge of the +deck and went below to write up the log and look +over the charts.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span></p> + +<p>"If this wind holds we'll be on the edge of the +sponging grounds by night," he said when he returned. +"I didn't realize before how big they are. +Why, they reach clear from Cedar Keys to Cape +Sable, about seven hundred miles."</p> + +<p>"One thing that has puzzled me is that all these +schooners seem to come from Key West," Charley +remarked, '"Of Key West' is lettered on the stern +of every one of them."</p> + +<p>"Key West used to be the headquarters for the +sponging business in the old days," the captain explained. +"They used to gather sponges different +from what they do now. A schooner would take +out about twenty small boats an' a crew of forty +men. When she got to the sponge grounds, the +small boats would scatter out around her, two men +in each boat. One man would do the sculling and +the other would lean over the bow with a water +glass in one hand—a pail with a pane of glass for a +bottom—and a long pole with a hook in the end in +the other. When he spied a sponge on the bottom +through the glass he'd have the other stop sculling +and he would hook it up with his pole. It was +slow, hard work, but they made money at it until +the Greeks came with their expert divers. They +could not compete with them so they either sold or +leased their schooners to the Greeks and went out of +business."</p> + +<p>The old sailor's explanation was interrupted by a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span> +howl of "Oh, Golly!" from the cook' galley forward +and Chris, dripping with water, bounded out +of the open door of the little structure, and rushed +aft.</p> + +<p>"I want you to put dat cook in irons, Massa Captain," +he cried. "He's done 'saulted his superior +officer."</p> + +<p>"What did he do to you," the captain asked with +a twinkle in his eye.</p> + +<p>"Throwed a hull pan of dirty, nasty dishwater +obber me. I was jus' tellin' him how he had outer +do, an' tryin' to show de ignorant man how to cook, +when—slosh—he let fly dat big pan full all obber +me."</p> + +<p>The dirty water was streaming from the little +negro's brilliant clothing and his face was streaked +with purple from his cap.</p> + +<p>The captain checked his desire to laugh.</p> + +<p>"The cook did just right," he said, gravely. +"You've got no business in his galley. A cook is always +boss there. Even the Captain seldom interferes +with him."</p> + +<p>Chris seemed inclined to protest indignantly, but +the old sailor continued.</p> + +<p>"How would you like to be cook an' have some +one poking around an' tellin' you what to do?"</p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon you is right," the little darkey +admitted, "I wouldn't stand such doin's. 'Spect<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span> +dough dat my good clothes is all spoiled. Dat +water was powerful greasy."</p> + +<p>"Better dry them out and lay them away," Walter +suggested. "They are too fine to wear at sea. +You had ought to save them 'till we get in port."</p> + +<p>Both boys were glad when Chris accepted the suggestion. +They could see that the crew regarded the +little fellow in his gay apparel with a contempt and +ridicule that the plucky, loyal little lad did not deserve.</p> + +<p>Under her shortened canvas, the "Beauty" had +dropped to the rear of the fleet. Late in the afternoon +the schooners ahead began to shorten sail. +Soon one rounded up into the wind, dropped anchor +and lowered sail. A mile further on another one +anchored, a mile beyond another took in sail, until +at last the whole fleet was strung out in a long line +reaching many miles North and South.</p> + +<p>The captain held the "Beauty" on her course +until the last schooner was passed then anchored, +lowered sails and made everything snug.</p> + +<p>"We are on the sponging grounds," he explained +to the boys who had been puzzled by the fleet's +maneuvers. "To-morrow we make our first try as +spongers."</p> + +<p>As soon as their supper was finished the boys +strolled forward to view the crew at their meal.</p> + +<p>The Greeks ate in groups of four. Each group +had a great tin pan filled with some kind of stew.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span> +This they divided into four equal portions with their +big spoons, all eating from the same pan.</p> + +<p>The stew, black bread as hard as a rock, and ripe +olives constituted their meal, but the boys, hearty +eaters themselves, were astounded at the amount of +food each Greek disposed of.</p> + +<p>"I never dreamed a man could stow away so +much grub," Charley remarked. "They are not +eating three meals in one, but six."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VII.<br /> + +<small>SPONGING.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> morning sun rose over a scene of bustle and +activity. From the hundred schooners strung out +two or three hundred diving boats with sails hoisted +and engines chugging.</p> + +<p>The young officers were up and away with the +earliest.</p> + +<p>"Go slow," Captain Westfield cautioned them as +they stepped aboard their craft. "Keep your eyes +open an' learn all you can. Don't give any orders +unless they are absolutely needed. But if you have +to give them an order make them obey it, don't let +them trifle with you. You can take Manuel along +if you want to, I reckon I can manage to get along +without him."</p> + +<p>But the boys declined the offer. They had both +taken a great dislike to the suave, smiling Greek.</p> + +<p>The Captain had given their crew general instructions +before they left the schooner and the young +officers had but little to do but signify by waves of +their hands which direction they wished to go.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span></p> + +<p>All places looked alike to the inexperienced boys, +and as soon as their craft was a quarter of a mile +from the schooner, Charley signed to his crew to +anchor and proceed with their work.</p> + +<p>The divers at once prepared for their descent to +the bottom. The lead was first hove to find out the +depth of the water, which proved to be about thirty-five +feet. Before donning their waterproof suits, +the divers tested the air pump carefully and examined +the air hose minutely, for upon these two things +their lives would depend when once they sank beneath +the surface. While they were putting on the +strange looking suits and heavy leaded shoes, the +crew slung short ladders over the sides. The divers +put on their headpieces last of all, these were large +globe-shaped coverings of metal with two heavy +glasses in front through which to see. But two +divers were to descend at a time. Their places +would be taken by two others at the end of two +hours, which is about as long as one can safely work +at a time beneath the surface. Those in reserve assisted +their companions in adjusting the heavy headpieces. +As soon as the helmets were on they screwed +in the air hose, and connected the other ends to the +pumps. A line by which to lower and raise them +was fastened around each diver's body and he was +then assisted onto the ladder, for it was almost impossible +for them to move in their cumbersome suits +and lead shoes. As soon as they had been helped to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span> +the lowest step on the ladder, each was given a large +basket to which a long line had been fastened, and +they were slowly and gently lowered to the bottom.</p> + +<p>The young officers watched their operations with +eager interest. What impressed them most was the +vigilant care shown by the divers remaining on +board. One took charge of the tub in which the air +hose was coiled and paid it out carefully as the diver +sank, the other held the life-line instantly ready for +the jerks which would signal to him the wishes of +the one below. Not once did either's eyes shift or +his attention waver from his task.</p> + +<p>"It's easy to see that this is a dangerous business," +Walter remarked.</p> + +<p>"Yes," his chum agreed, "I am beginning to see +that Mr. Williams was right when he said sponging +was a man's game. It certainly takes nerve to descend +like those divers have, knowing that there is +nothing between them and death but that little air +hose. But have you noticed how they are treating +that strange handsome fellow? They all seem to be +afraid to have him near."</p> + +<p>The mysterious sailor had approached the men +working the air pumps, apparently with the purpose +of helping with the pumping, but the pumpers drove +him away with menacing gestures and upraised fists. +He moved over near the coiled air hose but the diver +in charge of that met him with a torrent of fiercely-uttered +words and he slunk dejectedly forward, and,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span> +seating himself by the mast, buried his face in his +hands.</p> + +<p>"Poor chap," Walter remarked, "he seems to be +hated by the whole crew. I wonder what is the +reason."</p> + +<p>"We will find out, I guess, when we meet up with +Mr. Williams again," his chum replied. "He will +likely know, or be able to find out quickly from some +of his crew. But look, we are about to see our first +sponges."</p> + +<p>There had been a couple of quick jerks on the life-line. +The diver holding it called to one of the crew +who seized the line that had been attached to the +basket, and began hauling it carefully in hand over +hand.</p> + +<p>The boys leaned over the side, eager for the first +glimpse of their future cargo. When the basket +came into view they both uttered an exclamation of +disgust and disappointment.</p> + +<p>Instead of bright, clean, yellow sponges with +which they were familiar, the basket was heaped +with what looked like huge lumps of dirty mud.</p> + +<p>The man dumped the contents out on deck and +lowered the basket down again.</p> + +<p>"What greenies we are," Charley said as he +glanced at his chum's crestfallen face. "We might +have known if we had stopped to think, that sponges +have to be cleaned and cured before they look like +those we saw on shore. I expect that pile is worth<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span> +a lot of money in spite of its unattractive appearance."</p> + +<p>Five times did the basket appear loaded to the +brim before the divers' two hour spell below expired. +As soon as their time was up they were +hauled aboard, their suits removed and the other +two took their places.</p> + +<p>"Whew, but I am getting hungry," Walter exclaimed +as noon time drew near, "and we came off +from the schooner without bringing a lunch with +us."</p> + +<p>"I am glad we did," Charley said. "It's all +right having our meals regular when we are on +board the schooner and out of sight of the crew, but +it would hardly seem right to eat now before these +hungry fellows. I guess we can stand it to go without +dinner of they can stand it to go without both +dinner and breakfast. Besides, I don't believe I +could eat any lunch if we had it. Whew, but that +smell is getting awful."</p> + +<p>The hot sun was getting in its work on the rapidly +increasing pile of sponges on deck. Adhering to +them were multitudes of muscles and little fish +which were beginning to send forth a fearful stench.</p> + +<p>"I am beginning to realize that a sponger's life is +anything but a bed of roses," Walter laughed. "It's +easy to understand now why they only eat one meal +a day."</p> + +<p>The novelty of the diving operations soon wore<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span> +off and the boys, to pass the time, busied themselves +with an attempt to learn something of the Greek +language. They selected the engineer for their +teacher. He was a young fellow with an intelligent, +good-humored face and seemed to take great interest +in their efforts. Touching different parts of +the boat and engine the boys repeated the English +names for them. The young fellow grasped the idea +instantly and repeated the names in Greek, laughing +heartily over their attempts to pronounce the +words after him.</p> + +<p>In this manner the time passed quickly and pleasantly +and the lads were delighted with the rapid +progress they made.</p> + +<p>"At this rate we will be able to speak the language +a little in a week's time," Charley declared. +"I'm—" but he never finished the sentence.</p> + +<p>From around them rose cries that brought the +lads springing to their feet.</p> + +<p>The crew were all crowded against the rail staring +as if fascinated over the side, while the diver +holding one of the life-lines was hauling it in with +feverish energy.</p> + +<p>As the boys sprang to the rail, the diver's headpiece +appeared above the surface One glance, and +they understood the reason for the sudden commotion—from +the metal helmet dangled a short piece +of severed air hose.</p> + +<p>The luckless man was quickly dragged aboard,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span> +the head-piece quickly removed, and his rubber +clothing cut away, but his eyes were closed and his +face purple—he was dead. A long, weird, prolonged +wailing came from his shipmates which +arose and fell strangely, like the strains of the +mournful death march.</p> + +<p>The two chums gazed at each other with pale, +horror-stricken faces.</p> + +<p>"Poor fellow," Walter murmured, "His life +went out like a candle in a gale. Alive one minute, +dead the next. What could have cut that hose?"</p> + +<p>"Chafed against a sharp branch of coral or bitten +in two by a shark," Charley replied, sadly. +"Well, I guess it means the last of our sponging, +the other divers will hardly want to go down after +such an accident, and I don't blame them."</p> + +<p>But, to his amazement, as soon as the wailing +chant ceased, one of the remaining divers began +coolly to prepare to take the dead man's place.</p> + +<p>"My, but those fellows have got nerve," he declared, +admiringly, but he stopped the man as he +began to put on his diving suit and by signs ordered +the crew to get up anchor and return to the schooner.</p> + +<p>"It's only a couple of hours to dark and we have +had enough for one day anyway," he remarked to +his chum.</p> + +<p>When the diving boat reached the schooner his +shipmates prepared the dead man for burial. The +body was sewed up in stout canvas and a piece of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span> +iron fastened to it. It was then gently lowered over +the side and sank slowly beneath the waves.</p> + +<p>With its disappearance all vestige of gloom disappeared +from the crew. The dead man's scanty belongings +were brought forth and auctioned off to the +various bidders, and an hour after the crew were +chatting and laughing with each other as cheerfully +as ever.</p> + +<p>"Mr. Williams was right, this is a man's game, +and a game for rough, fearless men only," Walter +remarked thoughtfully, for a second time.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VIII.<br /> + +<small>TROUBLE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">After</span> the crew had eaten their supper and rested +a bit, the captain had them transfer the sponges +from the diving boat to the deck of the schooner. +The sponges made quite an imposing pile which the +old sailor surveyed with satisfaction. "You've +done well to-day," he remarked, "if every day's +work is as good we'll have a valuable cargo before +our three months are up. I reckon, thar's all of +two hundred dollars' worth of sponges in that +heap."</p> + +<p>"Are you sure that you know how to clean and +cure them right?" Charley enquired.</p> + +<p>"I don't, but Chris knows that part of the business +from A to Z. Where he comes from the people +live by sponging and pearl fishing."</p> + +<p>"Golly, dat's right," observed the little darkey. +"I'se helped my daddy fix sponges many a time. +First off, you'se got to beat de mud out ob dem wid +sticks, den you got to let dem lay foah a day or two +to die, 'cause dey's alive jus' like fishes. When +dey's good an' dead, you puts dem in nets an' hangs +dem ober de side for de water to wash dem out clean.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span> +Den you dry dem out on deck an' string dem out on +strings 'bout two yards long. Dat makes dem all +ready for market 'cept for clipping de bad parts off +of dem, which is done on shore. Dar ain't nothin' +'bout fixin' up sponges dat dis nigger doan know."</p> + +<p>Just then a small boat came alongside the schooner +and the boys hastened to the side to welcome the +two men it contained. They were the captain and +mate of the schooner anchored nearest to the +"Beauty". Both were young fellows hardly out +of their teens. They introduced themselves as +Steve Ward, and Ray Lowe.</p> + +<p>"We thought we'd drop over and have a little +chat with you," said Ward, who was the captain. +"You, of course, don't realize it yet, but an American +face looks mighty good amongst this army of +Greeks, especially after one has been out for a +month or two. We all start out together but before +the season ends we get pretty widely scattered and +to meet up with another schooner with an American +aboard is like coming across a long-lost brother. +This is my fifth trip and I am getting pretty well +hardened to the loneliness now, but the first time I +was out I nearly went crazy. After we parted from +the rest of the fleet, it was worse than being alone +on a desert island, for I had the misery of seeing +others talk, laugh and enjoy themselves without +being able to understand a word. When, at last, +we came across a ship with someone aboard I could<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span> +talk to I nearly cried for joy. It seemed so good to +be able to understand and make myself understood +once more." His glance fell upon Manuel +George, who was leaning against the rail, and his +gray eyes narrowed.</p> + +<p>"What made you bring that fellow with you?" +he asked.</p> + +<p>"We had to have someone along who could talk +their lingo," Captain Westfield replied. "Do you +know him?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know anything good of him," said the +other shortly. "I came near killing him once and +I've always half regretted that I didn't do it. It +was on my first trip," he explained. "It was just +such another case as that young fellow's who was +arrested the other day. Although I was captain, +the Greeks owned the schooner, and, because I +was young and inexperienced, they got the idea they +could run over me and do as they pleased. Manuel +was always stirring them up and encouraging them +to disobey orders. One day I had some words with +him about it, and,"—the young fellow's face darkened—"well, +he carries a bullet in his leg yet. The +others set on me and I had to lock myself up in the +cabin. Likely, they would have got me in the end +and thrown me overboard to feed the sharks, but +we happened to come across another schooner and +they had to let me go."</p> + +<p>"He don't want to try any tricks with me," Captain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span> +Westfield declared. "I got him to talk their +lingo but had him sign on as one of the crew. If he +tries to act up, I'll put him at the hardest work on +the schooner."</p> + +<p>"Well, keep your eye on him," advised the other. +"He has never made a trip yet without making +trouble. He's a mighty bad egg and as sly and cunning +as he is mean."</p> + +<p>The two men remained for over two hours, and +from them the little party learned many new and +interesting things about their new business and about +the Greeks.</p> + +<p>"We have no reason to complain of a dull trip +so far," Charley said, when the two Americans had +left. "Only two days out and one of our crew is +dead, another is supposed to be on the watch to make +us trouble, and a third is a mystery worth solving, +judging from the way the others treat him. If +things keep on as they have started, we will have a +voyage exciting enough to satisfy anyone."</p> + +<p>If the lad could have known of the exciting events +soon to follow close on each other's heels, he would +have had even less reason to complain of dullness.</p> + +<p>The next day's sponging was the same as the +first. They seemed to have happened upon a spot +where the sponges were unusually plentiful. The +basket came frequently to the surface loaded with +the big mud-covered masses and by nightfall the +diving boat's deck was well covered. All day the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span> +two lads persisted in their attempt to learn the Greek +names for the things about them. By night Charley +was able to direct the operation of getting under +way for the schooner. Of course, he was yet unable +to construct sentences in Greek, but he could call the +Greek names for sails, anchor, and different parts of +the rigging and the crew managed to guess the rest. +Though it was a crude and imperfect way of giving +orders, it succeeded better than the slow, imperfect +signs he had been obliged to depend upon before.</p> + +<p>"If we keep on as fast, we will be able to make +them understand us well within two weeks," he declared +gleefully.</p> + +<p>It was still light enough for them to see distinctly +when they reached the schooner, and they looked +about them with regret as they climbed aboard. +Her snow-white decks were filthy from the pounding +out of the sponges, and bulwarks, sails and rigging +were spattered with the foul mud, while the +strong, rank odor of dead fish hung heavy in the air.</p> + +<p>Chris and the captain had just knocked off work. +Their faces, hands and clothing were black as soot. +The old sailor's face showed set and stern through +its coating of mud. He said little until all were +washed up and seated around the supper table.</p> + +<p>"Well, lads, I reckon our troubles have begun," +he remarked, grimly. "Manuel an' I had a row to-day."</p> + +<p>"What about? How did it come out?" the boys +questioned, eagerly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I told him to help us with the sponge cleaning +and he refused to do it. When I insisted he flew +into a rage, cursed me, an' shook his fist in my face. +I couldn't stand for that an' he's down in the hold +now with the irons on him."</p> + +<p>"Well, I feel easier with him there than with him +mixing in with the crew," Charley declared.</p> + +<p>"My row with him ain't the worst of the matter," +the old sailor said gravely. "I called on the crew to +help me iron him and they all pretended they didn't +understand my sign, but they knew what I wanted +all right. I had to handle him alone an' we had +quite a struggle before I got the best of him." He +rolled up his sleeve and showed an ugly-looking cut +on his arm. "He came near getting me with his +knife an' I had to give him a couple of taps with a +belaying pin. That cut don't amount to anything, +but what worries me is that the crew stood around +an' watched him try to kill me without interfering—it's +a mighty bad sign."</p> + +<p>"That does look bad," Charley agreed, anxiously. +"I guess we had better keep him a close +prisoner and not let any of the crew go near him, he +might try to stir them up and make things hot for +us."</p> + +<p>"But that means that someone will have to guard +him an' carry his meals to him. It wouldn't do to +have one of the Greeks do it, I reckon."</p> + +<p>"No," Charley agreed, thoughtfully, "but I believe<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span> +I've got the very man for the job—that handsome +fellow the others seem to hate so. Manuel +tried to kill him and he is not likely to be easy with +him."</p> + +<p>The mysterious sailor was at once sent for by +Ben. As soon as he came the captain loaded a tray +with food and a bottle of water and signed for him +to carry it and follow him. Charley and Walter accompanied +the two.</p> + +<p>As they passed along the deck on their way to the +hold, they met angry glances and frowns from the +crew.</p> + +<p>The mysterious sailor was very intelligent and +they soon made him understand that he was to +guard the prisoner. He grinned with enjoyment +and, seating himself a little way from the Greek, +took out his long keen sheath knife and laid it handy +beside him.</p> + +<p>The prisoner's face grew black with rage at sight +of his guard, but he maintained a sulky silence.</p> + +<p>"I guess he's safe enough now," the captain said +as they returned to their cabin. "I believe that +fellow will guard him faithfully. They seem to +hate each other like poison—I wish I knew the reason +for it."</p> + +<p>"It would not seem so strange if the hatred was +confined to him and Manuel, but all the others seem +to share in the feeling," Charley remarked. "It +seems very queer to me."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER IX.<br /> + +<small>MANUEL'S RELEASE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Before</span> the boys left the schooner next morning, +the guard they had set over Manuel approached the +captain, and by signs and gestures intimated that +the prisoner wished to speak to him.</p> + +<p>Manuel's sullen demeanor had entirely disappeared +and he looked humble and penitent.</p> + +<p>"I wish to make my most humble apologies to +you, noble captain," he declared. "All night long +I have thought over my hasty actions with shame +and regret. You were right and I wrong. I will +work hard at whatever you set me to do, and in the +future you will have no cause to complain if you +will set me at liberty."</p> + +<p>There were tears in the fellow's eyes and his +voice trembled as he spoke.</p> + +<p>"Stop that blubbering," said the blunt old sailor, +who detested tears in men. "I reckon, if you are +sure that you've learned your lesson an' won't try to +act smart again, I'll set you free; but the minute +you try to start any trouble again, I'll put you down +here for keeps."</p> + +<p>As he removed the irons from the prisoner, the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span> +strange sailor burst into a torrent of passionate +speech.</p> + +<p>The captain paid no attention to him for he could +not understand a word of it, but Charley, who was +watching closely, saw Manuel give the fellow a +quick glance of sly triumph.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid you have made a mistake in setting +that fellow free, Captain," the lad said, as they returned +to the deck. "I believe it would have been +wiser to have kept him in irons until we could +touch some port and put him ashore."</p> + +<p>"I never feel like being hard on a man when he's +sorry for what he has done," the old sailor replied. +"I guess it will make the crew feel better tempered +to have him set free. I'm going to put him ashore +at the first port we touch. In the meanwhile we'll +keep him hard at work an' keep a eye on him all the +time."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we had better take him with us and put +him to work at the pump," Walter suggested. +"That's good hard work."</p> + +<p>Charley approved the suggestion, for in spite of +the Greek's seeming repentance, the lad did not trust +him in the least and thought it wisest that he and +the captain should be kept separated for awhile after +their quarrel.</p> + +<p>Manuel went at the hard labor at the air pump +with a willingness and cheerfulness which seemed +to show the sincerity of his repentance. At first, he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span> +seemed inclined to talk overmuch with the rest of +the crew, but Charley cut short his talkativeness +with a curt command.</p> + +<p>"I believe that fellow is a regular Jonah," he confided +to his chum during the noon hour rest. "Yesterday +and the day before we got lots of sponges, +but we haven't taken in enough this morning to pay +expenses."</p> + +<p>"I guess this part of the ground is getting worked +out, perhaps," Walter replied. "I've noticed several +schooners pulling up anchor and getting under +way."</p> + +<p>His surmise proved correct for during the afternoon +many of the fleet passed them headed North. +Evidently others were finding the ground as poor +as they did.</p> + +<p>Late in the afternoon the captain recalled them +to the schooner with a signal previously agreed +upon,—a flag hoisted to the foremast head.</p> + +<p>"I reckon we'd better be getting under way," +the old sailor said when they got aboard. "I want +to keep with the fleet an' all the schooners seem to +be getting under sail. I've noted the course they +are takin' an' with this wind they'll be a long ways +from us if we wait until morning. I hailed one of +the captains and he said they intended to sail all +night an' anchor an' get to work early in the morning."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span></p> + +<p>By the time the sails were all hoisted and the +anchor tripped, it had grown quite dark so the +schooner's great side-lights of red and green were +filled, lit, and lashed to the foremast shrouds, for, +with so many boats around them every caution must +be taken to avoid running one down, or being run +down themselves. The crew was divided into three +watches. Of which Walter was to have charge of +the first, from eight to twelve o'clock. Charley to +have command of the second, or middle watch, from +twelve to four o'clock, while the captain would take +the third, or morning watch, from four to eight +<span class="smcap">A. M.</span></p> + +<p>The breeze held steady and strong and the night +passed away without any exciting incident.</p> + +<p>The boys were up again at first peep of day, expecting +to have to start out with the diving boat as +soon as the sun arose. But, when they gained the +deck, they found the "Beauty" still swinging along +on her course and the captain pacing the deck +greatly perplexed.</p> + +<p>"It's mighty queer, but thar ain't one of the fleet +in sight," he exclaimed as he caught sight of the lads. +"I don't understand it at all. Go aloft, Charley, an' +see if you can see any of them."</p> + +<p>The lad swung himself into the shrouds and made +his way up to the mainmast cross trees, but, although +he gazed all around, his eyes met nothing but the +broad expanse of the blue sparkling waters.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Maybe we've run them all out of sight during +the night," he suggested when he regained the deck, +but the old sailor shook his head.</p> + +<p>"The 'Beauty's' mighty fast, but she's not +speedy enough to do that," he declared. "Some of +those schooners were ten miles ahead of us when we +started. Besides, I shortened sail as soon as I took +my watch, because I did not want to get in the lead."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we have dropped away behind the rest," +Walter said, but the others knew that that was impossible. +The "Beauty" was far too fast a boat to +be left so far behind.</p> + +<p>The Captain examined the log. "We have come +a hundred and ten miles," he said. "Do you reckon +either of you boys could have made a mistake in the +course during your watch?"</p> + +<p>"We didn't vary a quarter of a point from the +direction you gave during my four hours," Charley +declared. "I kept watch of the compass most of +the time and the needle held steady at North."</p> + +<p>"I was careful about that, also," Walter said. +"We were headed exactly North during my entire +watch."</p> + +<p>"Well, that compass is true," the captain declared. +"I tested it carefully before we left port. I reckon +thar's only one explanation; the fleet must have +changed their course during the night. We'd better +heave-to until noon when I can take the sun an' tell +exactly where we are at. It ain't no use trying to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span> +pick up the fleet again, now they are out of sight—it +would be like hunting for a needle in a hay stack."</p> + +<p>The crew were immediately set to taking in sail +and in a few minutes the little ship was lying head +to the wind under reefed foresail sail.</p> + +<p>When the noon hour drew near, Captain Westfield +brought his instruments on deck and prepared to +take an observation of the sun. As soon as he secured +it he went below to work out their position on +the chart.</p> + +<p>When he reappeared his face wore a very puzzled +expression. "Heave the lead and find out how +deep the water is an' what kind of bottom," he said, +briefly.</p> + +<p>Charley took the lead, a heavy cone-shaped piece +of lead, slightly hollowed at the bottom, and with a +long line attached to the small end. Filling the +hollow end with soft soap, he dropped the lead over +the side and let it sink until it struck the bottom. +Then he pulled it aboard again, noting carefully the +water mark on the line and examining the soap to +which some particles of the bottom had adhered.</p> + +<p>"Depth, six fathoms, (36 feet) bottom, soft gray +mud," he announced.</p> + +<p>The captain strode back to the compass and stared +at it with a puzzled frown on his face.</p> + +<p>"We're forty miles from where we should be," +he said as the boys gathered around him, "Sure<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span> +neither of you boys made a mistake in the course last +night?"</p> + +<p>"Sure," declared both lads positively.</p> + +<p>The four puzzled over the strange situation in +silence for several minutes. Then the captain with +his knife loosened the screws and removed the compass' +face of glass.</p> + +<p>"I wonder how that got there," he suddenly exclaimed.</p> + +<p>Cunningly placed, so as to draw the magnetic +needle West of North was a small bright iron nail.</p> + +<p>"It couldn't have got there by itself," Charley +declared, excitedly. "It must have been put there +by someone while we were all at supper last night."</p> + +<p>"I guess there is no doubt as to who that someone +was," with an inclination of his head towards +Manuel who, standing a little ways off was watching +them closely. The Greek, as soon as he saw the +attention he was receiving, turned and strolled carelessly +forward.</p> + +<p>The captain pondered gravely, "I don't see +what his object was," he said, at last. "If we held +on that course long it would only have carried us +further out into the Gulf, so he couldn't have been +aiming to get us wrecked."</p> + +<p>"He planned to get us separated from the fleet," +Charley declared. "Do you think we could find it +again, captain?"</p> + +<p>The old sailor shook his head. "There's no telling<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span> +where we are now," he said, gloomily, "we +might hunt for days without coming across them. +If that fellow did put that nail there to make us lose +them, he's succeeded all right."</p> + +<p>"What had we better do, captain?" Walter +asked, anxiously.</p> + +<p>"Well, we aint got no real proof that the fellow +put that nail thar so we can't do anything with him. +It might have been in thar all the time, though I'm +willing to take an oath that the compass was true +when we left port. Thar ain't much chance of picking +up the fleet again an' I don't reckon we'd better +waste time trying it. The lead shows we are still +on the sponge banks an' I reckon we'd best just get +to work, say nothing, an' keep a close watch on that +oil Greek chap."</p> + +<p>The "Beauty" was anchored accordingly, sails +lowered and furled, and everything made snug. As +soon as that was done, the boys ordered their crew +into the diving boat and, running out a little ways +from the schooner, gave the signal to resume the +diving operations.</p> + +<p>By sheer accident, they had chanced upon a spot +rich in sponges and the lads watched with satisfaction +the steady reappearance of the lowered basket.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER X.<br /> + +<small>A RASH RESOLVE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> boys watched Manuel closely throughout the +entire afternoon, but they could detect nothing +amiss in his manner or actions. He did his work +willingly and cheerfully, humming a tune most of +the time, apparently he was at peace with himself +and the world.</p> + +<p>They were not the only ones who watched the +Greek closely. Whenever the lads glanced at the +handsome sailor, they found him gazing intently +at the suspected man, much as a cat watches a +mouse, ready to spring at its slightest movement.</p> + +<p>The boys kept well apart from the crew, watchful +for any threatened outbreak on their part. But the +men seemed so cheerful, willing and contented that +they soon grew ashamed of their distrust.</p> + +<p>Once the handsome sailor approached them +respectfully, hat in hand, and, halting before them, +spoke rapidly in a low voice. The lads shook their +heads to show that they did not understand, and, +with a look of helpless resignation on his face, the +fellow returned to his work.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I wish we could understand what he says," +Charley said, wistfully. "He, evidently, has something +important he wishes to tell us."</p> + +<p>"We will be able to make out what he says before +long," Walter said, cheerfully. "We are learning +lots of new words every day."</p> + +<p>"Yes, we are getting along pretty well," his chum +agreed, "but we are not picking up the language near +as well as Chris. It's really wonderful how fast he +is learning."</p> + +<p>The little negro and the Greek boy had become +great friends and Chris, naturally quick witted, was +learning with astonishing rapidity to talk to his new +chum.</p> + +<p>"It's the best day we've had yet," Charley declared +as they returned to the schooner in the evening. +"We have got as many sponges this afternoon +as we have during any entire day."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield was elated over their success. +"It's turned out all right after all," he said. +"We've stumbled upon a mighty rich part of the +banks, an' I reckon, we ain't lost the fleet either, +as we feared, thar's some twenty sails coming up +from the South'ard."</p> + +<p>The vessels, which the boys had not noticed before, +were approaching rapidly, coming before the +stiff breeze. Before dark settled down, they were +plainly visible but the eager watchers could not +recognize any of them, they seemed larger schooners<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span> +than any they had seen in the fleet. The strangers +anchored for the night near the "Beauty" and the +captain got out his night glass and studied them +carefully.</p> + +<p>"They ain't any of the fleet," he declared with +keen disappointment. "They're Spanish smacks +from Cuba. They fish around this coast regularly +every season."</p> + +<p>"Well, they'll be some company, anyway, as long +as they stay near us," Charley said, cheerfully. "I +can speak Spanish if I can't Greek, we can go over +and call on them in the morning. I'd like to go +to-night, but I feel too tired out to move."</p> + +<p>Soon after supper, Manuel approached Captain +Westfield, respectfully.</p> + +<p>"We would like to go aboard the schooners, if +you will permit," he requested. "We are nearly out +of tobacco and the Cubans always carry a lot for +which we can trade."</p> + +<p>The old sailor thought for a few minutes. "You +can go," he said, shortly, "you an' one man. Take +the dingy. I don't want the diving boat used. An' +be sure you're back aboard early."</p> + +<p>The Greek thanked him effusively for the permission, +and, calling one of his shipmates, the two got +the schooner's little boat over the side and sculled +away for the nearest smack.</p> + +<p>"They have got plenty of tobacco," growled the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span> +captain, as soon as the two were out of hearing. +"Thar was enough sent aboard at Tarpon to last +them for months. I reckon he's figuring on deserting, +that's why I let him go. I'd be willing to lose +the boat and the other man to be well rid of him."</p> + +<p>It seemed that the old sailor was correct for when +eight o'clock came Manuel had not returned.</p> + +<p>"After what happened last night, I don't reckon +it's wise to leave the deck alone," the captain said as +the boys prepared to retire to their bunks. "One +of us had ought to keep watch to see that no one +monkeys with the wheel or compass."</p> + +<p>Walter offered to take the first watch from eight +to twelve, and, leaving him pacing back and forth +aft of the mainmast, the others retired to rest.</p> + +<p>Charley was awakened by a vigorous shaking and +his chum's voice calling to him to get up.</p> + +<p>"My watch so soon," grumbled the lad sleepily, +"Seems like I just got to sleep."</p> + +<p>"It's only eleven o'clock," said Walter in excited +tones, "but Manuel came aboard an hour ago very +drunk. He must have brought liquor with him for +they are all raising merry Ned in the forecastle now. +The captain and Chris are on deck. Hurry up, +there's likely to be trouble any minute."</p> + +<p>Charley slipped hastily into his clothing and securing +his revolver ran on deck. His three companions +with revolvers in their hands were ranged across +the deck just aft of the mainmast. From the forecastle,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span> +forward, came an uproar of shouting, cursing, +and fighting.</p> + +<p>The old sailor was blaming himself, bitterly. +"I'd ought to have thought of it," he exclaimed, +"Auguident is cheap as water in Cuba an' those +smacks always carry a lot of it to trade off for other +things. What an old fool I was."</p> + +<p>"What shall we do?" Charley asked.</p> + +<p>"Nothing, but let 'em fight it out amongst themselves +an' keep 'em from crowding aft on us. Our +lives wouldn't be worth a pinch of snuff if we went +down to quiet them. If any of 'em tries to come aft +of the mainmast, shoot him."</p> + +<p>The words were hardly out of his mouth when +a figure burst out of the forecastle and came running +aft followed by several others staggering, shouting +and cursing.</p> + +<p>The captain raised his pistol and took deliberate +aim as the flying man drew near.</p> + +<p>"Stop, or I'll shoot," he commanded.</p> + +<p>Charley knocked aside his upraised arm. "Let +him pass," he cried, "it's the strange sailor, they +have been trying to kill him."</p> + +<p>The handsome fellow was bleeding from a dozen +knife wounds, and was breathing short and heavily. +As he reached the little party of chums, he turned +about and faced his pursuers. It was evident that +he did not lack courage.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span></p> + +<p>The pursuing Greeks stopped short at sight of the +little band stretched across the deck with leveled +revolvers. For a minute they seemed about to dash +forward regardless of consequences, but, after a +moment's hesitation, with a volley of curses they +turned and slunk back to the forecastle. They were +yet sober enough to realize the danger of open +mutiny.</p> + +<p>"I don't think they'll try to bother us," said the +captain with a sigh of relief. "They ain't drunk +enough for that yet, an' I reckon they've about +drank up all their liquor by now. It wouldn't last +long amongst so many of them."</p> + +<p>The strange sailor had sunk to the deck in a dead +faint, and, leaving the boys to guard the deck, the +Captain and Chris carried him below, and, laying +him in one of the bunks, hurried back to their companions.</p> + +<p>"He ain't going to die," the old sailor informed +them. "He's just weak from loss of blood. I +didn't take time to look him over close, but I +counted nineteen knife cuts on his body an' likely +thar's some I didn't notice."</p> + +<p>"We will have to keep him back aft with us. +They would likely kill him if we sent him back to +the forecastle, for he is unable to defend himself +now," Charley said, and his chums agreed with him.</p> + +<p>The uproar in the forecastle continued for a long +time then gradually subsided. Evidently, the crew<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span> +had disposed of the last of the liquor and its effects +were slowly wearing off.</p> + +<p>Not until four o'clock, however, did the last noise +cease, and the little party of chums remained on +deck until the sun rose, ready for any violence from +the drunken Greeks. Daylight found them pale and +tired from their long, anxious vigil.</p> + +<p>"Better go below, lads, and have a good nap," +the captain advised. "They have all quieted down +and there is no danger of trouble for the present. +They are going to feel mighty sick and weak from +the drink."</p> + +<p>"I'm not going to give them a chance to sleep +off their bad feelings," declared Charley, grimly. +"My crew have got to turn to and work as usual. +I'm going to turn them out as soon as Ben awakes."</p> + +<p>When the little Greek lad appeared, looking pale +and frightened, Charley sent him below to rouse +Manuel.</p> + +<p>The lad, apparently, did not relish the task but he +went, and, after a long time, reappeared accompanied +by the Greek.</p> + +<p>Manuel plainly showed the effects of the liquor. +He looked sick and haggard and one eye was much +discolored from a blow he had received. He was +ready, however, with an excuse for the night's disorder. +"I did my best to stop the noise and trouble, +and it was thus I received a blow in the eye."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You were drunk when you came aboard," +accused Walter.</p> + +<p>"I took a drink on the schooner," admitted +Manuel, "only one little drink. It was foolish, for +I am unused to liquor and it went to my legs, but my +head was clear. I regret the disorder of the others."</p> + +<p>There was no doubt in the minds of the captain +and the boys that he was really the author of all +the trouble, but they could not prove it and Charley +dismissed him with a curt command to call the crew.</p> + +<p>They were a sick-looking crowd when they were +at last collected on deck. All showed the effect of +the liquor and many were the black eyes and bruised +faces. Their fighting humor seemed to have departed, +however, and they went about their tasks +quietly, sullenly, and listlessly.</p> + +<p>After they had finished their morning coffee, +Charley ordered his crew into the diving boat and +set out for the spot where they had found so many +sponges.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XI.<br /> + +<small>A MYSTERY.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> two boys kept well apart from the crew, +and watched closely for any signs of threatened +trouble, but, although the men looked sullen and +ugly enough for any kind of act, they seemed much +subdued and went about their tasks quietly saying +little, even to each other.</p> + +<p>"I guess we are giving ourselves a lot of worry +without cause," Walter remarked, softly. "Those +fellows seem quiet enough now. It was the liquor +that made them act as they did last night, but they +have drank it all up now and I do not believe we will +have any more trouble with them."</p> + +<p>"I wish I could agree with you," his chum said, +gravely, "but I can't. I believe in the old Latin +proverb—'in vino veritas'—there is truth in wine. +I've always noticed that when a man gets intoxicated, +he reveals just the kind of man he really is. +If he is naturally quarrelsome when sober he is sure +to want to fight when drinking. If he is good-hearted +and kind when sober, he is generally good-humored<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span> +when drunk. Liquor seems to destroy +a man's caution and make him reveal his real character. +Now these fellows showed plainly their feelings +towards us last night when they were drinking. +To-day they are sober and more cautious, but +I believe they feel just the same towards us. It +only needs some real or fancied wrong to bring their +hatred to the surface again. I believe if we had a +clash with one of them now we would have a first-class +mutiny on our hands; but, I guess, we had +not better do any more whimpering. They will +suspect that we are discussing them and it will not +improve matters any."</p> + +<p>For awhile the sponges came up from below every +half hour, but towards noon a full hour went by +without the basket making its appearance. The +lads, at last, became somewhat alarmed at the delay.</p> + +<p>"Do you suppose they are in any trouble down +below?" Charley enquired of Manuel.</p> + +<p>The Greek shook his head. "They would have +signaled if anything had been wrong. There, they +are signaling now."</p> + +<p>There came several jerks on the life-lines and the +Greeks in charge of them pulled the divers up and +into the boat. The men had been below for only an +hour and the boys were puzzled to account for their +coming up before their time had expired. When +their head-pieces were removed the lads could see +that the divers were greatly excited. They spoke<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span> +rapidly to those around them, and a hum of excited +conversation arose from the before listless crew.</p> + +<p>"What's the matter?" Charley demanded of +Manuel, who seemed to be the most excited of all.</p> + +<p>"It is nothing," was the quick reply. "The men +grew faint for a minute but they will be all right +soon. That often happens to one when diving."</p> + +<p>The Greek's excitement was too great for such a +trivial cause and Charley decided promptly that he +was lying.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the divers resumed their head-pieces +and prepared to descend again. As they +stood on the ladders one of the crew handed one of +them a coil of light rope to the end of which was +attached a piece of light wood.</p> + +<p>"What does he want with that buoy?" Charley +demanded, sharply.</p> + +<p>"There's a bad hole in the bottom which he +wishes to mark so that there will be no danger of his +blundering into it," replied Manuel promptly, but, +again, Charley decided that the fellow was lying.</p> + +<p>"There's something in the wind," he remarked +to Walter. "The crew seem greatly excited, and +Manuel, I am sure, is lying."</p> + +<p>A strange change had suddenly taken place in the +crew's manner. Before, they had been silent, sullen +and listless, now, they were animated, their eyes +glittered with excitement, and they chattered back +and forth like so many magpies.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span></p> + +<p>Manuel evidently noticed that the boys were +watching them closely, for he addressed them in a +low tone and their chattering ceased. They resumed +their work with something like a return of their +former manner, but it was easy to see that their +sullenness was now assumed.</p> + +<p>The lads turned their attention to the course the +diver was taking, and watched for the appearance +of the buoy which would show the whereabouts of +the bad place on the bottom. The bit of wood soon +floated into view not a hundred feet from the boat.</p> + +<p>Apparently, the divers were still suffering from +their faintness, for it was a long time after they +descended before the first basket load of sponges +appeared, and it was nearly an hour before the +second one was hoisted aboard.</p> + +<p>"We are not getting many to-day," Walter +grumbled. "If we don't do better pretty soon, we +had better move and try another place."</p> + +<p>"There is something queer doing," Charley declared. +"Just watch those life-lines and see what +you make of it."</p> + +<p>The ropes which were fastened to the divers +showed plainly the direction taken by the men below. +The lines were kept faintly taut to permit of the +signals being clearly felt, and their slant gave an +accurate idea of just where the divers were working.</p> + +<p>Walter watched for awhile, a puzzled frown +gathering on his face.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Why," he exclaimed, "they are right on that +bad part of bottom, and they haven't stirred for the +last fifteen minutes."</p> + +<p>The lads continued to watch the tell-tale lines. +For another fifteen minutes the ropes remained +motionless, then from their twitching it became +evident that the divers were once more moving +around. In a short time thereafter, the usual signal +was given and two baskets of sponges were hoisted +up.</p> + +<p>"That's got me puzzled," said Charley, as the +peculiar performance was repeated. "I guess we +had better appear not to have noticed it. The crew +is not looking at us in a very friendly way."</p> + +<p>The attitude of the Greeks seemed to be growing +hostile. Many were the unfriendly glances they cast +at the two lads and the boys could hear their names +repeated in the low-toned conversation going on.</p> + +<p>The two lads retired to the bow where, though +they effected to be taking their ease, they kept on the +alert for the first signs of trouble.</p> + +<p>Though nothing happened to further arouse their +fears, it was a trying situation and both were glad +when the time came to return to the schooner.</p> + +<p>They found the captain and Chris both tired from +a hard day's labor cleaning sponges. The wounded +sailor was sitting back by the wheel, looking somewhat +pale and haggard, but not a great deal the +worse for his many wounds.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span></p> + +<p>"His troubles' been sorter praying on his mind all +day," said the captain. "He got a hold of my pad +and pencil this morning an' he's been drawing +pictures of the fight and other things—here's one of +them."</p> + +<p>The old sailor produced a crumpled piece of +paper from his pocket.</p> + +<p>Walter examined the sketch closely. It was not +without a certain cleverness and was better than +one would expect of a humble sailor before the mast. +It depicted a struggle between two groups of men. +In one of the groups, the lad could recognize some +of the faces of the Greeks, who, armed with knives +and clubs, were assailing the other party. As the +lad bent over to examine the other group more +closely, he uttered an exclamation of surprise. At +first glance there was nothing startling about those +whom the Greeks were fighting, but a second glance +showed something familiar about the figures composing +it. He passed the sketch to Charley.</p> + +<p>"What do you make of it?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Why, that little group is intended to represent +us," his chum exclaimed. "See they are just four +in number. That big one with the beard is meant +for the captain and the little one for Chris, the other +two are you and I. Why, the likeness to us is quite +striking when you look at it closely."</p> + +<p>"I believe he intended this for a warning to us,"<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span> +Walter declared. "Where are the rest of the things +he drew, Captain?"</p> + +<p>"I threw them all away, I didn't reckon they +meant anything," the old sailor replied, regretfully.</p> + +<p>"Well, never mind," said Charley cheerfully, +"we will get him to draw them over again. He +seems a very intelligent fellow. I wish he could +talk so as to tell us what the crew are saying now. +Just look at him."</p> + +<p>The strange sailor was leaning forward listening +eagerly to the buzz of conversation going on between +the Greeks. The diving boat's crew seemed +to have conveyed the excitement under which they +had been laboring all day to their shipmates who +had remained aboard the schooner. Groups of two +or three were gathered here and there, talking +eagerly together.</p> + +<p>Walter called the little Greek lad to him.</p> + +<p>"What are the men talking about, Ben?"</p> + +<p>The little fellow hesitated before replying. It +was plain that he was greatly troubled and +frightened. "They talk about nothing much," he +stammered.</p> + +<p>Walter was pressing him with further questions +when his chum interfered.</p> + +<p>"It's hardly fair to make him tell," he said. +"It might cause him a lot of trouble. His uncle +is glaring at him now, as though he would like to +kill him."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span></p> + +<p>There was nothing to be learned by watching the +crew's actions, so, signing to the wounded sailor to +follow them, the four chums descended to the cabin +where the Greek cook had supper waiting for them.</p> + +<p>Charley was unusually quiet during the meal, but +when the Greek cook and Ben had at last retired +carrying the dishes with them, he arose and closed +the cabin door.</p> + +<p>"Captain," he said as he returned to his companions, +"I am going down in a diving suit to-morrow."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XII.<br /> + +<small>IN A DIVING SUIT.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> old sailor stared at Charley as though he +feared the lad had taken leave of his senses.</p> + +<p>"Why, you must be crazy," he exclaimed. "You +don't know anything about that kind of diving."</p> + +<p>"I fancy there is not much to learn about it," +Charley replied. "I've been watching the divers +closely and it appears very simple. The main thing +seems to be to keep the air hose clear. I've been +wanting to go down ever since the first day, and +the strange way the crew have acted to-day has +decided me to try it. I want to see what it is that +has so excited them."</p> + +<p>"It's a fool notion and I ain't going to let you +do it," the captain stormed, but Charley only +grinned, cheerfully.</p> + +<p>"It's no use scolding, Captain, I've quite made +up my mind to try it. I've been thinking it over the +whole day."</p> + +<p>"I say you sha'n't do it," roared the old sailor. +"I'll put you in irons first, I'm captain of this +schooner."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span></p> + +<p>"But I'm captain of the diving boat," Charley +reminded him with a grin, "If anyone interferes +with my doings on my own ship it's mutiny, you +know."</p> + +<p>"Walt, say something to get him out of that fool +notion," pleaded the old sailor, helplessly.</p> + +<p>Walter turned to his chum with a twinkle in his +eye, "If you go down, I'm going too," he said, +decidedly.</p> + +<p>"You're two young lunatics," the captain declared, +wrathfully. "You're bound to always run +yourselves into danger whenever you get a show. +Neither one of you will ever live to see twenty."</p> + +<p>But, although he fumed and threatened for a long +time, the matter ended, as was always the case +when the boys had determined upon a thing, in +his, at last, giving a grudging consent to their plan.</p> + +<p>Chris had followed his little friend Ben on deck +as soon as he finished his supper, but soon after the +discussion was ended he returned below grumbling.</p> + +<p>"Dat white child ain't no fitten company to-night," +he declared. "He acts plum scart to death +an' won't talk none tall."</p> + +<p>"You go up and stay around the wheel, 'till we +come up," the captain ordered. "I thought you were +there all the time or I'd been up myself, I don't want +none of those fellows fooling around the compass."</p> + +<p>When Chris had retired, still grumbling, Walter +brought out a pad and pencil and handed them to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span> +the sailor who had been watching their faces closely +during their animated debate.</p> + +<p>The man seized them eagerly and bending over +the pad began to draw slowly with awkward, clumsy +fingers. When the sketch was finished he tore off +the sheet of paper and handed it to Charley whom +he seemed to recognize as the real leader of the +little party.</p> + +<p>The lad examined the sketch with eager interest. +"He must be a very cheerful sort of fellow," he +remarked, as he passed it to his chum. "First, he +prophesies a fight with the crew, and, now, he has +got us all shipwrecked. Can't say much for his skill +with the pencil though; that hulk does not look +much like our pretty 'Beauty'."</p> + +<p>The rude sketch pictured a forlorn, dismasted +wreck, covered with seaweed and with one side +badly stove in.</p> + +<p>The sailor had immediately commenced upon another +picture which he soon passed over.</p> + +<p>The boys looked it over but could not decide what +it was intended to represent.</p> + +<p>"It looks like a box full of crackers," Charley +said with a grin. "Well, if he's decided to have us +shipwrecked, it's thoughtful of him to provide us +with something to eat."</p> + +<p>But the sailor did not seem to regard it as any +laughing matter. He watched their expressions<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span> +with a face full of concern, and, when Walter shook +his head to show that he did not understand the +sketch, he laid aside the pad with a heavy sigh.</p> + +<p>"He has given it up," Charley said. "We had +better go to bed, I guess we have a hard day ahead +of us to-morrow."</p> + +<p>Chris was recalled from the deck and Walter +took his place while the others turned into their +bunks and were soon fast asleep. At midnight he +awakened Charley and at four o'clock Charley was +relieved by the captain. The watches passed away +without any alarm, but one thing struck both of +the lads as being curious. All during their watches +three or four of the Greeks remained on deck instead +of seeking their bunks as they usually did right +after eating supper. They sat around up by the +forecastle smoking and talking quietly together and +the boys came to the conclusion that they were +merely wakeful from the effects of the liquor they +had drank the night before.</p> + +<p>The boys looked longingly at the tempting breakfast +served by the Greek cook, but as they had +decided to make the descent to the bottom that +morning they were obliged to be content with a cup +of coffee.</p> + +<p>The captain and Chris followed them aboard the +diving boat. "We're going with you," the old +sailor explained. "It's a risky thing you're planning +to do an' I'd be too nervous and anxious about<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span> +you to stay on the schooner. She will be all right +without us for a little while."</p> + +<p>Manuel seemed to note the presence of the captain +and Chris with satisfaction. Before the boat was +shoved off from the schooner, he called the cook +to the rail and conversed with him a few minutes in +low tones.</p> + +<p>But his satisfaction changed to frowning anger +when the boys began to don the diving suits.</p> + +<p>"You are foolish to attempt to go down, young +sirs," he said, angrily. "It is dangerous, very +dangerous."</p> + +<p>"We are the only ones at all likely to suffer," +Charley replied shortly. "Tend strictly to your +pumping, when we think we need advice, we will ask +you for it."</p> + +<p>Before his head-piece was adjusted, he found +opportunity to whisper to Walter. "We won't be +able to talk when we get below, so I want you to +follow me and do just what you see me do."</p> + +<p>"I will," promised his chum. "My, don't these +things feel queer. I can hardly lift my feet, they +are so heavy. They make me feel helpless as a +little baby."</p> + +<p>The divers adjusted the helmets to the lads' heads +and, assisting them to the rail, helped them down +the ladder, and lowered them gently to the bottom.</p> + +<p>Charley laughed to himself as he caught sight +of Walter in the clear water. His chum looked<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span> +like some strange monster in the grotesque diving +suit. He waved his hand to him and Walter placed +one great paw over his helmet where his mouth was +supposed to be, to show that he was endeavoring +politely to stifle a laugh.</p> + +<p>But the boys' merriment at each other's grotesque +appearance was quickly lost in admiration of the +strange scene about them.</p> + +<p>It was as though they were standing in the midst +of a beautiful garden. Here and there were patches +of soft white bottom, like winding paths amongst +the marine growth. On every side of the bare places +rose lace-like sea fans of purple, yellow, and red, +and feather-like sea plumes swaying gently to and +fro to the motion of the water caused by the lads' +descent. At their bases lay scattered multitudes of +shells of every conceivable shape, size, and hue, +while, towering far above the riot of color, rose +mighty trees of snow-white coral among the +branches of which hovered golden, silver, crimson, +and every shade of fish, great and small, their fins +flashing gracefully as they darted to and fro.</p> + +<p>For some moments, the lads stood motionless +drinking in the beauty of the wonderful garden, but +they had not descended merely to admire and +Charley, after a long look around, hauled gently on +the life-line until he had some hundred feet coiled +neatly at his feet. Walter, though not comprehending +his chum's plan, followed his example. The<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span> +ruse was to serve a two-fold purpose, first to lead +those on the diving boat to think that the two were +a considerable distance from the boat, and, second, +to deceive them as to the real direction taken by +those below.</p> + +<p>As soon as Walter had got his life-line neatly +coiled down, Charley turned at right angles from +the spot and moved slowly forward for the place +where he calculated lay the supposed bad place in +the Gulf's bottom.</p> + +<p>He was surprised to find that he could walk with +perfect ease and comfort. The suit, which had been +so heavy and cumbersome above the surface, now +rested on him lightly as a feather. He could have +walked with considerable speed had it not been for +the care he had to take to keep his life-line free and +clear from the numerous branches of coral. He +watched Walter anxiously to see that he used the +same care with the rope upon which their very lives +depended and he was relieved to see that his chum +used every possible precaution.</p> + +<p>Although the water was clear as crystal, neither +lad could see far ahead at that depth below the +surface for it was too far for the sun's light to +penetrate brightly. Charley was almost upon the +rope with its floating buoy above before he perceived +it. He moved forward now with the greatest +caution for, if Manuel's statement was true, a hasty +step might plunge him suddenly into a nasty hole or<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span> +a dangerous patch of quicksand. But the bottom +did not seem any different from that over which +they had passed. The rope was fastened to a +branch of coral where there was no indication of +a hole or quicksand, but, a little beyond where the +rope was fastened, the lad could see dimly a large +black mass rising up from the bottom. Towards it +he slowly made his way, followed by his chum.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XIII.<br /> + +<small>A CLOSE CALL.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Charley's</span> eyes were becoming accustomed to +the semi-gloom and a few steps forward gave him a +clear view of the dark object. One glance, and he +turned to his chum with a cry which was lost in his +muffling helmet.</p> + +<p>Before the two lads lay the wreck of a once +stately ship, her masts broken short off and a great +gaping hole in her side. She had evidently lain +long in her bed amongst the coral and sponges for +long tendrils of sea moss streamed out from her +barnacle-covered sides.</p> + +<p>Someone had been there before them for the +moss and marine growth had been scraped from the +vessel's stern revealing the name, "Golden Hope".</p> + +<p>Charley turned from the spelling out of the +indistinct letters to see his chum beckoning to him +wildly and he hurried to his side.</p> + +<p>Walter was stooping over an opened box partly +filled with what had once been shining gold pieces +but which were now tarnished and almost unrecognizable<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span> +in their coat of gray slime. The box had +been recently torn open as was evident from the +freshly-splintered wood.</p> + +<p>Charley sat down on the box's edge and did some +rapid thinking. The crew's excitement was now +accounted for. They had not come upon a rich +bed of sponges as he had suspected but had discovered +a treasure such as men for ages have fought, +struggled, and died to attain. The half emptied +box showed that the divers had already begun to remove +the gold. For a moment, the lad was puzzled +to know how they had been able to bring up what +was missing without its being seen. There were no +pockets to the diving suits and they could have +carried but a few pieces at a time in their closed +hands. A moment's reflection, however, brought +him to the only possible explanation; the gold must +have been sent up in the sponge basket hidden +amongst the lumps of mud from which it could +have been removed by the crew without much risk +of discovery. But it was not the removal of the +gold which gave the quick-witted lad the most concern. +The amount taken by the Greeks was likely +but a mere trifle when compared with that which remained. +It was the effects the discovery of such a +treasure would have upon an already unruly crew +that he feared. As he had said to Walter but the +day before, he believed it needed but a trifle to fan +the Greeks' growing discontent into open mutiny.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span> +Here was riches enough to tempt the most steady +band of sailors and it was but reasonable to suppose +that it would tempt the lawless Greeks to deeds of +violence and bloodshed. These thoughts surged +through the lad's mind in far less time than it has +taken to tell of them. He would have liked to have +talked the matter over with his chum and settled +upon the wisest plan to follow, but that was impossible +below the surface and signs were useless to +convey exact ideas. He must decide alone upon +their immediate course of action and trust to +Walter's quick wit to fall in with what he decided +upon.</p> + +<p>Arising he turned to his chum and laid one finger +across his lips. Walter nodded his ponderous head-piece +to show that he understood the sign for silence +regarding their discovery.</p> + +<p>Taking up his sponge basket, Charley retraced his +steps to the spot where they had descended followed +by his observant chum. Here the sponges grew in +abundance and he at once began to fill his basket, +an example which Walter immediately followed.</p> + +<p>As he bent over to tear up an unusually large +sponge he became suddenly sensible of an agitation +of the water near him. Straightening up, he stood +frozen to his tracks with fear and horror. Not ten +feet from where he stood lay a gigantic shark, its +belly gleaming white through the clear water. Its +little green eyes were fixed upon him with a wicked<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span> +unblinking stare. He let the basket drop from his +grasp and flung up his arms with an unreasoning +instinct to protect his head from the impending +attack. At his sudden movement the great fish +darted away. Evidently, it was equally as +frightened of the strange unknown monster it had +encountered.</p> + +<p>The shock had left the frightened lad weak and +trembling and he had to rest a few minutes before +he could resume the filling of his basket.</p> + +<p>As he placed the last sponge in the basket he +turned to signal to his chum to ascend, but Walter +was already gone, his figure, grotesque in the diving +suit, was already well up from the bottom and +shooting up with astonishing swiftness. At the +same moment Charley became aware of a strange +sickening sensation. He was choking and gasping +for breath. Before he could realize what had happened +the frightful sensation had passed and he +was able to breathe fully and freely, and he felt +himself being pulled swiftly to the surface.</p> + +<p>In a moment he was hoisted above the surface, +hauled aboard the boat and his helmet removed. +The captain, white-faced and shaken was leaning +against the mast his revolver in his hand. Chris, +ashen-hued, and a sailor, was still pumping faintly. +Close beside the air pump lay Manuel in apparent +unconsciousness.</p> + +<p>"What's happened?" Charley cried.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Manuel keeled over in a fit or something," said +the captain, brokenly. "I thought you would both +be dead before we could get you to the surface. It +seemed ages before I could get Chris to the pump +and the fellows to hauling you up. They seemed +to move mighty slow 'till I threatened to shoot. +They maybe didn't understand what I said but the +sight of the gun made 'em more lively," he concluded, +grimly.</p> + +<p>Charley walked over to the prostrate Greek and +stood gazing down at his upturned face.</p> + +<p>"He has no business to faint when he's working +the air pump," he said savagely. "I guess I'll kick +him a good hard one in the face for punishment."</p> + +<p>The manly lad had no such intention of carrying +out such a brutal threat but he wanted to test +whether the treacherous Greek was, as he suspected, +really shamming.</p> + +<p>The prostrate man's features twitched, he sighed +heavily and rolled over on his side, Charley's suspicions +were confirmed.</p> + +<p>"Captain," said the lad distinctly, "if anything +happens to Walter and I when we are below the +surface, I want you to shoot this man without the +slightest hesitation. He is the only one who can +understand your orders and he must be made +responsible for our safety."</p> + +<p>"I'll shoot him the first time anything goes +wrong," the captain declared wrathfully, as he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span> +caught the wink of Charley's eye. "I feel like +killing him now, for the fright he gave me."</p> + +<p>The shamming Greek did not seem to relish this +threatening talk. He showed signs of surprisingly +rapid recovery. In a few minutes he was able to sit +up and look around.</p> + +<p>"I am overjoyed to find you both alive," he said +faintly to the two boys. "Everything grew suddenly +black before me when I was pumping and I +knew no more. It is my heart, it troubles me at +times. You young gentlemen must go down no +more, it is too risky."</p> + +<p>"We have had enough of it for to-day, but we +may try it again to-morrow," Charley replied, +cheerfully. "It is very beautiful and interesting +down below."</p> + +<p>"I hope you avoided the bad place on the +bottom," said the Greek, anxiously. "The divers +say it is a dangerous hole."</p> + +<p>"You must think we are fools to venture near +such a place," said Charley, indignantly, and the +man looked greatly relieved.</p> + +<p>Above all, the prudent lad wished to keep the +crew from thinking that he and Walter had come +upon the treasure. As long as they believed them +ignorant of its existence they would likely continue +the work of secretly removing it without open +violence.</p> + +<p>He could not talk over the matter with his chums<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span> +without danger of being overheard, and he was +forced to appear unconcerned and look on with indifference +while the divers sent up basket after +basket of sponges, in every load of which he was +convinced was hidden several hundred dollars of +the gold coins.</p> + +<p>He greatly admired Walter's manner. The lad +chattered over the beautiful gardens they had seen +below without a hint in his voice or manner of the +secret they had stumbled upon.</p> + +<p>From time to time the crew shot glances of scowling +suspicion at the little group, but they were +evidently reassured by the boys' cheerfulness and +apparent unconcern.</p> + +<p>It was like sitting beside a powder mine with a +lighted fuse in it, and both lads were greatly relieved +when the long day dragged away to its close +and the diving boat was headed back for the +schooner.</p> + +<p>They were met at the schooner's rail by the cook +who seemed greatly excited and who greeted them +with a torrent of rapidly spoken words.</p> + +<p>Manuel listened with a look of sadness, real or +assumed, on his face.</p> + +<p>"He says," he interpreted swiftly, "that the +wounded man went suddenly crazy this morning +and flung himself into the sea."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XIV.<br /> + +<small>THE DISCUSSION.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> chums looked at each other in silent comprehension. +There was not a doubt in the mind of +either that the sailor had been made away with during +their absence from the ship. They recalled +Manuel's talk with the cook before they left the +schooner and the look of satisfaction in his face +when he learned that they were all going on the +diving boat. Even the captain was not slow to grasp +the horrible truth.</p> + +<p>"It's a terrible business, but don't let on that you +suspect them," he whispered. "We've got to have +a long talk and decide what it's best to do." To +Manuel, he said, curtly, "I reckon, it's the fellow's +own business if he wanted to drown himself, so you +ain't got no cause to grieve. Better divide his +things up amongst the crew."</p> + +<p>Although they were eager for a talk alone, the +four lounged carelessly about the deck, striving to +appear unconcerned, until the Greek boy summoned +them to supper below. They talked cheerfully until<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span> +the cook had retired bearing the empty dishes with +him. Then Charley arose and noiselessly closed +the cabin windows and door so that their words +would not reach the deck. Returning to his seat, +he called the pale-faced little Greek lad to him, and, +resting his hand on his head, said kindly,</p> + +<p>"Ben, we are not going to repeat anything you +say to us, and we want you to tell us just what has +been troubling you the last few days."</p> + +<p>The little lad burst into tears, "They'll kill me," +he sobbed, "they'll kill me."</p> + +<p>"They will never know you told us," Charley +assured him. "We will never let anyone know you +told us."</p> + +<p>"They are going to kill you all," faltered the boy +as soon as he could control his sobs.</p> + +<p>"Why do they want to kill us," Charley questioned.</p> + +<p>"My uncle makes them mad. When you give +orders he adds lots of bad names and swear words +to them. He tells the crew that you always take +that sailor's part. He tells them you're going to +have them all put in jail when you get back to Tarpon. +He tells them you love that sailor and hate +Greeks."</p> + +<p>"But why did they hate that sailor so?" Walter +questioned.</p> + +<p>"He Turk," explained the lad. "Greeks hate +Turks."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span></p> + +<p>The chums glanced at each other in swift comprehension. +They knew of the deadly hatred that +existed between the two races. A hatred that had +led to the bitter war in which the Greeks had been +badly beaten. They understood now why the handsome +sailor had been shunned by all his shipmates. +They could see, too, how the wily Manuel had used +their defense of the man to arouse the crew's resentment +against them. The cunning Greek had woven +about them a net of lies which it would be impossible +to explain away.</p> + +<p>"Then they find gold," Ben continued, "that +makes them crazy. Manuel tells them to leave you +alone if you don't find out about the money, but kill +you if you do."</p> + +<p>"The infernal rascal," exploded the captain. +"He goes in irons and down in the hold to stay 'till +we get to port."</p> + +<p>"Don't do that!" cried the alarmed Greek lad. +"They kill you right off if you do."</p> + +<p>"One thing more," said Charley, as the little +fellow's tears began to flow afresh. "Who killed +that sailor?"</p> + +<p>But Ben did not know although it was evident +that he did not doubt that the man had been killed.</p> + +<p>Charley waited until the lad had dried his tears, +then let him go with the caution to tell none of the +crew that he had told them.</p> + +<p>"We are in the tightest fix of our lives," he declared,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span> +when Ben had gone. "It seems, from what +he says, that we are safe so long as they do not +suspect that we know anything about the gold but +I fancy that Manuel suspects that we have found it +and I do not believe we can count on their being +willing to let us reach port alive. The question is, +what had we better do."</p> + +<p>"I don't understand all this talk about gold," said +the captain.</p> + +<p>The boys hurriedly told of the discovery they +had made while the old sailor listened with sparkling +eyes.</p> + +<p>"Boys," he exclaimed, when their tale was concluded, +"you've found what will make rich men of +us all. I remember the excitement caused by the +loss of that ship. It happened twelve years ago. +For months tugs and steamers were scouring the +Gulf searching for her. She had cleared from New +Orleans for New York with two million dollars +in gold aboard."</p> + +<p>"She might as well contain two million toothpicks +so far as we are concerned," said Charley, +impatiently. "I'd give up every cent of it willingly +to be safe in port this minute."</p> + +<p>The captain, brought abruptly back to a realization +of their desperate situation, thought deeply for +several moments before he spoke. "We had ought +to be able to hold our own against them fellows," he, +at last, observed. "We are well armed and I don't<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span> +believe they have got any weapons except their sheaf +knives which ain't no good except at close quarters."</p> + +<p>"It is not open violence but treachery that I fear," +Charley explained. "We have had two samples already +of the way they work. First in that stoppage +of the air hose and, second, in the making away of +that sailor. No, that Manuel is too cunning a rascal +to risk open rebellion when he can accomplish his +ends without any personal risk."</p> + +<p>"Why not let them continue to get up the gold +and hide it as they have been doing?" Walter +suggested. "We can pretend that we do not know +what is going on. Then when we get to port we +can turn them over to the authorities and recover +the money without any trouble."</p> + +<p>Charley shook his head doubtfully. "That will +not do," he said. "I am as convinced as I am that +I am living, that we would never reach port alive. +Manuel is too wise to take any chances and he +knows that they could not remove such a large +amount of gold from the schooner without arousing +suspicion. I believe he has entrusted the crew to +spare us for the present only because he thinks that +some of the fleet might happen along and grow +curious if we were all missing. Besides, it is +doubtful if any of them know enough about navigation +to sail the 'Beauty' home. Us boys, he probably +will not hesitate to remove at any time if he can +give the act the appearance of accident, like what<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span> +occurred to-day. The captain, he will likely permit +to remain alive until near port. He will have a +long story made up to account for our disappearance +and the gold will likely be well hidden amongst the +ballast from where he can remove it without exciting +comment so long as we are not on board."</p> + +<p>The lad spoke confidently for he was putting himself +in the place of the cunning Greek and reasoning +just what he would do in a like position.</p> + +<p>"I've got it," exclaimed the captain in triumph. +"When they are asleep we'll batten down the forecastle +hatch on them and keep them there until we +get to port. We four can work the schooner in, I +guess."</p> + +<p>"I tell you, you don't realize what a cunning +rascal that fellow is," Charley declared in reluctant +admiration. "He has provided against just such +an attempt. I did not understand the reason for it +last night, but I noticed that all during my watch +on deck there were three or four men hanging +around the deck up forward. It's a great stake +they are playing for and they are not taking the +slightest chances."</p> + +<p>"I noticed the men hanging around," admitted +the captain, "but I didn't think much of it at the +time. Let's have your plan, if you've got one, lad."</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid we can't get out of this hole without +some violence and danger," Charley replied. "I +have been thinking over it all day and this is the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span> +only thing I can think of that seems to offer any +hope of success. First thing in the morning Walter +and I must descend to the wreck again and bring up +enough gold to pay off the men when we get to +port. It's a risky thing to do, but it is necessary to +carry out my plan. You see," he paused to explain, +"the men were shipped for three months and they +could demand pay for that time. We haven't got +the money and we have not gathered up enough +sponges yet to make up so large an amount. They +could tie the schooner up for their wages and make +us a lot of trouble and expense, a thing Manuel +would be sure to do."</p> + +<p>"But they have got a lot of gold which belongs to +us, already," Walter suggested.</p> + +<p>"We would have hard work to prove that it is +ours, and it would mean a lot of delay," replied his +chum quickly.</p> + +<p>"Go on with your plan, lad," said the captain, +who perceived that Charley had thought over all +sides of the question with his usual clearness.</p> + +<p>"After we have brought up the money. We will +use their own plan for bringing it up without its +being noticed—we will hang around and let them +go on with the work as usual all day, for it would +not do to fight it out on the diving boat. When we +get back to the schooner at night, we will bring +matters to a head. We will make them get up +anchor and sails and head back for Tarpon. There's<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span> +bound to be trouble and plenty of it but we'll be +prepared for it and Tarpon is only two days' sail. +What do you think of the plan?"</p> + +<p>He did not have to wait long for a chorus of +objections.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XV.<br /> + +<small>A DESPERATE PLAN.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">I don't</span> see that your plan is any better than +mine," Walter objected.</p> + +<p>"To tarry along while they remove the gold +would give them time enough to remove us one by +one," Charley replied, "While by doing as I have +suggested they will have but little chance for +treachery, and, although we will be sure to have +trouble with them as soon as we order them to get +up anchor, I think we can manage to keep the upper +hand of them for the short time it will take to +reach Tarpon."</p> + +<p>"Golly, dis nigger plum hates to run off an' lebe +all dat gole," Chris observed.</p> + +<p>"We'll come back for it," Charley declared. "As +soon as we have paid off the Greeks and got rid of +them, we'll pick a crew of Americans and hurry +back."</p> + +<p>"And while we are wasting time in getting a new +crew, the Greeks will have spread the news and a +dozen boats will be here before we can get back."</p> + +<p>"You forget that the captain is the only one who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span> +knows where we are by the latitude and longitude. +Without knowing that, fifty boats might hunt for +a month without seeing that little buoy. It would +be like looking for a needle in a haystack."</p> + +<p>"Hang that pesky Greek," exclaimed the captain. +"He asked me this morning for the schooner's position, +an' I gave it to him."</p> + +<p>Charley's face fell, "That fellow seems to think +of everything," he sighed. "But it's hard to get an +exact position by latitude and longitude alone, isn't +it, Captain?"</p> + +<p>"A navigator is lucky if he hits within four or +five miles of the place he's aiming for. Of course +it can be done if one is extra careful, but I could +not swear to our exact position on the chart now, +'though I reckon I could come within a couple of +miles of it."</p> + +<p>"Good," Charley exclaimed, "I guess, we can +make it impossible for them to find the wreck again, +if they should manage to get back before us. It +will mean a little change in my plan, though. +Instead of getting off to-morrow night, we will have +to wait until the next morning." He hastily outlined +his amended plan, which, after they had discussed +it carefully, his companions agreed was as +promising as any they could think of.</p> + +<p>They had hardly finished their discussion when +there came a knock at the cabin door and Manuel +entered, smiling.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I wished to enquire if the young gentlemen +intend to go down in the suits again to-morrow?" +he said, suavely.</p> + +<p>"We haven't decided yet," Charley said, carelessly, +"Why do you wish to know?"</p> + +<p>"Because, if you are, the air hose had better be +greased. If it is left dry for long the rubber sometimes +cracks and makes leaks."</p> + +<p>"Then have it well greased," the captain ordered.</p> + +<p>"I guess he's afraid of being shot if anything +happens, an' is taking every precaution," chuckled +the captain when the Greek had retired.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps," agreed Charley, doubtfully, "but, I +confess, I am afraid of that fellow. I'll certainly +look over that hose carefully before I go down to-morrow."</p> + +<p>When they ascended to the deck, which they had +forgotten to have watched in the excitement of their +discussion, they found Manuel and two of the +divers busily engaged in greasing the rubber air +hose with bacon slush from the cook's galley.</p> + +<p>Charley's was the first watch on deck and, long +after his companions had retired to their bunks, he +paced back and forth aft of the main mast pondering +thoughtfully over the plan he had suggested. +It was the best he could conceive under the circumstances +but he realized that its execution would be +attended with the gravest dangers. Most of all, he +dreaded the proposed descent to the bottom for the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span> +gold. He was convinced that Manuel had hit upon +some scheme to get rid of him and Walter without +danger to himself. Again and again the lad's +thoughts came back to the greasing of the hose. If +the operation was so important, why had the divers +not done it before—They were not the kind of men +to take any unnecessary risks in their dangerous +work below the surface. He had often noted the +care with which they had examined hose and pump +before each descent.</p> + +<p>But, while the lad puzzled over the matter, he did +not neglect to keep a watchful eye upon the three +or four Greeks who lingered on the forward deck. +If he had needed any reminder of the peril of their +situation, it would have been found in the sight of +those watchful, restless figures.</p> + +<p>Near the end of his watch, he gave vent to a low +exclamation—He had discovered the reason for +the greasing of the hose. For a few minutes he +was appalled by the cunning fiendishness which had +prompted the act. The two hoses lay coiled close +together in great heaps on deck. Sauntering over to +them, the lad stooped over each pile for a second, +then, straightening up, he resumed his slow steady +pacing.</p> + +<p>At midnight he awoke Walter to take his place. +"I've solved it," he told him.</p> + +<p>"Solved what?" asked Walter, sleepily.</p> + +<p>"Their reason for greasing the hose."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span></p> + +<p>"What is it?"</p> + +<p>"To attract sharks and lead them to bite it in +two."</p> + +<p>"The fiends!" Walter cried as the devilish +ingenuity of the plot dawned upon him. "What +are you going to do about it?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing, until we are ready to descend," his +chum replied, "then it will be too late for them to +practice another surprise for us."</p> + +<p>"Are you sure you are right," asked Walter, +doubtfully. "They are not sure that we are going +to descend, you know."</p> + +<p>"I think Manuel feels pretty confident that we +will. If we fail to do so, he likely will find some +excuse for replacing the greased hose with new ones. +You can bet, he's got it all figured out. He is the +brainiest villain I ever met up with. Better hurry +on deck now, and keep a close watch out. There's +no telling what other scheme he's got hatched up."</p> + +<p>Although he retired to his bunk at once, Charley +lay long awake. The morrow would be filled with +danger and his nerves were already growing tense +for the struggle which he foresaw. The Captain +had relieved Walter on deck before he at last fell +into a troubled slumber from which he awoke just +as day was beginning to break.</p> + +<p>By the time it was light enough to see, he was up +and dressed and making preparations for the carrying +out of his hazardous plan. From the lazerette,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span> +he procured a long coil of light rope which he +placed in one corner of his cabin. He next opened +up his valise and got out the ammunition he had +purchased in Tarpon and a small, but excellent +pocket compass. These he placed in his bunk where +they would be handy if needed quickly.</p> + +<p>When breakfast was over, the diving boat was +brought alongside and all got on board except the +cook and four men left to take care of the schooner +and clean the sponges gathered the previous day.</p> + +<p>"We have decided to go down and have one more +look at those sea gardens," Charley told Manuel +when the sponging ground was reached. "They are +beautiful enough to invite another visit."</p> + +<p>The Greeks' face expressed satisfaction. "They +are beautiful," he agreed, "but the young gentlemen +are rash to go down. Let the divers take the +risks—they are paid to do it."</p> + +<p>"We will be very careful," Charley said, cheerfully. +"Walt, we had better look over the hose +before we go down, the divers always do."</p> + +<p>The greased hose had been recoiled in the tubs +and the boys proceeded to overhaul them, foot by +foot, searching them closely for cracks or punctures.</p> + +<p>Walter was puzzled to comprehend his chum's +plan. After what he had discovered, surely he did +not intend to risk using the dangerous things, but he +was well enough acquainted with Charley's shrewdness +to hold his tongue and keep his face from betraying<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span> +his uneasiness. He felt sure that there was +a good reason for his chum's actions. He had but +just reached this decision when he came upon a +gapping hole in the hose. It looked much as though +it had been cut in two with a sharp knife.</p> + +<p>"Here's a bad place," he announced. "It's lucky +I found it. Air can't be pumped through this thing."</p> + +<p>"And here's a hole in mine, too," Charley declared +in accents so surprised that no one would +have dreamed that he had made both slits the night +before to serve as an excuse for the rejection of the +dangerous hose. "We can't use either one of them, +we'll have to get out the new hose."</p> + +<p>Manuel's face for a second was a picture of +bewilderment and baffled rage, but in a moment he +was again suave and smiling. "I don't see what +can have made those cuts," he declared. "They +can be patched in a few minutes, however. It would +be a pity to throw away such hose, it is as good as +new except for those two little places which can be +speedily fixed."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XVI.<br /> + +<small>TOO LATE.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">No</span> patched hose for me," Charley said, decidedly. +"If the divers want to risk using it, they +can."</p> + +<p>It was not just the reply the wily Greek had expected +and he hastened to answer.</p> + +<p>"You are right, it does not pay to take risks. +I will get the new hose and put it on."</p> + +<p>But Charley was ahead of him. He did not intend +to give the wily Greek any chance to play tricks +with the new hose. He brought it out from the +lockers in which it was kept and, after examining it +carefully connected it to the air pumps and helmets. +Before putting on his head-piece, he tried the air +pump also. It proved to be in perfect working order +and sent the air gushing through the hose. Manuel +fastened the life-line below his arms, but Charley +called the captain to adjust the heavy helmet over +his head.</p> + +<p>As soon as his feet touched the bottom, Charley +moved forward for the wreck, Walter at his side.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span> +Neither lad wished to remain below a second longer +than was necessary for they fully realized that they +were running a terrible risk in descending at all. +They found the box they had discovered the day +before entirely empty, the divers had brought another +out from the wreck's hold and broken it open. +The gold was in twenty dollar pieces and in a few +minutes the lads had transferred several hundred +dollars from the box to the baskets. It was hard to +resist taking more but the risks were too great to +permit it. Quickly hastening back to the patch of +sponges, they tore up several baskets full of the mud +and covered fungus and, making a slit in each with +their sheaf knives, stuffed in the coins. It was the +very plan the divers had followed but Charley had +decided that they would not be looking for the +adopting of their own trick. As soon as the last +coin was hidden and the loaded sponges placed in the +basket with others on top of them to complete the +load, Charley signed to Walter to ascend and stood +watching him until he had been drawn to the surface, +then he gave the signal to be drawn up himself. +He was raised a few feet up from the bottom then +he sank quickly back to the place from which he +had risen and he saw the end of the life-line dangling +in the water twenty feet above his head. <i>It +had been pulled loose from his body.</i></p> + +<p>Charley stood for a moment looking at it in +terrified dismay while his quick brain took in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span> +awful significance of his position. Frightened as he +was, he could not but admire the quickness with +which Manuel had hit upon another scheme for his +undoing after that of the greased hose, had failed, +for he had not a doubt that the Greek had fastened +the life-line to him in such a manner that it would +pull loose with a hard jerk. He was in no immediate +danger of death for the air hose still connected +him with the surface and the fresh air still +came gushing in a welcome stream into his helmet, +but a moment's reflection convinced him that this +was not all of Manuel's scheme, for the Greek would +know that the captain and Walter would soon become +uneasy over his delay and would start an +investigation which would quickly reveal that the +life-line was no longer attached to him. Clearly, +the Greek had another card up his sleeve which he +would soon play and Charley waited for it with +every nerve strained to keenest tension. He felt +longingly of the air hose, wondering if the frail tube +would hold for him to pull himself up to the surface +by it, but he quickly decided that it would not +stand the heavy strain and to break it would mean +his instant death. Keeping one eye on the life-line +so tantalizingly out of his reach he moved slowly +forward until he stood beneath the diving boat which +showed like a dim shadow above him. Suddenly a +thrill of horror went through him, the diving boat +was slowly drifting away—Manuel had played his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span> +trump card. In a flash the terror-stricken lad comprehended +the situation. Some one of the Greeks, +under Manuel's instructions, had stealthily severed +the cable, relying on the boat's slow drift being +unnoticed by the captain and Walter until it had +dragged apart the frail air hose. But, just as +Charley had given up all hope and waited for the +parting of the hose which would mean his death, the +dangling life-line was jerked up out of sight,—his +companions had discovered a part at least of his +plight—upon their next actions depended his life or +death.</p> + +<p>The next few seconds seemed like hours to the +helpless lad, then a dark speck appeared in the +water above him quickly growing in size until he +could see that it was Chris fighting his way downward +with long steady strokes and following the air +hose in his descent. The little negro was nearly exhausted +when he reached the bottom. Thrusting the +end of the line he had brought into Charley's hand, +he turned upward and shot to the surface like a +rocket. Charley whipped the line about his waist +and gave the signal to pull up. He was swiftly +pulled to the surface, hauled aboard the boat, and +his helmet removed. Chris, breathing heavily, was +standing by the mast, the water dripping from him. +Walter and the captain, pale with fear, stood close +beside him.</p> + +<p>"Thank God, you're safe, lad," cried the old<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span> +sailor, tears in his eyes. "We feared the air hose +would part before Chris could get to you. We had +just pulled on the life-line and found it had come +loose from you when we discovered the boat had +gone adrift. I reckon, she must have chafed her +cable in two against a sharp piece of coral. Queer +how everything happens all at once that way, sometimes."</p> + +<p>It was clear the simple old sailor did not suspect +that the trouble was anything but an accident, and +Charley hastened to reply,</p> + +<p>"All is well that ends well, but I've nearly had the +life scart out of me. I don't think I'll ever want to +go down again."</p> + +<p>He was watching Manuel closely as he spoke and +he noted with satisfaction the expression of relief +on the Greek's swarthy face. If he could only keep +him from thinking that he knew anything about the +gold and had not discovered his treachery, he hoped +to be able to avoid open violence until they were +prepared and ready for it. He was convinced that +the Greek was too cowardly to risk the danger of +being shot in open mutiny so long as he thought +himself unsuspected and free to scheme their removal +without danger to himself.</p> + +<p>The diving boat was worked back to her old +position, another anchor dropped, and donning their +suits the divers resumed operations below. When +they came to the surface at the end of their two hour<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span> +trick below they seemed strangely excited and conversed +eagerly with Manuel and the rest of the crew. +Charley was for awhile puzzled to account for their +excitement, but 'ere long the solution came to him. +Like all plans intended to deceive, his had contained +a fatal defect.</p> + +<p>"Walt," he whispered to his chum, "those chaps +have noticed that some of the gold has been removed +from that box. We are in for trouble, now, I fear." +The Captain and Chris were warned to be on their +guard but it seemed that the warning was unnecessary, +the excited talk amongst the crew soon ceased +and the fresh divers quietly prepared for their +descent.</p> + +<p>But in spite of the quietness, there was a tension +and earnestness in the crew's manner which made +the anxious little party of chums feel that they were +standing at the edge of a powder mine which might +explode at any minute.</p> + +<p>"I would rather have open fighting than this +awful waiting," Walter whispered.</p> + +<p>"We will have that soon enough," said his chum, +grimly. "It will come as soon as we try to make +them get the schooner under way."</p> + +<p>The long anxious day at last drew to its close, +anchor was got up on the diving boat, and she was +headed back for the schooner.</p> + +<p>As they passed a large piece of driftwood covered +with large black birds with very long necks, Manuel<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span> +pointed at them, "Those are fine eating," he said +wistfully. "If the young gentlemen could kill a few +it would give us all a great feast."</p> + +<p>Walter looked at Charley who nodded assent, for +he was not loath that the Greek should witness their +skill with the revolver.</p> + +<p>Both boys had practiced often with their revolvers +and were better than average marksmen. Their +pistols were automatics, a style of weapon with +which even the unskillful can shoot fairly accurately. +Walter fired six shots in as many seconds, killing +four birds and wounding one. Charley fired four +shots at the same time, killing two birds and crippling +a third. The rest of the birds took flight before +the boys could shoot more. The captain and +Chris emptied their pistols at the flying flock without +success.</p> + +<p>The diving boat was run alongside the dead birds +and they were picked up by the crew. Manuel +seemed delighted, "The young gentlemen are +wonderful shots," he declared.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XVII.<br /> + +<small>OUTWITTED.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> chums hastened below when the schooner +was reached for they were eager to talk over the +next move to be made.</p> + +<p>"Things have got to be brought to a head right +off," declared the captain when Charley had +acquainted him with his suspicions of Manuel's foul +play. "It's rank foolishness to linger along an' give +them more chances to work out their devilish tricks. +It's better to have trouble with them right now while +we are prepared than to wait and perhaps have +them take us unawares."</p> + +<p>"Thank goodness the time for action is close at +hand," Charley agreed, "I could not stand this +anxiety and suspense much longer. Let's go over +our plan once more and make sure that we each +know our parts so that there will be no hitch when +we come to carry them out. Now as soon as we +have supper Chris and I will get into the dingy and +pretend that we are going to row around for fun. +We will pull back and forth until it gets good and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span> +dark, then we'll gradually work out to that buoy. +We will cut it adrift, take it aboard, pull due East +from the schooner for a mile and anchor it again. +That will throw them way off the scent if they +should manage to get back here again before us, +while it will tell us just where to look for the wreck. +That part is easy, the trouble will come when we +get back to the boat. First thing we had better do +is to stretch several ropes across the deck from rail +to rail just forward of the mainmast. That will +delay and bother them if they should try to rush +us in a body. The next move will be to get Manuel +aft and get the irons on him. We had better get +him down here in the cabin to attempt that. As +soon as we get him helpless, we will carry him up +and make him give our orders to get up anchor and +get sail on the schooner. He's too great a coward +to encourage his shipmates to make a rush for us +so long as he is in our power. They may try it in +spite of him, however, when they realize that the +gold is going to be lost to them. If they do we will +have to fight them off while Chris tends to the wheel. +We don't want any bloodshed if we can help it but +we mustn't let them get aft of the mainmast, they +would make short work of us if it ever came to close +quarters. Do you all understand now what we have +to do?"</p> + +<p>His companions nodded.</p> + +<p>"Then we had better reload our pistols, fill up our<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span> +cartridge belts, and get ready," he continued. "I'll +get the ammunition."</p> + +<p>But in a moment he was back from his cabin, his +face pale and grave.</p> + +<p>"How many shells have you got left in your +pistol?" he demanded.</p> + +<p>"One," Walter replied, while Chris and the captain +broke open their weapons to show only empty +chambers.</p> + +<p>"I have got three shots left, that makes four altogether," +Charley said, hopelessly. "All the rest +of our ammunition has been stolen out of my bunk."</p> + +<p>His companions grew as grave and pale as himself +at the announcement. With only four shots left +they were practically helpless in the hands of the +Greeks.</p> + +<p>"There is just one chance left," Charley declared, +desperately. "We have got to get Manuel in +our power and try to control the crew through +him. It may work and it may not, but it's our only +hope. Chris, go tell him we want to see him here +in the cabin."</p> + +<p>As soon as the little negro had gone, Charley +brought out a pair of handcuffs from his grip and +placed them in his pocket. "When I give the signal, +get them on him," he said. "I'll lock the door so +that he cannot get out or the crew come to help him. +He'll likely put up a fight and we'll have to watch +out for his knife, but the three of us had ought to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span> +be able to handle him. But hush, here they come +now."</p> + +<p>Footsteps sounded on the companionway stairs, +the cabin door opened, and Chris appeared, closely +followed by the Greek. The little negro stepped inside +but Manuel paused on the threshold and swept a +keen glance over the assembled party. Perhaps +some instinct warned him of his danger, perhaps he +decided that the time had come for his last treacherous +move. With a quick leap, he sprang back +through the open doorway, slammed the door to, +and bolted it outside, and the little band of chums +were prisoners in the cabin of their own ship.</p> + +<p>Charley leaped from his chair, but he was too +late.</p> + +<p>"Outwitted," he cried as he sank back into his +seat. "Beaten at every point of the game. What +fools, what bunglers we are." There was as much +chagrin as fear in his exclamations. To be so badly +beaten after all his vigilance and careful planning +was hard to bear.</p> + +<p>His companions sat silent with despair. So suddenly +had it all happened they had not yet had time +to realize that they were completely in the hands of +the Greeks who could do with them as they pleased.</p> + +<p>Charley flipped open his pistol and handed one of +his remaining cartridges to his chum, "That gives +us two apiece," he observed, "although I doubt if +we will either of us need them." He retired to his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span> +cabin and reappeared with a blanket and a book. +He spread out the blanket on the floor and stretching +himself out on it prepared to read. "Might +as well get what enjoyment we can," he said. +"There's nothing we can do, so we might as well +take it easy while we may."</p> + +<p>"How can you be so careless?" his chum exclaimed, +"any minute they may come down upon +us."</p> + +<p>"Little danger of that," the other replied, coolly. +"They know we've got four shots left yet. What +would be the use of their taking chances when they +have got everything in their own hands."</p> + +<p>But his companions could not view their position +with the same hopeless resignation. While he read +on apparently unconcerned, they discussed plan after +plan for escape from their prison and perilous situation, +only to reject one after the other as wildly +impracticable. At last they abandoned the discussion +in despair.</p> + +<p>"Better turn in and try to get a good night's +rest," Charley advised them calmly. "I will keep +watch for the first four hours, although I don't believe +there's the slightest use of it."</p> + +<p>"I'm too hungry to sleep," Walter declared. "I +wonder why they do not send us down our supper."</p> + +<p>"Bless your simple little soul," his chum exclaimed, +"They do not intend us to have anything to +eat. I thought you understood that."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span></p> + +<p>His companions looked at each other in dismay. +This, the greatest of all their perils, had not before +occurred to them. They understood now the awfulness +of their position. All the food and water were +stored forward. The Greeks had only to let them +alone and they would slowly die of hunger and +thirst.</p> + +<p>"They will not get us that way," declared Walter, +desperately. "Before I'll die of hunger and thirst +I'll set the schooner on fire."</p> + +<p>Charley nodded approval. "I've been thinking +of that myself," he said. "A quick death is better +than a slow torturing one. But there is plenty of +time to talk of that. While there is life there is hope +and I have a feeling that something is going to turn +up to help us out of this scrape. I've just happened +to think of one thing that's in our favor."</p> + +<p>He was prevented from explaining the new hope +which had occurred to him by a knock on the cabin +door and Manuel's sneering voice enquiring,</p> + +<p>"Are the gentlemen quite comfortable?"</p> + +<p>"Quite," Charley assured him, calmly. "Much +more comfortable than you and your mates will be +when the law reckons with you."</p> + +<p>"There is no law at sea but the law of the strongest +and most cunning," the Greek said, smoothly. +"But I bear a proposal from my shipmates for +your distinguished consideration."</p> + +<p>"State it," replied the lad, briefly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You are all in a bad position," stated the Greek +with oily maliciousness. "You were cunning but +not cunning enough or our positions would now be +reversed. We have only to do nothing now and you +will all die. It would sadden our hearts to lose such +loving friends but we would strive to bear up +bravely under the blow. But why should you all die +when we are willing to spare one. All that one +would have to do would be to take an oath to be +faithful and true to us and do as we bid him. Not +only would his life be spared, but he would receive +a share of the great wealth we have discovered."</p> + +<p>"Why are you so very generous in your offers?" +Walter demanded, sarcastically.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XVIII.<br /> + +<small>IMPRISONED.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">We</span> need one of you," explained Manuel, with +startling frankness. "Perhaps we could get along +without but it does not pay to take chances. There +is a government cutter which patrols the banks to +see that the sponging vessels are complying with the +laws. She may come upon us accidentally any time +and it would be awkward explaining why we continued +to work without American officers. It would +very likely get us into trouble. But if one of you +takes the part of the captain and shows the papers +and explains that the rest have died from fever, all +will go smoothly."</p> + +<p>"I suppose you have decided which one of us you +want?" Charley asked, curiously.</p> + +<p>"Any one of you will do, but we prefer you. +You have brains enough to realize where your own +interests lie. It is easier to handle a smart man than +a fool. Consider the chance we are giving you, on +the one hand slow, painful, certain death; on the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span> +other, an honored position, great wealth and +safety—we are generous indeed."</p> + +<p>"But how do you know that I will play fair?"</p> + +<p>"The moment you joined us you would be as +liable to the law as the rest of us," Manuel said +calmly, "We would live or hang together. You +would not dare to trifle with us, and I should watch +you closely all the time."</p> + +<p>"Here is my answer," declared Charley, whose +indignation had been steadily rising at the cold-blooded +proposal. "If you would all keep your +part of the agreement,—which I am convinced you +would not do, I'd die rather than join such a pack of +dirty murderers."</p> + +<p>"You are a bigger fool than I thought," replied +the Greek calmly. "I will leave you to consider +the matter better. Hunger is a great persuader, and +I am in hopes that you will soon see where your +best interests lie. Good-night, gentlemen, good-night, +may your dreams be of the pleasantest."</p> + +<p>"He's evidently somewhat worried," said +Charley, hopefully, when the Greek's mocking voice +had ceased. "He believes, I guess, that there is a +good chance of the cutter coming upon him or he +would not make such a proposal, although he would +not keep his part of it any longer than the danger +lasted. Our only hope is to keep up our strength and +spirits as long as possible. There is a chance that +the cutter may come along before it is too late. Better<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span> +all turn in and get some rest while you are still +not too hungry to sleep. I will call one of you to +take my place as soon as my four hours are up, although +I do not believe that they will trouble us."</p> + +<p>The lad was right in his belief. The night passed +away without any alarm and they were able by turns +to get some little sleep. With the coming of daylight, +they crowded to the windows and searched the +dreary waste of waters for sign of smoke or sail, +but found none. The crew were going about their +work in cheerful unconcern. Leaving a half dozen +men on the schooner, the balance got aboard the +diving boat and sailed out to the sponge ground +where they could be seen working steadily all day +bringing up the gold from the bottom. The prisoners +suffered much during the long day from their +increasing hunger and thirst.</p> + +<p>At night the diving boat returned to the schooner +and the dispirited watchers could see that the crew +had not wasted their day by any means. Both +sponge baskets were nearly full of the gold coins.</p> + +<p>"We've got to do something, I don't care how +desperate it is," declared Captain Westfield. "Anything +is better than this keeping still and suffering. +By to-morrow this time we'll be too weak to do +much and thar ain't no certainty that the cutter will +come along this way at all. I'm in for doing something, +no matter what."</p> + +<p>Charley turned from his gazing out of the window,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[139]</a></span> +"Look here, Captain," he called, softly. +"Speak low," he cautioned as the old sailor crept +to his side, "we don't want them to hear us on +deck."</p> + +<p>"Geewhilikens!" whispered the old seaman in +swift comprehension, "they've left the diving boat +fastened right under our windows."</p> + +<p>"God grant that they may not think to move it," +the lad replied, trembling with excitement. "We +can do nothing until it gets dark and they retire to +the forecastle."</p> + +<p>Walter and Chris were quickly made acquainted +with the suddenly-offered chance of escape and their +joy knew no bounds.</p> + +<p>Then followed hours which seemed like days to +the breathless, anxious watchers. The Greeks ate +their supper and lounged around the deck talking +and laughing. It seemed as though they would +never retire to their bunks. But at last their voices +gradually ceased and silence settled down upon the +schooner. Charley cautiously opened one of the +big windows and swung it outward, then climbing +softly toward the opening, lowered himself to the +diving boat's deck. The Captain, Walter, and Chris +followed. Not a word was spoken for each realized +the terrible risk they were running. As soon as all +were crouched motionless aboard, Charley, with his +knife, severed the rope which bound them to the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[140]</a></span> +schooner and the boat drifted slowly away from the +ship's side.</p> + +<p>No one moved until the schooner was at last lost +in the darkness.</p> + +<p>"Start up the engine," said Charley, as he took +the helm, and Walter slipped down amongst the +machinery. After a few minutes' fumbling in the +darkness, he crept back.</p> + +<p>"There's no gasoline in the tank," he announced.</p> + +<p>"Everything seems against us," Charley sighed. +"Well, get sail on her. We will have to do the +best we can."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the great square sail was spread, +and, leaning over, the little craft sent a line of foam +rippling from her bow.</p> + +<p>"They'll have hard work finding us in this darkness," +exulted the captain as he took the helm from +Charley. "I reckon, we'd better shape a course for +the nearest port,—that's Judson. As soon as we get +thar, we can telegraph to all the ports along the +coast to watch out for the schooner. We've got +'em now, I reckon, lads, they'll have to put in somewhere +sooner or later, an' they'll be nabbed. I feel +just like yelling for joy."</p> + +<p>The rising spirits of the little party were helped +by Chris' discovery of a couple of loaves of stale +black bread, and part of a bottle of ripe olives in +one of the lockers. They made a meagre but very +welcome repast upon the uninviting food.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[141]</a></span></p> + +<p>But their joy over their lucky escape was soon +dampened by the threatening appearance of the +Western sky. A heavy bank of clouds was slowly +rising there from which came flashes of lightning +and the rumble of distant thunder.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, it ain't nothin' but a thunder squall," +the captain assured them. "Thar ain't no call to be +uneasy, this is a mighty seaworthy little craft. I +reckon, we could ride out a right smart gale in her +if we had it to do."</p> + +<p>Before they ran much further the captain gave +the order to lower and reef the great sail. When +hoisted again, it was only a tiny patch of canvas, as +compared with its former size.</p> + +<p>"Thar's only one thing for us to do when that +squall strikes us an' that's to scud before it," the old +captain declared. "We can't heave her to under +that sail. Luckily, the way it's coming won't blow +us out of our course much."</p> + +<p>They had not long to wait for the storm to burst. +The wind soon descended with a violence that +threatened to bury the diving boat in the seas it +brought with it. But the little craft had been built +to stand just such weather, and, quickly gathering +headway, she darted away before the gale. With +the wind came the rain in great driving, blinding +sheets. The boys hailed its appearance with joy. +They spread out their jackets, bits of sail, and even +their hats to catch the precious drops. In a short<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[142]</a></span> +while they had secured enough to quench their intense +thirst. This done, they gathered around the +captain at the helm ready to render any assistance +in their power. There was little they could do for +the old sailor would trust no one but himself to +steer in the heavy sea-way. As the hours passed by +without showing any abatement of the storm, it became +evident to his companions that he was growing +anxious.</p> + +<p>"I don't like the way it's hanging on," he declared. +"We must be making at least twelve miles +an hour and, at that rate, we will have the land close +aboard before daylight. Crawl forward, Charley, +an' keep a sharp look-out, the sky is clearing some +an', I reckon, you can see a few hundred feet +ahead."</p> + +<p>The lad obediently worked his way up into the +bow, and bracing himself against the anchor bitts, +peered ahead into the darkness. He could make out +nothing at first but the heavy foam-flecked, tossing +water. He sat watching intently till, at last, Walter +crawled forward to take his place. He had only +got part way back to the stern when there came a +cry from his chum,</p> + +<p>"Hard down! hard down!"</p> + +<p>With true seaman's quickness, the Captain +jammed the long tiller over and the little craft, escaping +broaching in the trough of the seas by a +miracle, shot up into the wind—a second too late.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[143]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Hang on for your lives!" the old sailor cried.</p> + +<p>Black masses loomed out of the darkness to leeward. +A great wave picked up the helpless boat and +flung it with crashing, breaking timbers, upon the +rocks.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[144]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XIX.<br /> + +<small>WRECKED.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> boys had obeyed the old sailor's order, and, +though greatly shaken by the shock, they retained +their hold on the boat.</p> + +<p>"Quick, get on the rocks," shouted the Captain. +"She'll pound to pieces in a jiffy."</p> + +<p>Fortunately, the boat's bow had been driven up +on the ledge nearly out of the water. The boys +dropped over the side followed by the old sailor, +and, though beaten and bruised against the sharp +rocks succeeded in struggling out upon the one +which reared itself above the water. They glanced +back to where the boat had struck, but, short as had +been their struggle out, it had witnessed the destruction +of the staunch craft. Only that portion of her +bow lodged upon the reef remained intact, the balance +of her hull was a mass of twisted, splintered, +broken planks.</p> + +<p>Great as was the danger from which they had +escaped, their present position was still far from +safe. The slippery rock afforded but insecure footing +and it was frequently swept by the larger seas.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[145]</a></span> +At such times, they had all they could do to keep +from being swept off its slimy surface.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, we've struck on a reef," the Captain +said, anxiously. "It all depends upon the tide +whether we are safe or not. If it's low tide, now, +high tide will cover this rock so deep that we'll not +be able to hang on to it."</p> + +<p>It soon became evident that the tide was still rising, +though slowly. The waves began sweeping +over the flat rock with such violence that the tired, +wretched, anxious, little party could hardly maintain +their footing. To the right and left of them, +rose other higher masses of rock, but they did not +dare to attempt to reach them through the darkness +and the boiling surf. Wet, cold, hungry, and +wretched; they clung to their insecure refuge until +day began to break in the East. With the coming +of light they strained their brine-smarting eyes to +discover what manner of place it was upon which +they had been thrown. The outlook was not reassuring. +They were, as the Captain had surmised, +on a point of low-lying reef, most of which was constantly +wave-swept by the monstrous surges. To +the East of them, lay a low, marshy shore dotted +here and there with small islands covered with +cedar hammocks, but between them and the islands +was at least two miles of foaming water. The boys +gazed wistfully at the longed-for land.</p> + +<p>"We can't make it," Charley said, sadly. "Chris<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[146]</a></span> +might, perhaps, be able to swim it, but it would be +a long swim for the rest of us at any time, and, tired +and weak as we are now, it would be impossible. +We will have to stick it out here until the storm goes +down a bit, then, try to fashion some kind of a raft +out of the planks of the diving boat."</p> + +<p>"We can't be far from Judson," said the Captain, +with an attempt at cheerfulness. "A boat may +come by an' pick us up any minute."</p> + +<p>But the boys were not cheered by any such prospect. +They knew that the chance of any boat being +out in such weather was very small indeed. One +fact, however, gave them a little hope; the tide was +undoubtedly falling. It had evidently been almost +at its height when they had landed on the rock.</p> + +<p>"I wish we had something to eat," Walter sighed, +"we have had nothing but a little bread in two +days. I begin to feel weak all over."</p> + +<p>Chris gazed thoughtfully at the water on the +shore-side of the rock. "I reckon, I might find +somethin' down dar," he observed. "I'se goin' to +try it anyway. You white chilluns has sho' got to +hab somethin' to eat."</p> + +<p>Although the water was somewhat smoother to +the lee of the rocks, it boiled and foamed there +threateningly and the boys endeavored to dissuade +the plucky little negro from the attempt, but their +objections only made him the more determined.</p> + +<p>"Golly! you chilluns doan know what a diver dis<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[147]</a></span> +nigger is," he said, proudly. "You jes' stay still an' +watch him now." He removed his clothes, handing +them to Charley to hold, slipped over the side of the +rock, and sank down beneath the surface. He was +gone so long that the watchers had begun to grow +anxious when he reappeared, blowing like a porpoise. +In one hand, he held tightly clenched, a big +stone crab and a large conch.</p> + +<p>"Take 'em," he exclaimed, "I'se goin' down +again. Dar's heaps more of dem on de bottom."</p> + +<p>He continued diving until he had brought up six +more conchs and two more crabs, then he crawled +out on the rock completely exhausted, and held up +one foot for their inspection. There was a tiny +puncture in the sole of it from which the blood was +slowly trickling.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I'se goin' to hab some trubble wid dat +foot," he observed, gravely. "Ole Mister Stingaree +gib me a dig dar. He warn't much bigger dan +a plate, but der horns are powerful poison."</p> + +<p>His announcement sent a chill of fear to the +hearts of his companions, for they all well-knew the +dangerous character of the flat, horn-tailed fish +which lurks on the bottom in Florida waters. The +Captain did not lose a second in whipping out his +sheath knife and cutting open the puncture which he +washed out thoroughly with sea water. He then +made Chris sit on the edge of the rock and hang his +foot over in the water.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[148]</a></span></p> + +<p>The plucky little negro bore the operation with +unflinching cheerfulness. "I sho' wish you'd open +up one ob dem conch for me, Massa Charley," he observed. +"If dis ting's goin' to make me sick, I +wants to be dat much ahead."</p> + +<p>Charley quickly broke open one of the conchs +and gave him the meat,—a big lump of tough flesh, +almost sufficient for an entire meal. He also opened +several others for the Captain, Walter, and himself, +upon which they made a hearty and strengthening, +if somewhat tasteless, meal. Chris ate but little of +the tough meat, he soon pushed it away from him +with a weary little sigh.</p> + +<p>"I doan want no moah," he said, quietly. "I'ze +gettin' berry sick. Reckon ole Mister Stingaree +dun got dis nigger for sho'."</p> + +<p>His little ebony face soon took on a dull-ashen +hue and he began to vomit violently; passing from +these spells into a heavy stupor, the mysterious subtle +poison from the stingaree was getting in its +work. His grieving companions watched him in +helpless suspense, there was nothing they could do +to relieve his sufferings.</p> + +<p>"We can't let him die like this," Charley cried, as +the little sufferer twitched in spasms of pain. "I +am going to try to reach shore and find help. He +has taken bigger risks for us many a time."</p> + +<p>Neither Walter or the Captain tried to stop him. +They would have gladly offered to make the attempt<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[149]</a></span> +in his place but he was the strongest and best swimmer +of the three.</p> + +<p>He removed his jacket and shoes and with a last +good-bye, plunged off of the rock and headed for the +distant shore. He had not gone more than twenty +yards when he stopped with a cry of joy.</p> + +<p>"Come on," he called back, "the water isn't more +than three feet deep here. There's only a deep place +near the rocks and you can get across that easily."</p> + +<p>But he had to return to help them get Chris across +the deep narrow channel, for the little negro's struggles +in his spasms threatened to drown his helpers. +At last, the dangerous stretch of water was safely +crossed, and, leaving Walter and the Captain to half +float and half carry Chris between them, the lad +waded ahead, picking out the shoalest and smoothest +path to the shore. They arrived there spent and +panting and sank down for a moment to recover +their breath. It was not an inviting-looking place +where they had landed. A low rock-strewn marsh, +covered with tall, rank grass stretched away before +them for two or three miles before it met the higher, +heavily-wooded mainland. Here and there the +marsh was dotted with small, island-like clumps of +dark green cedar trees, and, picking up the light, +little negro in his strong, young arms, Charley +headed for the nearest of these, followed by his exhausted +companions. The passage was made with +difficulty; low needle-pointed rocks strewed the way,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[150]</a></span> +and here and there lay pools of soft, boggy mud, +tenanted by repulsive, swollen looking moccasins. +It needed care to avoid the one without stepping on +the other, but, at last, the patch of high ground was +reached and, laying his burden beneath a wide-spreading +cedar, Charley turned to his companions.</p> + +<p>"We have got to work quick if we are to stand a +chance even of saving him," he said, crisply. "Walter, +get in to the mainland as quick as you can and +bring me all the palmetto berries you can find,—hurry. +Captain, let me take your flint and steel and +then get me a lot of soft mud from the marsh."</p> + +<p>Tired though they were, the two hastened away to +execute his orders, while Charley worked swiftly to +carry out the plan he had formed while coming +ashore. It was a heroic one, but rough measures +were the only ones it was in his power to apply. +Hastily gathering together a pile of dead cedar +limbs, he lit a fire with the flint and steel. While it +was blazing up, he stripped off his belt and, tying it +above Chris' knee, with a stick twisted it tight until +it was embedded in the flesh, shutting off the flow of +blood from below to the heart. He next heated a +small stone in the now blazing fire and applied it +while hot to the swollen wound. The smell of the +crisping flesh sickened him, but he doggedly stuck to +his task until he judged the wound was sufficiently +cauterized. Chris lay mercifully lost to the pain in +a deep stupor. The lad had just finished burning<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[151]</a></span> +the wound when the Captain returned with his +jacket full of soft mud, and, emptying it out, +hastened back for another load. Charley heaped a +lot of rocks upon the fire, and, as soon as they were +hot, ranged them close on each side of the wounded +limb, heaping the soft mud on top of them until he +had formed an air-tight mound over the leg. He +now had a great poultice of hot mud of great drawing +power, the danger was that Chris might be attacked +by other spasms and succeed in working his +leg out from the hot covering. To prevent this, the +lad tore his shirt up into strips and, binding the little +negro tightly, piled stones around the encased leg +so that it could not be easily moved.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[152]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XX.<br /> + +<small>HUNTING HELP.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Charley</span> next cut off small branches of cedar +and placed them under the unconscious little fellow's +head and back so that he might rest as comfortably +as possible. This done, he sat back breathless and +exhausted and waited impatiently for Walter's return.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield surveyed the young physician's +work with hopeful admiration. "If Chris lives, it +will be you as has saved his life," he declared.</p> + +<p>"He has saved mine more than once," Charley +replied, "but I am afraid he is not going to live. I +don't like this deep stupor he has fallen into. I +wish Walter would hurry."</p> + +<p>Walter had been hurrying as fast as he could, and +he soon appeared bearing a hatful of ripe palmetto +berries. His riddled shoes and bleeding feet told of +reckless running over the sharp rocks.</p> + +<p>Charley smashed the ripe berries between two +stones, catching the juice in his cap. Chris' teeth +were tightly set, but he managed to pry them apart +with his knife blade and forced some of the sticky +liquid down his throat.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[153]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I don't know whether it will help him or not, +but I am in hopes it will," he said, as, tired out, he +sat down by the little fellow's side. "Those berries +make a powerful tonic and stimulant, and I believe +that is what is needed. The poison seems to have +deadened the heart's action and brought on that +stupor. A few minutes will tell whether it is going +to do any good."</p> + +<p>It soon became evident that the rude remedies +were performing their mission well, the sufferer's +pulse, which had grown slow and feeble, quickened, +and his little face began to lose some of its +ashen hue.</p> + +<p>As soon as he became sure that a change for the +better was taking place, Charley arose from his +brief rest.</p> + +<p>"I am going to find help," he declared. "We +must get him to some place where he can have +proper attention. How far do you think we are +from Judson, Captain?"</p> + +<p>"Not more than twenty miles to the north of it, +I judge. Maybe not more than ten miles. But you +must not dream of starting yet awhile, lad. You +must rest for a bit, an' have something to eat first."</p> + +<p>"And I am going with you when you start," +Walter declared. "Something might happen to you +amongst those slippery rocks and awful bog holes. +The Captain can do all that can be done for Chris +while you are gone."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[154]</a></span></p> + +<p>There was no disputing the wisdom of both suggestions +and they busied themselves with the first +proposition, the finding of something to eat. This +demanded more time and trouble. Another trip had +to be made down to the water and considerable +searching was necessary before they could collect +enough of crabs and shell fish to make the full meal +that their hunger craved. Their rest they gained +while their dinner was roasting in the coals.</p> + +<p>Their rest, meal, and Chris' steadily improving +condition, put them all in better strength and spirits, +and the boys were cheerful when they bid the old +sailor good-bye and made their start in search of +help.</p> + +<p>"We'll be back as soon as we can get back, Captain," +Charley said, "but you don't want to worry +if we take longer than you expect."</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I'll keep too busy to have much time +for worryin'," the old sailor replied. "Jes' be careful, +lads, an' get back as soon as you can."</p> + +<p>He watched until the rank marsh grass hid the +two lads from sight, then busied himself with making +the camp a little more comfortable for himself +and his sick companion. Chris' welfare was the +first thing to claim his attention. With his sheath +knife he cut armful after armful of marsh grass and +added it to the rough couch Charley had fashioned +for the little negro, converting it into a soft, comfortable +bed. The low-hanging cedar boughs<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[155]</a></span> +formed a kind of rude shelter over the little lad, but +the captain was not entirely satisfied with it. The +rainy season was near at hand and heavy showers +might be expected at any time. A thick layer of +marsh grass placed over the lowest cedar limbs +quickly made the covering more to his satisfaction. +This done, he paused for a brief rest and to decide +what should be his next task. Although, he knew +that the port of Judson could not be more than +twenty miles away, he realized that, owing to the +necessarily slow traveling amongst the sharp rocks +and bog holes, it might be at least three days before +the boys could succeed in getting back with help. +His duties, then, would be the care of Chris, the providing +of food for them both, and the gathering of +firewood. Water was luckily plentiful, there was an +abundance of it in a cup-like depression near the +center of the island.</p> + +<p>In a Northern country with no weapons but his +sheath knife, these tasks would have seemed almost +impossible of accomplishment, but the captain was +not discouraged. The first thing, of course, was to +see that the little negro's marked improvement was +not checked. Heating more stones in the fire, the +old sailor piled them around the mound of mud covering +the wounded leg. Then, as the berries Walter +had brought were nearly exhausted, he decided that +the next thing of importance was to lay in a fresh +supply. He found the trip to the mainland slow and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[156]</a></span> +dangerous. Where the way was not strewn with +sharp-pointed rocks, it was dotted with forbidding-looking +sink holes of soft, slimy mud. Rank-growing +marsh grass covered the whole, making it extremely +difficult to pick out a safe passage through +the dangers. At last, however, he gained the mainland +where he found the oily black berries growing +in greatest profusion. He gathered his jacket full +of them and then sat down on a fallen log to rest a +minute and look around. It was an inviting spot in +which he found himself. The land rose up from the +marsh to form a high, sloping bluff through which +trickled a stream of clear, reddish water.</p> + +<p>The bluff was covered with a dense growth of +palms, satinwoods, bays, rubber trees, and low-ground +palmettos. It was an ideal place for a +camp, and the captain eyed it regretfully, wishing +that it was possible to bring Chris there from the +little marsh-surrounded island. But that was impossible +until the little fellow was able to walk and +he dismissed the idea with a sigh. He was just +gathering up his jacket of berries to leave when a +noise in the undergrowth close at hand made him +sink back to his seat on the log. The brushes before +him parted suddenly and a large deer stepped +out into an open place not twenty feet from where +he sat. For a full two minutes, he and the timid +animal remained motionless, looking directly into +each other's eyes, then the old sailor pulled out his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[157]</a></span> +sheath knife and sprang for it with some wild notion +of securing it for food, but the deer leaped lightly +away a few steps and stopped again as if in deepest +wonder and curiosity. The captain sheathed his +knife with a sigh. "I reckon, you don't know how +wicked men are," he addressed the graceful animal. +"Guess you ain't ever seed many men or you +wouldn't be so powerful tame. Some steaks from +you would taste right good, but you ain't aiming to +let me get close enough for that. Well, good-bye, +old fellow, I hope I'll meet you again sometime +when I've got a good gun."</p> + +<p>Saying which, the old sailor picked up his burden +and headed back for the island, the deer gazing after +him in innocent-eyed wonder.</p> + +<p>He had nearly reached the little camp when a +scream from Chris sent him forward at a run, regardless +of rocks and sink holes.</p> + +<p>The scene that met his gaze as he burst into the +little clearing chilled him with horror and dismay.</p> + +<p>Attracted, no doubt, by its warmth, two huge, +swollen-looking moccasins had crawled up on the +little heap of mud and now lay with their flat, ugly +heads within a few inches of the little negro's trembling +body.</p> + +<p>"Don't move an inch, Chris," he shouted, as he +broke off a dead limb from a cedar tree.</p> + +<p>The caution was useless, for, bound as he was, +hand and foot, Chris could only lay and stare in +horror and helplessness.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[158]</a></span></p> + +<p>A couple of well-aimed blows from the stick +killed the two poisonous, sluggish serpents, and, +dragging them to the edge of the island, the captain +pitched them out into the marsh.</p> + +<p>"They ain't very pleasant visitors," he remarked +as he returned to his helpless companion, "but I +reckon, they've done you a heap of good. You was +laying like a dead man when I went ashore and now +you look right pert and lively."</p> + +<p>"Dey's too sudden an' powerful medicine," +grumbled Chris. "Dis nigger might jes' as well +die as be scart to death. Golly! how my leg does +burn and smart. Please take dat stuff off ob hit, +Massa Captain, an' unloose my han's."</p> + +<p>But the old sailor feared to remove the mud poultice, +dreading another relapse. However, he untied +the little negro's hands, upon his promise that he +would lie still and not move. He was delighted +with the change in the little lad. Whether the shock +from the snakes, or, what was much more probable, +the continued effects of the palmetto juice had done +the work, the stupor which had frightened them all +was entirely gone, and the patient soon declared +himself decidedly hungry.</p> + +<p>Cutting a stick and laying it within Chris' reach +so that he would have the means of protecting himself +from other possible visitors, the Captain departed +in search of food.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[159]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXI.<br /> + +<small>THE CASTAWAYS.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was lucky for the captain that he was wise to +the resources of the Florida coast. A stranger to +the country would not have known where to look +for food and would likely have soon perished of +hunger. Although he had no other weapon than +his sheath knife, he went about his task with the +air of a man who was confident of success. Before +leaving the island, he cut a long, straight cypress +pole and sharpened one end to a keen point. With +this in his hand, he made his way down to the Gulf. +The tide was high again but there was a mass of +rock some two hundred feet from shore which protruded +a couple of feet above the water. Removing +his shoes, he waded cautiously out, prodding +the bottom before him with his pole and picking +his way carefully to avoid stepping on a stingaree.</p> + +<p>The rock reached, he perched himself on its edge +and sat peeping down into the water which was +clear as crystal. He had not long to wait. In a few +minutes a fish swam slowly past close to the rock, +and, taking careful aim, the old sailor dove his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[160]</a></span> +rude spear down with all his force. Its point struck +just behind the fish's head, passing entirely through +its body. It died without a struggle, and the captain +lifted it out upon the rock with a shout of triumph. +It was a beautifully-specked sea trout about +three feet in length and weighed at least twelve +pounds. Although there was plenty of other fish +within sight, the trout was enough for their present +needs and, scaling and washing it carefully, the captain +waded ashore with his prize. But he was not +yet quite satisfied. Laying his fish down upon a +bunch of clean sea moss, he examined carefully the +muddy beach near the water's edge. Here and +there, tiny jets of water squirted up from the mud, +and, where they seemed to be most numerous, he +began to dig. In a few minutes he had unearthed a +couple of dozen large clams. With these and the +fish, and a huge armful of moist sea moss in his +arms, he made his way back to camp where Chris +was eagerly awaiting his return.</p> + +<p>"I sho' wish I could get up from hyah," mourned +the little negro. "Golly! I reckon, I'd show you +how to cook dat fish so dat you nebber could eat +nuff ob hit."</p> + +<p>"You jes' lie still thar," commanded the captain. +"I'm a Cape Cod man, an' thar ain't any +cook living that can show a Cape Cod man how to +cook this kind of grub. You just watch and learn +somethin'."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[161]</a></span></p> + +<p>Chris watched him with professional jealousy +and interest. He firmly believed that no one on +earth could cook as good as he but he reluctantly +admitted to himself that the old sailor made his +preparations with considerable promise of success.</p> + +<p>First, he scooped out a hole in the ground about +three feet deep and two feet square and kindled a +small fire in the bottom upon which he placed a +layer of small rocks, as soon as it was going good, +then, he paused to remark regretfully,</p> + +<p>"I wish we had some potatoes. I never heard of +a clam bake yet without potatoes."</p> + +<p>"Dar's something jes' as good as 'taters," declared +Chris, pointing to a low-growing plant. +"Jes' you dig up some ob dem roots an' try 'em. +Hit's wild cassava, an' hit taste jes' like Irish +'taters."</p> + +<p>The captain dug down with his sheath knife and +unearthed several tubers a couple of feet in length +and about three inches in circumference. He regarded +them dubiously, but, on Chris' repeated +assurances that they were good and wholesome, he +cut off several pieces and washed them carefully. +By the time this was done, the fire in the pit had +burned low, and the stones were smoking hot. Cutting +several broad, green, palmetto leaves, he laid +them on the stones and spread over them a thin +layer of the moist sea moss. Upon the moss he laid +the fish and over it spread another layer of moss<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[162]</a></span> +upon which he placed the clams, covering them with +more moss, upon which he placed the cassava, and, +piling a thick layer of sea grass over the whole, +built a small fire on top of it. Then he sat down +and watched the fire while he and Chris waited +hungrily the slow cooking of their meal. At last, +the captain declared that it must be done. The fire +on top was raked away, the contents of the pit were +taken out and placed upon green, clean palmetto +leaves, and the two castaways fell-to with appetites +sharpened by their long wait. And what a feast it +was,—the clams cooked to perfection in their own +juice, the fish juicy and delicious, the cassava snow-white +and mealy and all rendered doubly delicious +by the salt spicy taste of the seaweed in which they +had been cooked. And what a joy it was to feel +that the worst of their troubles were over. Chris +getting better, the boys soon to be back with help, +all the worry and anxiety they had suffered past, +the next few days to see them all safely back in +Tarpon, where they would all wait in comfort and +safety, ready to claim their ship when the Greeks +brought her in, and, after that, they would return +for the gold and with it they would secure the +many things they had longed for all their lives.</p> + +<p>Surely the prospect was bright enough to make +the two lonely castaways chatter brightly, cheerfully, +and hopefully over their evening meal. They +could not see the dangers, worries, and misfortunes<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[163]</a></span> +yet to befall them, and it was well they could not for +it would have robbed the two of the happiest hour +they had had in many days.</p> + +<p>At last, the feast was over and Chris had paid +the cook the highest compliment of which he could +conceive.</p> + +<p>"Golly! Massa Capt., you cooked dem tings +might nigh as good as I could have done."</p> + +<p>Although there were many things which the +captain wished to do, darkness was fast coming +on and he had to complete his final preparations for +the night. First, he cut a lot of small boughs which +he piled up under the shelter close to Chris to serve +as his own bed. This done, he gathered piles of +wood which he spread in a circle around the big +cedar and set on fire to protect them both from +chance visits of snakes during the night. By the +time this was finished, it was dark and he crept in +under the shelter close to his dusky little companion +in misfortune, and, after a short, simple prayer +full of thankfulness for their deliverance from the +dangers that had threatened them, he quickly fell +into the deep sleep of total exhaustion. But sleep +did not come so readily to Chris. He had slept, or +been unconscious, much of the time since his accident +and the stimulating effect of the palmetto +medicine helped to drive slumber away from him. +He lay very quiet to avoid disturbing the old sailor's +rest, but, try as he would, he could not get to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[164]</a></span> +sleep. At last he gave up the attempt and lay with +eyes wide open looking out at the stars and the +twinkling camp-fires. From the marsh about came +strange noises of the night, the croaking of multitudes +of frogs, the cackle of marsh hens, the squawking +of cranes, and the rustling of the marsh grass +in the wind. Slowly the circle of fire died down, +smouldered and went out. Only the big main camp-fire +was left a glowing mass of embers.</p> + +<p>Suddenly the wakeful little negro's ears caught +another sound mingled with the voices of the +night,—a slow, heavy, creeping noise. For a time +he lay quiet listening, his hearing strained to the +utmost to catch the new strange sound. He waited +until there was no doubt that it was close at hand +and steadily drawing nearer, then, he reached +over and shook his snoring companion.</p> + +<p>"Wake up, Massa Captain," he cried, "dar's +some wild beast a creepin' into de camp."</p> + +<p>"I hear it," agreed the captain, instantly wide +awake. "Jes' lay still, lad, an' don't be frightened. +I'll stir up the fire a bit, that will run it off."</p> + +<p>He arose from his couch and strode boldly for +the smouldering fire.</p> + +<p>"Look out!" Chris yelled, suddenly, "Foah de +Lawd's sake, look out!" His keen eyes had caught +a glimpse of a black shape passing between the old +sailor and the mass of glowing embers, but his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[165]</a></span> +warning came too late,—the captain was upon the +moving shape before he saw it.</p> + +<p>A swishing noise rent the air, a loud thud, the +old sailor was knocked backward several feet flat +on the ground, and, with a loud, sharp bellowing, +the mysterious visitor glided away into the darkness.</p> + +<p>"Is you hurt? Is you hurt, Massa Cap?" cried +the terror-stricken lad.</p> + +<p>"A little bit, a little bit," called back the old +sailor, his voice hoarse with pain.</p> + +<p>He came creeping back into the shelter on hands +and knees.</p> + +<p>"It was a big bull alligator," he explained, painfully. +"Must have been twelve feet long. It +caught me a fearful blow on the legs with its tail. +I hope thar ain't no bones broken but it feels as +though thar was."</p> + +<p>A close examination proved his fears groundless, +but the terrible blow had done all but break the +bones. In spite of the pain, however, he crawled +forth again and replenished the fire, but he was +faint and giddy with pain before he succeeded in +getting back into the shelter and stretched out on +his couch once more.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I'll be all right by morning," he said, +hopefully, "but I don't calculate I'll be able to +sleep any more to-night, my legs hurt too bad for +that. Don't make any difference though, I 'low<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[166]</a></span> +I've had enough sleep for one night—it can't be +more than a couple of hours 'till daylight."</p> + +<p>It proved to be even less and with the coming of +light he removed his trousers and examined his +limbs anxiously. He had indeed received a terrible +blow from the prowling monster, both legs were +bruised and swollen where the tail had struck it and +it seemed a miracle that the bones had not been +broken. It caused him exquisite pain to rise upon +his feet, but there was work which had to be done, +and, in spite of his suffering, he must do it. So, +hiding his pain as well as he could, he prepared to +sally forth to secure food for the day.</p> + +<p>But in spite of all his efforts he could not entirely +hide his intense suffering.</p> + +<p>"You jes' lay down an' let me go out an' find +grub, Massa Cap," Chris pleaded. "I feels jes' as +well as can be again now."</p> + +<p>But the sturdy old sailor would not listen to his +pleadings.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[167]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXII.<br /> + +<small>ANOTHER DANGER.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Dar's</span> one thing I want you to do 'fore you go +projectin' off," said the little negro. "I wants you +to cut me some ob dem palmetto buds. I'se goin' to +braid you a hat. Hit's a plum wonder dat you ain't +got sun struck goin' bareheaded like you is."</p> + +<p>"I ain't had time to remember that I lost my hat +when we were wrecked. I'se been so worried an' +busy," said the captain. "Now you speak of it, +my head does feel sort of dull an' heavy. I hope +the boys will think to cover their heads with something—this +sun does beat down right hot."</p> + +<p>"Mass Charley will sho' rig up some kind ob +hat," Chris declared, confidently. "'Sides dey's +both young an' can stand a heap more sun den +what you kin. You jes' be mighty careful dis +mornin' an' by noon dis nigger will hab a fine hat +fixed for you. I'se done made lots ob dem on Cat +Island."</p> + +<p>There was a few young cabbage palms scattered +over the island and the captain cut out several of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[168]</a></span> +the buds with his sheath knife and placed them beside +the little negro, then, knotting up the ends of +his bandanna handkerchief to form a turban, he +took his spear and started for the shore.</p> + +<p>Chris watched his slow, faltering, painful steps +until he was out of sight then began on his proposed +task. The buds were really young fresh +leaves yet unfolded, soft and pliable, yet very +strong. He shredded them into strips about half +an inch in width until he had accumulated quite a +pile; then, taking four of the pieces at a time, with +deft, skillful fingers, he wove them into a braid +about an inch in width.</p> + +<p>In a couple of hours, he had a string of braid +several yards long.</p> + +<p>The fashioning of the braid into a hat, without +needle and thread and while lying flat on his back +was a more difficult task, but he attacked it with +cheerful energy, using the point of his knife for a +needle and small strips of palmetto for thread. At +last, his task was completed, and, although the hat +was grotesque in shape and appearance, it was soft, +strong, and light, and would prove an effective protection +from the fierce rays of the tropic sun. The +little worker was not yet satisfied but at once set +about the manufacture of a basket from the same +material realizing how useful it would be for the +carrying of clams, fish, and other things.</p> + +<p>He was still engaged upon it when the captain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[169]</a></span> +came stumbling into camp bearing a large fish and +several dozen more of the clams. The old sailor's +face was red, his movement weak and uncertain, +and his breathing heavy and labored, while he was +trembling violently from head to foot. He sank +down in the cedar's shade and wiped his flaming +face.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I've got a touch of the sun," he said, +feebly. "I feel weak and dizzy. I'll lie down in +the shade for a bit an' it will pass off. Don't be +worried, lad, it will pass off in a jiffy."</p> + +<p>But pass off it did not. By the end of half an +hour the sturdy old seaman was lying unconscious, +his breath coming in short, wheezy gasps.</p> + +<p>Chris watched him for a while in anxiety and +fear. He knew that it might be dangerous for him +to move his wounded leg but all thought of his own +danger was lost in the fear that the stricken old +sailor was dying before his eyes. He attempted to +pull his leg out from the mound but could not move +it. The heat of the stones had baked the mud hard. +With great effort he raised himself into a sitting position, +and, with his sheath knife cut and dug away +frantically at the baked mud until he had the leg +uncovered, then, severing the bandage above his +knee, he attempted to rise but could not move the +injured limb. He fell back and viewed it with +frightened dismay. It was not a pretty sight for it +was a mass of blisters where the hot mud had clung,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[170]</a></span> +and a large bluish swelling marked the place where +the stingaree's horn had entered. The tight +bandage, shutting off the blood supply for so long, +had rendered it paralyzed and useless. Although +the breaking blisters caused him exquisite pain, he +fell to rubbing the numbed limb briskly with both +hands until the blood crept slowly back into the +veins. At last, he was able to gain his feet and by +resting most of his weight on his uninjured leg +managed to limp over to the unconscious sailor. +Luckily, he had been raised in a torrid country +where sunstrokes were of frequent occurrence. He +knew just what to do and he did it quickly and +surely. His first act was to raise the unconscious +man's head and place a high pillow of twigs +beneath it. Then, stirring the smouldering fire, he +placed several large stones in the glowing coals. +While they were heating he removed the captain's +shoes and bathed his hot head and flushed face with +cool water, and tearing his shirt to pieces, wet it and +bound it around the sufferer's head. By the time +this was done, the stones were hot, and, rolling a +couple up in his jacket, he placed them at the captain's +feet, then, seated by his side, he awaited the +result with fear and trembling. A terrible dread +gripped his heart that the remedies had been applied +too late, for the old sailor had all the appearance of +a dying man. Thirty minutes dragged slowly away +without apparent change, then, slowly, the old sailor's<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[171]</a></span> +breathing grew less labored and his face began +to lose some of its fiery hue. Chris hailed these +favorable signs with joy as indicated that the crisis +had been safely passed, but his joy was somewhat +dampened when the hours passed by without the +stricken man showing signs of consciousness. He +seemed to pass from his stupor to a deep sleep from +which the little negro dreaded awakening him. It +was evident that the old seaman was in for a long +spell of weakness from the heat stroke he had suffered. +There was nothing more his little companion +could do to relieve his sufferings and he +remained seated by his side watching him anxiously +until the waning of the afternoon warned him that +it was time to partake of food and make preparations +for the night. He had eaten nothing since the +night before and he was conscious of a sense of +growing weakness. The fish the captain had caught +was already tainted from the heat and the little +negro felt too weak as yet to venture forth to +secure more, so he dug up a few of the cassava roots +which he roasted in the coals. These, together with +a handful of palmetto berries, constituted his supper. +As soon as it was finished he began his preparations +for the night. Slowly and painfully, he +gathered together broken limbs to keep the circles +of fire going until daylight came again. By the +time this was accomplished and the fires lit he was +weak and trembling from pain and exhaustion and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[172]</a></span> +was glad to crawl onto his couch by the captain's +side. The old sailor roused into momentary wakefulness +at the noise of the snapping twigs.</p> + +<p>"How you is, Massa Capt.?" demanded the little +negro, eagerly.</p> + +<p>"Weak, mighty weak. Feel as though I couldn't +lift my hand to my head, but I will be all right by +morning, I reckon. I guess, we have got no cause +to worry now. The boys will be back to-night or +early in the morning at the latest. How do you feel, +lad?"</p> + +<p>"Fine," lied the little negro, cheerfully. "Jes' +you go back to sleep again. I'll keep de fires up all +right."</p> + +<p>With a sigh of satisfaction, the captain closed his +eyes and was soon sound asleep again, but there was +no such rest for his little companion. Twice Chris +hobbled out and renewed the fires. The third time +he had to crawl forth on hands and knees. His +wound was again swelling rapidly and he could no +longer bear his weight on the injured limb. He +tried vainly to sleep. The wounded leg throbbed +with intense pain which gradually crept over his +whole body, making him feel sick and faint all over. +He understood the reason for his sufferings. Some +of the poison still left in his wound had, with the +removal of the tight bandages from his leg, found +its way back into the blood and was coursing +through his little body poisoning as it went.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[173]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Golly!" he remarked, grimly, to himself, "if +dem white chillens doan get back wid help an' +medicine by mornin', I reckon dis nigger ain't agoin' +to see Cat Island and his old mammy no moah. +An' if Chris gits plum helpless what's goin' to become +ob Massa Captain wid no one to tend to him. +He tinks he'll be all right in de mornin' but hits +goin' to take a powerful long time for him to get +real peart again."</p> + +<p>The long night dragged slowly away. Occasionally +the little negro crept forth and replenished +the fires, the balance of the time he lay quiet listening +for cry or sound that would tell of the boys' +return, but nothing fell upon his strained hearing +but the croak of frogs, the bellowing of alligators +and the strange night noises of the marsh.</p> + +<p>At daylight the captain awoke and attempted to +rise, but, although he was greatly improved, he was +yet too weak to stand erect.</p> + +<p>"You jes' lie still," Chris counseled him, "dar +ain't no call for you to go projectin' around none. +I'se goin' out an' git somethin' for us to eat."</p> + +<p>Although it cost him intense pain, the little negro +managed to walk erect until he was out of the old +sailor's sight, then he dropped down on hands and +knees and crawled painfully down to the shore.</p> + +<p>The touch of the cool salt water helped the +throbbing pain in his leg and he succeeded in wading +out to the rocks where he was not long in spearing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[174]</a></span> +a large, fat mackerel. With this, he returned +to the camp, for he did not dare in his growing +weakness to search for clams or other food. He +found the old sailor asleep again, and, cleaning the +fish he broiled it over the coals. As soon as it was +done he awakened the sleeper.</p> + +<p>"Hyah is youah breakfas' all nice an' hot," he +announced. "You want to eat a plenty ob hit. +I'se agoin' to lay down a spell. I didn't sleep berry +good last night."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[175]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIII.<br /> + +<small>THE RELAPSE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Captain Westfield</span> ate heartily of the delicious +fish. Much to his delight, he found that, except for +the extreme weakness following his heat prostration, +he felt unusually well. He wisely decided not +to invite a relapse by getting up at once, and, as +soon as he had finished eating, he lay back upon +his couch and quietly fell asleep again. It was +midday when he awoke feeling much better and +stronger. The first thing that met his gaze as he +gained a sitting position was Chris lying in the +same position in which he had first flung himself. +He called to him several times but the little negro +lay still and motionless. Thoroughly alarmed, he +crawled over and surveyed the unconscious lad. +The sight of the enormously swollen leg and a few +minutes' fingering of the dark little wrist told him +what was the matter. The slow pulse beats showed +that the subtile poison, released from its confinement +by the removal of the bandage, had found its way +to the plucky, loyal, little heart.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[176]</a></span></p> + +<p>The captain sat down by the little fellow's side +and dashed the stinging tears from his eyes.</p> + +<p>"He's killed himself for me," he moaned. "If +he had laid still just as he was he would have been +all right. But, God bless him, he risked his life for +a poor, old, worthless hulk like me. An' thar ain't +nothing I can do to save him now."</p> + +<p>Although he had but small faith that it would do +any good in such a desperate case, he hastily crushed +out a cupful of juice from the palmetto berries and +forced it down Chris' throat, then, resuming his seat +by his side, he watched to see if the powerful +stimulant would have any effect.</p> + +<p>As the hours dragged slowly away he rejoiced +to see that the lad's condition apparently grew no +worse. Encouraged, he crushed out more of the +juice and administered it at regular intervals. "I +believe he's got a good fighting chance to pull +through. If the boys would only get back with +some whiskey an' drugs, now, I reckon, we could +save him. I wonder what can be keepin' them so +long. They've had plenty of time to make Judson +and back."</p> + +<p>But the afternoon wore away without sign of the +rescuers, and a new fear crept into the old sailor's +worries. Something must have happened to the two +boys. Late in the afternoon, he left Chris long +enough to hurry down to the shore in quest of fish +or clams for supper. He found the rock from<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[177]</a></span> +which he had fished completely submerged and a +heavy surf thundering far up into the marsh. +Under such conditions it was impossible to secure +fish or clams, and he returned to camp hungry, disappointed, +and with further cause for worry. The +heavy surf indicated another storm in the Gulf +which might reach where they were. If it did, it +would render their position still more uncomfortable +and dangerous. A heavy blow would continue to +cut off their supply of fish and clams and would +likely flood the low-lying marsh shutting them in on +their little island. If Chris had been well enough +to walk, the captain would have at once moved camp +to the mainland, but that was impossible now. By +sunset his fears were in a fair way to be realized. +The wind was steadily increasing in force, and, +blowing out of a clear sky, gave promise of still +greater violence. Supperless and worried, the old +sailor watched the night fall with but one thing to +cheer his drooping spirits—Chris was evidently +slowly improving. Likely much of the poison had +been drawn out from his wound by the hot mud +and the balance remaining had been overcome in +its paralyzing effects by the powerful stimulant. +The lad's pulse was slowly growing stronger and +it was clear that the crisis had been safely passed.</p> + +<p>The old sailor was too worried about the absent +lads to compose himself to sleep. Already, the surf +was sending up small wavelets far into the marsh.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[178]</a></span> +If the boys were returning the way they went, their +journey would be fraught with perils.</p> + +<p>The sky was covered with fleecy clouds but they +disappeared with the rising of the moon and by its +bright light he could see far out on the water where +the huge waves broke foaming white on the outer +bar.</p> + +<p>Suddenly he gave a shout that made Chris stir +in his stupor; "The boys! The boys!" he cried +in delight.</p> + +<p>In the broad path of moonlight, a small schooner +appeared feeling her way through a passage in the +reef under close-reefed sails.</p> + +<p>"They must have someone aboard that knows the +reef," he mused as he watched the little ship cautiously +weaving her way in between the dangerous +rocks.</p> + +<p>She held steadily for the shore until she was +scarce two cable lengths from it, then, she shot up +into the wind, her anchor was dropped, and her +sails lowered.</p> + +<p>The captain was down on the shore, heedless of +the flying spray, when the anchor hit the bottom.</p> + +<p>"Walt! Charley!" he roared at the top of his +voice.</p> + +<p>There was no answer and he hailed again.</p> + +<p>"Ahoy! Shore!" came an answering hail from +the schooner. "Who air yo' and what do yo' +want?"</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[179]</a></span></p> + +<p>The captain was silent for a moment with disappointment. +It was not the boys after all, but any +help was welcome at such a time and he made haste +to reply.</p> + +<p>"We're two shipwrecks in bad shape an' need +help. Who are you?"</p> + +<p>"The Hattie Roberts, sponger, from Key West. +Stan' by, an' we'll send a boat."</p> + +<p>While the strangers were launching a boat, the +captain had time to observe that the schooner's +decks were piled full of small boats and that, small +as she was, she carried a crew of at least thirty +men.</p> + +<p>"An old style, pole an' hook sponger," he decided. +"I didn't reckon there was any of them +left. I 'lowed the Greeks had run 'em all out of +business."</p> + +<p>Manned by half a dozen men, the little boat +came tearing through the waves towards the shore. +Flung up by a huge roller, she grounded almost at +the captain's feet. The instant she touched bottom, +her crew sprang over the side and drew her up safely +beyond the reach of the next roller. Even by the +dimmed light of the moon, the old sailor could see +that the new-comers were dark-skinned men with +heavy coarse features. He recognized them without +the aid of the peculiar accent as Conchs,—a +kind of mixed race belonging to the Florida Keys.</p> + +<p>"Whar's yo's companion?" demanded one, who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[180]</a></span> +from his air of authority was evidently the captain.</p> + +<p>"He's on a little island just a little ways from +here. I'll have to get one of your men to help me +down with him."</p> + +<p>"All right, Sam here will go with yo'. Step +lively, we have got to pull out from hyar quick. +There ain't as good anchorage as I 'lowed to find +behind the reef. We'll have to make foah a better +harbor."</p> + +<p>The captain, with the sailor detailed to help him, +was hurrying off on their mission when the Conch's +skippers curiosity caused him to stop him in spite of +the preciousness of time.</p> + +<p>"How did yo's git hyah in such a fix," he demanded.</p> + +<p>"Been sponging with a Greek crew. Crew +mutinied. We escaped in a diving boat. Got +wrecked in the night on the reef out thar," replied +Captain Westfield, briefly.</p> + +<p>"Sponging with the Greeks!" snarled the Conch +with an oath. "Then the Greeks can help yo' out +of yo'r fix, by all that's Holy, I won't. Hyah, Sam, +jump aboard with yo'."</p> + +<p>"You are not agoin' to desert us?" cried the +captain in bewildered consternation. "For the love +of humanity, man, what do you mean?"</p> + +<p>"I mean that I won't raise a finger to help any +mons who deals with the Greeks—blast 'em," cried +the Conch, fiercely. "They've ruined us an' our<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[181]</a></span> +people. We used to be a happy an' prosperous race +a'fore they came with their diving suits an' tramped +all over the bottom of the Gulf. Killing the little +baby sponges with their iron shoes, an' stripping the +bottom clean as a Conch's floor. We've been run +out of the business, an' they did it. We've lost our +homes, an' they caused it. Our families don't have +enough to eat an' wear any more, an' they are the +reason—curse 'em, curse 'em, curse 'em."</p> + +<p>"But you are leaving us to certain death, man!" +pleaded Captain Westfield, "The water is rising +over the marsh, already."</p> + +<p>"An' it will be flooded inside of ten hours," declared +the Conch with cruel satisfaction. "All +aboard mons an' shove off."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield grasped the gunwale of the +boat and tried to hold it while he reasoned and +argued with the fanatical Conch, but the infuriated +man rapped his knuckles with an oar and gave him +a shove with the blade that sent him struggling +backwards. By the time the old sailor recovered his +balance, the boat had been shoved off and was out +of his reach. He shook his clenched fist at the +Conch's receding figure.</p> + +<p>"You'll pay for this," he shouted. "No good +will come to you after such a trick." But it is +doubtful if the Conch even heard his voice above +the roar of the wind.</p> + +<p>The captain stood watching grimly until the boat<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[182]</a></span> +reached the schooner's side, and her close-reefed +sails were hoisted, her anchor broke and she headed +to the South inside the line of reef. When she had +faded away into the night, he turned back for the +camp filled with disappointment and dismay.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXIV.<br /> + +<small>THE FLOOD.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">As</span> the old sailor made his way back to the +island, he was alarmed to see how rapidly the water +was rising over the marsh. He splashed knee-deep +in the water at every step and it was easy to see +that it still continued to rise with astonishing +rapidity.</p> + +<p>His first act on reaching the island was to move +the camp to the highest knoll of ground, already +the lowest lying portions of the island were submerged. +Chris had regained consciousness though +he was still too weak to move without assistance. +He watched the old sailor's preparations with +evident interest and looked at the rapidly rising +water with evident anxiety.</p> + +<p>"If dat water doan stop comin' up, we is sho' +goin' to hab a hard time gettin' anythin' to eat," +he observed. "Can't get ober dem rock no way when<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[183]</a></span> +dey is covered wid water, sho' to break a leg in one +ob dem holes."</p> + +<p>"The Lord will watch out for us, lad," encouraged +the captain. "Look at all that He has brought +us through. He has never deserted us in our hour +of need."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little +darkey, thoughtfully. He remained quiet for a +few minutes then said quaintly, "'Spect's we +oughter ask him to look out foah Massa Charley +an' Massa Walt. I'ze getting plum anxious 'bout +dem two white chillins. Dey had oughter been back +long 'fore dis. Massa Charley's mighty clever, but +I 'spect dat it wouldn't do no harm to ax de Lawd +to help him out a bit if he's in trouble."</p> + +<p>"No one can do without the Lord's help, Chris," +the captain said, gravely, "an', I reckon, them lads +need it powerful bad. Something pretty serious +has happened, I 'low, to keep them from coming +back. We'll ask the Good Lord to watch out for +them an' protect them."</p> + +<p>The old sailor knelt by the little negro's side +and in simple seafaring language prayed that the +Heavenly Father would watch over and protect the +missing ones.</p> + +<p>The simple steadfast faith of the old seaman +and the trusting little negro filled them with a sense +of security and peace. They doubted not that their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[184]</a></span> +humble petition would be answered and that now a +Heavenly Eye was watching over them and their +absent companions and that a Divine Hand would +guide them through their trials and danger. They +stretched out on their leafy couches and went fast +to sleep, while the storm raged and howled around +them and the rising water crept slowly up on their +little island.</p> + +<p>It was broad daylight when they awoke and +looked about them. It was a wild and terrifying +scene that met their eyes. The marsh between them +and the sea was completely submerged and covered +with rolling white-caps. Far out on the reef they +could see the mighty rollers flinging their spray +forty feet in the air when they struck the sunken +rocks. Of the island, none remained except the +high sands and knoll upon which was their camp. +Between the island and the mainland was two miles +of swirling, foaming water.</p> + +<p>"Can't get to shore, no ways, now, Massa Captain," +Chris observed. "You had oughter gone +in las' night when you had a chance an' left dis +nigger behind."</p> + +<p>"The Lord will look out for us, lad," said the +old sailor cheerfully. "I don't calculate that the +water's going to rise high enough to cover this +knoll we are on an' as soon as the wind drops a +bit, the boys will be back for us with a boat. It's +just a matter of being patient for a little while.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[185]</a></span> +We may get a little bit hungry, but, I reckon, we +can stand that without grumbling."</p> + +<p>"Sho' we can," agreed Chris, bravely. "Tho' +hit do seem like I was gettin' powerful hungry already. +Ain't dar none of dem cassava roots dat +we can get at?"</p> + +<p>A close search revealed that most of the patch +of tubers was covered by the rising water. A few +plants however still showed on the little knoll and +these the captain dug at once. There was only a +scant half peck of the roots but that was better +than nothing.</p> + +<p>The old sailor kindled a little fire and roasted +all the roots in the coals.</p> + +<p>"We might as well have one good full meal," he +observed, "I never did take much stock in this idea +of going on short rations when grub is scarce. I +always 'lowed that one good feed would carry a +man further than a dozen pesky little ones that +only tantalize the stomach."</p> + +<p>But the roots shrank greatly in the cooking, by +the time the skins were removed, there was but little +left for the hungry castaways. They still felt empty +after their meal was finished.</p> + +<p>The day dragged wearily away with no sign of +abatement of the storm. The water continued to +rise slowly, but so slowly that the two anxious +watchers were not without hope that the little knoll +on which they were would escape the overflow.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[186]</a></span> +Their position was by no means uncomfortable. +There was no rain and the weather was so warm +that the wind did not cause them to suffer any from +cold. Aside from their growing hunger and their +anxiety about their missing companions, they were +quite comfortable. Chris, in fact, was in better +shape than at any time since they had been cast on +shore.</p> + +<p>"I don' reckon dis storm can las' berry much +longer," he observed, cheerfully, when the sun went +down in a perfectly clear sky. "Dar ain't no +clouds to back up de wind an' hit's bound to play +out 'fore long."</p> + +<p>"That's just where you're wrong, lad," said the +captain. "A gale from a clear sky is the worst of +all. I ain't ever seen many of them but what I have +seen were all hummers."</p> + +<p>The two sat looking out on the gloomy waste of +waters until the moon, now at its full, rose and lit +up the wild scene about them almost as brightly as +day. At last they tired of the wild, gloomy, disheartening +scene, and, after a short prayer together, +stretched out on their couches. Chris was almost +instantly asleep but the captain lay long awake, his +mind full of their helpless situation, and, of anxious +conjectures as to the fate of the two absent lads. +His own position and that of his little companion +was such as to awaken his deepest fears. So long +as the storm continued, their rescue by land or Gulf<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[187]</a></span> +was impossible. No boat could live amongst the +rocks and raging waters which now surrounded +them. His long experience told him that the storm +was likely to continue at least two days longer.—He +had seen similar gales blow for an entire week +without a let up. Even after the gale was over, +it would take some little time for the waves and +water to subside. At the best, they would suffer +greatly from hunger before their rescue would be +possible. But, to do the old sailor justice, his +thoughts were not so much of their own situation +as of the absent lads. He could only hope and +pray that they had not started to return by water +before the breaking of the storm.</p> + +<p>As he lay motionless musing, his ear caught a +low grating sound as of heavy objects drawn on +coarse sand. He quickly sat up on his couch and +looked around. In the bright moonlight he could +see large dark objects moving over the white sand.</p> + +<p>"'Gators, an' a regular drove of them," he exclaimed. +"Wake up, Chris! Wake up!"</p> + +<p>The little negro struggled up into a sitting position, +still half asleep.</p> + +<p>"What's de matter, Massa Cap?" he inquired.</p> + +<p>"Look at them 'gators, thar's dozens of them. +We've got to have a fire mighty quick an' stick close +to it."</p> + +<p>Chris greeted the sight of the dark objects with +a cry of joy.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[188]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Oh, Golly! De Good Lord's dun answered our +prayers. Dem's turtles."</p> + +<p>The old sailor sprang to his feet and would have +dashed for the nearest object if the little negro had +not restrained him.</p> + +<p>"You sho' scare dem all away if you do dat way," +he cautioned. "Jus' wait till dey gets to layin' an' +you can walk right up on 'em."</p> + +<p>The huge creatures crept steadily on up the shelving +knoll. Their progress was slow and clumsy, +and their lower shells dragging over the sand had +made the grinding noise the captain had heard. +They crept up to within ten feet of where the two +watchers lay, then, they halted, and, with their hind +flippers began to dig deep holes in the soft sand.</p> + +<p>"Dey lays der eggs in dem holes an' covers dem +up wid sand," Chris explained in a whisper. "Dey +each lays mighty nigh two hundred eggs. De warm +sand hatches out de little turtles."</p> + +<p>The two castaways waited until the great sea +hens had begun to lay, then Chris arose and walked +directly for them without any attempt at concealment. +The turtles did not pay the slightest attention +to his approach.</p> + +<p>"We'll take dese two smallest ones," he announced. +"Dey will be de tenderest. Jus' grab de +shell wid me, Massa Cap, back by de hind flippers +an' we'll flop 'em over on his back. Keep youah +eyes an' mouth shut."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[189]</a></span></p> + +<p>But the old sailor was too excited to heed the +advice. He grabbed the turtle's shell and heaved, +then staggered back spitting and coughing with +mouth, eyes, and ears full of sand, which the +creature with it's flippers sent flying in a cloud about +it.</p> + +<p>Chris waited until he had relieved himself of the +stinging sand and this time the captain, following +his advice, kept mouth and eyes tightly closed. A +few seconds sufficed to turn the two turtles on their +backs where they lay helpless.</p> + +<p>There must have been at least thirty turtles in +the bunch but the castaways contented themselves +with only turning the two, any more would have +been useless slaughter. Those unmolested quickly +completed their laying, covered the eggs and retreated +to the water.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXV.<br /> + +<small>THE FLOATING HATCH.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> castaways lost no time in rejoicing over +their good fortune. The Captain hastily kindled a +fire while Chris, with his sheath knife, proceeded to +butcher the smallest of the two turtles. Much experience +had made the little negro expert at the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[190]</a></span> +work and in a few minutes he had severed the two +shells and cut off several thick steaks from one of +the hind flippers. Then, squatting before the fire, +each impaled a steak on the end of a pointed stick +and toasted it over the coals.</p> + +<p>How good the steaming juicy meat tasted to the +two hungry ones. Steak after steak was broiled +and eaten before their ravenous appetites were +satisfied and they could eat no more.</p> + +<p>"Midnight is a sorter unusual hour for a feed," +Captain Westfield observed, "but, I reckon, we will +sleep none the worse for it. I 'low, we ain't got to +lay awake none worryin' about food now. Thar's +meat enough to last us for two weeks at least."</p> + +<p>"An' maybe, Ole Mister Gale will blow hisself +out," said Chris, hopefully, as, yawning sleepily he +stretched himself again on his couch.</p> + +<p>It was broad day when the castaways awoke from +the heavy slumber which had followed their hearty +midnight supper. They found the gale still blowing +with undiminished violence and the sky still brightly +blue. One thing, however, gave them great satisfaction, +the water had ceased to encroach upon their +little knoll. It had evidently reached its height.</p> + +<p>After a hearty breakfast of turtle steaks, the +two proceeded at once to dress and cure the turtles, +for they well knew that under the sun's heat the +fresh meat would soon spoil.</p> + +<p>They had neither salt nor smoke house with<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[191]</a></span> +which to cure it, but they went at the task with sure +confidence in the result. The meat was first cut +away from the shells and skinned, care being taken +to remove every particle of the greenish-colored +fat. Then, cutting across the grain, the meat was +divided into thin strips and spread upon leaves to +dry in the hot sun. It only remained for them to +protect it from the dews of night and chance rains +and a few days would see it thoroughly cured and +capable of keeping sweet and good so long as it was +kept dry.</p> + +<p>With some hazy idea that they might be of some +future use, the captain cleaned and washed out the +two, great, trough-like, upper shells of the turtles.</p> + +<p>"Dat looks like a lump of wreckage out dar by +de reef, Massa Cap," Chris observed as he +straightened up from his task of spreading out the +meat. "Pears like de tide is settin' hit in dis +way."</p> + +<p>"It is a bit of wreckage or a clump of seaweed," +the captain agreed after a brief survey. "It's drifting +in all right, but it's going to miss the island by +a good hundred yards."</p> + +<p>The two suspended work while they watched the +drifting object slowly near their island.</p> + +<p>"It looks like a hatch with something like a stack +atop of it," he observed to the captain as the object +drew close.</p> + +<p>"Hit's a man or 'ooman atop ob hit," cried Chris,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[192]</a></span> +whose eyes were keener than the old sailor's. "He's +layin' plum still, jes' like he was dead."</p> + +<p>Closer approach of the object convinced the captain +that the little negro was correct. There was +beyond doubt a motionless body lying on the low +floating hatch. It was evident too that the hatch +with its burden would pass the island at a distance +of at least one hundred and fifty yards. To venture +out and attempt to tow it in was to assume a terrible +risk. The water between it and the island was raging +and tossing over dozens of dangerous hidden +rocks. Only the strongest swimmer would have the +slightest chance of success, and, even should he +succeed, it might be to find that he had risked his +life to rescue a corpse. But the ocean breeds in its +followers a brotherhood that leads them to deeds of +quiet heroism. They never know when they may +be in need of a rescuing hand and it is seldom that +one turns aside from the rendering of service, no +matter how dangerous it may be to himself.</p> + +<p>When the hatch with its burden was nearly +abreast of the island Chris began to strip off his +clothes, but the Captain stopped him.</p> + +<p>"You're still too weak to attempt it, lad," he declared. +"You couldn't make it thar an' back, I +reckon I can fight it out all right. I've mighty nigh +got back all my strength."</p> + +<p>Hastily stripping off the pants and shirt in which +he was clothed, the old sailor slipped off into the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[193]</a></span> +water and struck out for the wreckage with long +steady strokes, warily avoiding the foaming spots +which marked the positions of the larger rocks. +The swim was not difficult for so experienced a +swimmer. The struggle would come when he +attempted to return with his burden. In a few +minutes, he reached the wreckage and, resting his +hand upon the hatch gazed down at the burden it +bore. He saw a man, apparently about forty years +of age, attired in rough seaman's garb, his face +bronzed and seamed from long years of exposure +to wind and weather. The stranger was lying flat +on his back on the hatch, his legs dangling over the +end. A rope passed around his body and under the +wood work prevented the larger seas from washing +him off his frail support. He was unconscious and +the captain reached over and placed his ear close +to his chest. He could detect a faint beating of +the heart. It was slow and feeble but still it was +beating,—the man was alive.</p> + +<p>Once satisfied of this fact, the old sailor quickly +shifted to the end of the hatch, and, resting one +hand upon it, and striking out with the other hand +and both feet, strove to force it back to the island. +He had not accomplished half the distance with his +burden when he saw that he could not hope to succeed. +The tide was slowly but surely sweeping him +in past the island direct for the mainland. Still, +he battled desperately on, swimming with all his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[194]</a></span> +strength. Suddenly the little raft seemed to move +forward with increased speed.</p> + +<p>"Take it easy, Massa Cap," sounded Chris' voice +close to his elbow. "We can make it togedder all +right." The plucky little negro had been quick to +see the danger and equally quick to come to the +rescue.</p> + +<p>Between the two, after half an hour of heartbreaking +battling with the current, they managed +to shove the raft ashore, where they sank exhausted +and panting upon the sand.</p> + +<p>As soon as they were able to move, they unlashed +the unconscious sailor from the hatch, and, carrying +him up, laid him upon the captain's couch. The +man seemed nearly dead, and for hours the +two, wet, exhausted castaways worked over him, +struggling to coax the spark of life into a flame. At +last they were rewarded by seeing a tinge of color +creep into the bronzed face. At length the sailor +sighed and opened his eyes.</p> + +<p>"Water," he gasped, faintly.</p> + +<p>"Golly! I should reckon he's had 'bout enough +water," Chris exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"Get some for him quick," Captain Westfield +commanded. "The salt brine he has swallowed +has parched his throat and stomach."</p> + +<p>The sailor took only one mouthful of the proffered +water, then spat it out with his face twitching.</p> + +<p>"Salt, salt," he murmured.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[195]</a></span></p> + +<p>A horrible fear seized the captain. He snatched +the shell from Chris' hand and took a swallow of +the water. His fear was confirmed, it was salt. +The Gulf had risen close enough to their little well +to percolate through the sand into it and render it +as salt as itself.</p> + +<p>The little negro divined the situation from the +captain's face. "Golly! dat's bad," he cried. +"Doin' widout water is a heap wurser den doin' +widout food."</p> + +<p>"Water, give me water," pleaded the rescued +man. "My throat's parched, parched."</p> + +<p>"You shall have some water as soon as we can +get it," Captain Westfield assured him. There was +something vaguely familiar to the old sailor in the +man's queerly accented speech. It was more puzzling +as he had no recollection of ever having seen +the man before.</p> + +<p>Considering his low condition the sailor recovered +his full senses and a measure of his strength with +astonishing rapidity. It was plain that he had not +been deprived of either food or water for any great +length of time. He was soon able to sit up and take +notice of his surroundings. A curious look stole +over his bronzed face as his gaze took in the two +castaways.</p> + +<p>"How did I get hyah?" he demanded.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield related the story of the rescue +briefly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[196]</a></span></p> + +<p>The sailor's rough features worked with emotion. +"I remember part," he cried. "Our vessel struck +on Needle Rocks in the darkness an' went down like +a stone. I had just time to throw myself on the +hatch an' pass a rope around my waist. The crew," +he shuddered—"must have all been dashed to +pieces against the rocks. God knows how I escaped. +An' yo' risked yo'r lives to save mine, yo' an' that +boy. Mon, how could yo' forgive me enough to do +such a deed?"</p> + +<p>"Forgive you?" echoed the captain, puzzled. +"I had nothin' to forgive."</p> + +<p>"I am Rufus Sanders, the Key West sponger who +refused yo'r appeals for help an' left yo' to yo'r +fate," cried the man, excitedly.</p> + +<p>"I did not know that, but it would have made no +difference," said the captain, gently. "You were a +helpless, shipwrecked man." He checked the flood +of thanks on the sponger captain's lips. "You have +nothing to thank us for," he declared. "We have +only saved you from one fate to suffer a worse with +us. We are hopelessly imprisoned on this island, +an' we have no water. All we can do is endure, +pray an' hope."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[197]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVI.<br /> + +<small>WITH THE BOYS.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Considering</span> the misfortunes which had befallen +them, the two chums were in surprisingly good +spirits, as they picked their way through the marsh, +headed South. It was a relief to be free from the +dread and apprehension under which they had labored +for so many days.</p> + +<p>"I feel almost as though we were on a picnic, +instead of being shipwrecked sailors who have been +robbed of their ship, and have lost all except the +clothes on their backs," Charley declared.</p> + +<p>"Everything is going to turn out all right after +all," agreed Walter, hopefully. "Chris is going to +get over his wound all right. He and the captain +will have no trouble in getting plenty of food and +water. We had ought to reach Judson by dark, and +we'll get a boat or wagon and return for them at +once. We can easily get from Judson to Tarpon, +and there we can get the United States Commissioner +to take up our case, and the minute the +'Beauty' enters port she will be seized and held for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[198]</a></span> +us. At the worst it will only mean the loss of our +diving boat and a little patient waiting. And think +of the store of gold which will be ours for a little +work."</p> + +<p>But his chum was not quite so optimistic. "I do +not think that we had better build too great hopes +on recovering either our ship or the gold," he observed. +"That Manuel is a clever rascal. I fear +he will rise to the occasion. He may think that we +are wrecked in the storm but I am convinced he +will take no chances. He will plan and scheme to +the last to secure the ship and money and save his +own neck from the halter. He may be caught at +last but he will not sail boldly into any port. He's +too wary for that."</p> + +<p>His words did not dampen Walter's high spirits. +"There is a revenue cutter at Tarpon," reminded +his chum. "As soon as we get to Judson, we will +telegraph to the Commissioner. He will not wait +for the 'Beauty' to touch a port if we can put our +case strong enough. He will start the cutter out in +search of her at once."</p> + +<p>"I hope you are right. If we are going to make +Judson before dark, however, we are going to have +to travel faster than we are going now. It's slow +going amongst this mud and rock. Let us make our +way inshore and see if it's any better traveling +there."</p> + +<p>But as they approached close to the mainland<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[199]</a></span> +they saw that there was no hopes of easier traveling +in that direction. The dense hammock jungle extended +down to the edge of the marsh. To make +one's way through it would be far slower than to +continue over the marsh. They, accordingly, retraced +their steps to the water's edge. It was +slightly easier traveling close to the water. The +waves had beat down the marsh grass along the +edge leaving a kind of beach of rock and mud. It +was hard and dangerous walking but safer than over +the marsh itself, where the rank growth hid the +treacherous bog holes.</p> + +<p>The boys often paused in their march to examine +the masses of stuff that had been cast up by the +waves. The squall of the night before had robbed +the bottom of great masses of seaweed and had +taken heavy toll of the life in the water. Every few +minutes the lads would pass great clumps of seaweed +tangled together in beautiful rainbows of +bright scarlets, yellows, crimsons and purples. Curiously +enough, the storm had dealt very harshly with +the finny tribe. Likely many of the fish had been +caught in shoal water and their lives beaten out +against the cruel rocks. They dotted the shore and +the chums frequently halted to admire one's curious +shape or coloring.</p> + +<p>"I wonder what kind this one is?" said Walter, +pointing to a long slim fish of a beautiful brilliant +green.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[200]</a></span></p> + +<p>"That is a parrot fish," his chum enlightened +him. "I think they are one of the most beautiful +fishes that swim. They are of all colors, some are +violet, some of golden, some scarlet, and in fact, +they are found of every shade and hue. They get +their names from their many brilliant colors, I +guess."</p> + +<p>"What a wonderful mysterious thing the sea is," +Walter commented. "I never realized before how +much of strange life it contains."</p> + +<p>"What we see along the beach this morning is +only a very small sample of its population," his +chum replied. "Sometimes, I think that all life +must have come first from the sea. There is hardly +an animal on land which has not a grotesque likeness +in some creature of the sea. Take that fish there +with the peculiarly shaped head and horns. Its +resemblance to a cow is so striking that it has been +named the cow fish. There is another little fish with +a head just like a horse. It is called the sea horse. +Then there is the toad fish, the frog fish, the snake +fish, and hundreds of others closely resembling the +animals after which they are named. But here," he +concluded, "is, in my opinion, the most wonderful +fish I have ever heard of. I have seen many of them +but one always has a puzzling fascination to me."</p> + +<p>He had stopped before a flat round-shaped fish +which lay stranded in the edge of the water. It was +still alive and struggling feebly to get back into<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[201]</a></span> +deeper water. It was of a light-tan color and was +covered with spots of darker hue. On its upper +surface was a soft, spongy-looking, circular spot +It was not a pretty looking object and Walter +viewed it with disgust.</p> + +<p>"I don't see anything fascinating about it," he +commented.</p> + +<p>"Just put your finger on that soft spongy place," +Charley directed, "that's where it's wonderful +secret is concealed. It is not poisonous," he added +as his chum hesitated.</p> + +<p>Walter bent down and pressed his finger against +the spongy mass. The next instant he leaped back +with a cry of alarm, shaking his arm madly. +"Jerusalem!" he exclaimed. "What is it?"</p> + +<p>"Got a shock did you?" laughed his chum. +"That's an electrical fish. Their mystery to me +lies in where they get the electricity with which they +are charged. Even a small one like that contains +enough to give a powerful shock."</p> + +<p>The morning had been advancing rapidly as they +walked and talked and the sun was shining down +hot on their bare heads. Charley, justifying Chris' +confidence in him, was quick to recognize the danger +from its torrid rays.</p> + +<p>He cast a look up at the sun. "It is nearly +noon," he declared. "We must get something to +cover our heads with and then find something to +eat. I am getting as hungry as a wolf."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[202]</a></span></p> + +<p>There was nothing along the rocky, muddy beach +that would do for hats and the two bent their steps +in towards the mainland. There, they broke off +small leafy branches and thrust the stems down +the backs of their shirts so that the leaves would +tower above, and shade their heads. These made +only a poor substitute for hats, but shed off the +fiercest rays of the sun.</p> + +<p>Close to where they broke off the boughs was a +small running stream and the boys drank thankfully +of its cold sweet water.</p> + +<p>"We have no time to waste in cooking and I fear +our bill-o-fare for dinner will be rather scanty," +Charley said. "Let's look around here and see if +we cannot find fruit of some kind."</p> + +<p>There were palmetto berries in plenty all along +the high bank but the lads had no desire to partake +of them except in a case of necessity. Seeing nothing +promising along the edge of the jungle, they +scrambled up the bank and made their way slowly +and cautiously into the hammock, keeping a wary +eye out for snakes. They found fruit of several +kinds in abundance, but most of it Charley rejected +as being poisonous, or not fit to eat. They gathered +two kinds which he declared were both palatable +and nourishing. One was a golden-red fruit about +the size of a pear. It contained a large nut to which +the meat clung closely. One bite into it and the +boys' hands and faces were smeared with sticky<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[203]</a></span> +juice. "I would recognize that smeary juice and +strong turpentine flavor, anywhere," laughed +Walter, "these are mangoes, the fruit, they say, +you have got to get into a bath-tub to eat if you +want to keep clean."</p> + +<p>The second fruit was about the size of a large +plum and snow white in color with a blotch of red +on the sides. Its meat was sweet, milky and +slightly puckering.</p> + +<p>"They are cocoa-plums," Charley explained. +"They are considered quite nutritious but I would +be afraid to eat a great many of them at a time on +account of their puckerishness. We can eat all we +want to of the mangoes however, they will not +hurt us."</p> + +<p>As soon as their repast was finished the boys +filled their pockets with mangoes and cocoa-plums +and hastened back to the shore.</p> + +<p>They plodded steadily along while the afternoon +wore away, but their progress over the rocks and +mud was slow and they realized that they would +not be able to reach Judson before darkness +rendered further traveling dangerous.</p> + +<p>They were passing a matted clump of seaweed +on the shore when Charley, stopping with a cry of +delight, fished out from its midst a round piece of +wood about four feet in length, from which trailed +a long, light line badly frayed in places by the rock.</p> + +<p>"Do you recognize this?" he shouted.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[204]</a></span></p> + +<p>"No," replied his chum in wonder at his excitement.</p> + +<p>"It's the buoy that marked the place where the +gold ship lay. The Greeks will have a job to locate +the gold now. That storm must have chafed the +rope in two against a ledge of coral. Hurrah, +hurrah."</p> + +<p>"I don't see but that is as bad news for us as for +the Greeks," Walter said, dubiously.</p> + +<p>"It is, in a way," his chum replied. "Of course +it will make it harder for us to find the exact spot +where the treasure lays, but the Greeks will be +delayed by it and that will give us a chance to get +there with the revenue cutter and catch them before +they get all the gold removed and get away."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[205]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVII.<br /> + +<small>THE JOURNEY.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> still lacked about an hour to sundown when +Charley called a halt. "We cannot possibly make +Judson before night, and it would be sheer foolishness +to try to travel over these rocks after it gets +dark," he declared. "We would be sure to get +some bad falls and very likely break an arm or leg. +The best thing we can do is to find a good place to +camp while it is still light and make ourselves as +snug as possible for the night."</p> + +<p>Walter, who was beginning to feel tired out from +the long day's tramp, was quick to agree with his +proposal and the two lads headed in for the mainland, +for neither felt any desire to spend the night +on the wet, muddy marsh.</p> + +<p>Good fortune seemed to guide their footsteps for +they struck the mainland just where a little stream +of clear water bubbled forth amongst a clump of +towering cedars.</p> + +<p>"The very place for our camp," Charley exclaimed. +"You see what you can fix up in the way<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[206]</a></span> +of a shelter, Walt, while I look around and see +what I can find for our supper."</p> + +<p>Walter was fast becoming an adept at the science +of woodcraft and he went about his task with certainty +and dispatch. First, he broke off armsful of +small boughs which he spread in two piles upon the +ground close to the trunks of two big cedar trees. +These were to serve as their couches and over them +he proceeded to erect a rough lean-to to protect them +from the wind and dew. There were plenty of dead +boughs all around, and, selecting two of the longest +and straightest, he leaned them against the trunk +of the two trees about six feet from the ground, +embedding their other ends firmly in the ground. +Across these, he laid other limbs a couple of feet +apart and upon them piled palmetto leaves and +boughs to form a roof. Before the open front of +the rude structure, he built a roaring fire of dead +cedar limbs. Close beside it he piled up a huge +heap of wood with which to keep the fire replenished +throughout the night. This completed his labors, +and stretching himself upon his springy, fragrant +couch before the crackling fire, he waited hungrily +for his chum's return. He was becoming alarmed +over his long absence when there came a crackling +of boughs and Charley strode into the circle of firelight, +bearing in one hand a snow-white heart, or +bud, of a cabbage palmetto and in the other, a chunk +of fresh meat several pounds in weight.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[207]</a></span></p> + +<p>"What have you got there?" he inquired, +eagerly.</p> + +<p>Charley grinned, "I'm too hungry to stop and tell +you now. Sharpen up a couple of sticks and we'll +broil some steaks, then, I'll give you three guesses +as to what it is, and bet that you don't guess right."</p> + +<p>Walter hastily cut two long green palmetto stems +and sharpened them to points at the ends. By the +time he had them ready, Charley had cut a couple of +generous-sized steaks from the hunk of meat. The +balance of it he wrapped up in a couple of green +palmetto leaves and buried in the coals. While the +steaks impaled upon the sticks were sizzling appetizingly +before the fire, he wrapped up the palmetto +heart in green leaves and buried it beside the roasting +meat.</p> + +<p>So hungry was Walter that he cut bits from his +steak before it was fairly done and devoured them +with eager appetite.</p> + +<p>"Like it?" inquired his chum with a twinkle in +his eye.</p> + +<p>"Fine, it only needs a little salt to make it +perfect," Walter declared. "I can't quite place it +though. It tastes like a cross between pork and +beefsteak. What is it anyway?"</p> + +<p>"Guess."</p> + +<p>"Pork?"</p> + +<p>"Nit."</p> + +<p>"Coon?"</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[208]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Nit."</p> + +<p>"Opossum?"</p> + +<p>"Nit."</p> + +<p>"I give it up then. What kind of animal is it?"</p> + +<p>"I found it on the bank of a little creek not far +from here," said Charley, dreamily. "It was sound +asleep and it did not look very pretty or innocent +even in its slumber, but beggars can't be choosers, +so I got me a good heavy club and crept up on it +softly. When it woke up I was near enough to give +it a good rap over the head. It gave me a couple +of good licks in the shins with its tail, however, before +I got it killed."</p> + +<p>Walter rose in his indignation, "Why didn't you +tell me at the start that it was alligator meat," he +demanded, "I would not have eaten a mouthful of +it."</p> + +<p>"And you'd gone hungry to bed," said his chum +with a chuckle. "You'd have let your prejudice +cheat you out of a good meal. It tastes all right, +don't it."</p> + +<p>"Yes," Walter admitted, ruefully, "and, now +that I've eaten some of it, I might as well keep right +on eating."</p> + +<p>"Wise lad," Charley approved. "Let me tell +you there are lots worse things than alligator steaks +when one is hungry."</p> + +<p>The steaks disposed of, the boys attacked the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[209]</a></span> +roasted meat and palmetto cabbage with such +vigorous appetites that there was but little left when +their hunger was at last appeased.</p> + +<p>"Pretty slim show for breakfast," said Charley, +ruefully, as he eyed the scanty remains. "Let's see +if we can't fix up some way to catch something during +the night."</p> + +<p>The plan which they finally decided upon to +accomplish this was very simple. With their sharp +knives, they whittled out several sets of figure-four +setters, and, dragging several small logs just outside +the circle of firelight, they placed a figure-four +setter under an end of each and baited the triggers +with bits of meat left from their supper. An +animal nosing around after the bait would be sure +to spring the setter and cause the log to descend +upon it.</p> + +<p>"We will surely get a coon or opossum before +morning," Charley declared. "Animals have lots +of curiosity and some of them are sure to be +attracted by the light of our camp-fire. The smell +of the cooked meat will attract them also."</p> + +<p>This last task completed, the boys stretched themselves +on their soft couches before the cheery fire +whose rays danced and flickered amongst the leafy +greenness of their shelter. It was a cozy, cheery +little camp and the two lads lay long awake, talking +hopefully with the cheery optimism that waits +upon a hearty supper and healthy vigorous youth.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[210]</a></span> +When at last they fell asleep, it was with confident +hope of a successful morrow.</p> + +<p>It seemed to Walter that he had barely fallen +asleep when he was struggling in that nightmare +state which lies halfway between slumber and +entire wakefulness. He struggled pantingly for +breath, but every breath he drew seemed to stifle +him. Oppressed with black horror, he fought his +way back to consciousness. But wakefulness +brought small relief. The air was heavy with a +stench that nauseated and sickened him.</p> + +<p>Charley, crouched beside the fire, was holding his +nose with one hand, his face expressing unutterable +disgust.</p> + +<p>"What in the world is the matter?" Walter demanded.</p> + +<p>"One of our traps worked," announced his chum, +grimly. "It's only a little skunk, but my, what a +big smell."</p> + +<p>"I should say so," Walter agreed. "We can't +stay here. We'll have to move camp."</p> + +<p>"I second the motion to adjourn," said his chum, +solemnly.</p> + +<p>No time was lost in debating the question and the +lads quickly took their departure from their cozy +camp. They made their way cautiously along the +edge of the hammock until the raucous odor was +left behind, then they halted and built another fire.</p> + +<p>"The measly little varmint," said Walter,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[211]</a></span> +wrathfully, as they crouched beside the blaze. +"He's gone and cheated us out of a good night's +sleep."</p> + +<p>"Oh, it isn't as bad as all that," said his chum, +cheerfully. "It's nearly morning now. See, there's +the morning star in the East. Besides," he added, +whimsically, "That poor little fellow isn't to blame. +He didn't ask us to set a trap for him. I bet he +regrets the accident as much as we do." Then +throwing back his head he sang in his clear tenor +voice, "Driven From Home."</p> + +<p>As the humor of the incident dawned upon +Walter, he burst into laughter in which he was +joined by his fun-loving chum.</p> + +<p>It was too near morning to consider selecting +another shelter so the two sat beside the fire until +day broke, then they made their way back to the +camp to examine their traps. All were sprung, but, +outside of the skunk, the only victims were an opossum +and a coon which they bore back to their new +fire. The opossum they broiled and ate for breakfast +while the coon they roasted to carry along with +them for dinner.</p> + +<p>Sunrise found them once more on the march +headed South.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[212]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVIII.<br /> + +<small>JUDSON.<a name="FNanchor_A_1" id="FNanchor_A_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_1" class="fnanchor">[A]</a></small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">By</span> noon the two lads estimated that they must +have come at least twenty miles from where they +had left the captain and Chris, and, if the old sailor +had been right in his reckoning, they could not be +far from their objective point, the town of Judson. +They began now to keep a sharp watch ahead and +ere long were rewarded by the sight of a low black +line projecting out from the marsh ahead. A closer +approach resolved the low black line into a long, +shaky, decrepit wharf, its piling rotting from age +and neglect and its timbers and planking fast falling +into decay. On the mainland back of the marsh a +few rude cabins, each at least a half a mile distant +from its nearest neighbor, rose from the middles of +wide neglected fields. One lone, aged sloop rode at +anchor near the wharf. The little port and the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[213]</a></span> +hamlet itself seemed to wear an air of deadly decay, +sadness and gloom.</p> + +<p>"Not a very cheerful or prosperous-looking +place," Charley observed as they clambered up on +the wharf and made their way ashore over its shaky +timbers.</p> + +<p>"No," his chum agreed, "but I am thankful to +reach it, poor as it is. My feet are getting sore +from tramping over these rocks, I can tell you."</p> + +<p>At the shore end of the dock the two paused long +enough to take a more careful survey of the place.</p> + +<p>"I declare it looks as though it was deserted or +all the inhabitants dead," Walter said nervously, +"See how the roads are all grown up with weeds as +though they were never used. There is no sign of +anyone about either."</p> + +<p>"Just notice those cabins," his chum exclaimed, +"They look just like the pictures I have seen of +houses the first settlers used to build during the +Indian times. They are built of great logs and +have loopholes like the forts of those days. What +a queer place!"</p> + +<p>"Well, there's smoke coming from the chimney +of that nearest cabin, and there seems to be someone +working out in the field by it," said Walter with +a sigh of relief. "I was beginning to think it was +an abandoned village."</p> + +<p>The two bent their steps towards the cabin +indicated. It was set in a square clearing of about<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[214]</a></span> +twenty acres, that was surrounded by a strip of +pine woods which separated it from its nearest +neighbor. As they drew nearer, they could see a +man at work near the cabin. He was ploughing up +the ground with a rude plow hitched to a yoke of +oxen.</p> + +<p>As the boys stepped out of the road into the +clearing, they were greeted by savage barks, and a +pack of dogs lolling around the cabin woke into +sudden life and came tearing towards them.</p> + +<p>The man at the plough let go the handles and +sprang into the cabin. The next minute a rifle +barrel protruded from one of the loopholes, "Halt +right where you-all is," called a voice from behind +the rifle.</p> + +<p>"Call off your dogs," shouted Charley, as he and +Walter, snatching up a couple of sticks, endeavored +to keep the growling, snapping curs at bay.</p> + +<p>"Who are you-alls an' what do you want?" demanded +the holder of the rifle.</p> + +<p>"We were shipwrecked twenty-five miles up the +coast. We want supplies and help to bring in two +companions, one of whom is badly hurt," answered +Charley.</p> + +<p>"Come closer an' let me have a good look at you-all," +commanded the cabin's occupant, "Here yu +Bet, yu Tige, yu Jim, be still thar," he called to the +snarling pack which slunk growling away at his +harsh commands.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[215]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys drew near the cabin in obedience to +his order. A brief survey of them seemed to convince +its owner that they were not what he feared. +The cabin door was flung open, and, rifle in hand, +he appeared in the doorway.</p> + +<p>"Come in you-alls an' have a cheer," he invited. +"I'll jis' unhitch them oxen an' then, while I'm +rustling up a bit of supper, you-alls can give me +your story."</p> + +<p>The tired, hungry boys accepted his invitation +with alacrity, and, while he was busy unharnessing +the yoke of steers, they seated themselves in a couple +of rude home-made chairs, and gazed curiously +about them.</p> + +<p>The cabin was about twenty feet square. Its +rough log walls were whitewashed, and its pine-slab +floor spotlessly clean. At one end was a big old-fashioned +fireplace from the rafters above which +hung home-cured hams, slabs of bacon, and strings +of sausages. A barrel in a corner was heaped high +with huge, sweet, sugary yams. Several boxes beside +it were heaped with onions, cabbages, carrots, +pumpkins, and other vegetables. In another corner +stood a barrel of home-ground corn meal and a big +hogshead of water. Taken all in all, the little +cabin's interior was a sight to fill the two hungry +lads with satisfied anticipation. They had hardly +completed their survey of it when their strange host<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[216]</a></span> +entered latching and bolting the heavy door behind +him.</p> + +<p>He was a man about forty years of age, strongly +built, but sallow with the sallowness of the native +Floridian. His face was kindly in expression but +stamped on its every line was a look of uneasiness +and apprehension. It was not an expression of +fear but rather the look of a brave man who was +simply on his guard every moment against expected +dangers.</p> + +<p>"I sho' have got to ask you-all to excuse me fur +the way I dun greeted you," he apologized, "but, +you see, strangers are mighty scarse around hyar +an' one has to be plum' careful. I'se powerful glad +to see a new face though—it's been mighty nigh +two years since I had talk with a stranger. I +reckon, you-alls must be some hungry. I'll rustle +up a little supper while you-all gives me your tale."</p> + +<p>With a deftness that indicated long batching experience, +he cut great slices of ham and placed them +to broil over the coals, mixed a pone of corn bread +and put it to bake in a Dutch oven, and buried a +dozen big yams to roast among the embers. While +he was thus engaged, Charley related the story of +their voyage and shipwreck omitting only any mention +of the gold. His story was frequently interrupted +by his host's exclamations, "I swan, an' dew +tell." When the lad had finished, the stranger +beamed upon him with evident pleasure. "I swan,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[217]</a></span> +hit's jis' like a novel I read once," he declared, "hit +was writ by a fellow called Russell, Clark Russell, +if I don't disremember his name. I don't reckon +his story was true though. I 'lows he just made it +up outer his head—but the vittals is ready now, you-alls +jis' back up to the table thar an' helps yourselves."</p> + +<p>The hungry boys needed no second invitation but +fell to work on the tender juicy ham and sugary +yams with hearty appetites while their host as he +ate, watched them with evident pleasure at their +enjoyment. When all had finished, he put away the +dishes, filled his corn-cob pipe, and leaned back in +his chair against the wall.</p> + +<p>"You-alls can't go back to whar yu left the +captain an' the little nigger to-night, noways," he +observed.</p> + +<p>"No," Charley agreed, "but we would like to +start back early in the morning if we can get a +wagon or a boat."</p> + +<p>"Thar ain't no fitten road for a wagon leading up +the coast," observed their host. "I owns that little +sloop anchored down thar by the dock. I reckon, +you-alls could make out with her. I don't reckon +them Wrights would stop you-alls from going if +they understood jis' how things stood. I don't 'low +they would be so pesky pisen mean as all that. I'd +like to go with you-alls an' see that ole captain an' +that little nigger, I sho' would."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[218]</a></span></p> + +<p>"We would like to have you go with us," said +Walter, eagerly. "Why can't you?"</p> + +<p>"'Cause I don't ever expect to leave this hyar +cabin alive," said his host, calmly.</p> + +<p>The boys stared at him in uneasy astonishment.</p> + +<p>"No, I ain't crazy," said the man quietly. +"Hush, jis' lis'en' a bit."</p> + +<p>A long prolonged growl came from one of the +dogs outside. The man arose and taking up his +rifle stepped over to the loophole beckoning to the +lads to follow. The moon lit up the little clearing +almost as light as day. The dogs were moving +around outside, sniffing and uttering low growls.</p> + +<p>The boys could see nothing unusual in the clearing +but they felt a sense of danger in the very air. +Their host's eyes, more accustomed to the surroundings +than their own, evidently detected something +ominous in one of the shadows thrown out +from the belt of pines. He thrust the barrel of his +rifle out through the loophole and the next instant +its sharp crack rent the stillness of the night. The +lurking shadow vanished amongst the pines with +a whoop of defiance.</p> + +<p>Their host pulled in his rifle, "A plum' miss," +he said, disgustedly, "Wall, the war is on for fair +now. Better outen that light an' draw your cheers +up by the fire an' I'll tell you'alls about hit."</p> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTE:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"> + +<p><a name="Footnote_A_1" id="Footnote_A_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_1">[A]</a> This account of Judson is the description of a little West +Florida town as it actually has been, and is to-day. Nineteen +of its scanty population have died by a fierce war. The author +has only changed the first letter of the town's real name.</p></div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[219]</a></span></p> + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIX.<br /> + +<small>THE FEUD.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Thar</span> ain't no call to keep watch at the loopholes," +said their host as the alarmed lads' glances +kept wandering towards the dark openings. "The +dogs will tell we-alls if anyone tries to come near +the cabin." He leaned back in his chair in silence +for a few minutes gazing into the heart of the fire +whose flickering rays lit up his bronzed, thoughtful, +kindly face.</p> + +<p>"Hit all began years ago when I warn't but a +little bit of a shaver," he began, quietly. "Judson +was a right-prosperous, happy, contented, little +place, then. Thar was mighty nigh a hundred people +living in the town, an' in the woods nigh about +hyar. Each family had hit's own little cabin an' +farm an' raised all hit's own living of meat, corn, +taters, an' sugar cane, an' each family had hit's patch +of cotton with which they bought what things they +needed that they didn't raise themselves. We had a +right tidy little schoolhouse. I went to hit two terms +when I was a little shaver," he said with evident<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[220]</a></span> +pride, "an' I learned how to read an' write pretty +well—the reading's been a heap of company to me +during the years since then. Each family had a +plenty to eat an' wear, an' thar warn't none that +you could call real poor people like I hearn tell you-alls +have in the North. We used to have dances +and barbecues, an' picnics an' a right sociable time. +The town was started by two families, the Turners +an' the Wrights—I'm a Turner,—an' all the people +about was kin to one or the other family, which +made everybody friendly and sociable with each +other. Hit was jis' a little Eden on earth, this +place, 'till the serpent came twisting an' crawlin' in. +The devil must have sho' had a hand in making +some of the men folks believe that the Good Lord +intended the honest corn they raised for anything +but food for man an' beast. Yes, I reckon, hit sho' +must have been ole Satan that made a few of the +Turners an' Wrights get together an' start a little +whiskey still over thar in the woods yonder. The +womin folks was again hit from the start, as, bless +their hearts, they've always been again the cursed +stuff. Hit was Christmas week that the still was +started goin', an' Christmas Eve the ones running +hit gave a big barbecue at the still to celebrate it. +Most everyone went, as they always did to doin's in +the neighborhood. Even my daddy an' two brothers, +Ben an' Abe, went to see the fun as they called +hit, but mammy she was a good, religious woman<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[221]</a></span>, +she staid at home an' kept me with her. She would +have liked to keep the other boys with her too, but +they had grown out of her control as boys sometimes +do." His bronzed face grew sadly thoughtful, +as he continued, "I recollect, I cried because I +couldn't go too, but mother sang to me an' tole me +stories—mother was a powerful hand at telling the +kind of stories boys like an' I soon quit cryin' an' +went to sleep quiet an' happy with mother singing +to me. Hit was the last time I ever heard mammy +sing. I reckon hit was 'bout midnight when a noise +woke me up. The door had been flung open—hit +was never locked in them days—an' father an' Abe +came rushin' in. Father's face was white as a sheet +an' I'll never forget the look on mammy's face. Hit +seemed as if she knowed without a word from +daddy what had happened. Thar was a curious +tremble in her voice as she asked, 'Whar's Ben?' +At the sound of her voice father broke down an' +sobbed like a child. 'He's dead,' he cried. +'They've killed my boy Ben. Those Wrights have +killed my boy Ben.'"</p> + +<p>The man paused as the recollection of that terrible +scene crowded his mind, while the two lads +looked at each other with sympathetic horror.</p> + +<p>"No one seemed to know just how the trouble +started," went on their host, quietly. "All hands +had taken a little too much liquor, there had been a +few hot words, a blow, an' Ben had keeled over<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[222]</a></span> +with a knife in his side. Then the fightin' started +between the kin of both families, an' daddy an' Abe +had run home to git their guns. Sore at heart as +mammy was, she begged 'em not to shed no more +blood but to leave it to the cotes, for mammy, as I +have said, was a religious woman. But both +Wrights and Turners came first from the mountains +of Kentucky whar man don't go to law again' +man but settles his quarrels with his rifle, An' so +the blood-feud began. Thar was more than Ben +killed that night,—Wrights as well as Turners. +When all had sobered up from the liquor thar came +a kind of lull or truce, but war always bruk out +again when either families got to drinkin'. They +got Abe the followin' year, but not 'fore he had +shot a couple of Wrights. Hit was three years +afore they got father. Mother, she pined away an' +died soon after they got him. I think she was +kinder glad to go, such things are wearin' on a +woman. An' so the killin's been goin' on ever since +by spells when the liquor gets to flowin'. I am the +only Turner alive, now, though thar's a few of my +kin still scattered around hyar. I've been shot at a +powerful lot of times, but, I reckon, I've been lucky. +Then too, they ain't none of them hunted me so +powerful hard, for I ain't took no part in any of +the killin's. I've shot a couple of times to scare +them away but not to kill. My own kin 'lows that +I'm poor-spirited, but somehow or other, I can't<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[223]</a></span> +forget the look on mammy's face the night Ben was +killed. I don't want to be the cause of puttin' no +such look on any woman's face. I've knowed all +these years though that my time must come sooner +or later. I heard to-day that the Wrights have got +in a lot of liquor from Tarpon Springs an' they are +sayin' that the last Turner has got to be wiped out +of Judson. So, I got me in a store of water an' +grub an' fixed to lay low for awhile. I may be able +to hold out until their liquor is gone an' the danger +is past, but I reckon hit doan' make so powerful +much of difference. They air plum' sho' to get me +sooner or later. Wall, that's the story, young fellows, +hit's been a right smart relief to have someone +sympathetic to tell hit to. Don't you worry none +though. As soon as comes mornin' I'll hist a flag +of truce an' arrange to have you fellows let out +peaceful. You can take my boat an' go after your +captain an' that little nigger, but I sho' advise you +not to stop hyar on youah way back. Keep right +on to Tarpon Springs. Some of my kin folks kin +bring the sloop back from thar."</p> + +<p>"You are very good," Charley exclaimed. "But +tell me why you have never left this awful place. +There are hundreds of places where you could have +made as good a living and been free from dread and +worry."</p> + +<p>"Mammy's grave is out thar among them pines," +said the man, simply, "an' daddy's, an' Ben's, an'<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[224]</a></span> +Abe's, then, atter all, this place is home, no other +place could be that."</p> + +<p>"I see," said Charley, much abashed.</p> + +<p>"I am proud to have met you, Mr. Turner," declared +Walter, warmly. "I think you are a noble +man."</p> + +<p>"No? I sho' reckon you is mistaken," said the +man in surprise. "Me noble? I reckon not. My +own kin 'lows I'm mighty poor-spirited 'cause I +won't take no hand in the killin'."</p> + +<p>"I don't care a cent what your kin says," began +Walter, hotly, but he was interrupted by the crack +of a rifle, the whistle of a bullet, and the howl of +a dog outside.</p> + +<p>His host winced as if the bullet had struck his +own body. "They've killed Bet," he cried. "Bet, +what I raised from a little bit of puppy. They +hadn't ought to go an' shoot a poor defenceless, +dumb animal, hit ain't right. My God, be they goin' +to kill all my poor faithful dawgs," he cried, as another +shot rang out followed by another pitiless +howl.</p> + +<p>Rifle shot followed rifle shot while the man stood +trembling with eyes flashing as he listened to the +whining of the animals outside. At last, heedless +of the bullets pattering against the logs, he flung +the door wide open and called to the hounds. They +came crowding in, a whining, mangy, ill-looking +pack, but disreputable as they were, they had been<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[225]</a></span> +the man's only friends through his lonely years and +the two lads respected him for his act.</p> + +<p>As soon as he had bolted the door again, he rummaged +in a corner and brought out three rifles. He +handed one to each of the boys. "I reckon, we'll +have to watch at the loopholes now the dawgs air +inside," he said quietly. "You-alls can take the +ones at the ends, I'll tend to the sides. Be right +careful 'bout standin' in front of 'em, a bullet might +pass through. An' don't shoot to kill if you can +help it."</p> + +<p>"An' his kin people call that man poor-spirited," +whispered Walter in wonder to his chum as they +took up their positions.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXX.<br /> + +<small>BESIEGED.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> boys had little opportunity for conversation +in their new rôle as guards, being separated from +each other by the length of the cabin. Strange as +was the position in which they found themselves, +they felt but little fear. The massive logs of which +the cabin was constructed bid defiance to the entry +of a bullet, and neither of them could believe that +the affair would amount to more than a few shots<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[226]</a></span> +being fired at the building while the attacking party +was under the influence of the liquor they had +drank. They believed that with the coming of day +the feudalists would disband and retire to their +homes, while they would be free to return to the +rescue of their friends on the island. Nevertheless, +they were not going to take any chances in the +duties as sentinels. They stood well to one side of +their loopholes and peeped out at the little clearing +plainly visible in the bright moonlight.</p> + +<p>"I reckon they can't see to shot through the loopholes, +but you-alls want to keep youah bodies out of +line with them," cautioned Mr. Turner. "Hit +mought be that a stray bullet would pass through +one of them. An' don't either of you young fellows +fire 'less you jes' have to. You doan't want to get +mixed up in this hyar quarrel. If yu' jis' naturally +have to shoot, aim low an' give it to 'em in the +laigs."</p> + +<p>"There seems to be several of them gathering together +at the edge of the woods," called Charley +anxiously. "Here they come straight for the +house!"</p> + +<p>His host darted to his side. "They've got a long +pole an' air aiming to batter down the door," he announced. +"Keep back, boys, an' let me do the talking +an' shootin', if thar's got to be any."</p> + +<p>But the boys crowded close to his side, eager to +view the coming attack.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[227]</a></span></p> + +<p>There were about a dozen men in the approaching +party and they advanced at a rapid trot, bearing +between them a huge pine log.</p> + +<p>"Halt whar you air," commanded Turner when +they had approached to within sixty feet of the +house. "If you-alls come any closer meanin' +trouble, someone is goin' to get hurt."</p> + +<p>There were enough of timid spirits in the party +to cause a halt in the advance.</p> + +<p>"We're goin' to get youah hide this time, Bill +Turner," shouted the foremost of the gang, a big, +heavily-whiskered man. "Hit's a disgrace on us +Wrights to have one of youah name livin' still in +this settlement. You're goin' to be done for this +time."</p> + +<p>"Now, I ain't done nothin' to you-alls in all these +years," said Turner quietly and argumentatively. +"You ain't got no cause to come 'round hectoring +me."</p> + +<p>"More shame for you," shouted the big man. +"We're goin' to do you, first, 'cause you're a +Turner, second, 'cause you've been too poor-spirited +all these years to put up a man's fight."</p> + +<p>"Pears lak hit needs a powerful lot of yu to do +fo' one, lone, mean-spirited critter," said Turner, +mildly.</p> + +<p>The big man stamped his foot with rage. "Hit +don't take none but me," he roared. "Yu come out +hyar an' we'll have it out, man to man."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[228]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I ain't a-doubting you're courage, Jim Wright," +returned the other, slowly, "but I ain't aimin' to +hurt no man 'less I have to. Besides, if I did get +the best of yu, all the rest of youah gang would +come down on me. Jes' keep away from my cabin, +that's all I've got to say."</p> + +<p>"Come on, boys," roared the leader. "He's too +mean-spirited to hurt a fly. He can't shoot all of +us, anyway."</p> + +<p>There was some hesitation, but his fellows, evidently, +believed that the man inside would not fire. +Under the urging of their leader they picked up the +log and started on a run for the door.</p> + +<p>But they quickly discovered their mistake. From +the loophole shot out quick jets of flame as the man +inside worked the lever of his Winchester. The log +dropped unheeded to the ground as its bearers +broke for the cover of the woods. Some were not +able to run but limped away groaning with pain. +After the fleeing ones strode the big leader, cursing +them for cowards and imploring them to return to +the assault.</p> + +<p>"I don't reckon I've hurt any one of them very +much," Turner remarked, as he slipped more shells +into his rifle. "I jes' aimed for their laigs."</p> + +<p>"Thank God, it has all ended without loss of +life," Charley said earnestly, but his host shook his +head.</p> + +<p>"Hit ain't ended, hit's jes' begun, Jim Wright<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[229]</a></span> +ain't one to be scart out by a little lead. He don't +know what fear is. If he can't get none of 'em to +come back with him, he'll come back alone. I wish +you young fellows were safe outer hyar, but it +won't do for you to try to leave now. Crazy drunk, +like them fellows is, hit wouldn't be safe for you. +Maybe by morning they'll be sobered up enough to +listen to reason."</p> + +<p>In spite of his words, the boys were hopeful that +the night would pass off without further trouble, +but they were soon undeceived. Half an hour had +not passed when the big leader emerged from the +woods followed by a half a dozen of his fellow +feudalists.</p> + +<p>His followers halted by the fallen log but he advanced +boldly direct for the loophole.</p> + +<p>"Keep away, for Gawd's sake, keep away, Jim," +Turner implored. "I don't want to have to shoot +you."</p> + +<p>"Hit's you or me this time!" shouted the other, +"The sun don't rise on no living Turner in this +town."</p> + +<p>"Keep back," warned Turner, thrusting his rifle +through the loophole, but even in his desperate situation, +the boys, crowded close beside him, and could +see that he aimed only at the legs of the advancing +man.</p> + +<p>Ruffian though he was, the other was not without +brute courage. He never paused in his advance.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[230]</a></span> +"Shoot," he shouted as he whipped out a pistol, +"Shoot, that's what I want yu to do."</p> + +<p>The two reports came almost together, but the +pistol shot was a fraction of a second ahead of the +other. Like a fire-swept weed Turner crumpled to +the floor, his rifle exploding as he fell.</p> + +<p>The big man clapped one hand to his side and fell +to the ground.</p> + +<p>With the report of his rifle, his followers had +grabbed up the log and rushed for the door, but +Charley had been quick to see the danger. Snatching +up the rifle from the fallen man, he fired at the +moving legs as fast as he could work the lever. The +whistling lead was more than the assaulters could +stand. Three dropped their hold on the log and +limped hurriedly for cover while their fellows, deprived +of their aid, could no longer sustain the +heavy timber, which sank again to the ground while +they hastened after their wounded companions.</p> + +<p>The boys watched them in silence until they entered +the woods then Charley set down the rifle.</p> + +<p>"I don't think they will be back right away +again," he said. "Anyway, we have got to risk a +light. Perhaps Mr. Turner is not dead."</p> + +<p>With hands that trembled with excitement Walter +struck a match and lit the lamp, then, the two boys +lifted the prostrate man and laid him upon the bed. +"Keep watch at the loophole while I see if anything +can be done for him," Charley commanded.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[231]</a></span></p> + +<p>The man's shirt was matted with blood and the +lad did not attempt to take it off, but cut it away +with his sheath knife, exposing the white chest in +the center of which gapped a horrible hole. "He's +badly wounded," he announced after a careful +examination of the wound. "There's two holes, +one in his chest and one in his side. I believe +the bullet struck a rib and glanced, coming out at his +side. If so, he will pull through if I can only +stop the blood flowing. I'll have to keep this lamp +lit for awhile even it is risky. I'll be as quick as +I can."</p> + +<p>There was little in the rude cabin with which +to do in such a case, but the resourceful lad made +the best of the situation, working with feverish +speed so as to be able to extinguish the lamp as +soon as possible. First, he washed out the wash +basin thoroughly and filling it with clean water +from the barrel added to the water a generous handful +of salt. With this he washed the ugly-looking +wound, then tearing into pieces a fresh sheet he +found lying on a shelf, he made a little wad of rags +with which, after soaking them in salt water, he +plugged up the gaping hole. Over this he bound +wet strips of the sheet to hold it securely in place. +He was rewarded for his labor by seeing that the +flow of blood was quickly checked and soon ceased +entirely. As soon as he made certain of this, he +extinguished the light and crept to his chum's side.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[232]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I think he will pull out all right," he announced. +"He is unconscious yet, and when he does come to +he'll be very weak from loss of blood. Have you +seen any more of those fellows?"</p> + +<p>"They're still in the woods around the clearing. +Listen and you'll hear their voices every now and +then."</p> + +<p>"Has the man who was shot moved any?"</p> + +<p>"No, he lays just as he fell. I guess he's dead."</p> + +<p>"It's a horrible affair," said Charley with a shudder. +"I'll never forget this night. It has put us in +a bad fix. We can't leave here now, and I don't +like the way the wind is coming up. If there's a +heavy storm, the captain and Chris will be in danger, +it wouldn't take a very heavy sea to cover that +marsh. Just listen how it's blowing."</p> + +<p>Walter seemed not to hear what his chum was +saying. He stood staring out at the still figure +stretched on the ground. "He hasn't moved, but +maybe he isn't dead," he said at last. "Perhaps, he +is bleeding to death and a little attention might save +his life."</p> + +<p>"You're right," Charley exclaimed. "We must +bring him in."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[233]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXI.<br /> + +<small>THE ENEMIES.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was a risky thing to attempt. To venture outside +would be to expose themselves in the bright +moonlight to the bullets of the feudalists, but the +two plucky lads never hesitated. The body lay not a +dozen steps from the cabin and it would not do to +let his fellows approach that close to the little fort. +Either they must save him themselves, if he was not +already dead, or leave him to die alone in the night.</p> + +<p>"We must be quick about it," Charley declared. +"As soon as I unlatch the door, we must run out, +grab him by the shoulders, and drag him in—he's +too heavy to lift."</p> + +<p>In this bold move fortune seemed to favor the +lads. They got their heavy burden to the door before +a shot was fired and, then, the bullets whistled +harmlessly above their heads.</p> + +<p>"We were lucky that time," Charley panted as +he barred the door again. "Now keep a sharp +lookout. I'll have to light that lamp again."</p> + +<p>"This fellow is not so very badly hurt," he announced,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[234]</a></span> +as soon as he had examined his new patient. +"The bullet has gone right through the +fleshy part of his shoulder. He will come out of it +all right if the wound is kept clean." In a few minutes +he had washed and dressed the wound as he +had the other man's, then, putting out the light once +more, he rejoined his companion at the loophole. +"Anything stirring?" he inquired.</p> + +<p>"No, I don't even hear their voices now. Perhaps +they will not bother us again to-night," Walter +replied, hopefully.</p> + +<p>"I am not worrying about them as much as I +am this wind," said his chum gloomily. "We are +safe enough here so long as the grub and water +holds out, but, God knows how it is faring with +Chris and the captain."</p> + +<p>The gale was now howling and whistling around +the little cabin with a force to justify Charley's +gloomy apprehension. The boys had to speak +loudly to make themselves heard above its uproar. +They soon abandoned all attempts at conversation +and waited wearily and silently for another assault +from the feudalists and for the coming of day.</p> + +<p>Either the ruffians had at last become over-powered +by the liquor they had drank or else they had +decided to wait the coming of day, for they did not +again show themselves in the clearing. Day, however, +came at last, after what seemed to the exhausted +lads an age of waiting.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[235]</a></span></p> + +<p>As soon as it became light enough to see, Charley +removed the bandages from their stricken host and +redressed his wound more carefully. "His pulse is +getting stronger and there is some color in his face," +he remarked to his chum. "I believe, I could bring +him to, but I guess it's best to let him lie unconscious +as long as he can. He will suffer enough +when he does regain consciousness."</p> + +<p>As soon as he finished with Turner, Charley +turned to his other patient who was beginning to +move uneasily and show signs of returning consciousness. +While he was yet bathing his wound +the man opened his eyes.</p> + +<p>"Gosh! how my shoulder hurts," he growled. +"Be mighty careful how you touch it, young fellow, +or I'll skin you alive."</p> + +<p>Charley set aside the basin of water and rising +to his feet looked down on the fellow with a face +full of scorn.</p> + +<p>"You great, big, drunken, cowardly murderer," +he exclaimed. "It's a pity that bullet didn't kill +you. You are not fit to live on God's green earth. +You're shot when trying, with a crowd of your fellows, +to kill a lone, inoffensive man. Your friends +don't think enough of you to come back and get +your carcass. We bring you in and care for you +and instead of thanks, your first words are a growl +and a threat. You are a cowardly, disgraceful +cur,—that's what you are."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[236]</a></span></p> + +<p>Astonished rage filled the man's face. "No man +ever said words like that to Jim Wright and lived," +he gasped. He attempted to rise but was too weak +to gain his feet, and sank back with a groan.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I guess you won't do any killing for a little +while," sneered Charley, whose anger was at white +heat. "I've no doubt people have been afraid to +tell you the truth before, but you are going to hear +it for once in your life. I've no doubt with your +strength and disposition you've bullied everything +until they are afraid to do anything but flatter you, +but, now you are going to take a dose of your own +medicine." Then, seating himself just out of reach +of the man's powerful arms, he proceeded to tell +him what he thought of him in words that stung +with contempt and scorn. Then, as his anger subsided, +he repeated the story Turner had told him, +contrasting Turner's quiet, patient, peaceful heroism +with the other's blood-thirstiness and violence, +with all the power of the earnestness he felt.</p> + +<p>At first the man kept interrupting him with curses +and abuse, but as he went calmly on ignoring the interruptions +the fellow lay quiet, his face turned to +the wall.</p> + +<p>Once Charley stopped, thinking he might have +fainted he lay so still, but he spoke up gruffly.</p> + +<p>"Did I kill him?"</p> + +<p>"No, but it's not your fault that you didn't," the +lad replied, curtly, and went on with his arraignment.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[237]</a></span> +"I don't care a hang what you and your +cowardly fellows think," he concluded, "all decent +people would say that that poor fellow lying there +is a brave hero while you are the mean-spirited, +cowardly one. And, now, if you'll lie quiet and +keep your mouth shut, I'll dress that wound. I hate +to pollute my hands by touching you, but it's got to +be done."</p> + +<p>The man lay quiet while the lad washed and +bound up his wound. Charley could see that his +features were working convulsively, but whether +from rage or pain he could not determine.</p> + +<p>As soon as his task was completed, Charley relieved +his chum at the loophole and Walter set about +making coffee and cooking some breakfast. They +were both sadly in need of food and felt much +better after they had eaten. As soon as they had +finished, Charley made his chum lie down to take a +nap, promising to call him, and lie down himself in +a couple of hours.</p> + +<p>While Walter was asleep Turner came out of the +deep swoon which had followed his wound. He was +weak and in terrible pain but in full possession of +his senses. It was evident that he was greatly bewildered +at the sight of his enemy lying helpless on +the floor, and Charley explained the situation to him +in a few words.</p> + +<p>"I sho' am glad I didn't kill him," said the sick +man, thankfully. "I jes' shot at his laigs, the gun<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[238]</a></span> +must have gone off when I fell. I am sho' sorry I +hurt you so bad, Jim, I didn't aim for to do hit."</p> + +<p>But Wright kept his face turned to the wall and +answered not a word.</p> + +<p>As the morning advanced Charley was much puzzled +by the constant sound of hammering coming +from the woods near the clearing. It was evident +their enemies were preparing another surprise but +he could not guess at its nature.</p> + +<p>All the morning long the hammering continued, +then shortly before noon there emerged from the +woods an object which caused him at first, to stare +in bewildered surprise, and, then, as it drew nearer +the cabin to send him to shaking Walter, whom he +had let sleep on.</p> + +<p>"Wake up! Wake up!" he cried. "We have +got to fight for our lives. Those fellows have built +a heavy breastwork on the front of a wagon and +are shoving it ahead of them up to the cabin."</p> + +<p>"Young fellows! help me up and help me to that +loophole," gruffly commanded the wounded man on +the floor. "Don't hesitate," he cried as the lad was +about to refuse the surprising command, "them fellows +have got a couple of sticks of dynamite in that +cart an' if they get near enough to throw it thar +won't be enough left of this cabin to make a good +toothpick. We was aiming to use it last night if +we couldn't get Turner no other way."</p> + +<p>Between them the two startled lads got the big<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[239]</a></span> +fellow on his feet and supported him to the loophole +where he leaned against the logs, his face +twitching with the pain of his effort.</p> + +<p>It was just in time, for the wagon with its burden +of death was scarce a hundred feet away when he +shouted: "Stop where yer are, boys. Thar ain't +no call to throw any of that stuff."</p> + +<p>"Is that you, Cap?" called one of the men. +"Why, we 'lowed yer was dead."</p> + +<p>"An' I might have been for all of yu fellows, +leaving me to die on the ground like a poisoned +dog."</p> + +<p>He paused while a chorus of excuses came from +the men behind the breastwork.</p> + +<p>"Well, I ain't dead, but it ain't no thanks to yu +fellows," he went on slowly and painfully. "Now, +yu fellows jes' roll that wagon back whar hit came +from an' go home and behave yerselves. Yu fellows +know me an' know I'll do what I say. Hit's +jes' come to me, an' hit's come in a powerful rough +way, that I've been powerful mean, pisen an' onery. +My eyes am sho' opened at last, an' I'm powerful +ashamed of how I've been carryin' on. But hit's all +over now. From now on Bill Turner is my friend, +an' the man that lifts a finger again' him lifts it +again' me, an' me an' my close kin will make this +place too hot to hold him. That's all I've got to say. +Now, go home."</p> + +<p>Murmurs of astonishment arose from the men<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[240]</a></span> +behind the wagon as they slowly but obediently +backed the wagon towards the woods. Over the +face of the wounded man on the bed stole a look of +joy unspeakable.</p> + +<p>The bewildered but delighted boys helped Wright +back to his place on the floor.</p> + +<p>"I want to shake hands with you, Mr. Wright," +said Charley, earnestly. "I am afraid I talked +pretty rough to you."</p> + +<p>"I needed hit," said the other as he took the proffered +hand. "Hit's a pity, young fellow, that thar +ain't more like yu down in this neck of thar woods."</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXXII.<br /> + +<small>THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Leaving</span> the boys safe from the danger that had +threatened them, let us return to the castaways +whom we left confronted by that menace, the most +grewsome of all to shipwrecked sailors, the lack of +water.</p> + +<p>The sponger captain needed no explanation but +the captain's simple words to realize the terrible +tortures and awful death that awaited them all if +help in some shape did not soon come to their rescue.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">[241]</a></span> +His bronzed face grew white beneath it's coat of +tan.</p> + +<p>"I am frightfully thirsty, already," he exclaimed, +"Is there no way we can reach the mainland. +Thar's water in plenty thar."</p> + +<p>"If we were birds or fish, we might get thar, I +reckon," replied Captain Westfield, "but, being as +we are only human beings, I calculate it ain't no way +possible."</p> + +<p>The Conch eyed the raging water that stretched +between the little island and the shore.</p> + +<p>"A strong swimmer might make it," he observed, +musingly. "I've swum farther many a time but it +was when I was in a sight better shape than I am +now."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I reckon a right powerful swimmer might +make it," assented the captain, "but this little fellow +and I are not equal to it, we'd never reach the +land."</p> + +<p>"I believe I could do it even now," said the +sponger calculatingly, "but I won't desert yo' two +Yo' saved my life an' I'd be worse than a Greek to +leave yo' here."</p> + +<p>"If you can do it, go ahead, man," said the old +sailor. "You can't do us any good by staying. +Better save your own life," but the Conch shook his +head sadly.</p> + +<p>"My life ain't worth much, now," he said sadly.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[242]</a></span> +"My little ship's gone, all my brave comrades +drowned, an' everything I had in the world lost. +I've not much to live for now."</p> + +<p>"Bosh, man," said the old sailor, "I reckon, +thar's always something for a man to live for as +long as the Good Lord let him live. If thar wasn't +the Lord wouldn't let him live."</p> + +<p>But the Conch was not to be comforted, the full +extent of his loss was beginning to make itself felt +as he regained his strength and the full possession +of his senses after his terrible ordeal. He soon +moved a little apart from the two castaways, and, +seating himself on the sand buried his face in his +hands. The two watchers could see the tears trickling +between his fingers and they turned away +greatly moved at that most impressive of sights, +the grief of a strong man, ashamed of displaying +his tears. When they looked again he was on his +knees and his bowed head showed that he was praying. +When he rejoined them, his manner was filled +with the calm and quietness of one who has found +peace for his afflictions.</p> + +<p>"I see there is no wood here with which to build +a raft," he observed. "Things look pretty bad, +but they say the darkest hour is just before the +dawn. We must take courage. Yo'r young friends +may return with help at any hour."</p> + +<p>The captain shook his head sadly. "Something +has happened to them or they would have been back<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[243]</a></span> +long ago. They cannot return now until the storm +is over."</p> + +<p>"It cannot last much longer," declared the Conch, +confidently. "It is losing force now, I believe it +will blow out by morning."</p> + +<p>"Maybe, but it will take a long time for the sea to +go down so a boat can live in it, and, in the meantime +we have no water."</p> + +<p>"We must not give way to despair," said the +Conch, who seemed like another man after his +devotions. "Let's dig another well right in the +midst of the island, perhaps we can get water fit to +drink."</p> + +<p>With but little hope the three fell to work and by +noon had dug a hole to water, but they had only +their labor for their pains, the water was salt, bitter, +and undrinkable. Indeed their labor was worse +than fruitless for their exertions had greatly increased +their thirst.</p> + +<p>Chris kindled a fire and roasted some of the turtle +meat and eggs, but the castaways only partook of a +few mouthfuls, as eating seemed but to increase +their thirst.</p> + +<p>The Conch had lost his hat when wrecked and +Chris, observing his bare head, set about braiding +him another hat from the green palmetto leaves.</p> + +<p>The Sponger watched him with interest. "Do +yo' think yo' could make a water-tight mat of that +stuff?" he enquired, eagerly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[244]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon, dis nigger could," declared +the little darkey. "I'se done made baskets ob hit dat +would hold water like a bucket."</p> + +<p>"How long would it take yo' to make a mat four +feet square?"</p> + +<p>The little negro considered, "I guess I could do +hit in a day."</p> + +<p>"Then drop that hat business and get to work on +hit. Work like yo' never did before. There's a +chance, jes' a chance, that it will be the saving of +us. Captain, there is work for us to do. Get the +entrails out of one of those turtle shells. Clean +them out good, pack them full of sand, and stretch +them out in the sun to dry. I've got a plan in mind. +It may fail, but it's worth trying. Be careful not +to break the skins."</p> + +<p>It was evident from the man's manner that he +was intensely in earnest and the old sailor lost no +time in asking idle questions but went quickly to +work at the task assigned him. In a short time he +had cleaned and washed out the turtle entrails and +filling them with dry sand stretched them out to dry +in the hot sun. When thus prepared they formed a +kind of small hose some thirty feet in length.</p> + +<p>While he was thus engaged, the Conch dragged +the empty shell down to the water and cleaned and +washed it out thoroughly. Leaving it near the +water's edge, he collected and piled close beside it, a +heap of dry wood. Then he returned to where<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[245]</a></span> +Chris was working and fell to helping him by stripping +and preparing the palmetto buds for the little +darkey's nimble fingers.</p> + +<p>Just before sundown he carefully removed the +sand from the dried entrails and was in possession +of a long, tough waterproof hose without hole or +break in it.</p> + +<p>Night brought no cessation of the strange labor. +A fire was kindled beside the little darkey and he +plaited on by its light while the captain and the +Conch kept him supplied with palmetto strips.</p> + +<p>About midnight Chris held up his work with a +weary sigh; "Hit's done," he announced.</p> + +<p>"Now for the test," cried the Conch, trembling +with excitement.</p> + +<p>Taking the strong, flexible, green mat he hurried +down to the turtle shell which he had filled half full +of sea water. Placing the mat over the top of the +shell, he bound it firmly in place with wisps of +palmetto leaves. Then, cutting a small hole in the +center of the mat, he inserted in it one end of the +strange hose, packing wet sand around it to make it +air-tight. He next coiled down the hose in the edge +of the sea and placed the other end of it in the +empty turtle shell. Then, heaping wood around +the mat-covered shell, he started a fire.</p> + +<p>The Captain and Chris at last understood his +plan. With his rude contrivance, he was going to +try to distill fresh water from salt after the manner<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[246]</a></span> +they do on big steamships with costly and complicated +apparatus. The steam from the heated water +was supposed to escape from the shell through the +hose. In passing through it it would become chilled +when the hose was coiled down in the cold sea +water and, condensing into water again, reach the +other shell fresh and free from salt.</p> + +<p>In theory the plan was perfect, but would the +rude contrivance do the work?</p> + +<p>The three thirsty watchers fairly held their breath +as they kept the fire roaring around the shell and +awaited results. At last tiny wisps of steam began +to trickle through the closely-woven mat. Tiny +drops of moisture were dropping from the end of +the hose. These grew larger and larger until at last +a tiny stream of water trickled forth.</p> + +<p>They danced and shouted for joy. "It works! +It works!" they cried.</p> + +<p>But thirsty though they were they had to possess +their souls in patience and wait for the process +worked very slowly. All night they staid by the +shells keeping the fire going. Just at day-break the +Conch gave the command to put out the fire. In +the other shell was several gallons of clear, pure +water. As soon as it had cooled sufficiently they +dipped it up with shells and drank greedily. It was +slightly bitter and tasteless but never did drink taste +better to parched throats. With the satisfying of +their thirst, came hunger and they all made a hearty<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[247]</a></span> +meal off the roasted meat and eggs left from dinner. +Just as the sun arose they lay down to sleep completely +exhausted but with thankfulness to God in +their hearts. Their greatest danger was past. They +had water and food in abundance, and the storm +was slowly but surely subsiding.</p> + +<p>They slept through the long day, awakening only +when the shades of night began to fall. Then after +satisfying their hunger and thirst, they lay down +and slept until morning came.</p> + +<p>They opened their eyes upon a clear, still day. +The storm had gone and the sea was growing calm. +Far to the South there showed on the blue water a +tiny patch of white,—a sail.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXXIII.<br /> + +<small>THE RESCUE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> castaways watched the distant sail with +mingled feelings of joy and suspense. Was it the +boys, or was it merely a strange craft beating up +the coast? Would it pass near the island or would +it go by too far out for them to make their presence +known? These were the questions they debated as +they strained their eyes on the distant patch of +white.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[248]</a></span></p> + +<p>One thing soon became evident to the eager +watchers, the sail was steadily growing larger. Although +the storm had passed and the sea subsided +there was still a brisk breeze blowing and each passing +hour brought the stranger craft visibly nearer. +No thought of breakfast entered the castaways' +minds, all their attention was fixed on the approaching +sail.</p> + +<p>At last it became evident that the vessel was a +small sloop, that it was headed directly for the +island and that it was rolling and pitching frightfully +in the still heavy seas.</p> + +<p>On it came, plunging and tossing like a frightened +steed and sending showers of spray from its +cut water. At last it was close enough to discover +two figures on its decks, one at the wheel, the other +forward, tending the jib sheet.</p> + +<p>"Hit's Massa Charley and Massa Walter," +shouted the sharp-eyed Chris. "Praise de Lawd, +Praise de Lawd," and his over-joyed companions +shouted a fervent "Amen."</p> + +<p>The sloop came steadily on, passing the island +and rounding up under its lee as near as its young +captain dared to approach. Anchor was dropped, +sails lowered, and launching a small boat it carried +on deck, its crew of two came sculling for the shore.</p> + +<p>And what a demonstration of joy there was +when it grounded on the sands and the chums so<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[249]</a></span> +long separated and so long beset with perils were +once more reunited. Such hand-wringings and congratulations, +and eager questions and chorused answers. +All happy. All excited. All talking at +once, and no one making himself thoroughly understood +in the general clamor.</p> + +<p>But Charley soon interrupted the talk-feast. +"We will be here all day at this rate," he said, +laughing. "We had better get on board and get +under way. That sloop is pretty old and cranky for +these waters and we'd better get back as soon as +we can for fear another squall will come up. We +can tell our stories on the way."</p> + +<p>The suggestion was wise and as none cared to +linger long on the dreary little island which had +been the scene of so much anxiety and suffering, +there was no delay in carrying it out. All climbed +into the little boat and were carried out to the sloop. +Her sails were hoisted, her anchor weighed, and +her bowsprit headed South for Tarpon. Down in +the sloop's cabin the castaways found a hot meal of +ham, eggs, potatoes and coffee waiting for them, +which Walter had prepared as a pleasant surprise. +In their excitement they had forgotten they were +hungry, but they remembered it now and fell upon +the tasty food with appetites that only left bare +dishes when satisfied, at last. The boys had brought +a pile of clothing with them, and after a wash-down +in cool sea water, the castaways threw away their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">[250]</a></span> +soiled, tattered garments, and, fed, washed, and +freshly clothed, felt like new men.</p> + +<p>The Captain's eyes danced with joy when Walter +presented him with a pipe and tobacco he had +brought with him.</p> + +<p>Later all gathered around the wheel and stories +and experiences were exchanged, but the reader is +already familiar with the most of them.</p> + +<p>"Even after the trouble was all over we couldn't +get away at once," Charley said, concluding his tale. +"I can tell you we were worried to have to lay +around and wait for the storm to pass, knowing that +you and Chris must be in danger on the island. The +people were awfully good to us after the feud was +ended. They could not do enough for us. They +even wanted to give us money, but of course we +couldn't take that. As soon as the wind went down +we borrowed this boat of Mr. Turner and started +out. We are to leave her at Tarpon and he will get +her from there."</p> + +<p>"Well, all's well that ends well, I reckon," said +the captain, puffing in supreme content. "We are +safe an' well now an' while we ain't got much +money, we will have the 'Beauty' as soon as she +comes into port, an' she's jes' the same as two thousand +dollars in the bank."</p> + +<p>"And we will have another try for that gold +when we get her," Charley declared. "I figure +that those fellows had to cast loose during the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">[251]</a></span> +storm and scud before it. They could not ride it +out at anchor. Now that the buoy's gone, it will +take them a long time to locate the gold again. We, +knowing the latitude and longitude can get back +to the spot before they can find it and get all the +gold removed, if we can get a revenue cutter at +Tarpon, as I think we can."</p> + +<p>The Captain's face was filled with dismay. "I've +clean forgot the figures, boys," he exclaimed. "I +put it down in the log all ship-shape, the latitude and +longitude, but I've clean forgot what it was. I +ain't got no memory for figures."</p> + +<p>It was a heavy blow for the golden-hopes of the +two boys and a silence of disappointment followed +the old sailor's announcement.</p> + +<p>"It's no use crying over spilt milk," said Charley, +at last, cheerfully. "We have still got the schooner, +and, with the money we get from her, we can make +a good start at something else."</p> + +<p>"You have still good cause for rejoicing," observed +the sponger captain. "You will still have +your vessel, but I have lost my all."</p> + +<p>The two chums were not the boys to give way to +repining and they were soon again as bright and +cheerful spirits as if their brightest hopes had been +realized.</p> + +<p>It was midnight when the little sloop at last crept +into the harbor of Tarpon. It was useless to go +ashore at such an hour so the little party made<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">[252]</a></span> +everything snug aboard and turned in on deck for +a few hours' sleep.</p> + +<p>They were up early next morning, and, after a +hasty breakfast, hurried ashore to notify the Commissioner +of their arrival and get him to take steps +for the seizure of the "Beauty" as soon as she +reached port.</p> + +<p>Mr. Driver was standing out in front of his +store as they came up the street. Amazement and +incredulity filled his face when he sighted them.</p> + +<p>"You!" he cried, "Why, I thought you were all +at the bottom of the Gulf."</p> + +<p>"No, we are slightly disfigured but still in the +ring," laughed Charley as he shook hands. "Our +schooner has not come in yet, has she?"</p> + +<p>Mr. Driver stared at him for a second. "There's +a mystery here," he declared. "Come on into the +store, and let's hear your story."</p> + +<p>Seated in the store's little back room, Charley +recounted their adventures while Mr. Driver listened +attentively. When he had concluded, Mr. Driver +remained silent for a moment.</p> + +<p>"I hate to be the teller of bad news," he said, at +last, "but you must learn it, and it had better come +from a friend. Your schooner is lost with all hands +on board."</p> + +<p>"Lost!" cried all together.</p> + +<p>"Yes, she went down at anchor during the storm. +The Greek sponger 'Zenephone' was passing when<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253">[253]</a></span> +she went under. Not a man was saved. Every one +on the 'Zenephone' wondered why she did not scud +before it instead of hanging to her anchor. I understand +now. They did not want to leave the +neighborhood of the gold."</p> + +<p>It was a heavy blow. At one sweep they were +robbed of their all. The little band of chums sat +paralyzed with grief, looking helplessly at each +other. Mr. Driver arose quietly and closed the door +softly behind him, leaving them alone with their +grief.</p> + +<p>For a few moments no one spoke. "It's hard, +but it must be met," sighed Walter at last. "What +are we going to do? We have nothing left now, +not even the clothes we wear."</p> + +<p>"God knows," answered Charley, hopelessly, at a +loss for once. "I suppose we will have to hunt +work at something or other."</p> + +<p>"And likely be scattered and separated for the +first time in years," exclaimed the captain.</p> + +<p>"That's the worst of it," agreed Walter, sadly. +"I don't mind working but I hate for us all to +have to drift apart."</p> + +<p>"Me too," wailed Chris. "Golly! I don't want +to be with no one but you-alls."</p> + +<p>"I don't believe the 'Beauty' is lost," Charley +declared. "I believe this is just another of Manuel's +tricks. He is as sharp a rascal as ever lived. I'll bet +she is safe and sound somewhere and that Manuel<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_254" id="Page_254">[254]</a></span> +just bought the Greeks on the 'Zenephone' to tell +that story."</p> + +<p>"Maybe," admitted the captain, doubtfully. +"The story rings true, though. It would have been +likely for them to hang to their anchor by the gold."</p> + +<p>"And it would be just the kind of details Manuel +would think of, knowing we would be more likely +to believe the story if we escaped alive. He is an +artist at rascality."</p> + +<p>"Even if you're right, I reckon it won't help us +much," said the old sailor. "The story's tied our +hands all right. The Commissioner won't do anything +just on our suspicions, an' we ain't got any +money to do anything ourselves."</p> + +<p>"I feel that Charley is right," Walter declared, +"but we've got only one chance to prove it. Get to +work, get some money and hire a Greek detective to +look into the matter for us. The first question is, +what can we do to earn money?"</p> + +<p>They were engaged in a fruitless discussion on +this point when Mr. Driver entered. He heard +their discussion with sympathetic interest.</p> + +<p>"There is no work around here," he declared. +"The Greeks work cheaper than an American can. +It's hard for an American to earn a bare living here. +I understand from what you say that you do not +want to be separated. I might find work for one of +you, but I couldn't for all. There is only one suggestion +I can make in such a case."</p> + +<p>"Please give it to us," Walter requested.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255">[255]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXIV.<br /> + +<small>CONCLUSION.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Well</span>," said Mr. Driver, "there is a large fish-house +at Clearwater, twenty miles below here. You +probably could get a job fishing for it. You could +all work together then. It is hard, dirty work but +there is pretty good money in it if a man works +hard."</p> + +<p>The chums exchanged glances.</p> + +<p>"I believe we will try it," Charley said. "Of +course we will have to talk it over before we decide, +but there does not seem to be anything else we can +do."</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Mr. Driver, "I'll give you a +letter to the fish boss, I know him personally. And +you'll need a little money to pay your fares there. +You can return it when you get to earning."</p> + +<p>The chums thanked the kind-hearted storekeeper +for his advice and assistance and adjourned to the +sidewalk where they discussed the matter earnestly. +It did not take them long to decide to follow Mr. +Driver's suggestion. They bid good-bye to the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_256" id="Page_256">[256]</a></span> +sponger captain, who decided to remain in Tarpon +and try to get service on one of Mr. Williams' +schooners, and, accepting the loan of ten dollars, +which Mr. Driver pressed upon them, they boarded +the first train going South and soon landed in the +little town of Clearwater. And there, we must leave +them for the present.</p> + + +<div class='center'><br />THE END.</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class='tnote'><div class='center'><b>Transcriber's Notes:</b></div> + +<p>Obvious punctuation errors repaired. The original text had no table of +contents. One was created to aid the reader. Chapter I is untitled.</p> + +<p>Page 3, "tatooed" changed to "tattooed" (tattooed arms and rolling)</p> + +<p>Page 10, two lines were transposed. The original read:</p> + +<div class='poem2'> +shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoul-<br /> +up with the money by to-morrow night I'll close up<br /> +ders. "You know what I say. If you don't come<br /> +this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining<br /> +</div> + +<p>Page 14, "hundreth" changed "hundredth" (a hundredth part of)</p> + +<p>Page 43, "alloted" changed to "allotted" (allotted to their boat)</p> + +<p>Page 62, "along" changed to "alone" (worse than being alone)</p> + +<p>Page 74, repeated word "see" removed from text Original read: (I don't see see +what his object)</p> + +<p>Page 78, "Manual" changed to "Manuel" (Manuel approached Captain)</p> + +<p>Page 85, "blow" changed to "below" (been below for only)</p> + +<p>Page 89, "exclaimation" changed to "exclamation" (an exclamation of surprise)</p> + +<p>Page 93, "captian" changed to "captain" (the captain declared)</p> + +<p>Page 100, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (gaping hole in her)</p> + +<p>Page 101, "was" changed to "were" (There were no)</p> + +<p>Page 102, "that" changed to "than" (time than it has)</p> + +<p>Page 105, "aim" changed to "air" (working +the air pump)</p> + +<p>Page 109, "baton" changed to "beaten" (Greeks had been +badly beaten)</p> + +<p>Page 128, "averge" changed to "average" (better than average marksmen)</p> + +<p>Page 164, "squaking" changed "squawking" (marsh hens, the squawking)</p> + +<p>Page 190, "minues" changed to "minutes" (in a few minutes he)</p> + +<p>Page 203, "taveling" changed to "traveling" (further traveling dangerous)</p> + +<p>Page 231, repeated word "is" removed from text. Original read: (awhile +even it is is risky)</p> + +<p>Page 231, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (up the gaping hole)</p> +</div> + + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by +Wilmer M. Ely + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY CHUMS IN GULF OF MEXICO *** + +***** This file should be named 44394-h.htm or 44394-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/4/3/9/44394/ + +Produced by The Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/old/44394-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/44394-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d041b81 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/old/44394-h/images/i002.jpg b/old/44394-h/images/i002.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..196e138 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-h/images/i002.jpg diff --git a/old/44394-h/images/i003.jpg b/old/44394-h/images/i003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e5645c --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-h/images/i003.jpg diff --git a/old/44394-h/images/spine.jpg b/old/44394-h/images/spine.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f801a1e --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-h/images/spine.jpg diff --git a/old/44394.txt b/old/44394.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..49cbfcf --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6963 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by Wilmer M. Ely + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico + or, On a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek Spongers + +Author: Wilmer M. Ely + +Release Date: December 9, 2013 [EBook #44394] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY CHUMS IN GULF OF MEXICO *** + + + + +Produced by The Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + + +[Illustration: "Charley leveled his gun and sent sixteen shrieking +bullets just above the wheelman's head."] + + + + +The Boy Chums In the Gulf of Mexico + + OR + + On a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek + Spongers + + BY WILMER M. ELY + + Author of "The Boy Chums on Indian River," "The Boy + Chums on Haunted Island," "The Boy Chums in + the Forest," "The Boy Chums' Perilous Cruise." + +[Illustration] + + A. L. BURT COMPANY + NEW YORK + + + + + Copyright 1913 + + BY A. L. BURT COMPANY + + THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO + + + + +CONTENTS + + + I. 3 + II. MR. DRIVER. 11 + III. PREPARATIONS 19 + IV. THE START 27 + V. THE START 36 + VI. FIRST TROUBLE 45 + VII. SPONGING 53 + VIII. TROUBLE 61 + IX. MANUEL'S RELEASE 68 + X. A RASH RESOLVE 76 + XI. A MYSTERY 84 + XII. IN A DIVING SUIT 94 + XIII. A CLOSE CALL 100 + XIV. THE DISCUSSION 107 + XV. A DESPERATE PLAN 115 + XVI. TOO LATE 122 + XVII. OUTWITTED 129 + XVIII. IMPRISONED 136 + XIX. WRECKED 144 + XX. HUNTING HELP 152 + XXI. THE CASTAWAYS 159 + XXII. ANOTHER DANGER 167 + XXIII. THE RELAPSE 175 + XXIV. THE FLOOD 182 + XXV. THE FLOATING HATCH 189 + XXVI. WITH THE BOYS 197 + XXVII. THE JOURNEY 205 + XXVIII. JUDSON 212 + XXIX. THE FEUD 219 + XXX. BESIEGED 225 + XXXI. THE ENEMIES 233 + XXXII. THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN 240 + XXXIII. THE RESCUE 247 + XXXIV. CONCLUSION 255 + + + + +THE BOY CHUMS + +IN THE GULF OF MEXICO + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +"IT'S just like stepping suddenly into a strange country. I am glad we +came even if we decide not to go into the business." + +The speaker, a sturdy, manly-looking boy of eighteen, was one of a +party of four persons who were strolling along a street in the Greek +section of Tarpon Springs, a small Florida town, located on the +Anclote River, a few miles from the Gulf of Mexico. His companions +were a boy about his own age but of less robust appearance, a little +negro lad with a good-humored intelligent face, and a middle-aged, +heavily-bearded, blue-eyed man whose tattooed arms and rolling gait +told of a life spent on tossing seas and whose confident bearing and +air of authority stamped him as one above the rank of a common sailor. + +Those who have followed The Boy Chums through their many adventures +will recognize in the little party their old friends Charley West, +Walter Hazard, Captain Westfield and the Bahama lad, Chris, who lately +returned from a perilous trip along the Atlantic beach searching for +wreckage, and now seeking some promising venture in which to invest the +Fifteen Hundred Dollars they earned on that voyage. + +"You're right, Charley," agreed the other boy. "I didn't know before +that there was a sight like this in Florida. Here's a bench. Let's set +down and rest a bit. I am tired from walking." + +"Golly, I reckon dis nigger's tired some too," chimed in the little +darkey, "I'se dun had de toothache in mah legs for most an hour, but +I'se had to keep up wid you-alls. Don't dare let you white chillen +prognostracate 'round a queer place like dis alone." + +The seat selected was a long bench standing on the edge of the +sidewalk, its back to the sandy street. The four seated themselves at +one end and gazed around with eager interest at the strange scene, +unconscious of the curious glances bestowed upon them by a large, +deeply-tanned man, who, seated on the other end of the bench, was +languidly whittling on a piece of white pine with a large sheaf knife. + +The scene was one to arouse more than passing interest. Up and down +the sidewalk hurried swarthy-faced, powerfully-built men of all ages +and appearances, but all possessed of the same clear-cut features and +straight noses. Singly and in groups of two and three, they hurried +past, picturesque in their bright-colored clothing with gaudy sashes +knotted about their waists. About all clustered an air of energy and +bustle uncommon to sleepy Florida towns. + +Built up close to the inner edge of the sidewalk was a row of large +buildings startling in their coats of bright yellow, red, blue, and +green paint. Stretching away, close together in the distance, they +gave one the impression of a gigantic rainbow. Through their wide-open +doors and windows the interested onlookers could gain a plain view of +the interiors, from which came the confused jangle of foreign tongues. +To the right of where the little party sat was a busy grocery store, +its windows filled with strings of dried garlic, strange-looking +cheeses, queer nuts and fruits and a multitude of eatables strange to +American eyes. To the left of them was a tobacco factory, the whirling +machines shredding up the huge brown leaves into hair-like fibers and +binding them up into pound packages. Directly before them was a great +hall filled with little tables around which were seated groups of the +regular-featured men, playing cards, eating, or puffing at strange +pipes, with a small hose for a stem, the smoke passing through great +glass vessels partly filled with rose water before it reached the +smoker's lips. + +"That's the fifteenth place of that kind I've counted to-day," remarked +Charley West. "From their numbers, one would imagine that these people +did nothing but eat and play cards." + +"I'd like to try one of them pipes," said Captain Westfield, wistfully. +"I'll bet they give a good, cool smoke." + +"Let's go in and get dinner," Walter suggested. "I am hungry as a wolf +and that food smells mighty good. You can try a pipe after we eat, +Captain." + +The man at the end of the bench shifted his position closer to them. + +"Strangers here?" he enquired. + +"Just came in this morning. We're looking into the sponge business a +bit," replied the Captain. + +Charley eyed the tanned man closely. There was a sinister expression to +the fellow's face, and his eyes shifted uneasily away from the lad's +level glance. The keen-witted boy was not favorably impressed with the +stranger's appearance, but the man's cordiality drove away his faint +feeling of distrust. + +"I'll go in with you then," he offered. "Those fellows don't speak much +English and you would have a hard job making them understand what you +wanted. I know a little Greek and may be able to help you out a bit." + +"Much obliged to you," said the Captain, gratefully. "We don't +understand a word of their lingo. I'll stand treat to the dinner if +you'll eat with us." + +"It's a go," agreed the stranger, quickly. "Come on. My name's Robert, +Captain Roberts," he volunteered when the little party were seated +around one of the tables, "I'm a retired ship's master." + +Captain Westfield introduced himself and his companions. "As I said, we +are lookin' into this sponge business a bit, but it's hard to pick out +the proper course from these twisted-tongued furriners," he said. "Do +you happen to know anything about it?" + +"I used to be in the business myself," Captain Roberts replied +promptly. "I made enough money in it to quit the sea for good." + +"Then I reckon you're the very man to give us a few pointers. Is there +as much money in it as one hears tell of?" + +"More," declared the other. "These Greeks are getting rich off +sponging. It is not anything unusual for a schooner's crew to clear up +three or four thousand dollars from a single trip. It takes quite a bit +of money to make a start, though." + +"We have got a little change in our clothes," said the Captain, +modestly. "Do you reckon a person could get started good on a Thousand +dollars?" + +"That would do nicely," declared Captain Roberts, "and I can tell you +just how to lay it out to the best advantage, but let's order dinner +first. We can talk while we are eating." + +He beckoned to a dark-skinned, ill-favored waiter and gave an order in +low-pitched fluent Greek. + +The waiter was back almost instantly with a tray-load of steaming +dishes which he placed upon the table. The boys could not determine +the exact nature of the strange viands, but they were too hungry to be +critical, and attacked the food with hearty appetites. + +"This mutton stew is delicious," Charley declared as he took another +helping. "I don't know as I ever tasted anything better." + +Captain Roberts grinned. "You don't want to make any guesses about +Greek food," he declared. "That isn't mutton, but just tough old +Billy-goat, fattened on a diet of tin cans. These fellows have the +knack of fixing up such things so they can't recognize them themselves. +Just wait till the coffee is served. You'll say you never drank any +better. But let's get back to that sponging business now, Captain." + +He and Captain Westfield were soon plunged in a tangled maze of talk +about schooners, diving boats, sponges, and divers. + +The boys gave but little heed to the discussion for their attention was +partly diverted by the unusual scene around them. + +"It's just like being in another country," Walter whispered to his chum. + +"Yes, but I don't like the attention we seem to receive," Charley +replied. "Those fellows are staring at us as though there was something +wrong in our being here." + +The Greeks gathered around the other tables indeed seemed more than +casually interested in the little party. They stared frequently at them +and their new acquaintance, and exchanged significant glances and low +words with each other. + +"I guess we appear as odd to them as they do to us," Walter said, +carelessly. "There is a man who is not a Greek. That fellow leaning +against the end of the counter in the corner." + +The man indicated was unmistakably an American. He was short, +heavily-built and had a determined, aggressive face. He was engaged in +a heated discussion with the proprietor of the cafe and his heavy face +was flushed with anger. As the boys gazed curiously, he brought down +his clenched fist on the counter with a force that shattered some of +the dishes piled upon it. + +"You needn't smirk, grin, and make excuses," he thundered at the suave, +smiling Greek. "You've got to pay me that bill you owe me. It's been +standing for months and I happen to know that you are making money all +the time, hand over fist. It's no use pretending you don't understand +me," he shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoulders. "You know +what I say. If you don't come up with the money by to-morrow night I'll +close up this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining goods under +false pretences. And it will not be any use for you to try your nice +little Greek trick of a knife in my back in the dark. I go heeled and +I don't go to sleep when I walk this street. The fellow who tries that +trick on me will stop enough lead to start a cartridge factory." + +He turned and was walking towards the door when his glance rested for a +moment on the boys and their companions. His glance swept swiftly over +each member of the little party. He paused, hesitated a moment, then +turning, walked swiftly towards their table. + +Captain Roberts rose hastily at his approach. "There's a friend of mine +over there," he said hurriedly, "who I want to speak to. I'll be back +in a minute." + +The approaching stranger noted his departure with a grim smile. He +stopped beside the Captain and stood gazing down for one brief minute. + +"Are you fools or strangers?" he demanded, crisply. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +MR. DRIVER. + + +THE stranger's smile robbed his words of their hardness. + +"Strangers, yes," Charley replied, "Fools, no." + +"No offense intended," said the man, quickly. "Strangers will sometimes +take advice but fools will not. My advice to you strangers is to keep +out of places like this and not to make friends with other strangers. I +don't suppose you know who that man is who just left you." + +"He's a retired sea captain," said Captain Westfield. "He was giving us +some pointers about the sponge business. Mighty pleasant an' obligin' +fellow. Mighty fair-spoken." + +"Bless your simple little souls," exclaimed the stranger. "He's no +captain, active or retired. He's the runner for this place. Lucky you +haven't any of you drank your coffee yet. You'd be waking up in some +alley bye-and-bye with your heads aching from knock-out drops and your +pockets turned inside out. My, but you were easy." + +"I don't reckon any one would dare do such a thing in broad daylight," +Captain Westfield declared. + +"It's been done in this place a dozen times. And the victim's kicks +never did any good after it happened, for there was always a dozen +Greeks ready to go on the stand and swear that it was only a case of +drunkenness on the victim's part. Better get out of here." + +The humbled little party arose and followed their conductor out to the +sidewalk. As they passed through the crowd they could not help but +notice the wrathful glances the sitters bestowed upon the one who had +cheated them of their victims. + +"I guess we have acted pretty green," Charley admitted, as they passed +outside, "but we were so eager to learn about the sponge business that +we forgot caution. Besides, one does not look for such tricks in a +little town like this. It's not like a big city where one has to be +always on his guard against strangers." + +The stranger favored the members of the little party with a closer +scrutiny than he had yet bestowed upon them. + +"So you are figuring on going into the sponge business, eh?" he asked. + +"We may try it a bit if we find out that it pays as well as we have +heard tell of," answered Captain Westfield, cautiously, "but it's +mighty hard to find out anything definite about it from these Greeks." + +"Oh, there's big money in it all right," said their new friend. "You +might make a go of it. You are a pretty husky, determined-looking lot +and would soon get on to the Greekish tricks. It's a risky business, +though. I don't advise anyone to take it up." + +"We've encountered a few risks in other lines," said Charlie, modestly. +"We are willing to take a few chances if there's money enough in it to +tempt us." + +The stranger pulled out his watch and looked at the time. "My name is +Driver," he remarked. "I own a store over on the next street in the +American section. Business is slack at this time of day and I will show +you around a bit, if you wish. My clerks can look out for the trade for +an hour or two." + +"No need of thanks," he said as the Captain accepted his offer +gratefully. "If you decide to go into the sponge business, you will +need lots of provisions and I hope to sell them to you. We Americans +do not get any of the Greek trade and we are always glad to secure a +new customer. Now I suppose you want to know about the profit side of +the business first. Well, I can not give you exact figures but I know +that all engaged in the business are making big money. All these big +buildings you see have been built out of sponging, and they do not +represent a hundredth part of the money made out of the business. +There is an enormous amount sent back to Greece every month through the +post-office and bank here. I know Greeks who landed here only a few +years ago with nothing but the clothes on their backs--and those were +mighty poor--that are wealthy men now and they made their fortunes out +of sponges. Oh, there's big money in it all right. But you can look +into that part of the business closer later on. Now, I want to show +you something of the sponges themselves. We will go down to the harbor +first." + +The interested little party followed him as he led the way along a soft +sand road flanked by scrub palmettos. + +Their guide paused beside one of the several large buildings standing +close to the road. "This is a clipping shed," he said. + +The building was open on one side and was filled with a crowd of old +men, women and young boys, all Greeks. Before each was a pile of rough +sponges from which they were clipping the spoilt parts with great +shearing shears. In one corner, a man worked over a big screw-press, +pressing the severed fragments of sponges into huge compact bales. + +"That part isn't important enough to waste much time looking at," Mr. +Driver said, as he turned away. "Come on and I'll show you something +worth seeing." + +As they followed along behind their guide, the boys became sensible +of a strong, pleasant, appetizing odor in the air, an odor which grew +stronger as they advanced. A turn in the road brought them suddenly +upon the source of the odor. On the shore of a quiet little land-locked +harbor, blazed dozens of small camp-fires over which sat great iron +kettles. On pieces of canvas laid upon the ground were piles of fresh +beef and mutton. Over each pile worked several Greeks cutting the meat +with the sheaf knives into tiny squares about an inch in size. Other +Greeks were dumping the little square pieces into the kettles, while +still others kept the contents stirred and the fires under the kettles +burning briskly. + +"They are putting down the meat for their next voyage," explained Mr. +Driver. "They roast it in its own fat, put it into stone jars, and pour +the fat over it. As soon as the fat cools and congeals it forms an +air-tight covering which keeps the meat from spoiling." + +"If it tastes half as good as it smells, it must be delicious," Charley +remarked. + +Chris viewed the cooking operation with professional jealousy. "Golly, +I bet dey can't cook like dis nigger," he declared, "I spect dem +kettles ain't none too clean noway." + +Captain Westfield gave but scant attention to the trying-out process. +His interest was centered on the big fleet of schooners anchored near +shore. They were over a hundred in number and were of all sizes and +designs. They made a pretty sight lying gracefully close together in +the little harbor. But the old sailor soon strolled on to where groups +of Greeks were building and repairing boats on the shore. He inspected +their work with a critical eye, but he was soon lost in admiration. + +"Lads," he exclaimed, "I never saw such workmen before. They are +turnin' out tight, neat seaworthy little crafts with no tools but a saw +and a hatchet. Ain't those queer lookin' crafts though." + +The boats were about thirty feet in length, sharp at both bow and +stern, and of enormous depth for their size. True to their love for +bright colors the Greeks had painted each plank a different hue and the +little vessels looked like floating rainbows. + +The captain viewed their single masts, which inclined aft at an angle +of forty-five degrees, with deep-sea scorn. + +"It's clean against Nature for a mast to be set that way," he declared. +"It ain't regular or ship-shape." + +"Those small crafts are used as diving boats," Mr. Driver explained. +"They carry a big square sail, but most of them are equipped with +engines also. They are great sea boats and will ride out a gale almost +as well as the schooners." + +His explanations were interrupted by loud talking close at hand and +the little party, full of curiosity, hastened to the spot from which +the uproar came. + +In the center of a circle of curious onlookers, a large man wearing a +marshal's badge was slipping a pair of handcuffs on the wrists of a +slender boyish-looking young fellow. + +"No need to put those things on me, Mr. Officer," the lad was +protesting, passionately. "I'll go along with you without any trouble. +I've only acted within my rights and all I want is a fair trial." + +"Anything you say can be used against you at your trial," cautioned the +marshal. + +"I don't care, I admit I shot two of those treacherous Greeks. It was +the only thing to do. When it came on to blow a gale, they refused to +cut the cable, and work the schooner. It was a case of making them obey +orders and get her off before the seas or lose my ship. I only wish I +had shot more of them. They have been laying for me ever since to slip +a knife into me and chuck me overboard. I haven't dared take a wink of +sleep for three days and two nights." + +"Poor fellow," said Mr. Driver, as the marshal led away his protesting +captive. "I expect it happened just as he says--an open mutiny, +compelling him to shoot--but every Greek in his crew will go on the +stand and swear that it was a case of cold-blooded murder. Fortunately, +the judge is wise to Greek methods and the law deals gently with +commanders." + +"He looked mighty young to be a captain," said Captain Westfield. + +"It's this way," Mr. Driver explained, "the law compels the Greeks to +have an American captain for each schooner and diving boat, and they +hire the youngest and, therefore, cheapest man that they can get. It's +a dog's life, out alone for months with a gang that doesn't speak +a word of English. As long as the captain is content to be a mere +figurehead he can get along without serious trouble, but the minute +he runs counter to their wishes there is a row. But time is flying, +and I must get back to the store. If you will come back with me I'll +introduce you to a man who knows more about sponging than another +American in the country." + +"Just a moment, lads," said the Captain, as they turned to go. "Which +of those schooners do you like the best?" + +The two chums unhesitatingly indicated a beautiful two-masted, +snow-white schooner that seemed to rest as loftily on the water as a +floating swan. The grace and beauty of exquisite lines marked her out +from the many shapely schooners surrounding her. In large gilt letters +on either side of her bow was her name "Beauty". + +"She's my choice too," declared the Captain. "I wish we owned her. I +ain't never seen a prettier model." + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +PREPARATIONS. + + +AS soon as they got back into town, Mr. Driver hunted up the man of +whom he had spoken, and, introducing him to each of the little party, +hurried back to his store. + +Mr. Williams was a young man still in his twenties. He was a stocky, +well-built young fellow with an intelligent face, determined manner, +and a short, crisp way of speaking. He sized up the little party with +one quick appraising glance as Captain Westfield stated their errand. + +"If you are not willing to stand hardships, dirt, discomfort, and +danger, you want nothing to do with sponging," he declared. + +"We can stand anything that it pays us to stand," Charley replied, +quickly. + +"Well, that's the right kind of spirit," approved the young man, "but, +of course you don't any of you realize what you will have to meet. I've +seen others start in with the same confidence and get cold feet before +the first trip was over. It isn't any nice, ladies' pink-tea business. +It's a game for real men, but if the men are the right kind, they +get their reward for what they endure, all right, all right. I landed +here with an empty pocket and emptier stomach, and now,--well, I am +not a John D. Rockefeller yet, but I've got enough laid by to keep the +wolf from the door for a good many years. Better men than I have done +better than I have. It's like everything else, the best man wins, and +wins something worth winning, but, as I have said, it's no business for +nice, tender, little Willie boys, it's a man's game." + +Charley grinned in sympathy with the reliant, independent spirit of the +young fellow which was close kin to his own traits. "We left off our +short pants last summer," he observed, gravely, "we are fast learning +to dress ourselves, and the Captain there can even comb his own hair." + +"Good," chuckled the other, "I guess _you_ will pass muster anyway, so +I will give you some idea of what you will have to expect. First, there +is the loneliness. For three months at a time you'll be at sea without +another soul to talk to, for there are very few of the Greeks who speak +English. With a party like yours it would not be so bad for you would +be company for each other, but for the American captains who go out +alone with a crew of Greeks, it's awful. I've known some to go crazy +for sheer loneliness, and few ever make a second trip,--I'll never +forget my first experience. Second, sponging is a dirty business, the +stench from dying sponges will upset any but the strongest stomachs. +Third, there are the dangers, storms, accidents, and troubles with the +crew. I have never had any serious trouble with my own men, but then I +understand their lingo and that counts for a good deal, and, besides +they all know me around here and know that I will shoot first and +explain afterwards--that counts for still more." + +"All that is interesting, but it ain't to the pint," said Captain +Westfield. "The question is what can one make off a trip. I reckon them +little things you're telling about is just details." + +"I'm afraid you'll find them pretty serious details," Mr. Williams +said with a laugh, "but you are right, the money point is the main +thing. That's the only thing that has kept me in the business. Well, I +had considerable _bad_ luck last trip but I cleaned up three thousand +dollars. I've been doing better than that." + +The chums looked at each other with expressive faces while Mr. +Williams' keen black eyes twinkled as he watched them. + +"I seed a schooner down at the harbor," observed Captain Westfield, +carelessly. "She was a pretty looking little craft and her name just +seemed to fit her--'The Beauty'. If she's good an' sound an' for sale, +I might be willing to give a thousand dollars for her." + +Mr. Williams laughed, "You are not the first sailor who has fallen +in love with the 'Beauty'. She is the finest ever. She has led the +sponging fleet for three seasons. Many have tried to buy her but +couldn't. You are in luck, however. Her owner died last week and I have +just received a letter from his widow asking me to find a purchaser for +her. You can have her as she lays for thirteen hundred dollars, and she +is dirt cheap at that." + +"Will you hold that offer open until ten o'clock to-night?" asked the +captain, "we will want to talk it all over a bit." + +Mr. Williams agreed to his request, and, after thanking him gratefully +for his information, the little party took their departure. + +"Back to the harbor," said the captain as soon as they were out of +hearing. "I want to take a good look at the 'Beauty'. If she is +anyway near as good as she looks from a distance she's worth at least +twenty-five hundred dollars. Why we could make a tidy sum by buying +her, sailing her around to Jacksonville, and selling her again." + +They soon arrived at the harbor again where for a quarter they hired a +young Greek to row them out to the schooner. + +They found the little vessel all that her name implied. She was about +sixty-five feet long and broad for her length. She looked more like a +gentleman's yacht than a sponging vessel and they were all delighted +with her appearance. But pleased as they were with her on deck, they +were even more pleased with her below. There, they found a large +main cabin with swinging lamps, hanging sideboard, easy chairs, and +comfortable furnishings. Opening into the main cabin were found roomy +staterooms, two on a side, furnished with large bunks containing +springy mattresses. Instead of the small portholes, common with crafts +of her size, each stateroom was provided with windows of heavy glass to +admit air and light. + +Up forward at the foremast was the forecastle, or crew's quarters. It +was large, comfortable and well equipped with bunks. Aft of it was +the cook's galley, containing a good stove and plenty of pots, pans +and kettles. Everything was exquisitely neat and clean. But Captain +Westfield was not content with a mere survey of cabin and furnishings. +He unfurled several of the sails and examined the canvas closely. He +tested the strength of rope after rope. He climbed aloft and looked +over blocks, stays, and running gear. Lastly, he descended into the +hold and examined all that was visible of the vessel's ribs and +planking. + +"She's as tidy a little craft as I ever saw," he declared, when he at +last rejoined the boys back by the wheel. "She ain't over six years old +an' her sails an' rigging are all new. She's worth twenty-five hundred +dollars of any man's money if she's worth a cent. All we have got to +do it to buy her and carry her around to some lively port an' we can +make twelve hundred dollars as easy as finding it." + +"What's the use of selling her right off if we buy her," Walter +suggested, "Surely a few months' use will not lessen her value to any +great extent. Why not make a couple of trips sponging in her. I am +anxious to have a try for some of that big money they all talk about. +We will never have a better chance than now. At the worst, we would +only lose the price of a few months' provisions, we would still have +our vessel worth far more than we paid for her." + +"You've hit the nail right on the head," the captain exclaimed, +delightedly. "That's just what I've been studying over, but I reckoned +I'd wait an' see if either of you boys proposed it." + +Charley hesitated before agreeing to his chum's proposal. "I confess, +I am not so anxious to try the sponge business as I was," he remarked. +"First, we know nothing about it ourselves, and would have to depend +entirely upon hired help--which is a bad thing to have to do in +any business. Second, I don't like the Greeks, I don't like their +appearances, I don't like the reputation they have, and I don't like +the idea of being with a gang that doesn't understand English." + +"Bosh," Walter replied, lightly, "we will get along all right with +them. It isn't like one lone man being out with them, there are four +of us and they wouldn't dare start trouble with so many. As for making +them understand, why we can hire a man as interpreter. I believe it's +the best chance to make money we've had yet." + +"And I too," Captain Westfield agreed. "I reckon we'd be foolish to +let such a chance slip by. That young fellow Williams says he's made +considerable." + +"But he made several trips and learned the business before he went into +it on his own hook," Charley objected. "However, I am not going to hold +back if the rest of you want to try it." + +"Good," exclaimed the captain, "we will go right back and settle the +deal with Williams. We'll make money off the schooner if we don't off +the sponging." + +They found Mr. Williams still in his office. The thirteen hundred +dollars was paid over and they received a bill of sale for the +'Beauty', one diving boat and everything the schooner contained. + +"You've got a good boat at a mighty low price," he said. "There is no +reason why you shouldn't make well with her, if you just use common +sense. Doubtless, you have heard lots of hard things about the Greeks, +but I don't believe they are half as bad as they are painted. Half of +the trouble captains have with them comes from their not understanding +each other. Get a reliable man to translate your orders, and you will +get along all right although you will find it a hard life. I wish I +could help you select your crew but I have to go to Tampa to-morrow, +and will not be back until the fleet sails. We will see each other +again on the sponging grounds, if not before. I wish you the best of +luck until we meet." + +The now tired little party bade the hustling young man good-bye and +repaired to the small hotel where they engaged rooms and meals. + +After supper Charley unpacked his valise and got out the silver-mounted +revolver presented to him by Mr. Weston. He noted its calibre and +sauntering down to the hardware store purchased several boxes of +cartridges of a size to fit. He gave a couple of boxes to Walter who +possessed the exact duplicate of his weapon. + +"That's my first preparation for our trip," he said laughing. + +But, although he spoke lightly, he was troubled by vague misgivings +that their new venture was not going to be the smooth sailing his +companions believed. For one thing, he doubted if rough, blunt, +quick-tempered Captain Westfield was just the man to successfully +handle the suave, oily, treacherous Greeks. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE START. + + +"WE have got to get a move on us," Captain Westfield said as the +four chums gathered together at the breakfast table. "I've been out +enquirin' around this mornin' an' I've larned that the sponging fleet +sails in two days. Of course we don't have to go with the fleet, but, +bein' as it's our first trip an' we're green at the business, I reckon, +we had better keep with the crowd an' learn all we can. I've been up +to see the United States Commissioner an' got charts of the sponging +grounds an' took out papers for the ship. We're all officers on the +papers, lads. He put me down as captain of the schooner, Chris is mate. +You, Charley, are captain of the diving boats, an' Walter's chief +engineer." + +"I don't want to be no mate," Chris protested. "I wants to be de cook. +Dat's schooner's got a powerful fine galley an' a sight ob pots an' +kettles. Golly! I reckon dis nigger can fix up de grub better dan any +of dem ignorant furriners. A mate ain't no manner ob count on board a +little ship. De captain's always blamin' him for somethin' or udder +an' de crew always hates him. He's always in trubble wid one or the +udder. Now de cook's always his own boss, he don't hab to stay out +nights in de cold an' de rain an' ebbery one is powerful perlite to +him, 'cause dey wants to keep on de bes' side ob de one dat handles de +grub. I'd rather be a cook dan an ole mate any day." + +"But you don't know how to rig up their queer furrin dishes, lad," the +captain explained. "They ain't used to eatin' grub fixed up good like +you fix it." + +"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little negro, pompously. "I +spect dey doan know much 'bout cookin'. Reckon dey wouldn't eat any +more ob der own if dey got a taste ob mine." + +"That's the trouble," the captain agreed craftily, "an' we don't want +to spoil them. Besides, I reckoned you'd like to be mate. Why, I was at +sea ten years before I got a mate's berth. I reckon your folks on Cat +Island would be mighty proud to hear that you were one an' was wearing +a blue suit with big brass buttons, an' a cap with Mate on it in big +gilt letters." + +"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the little negro, +delightedly, rising hastily from the table. "I'se goin' to buy dem +clothes right now an' hab my picture took in 'em an' send 'bout twenty +ob dem to de folks on Cat Island." + +"You got around that pretty neatly, Captain," Charley said, as soon as +Chris was gone. "I expected him to insist upon being cook. He thinks no +one else can do it so well. But, seriously, don't you think we are all +rather young to be ship's officers. Men are quite apt to resent having +to take orders from mere boys." + +"The law requires that those four offices be filled by Americans an' +we can't afford to hire men to fill the places. Chris will be under my +orders all the time an' will be mate only in name. But you boys are +already smart sailors an' I expect you to be real officers on your +boats. If you weren't on the papers proper you might have trouble with +your men, but the fact that you are regular commissioned officers will +make smooth sailing for you. Any refusal to obey your orders would be +mutiny." + +"Very well, Captain," agreed Walter. "What do you want Captain West and +I to do next?" + +"Just lay around an' enjoy yourselves this mornin', I guess. The first +thing is to get a fellow who talks Greek an' to hire a crew. I want to +pick them out myself. As soon as we get them there will be plenty to +do stockin' up with grub an' water. Better spend the time lookin' over +your new command an' pickin' up what you can about the business." + +The advice was good, and, as soon as they had finished breakfast, the +boys hastened down to the harbor to inspect the diving boats they had +acquired with the purchase of the 'Beauty'. Upon a close inspection, +they were delighted with their new commands. The little vessel was +quite new and its model promised great seaworthiness. Besides the huge +square sail it carried, it was equipped with a ten-horse power gasoline +engine. Its rig was different from any the boys had ever seen, and they +spent several hours studying it, and making themselves acquainted with +the working of the engine. + +"I believe I can handle it by myself now, if I had to do it," Charley +declared, at last. "The engine may give us a little trouble at first, +but we will soon get on to it and it's likely there will be several +Greeks in the crew who know how to run it. Now, the next thing is to +settle on a name for our craft." + +"I thought of calling it 'Flora'," Walter said, with a little sheepish +smile. + +"And I was thinking of naming it 'Ola'," declared Charley promptly. + +After a spirited debate over the two names they held in such esteem, +the two lads at last came to a compromise by agreeing to call their +little ship "The Two Sisters". This decided, they rummaged around +in the lockers until they found paint and brushes with which they +proceeded to letter on the bow of their crafts the name chosen. + +As soon as this task was finished, they returned to the village and +made a round of the shops purchasing clothing for their trip, pricing +provisions, and learning all they could from the various merchants +about the Greeks and the sponge business. + +They were passing a little photo studio when Chris' voice hailed them +from inside. It was hard for them to refrain from laughter at the +figure the little negro presented. + +A common blue suit had been too tame a color for Chris' +brilliant-loving soul. He was clothed in a pair of baggish yellow +trousers, many sizes too large for him, a coat of vivid scarlet hue, +and a cap of deepest purple. But in spite of his brilliant attire, his +little ebony face expressed deepest satisfaction. On a chair beside +him was a great pile of finished tin-types and the Greek proprietor, +beaming at the unusual rush of business, was just adjusting his camera +to take another. + +"Why, what do you want with any more of them, Chris?" Walter exclaimed. +"You've got enough already to supply everyone on Cat Island." + +"Dey ain't no good," replied the little darkey, mournfully, "I 'spect +dis man doan know his business." + +Charley examined one of the despised tintypes. "Why, they look just +like you," he declared. + +"Dey's just black an' white," protested the little negro. "Dey doan +show de colors at all." + +The chums turned their heads aside to hide their grins. + +"That's a Greek camera, Chris," Charley said with a wink at Walter. +"You can't expect it to take American colors. I tell you what to do. +Just write at the bottom of each picture: Pants, yellow; coat, scarlet; +cap, purple." + +"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the little darkey, +brightening. "But it hain't like habbing de colors show," he added, +mournfully. + +The three were making their way back to the hotel when their progress +was arrested by piercing screams coming from the rear of a large Greek +restaurant. + +The boys hesitated and looked at each other. + +"Sounds as though someone was hurt pretty bad," Charley commented, "but +I guess we had better go along about our business. We are likely to +get ourselves into trouble if we meddle with things in this section," +but as he spoke the screams rang out afresh. The chums looked at each +other; there was no need for words between them. + +"Well, it's foolish, but here goes," Charley exclaimed. + +A narrow alley led into the rear of the building and down it has +hastened followed by his two companions. + +A minute's walk brought them to the scene of the screams. + +In a little back yard stood a small Greek boy about thirteen years of +age. He was clad only in short trousers and his bare back and legs +were covered with angry welts. Above him towered a dark, scowling +Greek, who was swinging a heavy cowhide whip, while at each descent of +the cruel, stinging lash the lad's screams rose in piteous protests. +Clustered around was some dozen men and boys looking on with unconcern. + +Charley caught the Greek's arm as it rose for another blow. "Stop that, +you big brute," he cried, trembling with anger. "You have no right to +beat a little fellow like that, no matter what he has done. If you hit +him another blow, I'll have you arrested." + +"He won't understand you, Charley," Walter cautioned. + +But the Greek did understand. He turned a look of the deepest hate on +the plucky lad. For a second he seemed in the act of striking him with +the heavy whip, but Charley did not flinch. "Try it, if you dare," he +cried. + +The Greek lowered his upraised arm. "Why should I not strike him?" He +demanded savagely, but in perfect English. "He is mine, I pay his fare +all the way from Greece. All day he plays on the street and brings home +no money. I will beat him if I wish." + +"You will not," declared Charley, firmly. "If you do, you will be +arrested very quickly. Lad, if this man attempts to beat you again, +you come to us; you will find us on board the schooner 'Beauty'. If +she is not in the harbor you go to Mr. Driver who owns the store, I +will tell him about you and he will see that you are not abused. Do you +understand what I say?" + +"Yes sir, I speak English good," the little lad replied proudly. "He +teach me so I can beg the pennies." + +The Greek's manner had suddenly changed. His frown disappeared and he +wore a smile that he endeavored to make pleasant. + +"The noble young gentleman need not worry," he said, smoothly, "I love +the boy and already regret having whipped him--he is very bad. But it +shall happen no more." + +"It had better not," Charley replied shortly, as he turned away. "Come +on, Walt, I am going to speak to Mr. Driver about it now." + +Mr. Driver listened to the lad's story with a very grave face. "I'm +afraid you boys have made a dangerous enemy," he said. "That Greek is +Manuel George, and he is a very bad character. He was arrested once +for the murder of another Greek, but they could not prove the charge +against him although everyone believed that he had done it. You want to +be very careful as long as you are in Tarpon. I will gladly have him +arrested if the boy makes any complaint to me." + +The boys found the captain waiting for them at the hotel. "I've had +the best of luck," the old sailor declared. "I found the very Greek we +need to make our orders plain to the crew. He talks English as good +as you or I. I did not lose any time in gettin' his name on the ship's +papers. He promised to meet us here at the hotel this noon. There he +comes now." + +The chums exchanged a glance of dismay, for approaching their table, +bowing, smiling, and as suave as though they were his dearest friends +was Mr. Manuel George. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +THE START. + + +THE captain introduced the boys to the Greek who beamed upon them as +though nothing unpleasant had ever passed between them. The lads met +his smiling advances with a cold silence which the captain noticed with +puzzled concern. + +As soon as he could do so without attracting too much notice, Walter +drew the old sailor to one side. "We don't want anything to do with +that man," he declared, and he hurriedly told about the whipping and +repeated what Mr. Driver had said. + +Captain Westfield looked troubled. "I wish I'd known that two hours +ago," he said. "He's signed on with us now an' if I try to get rid of +him he can make a lot of trouble for us. We have got to take him along. +If we don't, he's liable to libel the schooner an' cost us no end of +money and delay." + +Walter's face showed his anxiety and concern. + +"He said he was going to bring a boy along with him to act as cabin +boy," said the old sailor after an uncomfortable pause. "Maybe it will +all work out for the best. He won't be able to abuse the lad on the +schooner, an' I don't see how he can make us any trouble. All he's to +do is to make our orders plain to the men, it ain't as though he was an +officer over them." + +"Well, if it can't be helped, we have just got to make the best of it," +Walter agreed, "I am going to keep a mighty close watch on him all the +time, though. We will talk more about it later on. He keeps glancing at +us as though he knew we were talking about him." + +As soon as he got the chance, Walter told his chum what the captain had +said. + +"I don't like the idea of that fellow going with us," Charley declared, +"but if it has got to be, we had better start in by treating him +friendly. It won't help matters any to quarrel with him." + +That was sound sense and the boys at once began to treat the Greek +pleasantly, in spite of the dislike they felt for him. + +There was no doubt but what the fellow understood his position +thoroughly. With his able assistance, the captain, in a short time, +secured a full crew of fifteen men, including four professional divers +who brought their queer looking suits with lead shoes and heavy helmets +along with them. The boys were pleased with the appearance of the men. +They were well-built, husky fellows and looked to be capable sailors. +They were much alike in looks, all being broad-shouldered and swarthy +with clean-cut features and straight noses. One alone seemed to differ +greatly from the rest. He was a tall, powerful, handsome fellow with +unusually small hands and feet. He seemed to be shunned by the others +and left very much to himself. He was evidently a good sailor and when +the captain set his new crew at work to getting the schooner ready for +sea he performed his part with a quickness and intelligence that won +the old sailor's approval. + +As soon as the work was well under way, Charley and Walter, taking the +interpreter with them, went back up town to purchase their stores. The +bulk of their purchases were made at Mr. Driver's store, but there were +many articles that he did not carry in stock which they had to buy at +the Greek stores. Manuel directed them as to the kind of food their +crew were accustomed to. The bulk of the stores consisted of ripe black +olives in small kegs; queer looking cheeses, rice, black flour and an +abundance of tea and coffee. The boys bought three whole beeves and +four lambs, directing that all their purchases should be sent down to +the schooner at once. + +"Whew," whistled Charley as he paid the last bill, "we have only got +five dollars left of our fifteen hundred." + +"Don't you care," Walter replied, confidently. "We will have a couple +of thousand dollars anyway coming to us when we get back, and still +have the 'Beauty' besides." + +The boys next visited the hotel and got their valises and belongings +which they carried down to their new floating home. + +They found that the Greeks already had the meat cut up and sizzling +merrily in the great iron kettles. + +The new crew were a quick and willing lot and before dark the last +article was stored aboard, and, with the diving boat towing along +behind, they dropped the schooner down the river to the mouth and +anchored for the night just outside amongst a great fleet of schooners +lying ready for an early morning start for the sponging ground. + +Long after they had eaten their supper and all of the crew but the +anchor watch had retired to the forecastle, the four chums sat on +deck admiring the beauty of the scene around them. A thousand lights +twinkled from the fleet and high in the air ahead of them the great +lantern of the Anclote lighthouse on its little island of barren rock. + +Captain Westfield awoke the boys early next morning, "Hurry up on deck +if you want to see the prettiest sight you ever saw," he said. The lads +hustled into their clothing and followed him up the ladder. As they +gained the deck they paused with exclamations of deepest admiration. + +It was blowing a stiff breeze and the blue water of the Gulf was +dancing and sparkling with white-crested waves. Around them was the +fleet all under sail, their snowy canvas towering high above their +shapely hulls. Some lay with sails slatting, still clinging to their +anchorage while their brightly attired crews worked over windlasses, +reeling in the dripping cables. Some already under way lay hove-to in +the open Gulf waiting for their fellows; while still others, anchors +tripped and sails drawing, heeling over to the brisk breeze, darted +away, sending the water tossing and foaming from their bows. + +The boys drew a long breath of pure delight at the beautiful picture. + +"It's grand," Charley cried. + +"Aye, lad," agreed the captain with satisfaction. "There's no place +like the sea for beautiful scenes. But thar ain't a ship in the whole +fleet as pretty as our own. Just watch her now." + +The old sailor gave a few short orders which the interpreter repeated +to the crew. A dozen of them sprang to the windlass, while others stood +by the halyards, ready to hoist the big jibs the second the anchor +broke ground. The "Beauty's" huge main and foresails were already +hoisted and her cable hove short. + +The men at the windlass shouted some words. + +"Anchor broke," translated Manuel. + +"Up helm," commanded the captain, "give her the jibs." + +The great sails mounted their stays, the "Beauty's" head played off, +and, careening over 'till her lee rail touched the water, she surged +through the waters like a thing alive. + +The chums watched the foam sweep past in transports of delight. + +"My, but she's fast," Walter cried. + +"Aye, lad," the captain agreed, joyfully. "I ain't never seen a faster, +except maybe Black Sam's schooner. We'll have to shorten sail in an +hour if we don't want to run away from the rest of the fleet." + +The boys watched with delight as the Beauty overhauled and passed +schooner after schooner. + +As she surged past a large black-hulled vessel with three diving boats +in tow, a man on the stranger's deck waved his cap and shouted, + +"Good luck to you. Better keep with the fleet." + +"That's Mr. Williams," Charley exclaimed. "I am glad that we are going +to be near somebody we know." + +"Yes, it is Mr. Williams," affirmed Manuel, who was standing near. "But +here is my little boy to say that your breakfast is ready." + +"What is your name?" Walter enquired of the little fellow as they all +followed him below. "I could never remember that," he said, when the +lad replied with a very long Greek name. "I guess we will have to call +you Ben for short." + +The band of chums were very hungry and they seated themselves around +the table before the steaming cups of coffee and waited impatiently +for the food to be brought on, but the little Greek lad took a position +behind their chairs and waited. + +"Hurry up, Ben, and bring the breakfast," the captain ordered. + +"Breakfast there," the lad replied. + +The old sailor repeated his order but Ben replied as before. + +"I reckon he don't understand," the captain remarked, "Go up and tell +your father, owner, or whoever he is, to come down." + +The lad was back in a minute with the smiling Greek. + +"We want our breakfast," the captain explained, "the boy don't seem to +understand." + +"He understands all right, but, I see the cook does not comprehend. It +is the custom to have coffee only in the morning on sponging ships." + +"Nothing but coffee for breakfast?" roared the old sailor. + +"We eat but one meal a day and that at night," the Greek explained. "If +the rest of the crew ate the divers would want to eat also, and that +would be fatal for them. The stomach must be empty when they descend to +the bottom in deep water, otherwise they die." + +"Well, they can't see us eat an' I want my three square meals a day," +said the hungry sailor. "Right saving plan for us though if they only +eat once a day." + +"They eat the whole three meals in one," the Greek said with a smile. +"I will speak to the cook at once and he will soon have something ready +for you." + +In a very short time they were served with a substantial meal to which +they all did full justice. As soon as it was finished, they returned to +the deck where they learned that the "Beauty" was already so far in the +lead of the fleet that sail had to be shortened. + +With Manuel's aid the boys picked out their crews for the diving boat. +They found that many of the Greeks were familiar with gasoline engines +and they selected one of the youngest and most intelligent-looking for +an engineer. The four divers were, of course, allotted to their boat, +but besides them they had to have two men to work the air pump and two +others to tend to the life-lines, which made a crew of nine, besides +the young officers, and would leave only Captain Westfield, Chris and +the cook and five men on board the schooner. + +The divers at once began preparations for their future dangerous work. +They examined pump and air hose very carefully, for a slight leak in +either one would mean death by suffocation beneath the surface. They +brought out their diving suits and went over them inch by inch for +possible rents or tears. Many of the suits were old and covered with +a multitude of rubber patches. The boys were amazed that their owners +would dare descend in such worn suits, but Manuel assured them that +the patches were so cunningly put on that not only would they exclude +water, but they would outlast the suit itself. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +FIRST TROUBLE. + + +ONE of the sailors Charley had selected for his crew was the tall +handsome fellow whom the others seemed to shun. + +"I can't understand what the rest have against him," the young captain +remarked to his chum. "He seems very quiet and well behaved, and he is +every inch a sailor. I would ask Manuel about him but it is bad policy +to discuss one of the crew with another. It always makes trouble. +Likely, Manuel would lie about him anyway, he seems to hate him, look +at him glaring at him now." + +The Greek was leaning against the railing staring at the sailor who was +coiling down a rope near him. Suddenly the Greek addressed the man in a +low savage tone. The sailor's face grew red with anger, and he replied +shortly in a few hissing words. With a bound, the Greek cleared the +space between the two and struck the sailor full in the mouth. The man +reeled back against the main mast, but, recovering himself in a second, +sprang for his assailant. The Greek leaped to one side and whipped out +a long wicked knife. + +Before he could use it, Captain Westfield, belaying pin in hand, rushed +in between the two. + +"Put up that knife," he roared. "I'll do what fighting there is to be +done on this ship." + +The Greek shot one quick glance at him, venomous with hate, then he +glanced beyond him at the two lads who waited expectantly with hands on +their pistols. + +"He cursed me," he said sullenly, as he slowly replaced the knife in +his pocket. + +"When anyone curses you, report it to me an' don't take the law in +your own hands. I'm master of this schooner, an' you might as well +understand it right off. Tell that fellow just what I've told you." + +The sailor's face darkened as the Greek spoke to him rapidly, but he +turned slowly away and walked forward. + +"That's a bad beginning," Charley remarked to his chum. "I wish we had +never seen that Greek. I believe he insulted that sailor. The fellow +was behaving himself and tending to his own business." + +He repeated the remark to the captain a little later. + +"I reckon you're right, lad," agreed the old sailor, "that Greek seems +to be a trouble-maker but he'll find he's got the wrong man to deal +with. I've handled too many crews of tough roughnecks to be bested by +a dirty furriner." + +"I'll bet he will keep you busy with complaints," Walter said. "How +are you going to get at the truth of it if he does complain about the +others of the crew?" + +"You'll see, I reckon, he will try something like that but I'm ready +for him." + +Sure enough, in less than an hour the Greek approached the Captain. + +"I hate to trouble you, but I must complain as you have directed," he +said suavely. "The cook, he is very abusive, I tried to instruct him +about your meals but he answers me with vile names." + +"Bring the cook aft," Captain Westfield commanded. + +Manuel escorted the bewildered-looking cook aft with a look of sly +triumph on his face. + +The captain looked the man over appraisingly. He was a +broad-shouldered, well-muscled fellow. He spoke to him briefly but the +cook shook his head. He could not understand. + +The old sailor picked up a rope and spread it in a big circle on the +deck. + +"This insulting of you has got to be stopped right off," he declared, +addressing the interpreter. "Give me your knife." + +The Greek surrendered his weapon. + +"Now both of you get inside that ring and fight it out to a finish," +he ordered. "Lick him good for calling you names." + +Manuel's face fell, and, turning he spoke rapidly to the cook. "He has +apologized and my honor is satisfied," he declared. + +"All right," the captain said with a wink at the grinning boys. "Next +time any one insults you, I am going to make you give him a good +licking in a square fist fight. I'm not agoing to let any of the crew +swear at you and call you names--it ain't right." + +"I guess we won't have any more complaints from him right off," he +chuckled as the disappointed Greek retired forward. + +"I'm afraid we're going to have more or less trouble through not +understanding their language," Charley said, gravely. "I don't believe +he had a bit of trouble with the cook. He was just aiming to have you +punish the fellow and get you disliked by the crew." + +"I can handle him all right," the captain declared, confidently. "If he +gets troublesome I'll iron him and put him down in the hold. I reckon I +can make the rest understand what I want done by signs, though it would +be mighty awkward if a gale struck us." + +The old sailor soon left the boys in charge of the deck and went below +to write up the log and look over the charts. + +"If this wind holds we'll be on the edge of the sponging grounds by +night," he said when he returned. "I didn't realize before how big they +are. Why, they reach clear from Cedar Keys to Cape Sable, about seven +hundred miles." + +"One thing that has puzzled me is that all these schooners seem to come +from Key West," Charley remarked, '"Of Key West' is lettered on the +stern of every one of them." + +"Key West used to be the headquarters for the sponging business in +the old days," the captain explained. "They used to gather sponges +different from what they do now. A schooner would take out about +twenty small boats an' a crew of forty men. When she got to the sponge +grounds, the small boats would scatter out around her, two men in each +boat. One man would do the sculling and the other would lean over the +bow with a water glass in one hand--a pail with a pane of glass for +a bottom--and a long pole with a hook in the end in the other. When +he spied a sponge on the bottom through the glass he'd have the other +stop sculling and he would hook it up with his pole. It was slow, hard +work, but they made money at it until the Greeks came with their expert +divers. They could not compete with them so they either sold or leased +their schooners to the Greeks and went out of business." + +The old sailor's explanation was interrupted by a howl of "Oh, Golly!" +from the cook' galley forward and Chris, dripping with water, bounded +out of the open door of the little structure, and rushed aft. + +"I want you to put dat cook in irons, Massa Captain," he cried. "He's +done 'saulted his superior officer." + +"What did he do to you," the captain asked with a twinkle in his eye. + +"Throwed a hull pan of dirty, nasty dishwater obber me. I was jus' +tellin' him how he had outer do, an' tryin' to show de ignorant man how +to cook, when--slosh--he let fly dat big pan full all obber me." + +The dirty water was streaming from the little negro's brilliant +clothing and his face was streaked with purple from his cap. + +The captain checked his desire to laugh. + +"The cook did just right," he said, gravely. "You've got no business +in his galley. A cook is always boss there. Even the Captain seldom +interferes with him." + +Chris seemed inclined to protest indignantly, but the old sailor +continued. + +"How would you like to be cook an' have some one poking around an' +tellin' you what to do?" + +"Golly! I reckon you is right," the little darkey admitted, "I wouldn't +stand such doin's. 'Spect dough dat my good clothes is all spoiled. +Dat water was powerful greasy." + +"Better dry them out and lay them away," Walter suggested. "They are +too fine to wear at sea. You had ought to save them 'till we get in +port." + +Both boys were glad when Chris accepted the suggestion. They could see +that the crew regarded the little fellow in his gay apparel with a +contempt and ridicule that the plucky, loyal little lad did not deserve. + +Under her shortened canvas, the "Beauty" had dropped to the rear of the +fleet. Late in the afternoon the schooners ahead began to shorten sail. +Soon one rounded up into the wind, dropped anchor and lowered sail. +A mile further on another one anchored, a mile beyond another took +in sail, until at last the whole fleet was strung out in a long line +reaching many miles North and South. + +The captain held the "Beauty" on her course until the last schooner was +passed then anchored, lowered sails and made everything snug. + +"We are on the sponging grounds," he explained to the boys who had been +puzzled by the fleet's maneuvers. "To-morrow we make our first try as +spongers." + +As soon as their supper was finished the boys strolled forward to view +the crew at their meal. + +The Greeks ate in groups of four. Each group had a great tin pan filled +with some kind of stew. This they divided into four equal portions +with their big spoons, all eating from the same pan. + +The stew, black bread as hard as a rock, and ripe olives constituted +their meal, but the boys, hearty eaters themselves, were astounded at +the amount of food each Greek disposed of. + +"I never dreamed a man could stow away so much grub," Charley remarked. +"They are not eating three meals in one, but six." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +SPONGING. + + +THE morning sun rose over a scene of bustle and activity. From the +hundred schooners strung out two or three hundred diving boats with +sails hoisted and engines chugging. + +The young officers were up and away with the earliest. + +"Go slow," Captain Westfield cautioned them as they stepped aboard +their craft. "Keep your eyes open an' learn all you can. Don't give any +orders unless they are absolutely needed. But if you have to give them +an order make them obey it, don't let them trifle with you. You can +take Manuel along if you want to, I reckon I can manage to get along +without him." + +But the boys declined the offer. They had both taken a great dislike to +the suave, smiling Greek. + +The Captain had given their crew general instructions before they left +the schooner and the young officers had but little to do but signify by +waves of their hands which direction they wished to go. + +All places looked alike to the inexperienced boys, and as soon as their +craft was a quarter of a mile from the schooner, Charley signed to his +crew to anchor and proceed with their work. + +The divers at once prepared for their descent to the bottom. The lead +was first hove to find out the depth of the water, which proved to +be about thirty-five feet. Before donning their waterproof suits, +the divers tested the air pump carefully and examined the air hose +minutely, for upon these two things their lives would depend when once +they sank beneath the surface. While they were putting on the strange +looking suits and heavy leaded shoes, the crew slung short ladders +over the sides. The divers put on their headpieces last of all, these +were large globe-shaped coverings of metal with two heavy glasses in +front through which to see. But two divers were to descend at a time. +Their places would be taken by two others at the end of two hours, +which is about as long as one can safely work at a time beneath the +surface. Those in reserve assisted their companions in adjusting the +heavy headpieces. As soon as the helmets were on they screwed in the +air hose, and connected the other ends to the pumps. A line by which to +lower and raise them was fastened around each diver's body and he was +then assisted onto the ladder, for it was almost impossible for them to +move in their cumbersome suits and lead shoes. As soon as they had been +helped to the lowest step on the ladder, each was given a large basket +to which a long line had been fastened, and they were slowly and gently +lowered to the bottom. + +The young officers watched their operations with eager interest. +What impressed them most was the vigilant care shown by the divers +remaining on board. One took charge of the tub in which the air hose +was coiled and paid it out carefully as the diver sank, the other held +the life-line instantly ready for the jerks which would signal to him +the wishes of the one below. Not once did either's eyes shift or his +attention waver from his task. + +"It's easy to see that this is a dangerous business," Walter remarked. + +"Yes," his chum agreed, "I am beginning to see that Mr. Williams was +right when he said sponging was a man's game. It certainly takes nerve +to descend like those divers have, knowing that there is nothing +between them and death but that little air hose. But have you noticed +how they are treating that strange handsome fellow? They all seem to be +afraid to have him near." + +The mysterious sailor had approached the men working the air pumps, +apparently with the purpose of helping with the pumping, but the +pumpers drove him away with menacing gestures and upraised fists. He +moved over near the coiled air hose but the diver in charge of that met +him with a torrent of fiercely-uttered words and he slunk dejectedly +forward, and, seating himself by the mast, buried his face in his +hands. + +"Poor chap," Walter remarked, "he seems to be hated by the whole crew. +I wonder what is the reason." + +"We will find out, I guess, when we meet up with Mr. Williams again," +his chum replied. "He will likely know, or be able to find out quickly +from some of his crew. But look, we are about to see our first sponges." + +There had been a couple of quick jerks on the life-line. The diver +holding it called to one of the crew who seized the line that had been +attached to the basket, and began hauling it carefully in hand over +hand. + +The boys leaned over the side, eager for the first glimpse of their +future cargo. When the basket came into view they both uttered an +exclamation of disgust and disappointment. + +Instead of bright, clean, yellow sponges with which they were familiar, +the basket was heaped with what looked like huge lumps of dirty mud. + +The man dumped the contents out on deck and lowered the basket down +again. + +"What greenies we are," Charley said as he glanced at his chum's +crestfallen face. "We might have known if we had stopped to think, that +sponges have to be cleaned and cured before they look like those we saw +on shore. I expect that pile is worth a lot of money in spite of its +unattractive appearance." + +Five times did the basket appear loaded to the brim before the divers' +two hour spell below expired. As soon as their time was up they were +hauled aboard, their suits removed and the other two took their places. + +"Whew, but I am getting hungry," Walter exclaimed as noon time drew +near, "and we came off from the schooner without bringing a lunch with +us." + +"I am glad we did," Charley said. "It's all right having our meals +regular when we are on board the schooner and out of sight of the crew, +but it would hardly seem right to eat now before these hungry fellows. +I guess we can stand it to go without dinner of they can stand it to go +without both dinner and breakfast. Besides, I don't believe I could eat +any lunch if we had it. Whew, but that smell is getting awful." + +The hot sun was getting in its work on the rapidly increasing pile of +sponges on deck. Adhering to them were multitudes of muscles and little +fish which were beginning to send forth a fearful stench. + +"I am beginning to realize that a sponger's life is anything but a bed +of roses," Walter laughed. "It's easy to understand now why they only +eat one meal a day." + +The novelty of the diving operations soon wore off and the boys, to +pass the time, busied themselves with an attempt to learn something of +the Greek language. They selected the engineer for their teacher. He +was a young fellow with an intelligent, good-humored face and seemed to +take great interest in their efforts. Touching different parts of the +boat and engine the boys repeated the English names for them. The young +fellow grasped the idea instantly and repeated the names in Greek, +laughing heartily over their attempts to pronounce the words after him. + +In this manner the time passed quickly and pleasantly and the lads were +delighted with the rapid progress they made. + +"At this rate we will be able to speak the language a little in a +week's time," Charley declared. "I'm--" but he never finished the +sentence. + +From around them rose cries that brought the lads springing to their +feet. + +The crew were all crowded against the rail staring as if fascinated +over the side, while the diver holding one of the life-lines was +hauling it in with feverish energy. + +As the boys sprang to the rail, the diver's headpiece appeared above +the surface One glance, and they understood the reason for the sudden +commotion--from the metal helmet dangled a short piece of severed air +hose. + +The luckless man was quickly dragged aboard, the head-piece quickly +removed, and his rubber clothing cut away, but his eyes were closed and +his face purple--he was dead. A long, weird, prolonged wailing came +from his shipmates which arose and fell strangely, like the strains of +the mournful death march. + +The two chums gazed at each other with pale, horror-stricken faces. + +"Poor fellow," Walter murmured, "His life went out like a candle in a +gale. Alive one minute, dead the next. What could have cut that hose?" + +"Chafed against a sharp branch of coral or bitten in two by a shark," +Charley replied, sadly. "Well, I guess it means the last of our +sponging, the other divers will hardly want to go down after such an +accident, and I don't blame them." + +But, to his amazement, as soon as the wailing chant ceased, one of the +remaining divers began coolly to prepare to take the dead man's place. + +"My, but those fellows have got nerve," he declared, admiringly, but +he stopped the man as he began to put on his diving suit and by signs +ordered the crew to get up anchor and return to the schooner. + +"It's only a couple of hours to dark and we have had enough for one day +anyway," he remarked to his chum. + +When the diving boat reached the schooner his shipmates prepared the +dead man for burial. The body was sewed up in stout canvas and a piece +of iron fastened to it. It was then gently lowered over the side and +sank slowly beneath the waves. + +With its disappearance all vestige of gloom disappeared from the crew. +The dead man's scanty belongings were brought forth and auctioned off +to the various bidders, and an hour after the crew were chatting and +laughing with each other as cheerfully as ever. + +"Mr. Williams was right, this is a man's game, and a game for rough, +fearless men only," Walter remarked thoughtfully, for a second time. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +TROUBLE. + + +AFTER the crew had eaten their supper and rested a bit, the captain +had them transfer the sponges from the diving boat to the deck of the +schooner. The sponges made quite an imposing pile which the old sailor +surveyed with satisfaction. "You've done well to-day," he remarked, +"if every day's work is as good we'll have a valuable cargo before our +three months are up. I reckon, thar's all of two hundred dollars' worth +of sponges in that heap." + +"Are you sure that you know how to clean and cure them right?" Charley +enquired. + +"I don't, but Chris knows that part of the business from A to Z. Where +he comes from the people live by sponging and pearl fishing." + +"Golly, dat's right," observed the little darkey. "I'se helped my daddy +fix sponges many a time. First off, you'se got to beat de mud out ob +dem wid sticks, den you got to let dem lay foah a day or two to die, +'cause dey's alive jus' like fishes. When dey's good an' dead, you puts +dem in nets an' hangs dem ober de side for de water to wash dem out +clean. Den you dry dem out on deck an' string dem out on strings 'bout +two yards long. Dat makes dem all ready for market 'cept for clipping +de bad parts off of dem, which is done on shore. Dar ain't nothin' +'bout fixin' up sponges dat dis nigger doan know." + +Just then a small boat came alongside the schooner and the boys +hastened to the side to welcome the two men it contained. They were +the captain and mate of the schooner anchored nearest to the "Beauty". +Both were young fellows hardly out of their teens. They introduced +themselves as Steve Ward, and Ray Lowe. + +"We thought we'd drop over and have a little chat with you," said Ward, +who was the captain. "You, of course, don't realize it yet, but an +American face looks mighty good amongst this army of Greeks, especially +after one has been out for a month or two. We all start out together +but before the season ends we get pretty widely scattered and to meet +up with another schooner with an American aboard is like coming across +a long-lost brother. This is my fifth trip and I am getting pretty +well hardened to the loneliness now, but the first time I was out I +nearly went crazy. After we parted from the rest of the fleet, it was +worse than being alone on a desert island, for I had the misery of +seeing others talk, laugh and enjoy themselves without being able to +understand a word. When, at last, we came across a ship with someone +aboard I could talk to I nearly cried for joy. It seemed so good to be +able to understand and make myself understood once more." His glance +fell upon Manuel George, who was leaning against the rail, and his gray +eyes narrowed. + +"What made you bring that fellow with you?" he asked. + +"We had to have someone along who could talk their lingo," Captain +Westfield replied. "Do you know him?" + +"I don't know anything good of him," said the other shortly. "I came +near killing him once and I've always half regretted that I didn't do +it. It was on my first trip," he explained. "It was just such another +case as that young fellow's who was arrested the other day. Although I +was captain, the Greeks owned the schooner, and, because I was young +and inexperienced, they got the idea they could run over me and do +as they pleased. Manuel was always stirring them up and encouraging +them to disobey orders. One day I had some words with him about it, +and,"--the young fellow's face darkened--"well, he carries a bullet +in his leg yet. The others set on me and I had to lock myself up in +the cabin. Likely, they would have got me in the end and thrown me +overboard to feed the sharks, but we happened to come across another +schooner and they had to let me go." + +"He don't want to try any tricks with me," Captain Westfield declared. +"I got him to talk their lingo but had him sign on as one of the +crew. If he tries to act up, I'll put him at the hardest work on the +schooner." + +"Well, keep your eye on him," advised the other. "He has never made a +trip yet without making trouble. He's a mighty bad egg and as sly and +cunning as he is mean." + +The two men remained for over two hours, and from them the little party +learned many new and interesting things about their new business and +about the Greeks. + +"We have no reason to complain of a dull trip so far," Charley said, +when the two Americans had left. "Only two days out and one of our crew +is dead, another is supposed to be on the watch to make us trouble, and +a third is a mystery worth solving, judging from the way the others +treat him. If things keep on as they have started, we will have a +voyage exciting enough to satisfy anyone." + +If the lad could have known of the exciting events soon to follow close +on each other's heels, he would have had even less reason to complain +of dullness. + +The next day's sponging was the same as the first. They seemed to have +happened upon a spot where the sponges were unusually plentiful. The +basket came frequently to the surface loaded with the big mud-covered +masses and by nightfall the diving boat's deck was well covered. All +day the two lads persisted in their attempt to learn the Greek names +for the things about them. By night Charley was able to direct the +operation of getting under way for the schooner. Of course, he was yet +unable to construct sentences in Greek, but he could call the Greek +names for sails, anchor, and different parts of the rigging and the +crew managed to guess the rest. Though it was a crude and imperfect way +of giving orders, it succeeded better than the slow, imperfect signs he +had been obliged to depend upon before. + +"If we keep on as fast, we will be able to make them understand us well +within two weeks," he declared gleefully. + +It was still light enough for them to see distinctly when they reached +the schooner, and they looked about them with regret as they climbed +aboard. Her snow-white decks were filthy from the pounding out of the +sponges, and bulwarks, sails and rigging were spattered with the foul +mud, while the strong, rank odor of dead fish hung heavy in the air. + +Chris and the captain had just knocked off work. Their faces, hands and +clothing were black as soot. The old sailor's face showed set and stern +through its coating of mud. He said little until all were washed up and +seated around the supper table. + +"Well, lads, I reckon our troubles have begun," he remarked, grimly. +"Manuel an' I had a row to-day." + +"What about? How did it come out?" the boys questioned, eagerly. + +"I told him to help us with the sponge cleaning and he refused to do +it. When I insisted he flew into a rage, cursed me, an' shook his fist +in my face. I couldn't stand for that an' he's down in the hold now +with the irons on him." + +"Well, I feel easier with him there than with him mixing in with the +crew," Charley declared. + +"My row with him ain't the worst of the matter," the old sailor said +gravely. "I called on the crew to help me iron him and they all +pretended they didn't understand my sign, but they knew what I wanted +all right. I had to handle him alone an' we had quite a struggle +before I got the best of him." He rolled up his sleeve and showed an +ugly-looking cut on his arm. "He came near getting me with his knife +an' I had to give him a couple of taps with a belaying pin. That cut +don't amount to anything, but what worries me is that the crew stood +around an' watched him try to kill me without interfering--it's a +mighty bad sign." + +"That does look bad," Charley agreed, anxiously. "I guess we had better +keep him a close prisoner and not let any of the crew go near him, he +might try to stir them up and make things hot for us." + +"But that means that someone will have to guard him an' carry his meals +to him. It wouldn't do to have one of the Greeks do it, I reckon." + +"No," Charley agreed, thoughtfully, "but I believe I've got the very +man for the job--that handsome fellow the others seem to hate so. +Manuel tried to kill him and he is not likely to be easy with him." + +The mysterious sailor was at once sent for by Ben. As soon as he came +the captain loaded a tray with food and a bottle of water and signed +for him to carry it and follow him. Charley and Walter accompanied the +two. + +As they passed along the deck on their way to the hold, they met angry +glances and frowns from the crew. + +The mysterious sailor was very intelligent and they soon made him +understand that he was to guard the prisoner. He grinned with enjoyment +and, seating himself a little way from the Greek, took out his long +keen sheath knife and laid it handy beside him. + +The prisoner's face grew black with rage at sight of his guard, but he +maintained a sulky silence. + +"I guess he's safe enough now," the captain said as they returned to +their cabin. "I believe that fellow will guard him faithfully. They +seem to hate each other like poison--I wish I knew the reason for it." + +"It would not seem so strange if the hatred was confined to him and +Manuel, but all the others seem to share in the feeling," Charley +remarked. "It seems very queer to me." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +MANUEL'S RELEASE. + + +BEFORE the boys left the schooner next morning, the guard they had set +over Manuel approached the captain, and by signs and gestures intimated +that the prisoner wished to speak to him. + +Manuel's sullen demeanor had entirely disappeared and he looked humble +and penitent. + +"I wish to make my most humble apologies to you, noble captain," he +declared. "All night long I have thought over my hasty actions with +shame and regret. You were right and I wrong. I will work hard at +whatever you set me to do, and in the future you will have no cause to +complain if you will set me at liberty." + +There were tears in the fellow's eyes and his voice trembled as he +spoke. + +"Stop that blubbering," said the blunt old sailor, who detested tears +in men. "I reckon, if you are sure that you've learned your lesson an' +won't try to act smart again, I'll set you free; but the minute you try +to start any trouble again, I'll put you down here for keeps." + +As he removed the irons from the prisoner, the strange sailor burst +into a torrent of passionate speech. + +The captain paid no attention to him for he could not understand a +word of it, but Charley, who was watching closely, saw Manuel give the +fellow a quick glance of sly triumph. + +"I'm afraid you have made a mistake in setting that fellow free, +Captain," the lad said, as they returned to the deck. "I believe it +would have been wiser to have kept him in irons until we could touch +some port and put him ashore." + +"I never feel like being hard on a man when he's sorry for what he has +done," the old sailor replied. "I guess it will make the crew feel +better tempered to have him set free. I'm going to put him ashore at +the first port we touch. In the meanwhile we'll keep him hard at work +an' keep a eye on him all the time." + +"Perhaps we had better take him with us and put him to work at the +pump," Walter suggested. "That's good hard work." + +Charley approved the suggestion, for in spite of the Greek's seeming +repentance, the lad did not trust him in the least and thought it +wisest that he and the captain should be kept separated for awhile +after their quarrel. + +Manuel went at the hard labor at the air pump with a willingness and +cheerfulness which seemed to show the sincerity of his repentance. At +first, he seemed inclined to talk overmuch with the rest of the crew, +but Charley cut short his talkativeness with a curt command. + +"I believe that fellow is a regular Jonah," he confided to his chum +during the noon hour rest. "Yesterday and the day before we got lots of +sponges, but we haven't taken in enough this morning to pay expenses." + +"I guess this part of the ground is getting worked out, perhaps," +Walter replied. "I've noticed several schooners pulling up anchor and +getting under way." + +His surmise proved correct for during the afternoon many of the fleet +passed them headed North. Evidently others were finding the ground as +poor as they did. + +Late in the afternoon the captain recalled them to the schooner with a +signal previously agreed upon,--a flag hoisted to the foremast head. + +"I reckon we'd better be getting under way," the old sailor said when +they got aboard. "I want to keep with the fleet an' all the schooners +seem to be getting under sail. I've noted the course they are takin' +an' with this wind they'll be a long ways from us if we wait until +morning. I hailed one of the captains and he said they intended to sail +all night an' anchor an' get to work early in the morning." + +By the time the sails were all hoisted and the anchor tripped, it had +grown quite dark so the schooner's great side-lights of red and green +were filled, lit, and lashed to the foremast shrouds, for, with so many +boats around them every caution must be taken to avoid running one +down, or being run down themselves. The crew was divided into three +watches. Of which Walter was to have charge of the first, from eight to +twelve o'clock. Charley to have command of the second, or middle watch, +from twelve to four o'clock, while the captain would take the third, or +morning watch, from four to eight A. M. + +The breeze held steady and strong and the night passed away without any +exciting incident. + +The boys were up again at first peep of day, expecting to have to start +out with the diving boat as soon as the sun arose. But, when they +gained the deck, they found the "Beauty" still swinging along on her +course and the captain pacing the deck greatly perplexed. + +"It's mighty queer, but thar ain't one of the fleet in sight," he +exclaimed as he caught sight of the lads. "I don't understand it at +all. Go aloft, Charley, an' see if you can see any of them." + +The lad swung himself into the shrouds and made his way up to the +mainmast cross trees, but, although he gazed all around, his eyes met +nothing but the broad expanse of the blue sparkling waters. + +"Maybe we've run them all out of sight during the night," he suggested +when he regained the deck, but the old sailor shook his head. + +"The 'Beauty's' mighty fast, but she's not speedy enough to do that," +he declared. "Some of those schooners were ten miles ahead of us when +we started. Besides, I shortened sail as soon as I took my watch, +because I did not want to get in the lead." + +"Perhaps we have dropped away behind the rest," Walter said, but the +others knew that that was impossible. The "Beauty" was far too fast a +boat to be left so far behind. + +The Captain examined the log. "We have come a hundred and ten miles," +he said. "Do you reckon either of you boys could have made a mistake in +the course during your watch?" + +"We didn't vary a quarter of a point from the direction you gave during +my four hours," Charley declared. "I kept watch of the compass most of +the time and the needle held steady at North." + +"I was careful about that, also," Walter said. "We were headed exactly +North during my entire watch." + +"Well, that compass is true," the captain declared. "I tested it +carefully before we left port. I reckon thar's only one explanation; +the fleet must have changed their course during the night. We'd better +heave-to until noon when I can take the sun an' tell exactly where we +are at. It ain't no use trying to pick up the fleet again, now they +are out of sight--it would be like hunting for a needle in a hay stack." + +The crew were immediately set to taking in sail and in a few minutes +the little ship was lying head to the wind under reefed foresail sail. + +When the noon hour drew near, Captain Westfield brought his instruments +on deck and prepared to take an observation of the sun. As soon as he +secured it he went below to work out their position on the chart. + +When he reappeared his face wore a very puzzled expression. "Heave the +lead and find out how deep the water is an' what kind of bottom," he +said, briefly. + +Charley took the lead, a heavy cone-shaped piece of lead, slightly +hollowed at the bottom, and with a long line attached to the small +end. Filling the hollow end with soft soap, he dropped the lead over +the side and let it sink until it struck the bottom. Then he pulled it +aboard again, noting carefully the water mark on the line and examining +the soap to which some particles of the bottom had adhered. + +"Depth, six fathoms, (36 feet) bottom, soft gray mud," he announced. + +The captain strode back to the compass and stared at it with a puzzled +frown on his face. + +"We're forty miles from where we should be," he said as the boys +gathered around him, "Sure neither of you boys made a mistake in the +course last night?" + +"Sure," declared both lads positively. + +The four puzzled over the strange situation in silence for several +minutes. Then the captain with his knife loosened the screws and +removed the compass' face of glass. + +"I wonder how that got there," he suddenly exclaimed. + +Cunningly placed, so as to draw the magnetic needle West of North was a +small bright iron nail. + +"It couldn't have got there by itself," Charley declared, excitedly. +"It must have been put there by someone while we were all at supper +last night." + +"I guess there is no doubt as to who that someone was," with an +inclination of his head towards Manuel who, standing a little ways off +was watching them closely. The Greek, as soon as he saw the attention +he was receiving, turned and strolled carelessly forward. + +The captain pondered gravely, "I don't see what his object was," he +said, at last. "If we held on that course long it would only have +carried us further out into the Gulf, so he couldn't have been aiming +to get us wrecked." + +"He planned to get us separated from the fleet," Charley declared. "Do +you think we could find it again, captain?" + +The old sailor shook his head. "There's no telling where we are now," +he said, gloomily, "we might hunt for days without coming across them. +If that fellow did put that nail there to make us lose them, he's +succeeded all right." + +"What had we better do, captain?" Walter asked, anxiously. + +"Well, we aint got no real proof that the fellow put that nail thar so +we can't do anything with him. It might have been in thar all the time, +though I'm willing to take an oath that the compass was true when we +left port. Thar ain't much chance of picking up the fleet again an' I +don't reckon we'd better waste time trying it. The lead shows we are +still on the sponge banks an' I reckon we'd best just get to work, say +nothing, an' keep a close watch on that oil Greek chap." + +The "Beauty" was anchored accordingly, sails lowered and furled, and +everything made snug. As soon as that was done, the boys ordered their +crew into the diving boat and, running out a little ways from the +schooner, gave the signal to resume the diving operations. + +By sheer accident, they had chanced upon a spot rich in sponges and the +lads watched with satisfaction the steady reappearance of the lowered +basket. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +A RASH RESOLVE. + + +THE boys watched Manuel closely throughout the entire afternoon, but +they could detect nothing amiss in his manner or actions. He did +his work willingly and cheerfully, humming a tune most of the time, +apparently he was at peace with himself and the world. + +They were not the only ones who watched the Greek closely. Whenever the +lads glanced at the handsome sailor, they found him gazing intently at +the suspected man, much as a cat watches a mouse, ready to spring at +its slightest movement. + +The boys kept well apart from the crew, watchful for any threatened +outbreak on their part. But the men seemed so cheerful, willing and +contented that they soon grew ashamed of their distrust. + +Once the handsome sailor approached them respectfully, hat in hand, +and, halting before them, spoke rapidly in a low voice. The lads shook +their heads to show that they did not understand, and, with a look of +helpless resignation on his face, the fellow returned to his work. + +"I wish we could understand what he says," Charley said, wistfully. +"He, evidently, has something important he wishes to tell us." + +"We will be able to make out what he says before long," Walter said, +cheerfully. "We are learning lots of new words every day." + +"Yes, we are getting along pretty well," his chum agreed, "but we +are not picking up the language near as well as Chris. It's really +wonderful how fast he is learning." + +The little negro and the Greek boy had become great friends and Chris, +naturally quick witted, was learning with astonishing rapidity to talk +to his new chum. + +"It's the best day we've had yet," Charley declared as they returned +to the schooner in the evening. "We have got as many sponges this +afternoon as we have during any entire day." + +Captain Westfield was elated over their success. "It's turned out all +right after all," he said. "We've stumbled upon a mighty rich part of +the banks, an' I reckon, we ain't lost the fleet either, as we feared, +thar's some twenty sails coming up from the South'ard." + +The vessels, which the boys had not noticed before, were approaching +rapidly, coming before the stiff breeze. Before dark settled down, they +were plainly visible but the eager watchers could not recognize any +of them, they seemed larger schooners than any they had seen in the +fleet. The strangers anchored for the night near the "Beauty" and the +captain got out his night glass and studied them carefully. + +"They ain't any of the fleet," he declared with keen disappointment. +"They're Spanish smacks from Cuba. They fish around this coast +regularly every season." + +"Well, they'll be some company, anyway, as long as they stay near us," +Charley said, cheerfully. "I can speak Spanish if I can't Greek, we can +go over and call on them in the morning. I'd like to go to-night, but I +feel too tired out to move." + +Soon after supper, Manuel approached Captain Westfield, respectfully. + +"We would like to go aboard the schooners, if you will permit," he +requested. "We are nearly out of tobacco and the Cubans always carry a +lot for which we can trade." + +The old sailor thought for a few minutes. "You can go," he said, +shortly, "you an' one man. Take the dingy. I don't want the diving boat +used. An' be sure you're back aboard early." + +The Greek thanked him effusively for the permission, and, calling one +of his shipmates, the two got the schooner's little boat over the side +and sculled away for the nearest smack. + +"They have got plenty of tobacco," growled the captain, as soon as the +two were out of hearing. "Thar was enough sent aboard at Tarpon to last +them for months. I reckon he's figuring on deserting, that's why I let +him go. I'd be willing to lose the boat and the other man to be well +rid of him." + +It seemed that the old sailor was correct for when eight o'clock came +Manuel had not returned. + +"After what happened last night, I don't reckon it's wise to leave the +deck alone," the captain said as the boys prepared to retire to their +bunks. "One of us had ought to keep watch to see that no one monkeys +with the wheel or compass." + +Walter offered to take the first watch from eight to twelve, and, +leaving him pacing back and forth aft of the mainmast, the others +retired to rest. + +Charley was awakened by a vigorous shaking and his chum's voice calling +to him to get up. + +"My watch so soon," grumbled the lad sleepily, "Seems like I just got +to sleep." + +"It's only eleven o'clock," said Walter in excited tones, "but Manuel +came aboard an hour ago very drunk. He must have brought liquor with +him for they are all raising merry Ned in the forecastle now. The +captain and Chris are on deck. Hurry up, there's likely to be trouble +any minute." + +Charley slipped hastily into his clothing and securing his revolver +ran on deck. His three companions with revolvers in their hands were +ranged across the deck just aft of the mainmast. From the forecastle, +forward, came an uproar of shouting, cursing, and fighting. + +The old sailor was blaming himself, bitterly. "I'd ought to have +thought of it," he exclaimed, "Auguident is cheap as water in Cuba an' +those smacks always carry a lot of it to trade off for other things. +What an old fool I was." + +"What shall we do?" Charley asked. + +"Nothing, but let 'em fight it out amongst themselves an' keep 'em +from crowding aft on us. Our lives wouldn't be worth a pinch of snuff +if we went down to quiet them. If any of 'em tries to come aft of the +mainmast, shoot him." + +The words were hardly out of his mouth when a figure burst out of the +forecastle and came running aft followed by several others staggering, +shouting and cursing. + +The captain raised his pistol and took deliberate aim as the flying man +drew near. + +"Stop, or I'll shoot," he commanded. + +Charley knocked aside his upraised arm. "Let him pass," he cried, "it's +the strange sailor, they have been trying to kill him." + +The handsome fellow was bleeding from a dozen knife wounds, and was +breathing short and heavily. As he reached the little party of chums, +he turned about and faced his pursuers. It was evident that he did not +lack courage. + +The pursuing Greeks stopped short at sight of the little band stretched +across the deck with leveled revolvers. For a minute they seemed about +to dash forward regardless of consequences, but, after a moment's +hesitation, with a volley of curses they turned and slunk back to the +forecastle. They were yet sober enough to realize the danger of open +mutiny. + +"I don't think they'll try to bother us," said the captain with a sigh +of relief. "They ain't drunk enough for that yet, an' I reckon they've +about drank up all their liquor by now. It wouldn't last long amongst +so many of them." + +The strange sailor had sunk to the deck in a dead faint, and, leaving +the boys to guard the deck, the Captain and Chris carried him below, +and, laying him in one of the bunks, hurried back to their companions. + +"He ain't going to die," the old sailor informed them. "He's just weak +from loss of blood. I didn't take time to look him over close, but I +counted nineteen knife cuts on his body an' likely thar's some I didn't +notice." + +"We will have to keep him back aft with us. They would likely kill +him if we sent him back to the forecastle, for he is unable to defend +himself now," Charley said, and his chums agreed with him. + +The uproar in the forecastle continued for a long time then gradually +subsided. Evidently, the crew had disposed of the last of the liquor +and its effects were slowly wearing off. + +Not until four o'clock, however, did the last noise cease, and the +little party of chums remained on deck until the sun rose, ready for +any violence from the drunken Greeks. Daylight found them pale and +tired from their long, anxious vigil. + +"Better go below, lads, and have a good nap," the captain advised. +"They have all quieted down and there is no danger of trouble for the +present. They are going to feel mighty sick and weak from the drink." + +"I'm not going to give them a chance to sleep off their bad feelings," +declared Charley, grimly. "My crew have got to turn to and work as +usual. I'm going to turn them out as soon as Ben awakes." + +When the little Greek lad appeared, looking pale and frightened, +Charley sent him below to rouse Manuel. + +The lad, apparently, did not relish the task but he went, and, after a +long time, reappeared accompanied by the Greek. + +Manuel plainly showed the effects of the liquor. He looked sick and +haggard and one eye was much discolored from a blow he had received. He +was ready, however, with an excuse for the night's disorder. "I did my +best to stop the noise and trouble, and it was thus I received a blow +in the eye." + +"You were drunk when you came aboard," accused Walter. + +"I took a drink on the schooner," admitted Manuel, "only one little +drink. It was foolish, for I am unused to liquor and it went to my +legs, but my head was clear. I regret the disorder of the others." + +There was no doubt in the minds of the captain and the boys that he was +really the author of all the trouble, but they could not prove it and +Charley dismissed him with a curt command to call the crew. + +They were a sick-looking crowd when they were at last collected on +deck. All showed the effect of the liquor and many were the black +eyes and bruised faces. Their fighting humor seemed to have departed, +however, and they went about their tasks quietly, sullenly, and +listlessly. + +After they had finished their morning coffee, Charley ordered his crew +into the diving boat and set out for the spot where they had found so +many sponges. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +A MYSTERY. + + +THE two boys kept well apart from the crew, and watched closely for +any signs of threatened trouble, but, although the men looked sullen +and ugly enough for any kind of act, they seemed much subdued and went +about their tasks quietly saying little, even to each other. + +"I guess we are giving ourselves a lot of worry without cause," Walter +remarked, softly. "Those fellows seem quiet enough now. It was the +liquor that made them act as they did last night, but they have drank +it all up now and I do not believe we will have any more trouble with +them." + +"I wish I could agree with you," his chum said, gravely, "but I can't. +I believe in the old Latin proverb--'in vino veritas'--there is +truth in wine. I've always noticed that when a man gets intoxicated, +he reveals just the kind of man he really is. If he is naturally +quarrelsome when sober he is sure to want to fight when drinking. If he +is good-hearted and kind when sober, he is generally good-humored when +drunk. Liquor seems to destroy a man's caution and make him reveal his +real character. Now these fellows showed plainly their feelings towards +us last night when they were drinking. To-day they are sober and more +cautious, but I believe they feel just the same towards us. It only +needs some real or fancied wrong to bring their hatred to the surface +again. I believe if we had a clash with one of them now we would have a +first-class mutiny on our hands; but, I guess, we had not better do any +more whimpering. They will suspect that we are discussing them and it +will not improve matters any." + +For awhile the sponges came up from below every half hour, but towards +noon a full hour went by without the basket making its appearance. The +lads, at last, became somewhat alarmed at the delay. + +"Do you suppose they are in any trouble down below?" Charley enquired +of Manuel. + +The Greek shook his head. "They would have signaled if anything had +been wrong. There, they are signaling now." + +There came several jerks on the life-lines and the Greeks in charge of +them pulled the divers up and into the boat. The men had been below +for only an hour and the boys were puzzled to account for their coming +up before their time had expired. When their head-pieces were removed +the lads could see that the divers were greatly excited. They spoke +rapidly to those around them, and a hum of excited conversation arose +from the before listless crew. + +"What's the matter?" Charley demanded of Manuel, who seemed to be the +most excited of all. + +"It is nothing," was the quick reply. "The men grew faint for a minute +but they will be all right soon. That often happens to one when diving." + +The Greek's excitement was too great for such a trivial cause and +Charley decided promptly that he was lying. + +In a few minutes the divers resumed their head-pieces and prepared to +descend again. As they stood on the ladders one of the crew handed one +of them a coil of light rope to the end of which was attached a piece +of light wood. + +"What does he want with that buoy?" Charley demanded, sharply. + +"There's a bad hole in the bottom which he wishes to mark so that there +will be no danger of his blundering into it," replied Manuel promptly, +but, again, Charley decided that the fellow was lying. + +"There's something in the wind," he remarked to Walter. "The crew seem +greatly excited, and Manuel, I am sure, is lying." + +A strange change had suddenly taken place in the crew's manner. Before, +they had been silent, sullen and listless, now, they were animated, +their eyes glittered with excitement, and they chattered back and forth +like so many magpies. + +Manuel evidently noticed that the boys were watching them closely, +for he addressed them in a low tone and their chattering ceased. They +resumed their work with something like a return of their former manner, +but it was easy to see that their sullenness was now assumed. + +The lads turned their attention to the course the diver was taking, and +watched for the appearance of the buoy which would show the whereabouts +of the bad place on the bottom. The bit of wood soon floated into view +not a hundred feet from the boat. + +Apparently, the divers were still suffering from their faintness, for +it was a long time after they descended before the first basket load of +sponges appeared, and it was nearly an hour before the second one was +hoisted aboard. + +"We are not getting many to-day," Walter grumbled. "If we don't do +better pretty soon, we had better move and try another place." + +"There is something queer doing," Charley declared. "Just watch those +life-lines and see what you make of it." + +The ropes which were fastened to the divers showed plainly the +direction taken by the men below. The lines were kept faintly taut +to permit of the signals being clearly felt, and their slant gave an +accurate idea of just where the divers were working. + +Walter watched for awhile, a puzzled frown gathering on his face. + +"Why," he exclaimed, "they are right on that bad part of bottom, and +they haven't stirred for the last fifteen minutes." + +The lads continued to watch the tell-tale lines. For another fifteen +minutes the ropes remained motionless, then from their twitching it +became evident that the divers were once more moving around. In a short +time thereafter, the usual signal was given and two baskets of sponges +were hoisted up. + +"That's got me puzzled," said Charley, as the peculiar performance was +repeated. "I guess we had better appear not to have noticed it. The +crew is not looking at us in a very friendly way." + +The attitude of the Greeks seemed to be growing hostile. Many were the +unfriendly glances they cast at the two lads and the boys could hear +their names repeated in the low-toned conversation going on. + +The two lads retired to the bow where, though they effected to be +taking their ease, they kept on the alert for the first signs of +trouble. + +Though nothing happened to further arouse their fears, it was a trying +situation and both were glad when the time came to return to the +schooner. + +They found the captain and Chris both tired from a hard day's labor +cleaning sponges. The wounded sailor was sitting back by the wheel, +looking somewhat pale and haggard, but not a great deal the worse for +his many wounds. + +"His troubles' been sorter praying on his mind all day," said the +captain. "He got a hold of my pad and pencil this morning an' he's been +drawing pictures of the fight and other things--here's one of them." + +The old sailor produced a crumpled piece of paper from his pocket. + +Walter examined the sketch closely. It was not without a certain +cleverness and was better than one would expect of a humble sailor +before the mast. It depicted a struggle between two groups of men. In +one of the groups, the lad could recognize some of the faces of the +Greeks, who, armed with knives and clubs, were assailing the other +party. As the lad bent over to examine the other group more closely, he +uttered an exclamation of surprise. At first glance there was nothing +startling about those whom the Greeks were fighting, but a second +glance showed something familiar about the figures composing it. He +passed the sketch to Charley. + +"What do you make of it?" he asked. + +"Why, that little group is intended to represent us," his chum +exclaimed. "See they are just four in number. That big one with the +beard is meant for the captain and the little one for Chris, the other +two are you and I. Why, the likeness to us is quite striking when you +look at it closely." + +"I believe he intended this for a warning to us," Walter declared. +"Where are the rest of the things he drew, Captain?" + +"I threw them all away, I didn't reckon they meant anything," the old +sailor replied, regretfully. + +"Well, never mind," said Charley cheerfully, "we will get him to draw +them over again. He seems a very intelligent fellow. I wish he could +talk so as to tell us what the crew are saying now. Just look at him." + +The strange sailor was leaning forward listening eagerly to the buzz of +conversation going on between the Greeks. The diving boat's crew seemed +to have conveyed the excitement under which they had been laboring all +day to their shipmates who had remained aboard the schooner. Groups of +two or three were gathered here and there, talking eagerly together. + +Walter called the little Greek lad to him. + +"What are the men talking about, Ben?" + +The little fellow hesitated before replying. It was plain that he was +greatly troubled and frightened. "They talk about nothing much," he +stammered. + +Walter was pressing him with further questions when his chum interfered. + +"It's hardly fair to make him tell," he said. "It might cause him a lot +of trouble. His uncle is glaring at him now, as though he would like to +kill him." + +There was nothing to be learned by watching the crew's actions, so, +signing to the wounded sailor to follow them, the four chums descended +to the cabin where the Greek cook had supper waiting for them. + +Charley was unusually quiet during the meal, but when the Greek cook +and Ben had at last retired carrying the dishes with them, he arose and +closed the cabin door. + +"Captain," he said as he returned to his companions, "I am going down +in a diving suit to-morrow." + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +IN A DIVING SUIT. + + +THE old sailor stared at Charley as though he feared the lad had taken +leave of his senses. + +"Why, you must be crazy," he exclaimed. "You don't know anything about +that kind of diving." + +"I fancy there is not much to learn about it," Charley replied. "I've +been watching the divers closely and it appears very simple. The main +thing seems to be to keep the air hose clear. I've been wanting to go +down ever since the first day, and the strange way the crew have acted +to-day has decided me to try it. I want to see what it is that has so +excited them." + +"It's a fool notion and I ain't going to let you do it," the captain +stormed, but Charley only grinned, cheerfully. + +"It's no use scolding, Captain, I've quite made up my mind to try it. +I've been thinking it over the whole day." + +"I say you sha'n't do it," roared the old sailor. "I'll put you in +irons first, I'm captain of this schooner." + +"But I'm captain of the diving boat," Charley reminded him with a grin, +"If anyone interferes with my doings on my own ship it's mutiny, you +know." + +"Walt, say something to get him out of that fool notion," pleaded the +old sailor, helplessly. + +Walter turned to his chum with a twinkle in his eye, "If you go down, +I'm going too," he said, decidedly. + +"You're two young lunatics," the captain declared, wrathfully. "You're +bound to always run yourselves into danger whenever you get a show. +Neither one of you will ever live to see twenty." + +But, although he fumed and threatened for a long time, the matter +ended, as was always the case when the boys had determined upon a +thing, in his, at last, giving a grudging consent to their plan. + +Chris had followed his little friend Ben on deck as soon as he finished +his supper, but soon after the discussion was ended he returned below +grumbling. + +"Dat white child ain't no fitten company to-night," he declared. "He +acts plum scart to death an' won't talk none tall." + +"You go up and stay around the wheel, 'till we come up," the captain +ordered. "I thought you were there all the time or I'd been up myself, +I don't want none of those fellows fooling around the compass." + +When Chris had retired, still grumbling, Walter brought out a pad and +pencil and handed them to the sailor who had been watching their faces +closely during their animated debate. + +The man seized them eagerly and bending over the pad began to draw +slowly with awkward, clumsy fingers. When the sketch was finished he +tore off the sheet of paper and handed it to Charley whom he seemed to +recognize as the real leader of the little party. + +The lad examined the sketch with eager interest. "He must be a very +cheerful sort of fellow," he remarked, as he passed it to his chum. +"First, he prophesies a fight with the crew, and, now, he has got us +all shipwrecked. Can't say much for his skill with the pencil though; +that hulk does not look much like our pretty 'Beauty'." + +The rude sketch pictured a forlorn, dismasted wreck, covered with +seaweed and with one side badly stove in. + +The sailor had immediately commenced upon another picture which he soon +passed over. + +The boys looked it over but could not decide what it was intended to +represent. + +"It looks like a box full of crackers," Charley said with a grin. +"Well, if he's decided to have us shipwrecked, it's thoughtful of him +to provide us with something to eat." + +But the sailor did not seem to regard it as any laughing matter. He +watched their expressions with a face full of concern, and, when +Walter shook his head to show that he did not understand the sketch, he +laid aside the pad with a heavy sigh. + +"He has given it up," Charley said. "We had better go to bed, I guess +we have a hard day ahead of us to-morrow." + +Chris was recalled from the deck and Walter took his place while the +others turned into their bunks and were soon fast asleep. At midnight +he awakened Charley and at four o'clock Charley was relieved by the +captain. The watches passed away without any alarm, but one thing +struck both of the lads as being curious. All during their watches +three or four of the Greeks remained on deck instead of seeking their +bunks as they usually did right after eating supper. They sat around +up by the forecastle smoking and talking quietly together and the boys +came to the conclusion that they were merely wakeful from the effects +of the liquor they had drank the night before. + +The boys looked longingly at the tempting breakfast served by the Greek +cook, but as they had decided to make the descent to the bottom that +morning they were obliged to be content with a cup of coffee. + +The captain and Chris followed them aboard the diving boat. "We're +going with you," the old sailor explained. "It's a risky thing you're +planning to do an' I'd be too nervous and anxious about you to stay on +the schooner. She will be all right without us for a little while." + +Manuel seemed to note the presence of the captain and Chris with +satisfaction. Before the boat was shoved off from the schooner, he +called the cook to the rail and conversed with him a few minutes in low +tones. + +But his satisfaction changed to frowning anger when the boys began to +don the diving suits. + +"You are foolish to attempt to go down, young sirs," he said, angrily. +"It is dangerous, very dangerous." + +"We are the only ones at all likely to suffer," Charley replied +shortly. "Tend strictly to your pumping, when we think we need advice, +we will ask you for it." + +Before his head-piece was adjusted, he found opportunity to whisper to +Walter. "We won't be able to talk when we get below, so I want you to +follow me and do just what you see me do." + +"I will," promised his chum. "My, don't these things feel queer. I can +hardly lift my feet, they are so heavy. They make me feel helpless as a +little baby." + +The divers adjusted the helmets to the lads' heads and, assisting them +to the rail, helped them down the ladder, and lowered them gently to +the bottom. + +Charley laughed to himself as he caught sight of Walter in the clear +water. His chum looked like some strange monster in the grotesque +diving suit. He waved his hand to him and Walter placed one great paw +over his helmet where his mouth was supposed to be, to show that he was +endeavoring politely to stifle a laugh. + +But the boys' merriment at each other's grotesque appearance was +quickly lost in admiration of the strange scene about them. + +It was as though they were standing in the midst of a beautiful garden. +Here and there were patches of soft white bottom, like winding paths +amongst the marine growth. On every side of the bare places rose +lace-like sea fans of purple, yellow, and red, and feather-like sea +plumes swaying gently to and fro to the motion of the water caused by +the lads' descent. At their bases lay scattered multitudes of shells of +every conceivable shape, size, and hue, while, towering far above the +riot of color, rose mighty trees of snow-white coral among the branches +of which hovered golden, silver, crimson, and every shade of fish, +great and small, their fins flashing gracefully as they darted to and +fro. + +For some moments, the lads stood motionless drinking in the beauty of +the wonderful garden, but they had not descended merely to admire and +Charley, after a long look around, hauled gently on the life-line until +he had some hundred feet coiled neatly at his feet. Walter, though not +comprehending his chum's plan, followed his example. The ruse was to +serve a two-fold purpose, first to lead those on the diving boat to +think that the two were a considerable distance from the boat, and, +second, to deceive them as to the real direction taken by those below. + +As soon as Walter had got his life-line neatly coiled down, Charley +turned at right angles from the spot and moved slowly forward for the +place where he calculated lay the supposed bad place in the Gulf's +bottom. + +He was surprised to find that he could walk with perfect ease and +comfort. The suit, which had been so heavy and cumbersome above the +surface, now rested on him lightly as a feather. He could have walked +with considerable speed had it not been for the care he had to take to +keep his life-line free and clear from the numerous branches of coral. +He watched Walter anxiously to see that he used the same care with the +rope upon which their very lives depended and he was relieved to see +that his chum used every possible precaution. + +Although the water was clear as crystal, neither lad could see far +ahead at that depth below the surface for it was too far for the sun's +light to penetrate brightly. Charley was almost upon the rope with its +floating buoy above before he perceived it. He moved forward now with +the greatest caution for, if Manuel's statement was true, a hasty step +might plunge him suddenly into a nasty hole or a dangerous patch of +quicksand. But the bottom did not seem any different from that over +which they had passed. The rope was fastened to a branch of coral where +there was no indication of a hole or quicksand, but, a little beyond +where the rope was fastened, the lad could see dimly a large black mass +rising up from the bottom. Towards it he slowly made his way, followed +by his chum. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +A CLOSE CALL. + + +CHARLEY'S eyes were becoming accustomed to the semi-gloom and a few +steps forward gave him a clear view of the dark object. One glance, and +he turned to his chum with a cry which was lost in his muffling helmet. + +Before the two lads lay the wreck of a once stately ship, her masts +broken short off and a great gaping hole in her side. She had evidently +lain long in her bed amongst the coral and sponges for long tendrils of +sea moss streamed out from her barnacle-covered sides. + +Someone had been there before them for the moss and marine growth had +been scraped from the vessel's stern revealing the name, "Golden Hope". + +Charley turned from the spelling out of the indistinct letters to see +his chum beckoning to him wildly and he hurried to his side. + +Walter was stooping over an opened box partly filled with what had +once been shining gold pieces but which were now tarnished and almost +unrecognizable in their coat of gray slime. The box had been recently +torn open as was evident from the freshly-splintered wood. + +Charley sat down on the box's edge and did some rapid thinking. The +crew's excitement was now accounted for. They had not come upon a +rich bed of sponges as he had suspected but had discovered a treasure +such as men for ages have fought, struggled, and died to attain. The +half emptied box showed that the divers had already begun to remove +the gold. For a moment, the lad was puzzled to know how they had been +able to bring up what was missing without its being seen. There were +no pockets to the diving suits and they could have carried but a few +pieces at a time in their closed hands. A moment's reflection, however, +brought him to the only possible explanation; the gold must have been +sent up in the sponge basket hidden amongst the lumps of mud from which +it could have been removed by the crew without much risk of discovery. +But it was not the removal of the gold which gave the quick-witted +lad the most concern. The amount taken by the Greeks was likely but a +mere trifle when compared with that which remained. It was the effects +the discovery of such a treasure would have upon an already unruly +crew that he feared. As he had said to Walter but the day before, he +believed it needed but a trifle to fan the Greeks' growing discontent +into open mutiny. Here was riches enough to tempt the most steady band +of sailors and it was but reasonable to suppose that it would tempt +the lawless Greeks to deeds of violence and bloodshed. These thoughts +surged through the lad's mind in far less time than it has taken to +tell of them. He would have liked to have talked the matter over with +his chum and settled upon the wisest plan to follow, but that was +impossible below the surface and signs were useless to convey exact +ideas. He must decide alone upon their immediate course of action and +trust to Walter's quick wit to fall in with what he decided upon. + +Arising he turned to his chum and laid one finger across his lips. +Walter nodded his ponderous head-piece to show that he understood the +sign for silence regarding their discovery. + +Taking up his sponge basket, Charley retraced his steps to the spot +where they had descended followed by his observant chum. Here the +sponges grew in abundance and he at once began to fill his basket, an +example which Walter immediately followed. + +As he bent over to tear up an unusually large sponge he became suddenly +sensible of an agitation of the water near him. Straightening up, he +stood frozen to his tracks with fear and horror. Not ten feet from +where he stood lay a gigantic shark, its belly gleaming white through +the clear water. Its little green eyes were fixed upon him with a +wicked unblinking stare. He let the basket drop from his grasp and +flung up his arms with an unreasoning instinct to protect his head from +the impending attack. At his sudden movement the great fish darted +away. Evidently, it was equally as frightened of the strange unknown +monster it had encountered. + +The shock had left the frightened lad weak and trembling and he had to +rest a few minutes before he could resume the filling of his basket. + +As he placed the last sponge in the basket he turned to signal to his +chum to ascend, but Walter was already gone, his figure, grotesque in +the diving suit, was already well up from the bottom and shooting up +with astonishing swiftness. At the same moment Charley became aware of +a strange sickening sensation. He was choking and gasping for breath. +Before he could realize what had happened the frightful sensation had +passed and he was able to breathe fully and freely, and he felt himself +being pulled swiftly to the surface. + +In a moment he was hoisted above the surface, hauled aboard the boat +and his helmet removed. The captain, white-faced and shaken was leaning +against the mast his revolver in his hand. Chris, ashen-hued, and a +sailor, was still pumping faintly. Close beside the air pump lay Manuel +in apparent unconsciousness. + +"What's happened?" Charley cried. + +"Manuel keeled over in a fit or something," said the captain, brokenly. +"I thought you would both be dead before we could get you to the +surface. It seemed ages before I could get Chris to the pump and the +fellows to hauling you up. They seemed to move mighty slow 'till I +threatened to shoot. They maybe didn't understand what I said but the +sight of the gun made 'em more lively," he concluded, grimly. + +Charley walked over to the prostrate Greek and stood gazing down at his +upturned face. + +"He has no business to faint when he's working the air pump," he said +savagely. "I guess I'll kick him a good hard one in the face for +punishment." + +The manly lad had no such intention of carrying out such a brutal +threat but he wanted to test whether the treacherous Greek was, as he +suspected, really shamming. + +The prostrate man's features twitched, he sighed heavily and rolled +over on his side, Charley's suspicions were confirmed. + +"Captain," said the lad distinctly, "if anything happens to Walter and +I when we are below the surface, I want you to shoot this man without +the slightest hesitation. He is the only one who can understand your +orders and he must be made responsible for our safety." + +"I'll shoot him the first time anything goes wrong," the captain +declared wrathfully, as he caught the wink of Charley's eye. "I feel +like killing him now, for the fright he gave me." + +The shamming Greek did not seem to relish this threatening talk. He +showed signs of surprisingly rapid recovery. In a few minutes he was +able to sit up and look around. + +"I am overjoyed to find you both alive," he said faintly to the two +boys. "Everything grew suddenly black before me when I was pumping and +I knew no more. It is my heart, it troubles me at times. You young +gentlemen must go down no more, it is too risky." + +"We have had enough of it for to-day, but we may try it again +to-morrow," Charley replied, cheerfully. "It is very beautiful and +interesting down below." + +"I hope you avoided the bad place on the bottom," said the Greek, +anxiously. "The divers say it is a dangerous hole." + +"You must think we are fools to venture near such a place," said +Charley, indignantly, and the man looked greatly relieved. + +Above all, the prudent lad wished to keep the crew from thinking that +he and Walter had come upon the treasure. As long as they believed +them ignorant of its existence they would likely continue the work of +secretly removing it without open violence. + +He could not talk over the matter with his chums without danger of +being overheard, and he was forced to appear unconcerned and look on +with indifference while the divers sent up basket after basket of +sponges, in every load of which he was convinced was hidden several +hundred dollars of the gold coins. + +He greatly admired Walter's manner. The lad chattered over the +beautiful gardens they had seen below without a hint in his voice or +manner of the secret they had stumbled upon. + +From time to time the crew shot glances of scowling suspicion at +the little group, but they were evidently reassured by the boys' +cheerfulness and apparent unconcern. + +It was like sitting beside a powder mine with a lighted fuse in it, and +both lads were greatly relieved when the long day dragged away to its +close and the diving boat was headed back for the schooner. + +They were met at the schooner's rail by the cook who seemed greatly +excited and who greeted them with a torrent of rapidly spoken words. + +Manuel listened with a look of sadness, real or assumed, on his face. + +"He says," he interpreted swiftly, "that the wounded man went suddenly +crazy this morning and flung himself into the sea." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE DISCUSSION. + + +THE chums looked at each other in silent comprehension. There was not +a doubt in the mind of either that the sailor had been made away with +during their absence from the ship. They recalled Manuel's talk with +the cook before they left the schooner and the look of satisfaction in +his face when he learned that they were all going on the diving boat. +Even the captain was not slow to grasp the horrible truth. + +"It's a terrible business, but don't let on that you suspect them," he +whispered. "We've got to have a long talk and decide what it's best +to do." To Manuel, he said, curtly, "I reckon, it's the fellow's own +business if he wanted to drown himself, so you ain't got no cause to +grieve. Better divide his things up amongst the crew." + +Although they were eager for a talk alone, the four lounged carelessly +about the deck, striving to appear unconcerned, until the Greek boy +summoned them to supper below. They talked cheerfully until the cook +had retired bearing the empty dishes with him. Then Charley arose and +noiselessly closed the cabin windows and door so that their words would +not reach the deck. Returning to his seat, he called the pale-faced +little Greek lad to him, and, resting his hand on his head, said kindly, + +"Ben, we are not going to repeat anything you say to us, and we want +you to tell us just what has been troubling you the last few days." + +The little lad burst into tears, "They'll kill me," he sobbed, "they'll +kill me." + +"They will never know you told us," Charley assured him. "We will never +let anyone know you told us." + +"They are going to kill you all," faltered the boy as soon as he could +control his sobs. + +"Why do they want to kill us," Charley questioned. + +"My uncle makes them mad. When you give orders he adds lots of bad +names and swear words to them. He tells the crew that you always take +that sailor's part. He tells them you're going to have them all put in +jail when you get back to Tarpon. He tells them you love that sailor +and hate Greeks." + +"But why did they hate that sailor so?" Walter questioned. + +"He Turk," explained the lad. "Greeks hate Turks." + +The chums glanced at each other in swift comprehension. They knew of +the deadly hatred that existed between the two races. A hatred that +had led to the bitter war in which the Greeks had been badly beaten. +They understood now why the handsome sailor had been shunned by all +his shipmates. They could see, too, how the wily Manuel had used their +defense of the man to arouse the crew's resentment against them. The +cunning Greek had woven about them a net of lies which it would be +impossible to explain away. + +"Then they find gold," Ben continued, "that makes them crazy. Manuel +tells them to leave you alone if you don't find out about the money, +but kill you if you do." + +"The infernal rascal," exploded the captain. "He goes in irons and down +in the hold to stay 'till we get to port." + +"Don't do that!" cried the alarmed Greek lad. "They kill you right off +if you do." + +"One thing more," said Charley, as the little fellow's tears began to +flow afresh. "Who killed that sailor?" + +But Ben did not know although it was evident that he did not doubt that +the man had been killed. + +Charley waited until the lad had dried his tears, then let him go with +the caution to tell none of the crew that he had told them. + +"We are in the tightest fix of our lives," he declared, when Ben had +gone. "It seems, from what he says, that we are safe so long as they +do not suspect that we know anything about the gold but I fancy that +Manuel suspects that we have found it and I do not believe we can count +on their being willing to let us reach port alive. The question is, +what had we better do." + +"I don't understand all this talk about gold," said the captain. + +The boys hurriedly told of the discovery they had made while the old +sailor listened with sparkling eyes. + +"Boys," he exclaimed, when their tale was concluded, "you've found what +will make rich men of us all. I remember the excitement caused by the +loss of that ship. It happened twelve years ago. For months tugs and +steamers were scouring the Gulf searching for her. She had cleared from +New Orleans for New York with two million dollars in gold aboard." + +"She might as well contain two million toothpicks so far as we are +concerned," said Charley, impatiently. "I'd give up every cent of it +willingly to be safe in port this minute." + +The captain, brought abruptly back to a realization of their desperate +situation, thought deeply for several moments before he spoke. "We had +ought to be able to hold our own against them fellows," he, at last, +observed. "We are well armed and I don't believe they have got any +weapons except their sheaf knives which ain't no good except at close +quarters." + +"It is not open violence but treachery that I fear," Charley explained. +"We have had two samples already of the way they work. First in that +stoppage of the air hose and, second, in the making away of that +sailor. No, that Manuel is too cunning a rascal to risk open rebellion +when he can accomplish his ends without any personal risk." + +"Why not let them continue to get up the gold and hide it as they have +been doing?" Walter suggested. "We can pretend that we do not know what +is going on. Then when we get to port we can turn them over to the +authorities and recover the money without any trouble." + +Charley shook his head doubtfully. "That will not do," he said. "I am +as convinced as I am that I am living, that we would never reach port +alive. Manuel is too wise to take any chances and he knows that they +could not remove such a large amount of gold from the schooner without +arousing suspicion. I believe he has entrusted the crew to spare us for +the present only because he thinks that some of the fleet might happen +along and grow curious if we were all missing. Besides, it is doubtful +if any of them know enough about navigation to sail the 'Beauty' home. +Us boys, he probably will not hesitate to remove at any time if he can +give the act the appearance of accident, like what occurred to-day. +The captain, he will likely permit to remain alive until near port. He +will have a long story made up to account for our disappearance and the +gold will likely be well hidden amongst the ballast from where he can +remove it without exciting comment so long as we are not on board." + +The lad spoke confidently for he was putting himself in the place +of the cunning Greek and reasoning just what he would do in a like +position. + +"I've got it," exclaimed the captain in triumph. "When they are asleep +we'll batten down the forecastle hatch on them and keep them there +until we get to port. We four can work the schooner in, I guess." + +"I tell you, you don't realize what a cunning rascal that fellow is," +Charley declared in reluctant admiration. "He has provided against just +such an attempt. I did not understand the reason for it last night, but +I noticed that all during my watch on deck there were three or four men +hanging around the deck up forward. It's a great stake they are playing +for and they are not taking the slightest chances." + +"I noticed the men hanging around," admitted the captain, "but I didn't +think much of it at the time. Let's have your plan, if you've got one, +lad." + +"I'm afraid we can't get out of this hole without some violence and +danger," Charley replied. "I have been thinking over it all day and +this is the only thing I can think of that seems to offer any hope +of success. First thing in the morning Walter and I must descend to +the wreck again and bring up enough gold to pay off the men when we +get to port. It's a risky thing to do, but it is necessary to carry +out my plan. You see," he paused to explain, "the men were shipped for +three months and they could demand pay for that time. We haven't got +the money and we have not gathered up enough sponges yet to make up so +large an amount. They could tie the schooner up for their wages and +make us a lot of trouble and expense, a thing Manuel would be sure to +do." + +"But they have got a lot of gold which belongs to us, already," Walter +suggested. + +"We would have hard work to prove that it is ours, and it would mean a +lot of delay," replied his chum quickly. + +"Go on with your plan, lad," said the captain, who perceived that +Charley had thought over all sides of the question with his usual +clearness. + +"After we have brought up the money. We will use their own plan for +bringing it up without its being noticed--we will hang around and let +them go on with the work as usual all day, for it would not do to fight +it out on the diving boat. When we get back to the schooner at night, +we will bring matters to a head. We will make them get up anchor and +sails and head back for Tarpon. There's bound to be trouble and plenty +of it but we'll be prepared for it and Tarpon is only two days' sail. +What do you think of the plan?" + +He did not have to wait long for a chorus of objections. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +A DESPERATE PLAN. + + +"I DON'T see that your plan is any better than mine," Walter objected. + +"To tarry along while they remove the gold would give them time enough +to remove us one by one," Charley replied, "While by doing as I have +suggested they will have but little chance for treachery, and, although +we will be sure to have trouble with them as soon as we order them to +get up anchor, I think we can manage to keep the upper hand of them for +the short time it will take to reach Tarpon." + +"Golly, dis nigger plum hates to run off an' lebe all dat gole," Chris +observed. + +"We'll come back for it," Charley declared. "As soon as we have paid +off the Greeks and got rid of them, we'll pick a crew of Americans and +hurry back." + +"And while we are wasting time in getting a new crew, the Greeks will +have spread the news and a dozen boats will be here before we can get +back." + +"You forget that the captain is the only one who knows where we are +by the latitude and longitude. Without knowing that, fifty boats might +hunt for a month without seeing that little buoy. It would be like +looking for a needle in a haystack." + +"Hang that pesky Greek," exclaimed the captain. "He asked me this +morning for the schooner's position, an' I gave it to him." + +Charley's face fell, "That fellow seems to think of everything," +he sighed. "But it's hard to get an exact position by latitude and +longitude alone, isn't it, Captain?" + +"A navigator is lucky if he hits within four or five miles of the place +he's aiming for. Of course it can be done if one is extra careful, but +I could not swear to our exact position on the chart now, 'though I +reckon I could come within a couple of miles of it." + +"Good," Charley exclaimed, "I guess, we can make it impossible for them +to find the wreck again, if they should manage to get back before us. +It will mean a little change in my plan, though. Instead of getting +off to-morrow night, we will have to wait until the next morning." He +hastily outlined his amended plan, which, after they had discussed it +carefully, his companions agreed was as promising as any they could +think of. + +They had hardly finished their discussion when there came a knock at +the cabin door and Manuel entered, smiling. + +"I wished to enquire if the young gentlemen intend to go down in the +suits again to-morrow?" he said, suavely. + +"We haven't decided yet," Charley said, carelessly, "Why do you wish to +know?" + +"Because, if you are, the air hose had better be greased. If it is left +dry for long the rubber sometimes cracks and makes leaks." + +"Then have it well greased," the captain ordered. + +"I guess he's afraid of being shot if anything happens, an' is taking +every precaution," chuckled the captain when the Greek had retired. + +"Perhaps," agreed Charley, doubtfully, "but, I confess, I am afraid of +that fellow. I'll certainly look over that hose carefully before I go +down to-morrow." + +When they ascended to the deck, which they had forgotten to have +watched in the excitement of their discussion, they found Manuel and +two of the divers busily engaged in greasing the rubber air hose with +bacon slush from the cook's galley. + +Charley's was the first watch on deck and, long after his companions +had retired to their bunks, he paced back and forth aft of the main +mast pondering thoughtfully over the plan he had suggested. It was +the best he could conceive under the circumstances but he realized +that its execution would be attended with the gravest dangers. Most +of all, he dreaded the proposed descent to the bottom for the gold. +He was convinced that Manuel had hit upon some scheme to get rid of +him and Walter without danger to himself. Again and again the lad's +thoughts came back to the greasing of the hose. If the operation was +so important, why had the divers not done it before--They were not the +kind of men to take any unnecessary risks in their dangerous work below +the surface. He had often noted the care with which they had examined +hose and pump before each descent. + +But, while the lad puzzled over the matter, he did not neglect to +keep a watchful eye upon the three or four Greeks who lingered on the +forward deck. If he had needed any reminder of the peril of their +situation, it would have been found in the sight of those watchful, +restless figures. + +Near the end of his watch, he gave vent to a low exclamation--He had +discovered the reason for the greasing of the hose. For a few minutes +he was appalled by the cunning fiendishness which had prompted the +act. The two hoses lay coiled close together in great heaps on deck. +Sauntering over to them, the lad stooped over each pile for a second, +then, straightening up, he resumed his slow steady pacing. + +At midnight he awoke Walter to take his place. "I've solved it," he +told him. + +"Solved what?" asked Walter, sleepily. + +"Their reason for greasing the hose." + +"What is it?" + +"To attract sharks and lead them to bite it in two." + +"The fiends!" Walter cried as the devilish ingenuity of the plot dawned +upon him. "What are you going to do about it?" + +"Nothing, until we are ready to descend," his chum replied, "then it +will be too late for them to practice another surprise for us." + +"Are you sure you are right," asked Walter, doubtfully. "They are not +sure that we are going to descend, you know." + +"I think Manuel feels pretty confident that we will. If we fail to do +so, he likely will find some excuse for replacing the greased hose with +new ones. You can bet, he's got it all figured out. He is the brainiest +villain I ever met up with. Better hurry on deck now, and keep a close +watch out. There's no telling what other scheme he's got hatched up." + +Although he retired to his bunk at once, Charley lay long awake. The +morrow would be filled with danger and his nerves were already growing +tense for the struggle which he foresaw. The Captain had relieved +Walter on deck before he at last fell into a troubled slumber from +which he awoke just as day was beginning to break. + +By the time it was light enough to see, he was up and dressed and +making preparations for the carrying out of his hazardous plan. From +the lazerette, he procured a long coil of light rope which he placed +in one corner of his cabin. He next opened up his valise and got out +the ammunition he had purchased in Tarpon and a small, but excellent +pocket compass. These he placed in his bunk where they would be handy +if needed quickly. + +When breakfast was over, the diving boat was brought alongside and all +got on board except the cook and four men left to take care of the +schooner and clean the sponges gathered the previous day. + +"We have decided to go down and have one more look at those sea +gardens," Charley told Manuel when the sponging ground was reached. +"They are beautiful enough to invite another visit." + +The Greeks' face expressed satisfaction. "They are beautiful," he +agreed, "but the young gentlemen are rash to go down. Let the divers +take the risks--they are paid to do it." + +"We will be very careful," Charley said, cheerfully. "Walt, we had +better look over the hose before we go down, the divers always do." + +The greased hose had been recoiled in the tubs and the boys proceeded +to overhaul them, foot by foot, searching them closely for cracks or +punctures. + +Walter was puzzled to comprehend his chum's plan. After what he had +discovered, surely he did not intend to risk using the dangerous +things, but he was well enough acquainted with Charley's shrewdness +to hold his tongue and keep his face from betraying his uneasiness. +He felt sure that there was a good reason for his chum's actions. He +had but just reached this decision when he came upon a gapping hole in +the hose. It looked much as though it had been cut in two with a sharp +knife. + +"Here's a bad place," he announced. "It's lucky I found it. Air can't +be pumped through this thing." + +"And here's a hole in mine, too," Charley declared in accents so +surprised that no one would have dreamed that he had made both slits +the night before to serve as an excuse for the rejection of the +dangerous hose. "We can't use either one of them, we'll have to get out +the new hose." + +Manuel's face for a second was a picture of bewilderment and baffled +rage, but in a moment he was again suave and smiling. "I don't see what +can have made those cuts," he declared. "They can be patched in a few +minutes, however. It would be a pity to throw away such hose, it is as +good as new except for those two little places which can be speedily +fixed." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +TOO LATE. + + +"NO patched hose for me," Charley said, decidedly. "If the divers want +to risk using it, they can." + +It was not just the reply the wily Greek had expected and he hastened +to answer. + +"You are right, it does not pay to take risks. I will get the new hose +and put it on." + +But Charley was ahead of him. He did not intend to give the wily Greek +any chance to play tricks with the new hose. He brought it out from +the lockers in which it was kept and, after examining it carefully +connected it to the air pumps and helmets. Before putting on his +head-piece, he tried the air pump also. It proved to be in perfect +working order and sent the air gushing through the hose. Manuel +fastened the life-line below his arms, but Charley called the captain +to adjust the heavy helmet over his head. + +As soon as his feet touched the bottom, Charley moved forward for +the wreck, Walter at his side. Neither lad wished to remain below a +second longer than was necessary for they fully realized that they were +running a terrible risk in descending at all. They found the box they +had discovered the day before entirely empty, the divers had brought +another out from the wreck's hold and broken it open. The gold was in +twenty dollar pieces and in a few minutes the lads had transferred +several hundred dollars from the box to the baskets. It was hard to +resist taking more but the risks were too great to permit it. Quickly +hastening back to the patch of sponges, they tore up several baskets +full of the mud and covered fungus and, making a slit in each with +their sheaf knives, stuffed in the coins. It was the very plan the +divers had followed but Charley had decided that they would not be +looking for the adopting of their own trick. As soon as the last coin +was hidden and the loaded sponges placed in the basket with others on +top of them to complete the load, Charley signed to Walter to ascend +and stood watching him until he had been drawn to the surface, then he +gave the signal to be drawn up himself. He was raised a few feet up +from the bottom then he sank quickly back to the place from which he +had risen and he saw the end of the life-line dangling in the water +twenty feet above his head. _It had been pulled loose from his body._ + +Charley stood for a moment looking at it in terrified dismay while his +quick brain took in the awful significance of his position. Frightened +as he was, he could not but admire the quickness with which Manuel had +hit upon another scheme for his undoing after that of the greased hose, +had failed, for he had not a doubt that the Greek had fastened the +life-line to him in such a manner that it would pull loose with a hard +jerk. He was in no immediate danger of death for the air hose still +connected him with the surface and the fresh air still came gushing in +a welcome stream into his helmet, but a moment's reflection convinced +him that this was not all of Manuel's scheme, for the Greek would know +that the captain and Walter would soon become uneasy over his delay +and would start an investigation which would quickly reveal that the +life-line was no longer attached to him. Clearly, the Greek had another +card up his sleeve which he would soon play and Charley waited for it +with every nerve strained to keenest tension. He felt longingly of +the air hose, wondering if the frail tube would hold for him to pull +himself up to the surface by it, but he quickly decided that it would +not stand the heavy strain and to break it would mean his instant +death. Keeping one eye on the life-line so tantalizingly out of his +reach he moved slowly forward until he stood beneath the diving boat +which showed like a dim shadow above him. Suddenly a thrill of horror +went through him, the diving boat was slowly drifting away--Manuel had +played his trump card. In a flash the terror-stricken lad comprehended +the situation. Some one of the Greeks, under Manuel's instructions, had +stealthily severed the cable, relying on the boat's slow drift being +unnoticed by the captain and Walter until it had dragged apart the +frail air hose. But, just as Charley had given up all hope and waited +for the parting of the hose which would mean his death, the dangling +life-line was jerked up out of sight,--his companions had discovered a +part at least of his plight--upon their next actions depended his life +or death. + +The next few seconds seemed like hours to the helpless lad, then a dark +speck appeared in the water above him quickly growing in size until he +could see that it was Chris fighting his way downward with long steady +strokes and following the air hose in his descent. The little negro +was nearly exhausted when he reached the bottom. Thrusting the end of +the line he had brought into Charley's hand, he turned upward and shot +to the surface like a rocket. Charley whipped the line about his waist +and gave the signal to pull up. He was swiftly pulled to the surface, +hauled aboard the boat, and his helmet removed. Chris, breathing +heavily, was standing by the mast, the water dripping from him. Walter +and the captain, pale with fear, stood close beside him. + +"Thank God, you're safe, lad," cried the old sailor, tears in his +eyes. "We feared the air hose would part before Chris could get to you. +We had just pulled on the life-line and found it had come loose from +you when we discovered the boat had gone adrift. I reckon, she must +have chafed her cable in two against a sharp piece of coral. Queer how +everything happens all at once that way, sometimes." + +It was clear the simple old sailor did not suspect that the trouble was +anything but an accident, and Charley hastened to reply, + +"All is well that ends well, but I've nearly had the life scart out of +me. I don't think I'll ever want to go down again." + +He was watching Manuel closely as he spoke and he noted with +satisfaction the expression of relief on the Greek's swarthy face. +If he could only keep him from thinking that he knew anything about +the gold and had not discovered his treachery, he hoped to be able to +avoid open violence until they were prepared and ready for it. He was +convinced that the Greek was too cowardly to risk the danger of being +shot in open mutiny so long as he thought himself unsuspected and free +to scheme their removal without danger to himself. + +The diving boat was worked back to her old position, another anchor +dropped, and donning their suits the divers resumed operations below. +When they came to the surface at the end of their two hour trick below +they seemed strangely excited and conversed eagerly with Manuel and the +rest of the crew. Charley was for awhile puzzled to account for their +excitement, but 'ere long the solution came to him. Like all plans +intended to deceive, his had contained a fatal defect. + +"Walt," he whispered to his chum, "those chaps have noticed that some +of the gold has been removed from that box. We are in for trouble, now, +I fear." The Captain and Chris were warned to be on their guard but +it seemed that the warning was unnecessary, the excited talk amongst +the crew soon ceased and the fresh divers quietly prepared for their +descent. + +But in spite of the quietness, there was a tension and earnestness +in the crew's manner which made the anxious little party of chums +feel that they were standing at the edge of a powder mine which might +explode at any minute. + +"I would rather have open fighting than this awful waiting," Walter +whispered. + +"We will have that soon enough," said his chum, grimly. "It will come +as soon as we try to make them get the schooner under way." + +The long anxious day at last drew to its close, anchor was got up on +the diving boat, and she was headed back for the schooner. + +As they passed a large piece of driftwood covered with large black +birds with very long necks, Manuel pointed at them, "Those are fine +eating," he said wistfully. "If the young gentlemen could kill a few it +would give us all a great feast." + +Walter looked at Charley who nodded assent, for he was not loath that +the Greek should witness their skill with the revolver. + +Both boys had practiced often with their revolvers and were better than +average marksmen. Their pistols were automatics, a style of weapon with +which even the unskillful can shoot fairly accurately. Walter fired six +shots in as many seconds, killing four birds and wounding one. Charley +fired four shots at the same time, killing two birds and crippling a +third. The rest of the birds took flight before the boys could shoot +more. The captain and Chris emptied their pistols at the flying flock +without success. + +The diving boat was run alongside the dead birds and they were picked +up by the crew. Manuel seemed delighted, "The young gentlemen are +wonderful shots," he declared. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +OUTWITTED. + + +THE chums hastened below when the schooner was reached for they were +eager to talk over the next move to be made. + +"Things have got to be brought to a head right off," declared the +captain when Charley had acquainted him with his suspicions of Manuel's +foul play. "It's rank foolishness to linger along an' give them more +chances to work out their devilish tricks. It's better to have trouble +with them right now while we are prepared than to wait and perhaps have +them take us unawares." + +"Thank goodness the time for action is close at hand," Charley agreed, +"I could not stand this anxiety and suspense much longer. Let's go over +our plan once more and make sure that we each know our parts so that +there will be no hitch when we come to carry them out. Now as soon as +we have supper Chris and I will get into the dingy and pretend that we +are going to row around for fun. We will pull back and forth until it +gets good and dark, then we'll gradually work out to that buoy. We +will cut it adrift, take it aboard, pull due East from the schooner for +a mile and anchor it again. That will throw them way off the scent if +they should manage to get back here again before us, while it will tell +us just where to look for the wreck. That part is easy, the trouble +will come when we get back to the boat. First thing we had better do is +to stretch several ropes across the deck from rail to rail just forward +of the mainmast. That will delay and bother them if they should try to +rush us in a body. The next move will be to get Manuel aft and get the +irons on him. We had better get him down here in the cabin to attempt +that. As soon as we get him helpless, we will carry him up and make him +give our orders to get up anchor and get sail on the schooner. He's too +great a coward to encourage his shipmates to make a rush for us so long +as he is in our power. They may try it in spite of him, however, when +they realize that the gold is going to be lost to them. If they do we +will have to fight them off while Chris tends to the wheel. We don't +want any bloodshed if we can help it but we mustn't let them get aft of +the mainmast, they would make short work of us if it ever came to close +quarters. Do you all understand now what we have to do?" + +His companions nodded. + +"Then we had better reload our pistols, fill up our cartridge belts, +and get ready," he continued. "I'll get the ammunition." + +But in a moment he was back from his cabin, his face pale and grave. + +"How many shells have you got left in your pistol?" he demanded. + +"One," Walter replied, while Chris and the captain broke open their +weapons to show only empty chambers. + +"I have got three shots left, that makes four altogether," Charley +said, hopelessly. "All the rest of our ammunition has been stolen out +of my bunk." + +His companions grew as grave and pale as himself at the announcement. +With only four shots left they were practically helpless in the hands +of the Greeks. + +"There is just one chance left," Charley declared, desperately. "We +have got to get Manuel in our power and try to control the crew through +him. It may work and it may not, but it's our only hope. Chris, go tell +him we want to see him here in the cabin." + +As soon as the little negro had gone, Charley brought out a pair of +handcuffs from his grip and placed them in his pocket. "When I give +the signal, get them on him," he said. "I'll lock the door so that he +cannot get out or the crew come to help him. He'll likely put up a +fight and we'll have to watch out for his knife, but the three of us +had ought to be able to handle him. But hush, here they come now." + +Footsteps sounded on the companionway stairs, the cabin door opened, +and Chris appeared, closely followed by the Greek. The little negro +stepped inside but Manuel paused on the threshold and swept a keen +glance over the assembled party. Perhaps some instinct warned him of +his danger, perhaps he decided that the time had come for his last +treacherous move. With a quick leap, he sprang back through the open +doorway, slammed the door to, and bolted it outside, and the little +band of chums were prisoners in the cabin of their own ship. + +Charley leaped from his chair, but he was too late. + +"Outwitted," he cried as he sank back into his seat. "Beaten at every +point of the game. What fools, what bunglers we are." There was as much +chagrin as fear in his exclamations. To be so badly beaten after all +his vigilance and careful planning was hard to bear. + +His companions sat silent with despair. So suddenly had it all happened +they had not yet had time to realize that they were completely in the +hands of the Greeks who could do with them as they pleased. + +Charley flipped open his pistol and handed one of his remaining +cartridges to his chum, "That gives us two apiece," he observed, +"although I doubt if we will either of us need them." He retired to +his cabin and reappeared with a blanket and a book. He spread out the +blanket on the floor and stretching himself out on it prepared to read. +"Might as well get what enjoyment we can," he said. "There's nothing we +can do, so we might as well take it easy while we may." + +"How can you be so careless?" his chum exclaimed, "any minute they may +come down upon us." + +"Little danger of that," the other replied, coolly. "They know we've +got four shots left yet. What would be the use of their taking chances +when they have got everything in their own hands." + +But his companions could not view their position with the same hopeless +resignation. While he read on apparently unconcerned, they discussed +plan after plan for escape from their prison and perilous situation, +only to reject one after the other as wildly impracticable. At last +they abandoned the discussion in despair. + +"Better turn in and try to get a good night's rest," Charley advised +them calmly. "I will keep watch for the first four hours, although I +don't believe there's the slightest use of it." + +"I'm too hungry to sleep," Walter declared. "I wonder why they do not +send us down our supper." + +"Bless your simple little soul," his chum exclaimed, "They do not +intend us to have anything to eat. I thought you understood that." + +His companions looked at each other in dismay. This, the greatest of +all their perils, had not before occurred to them. They understood now +the awfulness of their position. All the food and water were stored +forward. The Greeks had only to let them alone and they would slowly +die of hunger and thirst. + +"They will not get us that way," declared Walter, desperately. "Before +I'll die of hunger and thirst I'll set the schooner on fire." + +Charley nodded approval. "I've been thinking of that myself," he said. +"A quick death is better than a slow torturing one. But there is plenty +of time to talk of that. While there is life there is hope and I have +a feeling that something is going to turn up to help us out of this +scrape. I've just happened to think of one thing that's in our favor." + +He was prevented from explaining the new hope which had occurred to him +by a knock on the cabin door and Manuel's sneering voice enquiring, + +"Are the gentlemen quite comfortable?" + +"Quite," Charley assured him, calmly. "Much more comfortable than you +and your mates will be when the law reckons with you." + +"There is no law at sea but the law of the strongest and most cunning," +the Greek said, smoothly. "But I bear a proposal from my shipmates for +your distinguished consideration." + +"State it," replied the lad, briefly. + +"You are all in a bad position," stated the Greek with oily +maliciousness. "You were cunning but not cunning enough or our +positions would now be reversed. We have only to do nothing now and you +will all die. It would sadden our hearts to lose such loving friends +but we would strive to bear up bravely under the blow. But why should +you all die when we are willing to spare one. All that one would have +to do would be to take an oath to be faithful and true to us and do as +we bid him. Not only would his life be spared, but he would receive a +share of the great wealth we have discovered." + +"Why are you so very generous in your offers?" Walter demanded, +sarcastically. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +IMPRISONED. + + +"WE need one of you," explained Manuel, with startling frankness. +"Perhaps we could get along without but it does not pay to take +chances. There is a government cutter which patrols the banks to see +that the sponging vessels are complying with the laws. She may come +upon us accidentally any time and it would be awkward explaining why we +continued to work without American officers. It would very likely get +us into trouble. But if one of you takes the part of the captain and +shows the papers and explains that the rest have died from fever, all +will go smoothly." + +"I suppose you have decided which one of us you want?" Charley asked, +curiously. + +"Any one of you will do, but we prefer you. You have brains enough to +realize where your own interests lie. It is easier to handle a smart +man than a fool. Consider the chance we are giving you, on the one hand +slow, painful, certain death; on the other, an honored position, great +wealth and safety--we are generous indeed." + +"But how do you know that I will play fair?" + +"The moment you joined us you would be as liable to the law as the rest +of us," Manuel said calmly, "We would live or hang together. You would +not dare to trifle with us, and I should watch you closely all the +time." + +"Here is my answer," declared Charley, whose indignation had been +steadily rising at the cold-blooded proposal. "If you would all keep +your part of the agreement,--which I am convinced you would not do, I'd +die rather than join such a pack of dirty murderers." + +"You are a bigger fool than I thought," replied the Greek calmly. +"I will leave you to consider the matter better. Hunger is a great +persuader, and I am in hopes that you will soon see where your best +interests lie. Good-night, gentlemen, good-night, may your dreams be of +the pleasantest." + +"He's evidently somewhat worried," said Charley, hopefully, when the +Greek's mocking voice had ceased. "He believes, I guess, that there is +a good chance of the cutter coming upon him or he would not make such +a proposal, although he would not keep his part of it any longer than +the danger lasted. Our only hope is to keep up our strength and spirits +as long as possible. There is a chance that the cutter may come along +before it is too late. Better all turn in and get some rest while you +are still not too hungry to sleep. I will call one of you to take my +place as soon as my four hours are up, although I do not believe that +they will trouble us." + +The lad was right in his belief. The night passed away without any +alarm and they were able by turns to get some little sleep. With the +coming of daylight, they crowded to the windows and searched the dreary +waste of waters for sign of smoke or sail, but found none. The crew +were going about their work in cheerful unconcern. Leaving a half dozen +men on the schooner, the balance got aboard the diving boat and sailed +out to the sponge ground where they could be seen working steadily all +day bringing up the gold from the bottom. The prisoners suffered much +during the long day from their increasing hunger and thirst. + +At night the diving boat returned to the schooner and the dispirited +watchers could see that the crew had not wasted their day by any means. +Both sponge baskets were nearly full of the gold coins. + +"We've got to do something, I don't care how desperate it is," declared +Captain Westfield. "Anything is better than this keeping still and +suffering. By to-morrow this time we'll be too weak to do much and thar +ain't no certainty that the cutter will come along this way at all. I'm +in for doing something, no matter what." + +Charley turned from his gazing out of the window, "Look here, +Captain," he called, softly. "Speak low," he cautioned as the old +sailor crept to his side, "we don't want them to hear us on deck." + +"Geewhilikens!" whispered the old seaman in swift comprehension, +"they've left the diving boat fastened right under our windows." + +"God grant that they may not think to move it," the lad replied, +trembling with excitement. "We can do nothing until it gets dark and +they retire to the forecastle." + +Walter and Chris were quickly made acquainted with the suddenly-offered +chance of escape and their joy knew no bounds. + +Then followed hours which seemed like days to the breathless, anxious +watchers. The Greeks ate their supper and lounged around the deck +talking and laughing. It seemed as though they would never retire to +their bunks. But at last their voices gradually ceased and silence +settled down upon the schooner. Charley cautiously opened one of the +big windows and swung it outward, then climbing softly toward the +opening, lowered himself to the diving boat's deck. The Captain, +Walter, and Chris followed. Not a word was spoken for each realized +the terrible risk they were running. As soon as all were crouched +motionless aboard, Charley, with his knife, severed the rope which +bound them to the schooner and the boat drifted slowly away from the +ship's side. + +No one moved until the schooner was at last lost in the darkness. + +"Start up the engine," said Charley, as he took the helm, and Walter +slipped down amongst the machinery. After a few minutes' fumbling in +the darkness, he crept back. + +"There's no gasoline in the tank," he announced. + +"Everything seems against us," Charley sighed. "Well, get sail on her. +We will have to do the best we can." + +In a few minutes the great square sail was spread, and, leaning over, +the little craft sent a line of foam rippling from her bow. + +"They'll have hard work finding us in this darkness," exulted the +captain as he took the helm from Charley. "I reckon, we'd better shape +a course for the nearest port,--that's Judson. As soon as we get thar, +we can telegraph to all the ports along the coast to watch out for +the schooner. We've got 'em now, I reckon, lads, they'll have to put +in somewhere sooner or later, an' they'll be nabbed. I feel just like +yelling for joy." + +The rising spirits of the little party were helped by Chris' discovery +of a couple of loaves of stale black bread, and part of a bottle of +ripe olives in one of the lockers. They made a meagre but very welcome +repast upon the uninviting food. + +But their joy over their lucky escape was soon dampened by the +threatening appearance of the Western sky. A heavy bank of clouds was +slowly rising there from which came flashes of lightning and the rumble +of distant thunder. + +"I reckon, it ain't nothin' but a thunder squall," the captain assured +them. "Thar ain't no call to be uneasy, this is a mighty seaworthy +little craft. I reckon, we could ride out a right smart gale in her if +we had it to do." + +Before they ran much further the captain gave the order to lower and +reef the great sail. When hoisted again, it was only a tiny patch of +canvas, as compared with its former size. + +"Thar's only one thing for us to do when that squall strikes us an' +that's to scud before it," the old captain declared. "We can't heave +her to under that sail. Luckily, the way it's coming won't blow us out +of our course much." + +They had not long to wait for the storm to burst. The wind soon +descended with a violence that threatened to bury the diving boat in +the seas it brought with it. But the little craft had been built to +stand just such weather, and, quickly gathering headway, she darted +away before the gale. With the wind came the rain in great driving, +blinding sheets. The boys hailed its appearance with joy. They spread +out their jackets, bits of sail, and even their hats to catch the +precious drops. In a short while they had secured enough to quench +their intense thirst. This done, they gathered around the captain at +the helm ready to render any assistance in their power. There was +little they could do for the old sailor would trust no one but himself +to steer in the heavy sea-way. As the hours passed by without showing +any abatement of the storm, it became evident to his companions that he +was growing anxious. + +"I don't like the way it's hanging on," he declared. "We must be making +at least twelve miles an hour and, at that rate, we will have the land +close aboard before daylight. Crawl forward, Charley, an' keep a sharp +look-out, the sky is clearing some an', I reckon, you can see a few +hundred feet ahead." + +The lad obediently worked his way up into the bow, and bracing himself +against the anchor bitts, peered ahead into the darkness. He could make +out nothing at first but the heavy foam-flecked, tossing water. He sat +watching intently till, at last, Walter crawled forward to take his +place. He had only got part way back to the stern when there came a cry +from his chum, + +"Hard down! hard down!" + +With true seaman's quickness, the Captain jammed the long tiller over +and the little craft, escaping broaching in the trough of the seas by a +miracle, shot up into the wind--a second too late. + +"Hang on for your lives!" the old sailor cried. + +Black masses loomed out of the darkness to leeward. A great wave picked +up the helpless boat and flung it with crashing, breaking timbers, upon +the rocks. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +WRECKED. + + +THE boys had obeyed the old sailor's order, and, though greatly shaken +by the shock, they retained their hold on the boat. + +"Quick, get on the rocks," shouted the Captain. "She'll pound to pieces +in a jiffy." + +Fortunately, the boat's bow had been driven up on the ledge nearly +out of the water. The boys dropped over the side followed by the +old sailor, and, though beaten and bruised against the sharp rocks +succeeded in struggling out upon the one which reared itself above +the water. They glanced back to where the boat had struck, but, short +as had been their struggle out, it had witnessed the destruction +of the staunch craft. Only that portion of her bow lodged upon the +reef remained intact, the balance of her hull was a mass of twisted, +splintered, broken planks. + +Great as was the danger from which they had escaped, their present +position was still far from safe. The slippery rock afforded but +insecure footing and it was frequently swept by the larger seas. At +such times, they had all they could do to keep from being swept off its +slimy surface. + +"I reckon, we've struck on a reef," the Captain said, anxiously. "It +all depends upon the tide whether we are safe or not. If it's low tide, +now, high tide will cover this rock so deep that we'll not be able to +hang on to it." + +It soon became evident that the tide was still rising, though slowly. +The waves began sweeping over the flat rock with such violence that +the tired, wretched, anxious, little party could hardly maintain their +footing. To the right and left of them, rose other higher masses of +rock, but they did not dare to attempt to reach them through the +darkness and the boiling surf. Wet, cold, hungry, and wretched; they +clung to their insecure refuge until day began to break in the East. +With the coming of light they strained their brine-smarting eyes to +discover what manner of place it was upon which they had been thrown. +The outlook was not reassuring. They were, as the Captain had surmised, +on a point of low-lying reef, most of which was constantly wave-swept +by the monstrous surges. To the East of them, lay a low, marshy shore +dotted here and there with small islands covered with cedar hammocks, +but between them and the islands was at least two miles of foaming +water. The boys gazed wistfully at the longed-for land. + +"We can't make it," Charley said, sadly. "Chris might, perhaps, be +able to swim it, but it would be a long swim for the rest of us at any +time, and, tired and weak as we are now, it would be impossible. We +will have to stick it out here until the storm goes down a bit, then, +try to fashion some kind of a raft out of the planks of the diving +boat." + +"We can't be far from Judson," said the Captain, with an attempt at +cheerfulness. "A boat may come by an' pick us up any minute." + +But the boys were not cheered by any such prospect. They knew that the +chance of any boat being out in such weather was very small indeed. +One fact, however, gave them a little hope; the tide was undoubtedly +falling. It had evidently been almost at its height when they had +landed on the rock. + +"I wish we had something to eat," Walter sighed, "we have had nothing +but a little bread in two days. I begin to feel weak all over." + +Chris gazed thoughtfully at the water on the shore-side of the rock. "I +reckon, I might find somethin' down dar," he observed. "I'se goin' to +try it anyway. You white chilluns has sho' got to hab somethin' to eat." + +Although the water was somewhat smoother to the lee of the rocks, +it boiled and foamed there threateningly and the boys endeavored to +dissuade the plucky little negro from the attempt, but their objections +only made him the more determined. + +"Golly! you chilluns doan know what a diver dis nigger is," he said, +proudly. "You jes' stay still an' watch him now." He removed his +clothes, handing them to Charley to hold, slipped over the side of the +rock, and sank down beneath the surface. He was gone so long that the +watchers had begun to grow anxious when he reappeared, blowing like a +porpoise. In one hand, he held tightly clenched, a big stone crab and a +large conch. + +"Take 'em," he exclaimed, "I'se goin' down again. Dar's heaps more of +dem on de bottom." + +He continued diving until he had brought up six more conchs and two +more crabs, then he crawled out on the rock completely exhausted, and +held up one foot for their inspection. There was a tiny puncture in the +sole of it from which the blood was slowly trickling. + +"I reckon, I'se goin' to hab some trubble wid dat foot," he observed, +gravely. "Ole Mister Stingaree gib me a dig dar. He warn't much bigger +dan a plate, but der horns are powerful poison." + +His announcement sent a chill of fear to the hearts of his companions, +for they all well-knew the dangerous character of the flat, horn-tailed +fish which lurks on the bottom in Florida waters. The Captain did not +lose a second in whipping out his sheath knife and cutting open the +puncture which he washed out thoroughly with sea water. He then made +Chris sit on the edge of the rock and hang his foot over in the water. + +The plucky little negro bore the operation with unflinching +cheerfulness. "I sho' wish you'd open up one ob dem conch for me, Massa +Charley," he observed. "If dis ting's goin' to make me sick, I wants to +be dat much ahead." + +Charley quickly broke open one of the conchs and gave him the meat,--a +big lump of tough flesh, almost sufficient for an entire meal. He also +opened several others for the Captain, Walter, and himself, upon which +they made a hearty and strengthening, if somewhat tasteless, meal. +Chris ate but little of the tough meat, he soon pushed it away from him +with a weary little sigh. + +"I doan want no moah," he said, quietly. "I'ze gettin' berry sick. +Reckon ole Mister Stingaree dun got dis nigger for sho'." + +His little ebony face soon took on a dull-ashen hue and he began to +vomit violently; passing from these spells into a heavy stupor, the +mysterious subtle poison from the stingaree was getting in its work. +His grieving companions watched him in helpless suspense, there was +nothing they could do to relieve his sufferings. + +"We can't let him die like this," Charley cried, as the little sufferer +twitched in spasms of pain. "I am going to try to reach shore and find +help. He has taken bigger risks for us many a time." + +Neither Walter or the Captain tried to stop him. They would have gladly +offered to make the attempt in his place but he was the strongest and +best swimmer of the three. + +He removed his jacket and shoes and with a last good-bye, plunged off +of the rock and headed for the distant shore. He had not gone more than +twenty yards when he stopped with a cry of joy. + +"Come on," he called back, "the water isn't more than three feet deep +here. There's only a deep place near the rocks and you can get across +that easily." + +But he had to return to help them get Chris across the deep narrow +channel, for the little negro's struggles in his spasms threatened +to drown his helpers. At last, the dangerous stretch of water was +safely crossed, and, leaving Walter and the Captain to half float and +half carry Chris between them, the lad waded ahead, picking out the +shoalest and smoothest path to the shore. They arrived there spent and +panting and sank down for a moment to recover their breath. It was not +an inviting-looking place where they had landed. A low rock-strewn +marsh, covered with tall, rank grass stretched away before them for +two or three miles before it met the higher, heavily-wooded mainland. +Here and there the marsh was dotted with small, island-like clumps of +dark green cedar trees, and, picking up the light, little negro in his +strong, young arms, Charley headed for the nearest of these, followed +by his exhausted companions. The passage was made with difficulty; low +needle-pointed rocks strewed the way, and here and there lay pools +of soft, boggy mud, tenanted by repulsive, swollen looking moccasins. +It needed care to avoid the one without stepping on the other, but, +at last, the patch of high ground was reached and, laying his burden +beneath a wide-spreading cedar, Charley turned to his companions. + +"We have got to work quick if we are to stand a chance even of saving +him," he said, crisply. "Walter, get in to the mainland as quick as +you can and bring me all the palmetto berries you can find,--hurry. +Captain, let me take your flint and steel and then get me a lot of soft +mud from the marsh." + +Tired though they were, the two hastened away to execute his orders, +while Charley worked swiftly to carry out the plan he had formed while +coming ashore. It was a heroic one, but rough measures were the only +ones it was in his power to apply. Hastily gathering together a pile +of dead cedar limbs, he lit a fire with the flint and steel. While it +was blazing up, he stripped off his belt and, tying it above Chris' +knee, with a stick twisted it tight until it was embedded in the flesh, +shutting off the flow of blood from below to the heart. He next heated +a small stone in the now blazing fire and applied it while hot to the +swollen wound. The smell of the crisping flesh sickened him, but he +doggedly stuck to his task until he judged the wound was sufficiently +cauterized. Chris lay mercifully lost to the pain in a deep stupor. The +lad had just finished burning the wound when the Captain returned with +his jacket full of soft mud, and, emptying it out, hastened back for +another load. Charley heaped a lot of rocks upon the fire, and, as soon +as they were hot, ranged them close on each side of the wounded limb, +heaping the soft mud on top of them until he had formed an air-tight +mound over the leg. He now had a great poultice of hot mud of great +drawing power, the danger was that Chris might be attacked by other +spasms and succeed in working his leg out from the hot covering. To +prevent this, the lad tore his shirt up into strips and, binding the +little negro tightly, piled stones around the encased leg so that it +could not be easily moved. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +HUNTING HELP. + + +CHARLEY next cut off small branches of cedar and placed them under +the unconscious little fellow's head and back so that he might rest +as comfortably as possible. This done, he sat back breathless and +exhausted and waited impatiently for Walter's return. + +Captain Westfield surveyed the young physician's work with hopeful +admiration. "If Chris lives, it will be you as has saved his life," he +declared. + +"He has saved mine more than once," Charley replied, "but I am afraid +he is not going to live. I don't like this deep stupor he has fallen +into. I wish Walter would hurry." + +Walter had been hurrying as fast as he could, and he soon appeared +bearing a hatful of ripe palmetto berries. His riddled shoes and +bleeding feet told of reckless running over the sharp rocks. + +Charley smashed the ripe berries between two stones, catching the juice +in his cap. Chris' teeth were tightly set, but he managed to pry them +apart with his knife blade and forced some of the sticky liquid down +his throat. + +"I don't know whether it will help him or not, but I am in hopes it +will," he said, as, tired out, he sat down by the little fellow's side. +"Those berries make a powerful tonic and stimulant, and I believe that +is what is needed. The poison seems to have deadened the heart's action +and brought on that stupor. A few minutes will tell whether it is going +to do any good." + +It soon became evident that the rude remedies were performing their +mission well, the sufferer's pulse, which had grown slow and feeble, +quickened, and his little face began to lose some of its ashen hue. + +As soon as he became sure that a change for the better was taking +place, Charley arose from his brief rest. + +"I am going to find help," he declared. "We must get him to some place +where he can have proper attention. How far do you think we are from +Judson, Captain?" + +"Not more than twenty miles to the north of it, I judge. Maybe not more +than ten miles. But you must not dream of starting yet awhile, lad. You +must rest for a bit, an' have something to eat first." + +"And I am going with you when you start," Walter declared. "Something +might happen to you amongst those slippery rocks and awful bog holes. +The Captain can do all that can be done for Chris while you are gone." + +There was no disputing the wisdom of both suggestions and they busied +themselves with the first proposition, the finding of something to eat. +This demanded more time and trouble. Another trip had to be made down +to the water and considerable searching was necessary before they could +collect enough of crabs and shell fish to make the full meal that their +hunger craved. Their rest they gained while their dinner was roasting +in the coals. + +Their rest, meal, and Chris' steadily improving condition, put them all +in better strength and spirits, and the boys were cheerful when they +bid the old sailor good-bye and made their start in search of help. + +"We'll be back as soon as we can get back, Captain," Charley said, "but +you don't want to worry if we take longer than you expect." + +"I reckon, I'll keep too busy to have much time for worryin'," the old +sailor replied. "Jes' be careful, lads, an' get back as soon as you +can." + +He watched until the rank marsh grass hid the two lads from sight, +then busied himself with making the camp a little more comfortable for +himself and his sick companion. Chris' welfare was the first thing to +claim his attention. With his sheath knife he cut armful after armful +of marsh grass and added it to the rough couch Charley had fashioned +for the little negro, converting it into a soft, comfortable bed. +The low-hanging cedar boughs formed a kind of rude shelter over the +little lad, but the captain was not entirely satisfied with it. The +rainy season was near at hand and heavy showers might be expected at +any time. A thick layer of marsh grass placed over the lowest cedar +limbs quickly made the covering more to his satisfaction. This done, +he paused for a brief rest and to decide what should be his next task. +Although, he knew that the port of Judson could not be more than twenty +miles away, he realized that, owing to the necessarily slow traveling +amongst the sharp rocks and bog holes, it might be at least three days +before the boys could succeed in getting back with help. His duties, +then, would be the care of Chris, the providing of food for them both, +and the gathering of firewood. Water was luckily plentiful, there was +an abundance of it in a cup-like depression near the center of the +island. + +In a Northern country with no weapons but his sheath knife, these tasks +would have seemed almost impossible of accomplishment, but the captain +was not discouraged. The first thing, of course, was to see that the +little negro's marked improvement was not checked. Heating more stones +in the fire, the old sailor piled them around the mound of mud covering +the wounded leg. Then, as the berries Walter had brought were nearly +exhausted, he decided that the next thing of importance was to lay in +a fresh supply. He found the trip to the mainland slow and dangerous. +Where the way was not strewn with sharp-pointed rocks, it was dotted +with forbidding-looking sink holes of soft, slimy mud. Rank-growing +marsh grass covered the whole, making it extremely difficult to pick +out a safe passage through the dangers. At last, however, he gained +the mainland where he found the oily black berries growing in greatest +profusion. He gathered his jacket full of them and then sat down on a +fallen log to rest a minute and look around. It was an inviting spot in +which he found himself. The land rose up from the marsh to form a high, +sloping bluff through which trickled a stream of clear, reddish water. + +The bluff was covered with a dense growth of palms, satinwoods, bays, +rubber trees, and low-ground palmettos. It was an ideal place for a +camp, and the captain eyed it regretfully, wishing that it was possible +to bring Chris there from the little marsh-surrounded island. But +that was impossible until the little fellow was able to walk and he +dismissed the idea with a sigh. He was just gathering up his jacket of +berries to leave when a noise in the undergrowth close at hand made +him sink back to his seat on the log. The brushes before him parted +suddenly and a large deer stepped out into an open place not twenty +feet from where he sat. For a full two minutes, he and the timid animal +remained motionless, looking directly into each other's eyes, then the +old sailor pulled out his sheath knife and sprang for it with some +wild notion of securing it for food, but the deer leaped lightly away +a few steps and stopped again as if in deepest wonder and curiosity. +The captain sheathed his knife with a sigh. "I reckon, you don't know +how wicked men are," he addressed the graceful animal. "Guess you ain't +ever seed many men or you wouldn't be so powerful tame. Some steaks +from you would taste right good, but you ain't aiming to let me get +close enough for that. Well, good-bye, old fellow, I hope I'll meet you +again sometime when I've got a good gun." + +Saying which, the old sailor picked up his burden and headed back for +the island, the deer gazing after him in innocent-eyed wonder. + +He had nearly reached the little camp when a scream from Chris sent him +forward at a run, regardless of rocks and sink holes. + +The scene that met his gaze as he burst into the little clearing +chilled him with horror and dismay. + +Attracted, no doubt, by its warmth, two huge, swollen-looking moccasins +had crawled up on the little heap of mud and now lay with their flat, +ugly heads within a few inches of the little negro's trembling body. + +"Don't move an inch, Chris," he shouted, as he broke off a dead limb +from a cedar tree. + +The caution was useless, for, bound as he was, hand and foot, Chris +could only lay and stare in horror and helplessness. + +A couple of well-aimed blows from the stick killed the two poisonous, +sluggish serpents, and, dragging them to the edge of the island, the +captain pitched them out into the marsh. + +"They ain't very pleasant visitors," he remarked as he returned to his +helpless companion, "but I reckon, they've done you a heap of good. You +was laying like a dead man when I went ashore and now you look right +pert and lively." + +"Dey's too sudden an' powerful medicine," grumbled Chris. "Dis nigger +might jes' as well die as be scart to death. Golly! how my leg does +burn and smart. Please take dat stuff off ob hit, Massa Captain, an' +unloose my han's." + +But the old sailor feared to remove the mud poultice, dreading another +relapse. However, he untied the little negro's hands, upon his promise +that he would lie still and not move. He was delighted with the change +in the little lad. Whether the shock from the snakes, or, what was much +more probable, the continued effects of the palmetto juice had done the +work, the stupor which had frightened them all was entirely gone, and +the patient soon declared himself decidedly hungry. + +Cutting a stick and laying it within Chris' reach so that he would +have the means of protecting himself from other possible visitors, the +Captain departed in search of food. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +THE CASTAWAYS. + + +IT was lucky for the captain that he was wise to the resources of the +Florida coast. A stranger to the country would not have known where to +look for food and would likely have soon perished of hunger. Although +he had no other weapon than his sheath knife, he went about his task +with the air of a man who was confident of success. Before leaving the +island, he cut a long, straight cypress pole and sharpened one end to +a keen point. With this in his hand, he made his way down to the Gulf. +The tide was high again but there was a mass of rock some two hundred +feet from shore which protruded a couple of feet above the water. +Removing his shoes, he waded cautiously out, prodding the bottom before +him with his pole and picking his way carefully to avoid stepping on a +stingaree. + +The rock reached, he perched himself on its edge and sat peeping down +into the water which was clear as crystal. He had not long to wait. In +a few minutes a fish swam slowly past close to the rock, and, taking +careful aim, the old sailor dove his rude spear down with all his +force. Its point struck just behind the fish's head, passing entirely +through its body. It died without a struggle, and the captain lifted it +out upon the rock with a shout of triumph. It was a beautifully-specked +sea trout about three feet in length and weighed at least twelve +pounds. Although there was plenty of other fish within sight, the +trout was enough for their present needs and, scaling and washing it +carefully, the captain waded ashore with his prize. But he was not yet +quite satisfied. Laying his fish down upon a bunch of clean sea moss, +he examined carefully the muddy beach near the water's edge. Here and +there, tiny jets of water squirted up from the mud, and, where they +seemed to be most numerous, he began to dig. In a few minutes he had +unearthed a couple of dozen large clams. With these and the fish, and a +huge armful of moist sea moss in his arms, he made his way back to camp +where Chris was eagerly awaiting his return. + +"I sho' wish I could get up from hyah," mourned the little negro. +"Golly! I reckon, I'd show you how to cook dat fish so dat you nebber +could eat nuff ob hit." + +"You jes' lie still thar," commanded the captain. "I'm a Cape Cod man, +an' thar ain't any cook living that can show a Cape Cod man how to cook +this kind of grub. You just watch and learn somethin'." + +Chris watched him with professional jealousy and interest. He +firmly believed that no one on earth could cook as good as he but +he reluctantly admitted to himself that the old sailor made his +preparations with considerable promise of success. + +First, he scooped out a hole in the ground about three feet deep and +two feet square and kindled a small fire in the bottom upon which he +placed a layer of small rocks, as soon as it was going good, then, he +paused to remark regretfully, + +"I wish we had some potatoes. I never heard of a clam bake yet without +potatoes." + +"Dar's something jes' as good as 'taters," declared Chris, pointing to +a low-growing plant. "Jes' you dig up some ob dem roots an' try 'em. +Hit's wild cassava, an' hit taste jes' like Irish 'taters." + +The captain dug down with his sheath knife and unearthed several tubers +a couple of feet in length and about three inches in circumference. He +regarded them dubiously, but, on Chris' repeated assurances that they +were good and wholesome, he cut off several pieces and washed them +carefully. By the time this was done, the fire in the pit had burned +low, and the stones were smoking hot. Cutting several broad, green, +palmetto leaves, he laid them on the stones and spread over them a thin +layer of the moist sea moss. Upon the moss he laid the fish and over it +spread another layer of moss upon which he placed the clams, covering +them with more moss, upon which he placed the cassava, and, piling a +thick layer of sea grass over the whole, built a small fire on top of +it. Then he sat down and watched the fire while he and Chris waited +hungrily the slow cooking of their meal. At last, the captain declared +that it must be done. The fire on top was raked away, the contents of +the pit were taken out and placed upon green, clean palmetto leaves, +and the two castaways fell-to with appetites sharpened by their long +wait. And what a feast it was,--the clams cooked to perfection in their +own juice, the fish juicy and delicious, the cassava snow-white and +mealy and all rendered doubly delicious by the salt spicy taste of the +seaweed in which they had been cooked. And what a joy it was to feel +that the worst of their troubles were over. Chris getting better, the +boys soon to be back with help, all the worry and anxiety they had +suffered past, the next few days to see them all safely back in Tarpon, +where they would all wait in comfort and safety, ready to claim their +ship when the Greeks brought her in, and, after that, they would return +for the gold and with it they would secure the many things they had +longed for all their lives. + +Surely the prospect was bright enough to make the two lonely castaways +chatter brightly, cheerfully, and hopefully over their evening meal. +They could not see the dangers, worries, and misfortunes yet to befall +them, and it was well they could not for it would have robbed the two +of the happiest hour they had had in many days. + +At last, the feast was over and Chris had paid the cook the highest +compliment of which he could conceive. + +"Golly! Massa Capt., you cooked dem tings might nigh as good as I could +have done." + +Although there were many things which the captain wished to do, +darkness was fast coming on and he had to complete his final +preparations for the night. First, he cut a lot of small boughs which +he piled up under the shelter close to Chris to serve as his own bed. +This done, he gathered piles of wood which he spread in a circle around +the big cedar and set on fire to protect them both from chance visits +of snakes during the night. By the time this was finished, it was dark +and he crept in under the shelter close to his dusky little companion +in misfortune, and, after a short, simple prayer full of thankfulness +for their deliverance from the dangers that had threatened them, he +quickly fell into the deep sleep of total exhaustion. But sleep did not +come so readily to Chris. He had slept, or been unconscious, much of +the time since his accident and the stimulating effect of the palmetto +medicine helped to drive slumber away from him. He lay very quiet to +avoid disturbing the old sailor's rest, but, try as he would, he could +not get to sleep. At last he gave up the attempt and lay with eyes +wide open looking out at the stars and the twinkling camp-fires. From +the marsh about came strange noises of the night, the croaking of +multitudes of frogs, the cackle of marsh hens, the squawking of cranes, +and the rustling of the marsh grass in the wind. Slowly the circle of +fire died down, smouldered and went out. Only the big main camp-fire +was left a glowing mass of embers. + +Suddenly the wakeful little negro's ears caught another sound mingled +with the voices of the night,--a slow, heavy, creeping noise. For a +time he lay quiet listening, his hearing strained to the utmost to +catch the new strange sound. He waited until there was no doubt that it +was close at hand and steadily drawing nearer, then, he reached over +and shook his snoring companion. + +"Wake up, Massa Captain," he cried, "dar's some wild beast a creepin' +into de camp." + +"I hear it," agreed the captain, instantly wide awake. "Jes' lay still, +lad, an' don't be frightened. I'll stir up the fire a bit, that will +run it off." + +He arose from his couch and strode boldly for the smouldering fire. + +"Look out!" Chris yelled, suddenly, "Foah de Lawd's sake, look out!" +His keen eyes had caught a glimpse of a black shape passing between the +old sailor and the mass of glowing embers, but his warning came too +late,--the captain was upon the moving shape before he saw it. + +A swishing noise rent the air, a loud thud, the old sailor was knocked +backward several feet flat on the ground, and, with a loud, sharp +bellowing, the mysterious visitor glided away into the darkness. + +"Is you hurt? Is you hurt, Massa Cap?" cried the terror-stricken lad. + +"A little bit, a little bit," called back the old sailor, his voice +hoarse with pain. + +He came creeping back into the shelter on hands and knees. + +"It was a big bull alligator," he explained, painfully. "Must have been +twelve feet long. It caught me a fearful blow on the legs with its +tail. I hope thar ain't no bones broken but it feels as though thar +was." + +A close examination proved his fears groundless, but the terrible blow +had done all but break the bones. In spite of the pain, however, he +crawled forth again and replenished the fire, but he was faint and +giddy with pain before he succeeded in getting back into the shelter +and stretched out on his couch once more. + +"I reckon, I'll be all right by morning," he said, hopefully, "but I +don't calculate I'll be able to sleep any more to-night, my legs hurt +too bad for that. Don't make any difference though, I 'low I've had +enough sleep for one night--it can't be more than a couple of hours +'till daylight." + +It proved to be even less and with the coming of light he removed his +trousers and examined his limbs anxiously. He had indeed received a +terrible blow from the prowling monster, both legs were bruised and +swollen where the tail had struck it and it seemed a miracle that the +bones had not been broken. It caused him exquisite pain to rise upon +his feet, but there was work which had to be done, and, in spite of his +suffering, he must do it. So, hiding his pain as well as he could, he +prepared to sally forth to secure food for the day. + +But in spite of all his efforts he could not entirely hide his intense +suffering. + +"You jes' lay down an' let me go out an' find grub, Massa Cap," Chris +pleaded. "I feels jes' as well as can be again now." + +But the sturdy old sailor would not listen to his pleadings. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +ANOTHER DANGER. + + +"DAR'S one thing I want you to do 'fore you go projectin' off," said +the little negro. "I wants you to cut me some ob dem palmetto buds. +I'se goin' to braid you a hat. Hit's a plum wonder dat you ain't got +sun struck goin' bareheaded like you is." + +"I ain't had time to remember that I lost my hat when we were wrecked. +I'se been so worried an' busy," said the captain. "Now you speak of it, +my head does feel sort of dull an' heavy. I hope the boys will think to +cover their heads with something--this sun does beat down right hot." + +"Mass Charley will sho' rig up some kind ob hat," Chris declared, +confidently. "'Sides dey's both young an' can stand a heap more sun den +what you kin. You jes' be mighty careful dis mornin' an' by noon dis +nigger will hab a fine hat fixed for you. I'se done made lots ob dem on +Cat Island." + +There was a few young cabbage palms scattered over the island and +the captain cut out several of the buds with his sheath knife and +placed them beside the little negro, then, knotting up the ends of his +bandanna handkerchief to form a turban, he took his spear and started +for the shore. + +Chris watched his slow, faltering, painful steps until he was out of +sight then began on his proposed task. The buds were really young fresh +leaves yet unfolded, soft and pliable, yet very strong. He shredded +them into strips about half an inch in width until he had accumulated +quite a pile; then, taking four of the pieces at a time, with deft, +skillful fingers, he wove them into a braid about an inch in width. + +In a couple of hours, he had a string of braid several yards long. + +The fashioning of the braid into a hat, without needle and thread and +while lying flat on his back was a more difficult task, but he attacked +it with cheerful energy, using the point of his knife for a needle and +small strips of palmetto for thread. At last, his task was completed, +and, although the hat was grotesque in shape and appearance, it was +soft, strong, and light, and would prove an effective protection from +the fierce rays of the tropic sun. The little worker was not yet +satisfied but at once set about the manufacture of a basket from the +same material realizing how useful it would be for the carrying of +clams, fish, and other things. + +He was still engaged upon it when the captain came stumbling into +camp bearing a large fish and several dozen more of the clams. The +old sailor's face was red, his movement weak and uncertain, and his +breathing heavy and labored, while he was trembling violently from head +to foot. He sank down in the cedar's shade and wiped his flaming face. + +"I reckon, I've got a touch of the sun," he said, feebly. "I feel weak +and dizzy. I'll lie down in the shade for a bit an' it will pass off. +Don't be worried, lad, it will pass off in a jiffy." + +But pass off it did not. By the end of half an hour the sturdy old +seaman was lying unconscious, his breath coming in short, wheezy gasps. + +Chris watched him for a while in anxiety and fear. He knew that it +might be dangerous for him to move his wounded leg but all thought +of his own danger was lost in the fear that the stricken old sailor +was dying before his eyes. He attempted to pull his leg out from the +mound but could not move it. The heat of the stones had baked the mud +hard. With great effort he raised himself into a sitting position, +and, with his sheath knife cut and dug away frantically at the baked +mud until he had the leg uncovered, then, severing the bandage above +his knee, he attempted to rise but could not move the injured limb. He +fell back and viewed it with frightened dismay. It was not a pretty +sight for it was a mass of blisters where the hot mud had clung, and a +large bluish swelling marked the place where the stingaree's horn had +entered. The tight bandage, shutting off the blood supply for so long, +had rendered it paralyzed and useless. Although the breaking blisters +caused him exquisite pain, he fell to rubbing the numbed limb briskly +with both hands until the blood crept slowly back into the veins. At +last, he was able to gain his feet and by resting most of his weight +on his uninjured leg managed to limp over to the unconscious sailor. +Luckily, he had been raised in a torrid country where sunstrokes were +of frequent occurrence. He knew just what to do and he did it quickly +and surely. His first act was to raise the unconscious man's head and +place a high pillow of twigs beneath it. Then, stirring the smouldering +fire, he placed several large stones in the glowing coals. While they +were heating he removed the captain's shoes and bathed his hot head +and flushed face with cool water, and tearing his shirt to pieces, wet +it and bound it around the sufferer's head. By the time this was done, +the stones were hot, and, rolling a couple up in his jacket, he placed +them at the captain's feet, then, seated by his side, he awaited the +result with fear and trembling. A terrible dread gripped his heart that +the remedies had been applied too late, for the old sailor had all the +appearance of a dying man. Thirty minutes dragged slowly away without +apparent change, then, slowly, the old sailor's breathing grew less +labored and his face began to lose some of its fiery hue. Chris hailed +these favorable signs with joy as indicated that the crisis had been +safely passed, but his joy was somewhat dampened when the hours passed +by without the stricken man showing signs of consciousness. He seemed +to pass from his stupor to a deep sleep from which the little negro +dreaded awakening him. It was evident that the old seaman was in for a +long spell of weakness from the heat stroke he had suffered. There was +nothing more his little companion could do to relieve his sufferings +and he remained seated by his side watching him anxiously until the +waning of the afternoon warned him that it was time to partake of food +and make preparations for the night. He had eaten nothing since the +night before and he was conscious of a sense of growing weakness. The +fish the captain had caught was already tainted from the heat and the +little negro felt too weak as yet to venture forth to secure more, so +he dug up a few of the cassava roots which he roasted in the coals. +These, together with a handful of palmetto berries, constituted his +supper. As soon as it was finished he began his preparations for the +night. Slowly and painfully, he gathered together broken limbs to keep +the circles of fire going until daylight came again. By the time this +was accomplished and the fires lit he was weak and trembling from pain +and exhaustion and was glad to crawl onto his couch by the captain's +side. The old sailor roused into momentary wakefulness at the noise of +the snapping twigs. + +"How you is, Massa Capt.?" demanded the little negro, eagerly. + +"Weak, mighty weak. Feel as though I couldn't lift my hand to my head, +but I will be all right by morning, I reckon. I guess, we have got no +cause to worry now. The boys will be back to-night or early in the +morning at the latest. How do you feel, lad?" + +"Fine," lied the little negro, cheerfully. "Jes' you go back to sleep +again. I'll keep de fires up all right." + +With a sigh of satisfaction, the captain closed his eyes and was +soon sound asleep again, but there was no such rest for his little +companion. Twice Chris hobbled out and renewed the fires. The third +time he had to crawl forth on hands and knees. His wound was again +swelling rapidly and he could no longer bear his weight on the injured +limb. He tried vainly to sleep. The wounded leg throbbed with intense +pain which gradually crept over his whole body, making him feel sick +and faint all over. He understood the reason for his sufferings. Some +of the poison still left in his wound had, with the removal of the +tight bandages from his leg, found its way back into the blood and was +coursing through his little body poisoning as it went. + +"Golly!" he remarked, grimly, to himself, "if dem white chillens doan +get back wid help an' medicine by mornin', I reckon dis nigger ain't +agoin' to see Cat Island and his old mammy no moah. An' if Chris gits +plum helpless what's goin' to become ob Massa Captain wid no one to +tend to him. He tinks he'll be all right in de mornin' but hits goin' +to take a powerful long time for him to get real peart again." + +The long night dragged slowly away. Occasionally the little negro crept +forth and replenished the fires, the balance of the time he lay quiet +listening for cry or sound that would tell of the boys' return, but +nothing fell upon his strained hearing but the croak of frogs, the +bellowing of alligators and the strange night noises of the marsh. + +At daylight the captain awoke and attempted to rise, but, although he +was greatly improved, he was yet too weak to stand erect. + +"You jes' lie still," Chris counseled him, "dar ain't no call for you +to go projectin' around none. I'se goin' out an' git somethin' for us +to eat." + +Although it cost him intense pain, the little negro managed to walk +erect until he was out of the old sailor's sight, then he dropped down +on hands and knees and crawled painfully down to the shore. + +The touch of the cool salt water helped the throbbing pain in his leg +and he succeeded in wading out to the rocks where he was not long in +spearing a large, fat mackerel. With this, he returned to the camp, +for he did not dare in his growing weakness to search for clams or +other food. He found the old sailor asleep again, and, cleaning the +fish he broiled it over the coals. As soon as it was done he awakened +the sleeper. + +"Hyah is youah breakfas' all nice an' hot," he announced. "You want to +eat a plenty ob hit. I'se agoin' to lay down a spell. I didn't sleep +berry good last night." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +THE RELAPSE. + + +CAPTAIN WESTFIELD ate heartily of the delicious fish. Much to his +delight, he found that, except for the extreme weakness following his +heat prostration, he felt unusually well. He wisely decided not to +invite a relapse by getting up at once, and, as soon as he had finished +eating, he lay back upon his couch and quietly fell asleep again. It +was midday when he awoke feeling much better and stronger. The first +thing that met his gaze as he gained a sitting position was Chris lying +in the same position in which he had first flung himself. He called +to him several times but the little negro lay still and motionless. +Thoroughly alarmed, he crawled over and surveyed the unconscious lad. +The sight of the enormously swollen leg and a few minutes' fingering +of the dark little wrist told him what was the matter. The slow pulse +beats showed that the subtile poison, released from its confinement by +the removal of the bandage, had found its way to the plucky, loyal, +little heart. + +The captain sat down by the little fellow's side and dashed the +stinging tears from his eyes. + +"He's killed himself for me," he moaned. "If he had laid still just as +he was he would have been all right. But, God bless him, he risked his +life for a poor, old, worthless hulk like me. An' thar ain't nothing I +can do to save him now." + +Although he had but small faith that it would do any good in such a +desperate case, he hastily crushed out a cupful of juice from the +palmetto berries and forced it down Chris' throat, then, resuming his +seat by his side, he watched to see if the powerful stimulant would +have any effect. + +As the hours dragged slowly away he rejoiced to see that the lad's +condition apparently grew no worse. Encouraged, he crushed out more of +the juice and administered it at regular intervals. "I believe he's got +a good fighting chance to pull through. If the boys would only get back +with some whiskey an' drugs, now, I reckon, we could save him. I wonder +what can be keepin' them so long. They've had plenty of time to make +Judson and back." + +But the afternoon wore away without sign of the rescuers, and a new +fear crept into the old sailor's worries. Something must have happened +to the two boys. Late in the afternoon, he left Chris long enough +to hurry down to the shore in quest of fish or clams for supper. He +found the rock from which he had fished completely submerged and a +heavy surf thundering far up into the marsh. Under such conditions +it was impossible to secure fish or clams, and he returned to camp +hungry, disappointed, and with further cause for worry. The heavy surf +indicated another storm in the Gulf which might reach where they were. +If it did, it would render their position still more uncomfortable and +dangerous. A heavy blow would continue to cut off their supply of fish +and clams and would likely flood the low-lying marsh shutting them in +on their little island. If Chris had been well enough to walk, the +captain would have at once moved camp to the mainland, but that was +impossible now. By sunset his fears were in a fair way to be realized. +The wind was steadily increasing in force, and, blowing out of a clear +sky, gave promise of still greater violence. Supperless and worried, +the old sailor watched the night fall with but one thing to cheer his +drooping spirits--Chris was evidently slowly improving. Likely much of +the poison had been drawn out from his wound by the hot mud and the +balance remaining had been overcome in its paralyzing effects by the +powerful stimulant. The lad's pulse was slowly growing stronger and it +was clear that the crisis had been safely passed. + +The old sailor was too worried about the absent lads to compose himself +to sleep. Already, the surf was sending up small wavelets far into the +marsh. If the boys were returning the way they went, their journey +would be fraught with perils. + +The sky was covered with fleecy clouds but they disappeared with the +rising of the moon and by its bright light he could see far out on the +water where the huge waves broke foaming white on the outer bar. + +Suddenly he gave a shout that made Chris stir in his stupor; "The boys! +The boys!" he cried in delight. + +In the broad path of moonlight, a small schooner appeared feeling her +way through a passage in the reef under close-reefed sails. + +"They must have someone aboard that knows the reef," he mused as he +watched the little ship cautiously weaving her way in between the +dangerous rocks. + +She held steadily for the shore until she was scarce two cable lengths +from it, then, she shot up into the wind, her anchor was dropped, and +her sails lowered. + +The captain was down on the shore, heedless of the flying spray, when +the anchor hit the bottom. + +"Walt! Charley!" he roared at the top of his voice. + +There was no answer and he hailed again. + +"Ahoy! Shore!" came an answering hail from the schooner. "Who air yo' +and what do yo' want?" + +The captain was silent for a moment with disappointment. It was not the +boys after all, but any help was welcome at such a time and he made +haste to reply. + +"We're two shipwrecks in bad shape an' need help. Who are you?" + +"The Hattie Roberts, sponger, from Key West. Stan' by, an' we'll send a +boat." + +While the strangers were launching a boat, the captain had time to +observe that the schooner's decks were piled full of small boats and +that, small as she was, she carried a crew of at least thirty men. + +"An old style, pole an' hook sponger," he decided. "I didn't reckon +there was any of them left. I 'lowed the Greeks had run 'em all out of +business." + +Manned by half a dozen men, the little boat came tearing through the +waves towards the shore. Flung up by a huge roller, she grounded almost +at the captain's feet. The instant she touched bottom, her crew sprang +over the side and drew her up safely beyond the reach of the next +roller. Even by the dimmed light of the moon, the old sailor could see +that the new-comers were dark-skinned men with heavy coarse features. +He recognized them without the aid of the peculiar accent as Conchs,--a +kind of mixed race belonging to the Florida Keys. + +"Whar's yo's companion?" demanded one, who from his air of authority +was evidently the captain. + +"He's on a little island just a little ways from here. I'll have to get +one of your men to help me down with him." + +"All right, Sam here will go with yo'. Step lively, we have got to pull +out from hyar quick. There ain't as good anchorage as I 'lowed to find +behind the reef. We'll have to make foah a better harbor." + +The captain, with the sailor detailed to help him, was hurrying off on +their mission when the Conch's skippers curiosity caused him to stop +him in spite of the preciousness of time. + +"How did yo's git hyah in such a fix," he demanded. + +"Been sponging with a Greek crew. Crew mutinied. We escaped in a diving +boat. Got wrecked in the night on the reef out thar," replied Captain +Westfield, briefly. + +"Sponging with the Greeks!" snarled the Conch with an oath. "Then the +Greeks can help yo' out of yo'r fix, by all that's Holy, I won't. Hyah, +Sam, jump aboard with yo'." + +"You are not agoin' to desert us?" cried the captain in bewildered +consternation. "For the love of humanity, man, what do you mean?" + +"I mean that I won't raise a finger to help any mons who deals with +the Greeks--blast 'em," cried the Conch, fiercely. "They've ruined +us an' our people. We used to be a happy an' prosperous race a'fore +they came with their diving suits an' tramped all over the bottom of +the Gulf. Killing the little baby sponges with their iron shoes, an' +stripping the bottom clean as a Conch's floor. We've been run out of +the business, an' they did it. We've lost our homes, an' they caused +it. Our families don't have enough to eat an' wear any more, an' they +are the reason--curse 'em, curse 'em, curse 'em." + +"But you are leaving us to certain death, man!" pleaded Captain +Westfield, "The water is rising over the marsh, already." + +"An' it will be flooded inside of ten hours," declared the Conch with +cruel satisfaction. "All aboard mons an' shove off." + +Captain Westfield grasped the gunwale of the boat and tried to hold +it while he reasoned and argued with the fanatical Conch, but the +infuriated man rapped his knuckles with an oar and gave him a shove +with the blade that sent him struggling backwards. By the time the old +sailor recovered his balance, the boat had been shoved off and was out +of his reach. He shook his clenched fist at the Conch's receding figure. + +"You'll pay for this," he shouted. "No good will come to you after such +a trick." But it is doubtful if the Conch even heard his voice above +the roar of the wind. + +The captain stood watching grimly until the boat reached the +schooner's side, and her close-reefed sails were hoisted, her anchor +broke and she headed to the South inside the line of reef. When she +had faded away into the night, he turned back for the camp filled with +disappointment and dismay. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +THE FLOOD. + + +AS the old sailor made his way back to the island, he was alarmed +to see how rapidly the water was rising over the marsh. He splashed +knee-deep in the water at every step and it was easy to see that it +still continued to rise with astonishing rapidity. + +His first act on reaching the island was to move the camp to the +highest knoll of ground, already the lowest lying portions of the +island were submerged. Chris had regained consciousness though he was +still too weak to move without assistance. He watched the old sailor's +preparations with evident interest and looked at the rapidly rising +water with evident anxiety. + +"If dat water doan stop comin' up, we is sho' goin' to hab a hard time +gettin' anythin' to eat," he observed. "Can't get ober dem rock no +way when dey is covered wid water, sho' to break a leg in one ob dem +holes." + +"The Lord will watch out for us, lad," encouraged the captain. "Look +at all that He has brought us through. He has never deserted us in our +hour of need." + +"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little darkey, thoughtfully. +He remained quiet for a few minutes then said quaintly, "'Spect's we +oughter ask him to look out foah Massa Charley an' Massa Walt. I'ze +getting plum anxious 'bout dem two white chillins. Dey had oughter been +back long 'fore dis. Massa Charley's mighty clever, but I 'spect dat +it wouldn't do no harm to ax de Lawd to help him out a bit if he's in +trouble." + +"No one can do without the Lord's help, Chris," the captain said, +gravely, "an', I reckon, them lads need it powerful bad. Something +pretty serious has happened, I 'low, to keep them from coming back. +We'll ask the Good Lord to watch out for them an' protect them." + +The old sailor knelt by the little negro's side and in simple seafaring +language prayed that the Heavenly Father would watch over and protect +the missing ones. + +The simple steadfast faith of the old seaman and the trusting little +negro filled them with a sense of security and peace. They doubted not +that their humble petition would be answered and that now a Heavenly +Eye was watching over them and their absent companions and that a +Divine Hand would guide them through their trials and danger. They +stretched out on their leafy couches and went fast to sleep, while the +storm raged and howled around them and the rising water crept slowly up +on their little island. + +It was broad daylight when they awoke and looked about them. It was +a wild and terrifying scene that met their eyes. The marsh between +them and the sea was completely submerged and covered with rolling +white-caps. Far out on the reef they could see the mighty rollers +flinging their spray forty feet in the air when they struck the sunken +rocks. Of the island, none remained except the high sands and knoll +upon which was their camp. Between the island and the mainland was two +miles of swirling, foaming water. + +"Can't get to shore, no ways, now, Massa Captain," Chris observed. +"You had oughter gone in las' night when you had a chance an' left dis +nigger behind." + +"The Lord will look out for us, lad," said the old sailor cheerfully. +"I don't calculate that the water's going to rise high enough to cover +this knoll we are on an' as soon as the wind drops a bit, the boys will +be back for us with a boat. It's just a matter of being patient for a +little while. We may get a little bit hungry, but, I reckon, we can +stand that without grumbling." + +"Sho' we can," agreed Chris, bravely. "Tho' hit do seem like I was +gettin' powerful hungry already. Ain't dar none of dem cassava roots +dat we can get at?" + +A close search revealed that most of the patch of tubers was covered by +the rising water. A few plants however still showed on the little knoll +and these the captain dug at once. There was only a scant half peck of +the roots but that was better than nothing. + +The old sailor kindled a little fire and roasted all the roots in the +coals. + +"We might as well have one good full meal," he observed, "I never did +take much stock in this idea of going on short rations when grub is +scarce. I always 'lowed that one good feed would carry a man further +than a dozen pesky little ones that only tantalize the stomach." + +But the roots shrank greatly in the cooking, by the time the skins were +removed, there was but little left for the hungry castaways. They still +felt empty after their meal was finished. + +The day dragged wearily away with no sign of abatement of the storm. +The water continued to rise slowly, but so slowly that the two anxious +watchers were not without hope that the little knoll on which they +were would escape the overflow. Their position was by no means +uncomfortable. There was no rain and the weather was so warm that the +wind did not cause them to suffer any from cold. Aside from their +growing hunger and their anxiety about their missing companions, they +were quite comfortable. Chris, in fact, was in better shape than at any +time since they had been cast on shore. + +"I don' reckon dis storm can las' berry much longer," he observed, +cheerfully, when the sun went down in a perfectly clear sky. "Dar ain't +no clouds to back up de wind an' hit's bound to play out 'fore long." + +"That's just where you're wrong, lad," said the captain. "A gale from a +clear sky is the worst of all. I ain't ever seen many of them but what +I have seen were all hummers." + +The two sat looking out on the gloomy waste of waters until the moon, +now at its full, rose and lit up the wild scene about them almost as +brightly as day. At last they tired of the wild, gloomy, disheartening +scene, and, after a short prayer together, stretched out on their +couches. Chris was almost instantly asleep but the captain lay long +awake, his mind full of their helpless situation, and, of anxious +conjectures as to the fate of the two absent lads. His own position +and that of his little companion was such as to awaken his deepest +fears. So long as the storm continued, their rescue by land or Gulf +was impossible. No boat could live amongst the rocks and raging waters +which now surrounded them. His long experience told him that the storm +was likely to continue at least two days longer.--He had seen similar +gales blow for an entire week without a let up. Even after the gale +was over, it would take some little time for the waves and water to +subside. At the best, they would suffer greatly from hunger before +their rescue would be possible. But, to do the old sailor justice, his +thoughts were not so much of their own situation as of the absent lads. +He could only hope and pray that they had not started to return by +water before the breaking of the storm. + +As he lay motionless musing, his ear caught a low grating sound as of +heavy objects drawn on coarse sand. He quickly sat up on his couch and +looked around. In the bright moonlight he could see large dark objects +moving over the white sand. + +"'Gators, an' a regular drove of them," he exclaimed. "Wake up, Chris! +Wake up!" + +The little negro struggled up into a sitting position, still half +asleep. + +"What's de matter, Massa Cap?" he inquired. + +"Look at them 'gators, thar's dozens of them. We've got to have a fire +mighty quick an' stick close to it." + +Chris greeted the sight of the dark objects with a cry of joy. + +"Oh, Golly! De Good Lord's dun answered our prayers. Dem's turtles." + +The old sailor sprang to his feet and would have dashed for the nearest +object if the little negro had not restrained him. + +"You sho' scare dem all away if you do dat way," he cautioned. "Jus' +wait till dey gets to layin' an' you can walk right up on 'em." + +The huge creatures crept steadily on up the shelving knoll. Their +progress was slow and clumsy, and their lower shells dragging over the +sand had made the grinding noise the captain had heard. They crept up +to within ten feet of where the two watchers lay, then, they halted, +and, with their hind flippers began to dig deep holes in the soft sand. + +"Dey lays der eggs in dem holes an' covers dem up wid sand," Chris +explained in a whisper. "Dey each lays mighty nigh two hundred eggs. De +warm sand hatches out de little turtles." + +The two castaways waited until the great sea hens had begun to lay, +then Chris arose and walked directly for them without any attempt at +concealment. The turtles did not pay the slightest attention to his +approach. + +"We'll take dese two smallest ones," he announced. "Dey will be de +tenderest. Jus' grab de shell wid me, Massa Cap, back by de hind +flippers an' we'll flop 'em over on his back. Keep youah eyes an' mouth +shut." + +But the old sailor was too excited to heed the advice. He grabbed the +turtle's shell and heaved, then staggered back spitting and coughing +with mouth, eyes, and ears full of sand, which the creature with it's +flippers sent flying in a cloud about it. + +Chris waited until he had relieved himself of the stinging sand and +this time the captain, following his advice, kept mouth and eyes +tightly closed. A few seconds sufficed to turn the two turtles on their +backs where they lay helpless. + +There must have been at least thirty turtles in the bunch but the +castaways contented themselves with only turning the two, any more +would have been useless slaughter. Those unmolested quickly completed +their laying, covered the eggs and retreated to the water. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +THE FLOATING HATCH. + + +THE castaways lost no time in rejoicing over their good fortune. The +Captain hastily kindled a fire while Chris, with his sheath knife, +proceeded to butcher the smallest of the two turtles. Much experience +had made the little negro expert at the work and in a few minutes he +had severed the two shells and cut off several thick steaks from one +of the hind flippers. Then, squatting before the fire, each impaled a +steak on the end of a pointed stick and toasted it over the coals. + +How good the steaming juicy meat tasted to the two hungry ones. Steak +after steak was broiled and eaten before their ravenous appetites were +satisfied and they could eat no more. + +"Midnight is a sorter unusual hour for a feed," Captain Westfield +observed, "but, I reckon, we will sleep none the worse for it. I 'low, +we ain't got to lay awake none worryin' about food now. Thar's meat +enough to last us for two weeks at least." + +"An' maybe, Ole Mister Gale will blow hisself out," said Chris, +hopefully, as, yawning sleepily he stretched himself again on his couch. + +It was broad day when the castaways awoke from the heavy slumber which +had followed their hearty midnight supper. They found the gale still +blowing with undiminished violence and the sky still brightly blue. One +thing, however, gave them great satisfaction, the water had ceased to +encroach upon their little knoll. It had evidently reached its height. + +After a hearty breakfast of turtle steaks, the two proceeded at once +to dress and cure the turtles, for they well knew that under the sun's +heat the fresh meat would soon spoil. + +They had neither salt nor smoke house with which to cure it, but they +went at the task with sure confidence in the result. The meat was first +cut away from the shells and skinned, care being taken to remove every +particle of the greenish-colored fat. Then, cutting across the grain, +the meat was divided into thin strips and spread upon leaves to dry in +the hot sun. It only remained for them to protect it from the dews of +night and chance rains and a few days would see it thoroughly cured and +capable of keeping sweet and good so long as it was kept dry. + +With some hazy idea that they might be of some future use, the captain +cleaned and washed out the two, great, trough-like, upper shells of the +turtles. + +"Dat looks like a lump of wreckage out dar by de reef, Massa Cap," +Chris observed as he straightened up from his task of spreading out the +meat. "Pears like de tide is settin' hit in dis way." + +"It is a bit of wreckage or a clump of seaweed," the captain agreed +after a brief survey. "It's drifting in all right, but it's going to +miss the island by a good hundred yards." + +The two suspended work while they watched the drifting object slowly +near their island. + +"It looks like a hatch with something like a stack atop of it," he +observed to the captain as the object drew close. + +"Hit's a man or 'ooman atop ob hit," cried Chris, whose eyes were +keener than the old sailor's. "He's layin' plum still, jes' like he was +dead." + +Closer approach of the object convinced the captain that the little +negro was correct. There was beyond doubt a motionless body lying on +the low floating hatch. It was evident too that the hatch with its +burden would pass the island at a distance of at least one hundred and +fifty yards. To venture out and attempt to tow it in was to assume +a terrible risk. The water between it and the island was raging and +tossing over dozens of dangerous hidden rocks. Only the strongest +swimmer would have the slightest chance of success, and, even should he +succeed, it might be to find that he had risked his life to rescue a +corpse. But the ocean breeds in its followers a brotherhood that leads +them to deeds of quiet heroism. They never know when they may be in +need of a rescuing hand and it is seldom that one turns aside from the +rendering of service, no matter how dangerous it may be to himself. + +When the hatch with its burden was nearly abreast of the island Chris +began to strip off his clothes, but the Captain stopped him. + +"You're still too weak to attempt it, lad," he declared. "You couldn't +make it thar an' back, I reckon I can fight it out all right. I've +mighty nigh got back all my strength." + +Hastily stripping off the pants and shirt in which he was clothed, the +old sailor slipped off into the water and struck out for the wreckage +with long steady strokes, warily avoiding the foaming spots which +marked the positions of the larger rocks. The swim was not difficult +for so experienced a swimmer. The struggle would come when he attempted +to return with his burden. In a few minutes, he reached the wreckage +and, resting his hand upon the hatch gazed down at the burden it bore. +He saw a man, apparently about forty years of age, attired in rough +seaman's garb, his face bronzed and seamed from long years of exposure +to wind and weather. The stranger was lying flat on his back on the +hatch, his legs dangling over the end. A rope passed around his body +and under the wood work prevented the larger seas from washing him off +his frail support. He was unconscious and the captain reached over and +placed his ear close to his chest. He could detect a faint beating of +the heart. It was slow and feeble but still it was beating,--the man +was alive. + +Once satisfied of this fact, the old sailor quickly shifted to the end +of the hatch, and, resting one hand upon it, and striking out with the +other hand and both feet, strove to force it back to the island. He had +not accomplished half the distance with his burden when he saw that +he could not hope to succeed. The tide was slowly but surely sweeping +him in past the island direct for the mainland. Still, he battled +desperately on, swimming with all his strength. Suddenly the little +raft seemed to move forward with increased speed. + +"Take it easy, Massa Cap," sounded Chris' voice close to his elbow. "We +can make it togedder all right." The plucky little negro had been quick +to see the danger and equally quick to come to the rescue. + +Between the two, after half an hour of heartbreaking battling with +the current, they managed to shove the raft ashore, where they sank +exhausted and panting upon the sand. + +As soon as they were able to move, they unlashed the unconscious sailor +from the hatch, and, carrying him up, laid him upon the captain's +couch. The man seemed nearly dead, and for hours the two, wet, +exhausted castaways worked over him, struggling to coax the spark of +life into a flame. At last they were rewarded by seeing a tinge of +color creep into the bronzed face. At length the sailor sighed and +opened his eyes. + +"Water," he gasped, faintly. + +"Golly! I should reckon he's had 'bout enough water," Chris exclaimed. + +"Get some for him quick," Captain Westfield commanded. "The salt brine +he has swallowed has parched his throat and stomach." + +The sailor took only one mouthful of the proffered water, then spat it +out with his face twitching. + +"Salt, salt," he murmured. + +A horrible fear seized the captain. He snatched the shell from Chris' +hand and took a swallow of the water. His fear was confirmed, it was +salt. The Gulf had risen close enough to their little well to percolate +through the sand into it and render it as salt as itself. + +The little negro divined the situation from the captain's face. "Golly! +dat's bad," he cried. "Doin' widout water is a heap wurser den doin' +widout food." + +"Water, give me water," pleaded the rescued man. "My throat's parched, +parched." + +"You shall have some water as soon as we can get it," Captain Westfield +assured him. There was something vaguely familiar to the old sailor in +the man's queerly accented speech. It was more puzzling as he had no +recollection of ever having seen the man before. + +Considering his low condition the sailor recovered his full senses +and a measure of his strength with astonishing rapidity. It was plain +that he had not been deprived of either food or water for any great +length of time. He was soon able to sit up and take notice of his +surroundings. A curious look stole over his bronzed face as his gaze +took in the two castaways. + +"How did I get hyah?" he demanded. + +Captain Westfield related the story of the rescue briefly. + +The sailor's rough features worked with emotion. "I remember part," he +cried. "Our vessel struck on Needle Rocks in the darkness an' went down +like a stone. I had just time to throw myself on the hatch an' pass +a rope around my waist. The crew," he shuddered--"must have all been +dashed to pieces against the rocks. God knows how I escaped. An' yo' +risked yo'r lives to save mine, yo' an' that boy. Mon, how could yo' +forgive me enough to do such a deed?" + +"Forgive you?" echoed the captain, puzzled. "I had nothin' to forgive." + +"I am Rufus Sanders, the Key West sponger who refused yo'r appeals for +help an' left yo' to yo'r fate," cried the man, excitedly. + +"I did not know that, but it would have made no difference," said the +captain, gently. "You were a helpless, shipwrecked man." He checked the +flood of thanks on the sponger captain's lips. "You have nothing to +thank us for," he declared. "We have only saved you from one fate to +suffer a worse with us. We are hopelessly imprisoned on this island, +an' we have no water. All we can do is endure, pray an' hope." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +WITH THE BOYS. + + +CONSIDERING the misfortunes which had befallen them, the two chums +were in surprisingly good spirits, as they picked their way through +the marsh, headed South. It was a relief to be free from the dread and +apprehension under which they had labored for so many days. + +"I feel almost as though we were on a picnic, instead of being +shipwrecked sailors who have been robbed of their ship, and have lost +all except the clothes on their backs," Charley declared. + +"Everything is going to turn out all right after all," agreed Walter, +hopefully. "Chris is going to get over his wound all right. He and the +captain will have no trouble in getting plenty of food and water. We +had ought to reach Judson by dark, and we'll get a boat or wagon and +return for them at once. We can easily get from Judson to Tarpon, and +there we can get the United States Commissioner to take up our case, +and the minute the 'Beauty' enters port she will be seized and held +for us. At the worst it will only mean the loss of our diving boat and +a little patient waiting. And think of the store of gold which will be +ours for a little work." + +But his chum was not quite so optimistic. "I do not think that we had +better build too great hopes on recovering either our ship or the +gold," he observed. "That Manuel is a clever rascal. I fear he will +rise to the occasion. He may think that we are wrecked in the storm +but I am convinced he will take no chances. He will plan and scheme to +the last to secure the ship and money and save his own neck from the +halter. He may be caught at last but he will not sail boldly into any +port. He's too wary for that." + +His words did not dampen Walter's high spirits. "There is a revenue +cutter at Tarpon," reminded his chum. "As soon as we get to Judson, we +will telegraph to the Commissioner. He will not wait for the 'Beauty' +to touch a port if we can put our case strong enough. He will start the +cutter out in search of her at once." + +"I hope you are right. If we are going to make Judson before dark, +however, we are going to have to travel faster than we are going now. +It's slow going amongst this mud and rock. Let us make our way inshore +and see if it's any better traveling there." + +But as they approached close to the mainland they saw that there was +no hopes of easier traveling in that direction. The dense hammock +jungle extended down to the edge of the marsh. To make one's way +through it would be far slower than to continue over the marsh. They, +accordingly, retraced their steps to the water's edge. It was slightly +easier traveling close to the water. The waves had beat down the marsh +grass along the edge leaving a kind of beach of rock and mud. It was +hard and dangerous walking but safer than over the marsh itself, where +the rank growth hid the treacherous bog holes. + +The boys often paused in their march to examine the masses of stuff +that had been cast up by the waves. The squall of the night before had +robbed the bottom of great masses of seaweed and had taken heavy toll +of the life in the water. Every few minutes the lads would pass great +clumps of seaweed tangled together in beautiful rainbows of bright +scarlets, yellows, crimsons and purples. Curiously enough, the storm +had dealt very harshly with the finny tribe. Likely many of the fish +had been caught in shoal water and their lives beaten out against the +cruel rocks. They dotted the shore and the chums frequently halted to +admire one's curious shape or coloring. + +"I wonder what kind this one is?" said Walter, pointing to a long slim +fish of a beautiful brilliant green. + +"That is a parrot fish," his chum enlightened him. "I think they are +one of the most beautiful fishes that swim. They are of all colors, +some are violet, some of golden, some scarlet, and in fact, they are +found of every shade and hue. They get their names from their many +brilliant colors, I guess." + +"What a wonderful mysterious thing the sea is," Walter commented. "I +never realized before how much of strange life it contains." + +"What we see along the beach this morning is only a very small sample +of its population," his chum replied. "Sometimes, I think that all +life must have come first from the sea. There is hardly an animal on +land which has not a grotesque likeness in some creature of the sea. +Take that fish there with the peculiarly shaped head and horns. Its +resemblance to a cow is so striking that it has been named the cow +fish. There is another little fish with a head just like a horse. It is +called the sea horse. Then there is the toad fish, the frog fish, the +snake fish, and hundreds of others closely resembling the animals after +which they are named. But here," he concluded, "is, in my opinion, the +most wonderful fish I have ever heard of. I have seen many of them but +one always has a puzzling fascination to me." + +He had stopped before a flat round-shaped fish which lay stranded +in the edge of the water. It was still alive and struggling feebly +to get back into deeper water. It was of a light-tan color and was +covered with spots of darker hue. On its upper surface was a soft, +spongy-looking, circular spot It was not a pretty looking object and +Walter viewed it with disgust. + +"I don't see anything fascinating about it," he commented. + +"Just put your finger on that soft spongy place," Charley directed, +"that's where it's wonderful secret is concealed. It is not poisonous," +he added as his chum hesitated. + +Walter bent down and pressed his finger against the spongy mass. The +next instant he leaped back with a cry of alarm, shaking his arm madly. +"Jerusalem!" he exclaimed. "What is it?" + +"Got a shock did you?" laughed his chum. "That's an electrical fish. +Their mystery to me lies in where they get the electricity with which +they are charged. Even a small one like that contains enough to give a +powerful shock." + +The morning had been advancing rapidly as they walked and talked and +the sun was shining down hot on their bare heads. Charley, justifying +Chris' confidence in him, was quick to recognize the danger from its +torrid rays. + +He cast a look up at the sun. "It is nearly noon," he declared. "We +must get something to cover our heads with and then find something to +eat. I am getting as hungry as a wolf." + +There was nothing along the rocky, muddy beach that would do for hats +and the two bent their steps in towards the mainland. There, they broke +off small leafy branches and thrust the stems down the backs of their +shirts so that the leaves would tower above, and shade their heads. +These made only a poor substitute for hats, but shed off the fiercest +rays of the sun. + +Close to where they broke off the boughs was a small running stream and +the boys drank thankfully of its cold sweet water. + +"We have no time to waste in cooking and I fear our bill-o-fare for +dinner will be rather scanty," Charley said. "Let's look around here +and see if we cannot find fruit of some kind." + +There were palmetto berries in plenty all along the high bank but the +lads had no desire to partake of them except in a case of necessity. +Seeing nothing promising along the edge of the jungle, they scrambled +up the bank and made their way slowly and cautiously into the hammock, +keeping a wary eye out for snakes. They found fruit of several kinds +in abundance, but most of it Charley rejected as being poisonous, or +not fit to eat. They gathered two kinds which he declared were both +palatable and nourishing. One was a golden-red fruit about the size of +a pear. It contained a large nut to which the meat clung closely. One +bite into it and the boys' hands and faces were smeared with sticky +juice. "I would recognize that smeary juice and strong turpentine +flavor, anywhere," laughed Walter, "these are mangoes, the fruit, they +say, you have got to get into a bath-tub to eat if you want to keep +clean." + +The second fruit was about the size of a large plum and snow white in +color with a blotch of red on the sides. Its meat was sweet, milky and +slightly puckering. + +"They are cocoa-plums," Charley explained. "They are considered quite +nutritious but I would be afraid to eat a great many of them at a time +on account of their puckerishness. We can eat all we want to of the +mangoes however, they will not hurt us." + +As soon as their repast was finished the boys filled their pockets with +mangoes and cocoa-plums and hastened back to the shore. + +They plodded steadily along while the afternoon wore away, but their +progress over the rocks and mud was slow and they realized that they +would not be able to reach Judson before darkness rendered further +traveling dangerous. + +They were passing a matted clump of seaweed on the shore when Charley, +stopping with a cry of delight, fished out from its midst a round piece +of wood about four feet in length, from which trailed a long, light +line badly frayed in places by the rock. + +"Do you recognize this?" he shouted. + +"No," replied his chum in wonder at his excitement. + +"It's the buoy that marked the place where the gold ship lay. The +Greeks will have a job to locate the gold now. That storm must have +chafed the rope in two against a ledge of coral. Hurrah, hurrah." + +"I don't see but that is as bad news for us as for the Greeks," Walter +said, dubiously. + +"It is, in a way," his chum replied. "Of course it will make it harder +for us to find the exact spot where the treasure lays, but the Greeks +will be delayed by it and that will give us a chance to get there with +the revenue cutter and catch them before they get all the gold removed +and get away." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +THE JOURNEY. + + +IT still lacked about an hour to sundown when Charley called a halt. +"We cannot possibly make Judson before night, and it would be sheer +foolishness to try to travel over these rocks after it gets dark," he +declared. "We would be sure to get some bad falls and very likely break +an arm or leg. The best thing we can do is to find a good place to camp +while it is still light and make ourselves as snug as possible for the +night." + +Walter, who was beginning to feel tired out from the long day's tramp, +was quick to agree with his proposal and the two lads headed in for the +mainland, for neither felt any desire to spend the night on the wet, +muddy marsh. + +Good fortune seemed to guide their footsteps for they struck the +mainland just where a little stream of clear water bubbled forth +amongst a clump of towering cedars. + +"The very place for our camp," Charley exclaimed. "You see what you can +fix up in the way of a shelter, Walt, while I look around and see what +I can find for our supper." + +Walter was fast becoming an adept at the science of woodcraft and he +went about his task with certainty and dispatch. First, he broke off +armsful of small boughs which he spread in two piles upon the ground +close to the trunks of two big cedar trees. These were to serve as +their couches and over them he proceeded to erect a rough lean-to to +protect them from the wind and dew. There were plenty of dead boughs +all around, and, selecting two of the longest and straightest, he +leaned them against the trunk of the two trees about six feet from the +ground, embedding their other ends firmly in the ground. Across these, +he laid other limbs a couple of feet apart and upon them piled palmetto +leaves and boughs to form a roof. Before the open front of the rude +structure, he built a roaring fire of dead cedar limbs. Close beside it +he piled up a huge heap of wood with which to keep the fire replenished +throughout the night. This completed his labors, and stretching himself +upon his springy, fragrant couch before the crackling fire, he waited +hungrily for his chum's return. He was becoming alarmed over his long +absence when there came a crackling of boughs and Charley strode into +the circle of firelight, bearing in one hand a snow-white heart, or +bud, of a cabbage palmetto and in the other, a chunk of fresh meat +several pounds in weight. + +"What have you got there?" he inquired, eagerly. + +Charley grinned, "I'm too hungry to stop and tell you now. Sharpen up a +couple of sticks and we'll broil some steaks, then, I'll give you three +guesses as to what it is, and bet that you don't guess right." + +Walter hastily cut two long green palmetto stems and sharpened them +to points at the ends. By the time he had them ready, Charley had cut +a couple of generous-sized steaks from the hunk of meat. The balance +of it he wrapped up in a couple of green palmetto leaves and buried +in the coals. While the steaks impaled upon the sticks were sizzling +appetizingly before the fire, he wrapped up the palmetto heart in green +leaves and buried it beside the roasting meat. + +So hungry was Walter that he cut bits from his steak before it was +fairly done and devoured them with eager appetite. + +"Like it?" inquired his chum with a twinkle in his eye. + +"Fine, it only needs a little salt to make it perfect," Walter +declared. "I can't quite place it though. It tastes like a cross +between pork and beefsteak. What is it anyway?" + +"Guess." + +"Pork?" + +"Nit." + +"Coon?" + +"Nit." + +"Opossum?" + +"Nit." + +"I give it up then. What kind of animal is it?" + +"I found it on the bank of a little creek not far from here," said +Charley, dreamily. "It was sound asleep and it did not look very pretty +or innocent even in its slumber, but beggars can't be choosers, so I +got me a good heavy club and crept up on it softly. When it woke up +I was near enough to give it a good rap over the head. It gave me a +couple of good licks in the shins with its tail, however, before I got +it killed." + +Walter rose in his indignation, "Why didn't you tell me at the start +that it was alligator meat," he demanded, "I would not have eaten a +mouthful of it." + +"And you'd gone hungry to bed," said his chum with a chuckle. "You'd +have let your prejudice cheat you out of a good meal. It tastes all +right, don't it." + +"Yes," Walter admitted, ruefully, "and, now that I've eaten some of it, +I might as well keep right on eating." + +"Wise lad," Charley approved. "Let me tell you there are lots worse +things than alligator steaks when one is hungry." + +The steaks disposed of, the boys attacked the roasted meat and +palmetto cabbage with such vigorous appetites that there was but little +left when their hunger was at last appeased. + +"Pretty slim show for breakfast," said Charley, ruefully, as he eyed +the scanty remains. "Let's see if we can't fix up some way to catch +something during the night." + +The plan which they finally decided upon to accomplish this was very +simple. With their sharp knives, they whittled out several sets of +figure-four setters, and, dragging several small logs just outside the +circle of firelight, they placed a figure-four setter under an end of +each and baited the triggers with bits of meat left from their supper. +An animal nosing around after the bait would be sure to spring the +setter and cause the log to descend upon it. + +"We will surely get a coon or opossum before morning," Charley +declared. "Animals have lots of curiosity and some of them are sure to +be attracted by the light of our camp-fire. The smell of the cooked +meat will attract them also." + +This last task completed, the boys stretched themselves on their soft +couches before the cheery fire whose rays danced and flickered amongst +the leafy greenness of their shelter. It was a cozy, cheery little +camp and the two lads lay long awake, talking hopefully with the +cheery optimism that waits upon a hearty supper and healthy vigorous +youth. When at last they fell asleep, it was with confident hope of a +successful morrow. + +It seemed to Walter that he had barely fallen asleep when he was +struggling in that nightmare state which lies halfway between slumber +and entire wakefulness. He struggled pantingly for breath, but every +breath he drew seemed to stifle him. Oppressed with black horror, he +fought his way back to consciousness. But wakefulness brought small +relief. The air was heavy with a stench that nauseated and sickened him. + +Charley, crouched beside the fire, was holding his nose with one hand, +his face expressing unutterable disgust. + +"What in the world is the matter?" Walter demanded. + +"One of our traps worked," announced his chum, grimly. "It's only a +little skunk, but my, what a big smell." + +"I should say so," Walter agreed. "We can't stay here. We'll have to +move camp." + +"I second the motion to adjourn," said his chum, solemnly. + +No time was lost in debating the question and the lads quickly took +their departure from their cozy camp. They made their way cautiously +along the edge of the hammock until the raucous odor was left behind, +then they halted and built another fire. + +"The measly little varmint," said Walter, wrathfully, as they crouched +beside the blaze. "He's gone and cheated us out of a good night's +sleep." + +"Oh, it isn't as bad as all that," said his chum, cheerfully. "It's +nearly morning now. See, there's the morning star in the East. +Besides," he added, whimsically, "That poor little fellow isn't to +blame. He didn't ask us to set a trap for him. I bet he regrets the +accident as much as we do." Then throwing back his head he sang in his +clear tenor voice, "Driven From Home." + +As the humor of the incident dawned upon Walter, he burst into laughter +in which he was joined by his fun-loving chum. + +It was too near morning to consider selecting another shelter so the +two sat beside the fire until day broke, then they made their way back +to the camp to examine their traps. All were sprung, but, outside of +the skunk, the only victims were an opossum and a coon which they bore +back to their new fire. The opossum they broiled and ate for breakfast +while the coon they roasted to carry along with them for dinner. + +Sunrise found them once more on the march headed South. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +JUDSON.[A] + + +BY noon the two lads estimated that they must have come at least twenty +miles from where they had left the captain and Chris, and, if the old +sailor had been right in his reckoning, they could not be far from +their objective point, the town of Judson. They began now to keep a +sharp watch ahead and ere long were rewarded by the sight of a low +black line projecting out from the marsh ahead. A closer approach +resolved the low black line into a long, shaky, decrepit wharf, its +piling rotting from age and neglect and its timbers and planking fast +falling into decay. On the mainland back of the marsh a few rude +cabins, each at least a half a mile distant from its nearest neighbor, +rose from the middles of wide neglected fields. One lone, aged sloop +rode at anchor near the wharf. The little port and the hamlet itself +seemed to wear an air of deadly decay, sadness and gloom. + +"Not a very cheerful or prosperous-looking place," Charley observed as +they clambered up on the wharf and made their way ashore over its shaky +timbers. + +"No," his chum agreed, "but I am thankful to reach it, poor as it is. +My feet are getting sore from tramping over these rocks, I can tell +you." + +At the shore end of the dock the two paused long enough to take a more +careful survey of the place. + +"I declare it looks as though it was deserted or all the inhabitants +dead," Walter said nervously, "See how the roads are all grown up with +weeds as though they were never used. There is no sign of anyone about +either." + +"Just notice those cabins," his chum exclaimed, "They look just +like the pictures I have seen of houses the first settlers used to +build during the Indian times. They are built of great logs and have +loopholes like the forts of those days. What a queer place!" + +"Well, there's smoke coming from the chimney of that nearest cabin, and +there seems to be someone working out in the field by it," said Walter +with a sigh of relief. "I was beginning to think it was an abandoned +village." + +The two bent their steps towards the cabin indicated. It was set in +a square clearing of about twenty acres, that was surrounded by a +strip of pine woods which separated it from its nearest neighbor. As +they drew nearer, they could see a man at work near the cabin. He was +ploughing up the ground with a rude plow hitched to a yoke of oxen. + +As the boys stepped out of the road into the clearing, they were +greeted by savage barks, and a pack of dogs lolling around the cabin +woke into sudden life and came tearing towards them. + +The man at the plough let go the handles and sprang into the cabin. The +next minute a rifle barrel protruded from one of the loopholes, "Halt +right where you-all is," called a voice from behind the rifle. + +"Call off your dogs," shouted Charley, as he and Walter, snatching up a +couple of sticks, endeavored to keep the growling, snapping curs at bay. + +"Who are you-alls an' what do you want?" demanded the holder of the +rifle. + +"We were shipwrecked twenty-five miles up the coast. We want supplies +and help to bring in two companions, one of whom is badly hurt," +answered Charley. + +"Come closer an' let me have a good look at you-all," commanded the +cabin's occupant, "Here yu Bet, yu Tige, yu Jim, be still thar," he +called to the snarling pack which slunk growling away at his harsh +commands. + +The boys drew near the cabin in obedience to his order. A brief survey +of them seemed to convince its owner that they were not what he feared. +The cabin door was flung open, and, rifle in hand, he appeared in the +doorway. + +"Come in you-alls an' have a cheer," he invited. "I'll jis' unhitch +them oxen an' then, while I'm rustling up a bit of supper, you-alls can +give me your story." + +The tired, hungry boys accepted his invitation with alacrity, and, +while he was busy unharnessing the yoke of steers, they seated +themselves in a couple of rude home-made chairs, and gazed curiously +about them. + +The cabin was about twenty feet square. Its rough log walls were +whitewashed, and its pine-slab floor spotlessly clean. At one end +was a big old-fashioned fireplace from the rafters above which hung +home-cured hams, slabs of bacon, and strings of sausages. A barrel +in a corner was heaped high with huge, sweet, sugary yams. Several +boxes beside it were heaped with onions, cabbages, carrots, pumpkins, +and other vegetables. In another corner stood a barrel of home-ground +corn meal and a big hogshead of water. Taken all in all, the little +cabin's interior was a sight to fill the two hungry lads with satisfied +anticipation. They had hardly completed their survey of it when their +strange host entered latching and bolting the heavy door behind him. + +He was a man about forty years of age, strongly built, but sallow +with the sallowness of the native Floridian. His face was kindly in +expression but stamped on its every line was a look of uneasiness and +apprehension. It was not an expression of fear but rather the look of +a brave man who was simply on his guard every moment against expected +dangers. + +"I sho' have got to ask you-all to excuse me fur the way I dun greeted +you," he apologized, "but, you see, strangers are mighty scarse around +hyar an' one has to be plum' careful. I'se powerful glad to see a new +face though--it's been mighty nigh two years since I had talk with a +stranger. I reckon, you-alls must be some hungry. I'll rustle up a +little supper while you-all gives me your tale." + +With a deftness that indicated long batching experience, he cut great +slices of ham and placed them to broil over the coals, mixed a pone +of corn bread and put it to bake in a Dutch oven, and buried a dozen +big yams to roast among the embers. While he was thus engaged, Charley +related the story of their voyage and shipwreck omitting only any +mention of the gold. His story was frequently interrupted by his host's +exclamations, "I swan, an' dew tell." When the lad had finished, the +stranger beamed upon him with evident pleasure. "I swan, hit's jis' +like a novel I read once," he declared, "hit was writ by a fellow +called Russell, Clark Russell, if I don't disremember his name. I don't +reckon his story was true though. I 'lows he just made it up outer his +head--but the vittals is ready now, you-alls jis' back up to the table +thar an' helps yourselves." + +The hungry boys needed no second invitation but fell to work on the +tender juicy ham and sugary yams with hearty appetites while their host +as he ate, watched them with evident pleasure at their enjoyment. When +all had finished, he put away the dishes, filled his corn-cob pipe, and +leaned back in his chair against the wall. + +"You-alls can't go back to whar yu left the captain an' the little +nigger to-night, noways," he observed. + +"No," Charley agreed, "but we would like to start back early in the +morning if we can get a wagon or a boat." + +"Thar ain't no fitten road for a wagon leading up the coast," observed +their host. "I owns that little sloop anchored down thar by the dock. I +reckon, you-alls could make out with her. I don't reckon them Wrights +would stop you-alls from going if they understood jis' how things +stood. I don't 'low they would be so pesky pisen mean as all that. +I'd like to go with you-alls an' see that ole captain an' that little +nigger, I sho' would." + +"We would like to have you go with us," said Walter, eagerly. "Why +can't you?" + +"'Cause I don't ever expect to leave this hyar cabin alive," said his +host, calmly. + +The boys stared at him in uneasy astonishment. + +"No, I ain't crazy," said the man quietly. "Hush, jis' lis'en' a bit." + +A long prolonged growl came from one of the dogs outside. The man arose +and taking up his rifle stepped over to the loophole beckoning to the +lads to follow. The moon lit up the little clearing almost as light as +day. The dogs were moving around outside, sniffing and uttering low +growls. + +The boys could see nothing unusual in the clearing but they felt a +sense of danger in the very air. Their host's eyes, more accustomed to +the surroundings than their own, evidently detected something ominous +in one of the shadows thrown out from the belt of pines. He thrust +the barrel of his rifle out through the loophole and the next instant +its sharp crack rent the stillness of the night. The lurking shadow +vanished amongst the pines with a whoop of defiance. + +Their host pulled in his rifle, "A plum' miss," he said, disgustedly, +"Wall, the war is on for fair now. Better outen that light an' draw +your cheers up by the fire an' I'll tell you'alls about hit." + +FOOTNOTE: + +[A] This account of Judson is the description of a little West Florida +town as it actually has been, and is to-day. Nineteen of its scanty +population have died by a fierce war. The author has only changed the +first letter of the town's real name. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +THE FEUD. + + +"THAR ain't no call to keep watch at the loopholes," said their host +as the alarmed lads' glances kept wandering towards the dark openings. +"The dogs will tell we-alls if anyone tries to come near the cabin." He +leaned back in his chair in silence for a few minutes gazing into the +heart of the fire whose flickering rays lit up his bronzed, thoughtful, +kindly face. + +"Hit all began years ago when I warn't but a little bit of a shaver," +he began, quietly. "Judson was a right-prosperous, happy, contented, +little place, then. Thar was mighty nigh a hundred people living in +the town, an' in the woods nigh about hyar. Each family had hit's own +little cabin an' farm an' raised all hit's own living of meat, corn, +taters, an' sugar cane, an' each family had hit's patch of cotton +with which they bought what things they needed that they didn't raise +themselves. We had a right tidy little schoolhouse. I went to hit two +terms when I was a little shaver," he said with evident pride, "an' +I learned how to read an' write pretty well--the reading's been a +heap of company to me during the years since then. Each family had a +plenty to eat an' wear, an' thar warn't none that you could call real +poor people like I hearn tell you-alls have in the North. We used to +have dances and barbecues, an' picnics an' a right sociable time. The +town was started by two families, the Turners an' the Wrights--I'm +a Turner,--an' all the people about was kin to one or the other +family, which made everybody friendly and sociable with each other. +Hit was jis' a little Eden on earth, this place, 'till the serpent +came twisting an' crawlin' in. The devil must have sho' had a hand in +making some of the men folks believe that the Good Lord intended the +honest corn they raised for anything but food for man an' beast. Yes, +I reckon, hit sho' must have been ole Satan that made a few of the +Turners an' Wrights get together an' start a little whiskey still over +thar in the woods yonder. The womin folks was again hit from the start, +as, bless their hearts, they've always been again the cursed stuff. Hit +was Christmas week that the still was started goin', an' Christmas Eve +the ones running hit gave a big barbecue at the still to celebrate it. +Most everyone went, as they always did to doin's in the neighborhood. +Even my daddy an' two brothers, Ben an' Abe, went to see the fun as +they called hit, but mammy she was a good, religious woman, she staid +at home an' kept me with her. She would have liked to keep the other +boys with her too, but they had grown out of her control as boys +sometimes do." His bronzed face grew sadly thoughtful, as he continued, +"I recollect, I cried because I couldn't go too, but mother sang to me +an' tole me stories--mother was a powerful hand at telling the kind of +stories boys like an' I soon quit cryin' an' went to sleep quiet an' +happy with mother singing to me. Hit was the last time I ever heard +mammy sing. I reckon hit was 'bout midnight when a noise woke me up. +The door had been flung open--hit was never locked in them days--an' +father an' Abe came rushin' in. Father's face was white as a sheet +an' I'll never forget the look on mammy's face. Hit seemed as if she +knowed without a word from daddy what had happened. Thar was a curious +tremble in her voice as she asked, 'Whar's Ben?' At the sound of her +voice father broke down an' sobbed like a child. 'He's dead,' he cried. +'They've killed my boy Ben. Those Wrights have killed my boy Ben.'" + +The man paused as the recollection of that terrible scene crowded his +mind, while the two lads looked at each other with sympathetic horror. + +"No one seemed to know just how the trouble started," went on their +host, quietly. "All hands had taken a little too much liquor, there had +been a few hot words, a blow, an' Ben had keeled over with a knife in +his side. Then the fightin' started between the kin of both families, +an' daddy an' Abe had run home to git their guns. Sore at heart as +mammy was, she begged 'em not to shed no more blood but to leave it +to the cotes, for mammy, as I have said, was a religious woman. But +both Wrights and Turners came first from the mountains of Kentucky +whar man don't go to law again' man but settles his quarrels with his +rifle, An' so the blood-feud began. Thar was more than Ben killed that +night,--Wrights as well as Turners. When all had sobered up from the +liquor thar came a kind of lull or truce, but war always bruk out again +when either families got to drinkin'. They got Abe the followin' year, +but not 'fore he had shot a couple of Wrights. Hit was three years +afore they got father. Mother, she pined away an' died soon after they +got him. I think she was kinder glad to go, such things are wearin' on +a woman. An' so the killin's been goin' on ever since by spells when +the liquor gets to flowin'. I am the only Turner alive, now, though +thar's a few of my kin still scattered around hyar. I've been shot at +a powerful lot of times, but, I reckon, I've been lucky. Then too, +they ain't none of them hunted me so powerful hard, for I ain't took +no part in any of the killin's. I've shot a couple of times to scare +them away but not to kill. My own kin 'lows that I'm poor-spirited, but +somehow or other, I can't forget the look on mammy's face the night +Ben was killed. I don't want to be the cause of puttin' no such look +on any woman's face. I've knowed all these years though that my time +must come sooner or later. I heard to-day that the Wrights have got in +a lot of liquor from Tarpon Springs an' they are sayin' that the last +Turner has got to be wiped out of Judson. So, I got me in a store of +water an' grub an' fixed to lay low for awhile. I may be able to hold +out until their liquor is gone an' the danger is past, but I reckon hit +doan' make so powerful much of difference. They air plum' sho' to get +me sooner or later. Wall, that's the story, young fellows, hit's been +a right smart relief to have someone sympathetic to tell hit to. Don't +you worry none though. As soon as comes mornin' I'll hist a flag of +truce an' arrange to have you fellows let out peaceful. You can take +my boat an' go after your captain an' that little nigger, but I sho' +advise you not to stop hyar on youah way back. Keep right on to Tarpon +Springs. Some of my kin folks kin bring the sloop back from thar." + +"You are very good," Charley exclaimed. "But tell me why you have never +left this awful place. There are hundreds of places where you could +have made as good a living and been free from dread and worry." + +"Mammy's grave is out thar among them pines," said the man, simply, +"an' daddy's, an' Ben's, an' Abe's, then, atter all, this place is +home, no other place could be that." + +"I see," said Charley, much abashed. + +"I am proud to have met you, Mr. Turner," declared Walter, warmly. "I +think you are a noble man." + +"No? I sho' reckon you is mistaken," said the man in surprise. "Me +noble? I reckon not. My own kin 'lows I'm mighty poor-spirited 'cause I +won't take no hand in the killin'." + +"I don't care a cent what your kin says," began Walter, hotly, but he +was interrupted by the crack of a rifle, the whistle of a bullet, and +the howl of a dog outside. + +His host winced as if the bullet had struck his own body. "They've +killed Bet," he cried. "Bet, what I raised from a little bit of puppy. +They hadn't ought to go an' shoot a poor defenceless, dumb animal, hit +ain't right. My God, be they goin' to kill all my poor faithful dawgs," +he cried, as another shot rang out followed by another pitiless howl. + +Rifle shot followed rifle shot while the man stood trembling with eyes +flashing as he listened to the whining of the animals outside. At last, +heedless of the bullets pattering against the logs, he flung the door +wide open and called to the hounds. They came crowding in, a whining, +mangy, ill-looking pack, but disreputable as they were, they had been +the man's only friends through his lonely years and the two lads +respected him for his act. + +As soon as he had bolted the door again, he rummaged in a corner and +brought out three rifles. He handed one to each of the boys. "I reckon, +we'll have to watch at the loopholes now the dawgs air inside," he said +quietly. "You-alls can take the ones at the ends, I'll tend to the +sides. Be right careful 'bout standin' in front of 'em, a bullet might +pass through. An' don't shoot to kill if you can help it." + +"An' his kin people call that man poor-spirited," whispered Walter in +wonder to his chum as they took up their positions. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + +BESIEGED. + + +THE boys had little opportunity for conversation in their new role as +guards, being separated from each other by the length of the cabin. +Strange as was the position in which they found themselves, they felt +but little fear. The massive logs of which the cabin was constructed +bid defiance to the entry of a bullet, and neither of them could +believe that the affair would amount to more than a few shots being +fired at the building while the attacking party was under the influence +of the liquor they had drank. They believed that with the coming of +day the feudalists would disband and retire to their homes, while they +would be free to return to the rescue of their friends on the island. +Nevertheless, they were not going to take any chances in the duties as +sentinels. They stood well to one side of their loopholes and peeped +out at the little clearing plainly visible in the bright moonlight. + +"I reckon they can't see to shot through the loopholes, but you-alls +want to keep youah bodies out of line with them," cautioned Mr. Turner. +"Hit mought be that a stray bullet would pass through one of them. An' +don't either of you young fellows fire 'less you jes' have to. You +doan't want to get mixed up in this hyar quarrel. If yu' jis' naturally +have to shoot, aim low an' give it to 'em in the laigs." + +"There seems to be several of them gathering together at the edge of +the woods," called Charley anxiously. "Here they come straight for the +house!" + +His host darted to his side. "They've got a long pole an' air aiming to +batter down the door," he announced. "Keep back, boys, an' let me do +the talking an' shootin', if thar's got to be any." + +But the boys crowded close to his side, eager to view the coming +attack. + +There were about a dozen men in the approaching party and they advanced +at a rapid trot, bearing between them a huge pine log. + +"Halt whar you air," commanded Turner when they had approached to +within sixty feet of the house. "If you-alls come any closer meanin' +trouble, someone is goin' to get hurt." + +There were enough of timid spirits in the party to cause a halt in the +advance. + +"We're goin' to get youah hide this time, Bill Turner," shouted +the foremost of the gang, a big, heavily-whiskered man. "Hit's a +disgrace on us Wrights to have one of youah name livin' still in this +settlement. You're goin' to be done for this time." + +"Now, I ain't done nothin' to you-alls in all these years," said Turner +quietly and argumentatively. "You ain't got no cause to come 'round +hectoring me." + +"More shame for you," shouted the big man. "We're goin' to do you, +first, 'cause you're a Turner, second, 'cause you've been too +poor-spirited all these years to put up a man's fight." + +"Pears lak hit needs a powerful lot of yu to do fo' one, lone, +mean-spirited critter," said Turner, mildly. + +The big man stamped his foot with rage. "Hit don't take none but me," +he roared. "Yu come out hyar an' we'll have it out, man to man." + +"I ain't a-doubting you're courage, Jim Wright," returned the other, +slowly, "but I ain't aimin' to hurt no man 'less I have to. Besides, if +I did get the best of yu, all the rest of youah gang would come down on +me. Jes' keep away from my cabin, that's all I've got to say." + +"Come on, boys," roared the leader. "He's too mean-spirited to hurt a +fly. He can't shoot all of us, anyway." + +There was some hesitation, but his fellows, evidently, believed that +the man inside would not fire. Under the urging of their leader they +picked up the log and started on a run for the door. + +But they quickly discovered their mistake. From the loophole shot +out quick jets of flame as the man inside worked the lever of his +Winchester. The log dropped unheeded to the ground as its bearers +broke for the cover of the woods. Some were not able to run but limped +away groaning with pain. After the fleeing ones strode the big leader, +cursing them for cowards and imploring them to return to the assault. + +"I don't reckon I've hurt any one of them very much," Turner remarked, +as he slipped more shells into his rifle. "I jes' aimed for their +laigs." + +"Thank God, it has all ended without loss of life," Charley said +earnestly, but his host shook his head. + +"Hit ain't ended, hit's jes' begun, Jim Wright ain't one to be scart +out by a little lead. He don't know what fear is. If he can't get none +of 'em to come back with him, he'll come back alone. I wish you young +fellows were safe outer hyar, but it won't do for you to try to leave +now. Crazy drunk, like them fellows is, hit wouldn't be safe for you. +Maybe by morning they'll be sobered up enough to listen to reason." + +In spite of his words, the boys were hopeful that the night would pass +off without further trouble, but they were soon undeceived. Half an +hour had not passed when the big leader emerged from the woods followed +by a half a dozen of his fellow feudalists. + +His followers halted by the fallen log but he advanced boldly direct +for the loophole. + +"Keep away, for Gawd's sake, keep away, Jim," Turner implored. "I don't +want to have to shoot you." + +"Hit's you or me this time!" shouted the other, "The sun don't rise on +no living Turner in this town." + +"Keep back," warned Turner, thrusting his rifle through the loophole, +but even in his desperate situation, the boys, crowded close beside +him, and could see that he aimed only at the legs of the advancing man. + +Ruffian though he was, the other was not without brute courage. He +never paused in his advance. "Shoot," he shouted as he whipped out a +pistol, "Shoot, that's what I want yu to do." + +The two reports came almost together, but the pistol shot was a +fraction of a second ahead of the other. Like a fire-swept weed Turner +crumpled to the floor, his rifle exploding as he fell. + +The big man clapped one hand to his side and fell to the ground. + +With the report of his rifle, his followers had grabbed up the log and +rushed for the door, but Charley had been quick to see the danger. +Snatching up the rifle from the fallen man, he fired at the moving +legs as fast as he could work the lever. The whistling lead was more +than the assaulters could stand. Three dropped their hold on the log +and limped hurriedly for cover while their fellows, deprived of their +aid, could no longer sustain the heavy timber, which sank again to the +ground while they hastened after their wounded companions. + +The boys watched them in silence until they entered the woods then +Charley set down the rifle. + +"I don't think they will be back right away again," he said. "Anyway, +we have got to risk a light. Perhaps Mr. Turner is not dead." + +With hands that trembled with excitement Walter struck a match and lit +the lamp, then, the two boys lifted the prostrate man and laid him upon +the bed. "Keep watch at the loophole while I see if anything can be +done for him," Charley commanded. + +The man's shirt was matted with blood and the lad did not attempt +to take it off, but cut it away with his sheath knife, exposing the +white chest in the center of which gapped a horrible hole. "He's badly +wounded," he announced after a careful examination of the wound. +"There's two holes, one in his chest and one in his side. I believe the +bullet struck a rib and glanced, coming out at his side. If so, he will +pull through if I can only stop the blood flowing. I'll have to keep +this lamp lit for awhile even it is risky. I'll be as quick as I can." + +There was little in the rude cabin with which to do in such a case, +but the resourceful lad made the best of the situation, working with +feverish speed so as to be able to extinguish the lamp as soon as +possible. First, he washed out the wash basin thoroughly and filling it +with clean water from the barrel added to the water a generous handful +of salt. With this he washed the ugly-looking wound, then tearing into +pieces a fresh sheet he found lying on a shelf, he made a little wad +of rags with which, after soaking them in salt water, he plugged up +the gaping hole. Over this he bound wet strips of the sheet to hold it +securely in place. He was rewarded for his labor by seeing that the +flow of blood was quickly checked and soon ceased entirely. As soon as +he made certain of this, he extinguished the light and crept to his +chum's side. + +"I think he will pull out all right," he announced. "He is unconscious +yet, and when he does come to he'll be very weak from loss of blood. +Have you seen any more of those fellows?" + +"They're still in the woods around the clearing. Listen and you'll hear +their voices every now and then." + +"Has the man who was shot moved any?" + +"No, he lays just as he fell. I guess he's dead." + +"It's a horrible affair," said Charley with a shudder. "I'll never +forget this night. It has put us in a bad fix. We can't leave here now, +and I don't like the way the wind is coming up. If there's a heavy +storm, the captain and Chris will be in danger, it wouldn't take a very +heavy sea to cover that marsh. Just listen how it's blowing." + +Walter seemed not to hear what his chum was saying. He stood staring +out at the still figure stretched on the ground. "He hasn't moved, but +maybe he isn't dead," he said at last. "Perhaps, he is bleeding to +death and a little attention might save his life." + +"You're right," Charley exclaimed. "We must bring him in." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + +THE ENEMIES. + + +IT was a risky thing to attempt. To venture outside would be to expose +themselves in the bright moonlight to the bullets of the feudalists, +but the two plucky lads never hesitated. The body lay not a dozen steps +from the cabin and it would not do to let his fellows approach that +close to the little fort. Either they must save him themselves, if he +was not already dead, or leave him to die alone in the night. + +"We must be quick about it," Charley declared. "As soon as I unlatch +the door, we must run out, grab him by the shoulders, and drag him +in--he's too heavy to lift." + +In this bold move fortune seemed to favor the lads. They got their +heavy burden to the door before a shot was fired and, then, the bullets +whistled harmlessly above their heads. + +"We were lucky that time," Charley panted as he barred the door again. +"Now keep a sharp lookout. I'll have to light that lamp again." + +"This fellow is not so very badly hurt," he announced, as soon as he +had examined his new patient. "The bullet has gone right through the +fleshy part of his shoulder. He will come out of it all right if the +wound is kept clean." In a few minutes he had washed and dressed the +wound as he had the other man's, then, putting out the light once more, +he rejoined his companion at the loophole. "Anything stirring?" he +inquired. + +"No, I don't even hear their voices now. Perhaps they will not bother +us again to-night," Walter replied, hopefully. + +"I am not worrying about them as much as I am this wind," said his chum +gloomily. "We are safe enough here so long as the grub and water holds +out, but, God knows how it is faring with Chris and the captain." + +The gale was now howling and whistling around the little cabin with a +force to justify Charley's gloomy apprehension. The boys had to speak +loudly to make themselves heard above its uproar. They soon abandoned +all attempts at conversation and waited wearily and silently for +another assault from the feudalists and for the coming of day. + +Either the ruffians had at last become over-powered by the liquor they +had drank or else they had decided to wait the coming of day, for they +did not again show themselves in the clearing. Day, however, came at +last, after what seemed to the exhausted lads an age of waiting. + +As soon as it became light enough to see, Charley removed the bandages +from their stricken host and redressed his wound more carefully. "His +pulse is getting stronger and there is some color in his face," he +remarked to his chum. "I believe, I could bring him to, but I guess +it's best to let him lie unconscious as long as he can. He will suffer +enough when he does regain consciousness." + +As soon as he finished with Turner, Charley turned to his other +patient who was beginning to move uneasily and show signs of returning +consciousness. While he was yet bathing his wound the man opened his +eyes. + +"Gosh! how my shoulder hurts," he growled. "Be mighty careful how you +touch it, young fellow, or I'll skin you alive." + +Charley set aside the basin of water and rising to his feet looked down +on the fellow with a face full of scorn. + +"You great, big, drunken, cowardly murderer," he exclaimed. "It's a +pity that bullet didn't kill you. You are not fit to live on God's +green earth. You're shot when trying, with a crowd of your fellows, to +kill a lone, inoffensive man. Your friends don't think enough of you to +come back and get your carcass. We bring you in and care for you and +instead of thanks, your first words are a growl and a threat. You are a +cowardly, disgraceful cur,--that's what you are." + +Astonished rage filled the man's face. "No man ever said words like +that to Jim Wright and lived," he gasped. He attempted to rise but was +too weak to gain his feet, and sank back with a groan. + +"Oh, I guess you won't do any killing for a little while," sneered +Charley, whose anger was at white heat. "I've no doubt people have +been afraid to tell you the truth before, but you are going to hear +it for once in your life. I've no doubt with your strength and +disposition you've bullied everything until they are afraid to do +anything but flatter you, but, now you are going to take a dose of your +own medicine." Then, seating himself just out of reach of the man's +powerful arms, he proceeded to tell him what he thought of him in words +that stung with contempt and scorn. Then, as his anger subsided, he +repeated the story Turner had told him, contrasting Turner's quiet, +patient, peaceful heroism with the other's blood-thirstiness and +violence, with all the power of the earnestness he felt. + +At first the man kept interrupting him with curses and abuse, but as +he went calmly on ignoring the interruptions the fellow lay quiet, his +face turned to the wall. + +Once Charley stopped, thinking he might have fainted he lay so still, +but he spoke up gruffly. + +"Did I kill him?" + +"No, but it's not your fault that you didn't," the lad replied, curtly, +and went on with his arraignment. "I don't care a hang what you and +your cowardly fellows think," he concluded, "all decent people would +say that that poor fellow lying there is a brave hero while you are the +mean-spirited, cowardly one. And, now, if you'll lie quiet and keep +your mouth shut, I'll dress that wound. I hate to pollute my hands by +touching you, but it's got to be done." + +The man lay quiet while the lad washed and bound up his wound. Charley +could see that his features were working convulsively, but whether from +rage or pain he could not determine. + +As soon as his task was completed, Charley relieved his chum at the +loophole and Walter set about making coffee and cooking some breakfast. +They were both sadly in need of food and felt much better after they +had eaten. As soon as they had finished, Charley made his chum lie down +to take a nap, promising to call him, and lie down himself in a couple +of hours. + +While Walter was asleep Turner came out of the deep swoon which had +followed his wound. He was weak and in terrible pain but in full +possession of his senses. It was evident that he was greatly bewildered +at the sight of his enemy lying helpless on the floor, and Charley +explained the situation to him in a few words. + +"I sho' am glad I didn't kill him," said the sick man, thankfully. "I +jes' shot at his laigs, the gun must have gone off when I fell. I am +sho' sorry I hurt you so bad, Jim, I didn't aim for to do hit." + +But Wright kept his face turned to the wall and answered not a word. + +As the morning advanced Charley was much puzzled by the constant sound +of hammering coming from the woods near the clearing. It was evident +their enemies were preparing another surprise but he could not guess at +its nature. + +All the morning long the hammering continued, then shortly before noon +there emerged from the woods an object which caused him at first, to +stare in bewildered surprise, and, then, as it drew nearer the cabin to +send him to shaking Walter, whom he had let sleep on. + +"Wake up! Wake up!" he cried. "We have got to fight for our lives. +Those fellows have built a heavy breastwork on the front of a wagon and +are shoving it ahead of them up to the cabin." + +"Young fellows! help me up and help me to that loophole," gruffly +commanded the wounded man on the floor. "Don't hesitate," he cried as +the lad was about to refuse the surprising command, "them fellows have +got a couple of sticks of dynamite in that cart an' if they get near +enough to throw it thar won't be enough left of this cabin to make a +good toothpick. We was aiming to use it last night if we couldn't get +Turner no other way." + +Between them the two startled lads got the big fellow on his feet and +supported him to the loophole where he leaned against the logs, his +face twitching with the pain of his effort. + +It was just in time, for the wagon with its burden of death was scarce +a hundred feet away when he shouted: "Stop where yer are, boys. Thar +ain't no call to throw any of that stuff." + +"Is that you, Cap?" called one of the men. "Why, we 'lowed yer was +dead." + +"An' I might have been for all of yu fellows, leaving me to die on the +ground like a poisoned dog." + +He paused while a chorus of excuses came from the men behind the +breastwork. + +"Well, I ain't dead, but it ain't no thanks to yu fellows," he went on +slowly and painfully. "Now, yu fellows jes' roll that wagon back whar +hit came from an' go home and behave yerselves. Yu fellows know me +an' know I'll do what I say. Hit's jes' come to me, an' hit's come in +a powerful rough way, that I've been powerful mean, pisen an' onery. +My eyes am sho' opened at last, an' I'm powerful ashamed of how I've +been carryin' on. But hit's all over now. From now on Bill Turner is +my friend, an' the man that lifts a finger again' him lifts it again' +me, an' me an' my close kin will make this place too hot to hold him. +That's all I've got to say. Now, go home." + +Murmurs of astonishment arose from the men behind the wagon as they +slowly but obediently backed the wagon towards the woods. Over the face +of the wounded man on the bed stole a look of joy unspeakable. + +The bewildered but delighted boys helped Wright back to his place on +the floor. + +"I want to shake hands with you, Mr. Wright," said Charley, earnestly. +"I am afraid I talked pretty rough to you." + +"I needed hit," said the other as he took the proffered hand. "Hit's a +pity, young fellow, that thar ain't more like yu down in this neck of +thar woods." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + +THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN. + + +LEAVING the boys safe from the danger that had threatened them, let us +return to the castaways whom we left confronted by that menace, the +most grewsome of all to shipwrecked sailors, the lack of water. + +The sponger captain needed no explanation but the captain's simple +words to realize the terrible tortures and awful death that awaited +them all if help in some shape did not soon come to their rescue. His +bronzed face grew white beneath it's coat of tan. + +"I am frightfully thirsty, already," he exclaimed, "Is there no way we +can reach the mainland. Thar's water in plenty thar." + +"If we were birds or fish, we might get thar, I reckon," replied +Captain Westfield, "but, being as we are only human beings, I calculate +it ain't no way possible." + +The Conch eyed the raging water that stretched between the little +island and the shore. + +"A strong swimmer might make it," he observed, musingly. "I've swum +farther many a time but it was when I was in a sight better shape than +I am now." + +"Yes, I reckon a right powerful swimmer might make it," assented the +captain, "but this little fellow and I are not equal to it, we'd never +reach the land." + +"I believe I could do it even now," said the sponger calculatingly, +"but I won't desert yo' two Yo' saved my life an' I'd be worse than a +Greek to leave yo' here." + +"If you can do it, go ahead, man," said the old sailor. "You can't do +us any good by staying. Better save your own life," but the Conch shook +his head sadly. + +"My life ain't worth much, now," he said sadly. "My little ship's +gone, all my brave comrades drowned, an' everything I had in the world +lost. I've not much to live for now." + +"Bosh, man," said the old sailor, "I reckon, thar's always something +for a man to live for as long as the Good Lord let him live. If thar +wasn't the Lord wouldn't let him live." + +But the Conch was not to be comforted, the full extent of his loss was +beginning to make itself felt as he regained his strength and the full +possession of his senses after his terrible ordeal. He soon moved a +little apart from the two castaways, and, seating himself on the sand +buried his face in his hands. The two watchers could see the tears +trickling between his fingers and they turned away greatly moved at +that most impressive of sights, the grief of a strong man, ashamed of +displaying his tears. When they looked again he was on his knees and +his bowed head showed that he was praying. When he rejoined them, his +manner was filled with the calm and quietness of one who has found +peace for his afflictions. + +"I see there is no wood here with which to build a raft," he observed. +"Things look pretty bad, but they say the darkest hour is just before +the dawn. We must take courage. Yo'r young friends may return with help +at any hour." + +The captain shook his head sadly. "Something has happened to them or +they would have been back long ago. They cannot return now until the +storm is over." + +"It cannot last much longer," declared the Conch, confidently. "It is +losing force now, I believe it will blow out by morning." + +"Maybe, but it will take a long time for the sea to go down so a boat +can live in it, and, in the meantime we have no water." + +"We must not give way to despair," said the Conch, who seemed like +another man after his devotions. "Let's dig another well right in the +midst of the island, perhaps we can get water fit to drink." + +With but little hope the three fell to work and by noon had dug a hole +to water, but they had only their labor for their pains, the water +was salt, bitter, and undrinkable. Indeed their labor was worse than +fruitless for their exertions had greatly increased their thirst. + +Chris kindled a fire and roasted some of the turtle meat and eggs, but +the castaways only partook of a few mouthfuls, as eating seemed but to +increase their thirst. + +The Conch had lost his hat when wrecked and Chris, observing his bare +head, set about braiding him another hat from the green palmetto leaves. + +The Sponger watched him with interest. "Do yo' think yo' could make a +water-tight mat of that stuff?" he enquired, eagerly. + +"Golly! I reckon, dis nigger could," declared the little darkey. "I'se +done made baskets ob hit dat would hold water like a bucket." + +"How long would it take yo' to make a mat four feet square?" + +The little negro considered, "I guess I could do hit in a day." + +"Then drop that hat business and get to work on hit. Work like yo' +never did before. There's a chance, jes' a chance, that it will be the +saving of us. Captain, there is work for us to do. Get the entrails out +of one of those turtle shells. Clean them out good, pack them full of +sand, and stretch them out in the sun to dry. I've got a plan in mind. +It may fail, but it's worth trying. Be careful not to break the skins." + +It was evident from the man's manner that he was intensely in earnest +and the old sailor lost no time in asking idle questions but went +quickly to work at the task assigned him. In a short time he had +cleaned and washed out the turtle entrails and filling them with dry +sand stretched them out to dry in the hot sun. When thus prepared they +formed a kind of small hose some thirty feet in length. + +While he was thus engaged, the Conch dragged the empty shell down to +the water and cleaned and washed it out thoroughly. Leaving it near +the water's edge, he collected and piled close beside it, a heap of +dry wood. Then he returned to where Chris was working and fell to +helping him by stripping and preparing the palmetto buds for the little +darkey's nimble fingers. + +Just before sundown he carefully removed the sand from the dried +entrails and was in possession of a long, tough waterproof hose without +hole or break in it. + +Night brought no cessation of the strange labor. A fire was kindled +beside the little darkey and he plaited on by its light while the +captain and the Conch kept him supplied with palmetto strips. + +About midnight Chris held up his work with a weary sigh; "Hit's done," +he announced. + +"Now for the test," cried the Conch, trembling with excitement. + +Taking the strong, flexible, green mat he hurried down to the turtle +shell which he had filled half full of sea water. Placing the mat +over the top of the shell, he bound it firmly in place with wisps of +palmetto leaves. Then, cutting a small hole in the center of the mat, +he inserted in it one end of the strange hose, packing wet sand around +it to make it air-tight. He next coiled down the hose in the edge of +the sea and placed the other end of it in the empty turtle shell. Then, +heaping wood around the mat-covered shell, he started a fire. + +The Captain and Chris at last understood his plan. With his rude +contrivance, he was going to try to distill fresh water from salt after +the manner they do on big steamships with costly and complicated +apparatus. The steam from the heated water was supposed to escape from +the shell through the hose. In passing through it it would become +chilled when the hose was coiled down in the cold sea water and, +condensing into water again, reach the other shell fresh and free from +salt. + +In theory the plan was perfect, but would the rude contrivance do the +work? + +The three thirsty watchers fairly held their breath as they kept the +fire roaring around the shell and awaited results. At last tiny wisps +of steam began to trickle through the closely-woven mat. Tiny drops of +moisture were dropping from the end of the hose. These grew larger and +larger until at last a tiny stream of water trickled forth. + +They danced and shouted for joy. "It works! It works!" they cried. + +But thirsty though they were they had to possess their souls in +patience and wait for the process worked very slowly. All night they +staid by the shells keeping the fire going. Just at day-break the Conch +gave the command to put out the fire. In the other shell was several +gallons of clear, pure water. As soon as it had cooled sufficiently +they dipped it up with shells and drank greedily. It was slightly +bitter and tasteless but never did drink taste better to parched +throats. With the satisfying of their thirst, came hunger and they all +made a hearty meal off the roasted meat and eggs left from dinner. +Just as the sun arose they lay down to sleep completely exhausted but +with thankfulness to God in their hearts. Their greatest danger was +past. They had water and food in abundance, and the storm was slowly +but surely subsiding. + +They slept through the long day, awakening only when the shades of +night began to fall. Then after satisfying their hunger and thirst, +they lay down and slept until morning came. + +They opened their eyes upon a clear, still day. The storm had gone and +the sea was growing calm. Far to the South there showed on the blue +water a tiny patch of white,--a sail. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + +THE RESCUE. + + +THE castaways watched the distant sail with mingled feelings of joy and +suspense. Was it the boys, or was it merely a strange craft beating up +the coast? Would it pass near the island or would it go by too far out +for them to make their presence known? These were the questions they +debated as they strained their eyes on the distant patch of white. + +One thing soon became evident to the eager watchers, the sail was +steadily growing larger. Although the storm had passed and the sea +subsided there was still a brisk breeze blowing and each passing hour +brought the stranger craft visibly nearer. No thought of breakfast +entered the castaways' minds, all their attention was fixed on the +approaching sail. + +At last it became evident that the vessel was a small sloop, that it +was headed directly for the island and that it was rolling and pitching +frightfully in the still heavy seas. + +On it came, plunging and tossing like a frightened steed and sending +showers of spray from its cut water. At last it was close enough to +discover two figures on its decks, one at the wheel, the other forward, +tending the jib sheet. + +"Hit's Massa Charley and Massa Walter," shouted the sharp-eyed Chris. +"Praise de Lawd, Praise de Lawd," and his over-joyed companions shouted +a fervent "Amen." + +The sloop came steadily on, passing the island and rounding up under +its lee as near as its young captain dared to approach. Anchor was +dropped, sails lowered, and launching a small boat it carried on deck, +its crew of two came sculling for the shore. + +And what a demonstration of joy there was when it grounded on the sands +and the chums so long separated and so long beset with perils were +once more reunited. Such hand-wringings and congratulations, and eager +questions and chorused answers. All happy. All excited. All talking at +once, and no one making himself thoroughly understood in the general +clamor. + +But Charley soon interrupted the talk-feast. "We will be here all day +at this rate," he said, laughing. "We had better get on board and get +under way. That sloop is pretty old and cranky for these waters and +we'd better get back as soon as we can for fear another squall will +come up. We can tell our stories on the way." + +The suggestion was wise and as none cared to linger long on the +dreary little island which had been the scene of so much anxiety and +suffering, there was no delay in carrying it out. All climbed into the +little boat and were carried out to the sloop. Her sails were hoisted, +her anchor weighed, and her bowsprit headed South for Tarpon. Down in +the sloop's cabin the castaways found a hot meal of ham, eggs, potatoes +and coffee waiting for them, which Walter had prepared as a pleasant +surprise. In their excitement they had forgotten they were hungry, but +they remembered it now and fell upon the tasty food with appetites that +only left bare dishes when satisfied, at last. The boys had brought a +pile of clothing with them, and after a wash-down in cool sea water, +the castaways threw away their soiled, tattered garments, and, fed, +washed, and freshly clothed, felt like new men. + +The Captain's eyes danced with joy when Walter presented him with a +pipe and tobacco he had brought with him. + +Later all gathered around the wheel and stories and experiences were +exchanged, but the reader is already familiar with the most of them. + +"Even after the trouble was all over we couldn't get away at once," +Charley said, concluding his tale. "I can tell you we were worried to +have to lay around and wait for the storm to pass, knowing that you and +Chris must be in danger on the island. The people were awfully good to +us after the feud was ended. They could not do enough for us. They even +wanted to give us money, but of course we couldn't take that. As soon +as the wind went down we borrowed this boat of Mr. Turner and started +out. We are to leave her at Tarpon and he will get her from there." + +"Well, all's well that ends well, I reckon," said the captain, puffing +in supreme content. "We are safe an' well now an' while we ain't got +much money, we will have the 'Beauty' as soon as she comes into port, +an' she's jes' the same as two thousand dollars in the bank." + +"And we will have another try for that gold when we get her," Charley +declared. "I figure that those fellows had to cast loose during the +storm and scud before it. They could not ride it out at anchor. Now +that the buoy's gone, it will take them a long time to locate the gold +again. We, knowing the latitude and longitude can get back to the spot +before they can find it and get all the gold removed, if we can get a +revenue cutter at Tarpon, as I think we can." + +The Captain's face was filled with dismay. "I've clean forgot the +figures, boys," he exclaimed. "I put it down in the log all ship-shape, +the latitude and longitude, but I've clean forgot what it was. I ain't +got no memory for figures." + +It was a heavy blow for the golden-hopes of the two boys and a silence +of disappointment followed the old sailor's announcement. + +"It's no use crying over spilt milk," said Charley, at last, +cheerfully. "We have still got the schooner, and, with the money we get +from her, we can make a good start at something else." + +"You have still good cause for rejoicing," observed the sponger +captain. "You will still have your vessel, but I have lost my all." + +The two chums were not the boys to give way to repining and they were +soon again as bright and cheerful spirits as if their brightest hopes +had been realized. + +It was midnight when the little sloop at last crept into the harbor of +Tarpon. It was useless to go ashore at such an hour so the little party +made everything snug aboard and turned in on deck for a few hours' +sleep. + +They were up early next morning, and, after a hasty breakfast, hurried +ashore to notify the Commissioner of their arrival and get him to take +steps for the seizure of the "Beauty" as soon as she reached port. + +Mr. Driver was standing out in front of his store as they came up the +street. Amazement and incredulity filled his face when he sighted them. + +"You!" he cried, "Why, I thought you were all at the bottom of the +Gulf." + +"No, we are slightly disfigured but still in the ring," laughed Charley +as he shook hands. "Our schooner has not come in yet, has she?" + +Mr. Driver stared at him for a second. "There's a mystery here," he +declared. "Come on into the store, and let's hear your story." + +Seated in the store's little back room, Charley recounted their +adventures while Mr. Driver listened attentively. When he had +concluded, Mr. Driver remained silent for a moment. + +"I hate to be the teller of bad news," he said, at last, "but you must +learn it, and it had better come from a friend. Your schooner is lost +with all hands on board." + +"Lost!" cried all together. + +"Yes, she went down at anchor during the storm. The Greek sponger +'Zenephone' was passing when she went under. Not a man was saved. +Every one on the 'Zenephone' wondered why she did not scud before it +instead of hanging to her anchor. I understand now. They did not want +to leave the neighborhood of the gold." + +It was a heavy blow. At one sweep they were robbed of their all. The +little band of chums sat paralyzed with grief, looking helplessly at +each other. Mr. Driver arose quietly and closed the door softly behind +him, leaving them alone with their grief. + +For a few moments no one spoke. "It's hard, but it must be met," sighed +Walter at last. "What are we going to do? We have nothing left now, not +even the clothes we wear." + +"God knows," answered Charley, hopelessly, at a loss for once. "I +suppose we will have to hunt work at something or other." + +"And likely be scattered and separated for the first time in years," +exclaimed the captain. + +"That's the worst of it," agreed Walter, sadly. "I don't mind working +but I hate for us all to have to drift apart." + +"Me too," wailed Chris. "Golly! I don't want to be with no one but +you-alls." + +"I don't believe the 'Beauty' is lost," Charley declared. "I believe +this is just another of Manuel's tricks. He is as sharp a rascal as +ever lived. I'll bet she is safe and sound somewhere and that Manuel +just bought the Greeks on the 'Zenephone' to tell that story." + +"Maybe," admitted the captain, doubtfully. "The story rings true, +though. It would have been likely for them to hang to their anchor by +the gold." + +"And it would be just the kind of details Manuel would think of, +knowing we would be more likely to believe the story if we escaped +alive. He is an artist at rascality." + +"Even if you're right, I reckon it won't help us much," said the old +sailor. "The story's tied our hands all right. The Commissioner won't +do anything just on our suspicions, an' we ain't got any money to do +anything ourselves." + +"I feel that Charley is right," Walter declared, "but we've got only +one chance to prove it. Get to work, get some money and hire a Greek +detective to look into the matter for us. The first question is, what +can we do to earn money?" + +They were engaged in a fruitless discussion on this point when Mr. +Driver entered. He heard their discussion with sympathetic interest. + +"There is no work around here," he declared. "The Greeks work cheaper +than an American can. It's hard for an American to earn a bare living +here. I understand from what you say that you do not want to be +separated. I might find work for one of you, but I couldn't for all. +There is only one suggestion I can make in such a case." + +"Please give it to us," Walter requested. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + +CONCLUSION. + + +"WELL," said Mr. Driver, "there is a large fish-house at Clearwater, +twenty miles below here. You probably could get a job fishing for it. +You could all work together then. It is hard, dirty work but there is +pretty good money in it if a man works hard." + +The chums exchanged glances. + +"I believe we will try it," Charley said. "Of course we will have to +talk it over before we decide, but there does not seem to be anything +else we can do." + +"Very well," said Mr. Driver, "I'll give you a letter to the fish boss, +I know him personally. And you'll need a little money to pay your fares +there. You can return it when you get to earning." + +The chums thanked the kind-hearted storekeeper for his advice and +assistance and adjourned to the sidewalk where they discussed the +matter earnestly. It did not take them long to decide to follow Mr. +Driver's suggestion. They bid good-bye to the sponger captain, who +decided to remain in Tarpon and try to get service on one of Mr. +Williams' schooners, and, accepting the loan of ten dollars, which Mr. +Driver pressed upon them, they boarded the first train going South and +soon landed in the little town of Clearwater. And there, we must leave +them for the present. + + +THE END. + + * * * * * + +Transcriber's Notes: + +Obvious punctuation errors repaired. The original text had no table of +contents. One was created to aid the reader. Chapter I is untitled. + +Page 3, "tatooed" changed to "tattooed" (tattooed arms and rolling) + +Page 10, two lines were transposed. The original read: + + shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoul- + up with the money by to-morrow night I'll close up + ders. "You know what I say. If you don't come + this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining + +Page 14, "hundreth" changed "hundredth" (a hundredth part of) + +Page 43, "alloted" changed to "allotted" (allotted to their boat) + +Page 62, "along" changed to "alone" (worse than being alone) + +Page 74, repeated word "see" removed from text Original read: (I don't +see see what his object) + +Page 78, "Manual" changed to "Manuel" (Manuel approached Captain) + +Page 85, "blow" changed to "below" (been below for only) + +Page 89, "exclaimation" changed to "exclamation" (an exclamation of +surprise) + +Page 93, "captian" changed to "captain" (the captain declared) + +Page 100, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (gaping hole in her) + +Page 101, "was" changed to "were" (There were no) + +Page 102, "that" changed to "than" (time than it has) + +Page 105, "aim" changed to "air" (working the air pump) + +Page 109, "baton" changed to "beaten" (Greeks had been badly beaten) + +Page 128, "averge" changed to "average" (better than average marksmen) + +Page 164, "squaking" changed "squawking" (marsh hens, the squawking) + +Page 190, "minues" changed to "minutes" (in a few minutes he) + +Page 203, "taveling" changed to "traveling" (further traveling +dangerous) + +Page 231, repeated word "is" removed from text. Original read: (awhile +even it is is risky) + +Page 231, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (up the gaping hole) + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by +Wilmer M. Ely + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY CHUMS IN GULF OF MEXICO *** + +***** This file should be named 44394.txt or 44394.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/4/3/9/44394/ + +Produced by The Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/44394.zip b/old/44394.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a87a5e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394.zip |
